Sigma EF-610 DG SUPER - Instructions Manual

Merk: Sigma

Model: EF-610 DG SUPER -

Categorie: Camera knippert

Type: Instructions Manual

F18E10081

E L E C T R O N I C F L A S H

EF-610

DG SUPER

EO-ETTL II

INSTRUCTIONS

ENGLISH

The CE Mark is a Directive conformity mark of the European Community (EC).

DEUTSCH

Die CE-Kennzeichnung ist eine Konformitätserklärung des Herstellers, die dokumentiert, daß das betreffende

Produkt die Anforderungen von EG-Richtlinien einhält.

FRANÇAIS

Le label CE garantit la conformité aux normes établies par la Communauté Européenne.

NEDERLANDS

Het CE teken is een aanduiding voor de Europese Gemeenschap (EC).

ESPAÑOL

El logotipo CE es una directiva de conformidad con la Comunidad Europea (CE).

ITALIANO

Questo è il marchio di conformità alle direttive della comunità Europea (CE).

SVENSKA

CE-märket betyder att varan blivit godkänd av EU:s gemensamma kvalitetsnorm.

DANSK

CE-mærket er i overensstemmelse med de gældende regler i EU.

PORTUGUÊS

A marca CE garante a conformidade com as normas estabelecidas pela Comunidade Europeia.

SIGMA (Deutschland) GmbH

Carl-Zeiss-Str. 10/2, D-63322 Rödermark, F.R.GERMANY

Verkauf: 01805-90 90 85-0 Service: 01805-90 90 85-85 Fax: 01805-90 90 85-35

13 14 15 16

ENGLISH

Thank you very much for purchasing the Sigma EF-610 DG SUPER EO-TTL II Electronic Flash. This

product is specifically developed for the Canon EOS series SLR cameras. Depending on the camera

model, functions and operation may vary. Please read this instruction booklet carefully. To add to your

enjoyment of photography, the flash has a variety of features. To make the most of all these features

and to get the maximum performance and enjoyment from your flash, please read this instruction

booklet together with your camera’s instruction manual before using the flash, and also keep it handy

for your future reference.

PRECAUTIONS

In order to avoid causing any damage or injury, please read this instruction manual very carefully,

paying attention to the cautionary signs below, before using the flash.

Please take special note of the two cautionary signs below.

Warning !!

Caution !!

Symbol denotes the important points, where warning and caution are required.

Symbol contains information regarding the actions that must be avoided.

Using the product disregarding this warning sign might cause serious injury o

other dangerous results.

Using the product disregarding this caution sign might cause injury or damage.

Caution !!

Do not use this flash unit on any camera other than the Canon EOS series cameras, otherwise

the flash may damage the circuitry of these cameras.

This flash unit is not waterproof. When using the flash and camera in the rain or snow or nea

water, keep it from getting wet. It is often impractical to repair internal electrical components

damaged by water.

Never subject the flash and camera to shock, dust, high temperature or humidity. These factors

might cause fire or malfunctioning of your equipment.

When the flash is subjected to sudden temperature change, as when the flash unit is brought

from a cold exterior to warm interior, condensation might form inside. In such a case, place you

equipment in a sealed plastic bag before such a change, and do not use the flash unit until i

reaches room temperature.

Do not store your flash in a drawer or cupboard etc. containing naphthalene, camphor or othe

insecticides. These chemicals will have a negative effects on the flash unit.

Do not use a thinner, Benzene or other cleaning agents to remove dirt or finger prints from the

component. Clean with a soft, moistened cloth.

For extended storage, choose a cool dry place, preferably with good ventilation. It is

recommended that the flash be charged and fired several times a month, to maintain prope

capacitor functioning.

Warning !!

This flash contains high voltage circuits. To avoid electric shock or burns, do not attempt to

disassemble the flash. If the outside shell of the unit is broken or cracked, do not touch the

mechanism inside.

Do not fire the flash close to eyes. Otherwise the bright light could damage the eyes. Keep a

least 1m/3feet distance between face and the flash unit when taking a picture with flash.

Do not touch the synchro terminal of your camera when the flash is attached to the hot shoe.

High voltage circuitry could cause an electric shock.

Never use your camera in an environment where flammable, burnable, gas, liquids or chemicals,

etc, exist. Otherwise it might cause fire or explosion.

DESCRIPTION OF THE PARTS

EXTERNAL

PARTS

1.Flash Head 2.AF Auxiliary Light 3.Bounce Angle; Up and Down

4.Bounce Angle; Right and Left 5.Bounce Lock and Release Button; Up and Down

6.Swivel Lock and Release Button; Right and Left 7.LCD Panel 8.Battery Cover

9.Shoe Ring 10.Shoe 11.Catch Light Panel 12.Wide Panel

CONTROLS

13.MODE Button 14.SEL SELECT Button 15.

+ Increment Button

16.

Decrement Button 17.ZOOM Button 18.TEST Button

19.LIGHT Button 20.Ready Light 21.Power Switch

CAMERA MODELS AND FUNCTIONS

Although this Flash unit has been equipped with numerous functions, depending on the camera model

being used some functions may have some limitations. Please confirm the type camera you have from

the list below. Please refer to explanations of each function through the instruction manual; If no

model information is specified, it means that this function of flash can be used with all type of EOS

cameras.

A type camera E-TTL(E-TTL II) Compatible EOS SLR cameras

B type camera All other EOS cameras except those listed above

ABOUT THE BATTERY

This flash unit uses four “AA” type Alkaline dry cell batteries, Ni-Cad or Ni-MH rechargeable batteries.

Manganese batteries can also be used but as they have a shorter life than Alkaline batteries, we do

not recommend using them. Please replace batteries if it takes more than 30seconds to light the

Ready Lamp.

◆ To assure proper electrical contact, clean the battery terminals before installing the batteries.

◆ Ni-Cad or Ni-MH batteries do not have standardized contacts. If you use Ni-Cad or Ni-MH batteries,

please confirm that the battery contacts touch the battery compartment properly.

◆ To prevent battery explosion, leakage or overheating, use four new AA batteries of the same type

and brand. Do not mix the type or new and used batteries.

◆ Do not disassemble or short-circuit the batteries, or expose them fire or water; they may explode.

Do not recharge the batteries other than Ni-Cad or Ni-MH rechargeable batteries.

◆ When the flash will not be used for an extended period of time, remove the batteries from the flash

to avoid the possibility of damage from leakage.

◆ Battery performance decreases at low temperatures. Keep batteries insulated when using the flash

in cold weather.

◆ As with any flash, it is recommended you carry spare batteries when on a long trip or when

photographing outdoors in cold weather.

BATTERY LOADING

1. Be sure to set the Power Switch to the off position

then slide the battery cover in the direction of the

arrow to open.

2. Insert four AA size batteries into the battery

chamber. Be sure the + and – ends of the batteries

are aligned according to the diagram in the chamber.

3. Close the cover.

4. Slide the Power Switch to the ON position. After few

seconds the Ready Lamp will light, indicating that

the flash unit can be fired.

5. Please press the “Test Button” to be sure that the flash is working properly.

AUTO POWER OFF

To conserve battery power, the flash unit automatically turns itself off when the flash is not used within

approximately 90 seconds. To turn the flash on again, depress the TEST button or the camera shutter

button halfway. Please note that the “Auto Power Off” mechanism does not work with wireless TTL

flash mode, normal slave flash, and designated slave flash modes.

ERROR INDICATION

If the battery power is not sufficient or there is an electric information error between the camera and

flash unit, the “Flash Coverage Angle” will blink on the LCD panel. When this occurs, turn the power

switch off and on.

If it still blinks after this procedure, check the battery power.

ADJUSTING THE FLASH HEAD

Depress the Bounce “Up and Down” Lock and Release Button and

adjust the flash head to the desired position.

◆ If

appears on the LCD panel when you turn on the flash, and

if this mark blinks, then the flash head is adjusted to an incorrect

position.

ATTACHING AND REMOVING THE FLASH TO AND FROM THE CAMERA

Be sure to turn off the Power Switch, then insert the

Shoe Base into the hot shoe on the camera and turn

the Shoe Locking Ring until it is tight.

◆ When you attach or remove the flash, grasp the

bottom of the flash to prevent damage to the shoe

foot and the camera’s hot shoe.

◆ If the camera’s built-in flash is set in up position,

please close it before you attach the flash unit.

◆ To remove the flash, rotate the shoe-locking ring in

the opposite direction of ◄LOCK mark, until it stops.

SETTING OF FLASH COVERAGE ANGLE

When you press the ZOOM button,

the

symbol appears. Each time you press the ZOOM button,

the LCD panel display will change and indicate the zoom position in sequence as follows.

24mm → 28mm → 35mm → 50mm → 70mm → 85mm → 105mm → (Auto)

Generally, in the ETTL (TTL) mode, the flash will automatically set the zoom position according to the

focal length of your lens.

◆ When you turn on the main switch, the flash will memorize and set the zoom head position to the

last setting used.

◆ If you use a lens wider than the flash head setting, there may be under exposed areas around the

edge of the picture.

◆ Depending on the flash head setting, the flash’s Guide Number will be changed.

WIDE PANEL

This flashgun is equipped with a built-in wide panel,

which can provide an ultra wide 17mm angle of

coverage. Slide out the wide panel and catch light

panel and flip it down to cover the flash’s head. (Be

careful to slide the panels out smoothly.) Then put the

catch light panel back in its place. The coverage angle

setting of the flash will be set to 17mm automatically.

◆ If the built-in wide panel comes off accidentally, the

ZOOM button will not function. In this case please

contact the store where the flash was purchased or

a Sigma service station.

LCD PANEL ILLUMINATION

When you press the LIGHT button, the LCD panel will illuminate for about 8 seconds. The illumination

stays on longer than 8 seconds if you press the LIGHT button once again.

ETTL (TTL) AUTO FLASH

In the TTL AUTO Mode, the camera will control the amount of flash lighting to get the appropriate

exposure for the subject.

◆ “A” type cameras can be set in ETTL mode. “B” type cameras can be set in TTL mode.

1. Set the camera’s mode to Full-AUTO Mode. ( Usually

□

Mode. If the camera does not have

□

Mode, set to P Mode.)

2. Turn on the power switch of the flash, the ETTL (TTL) mark will

appear on the LCD panel and

the

flash will start charging.

3. Focus on your subject.

4. Check that the subject is located within the effective distance

range indicated on the LCD panel.

5. Press the shutter button, after the flash is fully charged.

Note: When the flash is fully charged, the ready light in the

viewfinder appears.

◆ When the camera receives the appropriate exposure, the ETTL (TTL) mark on the LCD panel will

appear for 5 seconds. If this indication does not appear, the flash illumination is not sufficent for

that situation. Please re-take the picture at a closer distance.

◆ The AF Auxiliary Light will turn on automatically as you focus on a dark area. Note: Effective

distance is up to about 0.7 to 9 meters (2.3-29.5 feet).

◆ When the camera is set to ‘Creative Zone’, the flash will be set to TTL / ETTL mode.

◆ When the flash is fully charged, the flash mark will appear in the finder. If the shutter is released

before the flash is fully charged, the camera will take the picture at a slow shutter speed with no

flash.

USING FLASH IN OTHER CAMERA MODES (Except EOS700, 750, 850)

Shutter Speed Priority Setting

By selecting the Tv mode of the camera, you can set the shutter speed from 30sec. to 1/X sync speed.

When you set the desired shutter speed, the camera will select the appropriate aperture value for the

scene. If the subject is too light or too dark, the aperture value indicator will blink and show the limit

values (maximum or minimum aperture). In such as case, the camera proceeds to take a flash

photograph at the limit value. Thus, the main subject in the picture should be exposed correctly, but

the background may become under or over exposed.

Aperture Priority Setting

By selecting the Av mode of your camera, the camera will select the appropriate shutter speed for the

scene. If the subject is too bright or too dark, the shutter speed indicator will blink and show the limit

(highest or slowest shutter speed) value. The highest shutter speed will be limited to the camera’s

normal flash synchronization speed. In such a case, the camera proceeds to take a flash photograph

at the limit value. Thus, the main subject in a picture should be exposed correctly, but the background

may become under or overexposed.

When used with M Mode

You can set the desired aperture value and shutter speed from 30 seconds to the camera’s flash sync

speed. If the camera’s exposure requires more light to achieve correct exposure for the inputted

values, the flashgun will provide sufficient light to give the correct exposure, within the working range

of the flashgun.

LIMITS OF CONTINUOUS SHOOTING

To prevent overheating of the flashgun’s circuitry, do not use your flash unit for at least 10 minutes

after continuously firing the flash for the number of exposures shown in the table below.

Mode Number of Flash Exposures

TTL, M(1/1,1/2) 20 Continuous Flash Shots

M(1/4, 1/8) 25 Continuous Flash Shots

M(1/16-1/32) 40 Continuous Flash Shots

Multi 10 Cycle

MANUAL FLASH OPERATION

Manual flash is provided for shooting subjects when the correct exposure is difficult to obtain in the

TTL mode. In the manual flash mode, you can set the flash power level from 1/1 (full) to 1/128 power

in one step increments.

1. Set the camera’s exposure mode to M.

2. Press the MODE button on the flash unit to select M.

3. The flash power output value blinks when you press the SEL

button.

4. Press

button to set the desired flash power output.

5. The manual flash output display will stop blinking and remain

displayed after you press the SEL button again.

6. Adjust the focusing by pressing the shutter button, note the subject distance on the focus ring on the

lens. Then adjust the lens’ aperture value or flash power level until the distance indicated on the LCD

panel of the flashgun is equal to the subject distance.

7. When the Ready Light of the flash is illuminated, the unit is ready for use.

◆ You can calculate the correct exposure by using the following formula:

Guide Number “GN” / Flash to Subject Distance = F-stop

This flash unit will automatically calculate and indicate the appropriate subject distance according to

the above formula.(Please refer to table1 on the last page)

SECOND CURTAIN SYNCHRONIZATION

When you photograph a moving subject with slow synchronization, usually the furrow of the subject

will be exposed in front of the subject. The ordinary flash light will fire when the first shutter curtain is

fully opened, thus the subject will be exposed from the time flash is fired to the time the shutter is

closed (First curtain synchronization). When you use second curtain synchronization, the flash will fire

just before the second curtain begins to close and the subject will be exposed by ambient light from

the time the shutter opens until the flash fires. As a result the furrow of the subject will be recorded

behind the subject. This is a more natural effect.

◆ This mode cannot be used with EOS 700, 750, 850 cameras.

1. Set the desired picture-taking mode of the camera.

2. Press

button mark will be displayed on the LCD

panel.

3. Adjust the focus and take the picture after confirming the ready

light.

◆ First curtain synchronization will be set if

mark is not displayed.

◆ If the camera is set to Full Auto Mode this function cannot be used.

◆ To cancel second curtain synchronization, turn off the

mark on the LCD panel by using

buttons.

HIGH SPEED SYNC (FP) FLASH, A TYPE CAMERAS ONLY

When you take a picture with an ordinary flash, you cannot use a shutter speed faster than the

camera’s synchronized speed because the flash must fire when the shutter curtain is fully open. When

using the High Speed Sync mode, the flash keeps firing while the shutter curtain is running, thus you

can use a shutter speed faster than the shutter’s normal synchronization speed.

1. Select the camera’s exposure mode. (“Tv” or “M” modes can be used)

2. Select a shutter speed faster than the camera’s normal synchronization speed.

3. Slide the Power Switch of the flash to the ON position.

4. Choose the Flash Mode by using MODE button (“ETTL” or “M”

modes can be used).

5. Press

button until the mark is displayed on the

LCD panel.

6. Focus on the subject

7. Check that the subject is located within the effective distance,

indicated on the LCD panel.

8. Confirm the

mark is in the viewfinder of the camera and then you can take the picture.

◆ With high-speed sync, the Guide Number changes depending on the shutter speed. The flash range

will be shorter (ie Guide Number will be smaller) when the shutter speed is faster. (Refer to table 2

on the last page).

◆ Selecting shutter speeds slower than the camera’s normal synchronization speed cancels Hi-speed

sync. Then the flash will automatically set to normal ETTL operation. To activate FP flash again,

follow the procedure above from point 1.

◆ It is possible to use the exposure compensation function with high speed synchronization operation.

To do so, please refer to your camera’s instruction manual regarding “exposure correction”.

◆

will disappear when Hi-speed sync (FP Flash) is cancelled.

FE LOCK

“FE” lock mode allows you to choose and lock the exposure before taking the picture.

1. Set the camera’s exposure mode (“P”, “Tv”, “Av”, “M” or “DEP”).

2. Set the flash’s mode to the E-TTL or the High Speed Sync.

3. Focus on the subject

4. Focus on the subject in the center AF frame of the viewfinder, and depress FE lock button.

◆ The flash unit will make a pre-flash, then calculate and memorize the amount of light necessary for

the correct exposure.

◆ The camera’s viewfinder will display “FEL” for 0.5 sec and the correct exposure will be set.

◆ If the viewfinder shows

mark, it means that power is not sufficient for correct exposure. Please

get closer to the subject and repeat from step 3.

5. After composing the picture, press the shutter button.

◆ This function may vary depending on camera model. For more details please refer to “FE lock”

instructions of your camera manual.

MODELING FLASH

If useing the Modeling flash, you can check the lighting and shadow effects before taking the picture.

(This function is limited to cameras which are compatible with modeling flash. For more details, please

refer to the instruction manual of your camera)

When the camera is set to modeling flash, the Flash panel will display the symbol automatically.

EXPOSURE COMPENSATION

You can use flash exposure compensation in combination with normal exposure compensation to

control the background exposure level. Flash exposure compensation can be set to ±3 stops in 1/3

stop increments (or in 1/2 stop increments with some cameras).

◆ This mode cannot be used with EOS 620, 650, 700, 850 and 1000 cameras.

1. Press the SEL button and select

2. Press the

button to set the desired flash exposure

compensation amount.

3. Press the SEL button until the display stops blinking.

4. Focus on the subject.

5. Check that the subject is within the flash range as displayed on

the EF 610 DG Super’s LCD panel.

6. You can take the picture after confirming that the Ready Light of the flash is illuminated.

◆ To cancel exposure compensation, please start from step 1 and choose + 0 on display.

FB (Flash Exposure Bracketing)

With FB, you can get bracketed flash shots of the subject while the ambient exposure level remains

constant. The bracketed flash shots can be taken in the sequence of correct exposure, under

exposure and over exposure, up to ± 3 stops in 1/3EV increments

(or 1/2EV increments with some cameras).

1. Press the SEL button until

blinks.

2. Press the

button to set the flash exposure bracketing

amount.

will be displayed after pressing the SEL button again.

4. Adjust the focusing.

5. Please check that the subject is within the flash range displayed on the EF- 610 DG Super’s LCD

panel.

6. Check the

mark is displayed in the virefinder and take the picture.

7. If it is necessary, repeat steps 4 to 6.

◆ This function will be cancelled automatically after making the third exposure.

MULTI FLASH MODE

While the shutter is open, the flash will fire repeatedly. By doing so a series of images of the subject

will be exposed in one frame. A bright subject with a dark background shows more effectively in this

mode. It is possible to set the firing frequency between 1Hz and

199Hz. Up to 100 flashes can be fired continuously. The maximum

number of flashes varies, depending on the flash’s power output

and firing frequency settings. (Please refer to table 3 on the last

page).

◆ This function cannot be used with EOS 700, 750, 850 cameras.

1. Set the camera’s exposure mode to M mode and set the F number.

2. Press the MODE button until the Multi-flash mode appears.

Press the SEL button until the flash firing frequency starts to blink.

4. Press the

button to set the desired flash frequency value.

5. After pressing the SEL button again, the flash power level will blink.

6. Press the

button to set the desired power level.

7. Press the SEL button again, the number of flashes will blink.

8. Press the

button to set the desired number of flashes.

9. Press the SEL button again, the display will stop blinking.

10. When the ready light of the flash is illuminated, the unit is ready to use.

Note: Please set the shutter speed longer than; Number of Flashes you want ÷ Firing Frequency

BOUNCE FLASH

When you take a photo with flash in a room, sometimes a strong shadow will appear behind the subject,

if you point the flash head upwards or sideways to reflect the light off the ceiling, wall etc. the subject

will be illuminated softly. Press the lock button and adjust the flash head to set the bounce angle.

UP: 0°, 60°, 75°, 90° DOWN: 0°,7°

RIGHT: 0°, 60°, 75°, 90° LEFT: 0°, 60°, 75°,90°, 120°, 150°, 180°

When the bounce flash mode is activated, a bounce indicator

will appear on the LCD panel.

Choose a white surface for bouncing the flash, otherwise the

image’s colour may be incorrect.

Depending on the reflecting surface, the subject distance and other

factors, the effective distance range for the TTL AUTO may change.

Please check for correct exposure confirmation (ETTL or TTL mark

on the LCD panel) after releasing the shutter.

CLOSE-UP EXPOSURES

Bounce flash can be tilted 7° downward for close-ups. The Flash will be effective only for the subjects

0.5 meter to 2 meters. When the flash head is tilted 7°,

will blink.

CATCH LIGHT PANEL

This flash is equipped with a built-in catch

light panel, which can create a catch light in

the eyes of the subject when the bounce

flash mode is activated. Slide out the wide

panel and catch light panel, and then put

wide panel back in its place. (Be careful to

slide the panels out smoothly.)

◆ To create a catch light effectively, tilt the flash head upward 90 degrees and take pictures at a close

distance.

WIRELESS FLASH

When using the “Wireless Flash” mode, you can take pictures with a more three-dimensional feeling,

or make natural images by using shadowing depending on the flash position. This can be done without

any extension cord connecting the camera body and flash. In case of the EF-610 DG SUPER,

communication between the camera body and the flash will be achieved by the light produced by the

flash. In the “Wireless Flash” mode, the camera will calculate the correct exposure automatically.

◆The type A camera models can be used with “Wireless Manual Flash” and “Wireless Multi Flash”

functions only. The EOS750 and EOS850 cannot be used with “Wireless Flash”.

◆In this instruction we call the flash unit which is attached to the camera body the “Master unit ” and

we call a flash unit at a remote position a “Slave unit”.

◆When setting a slave unit at the desired position, you can use the mini-stand provided. This

mini-stand has a screw hole for a tripod.

◆

Place the slave flash unit at the desired location. Do not place the slave unit within the picture area.

◆Set the flash unit within the range of 0.5m/1.5ft~5m/16ft from the subject and set the camera body

within the range of 1m/3ft~5m/16ft from the subject.

Channel Setting

When other people are using Wireless Flash mode near you, your flash may be connected with the

other person’s flash and your flash may fire. In this circumstance, please set a different channel for

your flash from that of the other person’s.

Channel setting for Master unit

1. Press the MODE button to Select the

mark.

2. Press the SEL button several times to make the channel indicator

blink.

3. Press the

button to set the channel number. (C1～C4)

4. Press the SEL button several times to stop the blinking.

Channel setting for Slave unit

1. Press the MODE button to Select the ETTL／／

mark.

Press the SEL button several times to make the channel indicator blink.

3. Press the

button to set the channel to the same number.

(C1 ～ C4) as the master unit.

4. Press the SEL button several times to stop the blinking.

◆ If the channel number of the Master and Slave flashguns are different, the Slave will not fire. Please set

the same number for Master and Slave.

Slave Unit ID Setting

When you use several Slave units, the Slave ID can be set to distinguish a Slave unit from Main flash.

◆ If you want to all Slave units to fire at the same flash output, this setting is not necessary.

1. Press the MODE button to Select the ETTL／

／

mark.

2. Press the SEL button three times to make the Slave ID indicator blink.

3. Press the

button and set the ID number. (1, 2 or 3)

4. Press the SEL button again so the display stops blinking.

◆ Repeat this process for each slave unit you are using, giving each one a different ID number.

Master Flash ON/OFF Setting

You can set the Master flash unit firing ON or OFF.

Master Flash unit firing ON

1. Press the MODE button to Select the

mark.

2. Press the

button to indicate the mark.

Master Flash unit firing OFF

1. Press the MODE button to Select the

mark.

2. Press the

button to indicate the mark.

WIRELESS ETTL AUTOFLASH (type A cameras only)

In this Wireless ETTL Autoflash function, the camera automatically calculates the correct exposure.

Preparation for Wireless Flash

Wireless ETTL Autoflash with Flash Ratio OFF

If you require an equal power ratio for each flash unit, the slave ID setting is not necessary. You can set 1, 2

or 3 for each Slave Unit in use.

All the Slave flash units will fire at the same flash output and the ETTL autoflash system controls the total

flash amount automatically, to obtain a correct flash exposure.

The instructions below show how to reset the flashgun so no flash ratio is used and therefore equal power

is emmited from each flashgun.

◆ Please set the Master Flash unit as follows:

1. Press the MODE button to select the ETTL／

mark.

2. Press the

button to display the mark (Master Flash will fire) or the shows (Master Flash

will not fire) in the LCD display.

3. Press the SEL button several times and confirm that the flash ratio is 1:1.

◆ If the flash ratio is indicated as or , press the

button until 1:1 is displayed.

4. Place the Slave Unit at the desired position.

5. Make sure that the Master Unit and Slave Unit have both been charged.

◆ Master Unit’s Ready Light is lit and Slave Unit’s AF Auxiliary Light is blinking.

6. Focus on the subject and take the picture.

Slave ID, Wireless ETTL Autoflash With Flash Ratio (Two Slave Units)

The Wireless ETTL autoflash system, described as an example, consists of a master unit on the camera,

which will not fire, and two slave units. When you set the flash ratio, the ETTL autoflash system then

controls the total flash amount according to the flash ratio, to obtain a correct exposure.

◆ Only EOS-1V, EOS-3 cameras can use this function.

◆ The flash ratio can be set between 8 : 1 ～ 1 : 1 ～ 1 : 8.

◆ Please set the Slave ID to 1 and 2 for each Slave unit.

Set the Master unit as follow.

1. Please set the Master Flash unit firing mode to OFF (see Mater Flash ON / OFF setting).

2. Press the MODE button to Select the ETTL／

mark.

3. Press the SEL button several times to make the flash ratio indicator blink.

4. Press the

button and select . (Blinking)

5. Press the SEL button to make flash ratio value blink.

6. Press the

button to set the flash ratio.

7. Press the SEL button to make the Flash Ratio indicator stop blinking.

8. Place the Slave Unit at the desired position.

9. Confirm that both the master and slave units are charged.

10. Focus on the subject and take the picture.

◆ If you want to change the settings, you can start from step 3.

◆ If you want to cancel the setting, please set the flash ratio 1:1. (refer to step 4)

Slave ID, Wireless ETTL Autoflash With Flash Ratio (Three Slave Units)

The following wireless ETTL autoflash procedure is for a master unit with three (3) slave units. This procedure

sets the flash ratio for two Slave Units and the flash exposure compensation amount for other slave unit.

◆ Only EOS-1V and EOS-3 camera can use this function.

◆ Please set the Slave ID 1, 2 and 3 for each Slave unit (See Slave ID Setting).

Set the Master unit as follow.

1. Please set the Master Flash unit firing mode to OFF (See Master Flash ON / OFF Settings).

2. Press the MODE button to Select the ETTL／ mark.

3. Press the SEL button several times to make the flash ratio indicator display blink.

4. Press the

button to select the 1 2 3. (Blinking)

5. Press the SEL button to make the flash ratio value blink.

6. Press the

button to set the flash ratio.

7. Press the SEL button to make the flash exposure compensation display blink.

8. Press the

button and set the flash exposure compensation amount.

9. Press the SEL button to make the indicator stop blinking.

10. Place the Slave Units at the desired position.

11. Confirm that both the master and slave units are charged.

12. Focus on the subject and take the picture.

◆ If you want to change the settings or cancel the flash ratio settings, you can start from step 3.

Wireless High-Speed Sync (FP Flash)

1. Please set the master flash to Wireless Flash mode. (Refer to Page 21)

2. Press the

button to set to ／ (Master Flash unit firing ON) or ／ (Master Flash

unit firing OFF).

The remainder of the procedure for setting wireless high-speed sync, is the same as for normal high-speed sync.

◆ It is not necessary to make any additional settings on the Slave units.

Wireless Flash Exposure Compensation

1. Please set master flash unit to the Wireless Flash Mode.

2. Press the SEL button to make

mark blink.

3. Press the

button to set the flash exposure compensation amount.

4. Press the SEL button several times to make exposure compensation indicator appear.

◆ It is not necessary to make any additional setting on the Slave units.

◆ You can also set the flash exposure compensation individually for each slave unit. (If using more than

one slave, you will need to apply steps 2-4 to each slave unit.)

Wireless FE Lock

1. First please set the flashgun to Wireless Flash mode.

2. Focus on the subject and press the FEL button on the camera.

3. The procedure for setting wireless EF lock is the same as for normal FE lock.

◆ It is not necessary to make any change to the settings on the Slave units.

Wireless Flash Exposure Bracketing (FB)

1. First set the flash to the Wireless Flash Mode.

2. On the Master Unit, press the SEL button several times to make the

mark blink.

3. Press the

button and set the flash exposure compensation amount.

4. Press the SEL button several times to make the indicator stop blinking.

5. The remainder of procedure for setting wireless FB is the same as for normal FB.

◆ It is not necessary to change any settings on the Slave units.

CHANGING THE WIRELESS MODE

Please set the flash as follows.

1. Press the MODE button to select the ETTL /

mark.

2. Press and hold the SEL button more than 2 seconds to make the mode indicator blink.

3. Press the MODE button and select the ETTL, M, or MULTI mode.

4. Press the SEL button to make the mode of indicator stop blinking.

WIRELESS MANUAL FLASH

You can manually set the slave unit’s flash output, with the master unit. The flash output among the slave

units can be uniform or varied. To determine the proper flash exposure, use a hand-held flash meter.

Wireless Manual Flash With Uniform Flash Output

Please set the Master flash unit as described below.

1. Please follow the procedure of Changing the Wireless Mode and set to the M／

mark.

2. Press the SEL button several times to make the flash output amount indicator blink.

3. Press the + button or – button to set the flash output amount.

4. Press the SEL button several times until the display stops blinking.

◆ If the master flash unit ON function is set, the master unit will also fire, at the same flash output.

Wireless Manual Flash With Varied Flash Output

You can set a different flash output for each slave unit(s) (the following explains the procedure for using

three slave flash units). Set the slave units to normal Wireless Flash mode.

Please set the master flash unit as follows.

1. Please follow the procedure for Changing the Wireless Mode and set to the M／

mark.

2. Press the SEL button several times to make the

mark blink.

3. Press the

button to select indicator. (blinking)

4. Press the SEL button, making the flash output display and blink.

5. Press the

button to set the flash output amount for ID 1.

6. Press the SEL button make the flash output display and blink.

7. Press the

button to set the flash output amount for ID 2.

8. Press the SEL button make the flash output display and blink.

9. Press the

button to set the flash output amount for ID 3.

10. Press the SEL button to make the indicator stop blinking.

◆ If there are only two slave units, please select the indicator at step 3 ( step 9 and step 10 should be

omitted).

WIRELESS MULTI FLASH

Set the master flash unit as follows.

1. Follow the procedure for Changing the Wireless Mode, and set to the MULTI／

mark.

2. Press the SEL button to make the firing frequency display blink.

3. Press the

button to set the firing frequency.

4. Press the SEL button to make the flash output amount display blink.

5. Press the

button to set the flash output amount.

6. Press the SEL button to make the flash count display blink.

7. Press the

button to set the flash count.

8. Press the SEL button to make the display stop blinking.

◆ The firing frequency and flash count will be the same for all slave units.

SLAVE FLASH

◆ When selecting this mode with the MODE button, make sure that the flash indicator mode (ETTL, M,

MULTI) is not displayed.

NORMAL SLAVE FLASH

Even if the EF-610 DG SUPER is not attached to the camera body, you can fire the flash by using another

flash unit.

◆ Built-in flash (E-TTL, E-TTL II) cannot be used.

◆ Please set your Master Flash unit to TTL autoflash (E-TTL, E-TTL II autoflash cannot be used) or Manual

flash mode.

1. Attach the flash unit to the camera’s hot shoe.

Set

the

camera’s

exposure

mode

the

desired

mode

you

use

mode,

also

set

the

desired

aperture

value

3. Turn on the flash unit and press the shutter button half way.

◆ Now, the aperture value and film speed are automatically

transmitted to the flash unit.

4. Remove the flash unit from the camera.

Press the MODE button and select the /

(Slave) mode.

6. Press the SEL button several times to make the flash output value

indicator blink.

7. Press the + or – button to set the flash output amount.

◆ Determine the appropriate flash output by setting the distance indicator on the LCD panel to coincide as

closely as possible with the actual distance from the slave flash to the subject. If the actual distance is

out of range, you will need to change the aperture value or film speed.

a. To change the aperture value: When the flash unit is set to the Slave mode, press the SEL button

until the aperture value blinks, then press the + or – button to set the desired aperture value. Then

press the SEL button to stop the display blinking.

b. To change the film speed: Press

MODE

to select the ISO, then press the SEL button to make the

indicator for the aperture value blink. Press the + or – button and set the desired film speed, then

press the SEL button once again. You will need to press the

MODE

button several times to return to

the slave mode.

8. Press the SEL button several times to make the display stop blinking.

9. Place the slave unit in the desired location. Do not place the slave unit within the picture area.

10. After confirming that all flash units are fully charged, press the shutter button to take the picture.

◆ When the EF-610 DG SUPER is fully charged, the AF Auxiliary Light will blink.

◆ The flash will not fire if the EF-610 DG SUPER is attached to the camera body while it is in the Slave

Mode setting.

DESIGNATED SLAVE FLASH

If using two or more EF-610 DG Super flash units, you can designate which flash will fire together by using

the channel settings. In this mode, one flash unit will be used as the Slave Controller and the others for

firing as Slaves.

Setting the Slave Flash unit(s) for firing

1. Attach the slave unit to the camera body.

2. Set the camera’s exposure mode to S or M.

3. Set the shutter speed to 1/30 or slower. (The slave controller unit (Master Flash) will transmit the

designated signal before the others fire. Thus if you use a shutter speed faster than 1/30, the firing flash

units will not be synchronized.)

4. Switch “ON” the flash unit and press the camera’s shutter button

halfway. (The aperture value and film speed are now automatically

transmitted to the slave flash unit.)

5. Remove the slave flash unit from the camera.

6. Press the MODE button and select the

/ . (Slave Mode)

7. Press the SEL button to make the channel display indicator blink.

8. Press the + or – button to set the channel number. (C1 or C2)

9. Press the SEL button to make the output amount display indicator of the flash blink.

10. Press the + or – button to set the flash output amount.

◆ Set the flash power by setting the distance indicator on the LCD panel to coincide as closely as possible

with the actual distance from the slave flash to the subject. If the actual distance is out of range, you

need to change the aperture value.

11. Press the SEL button several times to make the display stop blinking.

12. Place the slave unit in the desired location. Do not place the slave unit within the picture area.

Setting for Slave Controller unit

13. Attach the Slave Controller flash unit to the camera body.

14. Press the MODE button and select the

/ (Slave Mode).

15. Press the SEL button to make the channel display indicator blink.

16. Press the + or – button to set the same channel number as that set

on the firing flash unit.

17. Press the SEL button to make the flash output amount display

indicator blink.

18. Press the + button so the

mark is displayed and blinking.

19. Press the SEL button twice to make the display stop blinking.

20. After confirming that all flash units are fully charged, press the shutter button to take the picture.

◆ When the firing flash unit of EF-610 DG Super is fully charged, the AF Auxiliary Light will blink.

◆ As the slave control using is in

mode, the aperture on the slave control unit can not be changed.

◆ The Slave Controller unit functions only to control the slave unit.

SPECIFICATIONS

TYPE : Clip-on type serial-controlled TTL auto zoom electric flash

GUIDE NUMBER : 61 (ISO 100/m, 105mm head position)

POWER SOURCE : Four AA type alkaline batteries or Four AA type Ni-Cd batteries or,

: Four AA type Ni-MH Nickel-Metal Hydride batteries

RECYCLING TIME : about 7.0 sec. (Alkaline batteries)

: about 5.0 sec. (Ni-Cd, Ni-MH Nickel-Metal Hydride)

NUMBER OF FLASHES : about 120 flashes (Alkaline batteries)

: about 160 flashes (Ni-Cd, Ni-MH Nickel-Metal Hydride)

FLASH DURATION : about 1 / 700 sec. (full power firing)

FLASH ILLUMINATE ANGLE : 24～105mm motor powered control (17mm with Built-in Wide Panel)

AUTO POWER OFF : Available

WEIGHT : 330g / 11.6oz.

DIMENSIONS : 77mm (W) / 3.0in. x 139mm (H) / 5.5in. x 117mm (L) / 4.6in.

Disposal of Electric and Electronic Equipment in Private Households

ENGLISH

Disposal of used Electrical & Electronic Equipment (Applicable in the European Union and other European countries

with separate collection systems)

This symbol on the product, in the manual/warranty, and/or on the packaging indicates that this product must not be

treated as household waste. Instead it should be handed over to the appropriate collection point for the recycling of

electrical and electronic equipment. If your equipment contains easy removable batteries, please dispose of these

separately according to your local legislation. It is your responsibility to ensure that this product is recycled correctly. In doing so

you will help conserve natural resources, protect the environment and human health. For more detailed information about recycling

this

product

please

contact

your

local

city

office

your

household

waste

disposal

service

the

shop

where

you

purchased

the

product.

[Table1] GN 󰃥ISO100・m󰃦

17mm 24mm 28mm 35mm 50mm 70mm 85mm 105mm

1/1 23.0 34.0 35.0 36.0 46.0 52.0 56.0 61.0

1/2 16.3 24.0 24.7 25.5 32.5 36.8 39.6 43.1

1/4 11.5 17.0 17.5 18.0 23.0 26.0 28.0 30.5

1/8 8.1 12.0 12.4 12.7 16.3 18.4 19.8 21.6

1/16 5.8 8.5 8.8 9.0 11.5 13.0 14.0 15.3

1/32 4.1 6.0 6.2 6.4 8.1 9.2 9.9 10.8

1/64 2.9 4.3 4.4 4.5 5.8 6.5 7.0 7.6

1/128 2.1 3.0 3.1 3.2 4.1 4.7 5.0 5.5

[Table

2] GN 󰃥ISO100・m󰃦

17mm 24mm 28mm 35mm 50mm 70mm 85mm 105mm

1/125 16.3 24.0 24.7 25.5 32.5 36.8 39.6 43.1

1/160 14.4 21.3 21.9 22.5 28.8 32.5 35.0 38.1

1/180 13.6 20.0 20.6 21.2 27.1 30.6 33.0 35.9

1/250 11.5 17.0 17.5 18.0 23.0 26.0 28.0 30.5

1/320 10.2 15.0 15.5 15.9 20.3 23.0 24.7 27.0

1/350 9.1 13.4 13.8 14.2 18.2 20.6 22.1 24.1

1/400 9.7 14.4 14.8 15.2 19.4 22.0 23.7 25.8

1/500 8.1 12.0 12.4 12.7 16.3 18.4 19.8 21.6

1/640 7.2 10.6 10.9 11.3 14.4 16.3 17.5 19.1

1/750 6.6 9.8 10.1 10.4 13.3 15.0 16.2 17.6

1/800 6.4 9.5 9.8 10.1 12.9 14.5 15.7 17.1

1/1000 5.8 8.5 8.8 9.0 11.5 13.0 14.0 15.3

1/1250 5.1 7.6 7.8 8.0 10.3 11.6 12.5 13.6

1/1500 4.7 6.9 7.1 7.3 9.4 10.6 11.4 12.5

1/1600 4.5 6.7 6.9 7.1 9.1 10.3 11.1 12.1

1/2000 4.1 6.0 6.2 6.4 8.1 9.2 9.9 10.8

1/2500 3.6 5.4 5.5 5.7 7.3 8.2 8.9 9.6

1/3000 3.3 4.9 5.1 5.2 6.6 7.5 8.1 8.8

1/3200 3.2 4.8 4.9 5.0 6.4 7.3 7.8 8.5

1/4000 2.9 4.3 4.4 4.5 5.8 6.5 7.0 7.6

1/5000 2.6 3.8 3.9 4.0 5.1 5.8 6.3 6.8

1/6000 2.3 3.5 3.6 3.7 4.7 5.3 5.7 6.2

1/6400 2.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 4.5 5.1 5.5 6.0

1/8000 2.0 3.0 3.1 3.2 4.1 4.6 4.9 5.4

1/128

1～5Hz 1～100

6～7 Hz 1～90

8～9 Hz 1～80

10～11 Hz 1～70

12～14 Hz 1～60

15～19 Hz 1～50

20～199 Hz 1～40

1/64

1～3 Hz 1～90

4～5 Hz 1～80

6～7 Hz 1～70

8～9 Hz 1～50

10 Hz

1～45

11～14 Hz 1～35

15～19 Hz 1～30

20～50 Hz 1～25

60～199 Hz 1～20

1/32

1～3 Hz 1～60

4～5 Hz 1～50

6 Hz

1～30

7～9 Hz 1～20

10～19 Hz 1～15

20～199 Hz 1～12

1/16

1 Hz

1～30

2 Hz

1～20

3 Hz

1～10

4～199 Hz 1～6

1/8

1 Hz

1～14

2 Hz

1～7

3 Hz

1～6

4～7 Hz 1～5

8～9 Hz 1～4

10～199 Hz 1～3

1/4

1 Hz

1～4

2 Hz

1～3

3～119 Hz 1～2

[Table

3] MULTI FLASH MODE

F18N10081

E L E C T R O N I C F L A S H

EF-610

DG SUPER

-iTTL

INSTRUCTIONS

ENGLISH

The CE Mark is a Directive conformity mark of the European Community (EC).

13 14 15 16

ENGLISH

Thank you very much for purchasing the Sigma EF-610 DG SUPER NA-iTTL Electronic Flash. This

product is specifically developed for the Nikon SLR series cameras. Depending on the camera model,

functions and operation may vary. Please read this instruction booklet carefully. To add to your

enjoyment of photography, this flash has a variety of features. To make the most of all these features

and to get the maximum performance and enjoyment from your flash, please read this instruction

booklet together with your camera’s instruction manual, before using the flash and also keep it handy

for your future reference.

PRECAUTIONS

In order to avoid causing any damage or injury, please read this instruction manual very carefully,

paying attention to the cautionary signs below, before using the flash.

Please take special note of the two cautionary signs below.

Warning !!

Caution !!

Symbol denotes the important points, where warning and caution are required.

Symbol contains information regarding the actions that must be avoided.

Using the product disregarding this warning sign might cause serious injury o

other dangerous results.

Using the product disregarding this caution sign might cause injury or damage.

Warning !!

This flash contains high voltage circuits. To avoid electric shock or burns, do not attempt to

disassemble the flash. If the outside shell of the unit is broken or cracked, do not touch the

mechanism inside.

Do not fire the flash close to eyes. Otherwise the bright light could damage the eyes. Keep at

least 1m/3feet distance between face and the flash unit when taking a picture with flash.

Do not touch the synchro terminal of your camera when the flash is attached to a hot shoe. High

voltage circuitry could cause an electric shock.

Never use your camera in an environment where flammable, burnable, gas, liquids or chemicals,

etc, exist. Otherwise it might cause fire or explosion.

Caution !!

Do not use this flash unit on any camera other than the Nikon NA series cameras, otherwise the

flash may damage the circuitry of these cameras.

This flash unit is not waterproof. When using the flash and camera in the rain or snow or nea

water, keep it from getting wet. It is often impractical to repair internal electrical components

damaged by water.

Never subject the flash and camera to shock, dust, high temperature or humidity. These factors

might cause fire or malfunctioning of your equipment.

When the flash is subjected to sudden temperature change, as when the flash unit is brought

from a cold exterior to warm interior, condensation might form inside. In such a case, place you

equipment in a sealed plastic bag before such a change, and do not use the flash unit until it

reaches room temperature.

Do not store your flash in a drawer or cupboard etc. containing naphthalene, camphor or othe

insecticides. These chemicals will have a negative effects on the flash unit.

Do not use a thinner, Benzene or other cleaning agents to remove dirt or finger prints from the

component. Clean with a soft, moistened cloth.

For extended storage, choose a cool dry place, preferably with good ventilation. It is

recommended that the flash be charged and fired several times a month to maintain prope

capacitor functioning.

DESCRIPTION OF THE PARTS

EXTERNAL

PARTS

1.Flash Head 2.AF Auxiliary Light 3.Bounce Angle; Up and Down

4.Bounce Angle; Right and Left 5.Bounce Lock and Release Button; Up and Down

6.Swivel Lock and Release Button; Right and Left 7.LCD Panel 8.Battery Cover

9.Shoe Ring 10.Shoe 11.Catch Light Panel 12.Wide Panel

CONTROLS

13.MODE Button 14.SEL SELECT Button 15.

+ Increment Button

16.

Decrement Button 17.ZOOM Button 18.TEST Button

19.LIGHT Button 20.Ready Light 21.Power Switch

CAMERA MODELS AND FUNCTIONS

This flash can be used with cameras, which are given below.

Digital SLR, F6, F5, F4 Series, F3 Series(*), F100, F90X/N90S Series, F90/N90 Series, F80 Series,

F75/N75, F70D/N70, U/F65/N65, F60D/N60, F55/N55, F50D/N50, F-801S/N8008S, F-801/N8008,

F601M, F-601/N6006, F501/N2020, F401X, F401S/N4004S, F-401/N4004, F-301, N2000, FA, FE10,

FE-2, FG,

FM10,

New FM2,

FM3,

Nikonos V(*),

Pronea 600i

(*) It is necessary to use adapter for connection.

This instruction book is used for the following lens types. (Please check your lens.)

With Built-in CPU Nikon Lenses D Type Lenses, G Type Lenses, IX Nikor Lenses, Except D

type AF lens (does not include F3AF), Ai-P type lens

Without Built-in CPU Nikon Lenses Ai-S, Ai, Series E lens

ABOUT THE BATTERY

This flash unit uses four “AA” type Alkaline dry cell batteries or Ni-Cad, Ni-MH rechargeable batteries.

Manganese batteries can also be used but as they have a shorter life than Alkaline batteries, we do

not recommend using them. Please replace batteries if it takes more than 30seconds to light the

Ready Lamp.

◆ To assure proper electrical contact, clean the battery terminals before installing the batteries.

◆ NiCad batteries do not have standardized contacts. If you use NiCad batteries, please confirm that

the battery contacts touch the battery compartment properly.

◆ To prevent battery explosion, leakage or overheating, use four new AA batteries of the same type

and brand. Do not mix the type or new and used batteries.

◆ Do not disassemble or short-circuit the batteries, or expose them fire or water; they may explode.

Do not recharge the batteries other than Ni-Cd or Ni-MH rechargeable batteries.

◆ When the flash will not be used for an extended period of time, remove the batteries from the flash

to avoid the possibility of damage from leakage.

◆

Battery performance decreases at low temperatures. Keep batteries insulated when using the flash in cold

weather.

◆ As with any flash, it is recommended you carry spare batteries when on a long trip or when

photographing outdoors in cold weather.

BATTERY LOADING

1. Be sure to set the Power Switch to the off position

then slide the battery cover in the direction of the

arrow to open.

2. Insert four AA size batteries into the battery

chamber. Be sure the + and – ends of the batteries

are aligned according to the diagram in the

chamber.

3. Close the cover.

4. Slide the Power Switch to the ON position. After few seconds the Ready Lamp will light, indicating

that the flash unit can be fired.

5. Please press the “Test Button” to be sure that the flash is working properly.

AUTO POWER OFF

To conserve battery power, the flash unit automatically turns itself off when the flash is not used within

approximately 80 seconds. To turn the flash on again, depress the TEST button or the camera shutter

button halfway. Please note that the “Auto Power Off” mechanism does not work with wireless TTL

flash mode, normal slave flash, and designated slave flash modes.

Please Note; However, “Auto Power Off” mechanism does not work with slave flash mode.

ERROR INDICATION

If the battery power is not sufficient, or if there is an electric information error between the camera and

flash unit, the “Er” icon will blink on the LCD panel. When this occurs, turn the power switch off and on.

If it still blinks, after this procedure, check the battery power.

ADJUSTING THE FLASH HEAD

Depress the Bounce “Up and Down” Lock and Release Button and

adjust the flash head to the desired position.

◆ If

appears on the LCD panel when you turn on the flash, and

if this mark blinks, then the flash head is adjusted to an incorrect

position.

ATTACHING AND REMOVING THE FLASH TO AND FROM THE CAMERA

Be sure to turn off the Power Switch, then insert the Shoe Base into the hot shoe on the camera and

turn the Shoe Locking Ring until it is tight.

◆ When you attach or remove the flash, grasp the

bottom of the flash to prevent damage to the shoe

foot and the camera’s hot shoe.

◆ If the camera’s built-in flash is set in up position,

please close it before you attach the flash unit.

◆ To remove the flash, rotate the shoe-locking ring in

the opposite direction of ◄LOCK mark, until it

stops.

SETTING OF FLASH COVERAGE ANGLE

When you press the ZOOM button, the symbol appears. Each time you press the ZOOM button,

the LCD panel display will change and indicate the zoom position in sequence as follows.

24mm

→ 28mm → 35mm → 50mm → 70mm → 85mm → 105mm → (Auto)

Please confirm the distance from <<CHART

>> page 18. If the setting is possible with 1 then

depending on the focal length of the lens, the flash coverage angle will be set automatically, when TTL

mode is chosen.

◆ When you turn on the main switch, the flash will memorize and set the zoom head position to the

last setting used.

◆ If you use a lens wider than the flash head setting, there may be under exposed areas around the

edges of the picture.

◆ Depending on the flash head setting, the flash’s Guide Number will change.

WIDE PANEL

This flashgun is equipped with a built-in wide panel,

which can provide an ultra wide 17mm angle of

coverage. Slide out the wide panel and catch light

panel and flip it down to cover the flash’s head. (Be

careful to slide the panels out smoothly.) Then put the

catch light panel back in its place. The coverage angle

setting of the flash will be set to 17mm automatically.

◆ If the built-in wide panel comes off accidentally, the

ZOOM button will not function. In this case please

contact the store where the flash was purchased, or

an authorized .Sigma service station.

LCD PANEL ILLUMINATION

When you press the LIGHT button, the LCD panel will illuminate for about 8 seconds. The illumination

stays on longer than 8 seconds if you press the LIGHT button once again.

SETTING THE ISO FILM SPEED

The ISO film speed is automatically set for the combination of EF-610 DG SUPER NA-iTTL with Digital

SLR Cameras, or the F6, F5, F4 series, F100, F90X/F90/F80 (N90S/N90/N80) series, F75D/N75,

F65/N65, F70/N70, F810S/N8008S, F801/N8008 and Pronea600i. To confirm ISO film speed, press

the MODE button. If your camera is not one of the models listed above,

please follow the procedure below.

1. Press the MODE button until ISO is selected.

2. Press the SEL button. The ISO value will blink.

3. Press

–

to set ISO film speed.

4. Press the SEL button and make the indicator stop blinking.

TTL MODE

TTL mode can provide the correct exposure for the subject and will control the amount of flash.

◆ Please refer to <<CHART

>> which shows the combinations of camera and lens types, exposure

mode, and flash modes.

◆ TTL function does not work when using the following cameras: F3 series, FM10, New FM2, FE10,

Nikonos V.

1. Set the desired exposure mode on your camera. Please refer to

Camera’s Instruction manual.

2. Slide the Flash’s power switch to the ON position.

3. Select TTL/BL or TTL by pressing the MODE button.

◆ When using Digital SLR Cameras, please select TTL/BL. Depending

on the camera model, i-TTL or D-TTL system will be used. The ”

”

mark will be displayed on the LCD panel for both systems.

◆ For the following cameras; F5, F4 series, F100, F90X/F90/F80

(N90S/N90/N80) series, F70D/N70, F810S/N8008S, F801/ N8008S

and Pronea 600i, TTL/BL or TTL can be selected. However, cameras

other than those listed above, only TTL can be selected.

4. Focus on the subject.

5. Confirm that the subject is located within the effective distance range, indicated on the LCD panel.

◆ Depending on the combination of the camera, lens and selected exposure mode, the method for

shooting the subject with flash may be different. Please see chart “

” and set the “F”-number by

referring to the manual for your camera.

6. Confirm the Ready Light is on and press the shutter release button.

◆ When the camera does not receive the appropriate exposure for the subject, the TTL/BL or TTL

mark on the LCD panel will appear for 5 seconds after shooting, which shows that the flash power is

not sufficient for this situation. Please re-take at a closer distance or use a wider aperture. In the

case of F5, F100, F90X/F90/F80 (N90S/N90/N80) series and F70D/N70 cameras, the

underexposure indicator appears for 5 seconds. If you want to see the display for underexposure

again, please depress the LIGHT button.

◆ When the flash is fully charged, the ready light in the camera’s viewfinder will appear. If it does not

appear, the shutter of the camera may operate at a slow shutter speed without triggering the flash.

◆ If you use the AF camera with an AF lens, the AF Auxiliary Light will turn on automatically as you

focus on a subject in a dark area. However the AF Auxiliary Light will not light up if central focus

area is not selected.

<< CHART

Camera Lens Type

Exp.

Mode

Metering TTL System Note

Conf

Dist

F100

F90X/N90ser.

F80/N80ser.

F70D/N70

F75/N75

D, G Type All Modes All Modes

3-D Multi-Sensor

Can switch to TTL Mode. With

F5, F100, F80, series Cameras

spot metering system is always

TTL.

AF lens other

than D, G type

All Modes All Modes Multi-Sensor BL

Without Built in

CPU

A/M

Modes

Center-weighted,

Spot Metering

Center Weighted

/ Spot Fill-Flash

F4 Series

F-801S/N8008S

F-801/N8008

F65/N65

Pronea 600i

With Built-in CPU All Modes

Matrix Pattern TTL BL Can switch to TTL Mode.

TTL BL can work with only F4

series, AF F3, Ai-S, Ai, Series E

lens. Spot metering system of

F4 is always TTL.

Pronea 600i will be TTL, when

exposure mode is “M”. Center

Weighted BL cannot work.

Center-weighted,

Spot Metering

Center Weighted

/ Spot Fill-Flash

Without

Built-in CPU

A/M

Modes

Center-weighted,

Spot Metering

Center Weighted

/ Spot Fill-Flash

F601/N6006

F-601M

With Built-in CPU All Modes

Matrix Pattern TTL BL

Spot Metering cannot use with

F-601M

Center-weighted,

Spot Metering

Center Weighted

/ Spot Fill-Flash

Without

Built-in CPU

A/M

Modes

Center-weighted,

Spot Metering

Center Weighted

/ Spot Fill-Flash

F60D/N60

F50D/N50

F-401X/4004S

With Built-in CPU

P/S

A/M

TTL BL

If exposure mode is “M”, it will

be Center Weighted / Spot

Fill-Flash

Without

Built-in CPU

Center Weighted

/ Spot Fill-Flash

F501/N2020

F301/N2000

Built-in CPU lens,

Ai-S, Ai, Series E,

AF F3 Lens

TTL Programmed

A/M TTL

Except above

lenses

A/M TTL

F401S/N4004S

F401/N4004

With Built-in CPU

P/S

TTL Programmed

A/M TTL

Without Built-in CPU

M TTL

FA, FE2

FG, F3, FM3

With Built-in CPU;

Without Built-in CPU

A/M TTL

Confirm Distance:

: Flash’s LCD panel will show the F-number and working distance of flash automatically.

: Set the F-number on the flash to be the same as camera, and check the available working distance

range on the LCD panel. To set the F-number on the Flash, push the SEL button until the F-number blinks,

and use + or – button to set the F-number. Then press the SEL button again. The F-number will stop

blinking.

◆ When using Digital SLR cameras, functions will vary depending on the lens type and combinations

of exposure modes, same as F5 and F100 group (in chart A), however, they will use D-TTL (i-TTL).

LIMITS OF CONTINUOUS SHOOTING

To prevent overheating of the flash’s circuitry, do not use your Flash unit for at least 10minutes after

continiously using the flash as shown in the table below.

Mode Number of Flash Exposures

TTL, M(1/1,1/2) 20 Continuous Flash Shots

M(1/4, 1/8) 25 Continuous Flash Shots

M(1/16-1/32) 40 Continuous Flash Shots

Multi 10 Cycle

MANUAL FLASH OPERATION

Manual flash is provided for shooting subjects when the correct

exposure is difficult to obtain in the TTL mode. In the manual flash

mode, you can set the flash power level from 1/1 to 1/64 power in

1/3 stop increments.

1. Set the camera’s exposure mode (A, M modes).

2. Press the MODE button on the flash unit to select M.

3. Press the SEL button to make the guide number value blink.

4. Press

–

button to set the desired flash power output.

To stop the manual flash output display blinking, Press the SEL button again.

6. When the Ready Light of the flash is illuminated, the unit is ready for use.

How to set the correct flash power level

Page 18 <<CHART

>> combination of

Focus on the subject and note the subject distance on the lens’ focus ring. Adjust the lens’ aperture until

the distance indicated on the LCD panel of the flash is equal to the camera to subject distance.

When you use with cameras other than the above

Focus on the subject and note the subject distance on the lens’ focus ring. Adjust either the flash power

level or the flash’s F stop display. Please refer to the following on how to change the flash’s F-stop.

1. Press the SEL button several times and make the F-stop indicator blink.

2. Press the

button or

–

button to set the F-stop display.

3. Press the SEL button to make F-stop indicator stop blinking.

Set the distance indicated on the LCD panel of the flash so that it is about equal to the actual

camera-to-subject distance become about equal.

Then set the aperture value of the lens via lens’ aperture ring or cameras command dial.

◆ You can calculate the correct exposure by using this formula.

Guide Number “GN” / Flash to Subject Distance = F-stop

This flash unit will calculate and indicate the Subject Distance by following the above formula. (Please refer

to table1 on the last page).

DISTANCE PRIORITY MANUAL FLASH

With this flash operation system, EF-610 DG SUPER NA i-TTL automatically controls the light output

according to the selected distance and aperture value.

 Distance-priority manual flash is not possible with D1X and D1H digital cameras.

Page 18 <<CHART

>> combination of

1.Set the camera’s exposure mode to either A or M mode.

2.Press MODE on the flash unit so

(GN) is displayed.

3.Press the SEL button to make the distance display blink.

4.Press the

button or

–

button to set the distance.

5.Press the SEL button several times to stop blinking.

6.Set the aperture value on the lens or camera.

7.When the Ready Light of the flash is illuminated, the unit is ready for use.

When using with cameras other than the above

1.Please follow the first 2 steps as above and press the SEL button several times to make the aperture

display blink.

2.Press the

button or

–

button to set the F-stop display.

3.Press the SEL button to stop the display blinking.

4.Set the aperture value on the lens or camera, make sure that the flashgun is charged before firing.

◆ Distance-priority manual can be used together with exposure compensation.

1.Press the SEL button several times to make the compensation amount indicator blink.

2.Press the + or

button to set the compensation amount.

3.Press the SEL button several times to make the display stop blinking.

FV LOCK

“FV” lock mode allows you to choose and lock the exposure for part of the image before taking the picture.

◆ This function is available with CLS compatible camera models only.

◆ You cannot set this function on the flashgun directly. For details please refer to your camera’s

instruction manual.

AUTO FP HIGH-SPEED SYNC󲃕FP FLASH󲃖

When you take a picture with an ordinary flash, you cannot use a shutter speed faster than the

camera’s synchronized speed because the flash must fire when the shutter curtain is fully open. The

FP flash keeps firing while the shutter curtain is running. Thus you can use a shutter speed faster than

the synchronized speed.

◆ This function is available with CLS compatible cameras only.

◆ You cannot set this function on the flashgun directly. For details please refer to your camera’s

instruction manual.

◆ When you set this function on the camera,

will be displayed on Flash’s LCD display.

◆

Depending on the shutter speed, the Guide Number will change. (Please refer to table2 on the last page)

EXPOSURE COMPENSATION

You can compensate the exposure by changing the flash power level.

Exposure compensation of the EF-610 DG SUPER NA-iTTL Super flash’s power level

◆ Dedicated exclusively for Digital SLR Cameras and F6, F5, F4 series, F100, F90/N90, F90X/N90S,

F80/F80 series, F70D, F75/N75, U/F65/N65, F801S/N800S, F801/ N8008, F601M, F601/N6006 and

Pronea 600i only.

◆ Cameras with EV compensation capability allow you to make exposure compensation on either the

EF-610 DG SUPER NA-iTTL or the camera (or both). If you use both controls, exposure is modified

by the sum total of both exposure compensation values, and will affect the background exposure.

◆ If your camera is an F601 / N6006 series camera, set the exposure compensation by operating the

camera’s synchronization mode.

◆

It can be set at 1/3 stop increments from +1.0 stops to –3.0 stops.

1. Press the MODE button to select the TTL/BL (TTL) mode.

2. Press the SEL button to make the compensation amount

indicator blink.

3. Press the

and

button to set the compensation amount.

4. Press the SEL button several times to stop the display blinking.

Exposure compensation of the EF-610 DG SUPER NA-iTTL flash’s power level and background

◆ This function can be used on all Nikon cameras except F3 series, FM10, New FM2 and FE10.

Use your camera’s exposure compensation control button or dial to make exposure compensation to

both foreground and background. (Please refer to your camera’s instruction)

Exposure compensation on M mode

When using the camera on M mode, you can change the aperture value on the camera, or change the

flash power level, after setting the exposure compensation.

REAR-CURTAIN SYNCHRONIZATION

When you photograph a moving subject with slow synchronization, usually the furrow of the subject

will be exposed in front of the subject. The ordinary flash light will fire when the first shutter curtain is

fully opened, thus the subject will be exposed from the time flash is fired to the time the shutter is

closed (This is front curtain synchronization). When you use rear curtain synchronization, the flash will

fire just before the rear curtain begins to close, and the subject will be exposed by ambient light from

the time the shutter opens until the flash fires. As a result, the furrow of the subject will therefore be

recorded behind the subject, creating a more natural effect.

◆ It can be used with cameras providing rear-curtain sync. only.

◆ You cannot set this function on the flashgun directly. For details please refer to your camera’s

instruction manual.

◆ The LCD panel on the flash will indicate

mark, when the “Second-curtain synchronization”

function is set.

RED-EYE REDUCTION

When you take a picture with flash, sometimes the person’s eyes reflect the flash light and appear as

“red-eyes”, in the picture. If you use the function of “Red-eye reduction”, the flash will blink

approximately 1 second, before the shutter is released, and reduce the “red-eye”.

◆ Available with cameras providing red-eye reduction control only.

◆ You cannot set this function on the flashgun directly. For details please refer to your camera’s

instruction manual.

◆ The LCD panel on the flash will indicate

mark, when the “Red-eye reduction” function is set.

MODELING FLASH

If you use the Modeling flash, you can check the lighting and shadow effects, before you take the

picture.

1. Press the MODE button and select the mode you want to use.

2. Press the + button or – button several times to make the icon on the LCD panel appear.

3. Confirm that the flash is charged, then press the TEST button to fire.

MULTI FLASH MODE

When a slow shutter speed is used, the flash will fire repeatedly while the shutter is open. By doing so a

series of images of the subject will be exposed in one frame. A dark background with a bright subject

shows the result more effectively in this mode. It is possible to set the firing frequency between 1Hz and

100Hz. Up to 90 flashes can be fired continuously. The maximum number of flashes varies, depending

on the flash guide number and firing frequency settings. (Please refer to table3 on the last page).

Set the camera’s exposure mode to M and set the desired aperture.

2. Press the MODE button until the multi-flash mode appears.

Press the

SEL

button until the flash firing frequency starts to blink.

Press the

–

button to set the desired flash frequency value.

After pressing the

SEL

button again, the flash power level will blink.

6. Press the

–

button to set the desired power level.

7. Press the SEL button again, the number of flashes will blink.

8. Press the

–

button to set the desired number of flashes.

9. Press the SEL button until the display stops blinking.

10. When the ready light of the flash is illuminated, the unit is ready to use.

Note: Please set the shutter speed longer than; Number of Flashes you want ÷ Firing Frequency

How to set the correct flash power level

Page 18 <<CHART

>> combination of

Read out the subject distance from the focus ring on the lens. Then adjust the aperture ring on the lens

until the distance indicated on the LCD panel of the flash and the subject distance become about equal.

When using with cameras other than the above

Read-out the subject distance from the focus ring on the lens. Either change the flash power level or

the flash’s F-stop. Please refer following on how to change the flash’s F-stop.

1. Press the SEL button several times to make the F-stop indicator blink.

2. Press the + or – button and set the F-stop.

3. Press the SEL button and make the indicator of F-stop stop blinking.

Please set the distance indicated on the LCD panel of the flash and the actual subject distance so that they

are about equal.

Then set that F-stop on the lens aperture ring.

* You can calculate the correct exposure by using this formula:

Guide Number “GN” / Flash to Subject Distance = F-stop

This flash unit will calculate and indicate the Subject Distance by following the above formula.

(Please refer to table 1 on the last page)

BOUNCE FLASH

When you take a photo with flash in a room, sometimes a strong shadow will appear behind the

subject If you point the flash head upwards or sideways to reflect the light off the ceiling, wall etc, the

subject will be illuminated softly. Press the lock button and adjust the flash head to set the bounce

angle.

UP: 0°, 60°, 75°, 90° DOWN: 0°,7°

RIGHT: 0°, 60°, 75°, 90° LEFT: 0°, 60°, 75°,90°, 120°, 150°, 180°

When the bounce flash mode is activated, a bounce indicator

will appear on the LCD panel.

Choose a white surface for bouncing the flash, otherwise the

image’s colour may be incorrect. Depending on the reflecting

surface, the subject distance and other factors, the effective

distance range for the TTL AUTO may change. Please check for

correct exposure confirmation (TTL BL or TTL mark on the LCD

panel) after releasing the shutter.

CLOSE-UP EXPOSURES

Bounce flash can be tilted 7° downward for close-ups. The Flash will be effective only for the subjects

0.5 meter to 2 meters. When the flash head is tilted 7°

will blink.

CATCH LIGHT PANEL

This flash is equipped with a built-in catch

light panel, which can create a catch light in the

eyes of the subject when the bounce flash

mode is activated. Slide out the wide

panel and catch light panel, and then put

wide panel back in its place. (Be careful to

slide the panels out smoothly.)

◆ To create a catch light effectively, tilt the

flash head upward 90 degrees and take pictures at a close distance.

WIRELESS FLASH

When using the “Wireless Flash” mode, you can take pictures with a more three-dimensional feeling

with shadow, or you can produce natural images with shadow depending on the flash position without

any extension cord connecting the camera body to the flash. In case of the EF-610 DG SUPER

NA-iTTL, communication between the camera body and the flash will be achieved by the light of the

flash. In the “Wireless Flash” mode, the camera will calculate the correct exposure automatically.

◆ This function is available with CLS compatible cameras only.

◆ If the camera body incorporates Commander mode, it is possible to use its own built-in flash for wireless

photography.

◆ In these instructions, we call a flash unit, which is attached to the camera body the “Master unit ”, and we call

a flash unit at a remote position a “Slave unit”.

◆ When setting a slave unit at the desired position, you can use a mini-stand. This mini-stand has a screw hole

for a tripod.

◆ Place the slave flash unit at the desired location. Do not place the slave unit within the picture area.

◆ Set the flash unit within the range of 0.5m/1.5ft~5m/16ft from the subject and set the camera body within the

range of 1m/3ft~5m/16ft from the subject.

◆ Two or more sets of Slaves can be divided into groups and different flash conditions can be set for each group

(1~3). The Master Flash should be set at 0.

◆ Channel and group number settings can be input on the master unit and slave units. Other settings can be

input on the master flash unit only.

Setting the slave unit

1. Attach the flashgun to the camera body and switch “ON” the flash unit.

Press the MODE button to select the TTL /

icon.

◆ Setting cannot be done if camera’s exposure display turns off. In such a

case, press the camera’s shutter button half-way to re-activate the setting.

2. Press the SEL button to make the channel indicator blink and press the

+ or – button to set the channel number (from C1- C4).

3. Press the SEL button to make the group number blink and press the + or – button to set the group

number. Press the SEL button to confirm.

4. Detach the slave unit from the camera body and place it in the desired position.

◆ In the case of using the built-in flash of a camera body with Commander mode for wireless photography,

Group A cameras correspond to Group 1 flashguns and Group B corresponds to Group 2 flashguns. When

using the built-in flash unit of the D70 for wireless photography, set the channel number to C3 and group

number to 1. For the rest of the settings, refer to your camera’s instruction manual. Please also note that it

cannot be used with camera’s command mode AA and M1/128.

Setting the Master Unit

Setting the channel number on the master flash unit

1. Attach the flashgun to the camera body, and switch “ON” the flash unit.

Press the MODE button to select the

icon. Confirm the icon is

shown in the display.

2. Press the SEL button to make the channel indicator blink on the display.

3. Press the + or – button to set the desired channel number. (Choose the

same channel number as set on the slave flash unit.)

4. Press the SEL button several times until the display stops blinking.

Setting the flash mode on the master flash unit

5. Press the + or – button and select

(Master)

6. Press the SEL button and confirm

icon is blinking.

(If you do not want to fire master unit, press the + or – button and select

icon. Press the SEL button to confirm this setting).

7. Press the SEL button again.

8. Press the MODE button and select TTL, M or MULTI and then press the SEL button to confirm.

If TTL is selected, icon will blink and you can set the exposure compensation. If no compensation is

required press the SEL button to complete the setup. If compensation is required press the + or – button to

set the required amount, then press the SEL button to set compensation. If M mode is selected, press the +

or – button to set the flash output amount. If MULTI is selected, exposure will switch to Multi Flash Mode.

Setting the Flash Mode on the slave flash unit

The following has to be programmed into the master unit. This will set the

mode for the slave unit.

10. Press the + or – button and select a slave group number.

11. Press the SEL button so the flash symbol blinks and press the + or –

button to select

icon.

12. Continue from step 7 above.

◆

If you wish to fire two or more sets of slaves in different flash modes, use desired settings for each group number.

◆ If you set the Master or Slave to MULTI, all groups must be set to MULTI. Combinations with other flash

modes are not possible.

◆

If the Master or Slave is changed from MULTI to TTL or M, other groups will be changed to TTL or M. However, if

the

exposure

compensation

flash

output

level

returns

the

initial

value

will

necessary

set

them

again.

13. Check that all flashguns are fully charged.

◆ Confirm that the Master unit’s “Ready Light” is on and the Slave unit’s “AF Auxiliary Light” is blinking.

◆ Standard TTL will be displayed regardless of the selected flash mode.

Modeling flash when Wireless flash is used

If master unit is used for modeling flash

After wireless flash has been set, modeling flash can be used by pressing the TEST button.

If slave unit is used for modeling flash

1. When Wireless Flash setup is complete, press the + or – button on the master to select icon.

2. Press the SEL button several times to display (blinking) on the LCD display.

3. Press the + or – button to select and press the SEL button to confirm.

4. By pressing the TEST button only the selected flashgun will fire in modeling mode.

◆If you wish to select the master unit as the modeling flash, follow the above steps, but in step 3 select

and erase from display

SLAVE FLASH

NORMAL SLAVE FLASH

Even if the EF-610 DG SUPER is not attached to the camera body, you can fire the flash by using the

camera’s built-in flash or another flash unit.

1. Attach the flash unit to the camera’s hot shoe.

Set the camera’s exposure mode to the desired mode. If you use A or M mode, also set the desired aperture value.

3. Turn on the flash unit and press the shutter button half way.

◆ Now, the aperture value and film speed are automatically

transmitted to the flash unit.

4. Remove the flash unit from the camera.

5. Press the MODE button and select the

/ (Slave) mode.

6. Press the SEL button several times to make the flash output value

indicator blink.

7. Press the + or – button to set the flash output amount.

◆ Determine the appropriate flash output by setting the distance indicator on the LCD panel to coincide as

closely as possible with the actual distance from the slave flash to the subject. If the actual distance is

out of range, you will need to change the aperture value or film speed.

1. To change the aperture value: When the flash unit is set to the Slave mode, press the SEL button

until the aperture value blinks, then press the + or – button to set the desired aperture value. Then

press the SEL button to stop the display blinking.

2. To change the film speed: Press MODE to select ISO, then press SEL to make the aperture value

blink. Press the + or – button and set the desired film speed, then press the SEL button once again.

You will need to press the MODE button several times to return to the slave mode.

8. Press the SEL button several times to make the display stop blinking.

9. Place the slave unit in the desired location. Do not place the slave unit within the picture area.

10. After confirming that all flash units are fully charged, press the shutter button to take the picture.

◆ When the EF-610 DG SUPER NA-iTTL is fully charged, the AF Auxiliary Light will blink.

◆

The flash will not fire if the EF-610 DG SUPER is attached to the camera body whilst in Slave Mode setting.

◆ If you are using a Nikon brand flash unit with (3-D) Multi-Sensor BL function on your camera, and the

EF-610 DG SUPER NA-iTTL flash unit as a slave unit, please do not use (3-D) Multi-Sensor BL function,

as the monitor pre-flash may cause the slave to fire prematurely.

DESIGNATED SLAVE FLASH

If using two or more EF-610 DG Super flash units, you can designate which flash will fire together by using the

channel settings. In this mode, one flash unit will be used as the Slave Controller and the others for firing as Slaves.

Setting the Slave Flash unit(s) for firing

1. Attach the slave unit to the camera body.

2. Set the camera’s exposure mode to S or M.

3. Set the shutter speed to 1/30 or slower. (The slave controller unit

(Master Flash) will transmit the designated signal before the others

fire. Thus if you use a shutter speed faster than 1/30, the firing flash

units will not be synchronized.)

4. Switch “ON” the flash unit and press the camera’s shutter button halfway. (The aperture value and film

speed are now automatically transmitted to the slave flash unit.)

5. Remove the slave flash unit from the camera.

6. Press the MODE button and select the

/ . (Slave Mode)

7. Press the SEL button to make the channel display indicator blink.

8. Press the + or – button to set the channel number. (C1 or C2)

9. Press the SEL button to make the output amount display indicator of the flash blink.

10. Press the + or – button to set the flash output amount.

◆ Set the flash power by setting the distance indicator on the LCD panel to coincide as closely as possible

with the actual distance from the slave flash to the subject. If the actual distance is out of range, you

need to change the aperture value.

11. Press the SEL button several times to make the display stop blinking.

12. Place the slave unit in the desired location. Do not place the slave unit within the picture area.

Setting for Slave Controller unit

13. Attach the Slave Controller flash unit to the camera body.

14. Press the MODE button and select the

/ (Slave Mode).

15. Press the SEL button to make the channel display indicator blink.

16. Press the + or – button to set the same channel number as that set

on the firing flash unit.

17. Press the SEL button to make the flash output amount display

indicator blink.

18. Press the + button so the

mark is displayed and blinking.

19. Press the SEL button twice to make the display stop blinking.

20. After confirming that all flash units are fully charged, press the shutter button to take the picture.

◆ When the firing flash unit of EF-610 DG Super is fully charged, the AF Auxiliary Light will blink.

◆ As the slave control using is in

mode, the aperture on the slave control unit can not be changed.

◆ The Slave Controller unit functions only to control the slave unit.

SPECIFICATIONS

TYPE : Clip-on type serial-controlled TTL auto zoom electric flash

GUIDE NUMBER : 61 (ISO 100/m, 105mm head position)

POWER SOURCE : Four AA type alkaline batteries or, Four AA type Ni-Cd batteries or,

Four AA type Ni-MH Nickel-Metal Hydride

RECYCLING TIME : about 7.0 sec. (Alkaline batteries)

: about 5.0 sec. (Ni-Cd, Ni-MH Nickel-Metal Hydride)

NUMBER OF FLASHES : about 120 flashes (Alkaline batteries)

: about 160 flashes (Ni-Cd, Ni-MH Nickel-Metal Hydride)

FLASH DURATION : about 1 / 700 sec. (full power firing)

FLASH ILLUMINATE ANGLE : 24mm-105mm motor powered control (17mm with Built-in Wide Panel)

AUTO POWER OFF : Available

WEIGHT : 330 g / 11.6oz. DIMENSIONS : 77mm(W) / 3.0in. x 139mm(H) / 5.5in. x 117mm(L) / 4.6in.

Disposal of Electric and Electronic Equipment in Private Households

Disposal of used Electrical & Electronic Equipment (Applicable in the European Union and other European countries

with separate collection systems)

This symbol on the product, in the manual/warranty, and/or on the packaging indicates that this product must not be

treated as household waste. Instead it should be handed over to the appropriate collection point for the recycling of

electrical and electronic equipment. If your equipment contains easy removable batteries, please dispose of these

separately according to your local legislation. It is your responsibility to ensure that this product is recycled correctly. In doing so

you will help conserve natural resources, protect the environment and human health. For more detailed information about recycling

this

product

please

contact

your

local

city

office

your

household

waste

disposal

service

the

shop

where

you

purchased

the

product.

[Table1] GN (ISO100・m󰃦

17mm 24mm 28mm 35mm 50mm 70mm 85mm 105mm

1/1 23.0 34.0 35.0 36.0 46.0 52.0 56.0 61.0

1/2 16.3 24.0 24.7 25.5 32.5 36.8 39.6 43.1

1/4 11.5 17.0 17.5 18.0 23.0 26.0 28.0 30.5

1/8 8.1 12.0 12.4 12.7 16.3 18.4 19.8 21.6

1/16 5.8 8.5 8.8 9.0 11.5 13.0 14.0 15.3

1/32 4.1 6.0 6.2 6.4 8.1 9.2 9.9 10.8

1/64 2.9 4.3 4.4 4.5 5.8 6.5 7.0 7.6

1/128 2.1 3.0 3.1 3.2 4.1 4.7 5.0 5.5

[Table

GN 󰃥ISO100・m󰃦

17mm 24mm 28mm 35mm 50mm 70mm 85mm 105mm

1/125 16.3 24.0 24.7 25.5 32.5 36.8 39.6 43.1

1/160 14.4 21.3 21.9 22.5 28.8 32.5 35.0 38.1

1/180 13.6 20.0 20.6 21.2 27.1 30.6 33.0 35.9

1/250 11.5 17.0 17.5 18.0 23.0 26.0 28.0 30.5

1/320 10.2 15.0 15.5 15.9 20.3 23.0 24.7 27.0

1/350 9.1 13.4 13.8 14.2 18.2 20.6 22.1 24.1

1/400 9.7 14.4 14.8 15.2 19.4 22.0 23.7 25.8

1/500 8.1 12.0 12.4 12.7 16.3 18.4 19.8 21.6

1/640 7.2 10.6 10.9 11.3 14.4 16.3 17.5 19.1

1/750 6.6 9.8 10.1 10.4 13.3 15.0 16.2 17.6

1/800 6.4 9.5 9.8 10.1 12.9 14.5 15.7 17.1

1/1000 5.8 8.5 8.8 9.0 11.5 13.0 14.0 15.3

1/1250 5.1 7.6 7.8 8.0 10.3 11.6 12.5 13.6

1/1500 4.7 6.9 7.1 7.3 9.4 10.6 11.4 12.5

1/1600 4.5 6.7 6.9 7.1 9.1 10.3 11.1 12.1

1/2000 4.1 6.0 6.2 6.4 8.1 9.2 9.9 10.8

1/2500 3.6 5.4 5.5 5.7 7.3 8.2 8.9 9.6

1/3000 3.3 4.9 5.1 5.2 6.6 7.5 8.1 8.8

1/3200 3.2 4.8 4.9 5.0 6.4 7.3 7.8 8.5

1/4000 2.9 4.3 4.4 4.5 5.8 6.5 7.0 7.6

1/5000 2.6 3.8 3.9 4.0 5.1 5.8 6.3 6.8

1/6000 2.3 3.5 3.6 3.7 4.7 5.3 5.7 6.2

1/6400 2.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 4.5 5.1 5.5 6.0

1/8000 2.0 3.0 3.1 3.2 4.1 4.6 4.9 5.4

1/64

1～3 Hz 1～90

4～5 Hz 1～80

6～7 Hz 1～70

8～9 Hz 1～50

10 Hz

1～45

11～14 Hz 1～35

15～19 Hz 1～30

20～50 Hz 1～25

～

100 Hz 1～20

1/32

1～3 Hz 1～60

4～5 Hz 1～50

6 Hz

1～30

7～9 Hz 1～20

10～19 Hz 1～15

～

100 Hz 1～12

1/16

1 Hz

1～30

2 Hz

1～20

3 Hz

1～10

4～100 Hz 1～6

1/8

1 Hz

1～14

2 Hz

1～7

3 Hz

1～6

4～7 Hz 1～5

8～9 Hz 1～4

～

100 Hz 1～3

1/4

1 Hz

1～4

2 Hz

1～3

3～100 Hz 1～2

[Table

MULTI FLASH MODE

F18S10091

E L E C T R O N I C F L A S H

EF-610

DG SUPER

SA-STTL

INSTRUCTIONS

ENGLISH

The CE Mark is a Directive conformity mark of the European Community (EC).

13 14 15 16

ENGLISH

Thank you very much for purchasing the Sigma EF-610 DG SUPER SA-STTL Electronic Flash. This

product is specifically developed for the Sigma SA, SD series autofocus SLR cameras. Depending on

the camera model, functions and operation may vary. Please read this instruction booklet carefully for

your camera body. To add to your enjoyment of photography, the flash has a variety of features. To

make the most of all these features and to get the maximum performance and enjoyment from your

flash, please read this instruction booklet together with your camera’s instruction manual before using

the flash, and also keep it handy for your future reference.

PRECAUTIONS

In order to avoid causing any damage or injury, please read this instruction manual very carefully,

paying attention to the cautionary signs below, before using the flash.

Please take special note of the two cautionary signs below.

Warning !!

Caution !!

Symbol denotes the important points, where warning and caution are required.

Symbol contains information regarding the actions that must be avoided.

Using the product disregarding this warning sign might cause serious injury o

other dangerous results.

Using the product disregarding this caution sign might cause injury or damage.

Caution !!

Do not use this flash unit on any camera other than the Sigma SA, SD series cameras, otherwise

the flash may damage the circuitry of these cameras.

This flash unit is not waterproof. When using the flash and camera in the rain or snow or nea

water, keep it from getting wet. It is often impractical to repair internal electrical components

damaged by water.

Never subject the flash and camera to shock, dust, high temperature or humidity. These factors

might cause fire or malfunctioning of your equipment.

When the flash is subjected to sudden temperature change, as when the flash unit is brought

from a cold exterior to warm interior, condensation might form inside. In such a case, place you

equipment in a sealed plastic bag before such a change, and do not use the flash unit until i

reaches room temperature.

Do not store your flash in a drawer or cupboard etc. containing naphthalene, camphor or othe

insecticides. These chemicals will have a negative effects on the flash unit.

Do not use a thinner, Benzene or other cleaning agents to remove dirt or finger prints from the

component. Clean with a soft, moistened cloth.

For extended storage, choose a cool dry place, preferably with good ventilation. It is

recommended that the flash be charged and fired several times a month, to maintain prope

capacitor functioning.

Warning !!

This flash contains high voltage circuits. To avoid electric shock or burns, do not attempt to

disassemble the flash. If the outside shell of the unit is broken or cracked, do not touch the

mechanism inside.

Do not fire the flash close to eyes. Otherwise the bright light could damage the eyes. Keep a

least 1m/3feet distance between face and the flash unit when taking a picture with flash.

Do not touch the synchro terminal of your camera when the flash is attached to the hot shoe.

High voltage circuitry could cause an electric shock.

Never use your camera in an environment where flammable, burnable, gas, liquids or chemicals,

etc, exist. Otherwise it might cause fire or explosion.

DESCRIPTION OF THE PARTS

EXTERNAL

PARTS

1.Flash Head 2.AF Auxiliary Light 3.Bounce Angle; Up and Down

4.Bounce Angle; Right and Left 5.Bounce Lock and Release Button; Up and Down

6.Swivel Lock and Release Button; Right and Left 7.LCD Panel 8.Battery Cover

9.Shoe Ring 10.Shoe 11.Catch Light Panel 12.Wide Panel

CONTROLS

13.MODE Button 14.SEL SELECT Button 15.

+ Increment Button

16.

Decrement Button 17.ZOOM Button 18.TEST Button

19.LIGHT Button 20.Ready Light 21.Power Switch

ABOUT THE BATTERY

This flash unit uses four “AA” type Alkaline dry cell batteries, Ni-Cad or Ni-MH rechargeable batteries.

Manganese batteries can also be used but as they have a shorter life than Alkaline batteries, we do

not recommend using them. Please replace batteries if it takes more than 30seconds to light the

Ready Lamp.

■ To assure proper electrical contact, clean the battery terminals before installing the batteries.

■ NiCad batteries do not have standardized contacts. If you use NiCad batteries, please confirm that

the battery contacts touch the battery compartment properly.

■ To prevent battery explosion, leakage or overheating, use four new AA batteries of the same type

and brand. Do not mix the type or new and used batteries.

■ Do not disassemble or short-circuit the batteries, or expose them fire or water; they may explode. Do

not recharge the batteries other than Ni-Cd or Ni-MH rechargeable batteries.

■ When the flash will not be used for an extended period of time, remove the batteries from the flash to

avoid the possibility of damage from leakage.

■ Battery performance decreases at low temperatures. Keep batteries insulated when using the flash

in cold weather.

■ As with any flash, it is recommended you carry spare batteries when on a long trip or when

photographing outdoors in cold weather.

BATTERY LOADING

1. Be sure to set the Power Switch to the off position

then slide the battery cover in the direction of the

arrow to open.

2. Insert four AA size batteries into the battery chamber.

Be sure the + and – ends of the batteries are aligned

according to the diagram in the chamber.

3. Close the cover.

4. Slide the Power Switch to the ON position. After few

seconds the Ready Lamp will light, indicating that the

flash unit can be fired.

5. Please press the “Test Button” to be sure that the flash is working properly.

AUTO POWER OFF

To conserve battery power, the flash unit automatically turns itself off when the flash is not used within

approximately 5 minutes. To turn the flash on again, depress the TEST button or the camera shutter

button halfway. Please note that the “Auto Power Off” mechanism does not work with wireless TTL

flash mode, normal slave flash, and designated slave flash modes.

ERROR INDICATION

If the battery power is not sufficient or there is an electric information error between the camera and

flash unit, the “Er” mark will blink on the LCD panel. When this occurs, turn the power switch off and

on. If it still blinks after this procedure, check the battery power.

ADJUSTING THE FLASH HEAD

Depress the Bounce “Up and Down” Lock and Release Button,

and adjust the flash head to the desired position.

■ If

appears on the LCD panel when you turn on the flash, and

if this mark blinks, then the flash head is adjusted to an incorrect

position.

ATTACHING AND REMOVING THE FLASH TO AND FROM THE CAMERA

Be sure to turn off the Power Switch, Then insert the

Shoe Base into the hot shoe on the camera and turn

the Shoe Locking Ring until it is tight.

■ When you attach or remove the flash, grasp the

bottom of the flash to prevent damage to the shoe

foot and the camera’s hot shoe.

■ If the camera’s built-in flash is set in up position,

please close it before you attach the flash unit.

■ To remove the flash, rotate the shoe-locking ring in

the opposite direction of ◄LOCK mark, until it stops.

SETTING OF FLASH COVERAGE ANGLE

When you press the ZOOM button,

the

symbol appears. Each time you press the ZOOM button,

the LCD panel display will change and indicate the zoom position in sequence as follows.

24mm → 28mm → 35mm → 50mm → 70mm → 85mm → 105mm → (Auto)

Generally, in the TTL mode, the flash will automatically set the zoom position according to the focal

length of your lens.

■ When you turn on the main switch, the flash will memorize and set the zoom head position to the last

setting used.

■ If you use a lens wider than the flash head setting, there may be under exposed areas around the

edge of the picture.

■ Depending on the flash head setting, the flash’s Guide Number will be changed.

In the case of use with Sigma SD9 SD10 SD14 SD15

Due to the size of the camera’s image sensor, when the coverage angle of the flash is set to auto

zoom, coverage angle can effectively reach that of 17mm wide focal length, without using the wide

panel, (However, the coverage angle display of the flash will not show wider than 24mm). When the

wide panel is used, 10mm focal length can be covered. (However, the coverage angle display on the

flash will show 17mm.)

When "Manual Flash photography" or "FP Flash photography" is performed, the flash’s coverage

angle can be set automatically by the flash’s autozoom function. However, when used with the camera,

the effective range of the flash’s light can be extended by increasing the zoom setting of the flash to be

equal to the effective focal length of the lens being used by using the ZOOM button. Please refer to

the following table as a guide in setting the flash to the appropriate zoom setting. Please use this

table in conjunction with Table 1 (“Guide Number Table for Manual Flash”) on the last page of this

instruction manual, and Table 2 (“Guide Number Table for FP Flash”).

Lens’ Focal Length

10-13

14-15

16-19

20-29

30-39

40-49

50-59

Flash Coverage Angle

(given on the tables 1,2)

17mm

withwide panel

105

WIDE PANEL

This flashgun is equipped with a built-in wide panel,

which can provide an ultra wide 17mm angle of

coverage. Slide out the wide panel and catch light

panel and flip it down to cover the flash’s head. (Be

careful to slide the panels out smoothly.) Then put the

catch light panel back in its place. The coverage

angle setting of the flash will be set to 17mm

automatically.

◆ If the built-in wide panel comes off accidentally, the ZOOM button will not function. In this case

please contact the store where the flash was purchased or a Sigma service station.

LCD PANEL ILLUMINATION

When you press the LIGHT button, the LCD panel will illuminate for about 8 seconds. The illumination

stays on longer than 8 seconds if you press the LIGHT button once again.

TTL AUTO FLASH

In the TTL AUTO Mode, the camera will control the amount of flash lighting to provide the appropriate

exposure for the subject.

1. Set the camera’s exposure mode to

Mode. (In the case of SA-300,

SA-300N and SA-5 set to “

” fully automatic mode)

2. Turn on the power switch of the flash, the TTL mark will appear on the

LCD panel and flash will start charging. (If TTL mark does not appear,

depress the MODE button several times to select the TTL mode).

3. Focus on your subject.

4. Check that the subject is located within the effective distance range,

indicated on the LCD panel.

5. Press the shutter button, after the flash is fully charged.

When the flash is fully charged, the ready light in the viewfinder, and

appears on the flash unit.

■ The TTL exposure is controlled by the S-TTL system of the digital camera. If the flash is set to TTL,

the character "d" (digital) will be displayed on the LCD panel.

■ When the camera receives the appropriate exposure, the TTL mark on the LCD panel will appear for

5 seconds. If this indication does not appear, the flash illumination is not enough for that situation.

Please re-take the picture, at a closer distance.

■ The AF Auxiliary Light will turn on automatically as you focus on a subject in a dark area. The

effective range of the AF Auxiliary Light is up to about 0.7meter to 9 meters (2.3-29.5 feet).

■ If the SA-300, SA-300N and SA-5 cameras, are set to “

” fully automatic mode, Flash will

automatically switch to TTL mode only. For other camera exposure modes, the flash will be set to the

last chosen mode each time.

■ When the flash is fully charged, the flash mark will appear in the finder. If the shutter is released

before the flash is fully charged, the flash will not fire, and the camera will take the picture at a slow

shutter speed.

USING FLASH IN OTHER CAMERA MODES

Shutter Speed Priority Setting

By selecting the

mode of the camera, you can set the shutter speed from 30sec. to 1/X sync speed.

When you set the desired shutter speed, the camera will select the appropriate aperture value for the

background. If the subject is too light or too dark, the aperture value indicator will blink and show the

limit values (maximum or minimum aperture). In such as case, the camera proceeds to a take a flash

photograph at the limit value. Thus, the main subject in the picture should may be exposed correctly,

but the background may become under or over exposed.

Aperture Priority Setting

By selecting the

mode of your camera, the camera will select the appropriate shutter speed for the

scene

. If the subject is too bright or too dark, the shutter speed indicator will blink and show the limit

(highest or slowest shutter speed) value.

The highest shutter speed will be limited to the camera’s

normal flash synchronization speed. In such a case, the camera proceeds to take a flash photograph

at the limit value. Thus, the main subject in a picture should be exposed correctly, but the background

may become under or overexposed.

When used with

Mode

You can set the desired shutter speed and aperture value. You can set the shutter speed from top

sync speed to bulb. If you adjust the exposure according to the exposure meter indication, the camera

will work as for Daylight synchronization flash or slow, synchronization.

■ In the case of use with SD9, SD10, depending on the ISO setting, shutter speed will change to slow

shutter speed side. For more detailed information, please refer to Exposure Mode selection.

LIMITS OF CONTINUOUS SHOOTING

To prevent overheating of the flashgun’s circuitry, do not use your flash unit for at least 10 minutes

after continuously firing the flash for the number of exposures shown in the table below.

Mode Number of Flash Exposures

TTL, M(1/1,1/2) 20 Continuous Flash Shots

M(1/4, 1/8) 25 Continuous Flash Shots

M(1/16-1/32) 40 Continuous Flash Shots

Multi 10 Cycle

MANUAL FLASH OPERATION

Manual flash is provided for shooting subjects when the correct exposure is difficult to obtain in the

TTL mode. In the manual flash mode, you can set the flash power level from 1/1 (full) to 1/128 power

in one step increments.

1. Set the camera’s exposure mode to M.

2. Press the MODE button on the flash unit to select M.

3. The flash power output value blinks when you press the SEL

button.

4. Press

–

button to set the desired flash power output.

5. The manual flash output display will stop blinking and remain

displayed after you press the SEL button again.

6. Adjust the focusing by pressing the shutter button, note the subject distance on the focus ring on the

lens. Then adjust the lens’ aperture value or flash power level until the distance indicated on the

LCD panel of the flashgun is equal to the subject distance.

7. When the Ready Light of the flash is illuminated, the unit is ready for use.

■ You can calculate the correct exposure by using the following formula:

Guide Number “GN” / Flash to Subject Distance = F-stop

This flash unit will automatically calculate and indicate the appropriate subject distance according to

the above formula.(Please refer to table1 on the last page)

FP FLASH (Except SA-300)

When you take a picture with an ordinary flash, you cannot use a shutter speed faster than the

camera’s synchronized speed because the flash must fire when the shutter curtain is fully open. The

FP flash keeps firing, while the shutter curtain is running. Thus you can use a shutter speed faster than

the synchronized speed.

1. Set the camera’s exposure mode to

mode.

2. Press the MODE button on the flash unit, to select the M.

3. Press the

–

button and make the indicate

indicator appear on the LCD panel.

4. Set the shutter speed.

5. Read-out the subject distance from the focus ring on the lens.

Then, adjust the aperture value until the distance indicated on the LCD panel of the flash matches

the subject distance on the lens as closely as possible.

6. When the Ready Light of the flash is illuminated, the unit is ready for use.

■ Depending on the shutter speed, the Guide Number will be changed.(Please refer to table2 on the

last page)

■ When you use the FP flash, do not use the Wide Panel.

■ You cannot set the Second Curtain Synchronization while the flash unit is set on FP Flash

■ If you want to cancel the FP Flash mode, please follow the FP flash procedure to make the

indicator display from the LCD panel.

SECOND CURTAIN SYNCHRONIZATION

When you photograph a moving subject with slow synchronization, usually the furrow of the subject

will be exposed in front of the subject. The ordinary flash light will fire when the first shutter curtain is

fully opened, thus the subject will be exposed from the time flash is fired to the time the shutter is

closed (This is called First Curtain Synchronization). When you use second curtain synchronization,

the flash will fire just before the second curtain begins to close and and the subject will be exposed by

ambient light from the time the shutter opens until the flash fires. The furrow of the subject will

therefore be exposed behind the subject. This is a more natural effect.

1. Set the desired picture-taking mode of the camera.

2. Select the Mode of the flash. (TTL, M modes. SD9, SD10 SD14

and SD15 can be used in M mode only)

3. Press

–

button mark will be displayed on the LCD

panel.

4. Adjust the focus and take the picture after confirming the ready

light is lit.

■ First curtain synchronization will be set if

mark is not displayed.

■ In the Full Auto Mode “

” of SA-300, SA-300N, SA-5 cameras, this function cannot be used.

■ To cancel second curtain synchronization, turn off the

mark on the LCD panel.

RED-EYE REDUCTION

When you take a picture with flash, sometimes the person’s eyes reflect the flashlight and will exhibit

“red-eye” in the picture. If you use the function of “Red-eye reduction”, the flash will blink

approximately 1 second before the shutter is released, and reduce the “red-eye”.

1. Press the MODE Select the mode of the flash(TTL, M modes)

2. Press

–

, button and make mark displayed on the

LCD panel.

3. Adjust the focus, and take the picture after confirming the ready

light is lit.

■ To cancel the “Red-eye reduction” turn of the mark.

■ In the Full Auto Mode “

” of SA-300, SA-300N, SA-5 cameras,

this function cannot be used.

MODELING FLASH

If useing the Modeling flash, you can check the lighting and shadow effects before taking the picture.

1. Press the MODE button and select the mode.

2. Press the

button or

–

button several times to make the icon on the LCD panel

appear.

3. Confirm that the flash is charged, then press the TEST button to fire.

EXPOSURE COMPENSATION

You can use flash exposure compensation in combination with normal exposure compensation to

control the background exposure level. Flash exposure compensation can be set to ±3 stops in 1/3

stop increments (or in 1/2 stop increments with some cameras).

1. Press the MODE button and select the TTL mode.

2. Press the SEL button to make the indicator of mark blink.

3. Press the

button or

–

button to set the compensation

amount.

4. Press the SEL button to make compensation amount indicator

stop blinking.

5. Focus on the subject.

6. Check that the subject is within the flash range displayed on the EF 610 DG SUPER SA-STTL’s LCD

panel.

7. You can take the picture after confirming that the Ready Light of the flash is illuminated.

■ When you set the exposure compensation on the camera, both the flash power level and

background can be compensated.

■ You can use both exposure compensation by flash, and exposure compensation by camera at the

same time.

MULTI FLASH MODE

While the shutter is open, the flash will fire repeatedly. By doing so a series of images of the subject

will be exposed in one frame. A bright subject with a dark background shows more effectively in this

mode. It is possible to set the firing frequency between 1Hz and 199Hz. Up to 100 flashes can be fired

continuously. The maximum number of flashes varies, depending on the flash’s power output and firing

frequency settings. (Please refer to table 3 on the last page).

1. Set the camera’s exposure mode to M mode and set the F

number.

2. Press the MODE button until the Multi-flash mode appears.

3. Press the SEL button until the flash firing frequency starts to

blink.

4. Press the

–

button to set the desired flash frequency

value.

5. After pressing the SEL button again, the flash power level will blink.

6. Press the

–

button to set the desired power level.

7. Press the SEL button again, the number of flashes will blink.

8. Press the

–

button to set the desired number of flashes.

9. Press the SEL button again, the display will stop blinking.

10. When the ready light of the flash is illuminated, the unit is ready to use.

Note: Please set the shutter speed longer than; Number of Flashes you want ÷ Firing Frequency

BOUNCE FLASH

When you take a photo with flash in a room, sometimes a strong shadow will appear behind the

subject, if you point the flash head upwards or sideways to reflect the light off the ceiling, wall etc. the

subject will be illuminated softly. Press the lock button and adjust the flash head to set the bounce

angle.

UP: 0°, 60°, 75°, 90°

DOWN: 0°,7°

RIGHT: 0°, 60°, 75°, 90° LEFT: 0°, 60°, 75°,90°, 120°, 150°, 180°

When the bounce flash mode is activated, a bounce indicator

will appear on the LCD panel.

Choose a white surface for bouncing the flash, otherwise the

image’s colour may be incorrect.

Depending on the reflecting surface, the subject distance and other

factors, the effective distance range for the TTL AUTO may change.

Please check for correct exposure confirmation (TTL mark on the

LCD panel) after releasing the shutter.

CLOSE-UP EXPOSURES

Bounce flash can be tilted 7° downward for close-ups. The Flash will be effective only for the subjects

0.5 meter to 2 meters. When the flash head is tilted 7°,

will blink.

CATCH LIGHT PANEL

This flash is equipped with a built-in catch

light panel, which can create a catch light in

the eyes of the subject when the bounce

flash mode is activated. Slide out the wide

panel and catch light panel, and then put

wide panel back in its place. (Be careful to

slide the panels out smoothly.)

◆ To create a catch light effectively, tilt the flash head upward 90 degrees and take pictures at a close

distance.

WIRELESS FLASH

(Except SD9)

When using the “Wireless Flash” mode, you can take pictures with a more three-dimensional feeling,

or make natural images by using shadowing depending on the flash position. This can be done without

any extension cord connecting the camera body and flash. In case of the EF-610 DG SUPER,

communication between the camera body and the flash will be achieved by the light produced by the

flash. In the “Wireless Flash” mode, the camera will calculate the correct exposure automatically.

CONTROL SYSTEM CHANGE

Control System of “Wireless Flash” is different for each camera. First it is necessary to attach the flashgun to the

camera for activating the control system. If this operation is neglected, wireless function may not work when

flashgun is separated from the camera.

1. Attach the flashgun to the camera and turn on the power switch of the flashgun and camera.

2. Press the shutter button of camera halfway. (The camera and flashgun communicate and control

system will be switched automatically.)

3. Turn off the power switch of the flashgun and camera.

WHEN BUILT-IN FLASH IS USED (SA-7, SA-9 SD14 AND SD15)

1. Press the MODE button to select the mark.

2. Press the SEL button to make the channel indicator blink.

3. Press the + button or – button to set the channel.

4. Press the SEL button to stop the indicator blinking.

5. Place the EF-610 DG SUPER SA-STTL at the desired position.

■ Do not place the flash unit within the picture area.

■ Please be set the flash unit between 0.5m～5m (1.6 ~16ft) from the subject, and set the camera

body between 1m～5m (1.6~16ft) from the subject.

■ Be sure to set the camera’s flash mode to “Wireless Flash Mode”, and set the channel number on

the EF-610 DG SUPER SA-STTL Flash unit to the same channel number as that you set on the

camera. Otherwise, the EF-610 DG SUPER SA-STTL and your camera will not communicate with

each other and the EF-610 DG SUPER SA-STTL will not fire, when you take picture.

6. Pop-up the camera’s built-in flash, and then after both flashes are fully charged, press the shutter

button to take the picture.

■ AF Auxiliary Light on the EF-610 DG SUPER SA-STTL will blink, when the flash unit charged and is

ready to fire.

■ The EF-610 DG SUPER SA-STTL will fire when the built-in flash fires. The camera’s built-in flash is

fired only to control the EF-610 DG SUPER SA-STTL only. The flash lighting of the subject is done

by the EF-610 DG SUPER SA-STTL. The camera will control the flash power level, as a TTL mode

flash, to Obtain correct exposure.

CAMERAS NOT EQUIPPED WITH BUILT-IN FLASH USED (SD10)

For Wireless flash two pieces of EF-610 DG SUPER SA-STTL will be necessary. In this instruction, we

call a flash unit, which is attached to the camera body “Master unit”, and we call a flash unit at a

remote position “Slave unit”.

Master unit Setting

1. Attach the flash unit to the camera.

2. Press the MODE button to select

⁄ mark.

3. Press SEL button, to make the channel indicator blink on the

display.

4. Press + or – button to set the desired channel number.

5. Press the SEL button several times until the display stops

blinking.

Slave unit Setting

6. Press the MODE button to select .

7. Press SEL button, to make the channel indicator blink, on the display.

8. Press + or – button to choose the same channel number

as set on the Master unit.

9. Press the SEL button several times until the indicator stops

blinking.

10. Place the Slave unit at the desired position.

11. Check that both flashes are fully charged.

■ Ready light lamp will light, and the AF Auxiliary lamp will blink to

indicate that the flash is ready for shooting.

12. Adjust the focus on the subject, and take the picture.

■ Master unit fires just for controlling the Slave unit, and does not influence photography.

■ When you set a slave unit at the desired position, you can use mini-stand. This mini-stand has a

screw hole for a tripod.

SLAVE FLASH

NORMAL SLAVE FLASH

Even if the EF-610 DG SUPER SA-STTL is not attached to the camera body, you can fire the flash by

using the camera’s built-in flash or another flash unit.

1. Attach the flash unit to the camera’s hot shoe.

2. Set the camera’s exposure mode to the desired mode. If you use

mode, also set the

desired aperture value.

3. Turn on the flash unit. Then press the shutter button half way.

■ Now, the aperture value and film speed are automatically

transmitted to the flash unit.

4. Remove the flash unit from the camera.

5. Press the MODE button and select the

/ (Slave)

mode.

6. Press the SEL button several times to make the flash output

value indicator blink.

7. Press the

–

button to set the flash output amount.

■ Determine the appropriate flash output by setting the distance indicator on the LCD panel to coincide

as closely as possible, with the actual distance from the slave flash to the subject. If the actual

distance is out of range, you will need to change the aperture value or film speed.

■ You can set the film speed or aperture value on the flash unit manually, if desired.

a. For the film speed … Press the MODE to select the ISO, then press the SEL button to make

the indicator blink. Press the + button or – button and set the desired film speed, then

press the SEL button once again.

b. For the aperture value … When the flash unit is set to the Slave mode, press the SEL button to

make the indicator for the aperture value blink, and press the + button or – button to set

the desired aperture value. Then press the SEL button.

8. Press the SEL button several times to make the display stop blinking.

9. Place the slave unit in the desired location. Do not place the slave unit within the picture area.

10. After confirming that all flash units are fully charged, press the shutter button to take the picture.

■ When using the EF610 DG SUPER SA-STTL flash as the "Slave Controller" (on SD9, SD10, SD14

or SD15 camera) in Normal Slave mode, please set the flash to "Manual" mode, and adjust the light

output to 1/16 power. If you set it to TTL mode instead, the Pre-Flash system will function, causing

the "Slave" (off-camera) flash unit to fire prematurely.

■ When the EF-610 DG SUPER SA-STTL is fully charged, the AF Auxiliary Light will blink.

■ The flash will not fire if the EF-610 DG SUPER SA-STTL is attached to the camera body while it is in

the Slave Mode setting.

DESIGNATED SLAVE FLASH

If using two or more EF-610 DG SUPER SA-STTL flash units, you can designate which flash will fire

together by using the channel settings. In this mode, one flash unit will be used as the Slave Controller

and the others for firing as Slaves.

Setting the Slave Flash unit(s) for firing

1. Attach the slave unit to the camera body.

2. Set the camera’s exposure mode to

■ Set the shutter speed to 1/30 or slower. (The slave controller unit (Master Flash) will transmit the

designated signal before the others fire. Thus if you use a shutter speed faster than 1/30, the firing

flash units will not be synchronized.)

3. Switch “ON” the flash unit and press the camera’s shutter button

halfway. (The aperture value and film speed are now

automatically transmitted to the slave flash unit.)

4. Remove the slave flash unit from the camera.

5. Press the MODE button and select the

/ . (Slave

Mode)

6. Press the SEL button to make the channel display indicator

blink.

7. Press the + or – button to set the channel number. (C1 or C2)

8. Press the SEL button to make the output amount ( ) display indicator of the flash blink.

9. Press the + or – button to set the flash output amount.

■ Set the flash power by setting the distance indicator on the LCD panel to coincide as closely as

possible with the actual distance from the slave flash to the subject. If the actual distance is out of

range, you need to change the aperture value.

10. Press the SEL button several times to make the display stop blinking.

11. Place the slave unit in the desired location. Do not place the slave unit within the picture area.

Setting for Slave Controller unit

12. Attach the Slave Controller flash unit to the camera body.

13. Press the MODE button and select the

/ (Slave

Mode).

14. Press the SEL button to make the channel display indicator

blink.

15. Press the

–

button to set the same channel number as

that set on the firing flash unit.

16. Press the SEL button to make the flash output amount (

) display indicator blink.

17. Press the SEL button to make the display stop blinking. ( mark disappear and, channel display

will appear)

18. After confirming that all flash units are fully charged, press the shutter button to take the picture.

■ When the firing flash unit of EF-610 DG SUPER SA-STTL is fully charged, the AF Auxiliary Light will

blink.

■ As the slave control using is in

mode, the aperture on the slave control unit can not be

changed.

■ The Slave Controller unit functions only to control the slave unit.

SPECIFICATIONS

TYPE : Clip-on type serial-controlled TTL auto zoom electric flash

GUIDE NUMBER : 61 (ISO 100/m, 105mm head position)

POWER SOURCE : Four AA type alkaline batteries or Four AA type Ni-Cd batteries or,

: Four AA type Ni-MH Nickel-Metal Hydride batteries

RECYCLING TIME : about 7.0 sec. (Alkaline batteries)

: about 5.0 sec. (Ni-Cd, Ni-MH Nickel-Metal Hydride)

NUMBER OF FLASHES : about 120 flashes (Alkaline batteries)

: about 160 flashes (Ni-Cd, Ni-MH Nickel-Metal Hydride)

FLASH DURATION : about 1 / 700 sec. (full power firing)

FLASH ILLUMINATE ANGLE : 24～105mm motor powered control (17mm with Built-in Wide Panel)

AUTO POWER OFF : Available

WEIGHT : 330g / 11.6oz.

DIMENSIONS : 77mm (W) / 3.0in. x 139mm (H) / 5.5in. x 117mm (L) / 4.6in.

[Table1] GN 󰃥ISO100・m󰃦

17mm 24mm 28mm 35mm 50mm 70mm 85mm 105mm

1/1 23.0 34.0 35.0 36.0 46.0 52.0 56.0 61.0

1/2 16.3 24.0 24.7 25.5 32.5 36.8 39.6 43.1

1/4 11.5 17.0 17.5 18.0 23.0 26.0 28.0 30.5

1/8 8.1 12.0 12.4 12.7 16.3 18.4 19.8 21.6

1/16 5.8 8.5 8.8 9.0 11.5 13.0 14.0 15.3

1/32 4.1 6.0 6.2 6.4 8.1 9.2 9.9 10.8

1/64 2.9 4.3 4.4 4.5 5.8 6.5 7.0 7.6

1/128 2.1 3.0 3.1 3.2 4.1 4.7 5.0 5.5

[Table

2] GN (ISO100・m󰃦

17mm 24mm 28mm 35mm 50mm 70mm 85mm 105mm

1/125 16.3 24.0 24.7 25.5 32.5 36.8 39.6 43.1

1/160 14.4 21.3 21.9 22.5 28.8 32.5 35.0 38.1

1/180 13.6 20.0 20.6 21.2 27.1 30.6 33.0 35.9

1/250 11.5 17.0 17.5 18.0 23.0 26.0 28.0 30.5

1/320 10.2 15.0 15.5 15.9 20.3 23.0 24.7 27.0

1/350 9.1 13.4 13.8 14.2 18.2 20.6 22.1 24.1

1/400 9.7 14.4 14.8 15.2 19.4 22.0 23.7 25.8

1/500 8.1 12.0 12.4 12.7 16.3 18.4 19.8 21.6

1/640 7.2 10.6 10.9 11.3 14.4 16.3 17.5 19.1

1/750 6.6 9.8 10.1 10.4 13.3 15.0 16.2 17.6

1/800 6.4 9.5 9.8 10.1 12.9 14.5 15.7 17.1

1/1000 5.8 8.5 8.8 9.0 11.5 13.0 14.0 15.3

1/1250 5.1 7.6 7.8 8.0 10.3 11.6 12.5 13.6

1/1500 4.7 6.9 7.1 7.3 9.4 10.6 11.4 12.5

1/1600 4.5 6.7 6.9 7.1 9.1 10.3 11.1 12.1

1/2000 4.1 6.0 6.2 6.4 8.1 9.2 9.9 10.8

1/2500 3.6 5.4 5.5 5.7 7.3 8.2 8.9 9.6

1/3000 3.3 4.9 5.1 5.2 6.6 7.5 8.1 8.8

1/3200 3.2 4.8 4.9 5.0 6.4 7.3 7.8 8.5

1/4000 2.9 4.3 4.4 4.5 5.8 6.5 7.0 7.6

1/5000 2.6 3.8 3.9 4.0 5.1 5.8 6.3 6.8

1/6000 2.3 3.5 3.6 3.7 4.7 5.3 5.7 6.2

1/6400 2.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 4.5 5.1 5.5 6.0

1/8000 2.0 3.0 3.1 3.2 4.1 4.6 4.9 5.4

1/128

1～5Hz 1～100

6～7 Hz 1～90

8～9 Hz 1～80

10～11 Hz 1～70

12～14 Hz 1～60

15～19 Hz 1～50

20～199 Hz 1～40

1/64

1～3 Hz 1～90

4～5 Hz 1～80

6～7 Hz 1～70

8～9 Hz 1～50

10 Hz

1～45

11～14 Hz 1～35

15～19 Hz 1～30

20～50 Hz 1～25

60～199 Hz 1～20

1/32

1～3 Hz 1～60

4～5 Hz 1～50

6 Hz

1～30

7～9 Hz 1～20

10～19 Hz 1～15

20～199 Hz 1～12

1/16

1 Hz

1～30

2 Hz

1～20

3 Hz

1～10

4～199 Hz 1～6

1/8

1 Hz

1～14

2 Hz

1～7

3 Hz

1～6

4～7 Hz 1～5

8～9 Hz 1～4

10～199 Hz 1～3

1/4

1 Hz

1～4

2 Hz

1～3

3～119 Hz 1～2

[Table

3] MULTI FLASH MODE

Disposal of Electric and Electronic Equipment in Private Households

ENGLISHsposal of used Electrical & Electronic Equipment (Applicable in the European Union and other European

countries with separate collection systems)

This symbol on the product, in the manual/warranty, and/or on the packaging indicates that this product must not be

treated as household waste. Instead it should be handed over to the appropriate collection point for the recycling of electrical and

electronic equipment. If your equipment contains easy removable batteries, please dispose of these separately according to your

local legislation. It is your responsibility to ensure that this product is recycled correctly. In doing so you will help conserve natural

resources, protect the environment and human health. For more detailed information about recycling

this

product

please

contact

your

local

city

office

your

household

waste

disposal

service

the

shop

where

you

purchased

the

product.

F18A10091

E L E C T R O N I C F L A S H

EF-610

DG SUPER

使用明書

INSTRUCTIONS

BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG

MODE D’EMPLOI

INSTRUCCIONES

ISTRUZIONI PER L’USO

BRUGSANVISNING

GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING

用戶手冊

사용󱿅 설명서

POOCO O 

日本語

ENGLISH

DEUTSCH

FRANÇ

ESPAÑOL

ITALIANO

DANS

NEDERLANDS

中

文

한 󰖢 어

CC

2~13

14~24

25~36

37~47

48~58

59~69

70~80

81~91

92~102

103~113

114~125

1713 14 15 16

ENGLISH

The CE Mark is a Directive conformity mark of the European Community (EC).

DEUTSCH

Die CE-Kennzeichnung ist eine Konformitätserklärung des Herstellers, die dokumentiert, daß das betreffende

Produkt die Anforderungen von EG-Richtlinien einhält.

FRANÇAIS

Le label CE garantit la conformité aux normes établies par la Communauté Européenne.

NEDERLANDS

Het CE teken is een aanduiding voor de Europese Gemeenschap (EC).

ESPAÑOL

El logotipo CE es una directiva de conformidad con la Comunidad Europea (CE).

ITALIANO

Questo è il marchio di conformità alle direttive della comunità Europea (CE).

SVENSKA

CE-märket betyder att varan blivit godkänd av EU:s gemensamma kvalitetsnorm.

DANSK

CE-mærket er i overensstemmelse med de gældende regler i EU.

PORTUGUÊS

A marca CE garante a conformidade com as normas estabelecidas pela Comunidade Europeia.

SIGMA (Deutschland) GmbH

Carl-Zeiss-Str. 10/2, D-63322 Rödermark, F.R.GERMANY

Verkauf: 01805-90 90 85-0 Service: 01805-90 90 85-85 Fax: 01805-90 90 85-35

日本語

びマレトロニッフラッュ EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI 買いㄥい

あういフラッュソニヸ AF ㄟ眼レフメラ使用メラ

使用機能や操作方法異使用メラ当箇所選

い明書精ㄥフラッュ機能操作扱いㄥ注意理解

写真撮影楽い使用メラ明書フラッュ使用方法関

󰆯目あわ覧い後使い方い見所

必保管い

安全上の注意

人的損害や物的損害然防使用前󰆯目内容十理解い

う願い

警告

注意

記号注意警告促内容告い

記号行禁内容告い

表示無視誤扱い人死亡重傷負う能性想定

内容示い

表示無視誤扱い人󰄧害負う能性想定内容

び物的損害発生想定内容示い

警告

フラッュ内部高電回路組込い感電や火傷あ

解改等絶対いい万ㄟ落ㄦ等破損場合内部部品

手触う十注意ㄦい

フラッュ人目近撮影いい目近フラッュ発光視力

󰄧害起険性あ特乳幼児撮影 1m 以ㄥ離い

メラホットュヸフラッュ接使用メランロタヸミナル

手触いい高電感電あ

燃性大気中あ場所使用いい火災原因



注意

フラッュソニヸ AF ㄟ眼レフメラ以外メラ使用いい誤動作や

メラ電子回路悪影響及ぼ能性あ

フラッュ防水構い雨天や水辺使用濡いう

注意ㄦい水内部入込故󰄧原因

ホコリ多い場所や高温多湿場所放置いい故󰄧や火災原因



急激温度変化



フラッュ内部結露生あ



寒い屋外い室内

入ヸやビニヸル袋入周温度使用い

防虫剤フラッュ悪影響ㄨえタンや押入保管いい

ンナヸベンン等機溶剤拭いい変色変形等原因

フラッュ使用放置性能劣化１ヶ１度目安発光テト数回

行い

各部の名称󰎣1 ペー󰎤

外観部

1.発光部 2.AF補助光発光部 3.ㄥㄦバウン角度表示 4.右バウン角度表示

5.ㄥㄦバウンロッ解除ボタン 6.右バウンロッ解除ボタン 7.液晶パネル

8.電池室バヸ 9.リリヸボタン 10.付ュヸ 11.ャッチラトパネル

12.ワドパネル

操作部

13.MODE ボタン 14.SEL ボタン 15.

＋

ボタン 16.

－

ボタン 17.ZOOM ボタン

18.TEST ボタン 19.LIGHTボタン 20.レデラト 21.電源ッチ

電池につい

フラッュ電源単 3 形ルリ乾電池ニッル水素電池ニッド

電池 4 使用レデラト灯 30 秒以ㄥ電池 4 新い

交換い

◆ 電池や電池室バヸ接常いい

◆ 単 3 形ニッル水素電池単 3 形ニッド電池電池側接形状規格統ㄟい

使用確認買い求い

◆ 交換 4 同メヸヸ同種類使用い誤使い方

液漏発熱破裂等あ

◆ 電池解火中ヷ水中投ㄦョヸト等いい電池破裂液漏

や火災原因

◆ 充電い電池充電いㄦい電池破裂液漏や火災原因



◆ 撮影済電池出保管い電池入長期間放置

液漏生フラッュ内部損傷あ

◆ 長期間旅行寒冷地撮影大量撮影予備電池用意い

◆ 寒冷地電池性能極端ㆯㄦ電池保温使用い

電池の入方

 電源ッチ OFF い確認電池室バヸ矢方向ラド

ㄥ持ㄥ開

 単ㄤ形電池 4 電池室バヸ内面表示従い

電池＋－向間えいう入

 電池室バヸ戻閉

 電源ッチ ON 充電開始発

光能状態充電レデラト

灯

 TEST ボタン押発光確認

ートパワーフ機構につい

フラッュヸトパワヸフ機構いい電源ッチ ON 状態約 4

間フラッュ操作い電池消耗防自動的電源 OFF TEST

ボタン押メラ体ャッタヸボタン半押再度電源 ON 

ワヤレフメラフラッュモヸド通常レヸブモヸド指定レヸブモヸド

ヸトパワヸフ機構働

エラー表示につい

電池消耗電気信号異常生場合液晶パネル説Er読表示出あ

ラヸ表示出場合電源ッチㄟ OFF 再度 ON 

い表示消えい場合電池検い

発光部のセット

ㄥㄦバウンロッ解除ボタン押発光部面方向

ット

◆ 電源ッチ ON 液晶パネル

マヸ灯

滅表示場合発光部面方向ッ

トい注意い

メラへの取付け方

電源ッチ OFF い確認

メラホットュヸチッロッ

差込󰎣󰎤

◆ メラ着脱フラッュㄦ部持行い

付ュヸやメラホットュヸ無理力

加わいう注意い

◆ フラッュ内蔵メラ必内蔵フラッ

ュ納状態付い

外フラッュリリヸボタン押外い󰎣󰎤

照射角のセット

ZOOM

ボタン押

表示出ボタン押照射角次う換わ

24mm → 28mm → 35mm → 50mm → 70mm → 85mm → 105mm →󰎣自動󰎤

通常 TTL モヸドット使用レン焦距離合照射角自動的ット



◆ 電源 ON 自動的前回使用照射角ット表示確認

い

◆ レン焦距離望遠側󰎣数値大い方󰎤ット場合面四隅



◆ 照射角変わドナンバヸ変化

ワイドパネルについ

フラッュ通常状態 24mm 角バ

ヸ17mm 広角レン使用

ワドパネル+ャッチラトパネル

引出 (強引張い

い) ャッチラトパネル元ㆮ置納

い照射角自動的 17mm 角対応

ット

◆ 事故ワドパネル外ZOOM ボタン機能購入店

弊社営業所修理申い

液晶パネルの照明

LIGHT ボタン押約 8 秒間液晶パネル照明照明中再度 LIGHT ボタン押

時更 8 秒間照明

TTL 撮影

TTL モヸド被写体適露出うフラッュ発光量メラ制御

◆ メラやレン組合わTTL 調光方式異ㄦ表参照ㄦい

󰎣組合わ液晶パネル TTL 表示󰎤

デ

タルㄟ眼レフメラ

α-7,70,Sweet位,Sweet位L

α-9 以外メラ

D レン ADI 調光 DI 調光通常 TTL 調光

D 以外レン DI 調光 DI 調光通常 TTL 調光

 メラ P モヸドット

 フラッュ電源ッチ ON TTL 表示液

晶パネル出充電始

◆ デタルㄟ眼レフメラ使用󰄦

灯い

確認い消灯い場合＋或い

－ボタン押 表示い消灯状態

撮影露出合わい場合あ

 被写体ピント合わ

 被写体撮影能範あ液晶パネル距離表示確認

 充電完了確認ャッタヸボタン押撮影

◆ フラッュ撮影常行わフラッュ液晶パネル TTL 表示 5 秒間滅

滅い光量ㄧ足い被写体近撮影直い

◆ い場所ヸトフヸ作動助AF 補助光照射󰎣効範ヷ

約 0.7m～9m󰎤

◆ メラ M モヸドットい前回使用モヸドット注意

い

◆ 充電完了フンダヸ内フラッュマヸ灯充電完了いい

ャッタヸフラッュ無状態適露出うロヸャッタヸ

注意い

◆ 調光連動距離表示能範超え液晶パネル距離表示バヸ滅

各撮影モードのフラッュ撮影

A モードのき

絞任意ット最適ャッタヸ度自動的選フラッュ強制発光



S モードのき

ャッタヸ度任意ット最適絞選

M モードのき

ャッタヸ度絞自選󰎣フルムㄟ眼レフメラ使用ハピヸド

ンロ OFF い場合同調度いャッタヸ度選󰎤

◆ フラッュ強制発光

◆ メラ露出計表示合わ適露出ット簡単デヸラトンロやロヸ

ンロ行え求適性露出意的露出変化い便利

連続撮影時の注意

連発光加熱劣化防以ㄦ表示回数以ㄦ 10 以ㄥ休

い

モヸド最大連発光回数

TTL, M(1/1, 1/2)

20 回

M(1/4, 1/8)

25 回

M(1/16～1/32) 40 回

MULTI

10 サル

マニュアル発光撮影

被写体条件TTL 露出意面異うあ様

自意映方法マニュル発光あマニュ

ル発光量ボタン押び換わ1/1～1/64 範設定

 メラ撮影モヸド M ット

 MODE ボタン M 選択

 SEL ボタン押発光量表示滅

 ＋或い－ボタン押発光量設定

 SEL ボタン押表示灯

 ピント合わレン距離目盛示撮影距離フラッュ液晶パネルㄥ表示い

適撮影距離ㄟ致うフラッュ発光量絞値変え

 充電完了確認撮影

◆ マニュル発光適露出次計算式割出

フラッュ発光量󰎣ドナンバヸ󰎤／撮影距離󰎣m󰎤＝絞値󰎣F󰎤

󰎣フラッュㄥ記計算適露出撮影距離算出表示ドナン

バヸ巻［表 1］参照い󰎤

ハイピードンロ撮影󰎣HSS 発光󰎤

通常フラッュ撮影ャッタヸ幕全開フラッュ光

同調度高ャッタヸ使用ハピヸドンロフラッュ連

発光ャッタヸ走行開始終了発光維持同調度高

ャッタヸ使用能

◆ デタルㄟ眼レフメラ使用場合TTL 撮影時常

表示い

 フラッュモヸド MODE ボタン選択󰎣TTL

M モヸド使用󰎤

 ＋或い－ボタン押液晶パネル

表示

 被写体ピント合わ

 充電完了確認撮影

◆ ハピヸドンロ撮影フラッュドナンバヸャッタヸ度変化

光到距離短注意いドナンバヸ巻［表 2］参照

い

◆ 解除

表示消

モデリン発光

モデリン発光機能使用フラッュ撮影被写体影出や多灯発光ラ

テンバラン確認

 MODE ボタンモヸド選択

 ＋或い－ボタン数回押液晶パネル 表示

 充電完了確認TEST ボタン押発光

マルチ発光撮影

ャッタヸ開いい間フラッュ連発光被写体動１コマ面連解

写真う写込背景被写体明い方効果的マルチ

発光発光周波数ボタン押び換わ1～100Hz 範設定連

発光能回数 90 回い発光量発光周波数変わ最大連

発光回数巻［表 3］参照い

 メラ撮影モヸド

ット任意絞値設定

 MODE ボタン MULTI 選択

 SEL ボタン押発光周波数表示滅

 ＋或い－ボタン押発光周波数設定

 SEL ボタン押発光量表示滅

 ＋或い－ボタン押発光量設定

 SEL ボタン押発光回数表示滅

 ＋或い－ボタン押発光回数設定

 SEL ボタン押表示灯

 ピント合わ充電完了確認撮影

󰎣発光回数󰎤与󰎣発光周波数󰎤 以ㄥャッタヸ度設定い

バウン撮影

室内フラッュ撮影壁背景強い影出

あフラッュ発光部ㄥ向発光天井

射影少い柔写真撮影

バウンロッボタン解除回転

ㄥ：0°60°75°90° ㄦ：0° 7°

右：0°60°75°90°

：0°60°75°90°120°150°180°

換え出来バウン撮影時液晶パネル



表示

バウン射面色写真全体あわ白い面選い

バウン射面状況や撮影距離撮影条件調光範変化

撮影後液晶パネル表示撮影う確認い

近接撮影

発光部ㄦ 7°傾近接撮影い面ㄦ部十光わ

機能被写体距離約 0.5～2m 以内効

ㄦ方 7°バウンい時

表示滅

キャッチライトパネル

バウン撮影時人物目ャッチラ

ト入ャッチラ

トパネル内蔵いワドパネル

+ャッチラトパネル引

出 (強引張いい)

ワドパネル元ㆮ置納

い

◆ バウン角度ㄥ方 90°被写体近い距離撮影効果的

ワイヤレ撮影

フラッュメラ外置ㆮ置夫陰影立体感あ写真や自然

陰影写真う撮影いメラフラッ

ュコヸド接い多いEF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI 

メラフラッュ信号伝フラッュ光利用行うコヸド撮影

ワヤレ発光撮影露出メラ自動的適露出う制御



◆ メラ付フラッュコントロヸラヸメラ離置フラッ

ュフメラフラッュ表記

◆ フラッュメラ離使用付属ミニタンド付便利

ミニタンドㄤ脚用穴いい

◆ 面内フラッュ入いう注意い

◆ 被写体フラッュ約 0.5m～5mメラ約 1m～5m 範内ットい

◆ 他人ワヤレ撮影い信号光使いフラッュ発光う

あう場合他人うチャンネル設定ワ

ヤレフラッュ撮影操作方法覧い

.メラの内蔵フラッュを信号にす場合

 メラワヤレフラッュモヸドット

◆ 設定方法メラ異メラ使用明書覧い

 メラ露出モヸドット󰎣P,A,S,M いット󰎤

 フラッュ

ボタン数回押フフラッュモヸド表示換え

 ボタン押フメラフラッュ番号 1 設定



ボタン押発光モヸド TTL 設定



ボタン押チャンネル表示滅



或い ボタン押チャンネル番号󰎣C1～C4󰎤

設定



ボタン押表示灯

 フラッュメラ付メラャッタヸボタン

半押󰎣メラ側チャンネル番号記憶󰎤

 フラッュメラ外決いㆮ置ット

 メラ内蔵フラッュポップップフラッュ充電完了確認

◆ ワヤレフラッュモヸドAF 補助光滅充電完了知

 被写体ピント合わ撮影

◆ メラ内蔵フラッュ発光同時発光メラ内蔵フラッュEF-610

DG SUPER SO-ADI 制御発光主撮影 EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI 

発光行わ露出制御 TTL モヸド同様被写体適露出う EF-610 DG

SUPER SO-ADI 発光量メラ制御

◆ ャッタヸ度応通常撮影ワヤレハピヸドンロ撮影自動的換

わ

◆ 発光モヸド M 設定場合ワヤレマニュル発光チャンネル設定後

発光量表示滅

或い ボタン押発光量ット ボタ

ン押表示灯い

B.メラに取付けたフラッュを信号にす場合

ワヤレ撮影行う 2 以ㄥ EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI 必要フメラフラッ

ュ側 EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI 使用機能や使用メラ制

限あフメラフラッュ使用機種コントロヸラヸコントロ

ヸルモヸド変更必要あㄦ表参照い󰎣コントロヸラヸ必 EF-610

DG SUPER SO-ADI 使用い󰎤

フメラフラッュ

使用機種

EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI

EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI

EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI

コントロヸルモヸド

使用メラ

α700, α900 α900

光量比制御設定

コントロヸラヸフメラフラッ

ュ 1フメラフラッュ 2 

最大 3 ルヸプ制御

ルヸプ発光禁

５段階光量比設定能

コントロヸラヸフメラフラッ

ュ 2 ルヸプ制御

コントロヸラヸ：フメラフラッ

ュ割合 1:2  2:1 選

択能

発光モヸド

TTL 撮影, ハピヸドンロ撮

影󰎣TTL, M󰎤, マニュル発光

TTL 撮影, ハピヸドンロ撮

影󰎣TTL󰎤

B-1.フメラフラッュのみを発光せ場合

メラコントローラーの設定

 メラワヤレフラッュモヸドット

◆ 設定方法メラ異メラ使用明書覧い

 メラ露出モヸドット󰎣P,A,S,M いット󰎤

 メラフラッュ付

 自動ワヤレコントロヸラヸ設定表示換わ

󰎣自動的換わい場合

ボタン数回押

コントロヸラヸ設定表示換えい󰎤



ボタン押コントロヸルモヸド表示滅

 或い ボタン押コントロヸルモヸド 

設定



ボタン押チャンネル表示滅

 或い ボタン押チャンネル番号󰎣C1～C4󰎤設定



ボタン押光量比制御モヸド表示 [r OFF/On] 滅



或い ボタン押 [ ] 設定



ボタン押表示灯

フメラフラッュの設定

 ボタン数回押フメラフラッュ設定表示

換え



ボタン押フメラフラッュ番号

設定

 ボタン押発光モヸド TTL 設定



ボタン押チャンネル表示滅

 或い ボタン押コントロヸラヸ同チャンネル番号設定



ボタン押表示灯

 フメラフラッュ決いㆮ置ット

 両方フラッュ充電完了確認

◆ コントロヸラヸ側レデラト灯フメラフラッュ側 AF 補助光滅

充電完了知

 被写体ピント合わ撮影

B-2.光量比制御撮影をす場合󰎣コントロールモード

󰎤

メラコントローラーの設定

 B-1 手󰆰同様設定行い



或い ボタン押光量比制御モヸド表示

[

] 設定



ボタン押発光モヸド表示滅



或い ボタン押発光モヸド TTL 設定

 ボタン押コントロヸラヸ光量比設定表示 [ ] 滅

 或い ボタン押コントロヸラヸ光量比設定



ボタン押フメラフラッュ 1 光量比設定表示 [ ] 滅

 或い ボタン押フメラフラッュ 1 光量比設定

 ボタン押フメラフラッュ 2 光量比設定表示 [ ] 滅



或い ボタン押フメラフラッュ 2 光量比設定

 ボタン押表示灯

フメラフラッュの設定

 B-1 フメラフラッュ設定 同様設定行い

◆ フメラフラッュ複数あ場合割当いフメラフラッュ番号

設定い

◆ 光量比設定コントロヸラヸフメラフラッュ 1フメラフラッュ 2 

以ㄦう設定

(発光禁)124816

発光量割合設定値 / 合計数値 

[例]

設定値発光量割合

コントロヸラヸ

2 2/7

フメラフラッュ 1

1 1/7

フメラフラッュ 2

4 4/7

B-3.光量比制御撮影をす場合󰎣コントロールモード

󰎤

メラコントローラーの設定

 B-1 手󰆰同様設定行い



或い ボタン押コントロヸルモヸド 

設定



ボタン押チャンネル表示滅



或い ボタン押チャンネル番号設定



或い ボタン押光量比制御モヸド表示 [ ] 設定



ボタンボタン押光量比表示滅



或い ボタンボタン押コントロヸラヸ : フメラフラッュ光量比設

定󰎣

 選択󰎤



ボタン押表示灯

フメラフラッュの設定

 フメラフラッュ EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI 場合 B-1 フメラフラッュ

設定 同様設定行い

◆ フメラフラッュ EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI 場合EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI

使用明書当󰆯目従設定い

◆ フメラフラッュ EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI 場合チャンネル設定󰎣C1～C3󰎤



レーブ発光

通常レーブ発光

フラッュメラ体離メラ内蔵フラッュや他フラッュ使用同調

発光

◆ 通常レヸブ発光メラ側 ADI 調光 DI 調光行わ組合わい

プリ発光誤動作起使用

 フラッュメラ付

 メラ撮影モヸドット

 フラッュ電源 ON メラャッタヸボタン

半押

◆ ISO 感度絞値フラッュ記憶

 フラッュメラ外

 MODE ボタン

／ 選択

 SEL ボタン数回押発光量表示滅

 ＋或い－ボタン押発光量設定

◆ あ決いフラッュ設置場所被写体距離フラッュ距離表示

ㄟ致う発光量設定ㄟ致い場合絞設定変更

い

◆ フラッュ単体 ISO 感度や絞値変更

◆ ISO 感度 MODE ボタン

選択SEL ボタン押表示滅＋或

い－ボタン押数値設定再度 SEL ボタン押表示灯

◆ 絞値レヸブ設定状態SEL ボタン押絞値滅

＋或い－ボタン押数値設定再度 SEL ボタン押表示灯

 SEL ボタン数回押表示灯

 フラッュ決いㆮ置ット面内フラッュ入いう注意

い

 メラ内蔵フラッュメラ付あフラッュ設置あフラッ

ュ充電完了確認撮影

◆ EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI 充電完了 AF 補助光滅知

◆ レヸブ発光設定状態メラ付連動レヸブ発光解

除付い

指定スレーブ発光

複数 EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI 使用



設定チャンネルㄟ致フラッュ

同調発光1 制御用メラ付他発光用使

用

発光用フラッュの設定

 フラッュメラ付

 メラ撮影モヸド設定󰎣SM モヸド使用󰎤

◆ 指定レヸブモヸド発光前信号送信ャッタヸ度 1／30 以ㄦ

ットい

 フラッュ電源

メラャッタヸボタン半押

◆ ISO 感度絞値フラッュ記憶

 フラッュメラ外

 MODE ボタン

／ 選択

 SEL ボタン押チャンネル表示滅

 ＋或い－ボタン押チャンネル番号設定

󰎣C1 C2 いット󰎤

 SEL ボタン押発光量表示滅

 ＋或い－ボタン押発光量設定

◆ あ決いフラッュ設置場所被写体距離フラッュ距離表示

ㄟ致う発光量設定ㄟ致い場合絞設定変更

い

 SEL ボタン数回押表示灯

 フラッュ決いㆮ置ット面内フラッュ入いう注意

い

制御用フラッュの設定

 フラッュメラ付前 MODE ボタン ／ 選択

 SEL ボタン押チャンネル表示滅

 ＋或い－ボタン押発光用フラッュ同チャンネル

番号設定

 SEL ボタン押発光量表示滅

 ＋ボタン押 表示

 SEL ボタン押表示灯

 フラッュメラ付

 全フラッュ充電完了確認撮影

◆ 発光用 EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI 充電完了 AF 補助光滅知

◆ 発光量設定

選択指定レヸブ発光制御用設定SEL ボタン押

絞値設定

◆ 制御用フラッュ光信号送信用主撮影発光用フラッュ行わ

主要諸元

形式：リップン式直列制御 TTL ヸトヸムフラッュ

ドナンバヸ：61󰎣ISO 100／m105mm ㆮ置󰎤

使用電源：単ㄤ形ルリ乾電池 4 又単ㄤ形ニッド電池 4 

単ㄤ形ニッル水素電池 4 

充電時間：約 7 秒󰎣ルリ乾電池使用󰎤約 5 秒󰎣ニッド電池又ニッル水素電池使用󰎤

発光回数：約 120 回󰎣ルリ乾電池使用󰎤

約 160 回󰎣ニッド電池又ニッル水素電池使用󰎤

閃光時間：約 1／700 秒󰎣フル発光時󰎤

照射角度：24～105mm 使用レン合わ自動ット

󰎣ワドパネル使用 17mm レン角バヸ󰎤

ヸトパワヸフ／ヸトパワヸン：内蔵

質量：330g 寸法󰎣幅不高不長󰎤：77不139不117mm

品質保証アフターサービについ

保証細フタヸサヸビ関別紙保証規定参照い

電話で󰗊お問い合わせ󰗋・・・ マ タマヸサヸビ部フリヸコヸル:

0120-9977-88

󰎣携帯電ヷPHS 利用方 044-989-7436 連絡い󰎤

付時間

～金

9:00-18:00󰎣土び年年始弊社休業休い󰎤

株式会社マ 社

〒215-8530 奈川県川崎市麻生区栗木 2 ㄠ目 4 番 16 号 

(

044

)

989-7430

(代) FAX:

(

044

)

989-7451

大阪営業所〒541-0059 大阪市中央区博労 1-7-2 堺筋トラトビル 8F 06(6271)1548

 場〒969-3395 福島県耶麻郡磐梯大大谷知坂 6594 0242(73)2771(代)

ンタヸネットホヸムペヸドレ http://www.sigma-photo.co.jp

ENGLISH

Thank you very much for purchasing the Sigma EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI Electronic Flash. This

product is specifically developed for the SONY AF SLR cameras. Depending on the camera model,

functions and operation may vary. Please read this instruction booklet carefully for your camera

body. To add to your enjoyment of photography, the flash has a variety of features. To make the

most of all these features, and to get the maximum performance and enjoyment from your flash,

please read this instruction booklet, together with your camera’s instruction manual, before using

the flash, and also keep it handy for your future reference.

PRECAUTIONS

In order to avoid causing any damage or injury, please read this instruction manual very carefully,

paying attention to the cautionary signs below, before using the flash.

Please take special note of the two cautionary signs below.

Warning !!

Caution !!

Symbol denotes the important points, where warning and caution are required.

Symbol contains information regarding the actions that must be avoided.

Using the product disregarding this warning sign might cause serious injury o

other dangerous results.

Using the product disregarding this caution sign might cause injury or damage.

Warning !!

This flash contains high voltage circuits. To avoid electric shock or burns, do not attempt to

disassemble the flash. If the outside shell of the unit is broken or cracked, do not touch the

mechanism inside.

Do not fire the flash close to eyes. Otherwise the bright light could damage the eyes. Keep at

least 1m/3feet distance between face and the flash unit when taking a picture with flash.

Do not touch the synchro terminal of your camera when the flash is attached to the hot shoe.

High voltage circuitry could cause an electric shock.

Never use your camera in an environment where flammable, burnable, gas, liquids or chemicals,

etc, exist. Otherwise it might cause fire or explosion.

Caution !!

Do not use this flash unit on any camera other than the SONY AF SLR cameras; otherwise the

flash may damage the circuitry of these cameras.

This flash unit is not waterproof. When using the flash and camera in the rain or snow or nea

water, keep it from getting wet. It is often impractical to repair internal electrical components

damaged by water.

Never subject the flash and camera to shock, dust, high temperature or humidity. These factors

might cause fire or malfunctioning of your equipment.

When the flash is subjected to sudden temperature change, as when the flash unit is brought

from a cold exterior to warm interior, condensation might form inside. In such a case, place you

equipment in a sealed plastic bag before such a change, and do not use the flash unit until i

reaches room temperature.

Do not store your flash in a drawer or cupboard etc. containing naphthalene, camphor or othe

insecticides. These chemicals will have a negative effects on the flash unit.

Do not use a thinner, Benzene or other cleaning agents to remove dirt or finger prints from the

component. Clean with a soft, moistened cloth.

For extended storage, choose a cool dry place, preferably with good ventilation. It is

recommended that the flash be charged and fired several times a month, to maintain prope

capacitor functioning.

DESCRIPTION OF THE PARTS

EXTERNAL

PARTS

1.Flash Head 2.AF Auxiliary Light 3.Bounce Angle; Up and Down

4.Bounce Angle; Right and Left 5.Bounce Lock and Release Button; Up and Down

6.Swivel Lock and Release Button; Right and Left 7.LCD Panel 8.Battery Cover

9.Release Button 10.Shoe 11.Catch Light Panel 12.Wide Panel

CONTROLS

13.MODE Button 14.SEL SELECT Button 15.

+ Increment Button

16.

Decrement Button 17.ZOOM Button 18.TEST Button

19.LIGHT Button 20.Ready Light 21.Power Switch

ABOUT THE BATTERY

This flash unit uses four “AA” type Alkaline dry cell batteries, Ni-Cad or Ni-MH rechargeable batteries.

Manganese batteries can also be used but as they have a shorter life than Alkaline batteries, we do

not recommend using them. Please replace batteries if it takes more than 30seconds to light the

Ready Lamp.

◆ To assure proper electrical contact, clean the battery terminals before installing the batteries.

◆ Ni-Cad or Ni-MH batteries do not have standardized contacts. If you use Ni-Cad or Ni-MH batteries,

please confirm that the battery contacts touch the battery compartment properly.

◆ To prevent battery explosion, leakage or overheating, use four new AA batteries of the same type

and brand. Do not mix the type or new and used batteries.

◆ Do not disassemble or short-circuit the batteries, or expose them fire or water; they may explode. Do

not recharge the batteries other than Ni-Cad or Ni-MH rechargeable batteries.

◆ When the flash will not be used for an extended period of time, remove the batteries from the flash

to avoid the possibility of damage from leakage.

◆ Battery performance decreases at low temperatures. Keep batteries insulated when using the flash

in cold weather.

◆ As with any flash, it is recommended you carry spare batteries when on a long trip or when

photographing outdoors in cold weather.

BATTERY LOADING

1. Be sure to set the Power Switch to the off position

then slide, the battery cover in the direction of the

arrow to open.

2. Insert four AA size batteries into the battery chamber.

Be sure the + and – ends of the batteries are aligned

according to the diagram in the chamber.

3. Close the cover.

4. Slide the Power Switch to the ON position. After few

seconds, the Ready Lamp will light, indicating that

the flash unit can be fired.

5. Please press the “Test Button” to be sure that the flash is working properly.

AUTO POWER OFF

To conserve battery power, the flash unit automatically turns itself off when the flash is not used for

approximately 240 seconds. To turn the flash on again, depress the “TEST” button, or depress the

camera shutter button halfway. Please note that, “Auto Power Off” mechanism does not work with

‘Wireless’ off-camera flash mode, normal slave flash, and designated slave flash modes.

ERROR INDICATION

If the battery power is not sufficient or there is electric information error between the camera and flash

unit, the “Er” mark will blink on the LCD panel. When this occurs, turn the power switch off and on. If it

still blinks, after this procedure, check the battery power.

ADJUSTING THE FLASH HEAD

Depress the Bounce “Up and Down” Lock and Release Button, and

adjust the flash head to the desired position.

◆

appears on the LCD panel, when you turn on the flash, and if

this mark blinks, then the flash head is adjusted to an incorrect

position.

ATTACHING

AND

REMOVING

THE

FLASH

AND

FROM

THE

CAMERA

Be sure turn off the Power Switch. Then insert the

Shoe Base into the hot shoe of the camera until it

clicks and locks. 

◆ When you attach or remove the flash, grasp the

bottom of the flash to prevent damage to the shoe

foot and camera’s hot shoe.

◆ If the camera’s built-in flash is set in up position,

please close it before you attach the flash unit.

When you remove the flash, slide the flash unit out of

the camera’s hot shoe, while pressing the release button. 

SETTING OF FLASH COVERAGE ANGLE

When you press the ZOOM button symbol appears. Each time you press the ZOOM button, the

LCD panel display will change and indicate the zoom position in sequence, as follows.

24mm

→ 28mm → 35mm → 50mm → 70mm → 85mm → 105mm → (Auto)

Generally, in the TTL mode, the flash will automatically set the zoom position according to the focal

length of your lens.

◆ When you turn on the main switch, the flash will memorize and set the zoom head position to the

last setting used.

◆ If you use a lens wider than the flash head setting, there may be under exposed areas around the

edge of the picture.

◆ Depending on the flash head setting, the flash’s Guide Number will be changed.

WIDE PANEL

This flashgun is equipped with a built-in wide panel,

which can provide an ultra wide 17mm angle of

coverage. Slide out the wide panel and catch light

panel and flip it down to cover the flash’s head. (Be

careful to slide the panels out smoothly.) Then put the

catch light panel back in its place. The coverage angle

setting of the flash will be set to 17mm automatically.

◆ If the built-in wide panel comes off accidentally, the

ZOOM button will not function. In this case please

contact the store where the flash was purchased or

a Sigma service station.

LCD PANEL ILLUMINATION

When you press the LIGHT button, the LCD panel will illuminate for about 8 seconds. The illumination

stays on longer than 8sec, if you press the LIGHT button once again.

TTL AUTO FLASH

In the TTL AUTO Mode, the camera will control the amount of flash lighting, to get the appropriate

exposure for the subject.

◆ Depending on the camera model and lens combination, TTL Flash procedure varies. Please see the

below chart. (In all combinations, TTL will be displayed on the LCD)

D-SLR / Maxxum 70, 50, 7, 5, 4, 3

nax 7D, 60, 40, 7, 5, 4, 3L

Maxxum 9

nax 9

Other Camera Models

D type Lens ADI metering Pre-flash metering Ordinary TTL metering

Non-D type lens

Pre-flash metering Pre-flash metering Ordinary TTL metering

1. Set the camera’s exposure mode to

Mode.

2. Turn on the power switch of the flash, the TTL mark will appear

on the LCD panel and the flash will start charging.

◆ With D-SLRs, please make sure that

indicator is on. If the

indicator is off, press the

–

button and make the

indicate indicator appear on the LCD panel, otherwise

exposure will not be correct.

3. Focus on your subject.

4. Check that the subject is located within the effective flash distance range, indicated on the LCD

panel of the flash unit.

5. Press the shutter button, after the flash is fully charged.

◆ When the camera receives the appropriate exposure, the TTL mark on the flash’s LCD panel will

appear for 5 seconds. If this indication does not appear, the flash illumination is not sufficient for that

situation. Please re-take the picture, at a closer distance.

◆ The AF Auxiliary Light will turn on automatically if you focus on a subject in a dark area. The effective

range of the AF Auxiliary Light is up to about 0.7meter to 9meter (2.3-29.5 feet).

◆ Please note that when the camera is set to M mode, the flash will be set to the mode settings last

used.

◆ When the flash is fully charged, the flash mark will appear in the camera viewfinder. If the shutter is

released before the flash is fully charged, the flash will not fire, and the camera will take the picture

at a slow shutter speed as if by ambient light only.

USING FLASH IN OTHER CAMERA MODES

Shutter Speed Priority Setting

When you set the desired shutter speed, the camera will select the appropriate aperture value. You

cannot choose shutter a speed faster than the camera’s sync speed. Fill flash is used when this mode

is selected.

Aperture Priority Setting

By selecting the A mode, after you select the desired aperture the camera will set the appropriate shutter

speed for the background exposure. Fill flash is used when this mode is selected.

When used with M Mode

You can set the desired shutter speed and aperture value. You can set the shutter speed from top sync

speed to bulb.

◆ The fill flash is used when this mode is selected.

◆ If you adjust the exposure according to the exposure meter indication, the camera will work as for

Daylight synchronization flash or slow synchronization.

LIMITS OF CONTINUOUS SHOOTING

To prevent overheating of the flash’s circuitry, please do not use your Flash unit for at least 10minutes

after using the number of flash exposures, shown in the below table have been made in quick succession.

Mode Number of Flash Exposures

TTL, M(1/1,1/2) 20 Continuous Flash Shots

M(1/4, 1/8) 25 Continuous Flash Shots

M(1/16-1/32) 40 Continuous Flash Shots

Multi 10 Cycle

MANUAL FLASH OPERATION

Manual flash is provided when shooting the subjects when the correct, Exposure is difficult to obtain in

the TTL mode.

In the manual flash mode, you can set the flash power level from 1/1 (full) to 1/64 power in one step

increments.

1. Set the camera’s exposure mode to M.

2. Press the MODE button on the flash unit to select M.

3. The guide number value blinks when you press the SEL button.

4. Press

–

button to set the desired flash power output.

5. The manual flash output display will stop blinking and remain

displayed after you press the SEL button again.

6. Adjust the focusing by pressing the shutter button, read-out subject distance from the focus ring on

the lens. Then, adjust the F-stop or flash power, until the distance indicated on the LCD panel of the

flash, and subject distance becomes about equal.

7. When the Ready Light of the flash is illuminated, the unit is ready for use.

◆ You can calculate the correct exposure by using the following formula:

Guide Number “GN” / Flash to Subject Distance = F-stop

This flash unit will automatically calculate and indicate the appropriate Subject Distance according to

the above formula. (Please refer to table1 on the last page)

HIGH SPEED SYNC (FP) FLASH

󰎣HSS󰎤

When you take a picture with an ordinary flash, you cannot use a shutter speed faster than the

camera’s synchronized speed because the flash must fire when the shutter curtain is fully open. The

FP flash keeps firing, while the shutter curtain is running. Thus you can use a shutter speed faster than

the synchronized speed.

1. Choose the Flash Mode by using MODE button (“TTL” or “M” modes can be used).

2. Press the

–

button and make the indicate indicator

appear on the LCD panel.

3. Focus on the subject

4. When the Ready Light of the flash is illuminated, the unit is

ready for use.

◆ Depending on the shutter speed, the Guide Number will be

changed.(Please refer to table2 on the last page)

◆ If you want to cancel the FP Flash mode, please follow the FP

flash procedure to make the

indicator display from the LCD panel.

MODELING FLASH

If you use the Modeling flash, you can check the lighting and shadow effects, before you take the

picture.

1. Press the MODE button and select the mode.

2. Press the

button or

–

button several times to make the icon on the LCD panel appear.

3. Confirm that the flash is charged, then press the TEST button to fire.

MULTI FLASH MODE

While the shutter is open, the flash will fire repeatedly. By doing so a series of images of the subject

will be exposed in one frame. A dark background with a bright subject shows more effectively in this

mode. It is possible to set the firing frequency between 1Hz and 100Hz. Up to 90 flashes can be fired

continuously. The maximum number of flashes varies, depending on the flash guide number and firing

frequency settings. (Please refer to table 3 on the last page)

1. Set the camera’s exposure mode to M mode, and set the F number

2. Press the MODE button until the Multi-flash mode appears

3. Press the SEL button until the flash firing frequency starts to

blink.

4. Press the

–

button to set the desired flash frequency value.

5. After pressing the SEL button again, the flash power level will

blink.

6. Press the

–

button to set the desired power level.

7. Press the SEL button again, the number of flashes will blink.

8. Press the

–

button to set the desired number of flashes.

9. Press the SEL button again, the display will stop blinking.

10. When the ready light of the flash is illuminated, the unit is ready to use.

Note: Please set the shutter speed longer than; Number of Flashes you want 与 Firing Frequency

BOUNCE FLASH

When you take a photo with flash in a room, sometimes a strong shadow will appear behind the

subject, if you point the flash head upwards or sideways to reflect the light off the ceiling, wall etc. the

subject will be illuminated softly. Press the lock button and adjust the flash head to set the bounce

angle.

UP: 0°, 60°, 75°, 90° DOWN: 0°,7°

RIGHT: 0°, 60°, 75°, 90° LEFT: 0°, 60°, 75°,90°, 120°, 150°, 180°

When the bounce flash mode is activated, a bounce indicator

will appear on the LCD panel.

Choose a white surface for bouncing the flash, otherwise the

image’s colour may be incorrect.

Depending on the reflecting surface, the subject distance and other

factors, the effective distance range for the TTL AUTO may change.

Please check for correct exposure confirmation (TTL mark on the

LCD panel) after releasing the shutter.

CLOSE-UP EXPOSURES

Bounce flash can be tilted 7° downward for close-ups. The Flash will be effective only for the subjects

0.5 meter to 2 meters. When the flash head is tilted 7°,

will blink.

CATCH LIGHT PANEL

This flash is equipped with a built-in catch

light panel, which can create a catch light in

the eyes of the subject when the bounce

flash mode is activated. Slide out the wide

panel and catch light panel, and then put

wide panel back in its place. (Be careful to

slide the panels out smoothly.)

◆ To create a catch light effectively, tilt the flash head upward 90 degrees and take pictures at a close

distance.

WIRELESS FLASH

When you use the “Wireless Flash” mode, you can take pictures with a more three-dimensional effect

by shadow, or you can make natural image by shadow depending on the flash position, without any

extension cord connecting the camera body and the flash. In the case of the EF-610 DG SUPER

SO-ADI, communication between the camera body and the flash will be done by the means of the light

of the flash. In the “Wireless Flash” mode, the camera will calculate the correct exposure automatically.

◆ In this instruction, we call a flash unit, which is attached to the camera body the “Controller”, and we

call a flash unit at a remote position the “off-camera flash”.

◆ It would be helpful to use a mini-stand when the flash unit is separated from the camera. The

mini-stand has a threaded hole to attach the flash unit to a tripod.

◆ Make sure not to position the flash your picture area.

◆ Place the flash approximately between 0.5m~5m(1.5-5.6ft) range, and camera approximately

1m~5m(3-16ft) range from the subject.

◆ In case of other people using Wireless Flash mode near you, your flash may be influenced by the

other person’s flash and your flash may fire. In this circumstance, please set your flash to a

different channel; from that of the other person’s flash. Please refer to above settings.

A. USING THE SIGNAL OF BUILT-IN FLASH AS A TRIGGER.

1. Set the camera to the wireless flash mode.

◆ Since the settings vary depending on the camera model, please refer to the instruction manual for

your camera.

2. Set the camera’s exposure mode to P,A,S or M.

3. Press the

button of the flashgun until the off-camera

flash display appears.

4. Set the off-camera flash number to 1 by pressing the

button.

5. Press the

button to set the Flash Mode to TTL.

6. Channel information will blink when the

button is pressed.

7. Set the channel number (C1 - C4) by pressing

button.

8. Press the

button, the indicator will stop blinking.

9. Attach the flashgun to the camera body and press the shutter button halfway (the channel number

is recorded to the camera).

10. Remove your flash from the camera and place it at the desired position.

11. Pop-up the built-in flash of your camera, and confirm that it is fully charged.

◆ In wireless flash mode, AF Auxiliary Light will blink to indicate that the flash is fully charged.

12. Adjust the focus of your camera for taking picture.

◆ The EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI will fire when the built-in flash fires. The camera’s built-in flash is

fired only for control of the EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI. The illimunation of the subject is done by

the EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI. The camera will control the flash power as a TTL Auto flash, to

obtain the correct exposure.

◆ Depending on the shutter speed, it will be switched automatically to normal flash or high speed sync

flash.

◆ When the camera’s exposure mode is set to M, it will be manual wireless flash. After setting the

channel number, the flash power level will blink. Set the desired flash power output by pressing the

or button and then press the button to stop the display blinking.

B. USING THE SIGNAL OF THE FLASH THAT IS ATTACHED TO THE

CAMERA AS THE TRIGGER

For Wireless Flash, two or more EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI flash units are necessary. EF-530 DG

SUPER SO-ADI can be used only with off-camera mode. Depending on the flash unit model of

off-camera flash, it is necessary to change the control mode of the controller. Please see the below

chart. (EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI can be used for the controller).

Flashgun model can be

used for off-camera flash

EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI

EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI

EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI

Control Mode

Camera model can be

used with off-camera flash

α700, α900 α900

Ratio-Flash Control setting

It is possible to control up to 3

groups;Controller, Off-Camera

Flash 1 and Off-Camera Flash 2.

It is possible to set flash-ratio of

each group from 5 levels or

without falsh.

It is possible to control 2

groups;Controller and Off-Camera

Flash.

Controller : It is possible to set the

ratio of off-camera flash to 1:2 or

2:1.

Flash Mode

TTL Auto flash, High Speed Sync

Flash (TTL, M), Manual flash

TTL Auto flash, High Speed Sync

Flash (TTL)

B-1.In the case of using only off-camera flash

Camera and Controller Setting

1. Set the camera to the wireless flash mode.

◆ Since the settings vary depending on the camera model, please refer to the instruction manual for

your camera.

2. Set the camera’s exposure mode to P,A,S or M.

3. Attach the flashgun to the camera body.

4. The flashgun’s LCD panel will be switched to the controller

setting display automatically. (If the LCD panel will not be

switched automatically, press the

button until the

controller setting display appears.)

5. The control mode display will blink when the

button is

pressed.

6. Set the control mode to

by pressing the or button.

7. Channel information will blink when the

button is pressed.

8. Set the channel number (C1 - C4) by pressing the

button.

9. The ratio-flash control display will blink when the

button is pressed.

10. Set the ratio-flash control mode to [

] by pressing the or button.

11. Press the

button again, the display will stop blinking.

Off-Camera Flash Setting

12. Press the button until the off-camera flash display appears.

13. Set the off-camera flash number to 1 by pressing the

button.

14. Press the

button to set the flash mode to TTL.

15. Channel information will blink when the

button is pressed.

16. Press

button to choose the same channel number as

set on the controller.

17. Press the

button, the indicator stops blinking.

18. Place the off-camera flash at the desired position.

19. Check that both flashes are fully charged.

◆ Ready light lamp will light, and the AF Auxiliary lamp will blink to indicate that the flash is ready for

shooting.

20. Adjust the focus on the subject, and take the picture.

B-2. Ratio-Flash Control (Control Mode

)

Camera and Controller setting

1. Process the same setting from step 1 to 9 of B-1.

2. Set the ratio-flash control mode display to the [

] by

pressing the

or button.

3. The flash mode display will blink when the

button is

pressed.

4. Set the flash mode to TTL by pressing the

or button.

5. The ratio-flash display [

] of the controller will blink when the button is pressed.

6. Set the ratio of the controller by pressing the

or button.

7. The ratio-flash display [

] of Off-Camera Flash 1 will blink when the button is pressed.

8. Set the ratio of Off-Camera Flash 1 by pressing the

or button.

9. The ratio-flash display [

] of Off-Camera Flash 2 will blink when the button is pressed.

10. Set the ratio of Off-Camera Flash 2 by pressing the

or button.

11. Press the

button, the indicator stops blinking.

Off-Camera Flash Setting

12. Process the same setting of B-1 Off-Camera Flash Setting.

◆ If the off-camera flash unit is plural, allocate the desired off camera flash number to each unit.

◆ It is possible to set the flash ratio for the controller, Off-Camera Flash 1 and Off-Camera Flash 2 as

follows.

(without flash)124816

The ratio of flash output amount is setting the value of each unit / total value.

[Example]

Setting value Ratio of flash amount

Controller 2 2/7

Off-Camera Flash 1 1 1/7

Off-Camera Flash 2 4 4/7

B-3. Ratio-Flash Control (Control Mode

)

Camera and Controller setting

1. Process the same setting from step 1 to 6 of B-1.

2. Set the control mode to

by pressing the or button.

3. Channel information will blink when the

button is

pressed.

4. Set the channel number (C1 – C4) by pressing

button.

5. Set the ratio-flash control mode display to the [

] by

pressing the

or button.

6. The ratio-flash display will blink when the

button is pressed.

7. Set the ratio of the controller: Off-Camera Flash by pressing the

or button.󰎣Select the

.󰎤

8. Press the button, the indicator stops blinking.

Off-Camera Flash Setting

9. If the Off-Camera Flash is EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI, please process the same setting of B-1

Off-Camera Flash Setting.

◆ If the Off-Camera Flash is EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI, please refer to the instruction manual of

EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI.

◆ If the Off-Camera Flash is EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI, the channel number can be set only from C1

to C3.

SLAVE FLASH

NORMAL SLAVE FLASH

Even if the EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI is not attached to the camera body, you can fire the flash by

using the camera’s built-in flash or another flash unit

1. Attach the flash unit to the camera’s hot shoe.

2. Set the camera’s exposure mode to the desired mode. If you use A or M mode, set the desired

aperture value also.

3. Turn on the flash unit. Then press the shutter button half way.

◆ Now, the aperture value and film speed are automatically

transmitted to the flash unit.

4. Remove the flash unit from camera.

5. Press the MODE button and select the

/ (Slave)

mode.

6. Press the SEL button several times to make the flash output

amount indicator blink.

7. Press the + button or – button to set the flash output amount.

◆ Determine the appropriate flash power by setting the distance indicator on the LCD panel to coincide

as closely as possible, with the actual distance from the slave flash to the subject. If the actual

distance is out of range, you need to change the aperture value.

◆ You can set the film speed or aperture value on the flash unit manually, if desired.

a. For the film speed … Press the MODE to select the ISO, then press the SEL button to make the

indicator blink. Press the + button or – button and set the desired film speed, then press the SEL

button once again.

b. For the aperture value … When the flash unit is set to the Slave mode, press the SEL button to

make the indicator for the aperture value blink, and press the + button or – button to set the

desired aperture value. Then press the SEL button.

8. Press the SEL button several times to make the display stop blinking.

9. Place the slave unit in the desired location. Do not place the slave unit within the Picture area.

10. After you confirm that all flash units are fully charged, press the shutter button to take the picture.

◆ If you are using a SONY brand flash unit , or the camera’s built-in flash TTL function on your camera,

and the EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI flash unit as a slave unit, please do not use ADI,DI function, as

the monitor pre-flash may cause the slave to fire prematurely.

◆ When the EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI is fully charged, the AF Auxiliary Light will blink.

◆ The flash will not fire if the EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI is attached to the camera body while it is in

the Slave Mode setting.

DESIGNATED SLAVE FLASH

If you use two or more EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI flash units, you can designate which flashes will

fire together by using the channel settings. In this mode, one flash unit will be used as the Slave

Controller and the others for firing as Slaves.

Setting the Slave Flash unit(s) for firing

1. Attach the firing flash unit to the camera body.

2. Set the camera’s exposure mode to S or M mode.

◆ Then set the shutter speed to 1/30 or slower. The slave

Controller will transmit the designated signal before the others

fire. Thus if you use a shutter speed faster than 1/30, the firing

flash units will not be synchronized.

3. Switch “ON” the flash unit, and press the camera’s shutter button halfway.

◆ Now, aperture value and film speed are automatically transmitted to the slave flash unit.

4. Remove the slave flash unit from camera.

5. Press the MODE button and select the

/ . (Slave Mode)

6. Press the SEL button to make the channel display indicator blink.

7. Press the + button or – button to set the channel number. (C1 or C2)

8. Press the SEL button to make the output amount display indicator of flash blink.

9. Press the + button or – button to set the flash output amount.

◆ Set the flash power by setting the distance indicator on the LCD panel to coincide as closely as

possible with the actual distance from the slave flash to the subject. If the actual distance is out of

range, you need to change the aperture value.

10. Press the SEL button several times to make the display stop blinking.

11. Place the slave unit in the desired location. Do not place the slave unit within the picture area.

Setting for Slave Controller unit

12. Press the MODE button and select the / (Slave Mode).

13. Press the SEL button to make the channel display indicator blink.

14. Press the + button or – button to set the same channel number

as that set on the firing flash unit.

15. Press the SEL button to make the flash output amount display

indicator blink.

16. Press the + button

mark displayed.

17. Press the SEL button to make the display stop blinking.

18. Attach the Slave Controller flash unit to the camera body.

19. After you confirm that all flash units are fully charged, press the shutter button to take the picture.

◆

When the firing flash unit of EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI is fully charged, the AF Auxiliary Light will blink.

◆ You cannot set the aperture value by SEL button, if you select the mark at the setting of flash

output amount. The flash unit will be set to the Slave Controller mode.

◆ The Slave Controller unit functions only to control the slave unit.

SPECIFICATIONS

TYPE : Clip-on type serial-controlled TTL auto zoom electric flash

GUIDE NUMBER : 61 (ISO 100/m, 105mm head position)

POWER SOURCE : Four AA type alkaline batteries or Four AA type Ni-Cd batteries or,

: Four AA type Ni-MH Nickel-Metal Hydride batteries

RECYCLING TIME : about 7.0 sec. (Alkaline batteries)

: about 5.0 sec. (Ni-Cd, Ni-MH Nickel-Metal Hydride)

NUMBER OF FLASHES : about 120 flashes (Alkaline batteries)

: about 160 flashes (Ni-Cd, Ni-MH Nickel-Metal Hydride)

FLASH DURATION : about 1 / 700 sec. (full power firing)

FLASH ILLUMINATE ANGLE : 24～105mm motor powered control (17mm with Built-in Wide Panel)

AUTO POWER OFF : Available WEIGHT : 330g / 11.6oz.

DIMENSIONS : 77mm (W) / 3.0in. x 139mm (H) / 5.5in. x 117mm (L) / 4.6in.

DEUTSCH

Vielen Dank, dass Sie sich für ein SIGMA EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI Blitzgerät entschieden

haben. Dieses Produkt wurde speziell für den Einsatz an der SONY AF Spiegelreflexkameraserie

entwickelt. Abhängig von dem jeweiligen Kameramodell können Funktionen und Handhabung

differieren. Bitte lesen Sie diese Gebrauchsanleitung bezogen auf Ihr Kameramodell sorgfältig

durch. Um Ihre Freude an der Fotografie zu steigern, besitzt dieses Gerät eine Vielzahl von

Ausstattungsmerkmalen. Sie sollten diese Gebrauchsanleitung im Zusammenhang mit Ihrer

Kamerabedienungsanleitung studieren und für zukünftiges Nachschlagen griffbereit halten, um die

Funktionen

vollem

Umfang

nutzen

und

die

maximale

Leistung

des

Gerätes

ausschöpfen

können.

VORSICHTSMAßNAHMEN

Achtung!!

Benutzen Sie dieses Blitzgerät nicht an einer anderen Kamera als an einer SONY AF

Spiegelreflexkamera; andernfalls könnte das Blitzgerät die Schaltkreise der Kamera

beschädigen.

Dieses Blitzgerät ist nicht wasserdicht. Wenn Sie die Ausrüstung im Regen, Schnee oder in der Nähe

von Wasser verwenden, bewahren Sie sie davor, nass zu werden. Es ist häufig unmöglich,

Wasserschäden interner elektrischer Komponenten zu reparieren.

Setzen Sie das Blitzgerät niemals Stößen, Staub, Hitze oder Feuchtigkeit aus. Diese Faktoren

könnten einen Brand oder Fehlfunktionen Ihrer Ausrüstung verursachen.

Wenn das Gerät plötzlichen Temperaturschwankungen ausgesetzt, etwa aus einer kalten Umgebung

in einen warmen Innenraum gebracht wird, kann sich Kondensniederschlag im Inneren des Gerätes

bilden. In solchen Fällen stecken Sie das Gerät bitte vor dem Temperaturwechsel in eine zu

verschließende Plastiktasche und benutzen Sie es erst wieder, wenn es sich der Raumtemperatu

angepasst hat.

Bewahren Sie das Gerät nicht in einer Schublade oder einem Schrank auf, wo es schädlichen

Dämpfen wie derer von Naphthalin, Kampfer oder Insektiziden ausgesetzt ist.

Verwenden Sie weder Verdünner, Benzin noch andere Reinigungsmittel, um Schmutz oder Fingerabdrücke

von dem Gerät zu entfernen. Benutzen Sie ein weiches, gegebenenfalls angefeuchtetes, fusselfreies Tuch.

Bewahren Sie das Blitzgerät an einem trockenen, kühlen und gut belüfteten Ort auf. Lösen Sie den

Blitz von Zeit zu Zeit aus, um seine volle Leistungsfähigkeit langfristig zu erhalten.

Um Verletzungen oder Beschädigungen zu verhindern, lesen Sie diese Bedienungsanleitung vor dem

ersten Einsatz Ihres Blitzgerätes bitte sehr sorgfältig und vollständig durch und beachten Sie unbedingt

die untenstehenden Warnzeichen. Bitte beachten Sie speziell die beiden folgenden Warnzeichen.

Warnung!!

Achtung!!

Dieses Symbol verweist auf die wichtigen Punkte, an denen Vorsicht geboten ist.

Dieses Symbol enthält Informationen bezüglich zu unterlassender Handlungen.

Wenn Sie die entsprechenden Hinweise nicht befolgen, kann dies zu ernsthaften

Verletzungen oder anderen gefährlichen Folgen führen.

Wenn Sie die entsprechenden Hinweise nicht befolgen, können Verletzungen ode

Schäden entstehen.

Warnung!!

Dieses Blitzgerät enthält hochspannungsführende Schaltkreise. Um elektrische Schläge ode

Verbrennungen zu vermeiden, versuchen Sie nicht, das Gerät zu öffnen. Sollte das äußere Gehäuse

gebrochen oder zersprungen sein, berühren Sie keine inneren Geräteteile.

Blitzen Sie nicht aus kurzer Entfernung direkt in die Augen. Andernfalls kann das grelle Licht die

ugen verletzen. Halten Sie beim Fotografieren zumindest einen Abstand von einem Meter zwischen

Gesicht und Blitzgerät ein.

Berühren Sie nicht einen eventuell zusätzlich vorhanden Blitzkontakt (X) Ihrer Kamera, wenn das

Blitzgerät im Zubehörschuh steckt. Hochspannungsführende Stromkreise könnten einen elektrischen

Stromschlag verursachen.

Benutzen Sie Ihre Ausrüstung nie in der Umgebung entflammbarer, brennbarer Gase, Flüssigkeiten

oder Chemikalien etc. Andernfalls könnte dies zu einem Brand oder einer Explosion führen.

BESCHREIBUNG DER TEILE

Externe Teile

1.Blitzkopf 2.AF-Hilfsilluminator 3.Verstellwinkel vertikal 4.Schwenkwinkel horizontal

5.Verstellver –u. entriegelung vertikal 6.Schwenkver –u. entriegelung horizontal

7.Flüssigkeitskristallanzeige 8.Batteriefachdeckel 9. Entriegelungsknopf 10.Aufsteckfuß

11. Reflektorfolie 12. Weitwinkelstreuscheibe

Bedienungselemente

13.Betriebsartentaste MODE 14.Wahltaste SEL 15.

+ Steigerungstaste

16.

Reduzierungstaste 17.ZOOM Taste ZOOM 18.Testauslöser TEST

19.Beleuchtungstaste LIGHT 20.Bereitschaftslampe 21.Hauptschalter

BATTERIEHINWEISE

Dieses Blitzgerät benötigt vier „AA“ Alkaline Trockenbatterien oder wiederaufladbare Ni-Cad oder

Ni-MH Akkus. Wechseln Sie den kompletten Batteriesatz aus, wenn die Aufladezeit mehr als 30

Sekunden beträgt.

◆ Um einwandfreien elektrischen Kontakt zu gewährleisten, reinigen Sie die Batteriekontakte, bevor

Sie die Batterien einsetzen.

◆ Ni-Cad / Ni-MH Akkus besitzen keine standardisierten Kontakte. Falls Sie Ni-Cad / Ni-MH Akkus

verwenden, vergewissern Sie sich, dass die Batteriekontakte jene des Batteriefaches einwandfrei

berühren.

◆ Verwenden Sie ausschließlich vier frische „AA“ Mignonzellen einer Marke und eines Typs, um die

Gefahr des Platzens einer Batterie, des Austritts von Batteriesäure oder der Überhitzung

vorzubeugen. Mischen Sie keinesfalls frische und gebrauchte Batterien.

◆ Batterien dürfen weder geöffnet, noch kurzgeschlossen bzw. ins Feuer geworfen werden, da sie

explodieren können. Zur Wiederaufladung dürfen nur hierfür geeignete Zellen verwendet werden,

wie etwa Ni-Cad / Ni-MH.

◆ Wenn Sie das Blitzgerät längere Zeit nicht benutzen wollen, entnehmen Sie bitte die Batterien, um

Schäden durch austretende Batteriesäure zu verhindern.

◆ Bei niedrigen Temperaturen lässt die Leistung jeder Batterie nach. Bewahren Sie die Batterien daher

bei kalter Witterung bis zur Aufnahme getrennt vom Blitzgerät möglichst körperwarm auf.

◆ Wie bei jedem Blitzgerät empfiehlt sich die Mitnahme von Ersatzbatterien auf einer Reise oder für

Außenaufnahmen bei winterlichen Temperaturen.

EINLEGEN DER BATTERIEN

1. Vergewissern Sie sich, dass der Hauptschalter auf

OFF steht und öffnen Sie den Batteriefachdeckel

durch Schieben in Pfeilrichtung und klappen Sie ihn

nach oben.

2. Setzen Sie vier Mignonzellen Typ „AA“ entsprechend

der Markierung der Polung (+ und

) in das

Batteriefach ein.

3. Schließen Sie den Batteriefachdeckel.

4. Schalten Sie das Gerät am Hauptschalter ein. Nach

einigen Sekunden leuchtet die

Blitzbereitschaftslampe auf und zeigt somit an, dass das Gerät nunmehr zündbereit ist.

5. Um sich von der Funktionsfähigkeit durch einen Probeblitz zu überzeugen, genügt ein Druck auf den

Testauslöser.

Automatische Abschaltung

Um Strom zu sparen, schaltet sich das Gerät 240 Sekunden nach der letzten Betätigung automatisch

ab. Zur Wiedereinschaltung genügt ein Druck auf den Testauslöser oder das Antippen des

Kameraauslösers. Die automatische Abschaltung steht nicht im kabellosen Blitzbetrieb zur Verfügung.

Fehleranzeige

Bei ungenügender Batteriespannung bzw. fehlerhaftem Informationsaustausch zwischen Kamera und

Blitzgerät erscheint “Er” in der LCD. Schalten Sie das Gerät in diesem Fall kurzfristig aus und wieder

ein. Führt dies nicht zum Erlöschen der Anzeige, prüfen Sie bitte die Batteriespannung.

EINSTELLEN DES BLITZKOPFES

Drücken Sie die Verstellwinkelver- und -entriegelungstaste,

während Sie den Blitzkopf in die gewünschte Position neigen.

◆ Wenn Sie das Gerät einschalten, erscheint

auf dem LCD.

Sollte das Symbol blinken, befindet sich der Blitzkopf in einer

unzulässigen Position.

ANBRINGEN UND ABNEHMEN DES BLITZGERÄTES

Vergewissern Sie sich, dass das Gerät ausgeschaltet

ist. Schieben Sie dann den Aufsteckfuß des Blitzes in

den Zubehörschuh der Kamera bis er einrastet. 

◆ Fassen Sie das Gerät zum Ansetzen bzw.

Abnehmen ausschließlich an seinem Unterteil an,

um Beschädigungen am Steckfuß oder am

Zubehörschuh der Kamera zu vermeiden.

◆ Falls der eingebaute Blitz der Kamera ausgeklappt

sein sollte, muss er vor dem Anbringen des EF-610

DG SUPER SO-ADI eingeklappt werden.

Um das Blitzgerät abzunehmen, ziehen Sie es unter Druck auf den Entriegelungsknopf aus dem

Zubehörschuh. 

EINSTELLEN DES AUSLEUCHTWINKELS

(ZOOMREFLEKTOR)

Nach Druck auf die ZOOM-Taste erscheint das Symbol . Durch wiederholtes Drücken der

ZOOM-Taste ändert sich die Einstellung des ZOOMreflektors und der Anzeige in der LCD wie folgt:

24mm → 28mm → 35mm → 50mm → 70mm → 85mm → 105mm → (Auto)

In der Betriebsart TTL reguliert das Gerät die Einstellung des Zoomreflektors innerhalb des

Einstellbereiches automatisch entsprechend der Brennweite des verwendeten Objektives.

◆ Beim Einschalten des Blitzes stellt sich der Zoomreflektor automatisch auf die zuletzt benutzte

Einstellung.

◆ Sofern Sie eine kürzere Objektivbrennweite benutzen, als am Zoomreflektor eingestellt wurde,

werden die Bildecken abgedunkelt wiedergegeben.

◆ Die Blitzleistung ändert sich in Abhängigkeit von der Zoomreflektoreinstellung.

WEITWINKELSTREUSCHEIBE

Das Blitzgerät ist mit einer eingebauten

Weitwinkelstreuscheibe ausgestattet, die die Ausleuchtung

des Bildwinkels eines 17mm Objektivs ermöglicht.

Ziehen Sie die Weitwinkelstreuscheibe gemeinsam mit

der eingebauten Reflektorfolie vorsichtig heraus und

klappen Sie ausschließlich die Weitwinkelstreuscheibe

vor den Blitzkopf. Anschließend schieben Sie nur die

Reflektorfolie wieder zurück. Der Ausleuchtwinkel des

Blitzgeräts stellt sich nun automatisch auf 17mm.

◆ Sollte die eingebaute Weitwinkelstreuscheibe versehentlich abgerissen werden, funktioniert die

ZOOM-Taste nicht mehr. In diesem Fall wenden Sie sich bitte an Ihren Händler oder direkt an einen

autorisierten SIGMA Service.

BELEUCHTUNG DER LCD

Beim Druck auf die LIGHT Taste wird das Display für ca. acht Sekunden lang beleuchtet. Durch

erneuten Druck auf die LIGHT Taste bleibt die Beleuchtung für länger als acht Sekunden aktiviert.

TTL BLITZAUTOMATIK

Im TTL-Blitzautomatikbetrieb kontrolliert die Kamera die abgeblitzte Lichtmenge, so- dass sich daraus

die korrekte Belichtung des Hauptobjektes ergibt.

◆ Abhängig von dem eingesetzten Kamera-Modell und der Objektiv-Kombination variiert der

TTL-Blitzbetrieb. Bitte beachten Sie die untenstehende Tabelle.(In allen Kombinationen erscheint

die TTL-Anzeige im Display)

D-SLR Kameras,

Dynax 60, 40, 7, 5, 4, 3L

(

Maxxum 7D, 70, 50, 7, 5, 4, 3

)

Dynax 9

(Maxxum 9)

Andere Modelle

D-Charakteristik

ektiv

ADI-Blitzsteuerung Vorblitzmessung

Konventionelle

TTL-Messun

Objektive ohne

D-Charakteristik

Vorblitzmessung Vorblitzmessung

Konventionelle

TTL-Messun

1. Stellen Sie die Belichtungsautomatik der Kamera auf P.

2. Schalten Sie das Blitzgerät am Hauptschalter ein. Das TTL

Symbol erscheint auf dem LCD und das Gerät beginnt, sich

aufzuladen.

◆ Vergewissern Sie sich beim Einsatz an D-SLR Kameras, dass

die

Funktion aktiviert ist. Sollte die Anzeige nicht

leuchten, drücken Sie bitte

oder

–

Tasten, bis das

Symbol im Display des Blitzgerätes erscheint. Andernfalls

arbeitet die Belichtungskontrolle nicht korrekt.

3. Stellen Sie scharf.

4. Vergewissern Sie sich, dass sich das Hauptobjekt innerhalb der in dem LCD angezeigten

Blitzreichweite befindet.

5. Nachdem der Blitz vollständig aufgeladen ist, betätigen Sie den Auslöser.

◆ Wenn die Kamera ausreichende Belichtung ermittelt hat, erscheint das TTL Symbol für fünf

Sekunden auf dem Display. Sollte diese Anzeige nicht erscheinen, war die Blitzbelichtung nicht

ausreichend. Wiederholen Sie in diesem Fall die Aufnahme aus kürzerer Entfernung.

◆ Das AF-Hilfslicht schaltet sich automatisch ein, wenn Sie ein Motiv im Dunkeln anvisieren. Seine

Reichweite beträgt ca. 0,7 bis 9 Meter.

◆ Sofern sich die Kamera in der manuellen Betriebsart befindet, beachten Sie bitte, dass das

Blitzgerät jeweils in die zuletzt gewählte Einstellung zurückkehrt.

◆ Sobald das Blitzgerät die volle Ladekapazität erreicht hat, erscheint die Bereitschaftsanzeige im

Sucher. Wenn der Auslöser vor Erreichen der Zündbereitschaft betätigt wird, blitzt das Gerät nicht

und die Kamera löst entsprechend der Lichtverhältnisse mit langer Verschlusszeit aus.

Einsatz des Blitzgerätes in anderen Betriebseinstellungen

Einsatz mit Blendenautomatik

Je nach gewählter Verschlusszeit ermittelt die Kamera die passende Blende entsprechend der Helligkeit

des Motivs. Sie können keine kürzere Verschlusszeit wählen als die Synchronzeit der Kamera.

Einsatz mit Zeitautomatik

Bei Wahl der Zeitautomatik ermittelt die Kamera zur vorgewählten Blende die passende Verschlusszeit zur

Helligkeit des Hintergrundes. Beim Einsatz dieser Betriebsart wird die ständige Blitzzuschaltung angewandt.

Einsatz mit manueller Einstellung

In dieser Betriebsart können Sie sowohl die Blende als auch die Verschlusszeit in dem Bereich

zwischen der Synchronzeit und B (bulb = beliebig) vorwählen.

◆ Beim Einsatz dieser Betriebsart wird die ständige Blitzzuschaltung angewandt.

◆ Sofern Sie sich dabei nach den Angaben des Belichtungsmessers richten, arbeitet die Kamera wie

beim Aufhellblitzen bzw. bei der Langzeitsynchronisation.

GRENZEN DER SERIENAUSLÖSUNG

Um ein Überhitzen des Gerätes zu verhindern, legen Sie eine 10minütige Pause nach dem

Absolvieren der im folgenden genannten Aufnahmeserien ein.

Betriebsart

nzahl der Blitzaufnahmen

TTL, M (1/1, ½) 20 Serienauslösungen

M (1/4, 1/8) 25 Serienauslösungen

M (1/16-1/32) 40 Serienauslösungen

Multi 10 Sequenzen

MANUELLER BLITZBETRIEB

Der manuelle Blitzbetrieb empfiehlt sich immer dann, wenn Motive geblitzt werden, deren korrekte

Belichtung mittels TTL-Betriebsart nur schwierig zu erreichen ist. In der manuellen Betriebsart lässt

sich die Blitzleistung von 1/1 (voll) bis zu 1/64 in einstufigen Schritten wählen.

1. Schalten Sie die Kamera auf M.

2. Drücken Sie am Blitzgerät die Betriebsartentaste MODE, um M

zu wählen.

3. Der Wert der Blitzleistung blinkt, wenn Sie die Wahltaste SEL

drücken.

4. Drücken Sie die Taste

oder

–

, um die gewünschte

Blitzleistung einzustellen.

5. Nach dem erneuten Drücken der Wahltaste SEL stoppt das Blinken des Blitzleistungswertes und die

Anzeige bleibt bestehen.

6. Stellen Sie Ihr Motiv durch Antippen des Kameraauslösers scharf und lesen Sie die Entfernung von

der Einstellskala des Objektives ab. Verändern Sie anschließend die Blendeneinstellung oder die

Blitzleistung so lange, bis die angezeigte Blitzreichweite auf dem LCD des Blitzgerätes der

tatsächlichen Entfernung zum Motiv entspricht.

7. Sobald die Bereitschaftslampe aufleuchtet, ist das Gerät zündbereit.

◆ Die korrekte Belichtung kann nach der folgenden Formel ermittelt werden:

Leitzahl (GN) / Abstand Blitz zum Motiv (in m) = Arbeitsblende

Das Blitzgerät ermittelt und indiziert die Entfernung zum Hauptobjekt automatisch entsprechend der

obigen Formel. (Bitte beachten Sie die Tabelle 1 auf der letzten Seite)

KURZZEITBLITZSYNCHRONISATION (FP; HSS)

Wenn Sie mit einem gewöhnlichen Blitzgerät arbeiten, können Sie keine kürzere Verschlusszeit als die

Synchronzeit der Kamera verwenden, da der Blitz in dem Moment gezündet werden muss, in dem das

Bildfenster von den Verschlussvorhängen vollständig freigegeben ist. Bei der Kurzzeitsynchronisation

sendet das Gerät ununterbrochen Blitze, während der Verschluss abläuft. Hierdurch kann eine kürzere

Verschlusszeit als die eigentliche Synchronzeit verwendet werden.

1. Wählen Sie an der Kamera die Belichtungsfunktion („S“ und

„M“ ist verfügbar)

2. Drücken Sie die Taste

oder

–

, bis das Symbol auf dem

LCD erscheint.

3. Stellen Sie das Objekt scharf

Sobald die Bereitschaftslampe aufleuchtet, ist das Gerät zündbereit.

◆ Bei Verwendung der Kurzzeitsynchronisation verändert sich die Leitzahl des Blitzes in Abhängigkeit

von der eingestellten Verschlusszeit. Die Blitzreichweite wird umso kürzer, je schneller die gewählte

Verschlusszeit. (Bitte beachten Sie die Tabelle 2 auf der letzten Seite).

◆ Wenn Sie die Betriebsart Kurzzeitsynchronisation löschen möchten, folgen Sie bitte der Anleitung für

die Einstellung der

Betriebsart und entfernen das Symbol aus der Anzeige

EINSTELLLICHT

Mit dem Einstelllicht können Sie die Lichtwirkung und den Schattenverlauf vor der Aufnahme

überprüfen.

1. Drücken Sie die MODE Taste und wählen Sie die Betriebsart.

2. Drücken Sie die

oder

–

Taste, bis das Symbol auf dem LCD erscheint.

3. Warten Sie das Aufleuchten der Bereitschaftslampe ab und drücken Sie die TEST Taste zur

Auslösung des Einstelllichtes.

STROBOSKOPBETRIEB

Während der Verschluss geöffnet ist, sendet das Blitzgerät eine Serie von Blitzen aus. Hierdurch

entsteht auf einem Bild eine Sequenz von Aufnahmen eines Motivs. Ein helles Motiv vor dunklem

Hintergrund ist am effektivsten für diese Funktion. Die Blitzfrequenz kann zwischen 1 Hz und 100 Hz

eingestellt werden.

Bis zu 90 Blitze können kontinuierlich abgegeben werden. Die maximale Anzahl von Blitzen variiert in

Abhängigkeit von der Leitzahl und der eingestellten Frequenz.

(Bitte beachten Sie die Tabelle 3 auf der letzten Seite).

1. Stellen Sie die Belichtungsfunktion der Kamera auf M und

stellen Sie eine Blende ein.

2. Drücken Sie wiederholt die Betriebsartentaste MODE, bis die

Stroboskopanzeige MULTI erscheint.

3. Drücken Sie die Wahltaste SEL, bis die Blitzfrequenzanzeige zu

blinken beginnt.

4. Drücken Sie die Taste

oder

–

, um den gewünschten Wert einzustellen.

5. Nach dem erneuten Druck auf die Wahltaste SEL beginnt die Angabe der Blitzleistung zu blinken.

6. Drücken Sie die Taste

oder

–

, um den gewünschten Wert einzustellen.

7. Nach dem erneuten Druck auf die Wahltaste SEL beginnt der Wert der Blitzanzahl zu blinken.

8. Drücken Sie die Taste

oder

–

, um die gewünschte Anzahl von Blitzen einzustellen.

9. Nach dem erneuten Druck auf die Wahltaste SEL stellt die Anzeige das Blinken ein.

10. Sobald die Bereitschaftslampe aufleuchtet, ist der Blitz einsatzbereit.

Achtung: Bitte wählen Sie eine längere Verschlusszeit als:

Anzahl der eingestellten Blitze / Blitzfrequenz in Hz

INDIREKTES BLITZEN

Bei Blitzaufnahmen in Innenräumen erscheint häufig ein harter Schlagschatten hinter Ihrem direkt

angeblitzten Objekt. Wenn Sie den Blitzreflektor jedoch nach oben neigen und das Blitzlicht somit

indirekt über eine Decke auf ihr Motiv fällt, erreichen Sie eine

wesentlich weichere Ausleuchtung.

Drücken Sie die Entriegelungstaste

und neigen Sie den Blitzkopf in den gewünschten Winkel.

Vertikal, aufwärts: 0,60,75 und 90° abwärts: 0 und 7°

Horizontal,

rechts:

0,60,75

und

90°

links:

0,60,75,90,120,150

und

180°

Wenn indirektes Blitzen gewählt wurde, erscheint das Neigesymbol

auf dem LCD.

Das Motiv wird in die Farbe der reflektierenden Oberfläche getaucht.

Wählen Sie deshalb bitte eine weiße Oberfläche für das indirekte

Blitzen. Abhängig von der reflektierenden Oberfläche, der

Motiv-Entfernung und anderen Faktoren kann sich die effektive

Distanz für die TTL-Automatik verändern. Deshalb vergewissern Sie

sich bitte immer der Blitzkontrollanzeige (TTL-Anzeige auf dem

LCD) nach dem Auslösen.

NAHAUFNAHMEN

Der Blitzkopf kann für Nahaufnahmen um 7° nach unten geneigt werden. Die effektive Ausleuchtung

ist in diesem Fall nur für Motive in einem Abstand zwischen 0,5 und 2 Metern gegeben. Wenn der

Blitzkopf um 7° nach unten geneigt ist, blinkt das Neigesymbol

EINGEBAUTE REFLEKTORFOLIE

Das Blitzgerät ist mit einer eingebauten

Reflektorfolie ausgestattet, die eine dezente

frontale Aufhellung beim indirekten Blitzen

gestattet (bspw. ein Lichtreflex im Auge des

Models). Ziehen Sie die Weitwinkelstreuscheibe

gemeinsam mit der eingebauten Reflektorfolie

vorsichtig heraus und schieben Sie nur die

Weitwinkelstreuscheibe wieder zurück.

◆ Neigen Sie für eine natürliche Ausleuchtung mit dezenter frontaler Aufhellung den Blitzkopf um 90

Grad nach oben und fotografieren Sie aus kurzer Entfernung.

KABELLOSES BLITZEN

Durch den Einsatz der kabellosen Blitzauslösung haben Sie die Möglichkeit, in Ihren Bildern durch die

Lichtführung einen räumlichen Eindruck zu vermitteln, oder ihnen eine besonders natürliche

Lichtstimmung durch den gezielten Schattenverlauf in Abhängigkeit der Blitzgeräteposition zu

verleihen. Hierzu bedarf es keiner Kabelverbindung zwischen Kamera und Blitzgerät, da die

Kommunikation zwischen beiden Geräten mittels des Blitzlichtes vorgenommen wird. In dieser

Betriebsart ermittelt die Kamera die korrekte Belichtung automatisch.

◆ In dieser Bedienungsanleitung wird das Blitzgerät, welches mit der Kamera verbunden ist, als

„

Controller

“ bezeichnet und das entsprechend platzierte fernausgelöste Gerät als „

entfesselter Blitz

“.

◆ Wenn der „entfesselte Blitz“ an der gewünschten Stelle platziert werden soll, leistet ein

Blitzgeräteständer, der auch über ein Stativgewinde verfügt, gute Dienste.

◆ Wenn Sie den „entfesselten Blitz“ an der gewünschten Stelle platzieren, achten Sie darauf, dass er

im Bild nicht zu sehen ist.

◆ Bitte platzieren Sie den „entfesselten Blitz“ in einem Abstand zwischen 0,5m und 5m zum Motiv und

die Kamera zwischen 1m bis 5m zum Motiv.

◆ Für den Fall, dass andere Personen in Ihrer Nähe die kabellose Blitzauslösung nutzen und Ihr

eigenes Gerät auf diese Blitze reagieren sollte, stellen Sie bitte an Ihrem Gerät einen anderen Kanal

als die anderen Fotografen ein. Befolgen Sie hierzu bitte die obigen Einstellungen.

A. AUSLÖSUNG DURCH DEN EINGEBAUTEN BLITZ DER KAMERA

1. Stellen Sie die Kamera auf „Drahtlos Blitz“.

◆ Da die Einstellungen je nach Kameramodell variieren, entnehmen Sie bitte die genaue Einstellung

für „Drahtlos Blitz“ der Bedienungsanleitung Ihrer Kamera.

2. Stellen Sie den Belichtungsmodus der Kamera auf P, A, S oder M.

3. Drücken Sie die

Taste des Blitzgerätes, bis das Symbol

für entfesseltes Blitzen erscheint.

4. Drücken Sie die

Taste, bis für den entfesselten Blitz die

Ziffer 1 erscheint.

5. Drücken Sie die

Taste, um den TTL Blitzmodus

einzustellen.

6. Drücken Sie die

Taste, bis die Kanalanzeige blinkt.

7. Drücken Sie die

oder

Taste, um den Kanal (C1 - C4) einzustellen.

8. Drücken Sie die

Taste, um das Blinken der Kanalanzeige zu beenden.

9. Verbinden Sie das Blitzgerät mit der Kamera und drücken den Auslöser halb durch (der Kanal wird

an die Kamera übertragen).

10. Nehmen Sie das Blitzgerät von der Kamera und platzieren Sie es an der gewünschten Stelle.

11. Klappen Sie das eingebaute Blitzgerät aus und vergewissern Sie sich, dass es vollständig

aufgeladen ist.

◆ Im kabellosen Blitzbetrieb beginnt das AF-Hilfslicht des EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI zu blinken,

wenn die Blitzbereitschaft erreicht wird.

12. Stellen Sie die Schärfe an der Kamera ein.

◆ Das EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI löst aus, wenn das eingebaute Blitzgerät blitzt. Das eingebaute

Blitzgerät dient hierbei ausschließlich zur Kontrolle des EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI. Die Belichtung

erfolgt alleine durch das Blitzlicht des EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI. Die Kamera kontrolliert die

Blitzabgabe in der TTL-Automatik, um die korrekte Belichtung zu gewährleisten.

◆ In Abhängigkeit von der Verschlusszeit wird automatisch der normale Blitzbertrieb oder die

Kurzeit-Synchronisation eingestellt.

◆ Steht der Belichtungsmodus der Kamera auf M, findet manuelles kabelloses Blitzen statt. Nachdem

der Kanal gewählt wurde, blinkt die Anzeige der Blitzleistung. Wählen Sie die gewünschte

Blitzleistung durch Drücken der

oder Taste und im Anschluss die Taste, um das

Blinken der Anzeige zu beenden.

AUSLÖSUNG DURCH EINEN EXTERNEN BLITZ, DER MIT DER

KAMERA VERBUNDEN IST.

Für das kabellose Blitzen sind zwei oder mehrere EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI Aufsteckblitzgeräte

notwendig. Der EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI kann nur im entfesselten Blitz Modus verwendet werden.

Je nach Modell, das als entfesseltes Blitzgeräte eingesetzt wird, ist es notwendig den Kontroll-Modus

des Controllers zu ändern. Entnehmen Sie dies bitte der untenstehenden Tabelle (Der EF-610 DG

SUPER SO-ADI kann als Controller verwendet werden).

Aufsteckblitzgeräte, die als

entfesselter Blitz

eingesetzt werden können

EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI

EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI

EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI

Kontroll-Modus

Kameramodelle, die mit

dem entfesselten Blitz

genutzt werden können

α700, α900 α900

Blitz-Belichtungsverhältnis

Es ist möglich bis zu 3 Gruppen

anzusteuern; Controller, entfesselten

Blitz 1 und entfesselten Blitz 2.

Das Blitz-Belichtungsverhältnis kann

für jede der Gruppen in 5 Stufen

oder ohne Blitz eingestellt werden.

Es ist möglich 2 Gruppen

anzusteuern;Controller und

entfesselten Blitz.

Controller: Das Blitz-Belichtungs-

verhältnis des entfesselten Blitzes

kann auf 1:2 oder 2:1 eingestellt werden.

Blitz Modus

TTL Automatik,

Kurzzeit-Blitzsynchronisation

(TTL, M), manuelles Blitzen

TTL Automatik,

Kurzzeit-Blitzsynchronisation (TTL)

B-1. BEIM GEWÖHNLICHEN EINSATZ ALS ENTFESSELTER BLITZ

Einstellung Kamera und Controller

1. Stellen Sie die Kamera auf „Drahtlos Blitz“.

◆ Da die Einstellungen je nach Kameramodell variieren, entnehmen Sie bitte die genaue Einstellung

für „Drahtlos Blitz“ der Bedienungsanleitung Ihrer Kamera.

2. Stellen Sie den Belichtungsmodus der Kamera auf P, A, S oder M.

3. Verbinden Sie das Blitzgerät mit der Kamera.

4. Im Display erscheint automatisch die Controller-Anzeige.

(Erscheint die Anzeige nicht automatisch, drücken Sie die

Taste, bis die Controller-Anzeige erscheint.)

5. Drücken Sie die

Taste, bis der Kontroll-Modus blinkt.

6. Drücken Sie die

oder Taste, bis Kontroll-Modus

erscheint.

7. Drücken Sie die

Taste, bis die Kanalanzeige blinkt.

8. Drücken Sie die

oder

Taste, um den Kanal (C1 - C4) einzustellen.

9. Drücken Sie die

Taste, bis die Blitz-Belichtungsverhälnis Anzeige blinkt.

10. Drücken Sie die

oder Taste, bis als Blitz-Belichtungsverhältnis Modus [ ] erscheint.

11. Drücken Sie die

Taste, um das Blinken der Anzeige zu beenden.

Einstellung entfesseltes Blitzgerät

12. Drücken Sie die Taste des Blitzgerätes, bis das Symbol

für entfesseltes Blitzen erscheint.

13. Drücken Sie die

Taste, bis für den entfesselten Blitz die

Ziffer 1 erscheint

14. Drücken Sie die

Taste, um den TTL Blitzmodus

einzustellen.

15. Drücken Sie die

Taste, bis die Kanalanzeige blinkt.

16. Drücken Sie die

oder

Taste, um denselben Kanal wie am Controller einzustellen.

17. Drücken Sie die

Taste, um das Blinken der Anzeige zu beenden.

18. Platzieren Sie das entfesselte Blitzgerät an der gewünschten Position.

19. Vergewissern Sie sich, dass beide Geräte aufgeladen und blitzbereit sind.

◆ Die Bereitschaftslampe leuchtet und am entfesselten Blitzgerät beginnt das AF-Hilfslicht zu blinken.

20. Stellen Sie Ihr Motiv scharf und lösen Sie aus.

B-2. BLITZ-BELICHTUNGSVERHÄLTNIS (KONTROLL-MODUS

)

Einstellung Kamera und Controller

1. Verfahren Sie mit den Schritten 1 bis 9 ebenso wie im Abschnitt

B-1.

2. Drücken Sie die

oder Taste, bis als

Blitz-Belichtungsverhältnis Modus [

] angezeigt wird.

3. Drücken Sie die

Taste, bis der Blitz Modus blinkt.

4. Drücken Sie die

oder Taste, um den TTL Blitzmodus

einzustellen.

5. Drücken Sie die

Taste, bis die Blitz-Belichtungsverhältnis Anzeige [ ] blinkt.

6. Drücken Sie die

oder Taste, um das Blitz-Belichtungsverhältnis zu wählen.

7. Drücken Sie die

Taste, bis die Anzeige [ ] für entfesselten Blitz 1 blinkt.

8. Drücken Sie die

oder Taste, um das Verhältnis für entfesselten Blitz 1 einzustellen.

9. Drücken Sie die

Taste, bis die Anzeige [ ] für entfesselten Blitz 2 blinkt.

10. Drücken Sie die

oder Taste, um das Verhältnis für entfesselten Blitz 2 einzustellen.

11. Drücken Sie die

Taste, um das Blinken der Anzeige zu beenden.

Einstellung entfesseltes Blitzgerät

12. Verfahren Sie wie im Abschnitt B-1 Einstellung entfesseltes Blitzgerät.

◆ Verwenden Sie mehrere entfesselte Blitzgeräte, vergeben Sie den Blitzgeräten die jeweilige Ziffer

für entfesselten Blitz.

◆ Das Blitz-Belichtungsverhältnis des Controllers, entfesselten Blitz 1 und entfesselten Blitz 2 kann

wie folgt eingestellt werden.

(ohne Blitz)124816

Das Verhältnis der Blitzleistung reguliert den Wert jedes Blitzgerätes / Gesamtwert.

[Beispiel]

Einstellwert Blitz-Belichtungsverhältnis

Controller 2 2/7

Entfessleter Blitz 1 1 1/7

Entfessleter Blitz 2 4 4/7

B-3. BLITZ-BELICHTUNGSVERHÄLTNIS (KONTROLL-MODUS

)

Einstellung Kamera und Controller

1. Verfahren Sie mit den Schritten 1 bis 6 ebenso wie im Abschnitt B-1.

2. Drücken Sie die

oder Taste, bis Kontrollmodus

erscheint.

3. Drücken Sie die

Taste, bis die Kanalanzeige blinkt.

4. Drücken Sie die

oder

Taste, um den Kanal (C1 - C4)

einzustellen.

5. Drücken Sie die

oder Taste, bis als Blitz-

Belichtungsverhältnis Modus [

] angezeigt wird.

6. Drücken Sie die

Taste, bis die Blitz-Belichtungsverhältnis Anzeige blinkt.

7. Stellen Sie das Blitz-Belichtungsverhältnis des Controllers ein: Durch Drücken der

oder

Taste des entfesselten Blitzgeräts (Wählen Sie

oder ).

8. Drücken Sie die

Taste, um das Blinken der Anzeige zu beenden.

Einstellung entfessltes Blitzgerät

9. Verwenden Sie als entfesselten Blitz den EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI, verfahren Sie wie im

Abschnitt B-1 Einstellung entfesseltes Blitzgerät.

◆ Verwenden Sie als entfesselten Blitz den EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI, schauen Sie bitte in die

Bedienungsanleitung des EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI.

◆ Verwenden Sie als entfesselten Blitz den EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI, kann als Kanal nur C1 - C3

ausgewählt werden.

„SLAVE“ GERÄT

NORMALER „SLAVE“ GERÄTE BETRIEB

Selbst wenn der EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI nicht an der Kamera angesetzt ist, kann er durch den

eingebauten Blitz der Kamera oder ein anderes Blitzgerät ausgelöst werden.

1. Verbinden sie das Blitzgerät mit dem Kameragehäuse.

2. Stellen Sie die Kamera auf die gewünschte Belichtungsautomatik. Falls Sie A oder M wählen, stellen

Sie bitte auch die gewünschte Blende ein.

3. Schalten Sie das Blitzgerät ein. Anschließend drücken Sie den Kameraauslöser halb durch.

◆ Nun wird der Blendenwert und die Filmempfindlichkeit automatisch an das Blitzgerät übertragen.

4. Entfernen Sie das Blitzgerät von der Kamera.

5. Drücken Sie die Betriebsartentaste MODE und wählen Sie die

/ (Slave) Betriebsart.

6. Drücken Sie mehrmals die Wahltaste SEL, bis die Anzeige der

Blitzleistung blinkt.

7. Drücken Sie

oder

–

um die Blitzleistung einzustellen.

◆ Legen Sie die korrekte Blitzbelichtung durch übereinstimmendes Einstellen der Entfernungsanzeige

auf dem Display mit der tatsächlichen Entfernung zwischen „Slave“ Gerät und Motiv fest. Sollte sich

die tatsächliche Entfernung außerhalb der Blitzreichweite befinden, wählen Sie bitte eine größere

Blendenöffnung.

◆ Sie können Filmempfindlichkeit und Blendenwert, falls gewünscht, auch am Blitz manuell einstellen.

a. Für die Filmempfindlichkeit ... drücken Sie MODE und wählen Sie ISO, drücken Sie danach SEL,

sodass die Anzeige blinkt. Drücken Sie

oder

–

, um die gewünschte Filmempfindlichkeit

einzustellen und drücken Sie danach die SEL Taste noch einmal.

b. Für den Blendenwert ... Wenn das Blitzgerät auf Slave Betriebsart steht, drücken Sie die SEL

Taste, sodass die Blendenanzeige blinkt und drücken

Sie

oder

–

, um den gewünschten Wert

einzustellen. Drücken Sie danach noch einmal die SEL Taste.Press the SEL button several times

to make the display stop blinking.

8. Drücken Sie mehrmals die Wahltaste SEL, sodass die Anzeige dauerhaft erscheint.

9. Platzieren Sie den Blitz an der gewünschten Position und achten Sie darauf, dass er nicht auf dem

Bild zu sehen ist.

10. Nachdem Sie sich vergewissert haben, dass alle Blitzgeräte aufgeladen und blitzbereit sind,

betätigen Sie den Auslöser und nehmen das Bild auf.

◆ Wenn der EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI voll aufgeladen ist, beginnt das AF-Hilfslicht zu blinken.

◆ Der EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI wird nicht auslösen, wenn er an der Kamera angeschlossen ist,

während er sich im Slave Betrieb befindet.

◆ Wenn Sie ein Original-SONY Blitzgerät oder die TTL-Funktion des eingebauten Blitzgerätes der

Kamera und den EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI als „Slave“ Gerät einsetzen, benutzen Sie bitte nicht

die ADI, DI Funktion, da ansonsten der Vorblitz das „Slave“ Gerät unbeabsichtigt auslösen könnte.

KABELLOSE ZÜNDUNG BESTIMMTER „SLAVE“ GERÄTE

Falls Sie 2 oder mehr EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI Blitzgeräte einsetzen, können Sie durch den

Einsatz der Kanalwahl bestimmen, welche Geräte gleichzeitig blitzen sollen. In dieser Betriebsart wird

ein Gerät als Slave Controller und die anderen werden als blitzende „Slave“ Geräte eingesetzt.

Einstellung der blitzenden Geräte

1. Verbinden Sie das blitzende Gerät mit dem Kameragehäuse.

2. Stellen Sie die Belichtungsfunktion der Kamera auf S oder M.

◆ Stellen Sie die Verschlusszeit auf 1/30s oder länger. Der Slave Controller sendet das entsprechende

Signal, bevor die anderen Blitze auslösen. Wenn Sie daher den Verschluss auf eine kürzere Zeit als

eine 1/30s einstellen, sind die blitzenden Geräte nicht synchronisiert.

3. Schalten Sie das Blitzgerät ein und drücken Sie den Auslöser halb durch.

◆ Nun werden Filmempfindlichkeit und Blendenwert automatisch

an das Blitzgerät übertragen.

4. Entfernen Sie das Blitzgerät von der Kamera.

5. Drücken Sie die Betriebsartentaste MODE und wählen Sie die

/ (Slave) Betriebsart.

6. Drücken Sie die Wahltaste SEL, sodass die Anzeige der

Kanalwahl blinkt.

7. Drücken Sie

oder

–

um den Kanal einzustellen. (C1 oder C2)

8. Drücken Sie die Wahltaste SEL, sodass die Anzeige der Blitzleistung blinkt.

9. Drücken Sie

oder

–

, um die Blitzleistung einzustellen.

◆ Legen Sie die korrekte Blitzbelichtung durch übereinstimmendes Einstellen der Entfernungsanzeige

auf dem Display mit der tatsächlichen Entfernung zwischen „Slave“ Gerät und Motiv fest. Sollte sich

die tatsächliche Entfernung außerhalb der Blitzreichweite befinden, wählen Sie bitte eine größere

Blendenöffnung.

10. Drücken Sie mehrmals die Wahltaste SEL, sodass die Anzeige dauerhaft erscheint.

11. Platzieren Sie den Blitz an der gewünschten Position und achten Sie darauf, dass er nicht auf dem

Bild zu sehen ist.

Einstellung des Slave Controllers

12. Drücken Sie die Betriebsartentaste MODE und wählen Sie die

/ (Slave) Betriebsart.

13. Drücken Sie die Wahltaste SEL, sodass die Anzeige der

Kanalwahl blinkt.

14. Drücken Sie

oder

–

, und stellen Sie den gleichen Kanal ein

wie an der blitzenden Einheit.

15. Drücken Sie die Wahltaste SEL, sodass die Anzeige der

Blitzleistung blinkt.

16. Drücken Sie

, um das Symbol einzustellen.

17. Drücken Sie die Wahltaste SEL, um das Blinken der Anzeige zu beenden.

18. Verbinden Sie den Slave Controller mit dem Kameragehäuse.

19. Nachdem Sie sich vergewissert haben, dass alle Blitzgeräte aufgeladen und blitzbereit sind,

betätigen Sie den Auslöser und nehmen das Bild auf.

◆ Wenn der EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI voll aufgeladen ist, beginnt das AF-Hilfslicht zu blinken.

◆ Sie können den Blendenwert nicht durch die SEL Taste einstellen, sofern das

Symbol bei der

Blitzleistung gewählt wurde.

◆ Die Slave Controller Einheit kontrolliert ausschließlich die blitzenden Geräte.

TECHNISCHE DATEN

Type

Systemblitzgerät, Aufsteck-Type, serienmäßige TTL-Messung, mit

Auto-Zoomreflektor

Leitzahl 61 (ISO 100/m, 105mm Blitzkopfeinstellung)

Energieversorgung

4 AA Type Alkaline Batterien oder 4 AA Type Ni-Cd Akkus oder

4 AA Type Ni-MH Nickel-Metall Hydrid Akkus

Aufladezeit ca. 7,0 s mit Alkaline Batterien ca. 5,0 s mit Ni-Cd oder Ni-MH Akkus

Blitzanzahl ca. 120 mit Alkaline Batterien ca. 160 mit Ni-Cd oder Ni-MH Akkus

Blitzdauer ca. 1/700 s bei voller Leistung

Ausleuchtwinkel

24mm～105mm motorgesteuert

17mm mit eingebauter Weitwinkelstreuscheibe

Automatische

Abschaltung

Vorhanden

Gewicht 330 Gramm

Abmessungen 77mm (B) x 139mm (H) x 117mm (T)

FRANÇAIS

Nous vous remercions d'avoir choisi le flash électronique Sigma EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI. Ce

produit a été conçu spécifiquement pour être utilisé avec les boîtiers reflex SONY AF. Les

fonctions et le mode opératoire pouvant varier d'un appareil à l'autre, nous vous recommandons

de vous référer au mode d'emploi de votre boîtier. Ce flash dispose d'une grande diversité de

fonctions qui vous augmenteront le plaisir que vous éprouvez à faire de la photographie. Pour

profiter au mieux de ses possibilités et en tirer le meilleur parti, nous vous suggérons de lire

attentivement ce mode d'emploi avant toute utilisation, en ayant sous la main celui de votre

appareil. Nous vous conseillons également de le garder toujours à portée de main.

PRECAUTIONS

Avertissement !!

Ce produit a été conçu spécifiquement pour être utilisé avec les boîtiers reflex SONY AF. Toute

autre utilisation pourrait endommager les circuits électriques des appareils concernés.

Ce flash n'est pas étanche. Tenez-le à l'abri en cas d'utilisation sous la pluie, la neige ou les

embruns. Des circuits endommagés par l'eau sont souvent irréparables.

N'exposez pas votre flash, ni l'appareil, à un choc, à la poussière, à de très hautes températures

ou à l'humidité. Ces éléments pourraient causer des dégâts ou un dysfonctionnement.

Si le flash est soumis à un brusque contraste de température, comme de passer d'un extérieu

froid à un intérieur bien chauffé, une condensation peut se former à l'intérieur. Dans une telle

circonstance, placez le flash dans un sac plastique fermé et ne l'utilisez pas tant qu'il n'a pas

atteint la température de la pièce.

Ne rangez pas le flash dans un tiroir ou une armoire contenant de la naphtaline, du camphre ou

tout autre insecticide. Ceci pourrait provoquer des dysfonctionnements.

N'employez pas de dissolvant, de benzène ou tout autre agent chimique pour nettoyer votre flash

ou enlever des traces de doigts. N'utilisez qu'un chiffon doux et humide.

En cas de stockage prolongé, placez le flash dans un endroit sec et tempéré, de préférence

ventilé. Faites le fonctionner plusieurs fois par mois pour entretenir le condensateur.

Pour éviter tout dommage ou erreur de manipulation, nous vous demandons de lire attentivement

ce mode d’emploi avant d’utiliser votre appareil.

Nous attirons particulièrement votre attention sur les deux signes d’avertissement ci-dessous.

Mise en garde !!

Avertissement !!

Ce symbole marque un point important où la plus grande prudence est requise

Ce symbole correspond à une information qu’il convient de respecter

La non prise en compte de cette mise en garde pourrait entraîner un

accident grave ou un dommage sérieux au produit.

Le non respect de cet avertissement pourrait entraîner un accident ou

endommager le produit.

Mise en garde !!

Ce flash comprend des circuits électriques à haut voltage. N'essayez jamais de démonter le

produit, ceci pouvant entraîner une électrocution ou une brûlure. Si la coque est cassée ou fêlée,

ne touchez pas les composants internes.

Ne déclenchez jamais d'éclair à proximité des yeux. L'intensité lumineuse pourrait créer des

dommages irréversibles. Laissez toujours une distance d'au moins 1m/3 pieds entre le visage et

l'appareil lorsque vous photographiez avec le flash.

Ne touchez pas la griffe lorsque le flash est monté sur l'appareil. Vous pourriez subir une

décharge à haute tension.

N'utilisez jamais le flash dans un environnement de produits inflammables tels que gaz, produits

chimiques, solvants, etc…en raison de risques d'incendie ou d'explosion.

DESCRIPTION DES ELEMENTS

ELEMENTS

EXTERNES

1.Tête Flash 2.Illuminateur d'assistance AF 3.Angle d'inclinaison : Haut et Bas

4.Angle de rotation: Droite et Gauche 5.Verrouillage de la tête orientable Haut et Bas

6.Verrouillage du pivotement Droite et Gauche 7.Ecran LCD

8.Couvercle du compartiment piles 9.Bouton de deverrouillage 10.Sabot

11.Réflecteur de lumière 12.Elargisseur d'angle

CONTROLS

13.Bouton de MODE 14.Bouton SELECT SEL 15.Touche d'incrément +

16.Touche de décrément – 17.Bouton ZOOM 18.Bouton TEST

19.Bouton de rétro éclairage LIGHT 20.Lampe témoin de charge 21.Interrupteur

ALIMENTATION ELECTRIQUE

Ce flash fonctionne avec quatre piles alcalines ou quatre accus rechargeables Ni-Cd ou Ni-MH de type

“AA”. Des piles au manganèse peuvent aussi être utilisées, mais leur durée d'utilisation est plus courte

que celle des piles alcalines, et leur usage n'est donc pas conseillé. Remplacez les piles dès que le

temps de charge excède 30 secondes.

◆ Nettoyez les contacts des piles avant installation pour assurer une bonne conductivité.

◆ Les accus Ni-Cd ou Ni-Mh n'étant pas standardisés, vérifiez les contacts avec les extrémités du

compartiment de piles.

◆ Afin d'éviter tout risque d'explosion, d'écoulement ou de surchauffe, utilisez toujours quatre piles AA

neuves de même type et de la même marque. Ne mélangez ni différents types, ni des piles neuves

avec des piles usagées.

◆ Ne cherchez pas à démonter les piles, ni à les décharger. Ne les exposez ni au feu, ni à l'eau : il y

aurait danger d'explosion. De même, ne cherchez pas à recharger des piles, ou des accumulateurs

autres que des accus Ni-Cd ou Ni-Mh.

◆ Si vous n'utilisez pas le flash pendant une longue période, ôtez les piles afin d'éviter tout risque

d'écoulement.

◆ La performance des piles diminue sous de basses températures. Protégez-les du froid lorsque vous

utilisez le flash par temps froid.

◆ Il est toujours recommandé d'emmener des piles de rechange lors d'un long voyage ou en cas

d'utilisation par grand froid.

MISE EN PLACE DES PILES

1. Assurez-vous que le flash est éteint (interrupteur

principal en position "OFF"). Ouvrez alors le

compartiment de piles en faisant glisser le

couvercle dans le sens de la flèche.

2. Insérez quatre piles AA dans le compartiment de

piles, en respectant les polarités + et – comme

indiqué sur les parois.

3. Refermez le couvercle

4. Allumez le flash en plaçant l'interrupteur en position

"ON". Après quelques secondes, la lampe témoin

de charge s'allume, indiquant que le flash est prêt à fonctionner.

5. Appuyez sur le bouton TEST pour vous assurer que le flash fonctionne correctement.

MISE EN VEILLE AUTOMATIQUE

Le flash se met en veille automatiquement après environ 240 secondes de non-activation, afin de

préserver la puissance des piles. Pour le remettre en route, appuyez sur le bouton TEST ou appuyez à

mi-course sur le déclencheur de l'appareil. Le système de mise en veille automatique ne fonctionne pas

en mode de flash distant sans cordon, de mode flash esclave normal ou de mode flash esclave désigné.

INDICATEUR D'ANOMALIE

Si la puissance des piles est insuffisante, ou s'il y a un problème d'information électrique entre le flash

et le boîtier, le symbole "Er" clignote sur l'écran LCD. Dans ce cas, éteignez le flash et rallumez-le. Si

le témoin clignote encore, vérifiez la puissance des piles.

AJUSTEMENT DE LA TETE FLASH

Appuyez sur le bouton de verrouillage "Haut et Bas" et relâchez-le

ensuite en orientant la tête dans la position souhaitée.

◆

apparaît sur l'écran LCD lorsque vous l'allumez. Si cette

icône clignote, c'est que la tête est placée sur une mauvaise

position.

MISE EN PLACE ET RETRAIT DU FLASH

Assurez-vous que le flash est éteint. Placez ensuite le

sabot du flash dans la griffe porte-flash de l'appareil

jusqu'à son encliquetage. 

◆ Lorsque vous attachez ou retirez le flash, tenez

bien le corps du flash afin d'éviter d'endommager le

sabot ou la griffe porte flash.

◆ Si le flash intégré du boîtier est relevé, rabaissez-le

avant de mettre en place le flash sur la griffe.

Pour retirer le flash, faites glisser le sabot tout en appuyant sur le bouton de déblocage. 

REGLAGE DE L'ANGLE DE COUVERTURE

Si vous appuyez sur le bouton ZOOM, le symbole apparaît sur l'écran LCD. Chaque fois que vous

appuyez sur le bouton ZOOM, l'écran LCD affiche la position de la tête zoom selon la séquence

24mm

→ 28mm → 35mm → 50mm → 70mm → 85mm → 105mm → (Auto)

En mode TTL, le flash ajuste automatiquement la position de la tête zoom en fonction de la focale de

l'objectif.

◆ Lorsque vous rallumez le flash, la tête zoom se mettra sur la dernière position utilisée, qui aura été

mémorisée.

◆ Si vous utilisez un objectif dont l'angle de champ est supérieur à l'angle couvert par le flash, les

angles de l'image pourront être sous-exposés.

◆ La portée de l'éclair du flash varie en fonction de la position de la tête zoom.

ELARGISSEUR D'ANGLE

Ce flash est pourvu d'un élargisseur d'angle intégré

qui procure une couverture d'angle pour une focale de

17mm. Pour l'utiliser, veuillez extraire avec précaution

l'élargisseur et le réflecteur et les rabattre devant la

tête flash. Remettez ensuite le réflecteur dans son

logement.

La couverture d'angle se règle automatiquement sur

la focale 17mm.

◆ Si l'élargisseur d'angle est arraché accidentellement,

la tête zoom automatique ne fonctionne plus.

Contactez alors votre revendeur pour faire réparer le flash.

RETRO ECLAIRAGE DE L'ECRAN LCD

Si vous appuyez sur le bouton LIGHT l'écran LCD est éclairé pendant environ 8 secondes. Ce rétro

éclairage peut être interrompu en appuyant à nouveau sur LIGHT .

FLASH AUTOMATIQUE TTL

En mode de mesure TTL AUTO, l'appareil assure le contrôle de la quantité de lumière nécessaire pour

assurer une exposition correcte du sujet.

◆ La méthode de mesure au flash varie selon le type d'appareil et d'objectif utilisés. Nous vous

demandons de vous reporter au tableau ci-dessous : (dans tous les cas, le symbole TTL sera affiché

sur l'écran LCD)

Reflex numérique,

Dynax 60, 40, 7, 5, 4, 3L

Maxuum 70, 50, 7, 5, 4, 3

Dynax / Maxuum 9 Autres boîtiers

ectif AF-D Mesure ADI Pré-éclair de mesure Mesure TTL

Autres ob

ectifs Pré-éclair de mesure Pré-éclair de mesure Mesure TTL

1. Choisissez le mode

sur l'appareil

2. Mettez le flash sous tension; le symbole TTL apparaît sur l'écran

LCD et le flash se met en charge.

◆ Avec un reflex numérique, assurez-vous que le symbole

est

affiché. Dans le cas inverse, appuyez sur les touches + ou

– pour faire apparaître le symbole sur l'écran ACL. Sinon,

l'exposition ne sera pas correcte.

3. Faites la mise au point sur le sujet

4. Vérifiez que le sujet se trouve bien à l'intérieur de la plage de distance indiquée sur l'écran LCD.

5. Appuyez sur le déclencheur lorsque le flash est chargé.

◆ Si l'appareil a reçu la quantité de lumière appropriée, le signe TTL apparaît pendant 5 secondes sur

l'écran LCD. Si cette marque ne s'affiche pas, cela signifie que l'éclairage était insuffisant. Refaites

la photo à une moindre distance.

◆ Le faisceau d'assistance AF s'active automatiquement si vous photographiez dans le noir. Il est

opérant entre 0,7 et 9 mètres (2.3 à 29.5 pieds).

◆ Lorsque le boîtier est en mode M, le flash se positionne, lors de sa mise sous tension, sur les

paramètres précédemment utilisés.

◆ Lorsque le flash est chargé, le témoin de flash apparaît dans le viseur. Si l'obturateur est activé

avant la pleine charge, le flash n'émet pas d'éclair, et l'appareil prend la photo en vitesse lente en

fonction de la seule lumière ambiante.

UTILISATION DU FLASH DANS LES AUTRES MODES

Réglage en mode de priorité à la vitesse

Lorsque vous sélectionnez la vitesse souhaitée, l'appareil détermine la valeur d'ouverture appropriée.

Vous ne devez pas choisir une vitesse plus rapide que la vitesse de synchronisation.

Réglage en mode de priorité à l'ouverture

En mode A, l'appareil sélectionne la vitesse appropriée à une exposition correcte de l'arrière-plan.

Dans ce mode, le flash fonctionne en mode de déclenchement systématique.

Utilisation en mode M

Vous pouvez sélectionner à la fois la vitesse et la valeur d'ouverture. La vitesse peut être choisie entre

la vitesse de synchronisation et la pose B (bulb).

◆ Dans ce mode, le flash est activé systématiquement.

◆ Si vous réglez l'exposition en fonction des indications du boîtier, l' appareil fonctionnera comme en

mode de synchronisation à la lumière du jour ou en synchronisation lente

LIMITES DES PRISES DE VUE CONSECUTIVES AU FLASH

Pour éviter une surchauffe, laissez le flash au repos au moins 10 minutes après des séquences de

prises de vues consécutives en respectant le tableau ci-dessous.

Mode Nombre d'éclairs

TTL, M(1/1,1/2) 20 éclairs consécutifs

M(1/4, 1/8) 25 éclairs consécutifs

M(1/16-1/32) 40 éclairs consécutifs

Stroboscopique 10 Cycles

MODE OPERATOIRE EN FLASH MANUEL

Le flash manuel est utile quand l'obtention d'une exposition correcte en mode TTL est difficile. En

mode manuel, il est possible de faire varier la puissance du flash de la pleine puissance 1/1 au 1/64 de

puissance.

1. Sélectionnez le mode M sur le boîtier.

Appuyez sue le bouton MODE du flash et sélectionnez la marque

3. Appuyez sur le bouton SEL pour faire clignoter le symbole du

rapport de puissance

4. Appuyez sur les touches

–

pour sélectionner la puissance

souhaitée.

5. La valeur de puissance cesse de clignoter et s'affiche en continu

après une nouvelle pression sur le bouton SEL .

6. Faites la mise au point. Vérifiez la distance sur la bague de distance de l'objectif. Ajustez ensuite

l'ouverture ou le ratio de puissance de manière à faire au mieux la portée indiquée sur l'écran LCD

du flash avec la distance réelle du sujet.

7. Lorsque le flash est chargé, il est prêt à déclencher.

◆ Vous pouvez calculer l'exposition correcte en utilisant la formule ci-dessous

Nombre Guide “GN” / distance du sujet = valeur F du diaphragme

Le flash calcule et détermine la distance appropriée en utilisant cette formule. (voir le tableau 1 en

dernière page)

SYNCHRO HAUTE VITESSE (HSS)

Lorsque vous photographiez au flash, vous ne pouvez pas, normalement, utiliser une vitesse plus

rapide que la vitesse de synchronisation car le flash ne peut fonctionner que durant la pleine ouverture

de l'obturateur. La synchronisation rapide (Grande Vitesse) permet d'émettre alors même que le rideau

de l'obturateur est en mouvement. Vous pouvez donc utiliser une vitesse d'obturation plus rapide que

la vitesse de synchronisation.

1. Choisissez le mode flash en appuyant sur le bouton MODE (les

modes “TTL” et “M” peuvent être utilisés).

2. Appuyez sur la touche

–

pour faire apparaître le symbole

sur l'écran LCD.

3. Faites la mise au point sur le sujet.

4. Lorsque le flash est chargé, il est prêt à déclencher.

◆ Le nombre Guide varie selon la vitesse choisie (voir le tableau 2 en dernière page)

◆ Pour annuler le mode de flash FP, reprenez la procédure ci-dessus en supprimant le symbole

de l'écran LCD.

FLASH PREDICTIF

La fonction de flash prédictif permet de visualiser l'éclairage et les effets d'ombres avant de prendre la

photo.

1. Appuyez sur le bouton MODE et sélectionnez le mode flash désiré.

2. Appuyez sur

–

à plusieurs reprises pour faire apparaître l'icône sur l'écran LCD.

3. Assurez-vous que le flash est chargé, et appuyez ensuite sur le bouton TEST pour déclencher le

pré-flashage prédictif.

MODE DE FLASH STROBOSCOPIQUE (MULTI FLASH)

Dans ce mode créatif, le flash émet une série d'éclairs pendant l'ouverture de l'obturateur, générant

ainsi une série d'images du sujet sur la même vue. Le sujet sera particulièrement mis en valeur si

l'arrière-plan est sombre. La fréquence des éclairs peut être choisie entre 1Hz et 100Hz. Il est possible

de produire jusqu'à 90 éclairs en continu. Le nombre maximal d'éclairs dépend du nombre guide du

flash et de la fréquence retenue. (voir le tableau 3 en dernière page).

1. Sélectionnez le mode M sur le boîtier et choisissez l'ouverture.

2. Appuyez sur le bouton MODE pour afficher le symbole MULTI.

Appuyez sur SEL jusqu'à ce que l'affichage de la fréquence clignote

4. Appuyez sur

–

pour sélectionnez la fréquence souhaitée.

Appuyez à nouveau sur SEL pour faire clignoter l'indicateur de puissance.

6. Appuyez sur

–

pour entrer la puissance désirée.

7. Appuyez à nouveau sur SEL , le nombre d'éclairs clignote.

8. Appuyez sur

–

pour paramétrer le nombre d'éclairs.

9. Appuyez à nouveau sur SEL pour faire cesser le clignotement de l'affichage.

10. Le flash est prêt dès que le témoin de charge s'allume.

Nota: Choisissez toujours une vitesse plus longue que : Nombre d'éclairs / Fréquence des éclairs

FLASH INDIRECT

Lors d'une prise de vue au flash en intérieur, il est fréquent qu'une ombre indésirable apparaisse

derrière le sujet. Si vous orientez le réflecteur vers le plafond ou sur le côté vers un mur, l'éclairage du

sujet sera plus doux. Déverrouillez la tête orientable et orientez le réflecteur pour réaliser un éclairage

indirect. Les angles suivants sont possibles :

HAUT : 0°, 60°, 75°, 90° BAS; 0°,7°

(Pour prise de vue rapprochée)

DROITE: 0°

60°

75°

90°

GAUCHE

: 0°

60°

75°

90°

120°

150°, 180°

Lorsque la tête est en position de flash indirect, l'icône

s'affiche

sur l'écran LCD.

La lumière prenant la teinte de la surface sur laquelle elle se

réfléchit, il est recommandé de choisir une surface blanche.

Selon les propriétés réfléchissantes de la surface, la distance du sujet

et d'autres facteurs, l'intensité et la distance réelle parcourue par l'éclair

peuvent varier. Il est conseillé de vérifier la confirmation de l'exposition

correcte (symbole TTL sur l'écran LCD) après la prise de vue.

PRISE DE VUE RAPPROCHEE

La tête peut être orientée de 7° vers le bas pour la prise de vue rapprochée. Cette position ne doit être

utilisée que pour des distances comprises entre 0,5 et 2 mètres. Lorsque le réflecteur est incliné de 7°

vers le bas, l'icône

clignote.

REFLECTEUR DE LUMIERE

Ce flash est pourvu d'un réflecteur de

lumière intégré qui permet de créer un effet

de lumière harmonieux dans les yeux du

sujet en mode d'éclairage indirect. . Pour

l'utiliser, veuillez extraire avec précaution

l'élargisseur et le réflecteur et les rabattre

devant la tête flash. Remettez ensuite le

diffuseur dans son logement.

◆ Pour tirer le meilleur parti du diffuseur, orientez la tête à 90° vers le haut et photographiez à faible

distance.

FLASH DISTANT SANS CORDON (Wireless)

Le mode de commande de flash TTL sans cordon permet de varier les angles d'éclairage, d'accentuer

des reliefs en jouant avec les ombres ou de rendre l'éclairage plus naturel en faisant varier la position

du flash, sans aucun problème de liaison ou de connexion avec le boîtier. Avec le flash EF-610 DG

SUPER SO-ADI, la communication entre l'appareil et le flash se fait au moyen d'un éclair codé émis

par le flash intégré. Dans ce mode, l'appareil détermine automatiquement l'exposition correcte.

◆ Dans les instructions qui suivent, nous appellerons "flash de commande" le flash attaché au boîtier, et

"flash détaché" un flash distant de l'appareil.

◆ Il peut être pratique d'utiliser un mini-pied pour le flash détaché. Le support livré à cette fin avec le flash

comporte un pas de vis permettant de le fixer à un trépied.

◆ Assurez-vous que le flash ne se situe pas dans le champ de la prise de vue.

◆ Placez le flash à une distance comprise entre 0,5m et 5m du sujet (1.5~16ft), et l'appareil entre 1m et

5m du sujet (3~16ft).

◆ Dans le cas où d'autres personnes utiliseraient le mode distant sans cordon près de vous, il peur se

créer des interférences entre vos flashes et les leurs. Vous pouvez sélectionner chacun un canal de

communication différent en vous reportant aux instructions ci-dessus.

A. UTILISATION DU FLASH INTEGRE EN TANT QUE FLASH DE COMMANDE

1. Positionnez le boîtier en mode flash WireLess.

◆

La procédure de réglage dépendant du boîtier utilisé, nous vous

demandons de vous reporter au mode d’emploi de votre

appareil.

2. Choisissez le mode d’exposition P, A, S, ou M sur votre boîtier

3. Appuyez sur le bouton

du flash jusqu’à ce que l’icône

flash détaché apparaisse sur l’écran.

4. Réglez le numéro de flash détaché sur 1 en appuyant sur la touche

5. Appuyez sur le bouton

afin de sélectionner le mode Flash TTL.

6. Appuyez sur la touche

pour faire clignoter le numéro du canal.

7. Appuyez sur la touche

ou pour sélectionner le canal (C1 – C4).

8. Appuyez sur la touche

pour faire cesser le clignotement.

9. Placez le flash sur l’appareil et appuyez à mi-course sur le déclencheur (le numéro du canal est

enregistré par l’appareil).

10. Détachez le flash de l'appareil et placez-le à l'endroit désiré

11. Sortez le flash intégré de l'appareil et vérifiez qu'il est chargé.

◆ En mode de flash distant sans cordon, le faisceau d'assistance AF du flash détaché clignote pour

indiquer qu'il est chargé.

12. Faites la mise au point pour prendre la photo.

◆

Le flash EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI se déclenchera en même temps que le flash intégré. L'éclair

émis par

ce dernier ne sert qu'à contrôler le flash EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI, qui est le seul à

servir à l'éclairage du sujet. L'appareil ajuste la puissance du flash en mode Auto TTL pour assurer

une exposition correcte.

◆ En fonction de la vitesse d’obturation, le flash fonctionnera automatiquement entre flash normal et

synchronisation à haute vitesse.

◆ Lorsque le mode d’exposition du boîtier est le mode M, le flash sera en mode distant manuel.

Après avoir sélectionné le numéro de canal, le niveau de puissance du flash clignotera.

Sélectionnez la puissance souhaitée en appuyant sur les touches

ou et ensuite appuyez

sur la touche

pour faire cesser le clignotement.

UTILISATION D'UN FLASH ATTACHE EN TANT QUE FLASH DE COMMANDE

En mode distant sans fil, deux ou plusieurs flashes EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI sont nécessaires. Le

flash EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI peut être utilisé uniquement en tant que flash détaché. Selon le

modèle de flash utilisé il est nécessaire de changer le mode de contrôle du flash de commande. Voir le

tableau ci-dessous (le flash EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI étant utilisé comme flash de commande).

Type de flash pouvant être

utilisé comme flash détaché

EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI

EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI

EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI

Mode de contrôle

Type de boîtier pouvant être

utilisé en mode flash détaché

α700, α900 α900

Réglage du contrôle ratio

d’éclairage

Il est possible de contrôler jusque

3 groupes : Flash de commande,

Flash détaché 1 et Flash détaché

2. Il est possible de paramétrer le

ratio d’éclairage de chaque type

sur 5 niveaux ou sur inactif.

Il est possible de contrôler 2

groupes : Flash de commande et

Flash détaché.

Flash de commande : il est

possible de paramétrer le ratio du

flash détaché sur 1 :2 ou 2 :1.

Mode Flash

Flash Auto TTL, Flash à

synchronisation Haute Vitesse (TTL,

M),

Flash manuel.

Flash Auto TTL, Flash à

synchronisation Haute Vitesse (TTL)

B-1.ECLAIRAGE PAR LE FLASH DETACHE SEULEMENT.

Réglage du boîtier et du Flash de commande

1. Positionnez le boîtier en mode flash WireLess.

◆

La procédure de réglage dépendant du boîtier utilisé, nous vous

demandons de vous reporter au mode d’emploi de votre appareil.

2. Choisissez le mode d’exposition P, A, S, ou M sur votre boîtier.

3. Placez le flash sur l’appareil

4. L'écran ACL du flash se positionne automatiquement sur les réglages. (Si ce n'est pas le cas,

appuyez sur la touche

jusqu'à ce que les réglages du flash apparaissent sur l’écran.)

5. Appuyez sur la touche

pour faire clignoter l’affichage du mode de contrôle.

6. Appuyez sur la touche

ou afin de paramétrer le mode de contrôle sur .

7. Appuyez sur la touche

pour faire clignoter le numéro de canal.

8. Appuyez sur la touche

ou pour sélectionner le canal (C1 – C4).

9. Appuyez sur la touche

pour faire clignoter l’affichage du ratio d’éclairage.

10.

Appuyez sur la touche

afin de paramétrer le mode de contrôle du ratio d’éclairage sur [ ].

11. Appuyez sur la touche pour faire cesser le clignotement.

Réglage du flash detaché

12. Appuyez sur le bouton du flash jusqu’à ce que l’icône

flash détaché apparaisse sur l’écran.

13. Définissez le numéro de flash détaché à 1 en appuyant sur la

touche

14.

Appuyez sur le bouton

afin de sélectionner le mode Flash TTL.

15. Appuyez sur la touche pour faire clignoter le numéro du canal.

16. Appuyez sur la touche

ou pour sélectionner le même numéro de canal paramétré sur le

flash de commande.

17. Appuyez sur la touche

pour faire cesser le clignotement.

18. Placez le flash détaché à l'emplacement désiré.

19. Vérifiez que les deux flashes sont chargés.

◆ Le témoin de charge est allumé et le faisceau d'assistance AF du flash détaché clignote.

20. Faites la mise au point sur le sujet et prenez la photo.

B-2. PARAMETRAGE D’UN RATIO D’ECLAIRAGE (MODE DE CONTROLE

)

Réglage du boîtier et du flash de commande

1. Effectuez les opérations 1 à 9 du paragraphe B-1.

2. Appuyez sur la touche

ou afin de paramétrer

l’affichage du mode de contrôle du ratio d’éclairage sur [

3. Appuyez sur la touche

pour faire clignoter l’affichage du

mode flash.

4. Appuyez sur la touche

ou pour placer le mode flash

sur TTL.

5. Appuyez sur la touche

pour faire clignoter l’affichage du ratio d’éclairage [ ] du flash de

commande.

6. Appuyez sur la touche

ou pour définir le ratio d’éclairage du flash de commande.

7. Appuyez sur la touche

pour faire clignoter l’affichage du ratio d’éclairage [ ] du flash

détaché 1.

8. Appuyez sur la touche

ou pour définir le ratio d’éclairage du flash détaché 1.

9. Appuyez sur la touche

pour faire clignoter l’affichage du ratio d’éclairage [ ] du flash

détaché 2.

10. Appuyez sur la touche

ou pour définir le ratio d’éclairage du flash détaché 2.

11. Appuyez sur la touche

pour faire cesser le clignotement.

Réglage du flash détaché

12. Effectuez les mêmes opérations qu’au paragraphe B-1 Réglage du flash détaché

◆ Dans le cas d’utilisation de plusieurs flashes détachés, attribuez un numéro de flash détaché à

chacun d’entre eux.

◆ Il est possible de paramétrer le ratio d’éclairage des flash de commande, flash détaché 1 et flash

détaché 2 comme suit :

(Flash inactif) 124816

Le ratio de la puissance de chaque flash est définie par la valeur de chaque unité / valeur totale

[Exemple]

Valeur paramétrée Ratio d’éclairage du flash

Flash de commande 2 2/7

Flash détaché 1 1 1/7

Flash détaché 2 4 4/7

B-3. PARAMETRAGE D’UN RATIO D’ECLAIRAGE (MODE DE CONTROLE

)

Réglage du boîtier et du flash de commande

1. Effectuez les opérations 1 à 6 du paragraphe B-1.

2. Appuyez sur la touche

ou afin de paramétrer le mode

de contrôle sur

3. Appuyez sur la touche

pour faire clignoter le numéro du

canal.

4. Appuyez sur la touche

ou pour sélectionner le canal

(C1 – C4).

5. Appuyez sur la touche

ou afin de paramétrer l’affichage du mode de contrôle du ratio

d’éclairage sur [

]

6. Appuyez sur la touche

pour faire clignoter l’affichage du ratio d’éclairage.

7. Appuyez sur la touche

ou afin de paramétrer le ratio du flash de commande / flash

détaché. (Sélectionnez

8. Appuyez sur la touche

pour faire cesser le clignotement.

Réglage du flash détaché

9. Si le flash détaché est le flash EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI, effectuez les mêmes opérations qu’au

paragraphe B-1 Réglage du flash détaché

◆

Si le flash détaché est le flash EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI, nous vous demandons de vous

reporter au mode d’emploi du flash EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI.

◆ Si le flash détaché est le flash EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI, le numéro de canal peut uniquement

être sélectionné de C1 à C3.

FLASH ESCLAVE

FLASH ESCLAVE NORMAL

Cette fonction vous permet d'utiliser le flash EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI à distance du boîtier, en

utilisant le flash intégré ou tout autre flash pour l'activer.

1. Commencez par placer le flash sur la griffe de l'appareil.

Choisissez le mode d'exposition. Si vous utilisez le mode A ou M, fixez également la valeur d'ouverture.

3. Mettez le flash sous tension. Appuyez ensuite à mi-course sur le déclencheur.

◆ Les valeurs d'ouverture et la sensibilité du film ont ainsi été

transmises automatiquement au flash.

4. Retirez le flash de l'appareil.

Appuyez

sur

bouton

MODE

sélectionnez

symbole

6. Appuyez sur le bouton SEL à plusieurs reprises jusqu'à faire

clignoter l'indicateur de puissance.

7. Appuyez sur

–

pour déterminer la puissance souhaitée.

◆ La puissance doit être déterminée en faisant coïncider au mieux l'indicateur de distance de l'écran

LCD avec la distance réelle existant entre le flash esclave et le sujet. Si la distance réelle est en

dehors de la plage indiquée sur l'écran LCD, il faut changer la valeur d'ouverture.

◆

Vous pouvez régler la sensibilité du film ou la valeur d'ouverture manuellement si vous le souhaitez.

a. Pour régler la sensibilité du film… Appuyez sur MODE pour sélectionner le symbole , et

appuyez ensuite sur SEL jusqu'à ce que l'indicateur clignote. Appuyez sur

–

pour

paramétrer la sensibilité, et appuyez à nouveau sur SEL pour valider.

b. Pour régler la valeur d'ouverture… Après avoir positionné le flash en mode esclave, appuyez sur

SEL pour faire clignoter l'indicateur de valeur d'ouverture et appuyez sur

–

pour déterminer

l'ouverture. Appuyez ensuite sur SEL .

8. Appuyez sur SEL à plusieurs reprises pour valider la puissance.

9. Placez le flash à l'emplacement désiré. Prenez garde qu'il ne soit pas dans le champ de l'image.

10. Après avoir vérifié que tous les flashes sont chargés, prenez la photo.

◆

Lorsque le flash EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI est en pleine charge, la lumière d'assistance AF clignote.

◆ Le flash EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI ne fonctionnera pas s'il est attaché sur l'appareil lorsqu'il est

en mode de Flash esclave.

◆ Si vous utilisez un flash de marque SONY, ou le flash intégré du boîtier en mode TTL, et le flash

EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI en tant que flash esclave, n'activez pas la fonction ADI, le

pré-flashage pouvant faire déclencher le flash esclave prématurément.

FLASH ESCLAVE DESIGNE

Si vous utilisez deux ou plus de deux flashes EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI, vous pouvez désigner

quels flashes se déclencheront ensemble en paramétrant des canaux de communication. Dans ce

mode, un flash servira de flash esclave de contrôle, et les autres de flashes esclaves d'éclairage.

Préparation du ou des flashes d'éclairage

1. Attachez le flash sur la griffe de l'appareil.

2. Choisissez le mode d'exposition S ou M.

◆ Sélectionnez une vitesse d'obturation de 1/30 ou moins rapide.

Le flash de contrôle enverra un signal codé avant le déclenchement

des éclairs d'éclairage. Si vous utilisez une vitesse plus rapide

que 1/30 sec., les flash d'éclairage ne seront pas synchronisées.

3. Mettez le flash sous tension et appuyez à mi-course sur le déclencheur.

◆ Les valeurs d'ouverture et la sensibilité du film ont ainsi été transmises automatiquement au flash.

4. Retirez le flash de l'appareil.

5. Appuyez sur le bouton MODE et sélectionnez le symbole

/ . (Mode de flash esclave)

6. Appuyez sur le bouton SEL pour faire clignoter l'indicateur de canal.

7. Appuyez sur la touche

–

pour sélectionner le canal. (C1 ou C2)

8. Appuyez sur SEL pour faire clignoter l'indicateur de puissance.

9. Appuyez sur la touche

–

pour choisir la puissance souhaitée.

◆ La puissance doit être déterminée en faisant coïncider au mieux l'indicateur de distance de l'écran

LCD avec la distance réelle existant entre le flash esclave et le sujet. Si la distance réelle est en

dehors de la plage indiquée sur l'écran LCD, il faut changer la valeur d'ouverture.

10. Appuyez sur SEL à plusieurs reprises pour afficher les paramètres sélectionnés.

11. Placez le flash à l'emplacement désiré. Prenez garde qu'il ne soit pas dans le champ de l'image.

Préparation du flash de contrôle

12. Appuyez sur le bouton MODE et sélectionnez le symbole / (Mode de flash esclave).

13.

Appuyez sur le bouton

SEL

pour faire clignoter l'indicateur de canal.

14. Appuyez sur la touche

–

et sélectionnez le même canal

que celui retenu pour les flashes d'éclairage.

15. Appuyez sur SEL pour faire clignoter l'indicateur de puissance.

16. Appuyez sur la touche

pour faire apparaître l'icône .

17. Appuyez sur SEL pour confirmer et faire cesser le clignotement.

18. Attachez le flash esclave de contrôle sur l'appareil.

19. Après vous être assuré que tous les flashes sont chargés, prenez la photo.

◆ Lorsque les flashes d'éclairage sont chargés, leur lumière d'assistance AF clignote.

◆ Vous ne pouvez pas régler l'ouverture avec le bouton SEL lorsque vous avez sélectionné l'icône

lors du réglage de la puissance, le flash étant en mode de flash esclave de contrôle.

◆ Le flash esclave de contrôle ne sert qu'au contrôle du déclenchement des flashes d'éclairage.

CARACTERISTIQUES TECHNIQUES

TYPE : Flash électronique à tête zoom automatique et orientable à contrôle TTL

NOMBRE GUIDE : 61 (100 ISO/m, avec réflecteur en position 105mm)

ALIMENTATION : Quatre piles alcalines de type AA ou : Quatre accumulateurs Ni-Cd de type AA ou

: Quatre accumulateurs Ni-Mh de type AA

TEMPS DE RECYCLAGE : environ 7,0 sec. (avec piles alcalines)

: environ 5,0 sec. (accus Ni-Cd et Ni-Mh)

NOMBRE D'ECLAIRS : environ 120 éclairs (piles alcalines)

: environ about 160 éclairs (accus Ni-Cd et Ni-Mh)

DUREE DE L'ECLAIR : environ 1 / 700 sec. (à pleine puissance)

ANGLE D'ECLAIRAGE : 24~105mm avec motorisation automatique

17mm avec l'élargisseur d'angle intégré.

MISE EN VEILLE AUTOMATIQUE : oui

POIDS : 330 g DIMENSIONS : 76mm(l) x 138mm(H) x 116mm(L)

ESPAÑOL

Muchas gracias por comprar el Flash electrónico Sigma EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI. Este

producto ha sido desarrollado específicamente para cámaras SLR de SONY AF. Dependiendo del

modelo de cámara, las funciones serán diferentes. Por favor lea este manual de instrucciones

detenidamente para el cuerpo de su cámara. Para disfrutar de la fotografía, el flash tiene una

variedad de características. Para utilizar la mayoría de estas características, y obtener el

máximo rendimiento y disfrutar de su flash, por favor lea este libro de instrucciones junto con el

manual de su cámara antes de utilizar el flash, y guárdelo a mano para próximas consultas.

PRECAUCIONES

Para evitar posibles daños o perjuicios. Por favor lea el manual de instrucciones muy atentamente,

y preste atención a los símbolos de precaución que vienen a continuación antes de utilizar el flash.

Por favor tome nota de los dos símbolos de precaución que aparecen a continuación.

Advertencia

Cuidado!!

Este símbolo significa puntos importantes, que se requiere cuidado o advertencia.

O Este símbolo contiene información con respecto a acciones que deben prevenir.

Ignorar el símbolo de Advertencia al utilizar este producto, puede causar serio

perjuicios o otros daños.

Ignorar el símbolo de Advertencia al utilizar este producto, puede causa

daños o

uicios.

Cuidado!!

No utilice este flash en ninguno otra cámara que no sea de SONY AF SLR, se podría dañar el

circuito de estas cámaras.

Esta unidad de flash no es resistente al agua. Cuando utilice el flash y la cámara con lluvia,

nieve o cerca del agua, cuide que no se humedezca. A menudo es imposible repara

componentes eléctricos internos estropeados a causa del agua.

Nunca deje la cámara en un lugar con polvo, alta temperatura o húmedo. Estos factores pueden

causar fuego o estropear su equipo.

Cuando el flash está sujeto a cambios bruscos de temperatura, como cuando transporta la

unidad de flash de un lugar frío exterior a uno cálido interior. En este caso, ponga su equipo en

una bolsa de plástico sellada y no utilice la unidad de flash hasta que alcance la temperatura de

ola habitación.

No almacene el flash en un armario, cajón, etc., si contiene naftalina, o otros insecticidas. Esto

podría producir efectos negativos en la unidad de flash.

No utilice gasolina o otros agentes de limpieza para sacar el polvo o huellas dactilares. Límpiese

con un trapo de ropa suave.

Para un almacenamiento prolongado, escoja un lugar frío y seco, preferiblemente con buena

ventilación. Dispare el flash unas cuantas veces al mes para mantener en buen estado sus

funciones.

Advertencia!!

Este flash contiene circuitos de alto voltaje. Para evitar quemaduras no intente desmontar el

flash. Si la carcasa exterior se rompe no toque los mecanismos interiores.

No dispare el flash cerca de los ojos. El brillo del destello podría dañar los ojos. Mantenga una

distancia de al menos 1m entre la cara y la cámara, cuando realice fotografías con flash.

No toque el terminal sincro de la cámara cuando el flash está conectado a la zapata. El circuito

de alto voltaje podría causar un shock eléctrico.

Nunca utilice el equipo en ambientes inflamables, con llamas, gases, líquidos o químicos, etc.

Podría causar un incendio o una explosión.

DESCRIPCIÓN DE LAS PARTES

PARTES

EXTERIORES

1. Cabezal de flash 2. Luz auxiliar AF 3. Angulo de basculación; Arriba y abajo

4. Angulo de giro; Derecha e izquierda 5. Botón de bloqueo y desbloqueo de la

basculación; Arriba y abajo 6. Botón de bloqueo y desbloqueo del giro; Derecha

e izquierda 7. Pantalla LCD 8. Tapa de las pilas 9. Botón de desbloqueo

10. Zapata 11. Panel de luz rebotada 12. Panel angular

CONTROLES 13. Botón de MODO 14. <SEL> Botón SELECTOR

15. <+> Botón de Incremento 16. Botón de Disminución 17. Botón de ZOOM

18. Botón de TEST 19. Botón de LUZ 20. Luz de preparado

21. Interruptor de encendido

ACERCA DE LAS PILAS

Esta unidad de flash utiliza cuatro pilas Alcalinas de tipo “AA” o pilas recargables Ni-Cad / Ni-MH. Las

pilas de Magnesio también se pueden utilizar aunque tienen una vida más corta que las alcalinas. No

recomendamos utilizarlas. Por favor cambie las pilas si la Luz de Preparado tarda más de 30

segundos en iluminarse.

◆ Para asegurar un buen contacto eléctrico, limpie las terminales de las pilas antes de instalarlas.

◆

Las pilas Ni-Cad / Ni-MH, no tienen contactos estandarizados. Si utiliza las pilas Ni-Cad / Ni-MH, por favor

confirme que los contactos de las baterías coinciden correctamente con el compartimento de las pilas.

◆ Para prevenir la explosión de las pilas, una fuga o recalentamiento, utilice cuatro pilas nuevas AA

del mismo tipo y de la misma marca. No mezcle diferentes tipos ni pilas nuevas y usadas.

◆ No desmonte o haga un corto circuito con las pilas, o las exponga al fuego o al agua; podrían

explotar. Tampoco intente recargar pilas que no sean Ni-Cad / Ni-MH recargables.

◆ Cuando el flash no se vaya a utilizar en un periodo largo, saque las pilas del flash, para evitar

posibles daños o roturas.

◆ La vida de las pilas decrece a temperaturas bajas. Guarde las pilas en un lugar cálido cuando utilice

el flash con un tiempo frío.

◆ Como con ningún flash, se recomienda que se lleven pilas de recambio cuando se realice un viaje

largo o se fotografíe al exterior con temperaturas bajas.

CARGA DE LAS PILAS

1. Asegúrese de ajustar el flash a la posición off,

entonces deslice la tapa de las pilas en dirección de

la flecha para abrir el compartimento.

2. Inserte cuatro pilas del tamaño AA en el

compartimento de las pilas. Asegúrese que el + y el

– de las pilas coincide con el dibujo del compartimento.

3. Cierre la tapa.

4. Deslice el interruptor de encendido a la posición ON.

Después de unos segundos la luz de preparado se

iluminará, indicando que la unidad de flash ya está a

punto.

5. Por favor presione el “botón de Test “ para estar seguro de que el flash funciona correctamente.

DESACTIVACIÓN AUTOMÁTICA

Para conservar la carga de las pilas, el flash se desactiva cuando no se utiliza durante

aproximadamente 240 segundos. Para activar el flash de nuevo, presione el botón TEST, o el

disparador de la cámara suavemente. Tenga en cuenta que la “desconexión automática no funciona

con el modo “por control remoto”, con el flash esclavo normal ni en los modos de flash esclavo.

AJUSTE DEL CABEZAL DEL FLASH

Presione el botón de bloqueo y desbloqueo del movimiento arriba y abajo, mientras ajusta el cabezal

a la posición deseada. Aparecerá en la pantalla LCD cuando ponga en marcha el flash, y si esta

marca parpadea entonces el cabezal del flash no está ajustado a una posición correcta.

AJUSTE DEL CABEZAL DEL FLASH

Presione el botón de bloqueo y desbloqueo del movimiento arriba y

abajo, mientras ajusta el cabezal a la posición deseada.

◆ Aparecerá en la pantalla LCD cuando ponga en marcha el

flash, y si esta marca parpadea entonces el cabezal del flash no

está ajustado a una posición correcta.

MONTAR Y DESMONTAR EL FLASH A LA CAMARA

Asegúrese que el flash está desconectado. Entonces

inserte la base de la zapata en la zapata de la cámara

y gire el anillo de la zapata hasta que esté ajustado.



◆ Cuando coloque o desmonte el flash, agarre el

botón del flash para prevenir daños en el pie de la

zapata y la zapata de la cámara.

◆ Si el flash incorporado de la cámara esta alzado, por

favor ciérrela antes de montar la unidad de flash.

Para desmontar el flash de la cámara, deslice el flash hacia fuera mientras presiona el botón de

desbloqueo. 

AJUSTAR EL ANGULO DE COBERTURA DEL FLASH

Cuando presione el botón ZOOM, aparece el símbolo , cada vez que presiona el botón ZOOM, en

la pantalla LCD cambiará y indicará la posición de Zoom en secuencia, tal y como se muestra a

continuación.

24mm

→ 28mm → 35mm → 50mm → 70mm → 85mm → 105mm → (Auto)

Generalmente, en el modo TTL, el flash ajustará automáticamente la posición del zoom de acuerdo

con la focal del objetivo.

◆ Cuando pone en conecta el interruptor principal, el flash memorizará y ajustará el cabezal zoom a la

última posición ajustada.

◆ Si utiliza un objetivo más angular que el cabezal del flash, puede que surjan zonas subexpuestas

alrededor de la fotografía.

◆ Dependiendo del ajuste del cabezal del flash, la potencia del flash puede cambiar.

PANTALLA ANGULAR

Este flash está equipado con un panel angular, que

proporciona un ángulo de cobertura ultra angular de

17mm. Extraiga el panel angular y el panel de luz

rebotada y déjelo caer hasta cubrir el cabezal del

flash. (Sea cuidadoso a la hora de deslizar los

paneles). Después recoja el panel de luz rebotada a

su lugar. El ángulo de cobertura del flash se ajustará

automáticamente a 17mm.

◆ Si la pantalla angular incorporada, sale accidentalmente, el botón ZOOM no funcionará. En este

caso póngase en contacto con el establecimiento dónde compró el flash o con el servicio técnico.

ILUMINACIÓN DE LA PANTALLA LCD

Cuando presiona el botón LIGHT, la pantalla LCD se iluminará acerca de 8 segundos. La iluminación

se prolongará si vuelve a presionar el botón light otra vez.

FLASH AUTOMÁTICO TTL

En el modo TTL AUTO, la cámara controlará la cantidad de luz para obtener la exposición correcta del

sujeto.

◆ Dependiendo del modelo de cámara y la combinación con los objetivos, el procedimiento del flash

TTL varia. Por favor vea el cuadro a continuación. (En todas las combinaciones, TTL aparecerá en

la pantalla LCD)

Digitales réflex,

Dynax 60, 40, 7, 5, 4, 3L

Maxxum 70, 50, 7, 5, 4, 3

Dynax 9

(Maxxum 9)

Otros modelos de

cámara

Tipo de objetivos D Medición ADI Medición Pre-flash Medición normal TTL

Tipo de objetivo NO D Medición Pre-flash Medición Pre-flash Medición normal TTL

1. Seleccione el modo P en la cámara.

2. Conecte el flash, la marca TTL aparecerá en la pantalla LCD y el flash empezará a cargarse.

◆ Por favor, asegúrese que en las cámaras digitales réflex la

función

está activada. Si el indicador no aparece en

la pantalla LCD, presione el botón

–

para que éste

aparezca, de lo contrario la exposición no será correcta.

3. Enfoque el sujeto.

4. Compruebe que el sujeto está localizado en el rango efectivo

de distancia que se indica en la pantalla LCD

5. Presione el botón de disparo después que el flash esté completamente cargado.

◆ Cuando la cámara recibe la exposición adecuada, la marca TTL en la pantalla LCD aparecerá

durante 5 segundos. Si esta indicación no aparece, la iluminación del flash no es suficiente para

esta situación. Por favor vuelva a realizar la fotografía a una distancia menor.

◆ La luz auxiliar AF se activará automáticamente si se enfoca en un lugar oscuro. La distancia

efectiva es aproximadamente de 0.7 a 9 metros.

◆ Recuerde que cuando utiliza el flash con la cámara al modo M, el flash se ajustará al último modo

seleccionado.

◆ Cuando el flash está completamente cargado, la marca del flash aparecerá en el visor. Si se

realiza el disparo antes de que el flash esté completamente cargado, la cámara realizará la

fotografía a la velocidad más lenta.

UTILIZACIÓN DEL FLASH CON OTROS MODELOS DE CÁMARAS

Ajuste para la prioridad de velocidad

Cuando seleccione la velocidad de obturación deseada, la cámara seleccionará el diafragma

apropiado. No podrá escoger una velocidad superior a la sincronización de la cámara.

Ajuste para prioridad de diafragma.

Seleccionando el modo A de la cámara, después de escoger el diafragma deseado la cámara

seleccionará la velocidad apropiada para el fondo. Se utilizará el flash de relleno cuando se

seleccione este modo.

Cuando se utiliza con el Modo M

Usted puede ajustar el diafragma y la velocidad deseada. Puede ajustar la velocidad desde la

velocidad Pose a la velocidad sincro.

◆ El flash de relleno se utiliza cuando se selecciona este modo.

◆ Si se ajusta la exposición de acuerdo con la indicación del fotómetro, la cámara trabajará como

sincro de luz día o sincro lenta.

LIMITACIONES DEL DISPARO CONTINUO

Para prevenir recalentamientos, por favor no utilice la unidad de flash por lo menos 10 minutos

después de utilizar el número de exposiciones que se muestran en la tabla a continuación.

Modo Número de exposiciones con Flash

TTL, M(1/1,1/2) 20 Disparos continuos de flash

M(1/4, 1/8) 25 Disparos continuos de flash

M(1/16-1/32) 40 Disparos continuos de flash

Multi Ciclo 10

OPERACIÓN CON EL FLASH MANUAL

El flash manual es aconsejable cuando la correcta exposición de los sujetos es difícil de obtener con

el modo TTL. En el modo de flash manual, se puede ajustar el nivel de potencia del flash que va

desde 1/1 (completamente cargado) a 1/64, con incrementos de 1 paso.

1. Ajuste la exposición de la cámara al modo M.

Presione el botón MODE en la unidad de flash para seleccionar

3. El número guía parpadeará cuando presione el botón SEL

4. Presione el botón

–

para seleccionar la potencia de flash

deseada.

5. El display del flash manual dejará de parpadear y permanecerá

activo después de presionar el botón SEL otra vez.

6. Ajuste el enfoque presionando el disparador, compruebe la distancia a que se encuentra el sujeto

en el anillo de enfoque del objetivo. Ajuste el nºf o la potencia del flash hasta que la distancia

indicada en la pantalla LCD del flash y la distancia del sujeto se aproxime.

7. Cuando se ilumine la Luz de Preparado en el flash, la unidad está a punto para disparar.

◆ Se puede calcular la correcta exposición utilizando la siguiente fórmula:

Número Guía “NG” / La distancia del sujeto al flash= Nº F

Esta unidad de flash calculará e indicará automáticamente la Distancia al Sujeto apropiada según la

fórmula mencionada. (Por favor mire Cuadro 1 de la última página)

SINCRONIZACIÓN DEL FLASH A ALTA VELOCIDAD (FP) (HSS)

Cuando toma una fotografía con el flash ordinario, no se puede utilizar una velocidad superior a la

velocidad de sincronización de la cámara porque el flash se disparará cuando el obturador esté

completamente abierto. La sincronización del flash a alta velocidad se dispara mientras corren las

cortinillas. De esta manera se puede utilizar una velocidad más rápida que la velocidad de

sincronización.

1. Escoja el modo del flash presionando el botón MODE (Puede

utilizar los modos “TTL” o “M”)

2. Presione los botones

–

varias veces para que aparezca

el icono en la pantalla LCD.

3. Enfoque el sujeto.

4. Cuando se ilumine la Luz de Preparado en el flash, la unidad

está a punto para disparar.

◆ Con la sincronización a alta velocidad, el Número Guía dependiendo de la velocidad de obturación.

El rango del flash será más corto cuando la velocidad de obturación sea más rápida. (Por favor

mire Cuadro 2 de la última página)

◆ La marca

desaparecerá cuando se cancele la función de sincronización a alta velocidad (flash

FP)

MODO DE MULTI FLASH (Estroboscópico)

Mientras el obturador está abierto, el flash puede disparar repetidamente. Para realizar una serie de

imágenes del sujeto en un solo fotograma. En un fondo oscuro con el sujeto iluminado, este modo es más

efectivo. Es posible ajustar la frecuencia de disparos entre 1Hz y 100Hz. Superior a 90 disparos continuados.

El máximo números de disparos varía dependiendo del número guía del flash y de la frecuencia de

disparos. (Por favor mire Cuadro 3 de la última página).

1. Ajuste la cámara al modo M y seleccione el número F.

Presione el botón MODE hasta que aparezca el modo multi-flash.

Presione el botón SEL hasta que parpadee el flash de frecuencia.

4. Presione el botón

–

para ajustar el valor deseado.

5. Después de presionar el botón SEL otra vez, el nivel de la

potencia del flash parpadeará.

6. Presione el botón

–

para ajustar el nivel de la potencia del flash deseado

7. Presione el botón SEL para que parpadee el número de disparos

8. Presione los botón

–

para seleccionar el número de disparos deseados

9. Vuelva a presionar el botón SEL para que deje de parpadear.

10. Cuando se ilumine la Luz de Preparado del flash, la unidad está lista para utilizarlo.

Nota: Por favor seleccione una velocidad de obturación superior a;

Número de disparos que quiere / Frecuencia de disparo

FLASH REFLEJADO

Cuando realice una fotografía con flash en interior, a veces puede

aparecer una fuerte sombra detrás del sujeto, si apunta el cabezal

de flash hacia arriba para reflejar la luz del techo, de la pared etc.

El sujeto se iluminará más suavemente. Presione el botón de

bloqueo y gire el cabezal del flash al ángulo deseado.

Hacia arriba: 0°, 60°, 75°, 90° Derecha: 0°,7°

Derecha: 0°, 60°, 75°, 90°

Izquierda: 0°, 60°, 75°, 90°, 120°, 150°, 180°

Cuando el modo de flash reflejado está activado, aparecerá en la

pantalla LCD la marca

La fotografía recibirá el color de la superficie reflectante. Por favor escoja una superficie blanca para

reflejar el flash. Dependiendo de la superficie reflejada, de la distancia del sujeto y de otros factores, la

distancia efectiva para el TTL AUTO puede cambiar. Por favor compruebe la confirmación de la

correcta exposición (la marca TTL en la pantalla LCD) después de realizar el disparo.

EXPOSICIONES DE APROXIMACIÓN

El cabezal de flash puede inclinarse 7º hacia abajo para las aproximaciones. El flash será efectivo

solo para sujetos de 0.5 metros a 2 metros. Cuando el cabezal del flash está inclinado a 7º la marca

parpadeará.

PANEL DE LUZ REBOTADA

Este flash está equipado con un panel de

luz rebotada, que permite iluminar los ojos

del sujeto cuando el flash esta con el

cabezal basculado (en posición de luz

rebotada). Extraiga los dos paneles

simultáneamente, y después recoja el panel

angular a su lugar. (Sea cuidadoso a la hora

de deslizar los paneles.)

◆ Para crear una luz de captura efectiva, incline el cabezal del flash 90º hacia arriba y tome las

fotografías a una distancia cercana.

CONTROL REMOTO DEL FLASH

Cuando utilice el modo “Control remoto del flash”, puede realizar fotografías con sensación de imagen

tridimensional con sombra o puede realizar imágenes naturales con sombra dependiendo de la

exposición del flash sin ningún cable de conexión entre el flash y la cámara. En el caso del EF-610

DG SUPER SO-ADI, la señal de comunicación entre la cámara y el flash se tiene que realizar con la

luz del flash. En el modo de control remoto del flash, la cámara calculará la correcta exposición

automáticamente.

◆ En estas instrucciones llamamos a la unidad de flash conectada a la cámara “Controlador” y la

unidad de flash a la posición control remoto “Flash esclavo”.

◆ Será de ayuda si utiliza el flash con un mini-stand cuando está separado de la cámara. El

mini-stand tiene la rosca para adaptarlo al trípode.

◆ Asegúrese de no colocar el flash dentro del área de la foto.

◆ Coloque el flash a una distancia entre 0.5m a 5m y la cámara entre 1m y 5m del sujeto.

◆ En el caso que otras personas utilicen un flash por control remoto cerca suyo, le puede influir al

suyo y dispararse. En estas circunstancias ajuste otro canal diferente.

UTILIZAR LA SEÑAL DEL FLASH INCORPORADO COMO DISPARADOR.

1. Fije la cámara en el modo Flash Inalámbrico.

◆ Los ajustes varían dependiendo del modelo de cámara, por favor consulte el manual de

instrucciones de su cámara.

2. Establezca el modo de exposición de la cámara en P,A,S o M.

3. Presione el botón

del flash hasta que aparezca en la

pantalla el icono del flash esclavo.

4. Fije el número del flash esclavo en 1 presionando el botón

5. Presione el botón

para fijar el modo en TTL.

6. La información del canal parpadeará al presionar el botón

7. Fije el número del canal (C1 - C4) presionando el botón

8. Al presionar el botón

, el indicador dejará de parpadear.

9. Conecte el flash a la cámara y presione el disparador a la mitad (el número del canal se graba en

la cámara).

10. Saque el flash de la cámara y póngalo en el lugar deseado.

11. Levante el flash incorporado de la cámara y asegúrese que está totalmente cargado.

◆ La Luz de flash listo se iluminará La luz auxiliar AF parpadeará para indicar que el flash está

preparado para disparar.

12. Enfoque con la cámara y dispare.

◆ El EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI se disparará cuando se dispare el flash incorporado. El flash de la

cámara se dispara solo para poder controlar la potencia, para obtener la correcta exposición.

◆ Dependiendo de la velocidad de obturación, se conectará automáticamente en destello normal o

en destello sincronización alta velocidad.

◆ Cuando el modo de exposición de la cámara se establece en M, será flash inalámbrico manual.

Después de ajustar el número del canal, el nivel de potencia del flash parpadeará. Ajuste la

potencia deseada de salida del flash presionando el botón

o y entonces presione

para detener el parpadeo.

B. UTILIZAR LA SEÑAL DEL FLASH QUE ESTÁ ACOPLADO A LA

CÁMARA COMO DISPARADOR

Para el Flash Inalámbrico, son necesarias dos o más unidades de flash EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI.

El flash EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI únicamente se puede usar sin conectarlo a la cámara.

Dependiendo del modelo de flash que no esté conectado a la cámara, será necesario cambiar el

modo del controlador. Por favor consulte el siguiente cuadro. (El flash EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI se

puede usar como controlador).

Modelos de Flash que se

pueden usar fuera de la cámara

EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI

EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI

EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI

Modo de Control

Modelos de cámara que se

pueden usar con el flash fuera

del cuerpo de la cámara.

α700, α900 α900

Ajustes de relación de

control del destello

Puede controlar hasta 3 grupos;

Controlador, Flash esclavo 1 y

Flash esclavo 2.

Puede fijar la relación de flash de

cada grupo hasta 5 niveles o sin flash.

Puede controlar hasta 2 grupos;

Controlador y Flash esclavo.

Controlador: puede fijar la relación

del flash esclavo en 1:2 o 2:1.

Modos

Flash TTL Auto, Flash Sincro Alta

Velocidad (TTL, M), Flash Manual

Flash TTL Auto, Flash Sincro Alta

Velocidad (TTL)

B-1.EN CASO DE USAR SÓLO EL FLASH INALÁMBRICO

Ajustes de Cámara y Controlador

1. Establezca la cámara en modo inalámbrico.

2. Los ajustes varían dependiendo del modelo de cámara, por favor consulte el manual de

instrucciones de su cámara.

◆ Establezca el modo de exposición de la cámara en P,A,S o M.

3. Monte el flash en la cámara.

4. El panel LCD cambiará de configuración de forma automática.

(Si el panel LCD no cambia automáticamente, presione el botón

hasta que aparezca el control de ajuste.)

5. La pantalla del modo de control parpadeará cuando se pulse el

botón

6. Establezca el modo de control

presionando los botones o .

7. La información del canal parpadeará cuando se pulsa el botón

8. Ajuste el número del canal (C1 - C4) presionando los botones

9. La relación del control del flash parpadeará al presionar el botón

10. Establezca la relación del modo de control del flash en [

] presionando el botón o .

11. Presione de nuevo el botón

, y la visualización dejará de parpadear.

Ajustes del Flash Esclavo

12. Presione el botón hasta que visualice el icono del flash inalámbrico.

13. Fije el numero del flash esclavo en 1 presionando el botón

14. Presione el botón

para establecer el modo en TTL.

15. La información del canal parpadeará cuando se presione el

botón

16. Presione los botones

para escoger el mismo número

de canal que fijó en el controlador.

17. Presione el botón

y el indicador dejará de parpadear.

18. Coloque el flash externo a la posición deseada.

19. Compruebe que los dos flashes estén cargados.

◆ La Luz de flash listo se iluminará La luz auxiliar AF parpadeará para indicar que el flash está

preparado para disparar.

20. Enfoque el sujeto y dispare.

B-2. RELACIÓN CONTROL DEL FLASH (MODO CONTROL

)

Ajuste de la cámara y el controlador

1. Siga los mismos pasos de ajustes del 1 al 9 de la sección B-1.

2. Ajuste el modo de visualización del control [

] presionando

los botones

o .

3. La pantalla del modo parpadeará al presionar el botón

4. Fije el modo n TTL presionando los botones

o .

5. La visualización de la relación del flash [

] del controlador

parpadeará al presionar

6. Establezca la proporción del controlador presionando los botones

o .

7. La visualización de la relación [

] del Flash esclavo 1 parpadeará cuando se presione el botón

8. Fije la relación del Flash esclavo 1 presionando el botón

o .

9. La visualización de la relación [

] del Flash esclavo 2 parpadeará cuando se presione el botón

10. Establezca la proporción del Flash esclavo 2 presionando los botones

o .

11. Al presionar el botón

, el indicador dejará de parpadear.

Ajustes del Flash Esclavo

12. Proceda siguiendo los mismos ajustes del B-1 Ajustes del Flash Esclavo.

◆ Si el número de flashes esclavos es plural, asigne un número a cada unidad.

◆ Puede fijar la proporción del flash para el controlador, el Flash esclavo 1 y el Flash esclavo 2 de la

siguiente manera:

(sin destello)124816

La relación del valor de salida del destello establece el valor de cada unidad / valor total.

[Ejemplo]

Valor Ajuste Relación proporción flash

Controlador 2 2/7

Flash esclavo 1 1 1/7

Flash esclavo 2 4 4/7

B-3. CONTROL PROPORCIÓN FLASH (MODO CONTROL

)

Ajustes cámara y controlador

1. Siga los mismos pasos de ajustes del 1 al 6 de B-1.

2. Fije el modo de control en

presionando los botones o

3. La información del canal parpadeará al presionar el botón

4. Establezca el número del canal (C1 – C4) presionando los botones

5. Fije el modo de visualización de control de relación del flash [

] presionando los botones

o .

6. La visualización de la relación del flash parpadeará al presionar el botón

7. Fije la relación del controlador: Flash esclavo presionando los botones

o .󰎣Seleccione

.󰎤

8. Presione el botón

, y el indicador dejará de parpadear.

Ajustes del Flash Esclavo

9. Si el flash inalámbrico es el EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI, por favor proceda con los mismos ajustes

del B-1 Ajustes Flash esclavo.

◆ Si el Flash inalámbrico es el EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI, por favor consulte el manual de

instrucciones del EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI.

◆ Si el Flash inalámbrico es el EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI, el número del canal solo se puede fijar

del C1 a C3.

FLASH ESCLAVO

FLASH ESCLAVO NORMAL

Aunque el EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI no esté junto con el cuerpo de la cámara, puede disparar el

flash utilizando el flash incorporado o otra unidad de flash.

1. Monte la unidad de flash en la cámara.

2. Ajuste el modo de exposición de la cámara al modo deseado.

Si utiliza el modo A o M, seleccione el diafragma deseado también.

3. Conecte la unidad de flash. Presione el disparador levemente.

◆ Ahora el diafragma y la sensibilidad de la película se transmite

automáticamente a la unidad de flash.

4. Desmonte la unidad de flash de la cámara.

5. Presione el botón MODE y seleccione el modo

/ (Esclavo).

6. Presione el botón SEL repetidas veces para que el indicador de flash externo parpadee.

7. Presione el botón

–

para ajustar la potencia del flash externo.

◆ Determine la potencia apropiada del flash ajustando la distancia que aparece en la pantalla LCD

que coincida la más cerca posible con la actual distancia entre el flash esclavo y el sujeto. Si al

distancia actual está fuera del rango, necesitará cambiar el diafragma.

◆

Puede ajustar la sensibilidad de la película o el diafragma en la unidad de flash manualmente, si lo desea.

a. Para la sensibilidad de la película… Presione el botón MODE y seleccione , entonces

presione el botón SEL para que parpadee el indicador.

Presione el botón

–

y ajuste la sensibilidad deseada, luego presione el botón SEL una vez más.

b. Para el diafragma …Cuando la unidad de flash se ajusta al modo esclavo, presione el botón SEL

para que el indicador de diafragma parpadee, y presione el botón + o – para ajustar el

diafragma deseada, luego presione el botón SEL.

8. Presione el botón SEL repetidas veces para que aparezca el dispositivo.

9. Coloque la unidad de flash en el lugar deseado. No lo coloque dentro del área de la fotografía.

10. Después de comprobar que la unidad de flash está totalmente cargada, presione el disparador

para realizar la fotografía.

◆ Cuando el EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI está totalmente cargado, la luz auxiliar AF parpadeará.

◆ El flash no se disparará si el EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI Super está conectado a la cámara y está

ajustado al Modo Esclavo.

◆ Si está utilizando una marca SONY flash o la cámara incorporada en función de flash TTL de la

cámara, y el EF-610 DG SUPER flash SO-ADI como unidad esclava, por favor, no use ADI/DI

función, como el monitor de pre-flash puede hacer que el esclavo al fuego antes de tiempo.

DESIGNACIÓN DEL FLASH ESCLAVO

Si utiliza dos o más unidades EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI, puede desganar cual de los flashes se

dispararán juntos utilizando los ajustes del canal. En este modo una unidad de flash se utilizará como

controlador esclavo y el resto para disparar como esclavos.

Ajustar los disparos de las unidades de flash

1. Coloque la unidad de flash en la cámara.

2. Ajuste la exposición de la cámara al modo S o M.

◆ Ajuste la velocidad a 1/30 o inferior. El Controlador esclavo transmitirá la señal de designación

antes que a los otros flashes. Aunque si utiliza una velocidad más rápida que 1/30 las unidades de

flash no estarán sincronizadas.

3. Conecte la unidad de flash “ON”, y presione el disparador levemente.

◆ Ahora, el diafragma y la sensibilidad se transmiten automáticamente a la unidad de flash.

4. Saque la unidad de flash de la cámara.

5. Presione el botón MODE y seleccione

(Modo esclavo)

6. Presione el botón SEL para que el indicador de canal

parpadee.

Presione

botón

–

para

ajustar

número

canal.

(C1

C2)

8. Presione el botón SEL para que el indicador de flash externo

parpadee en la pantalla.

9. Presione el botón

–

para ajustar el flash externo.

◆ Ajuste la potencia del flash haciendo coincidir el indicador de distancia en la pantalla LCD lo más

aproximado posible con la distancia entre la unidad de flash esclavo y el sujeto. Si la distancia se

encuentra fuera del rango, necesitará cambiar el diafragma.

10. Presione el botón SEL repetidas veces para que aparezca la señal.

11. Coloque la unidad de flash en el lugar deseado. No lo coloque dentro del área de la foto.

Ajustes para la unidad Controladora Esclava

12. Presione el botón MODE y seleccione / . (Modo esclavo)

13. Presione el botón SEL para que el indicador de canal parpadee.

14. Presione el botón

–

y ajuste el mismo número de canal

para todas las unidades.

15. Presione el botón SEL para que el indicador de flash externo

parpadee en la pantalla.

16. Presione el botón

para que aparezca la marca .

17. Presione el botón SEL para que deje de parpadear.

18. Coloque la unidad de flash controlador en la cámara.

19. Después de comprobar que la unidad de flash está totalmente cargada, presione el disparador

para realizar la fotografía.

◆

Cuando el flash EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI está totalmente cargado, la luz auxiliar AF parpadeará.

◆ Si selecciona la marca en el ajuste de flash externo, no se puede ajustar el diafragma con el

botón SEL, la unidad de flash se tiene que ajustar al modo Controlador Esclavo.

◆ Las funciones del Controlador Esclavo sólo controla la unidad de disparo.

ESPECIFICACIONES

TIPO: Flash electrónico automático zoom TTL tipo Clip-on con controlador de serie.

NUMERO GUIA: 61 ( 100 ISO/m, posición del cabezal 105 mm)

ALIMENTACION: Cuatro pilas alcalinas de tipo AA

cuatro pilas Ni-Cd de tipo AA, cuatro pilas Niquel-hidrógeno de tipo AA.

TIEMPO DE RECICLAJE: acerca de 7.0 seg. (pilas alcalinas),

acerca de 5.0 seg. (con pilas Ni-Cd o Niquel-hidrógeno)

NÚMERO DE DISPAROS: acerca de 120 disparos (pilas alcalinas),

acerca 160 disparos (con pilas Ni-Cd o Niquel-hidrógeno)

DURACIÓN DEL DISPARO: acerca de 1/ 700 seg.( disparo a máxima potencia)

ANGULO DE ILUMINACION DEL FLASH: 24mm a 105mm controlador de motor de potencia

17mm con la pantalla angular incorporada.

AUTODESCONECTABLE: disponible

PESO: 330 g. DIMENSIONES: 77mm x 139mm x 117mm

ITALIANO

Grazie per la preferenza accordata al Flash elettronico Sigma EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI.

Questo prodotto è stato studiato specificatamente per le reflex SONY AF. A seconda del modello

della macchina, funzioni e operatività possono variare. Leggete attentamente questo manuale

quando usate il flash con la vostra macchina. Il flash dispone di molte funzioni per ottimizzare la

vostre riprese. Per avere ottime fotografie e ottenere il massimo dal flash, prima di iniziare a usarlo,

leggete questo manuale e quello della vostra macchina. Tenetelo poi a portata di mano per poterlo

consultare in caso di dubbio.

ATTENZIONE

Per evitare danni o ferite a terzi, leggete attentamente il manuale di istruzioni e fate attenzione ai

segni di allerta riportati di seguito prima di usare il flash. In particolar modo, fate attenzione a questi

due segnali:

Attenzione!!

Questo denota punti rilevanti, per i quali attenzione e cautela sono particolarmente richiesti

Il simbolo contiene informazioni su ciò che non si deve fare

Usare questo prodotto nell'inosservanza del presente segnale di pericolo può

causare serie ferite o mettervi in serio pericolo

Usare questo prodotto nell'inosservanza del presente segnale di pericolo può

causare serie ferite o danni.

Attenzione!!

Il flash contiene circuiti ad alto voltaggio. Per evitare di prendere la corrente o di bruciarsi, non

cercate di smontare il flash. Se la carrozzeria è rotta o incrinata, non toccate le parti interne.

Non scattate flash vicino agli occhi. La luce molto intensa può provocare danni alla vista. Tenete

almeno 1 metro di distanza tra il flash e il viso quando fotografate.

Non toccate il terminale syncro della macchina quando il flash è collegato. Il circuito ad alto

voltaggio può causare scosse elettriche.

Non usate la macchina in ambienti con materiali infiammabili, gas, agenti chimici o infiammabili

liquidi. C'è il rischio di causare un'esplosione.

Attenzione!!

Non usate questo flash con fotocamere che non siano reflex SONY AF; potreste danneggiarne i

circuiti elettrici.

Questo flash teme l'acqua. Se usato sotto pioggia, neve o vicino all'acqua va protetto. Spesso

non è possibile riparare componenti interni danneggiati dall'acqua.

Flash e apparecchio fotografico non vanno esposti a urti, polvere, alte temperature e umidità.

Questi fattori possono causare malfunzionamento o incendio dell'apparecchiatura.

Quando il flash è sottoposto a sbalzi improvvisi di temperatura (es. dal freddo di un esterno al

caldo di un ambiente interno) può formarsi della condensa. In questi casi, riponete l'attrezzatura

in un sacchetto di plastica e non usatela fino a quando non è a temperatura ambiente.

Non riponete il flash in un cassetto o armadietto con naftalina, canfora o altro insetticida. Possono

avere un effetto negativo sul suo funzionamento.

Non utilizzate un lucidante, Benzene o altro agente di pulizia per rimuovere sporco o impronte.

Pulite solamente con un panno morbido appena inumidito.

Se non intendete usare il flash per un lungo periodo, cercate un luogo asciutto e fresco dove

riporlo, preferibilmente con una buona ventilazione. Fate scattare il flash più volte nell'arco di un

mese, affinché mantenga adeguate capacità di funzionamento.

DESCRIZIONE DELLE PARTI

PARTI

ESTERNE

1.testa del flash 2.Luce ausiliaria AF 3.Angolo di rotazione per flash indiretto; su e giù

4.Angolo di rotazione per flash indiretto; destra e sinistra 5.Blocco della rotazione e

pulsante di sblocco: su e giù 6.Blocco SWIVEL e pulsante di sblocco: destra e sinistra

7.Display LCD 8.Coperchio delle batterie 9. Pulsante di scatto 10.Staffa

11. Pannello riflettente 12. Diffusore grandangolare

CONTROLLI

13.pulsante per la selezione dei modi 14.pulsante di selezione (sel)

15.pulsante di incremento (+) 16.pulsante di decremento (

) 17.pulsante zoom

18.pulsante TEST 19.pulsante d'illuminazione LIGHT 20.spia di pronto lampo

21.interruttore accensione

BATTERIA

Questo flash usa quattro pile AA di tipo alcalino o batterie ricaricabili Ni-Cad e Ni-MH. Anche le batterie

al Manganese possono essere usate ma hanno una durata più ridotta rispetto alle alcaline. Se la spia

di pronto lampo impiega più di 30 secondi ad illuminarsi, le pile vanno sostituite

◆ Per assicurare contatti elettrici ottimali, pulite i terminali delle batterie prima di installarle

◆ Le batterie Ni-Cad / Ni-MH non hanno contatti standard. Se le utilizzate, verificate che i contatti delle

batterie siano correttamente allocati

◆ Per evitare esplosioni delle batterie, perdite o surriscaldamento, usate quattro batterie nuove della

stessa marca. Non mischiate batterie di marche diverse, vecchie e nuove insieme

◆ Non mandate in corto le batterie, non smontatele, non esponetele a fonti di calore o d'energia:

potrebbero esplodere. Non ricaricate altre batterie se non quelle ricaricabili al Ni-Cad / Ni-MH.

◆ Se non si utilizza il flash per un periodo prolungato, togliere le batterie per evitare danni o perdite

◆ La funzionalità delle batterie decresce alle basse temperature. Tenete quindi le batterie protette

quando utilizzate il flash al freddo.

CARICAMENTO DELLE BATTERIE

1. Accertatevi che il pulsante d'accensione sia su off,

quindi facendolo scivolare nel verso indicato dalla

freccia, aprite il coperchio del vano batterie

2. Inserite quattro batterie AA nel vano apposito.

Accertatevi che i poli + e

sulle batterie

corrispondano a quelli segnati all'interno del vano.

3. Chiudete il coperchio

4. Spostate il pulsante d'accensione su ON. Dopo

qualche secondo la spia di pronto lampo si

illuminerà, indicando che il flash è pronto.

5. Per essere sicuri del corretto funzionamento del flash, premere il pulsante test

AUTO POWER OFF

Per risparmiare l'energia delle batterie il flash si spegne automaticamente dopo 240 secondi di

inattività. Per riaccenderlo basta premere il tasto TEST oppure premere a metà corsa il pulsante di

scatto della fotocamera. Attenzione: il dispositivo di spegnimento automatico (Auto Power Off) non

funziona nei modi scatto a distanza, flash ausiliario, e flash ausiliario prestabilito.

INDICAZIONI D'ERRORE

Se la potenza delle batterie non è sufficiente o c'è un'indicazione di errore tra la macchina e il flash, la

sigla " Er" lampeggerà sul display LCD. Se ciò avviene, portate l'interruttore acceso/spento su OFF e

quindi su ON. Se l'indicatore lampeggia ancora, controllate lo stato delle batterie.

REGOLAZIONE DELLA TESTA DEL FLASH

Premere il pulsante di blocco e rilascio "su e giù" della testa mobile,

mentre ne regolate la posizione.

◆

appare sul display LCD quando girate il flash e se questa

spia continua a lampeggiare dopo aver sistemato la testa del

flash, significa che non è stata posizionata correttamente.

INSERIMENTO E DISINSERIMENTO DEL FLASH

Controllare che il flash sia spento. Poi infilare lo

zoccolo del flash nella slitta portaccessori della

fotocamera, fino a che si blocca.

◆ Quando attaccate o staccate il flash, afferratelo

saldamente dal basso per evitare danni all'innesto.

◆ Se il flash incorporato della macchina è estratto,

chiudetelo prima di attaccare l'unità flash esterna

Per disinserirlo premere il pulsante di sblocco e

spingere il flash fuori dalla slitta portaccessori.

REGOLAZIONE DELL'ANGOLO DI COPERTURA DEL FLASH

Quando si preme il pulsante dello ZOOM appaiono dei simboli e il display LCD cambia e indica la

posizione dello ZOOM in sequenza, come segue

24mm

→ 28mm → 35mm → 50mm → 70mm → 85mm → 105mm → (Auto)

Nel modo “AUTO”, il flash predisporrà automaticamente il comando per effetto zoom secondo la focale

effettiva dell’obiettivo applicato.

◆ Quando accendete l'interruttore principale, il flash memorizza e regola nuovamente lo zoom

mettendo l'ultima regolazione davanti a quella precedente

◆ Se usate obiettivi con un angolo di ripresa più ampio di quello permesso dalla parabola del flash,

potrebbero esserci delle aree sotto-esposte verso i margini dell'inquadratura

◆ A seconda della regolazione della parabola del flash, la sua potenza può variare

DIFFUSORE GRANDANGOLARE

Il flash incorpora un filtro diffusore grandangolare che assicura la copertura fino alla focale del

supergrandangolare da 17mm. Estrarre il pannello

diffusore assieme al pannello riflettente dalla testa del

flash. (Estrarre i pannelli lentamente, con delicatezza.)

Poi spingere il pannello riflettente nel suo

alloggiamento. L’angolo di copertura del flash diventa

automaticamente pari alla focale da 17mm.

◆ Se il pannello si stacca accidentalmente, il pulsante

dello ZOOM non funzionerà. In questo caso,

contattate il negozio dove avete acquistato il flash o

un centro di assistenza.

ILLUMINAZIONE DEL DISPLAY LCD

Quando premete il pulsante LIGHT, il display LCD si illumina per circa 8 secondi. Se premete

nuovamente il pulsante LIGHT il display si spegnerà.

FLASH AUTOMATICO TTL

Nel modo di funzionamento TTL AUTO la fotocamera controlla automaticamente la quantità di luce

emessa dal flash, in modo che il soggetto riceva la necessaria quantità di luce.

◆ A seconda del modello di fotocamera e dell'obiettivo montato, la lettura TTL del flash varia. Riferirsi

alla seguente tabella. ( Con tutte le combinazioni l'indicazione TTL compare nel display LCD)

Digitali SLR, Dynax 60, 40, 7, 5, 4, 3L

Dynax 9 Altri modelli

Obiettivi D ADI Misurazione pre-flash TTL normale

Obiettivi non D Misurazione pre-flash Misurazione pre-flash TTL normale

1. Impostare il modo di esposizione della fotocamera su P

2. Accendere l'interruttore del flash che inizierà a caricarsi, mentre

la scritta TTL apparirà nel display LCD

◆ Con le fotocamere reflex Digitali SLR, assicuratevi che la spia

sia accesa. Se la spia è spenta, premere I pulsanti

oppure

, in questo modo la spia apparirà nel pannello

LCD, in caso contrario l’esposizione potrebbe essere sbagliata

3. Inquadrare il soggetto

4. Controllare che il soggetto sia nell'ambito delle distanze indicate nel pannello LCD del flash

5. Premere il pulsante di scatto, appena il flash abbia finito di caricarsi.

◆ Se il soggetto riceve la quantità di luce necessaria a una giusta esposizione, la scritta TTL

comparirà nel display LCD per circa cinque secondi. Se ciò non avviene significa che l'esposizione

non è stata sufficiente. E' necessario scattare una nuova foto, da una distanza minore.

◆ L'illuminatore AF si metterà automaticamente in funzione quando viene inquadrato un soggetto non

illuminato a sufficienza. La portata dell'illuminatore AF va da circa 0,7 metri a 9 metri.

◆ Ricordare che quando viene impostato sulla fotocamera il modo di funzionamento manuale M, il

flash funzionerà secondo l'ultimo modo di funzionamento impostato.

◆ Quando il flash è carica, nel mirino compare la spia di pronto flash. Se il pulsante di scatto viene

premuto prima che il flash sia del tutto carico, il lampo non scatterà e la fotocamera riprenderà il

soggetto con un tempo lento, determinato dalla esposizione della sola luce ambiente.

USO DEL FLASH CON LA FOTOCAMERA IN ALTRI MODI DI FUNZIONAMENTO

A priorità di esposizione

Quando impostate la velocità di scatto, la fotocamera automaticamente imposta il diaframma più adatto.

Non è possibile impostare una velocità di scatto più breve di quella di sincronizzazione con flash.

A priorità di diaframma

Impostando il modo A, dopo aver scelto il valore di diaframma desiderato, la fotocamera imposta

automaticamente il tempo di scatto, in modo da avere una corretta esposizione dello sfondo.

Impostando questo modo il flash funziona in fill flash.

Modo M, manuale

Potete impostare manualmente sia il valore di diaframma che il tempo di scatto. Si possono impostare tutti

i tempi compresi fra quello di sincronizzazione flash e la posa Bulb. In questo modo di funzionamento il

flash offre la possibilità di fill flash. Impostando i calori di esposizione suggeriti all'esposimetro, la

fotocamera lavora sia con la sincronizzazione normale, per luce diurna, sia con la sincronizzazione lenta.

LIMITAZIONI QUANDO SI SCATTA IN SEQUENZA

Per evitare il surriscaldamento, non usate il flash per almeno 10 minuti dopo una sequenza di scatti,

come indicato nella tabella

Modalità Numero di esposizioni flash

TTL, M (1/1,1/2)) 20 esposizioni continuate

M(1/4, 1/8) 25 esposizioni continuate

M(1/16-1/32) 40 esposizioni continuate

Multi 10 cicli

FLASH MANUALE

La regolazione manuale del flash è conveniente quando le condizioni sono tali che il sistema TTL non

funzionerebbe bene. Nel modo di funzionamento manuale è possibile regolare vari livelli di potenza,

da 1/1( piena potenza) a 1/64 di potenza, con incrementi di uno stop.

1. Regolate la macchina in modalità M o A

2. Premete il pulsante MODE sul flash fino a selezionare M

3. Quando premete il pulsante SEL, il valore del numero guida

lampeggia

4. Premete il pulsante

per regolare la potenza del flash

5. Il display d'uscita del flash manuale cesserà di lampeggiare

premendo nuovamente SEL

6. Attivare la messa a fuoco premendo il pulsante di scatto. Leggere la distanza fotocamera/soggetto

sull'anello delle distanze dell'obiettivo. Poi regolare il diaframma o la potenza del flash su di un

valore che faccia coincidere, la distanza indicata sul display LCD del flash con quella letta sulla

ghiera dell'obiettivo.

7. Quando la spia Ready si illumina, il flash è pronto per funzionare

◆ Potete calcolare la corretta esposizione seguendo la seguente formula:

Numero guida NG/distanza del flash dal soggetto=F-stop

Questo flash calcolerà automaticamente e indicherà la distanza appropriata dal soggetto seguendo la

formula di cui sopra. (Consultare la tabella 1 dell'ultima pagina)

SINCRONIZZAZIONE AD ALTA VELOCITÀ' (FP) (HSS)

Quando si fotografa con un normale flash, non si può utilizzare una velocità maggiore di quella di

sincronizzazione perché il flash deve scattare quando la tendina è completamente aperta. La

sincronizzazione ad alta velocità consente invece al flash di scattare mentre la tendina sta ancora

aprendosi. Di contro è possibile usare una velocità di scatto della macchina superiore a quella di

sincronizzazione.

1. Selezionate la modalità del flash intervenendo sul pulsante

MODE (possono essere usate le modalità TTL o M)

2. Premere il pulsante

e fare apparire la relativa

indicazione sul display LCD

3. Mettete a fuoco

4. Quando sul flash si accende la spia

di pronto lampo potete

scattare la foto.

◆ Con la sincronizzazione high-speed, il Numero Guida cambia in relazione alla velocità di ripresa. Il

campo d’azione del flash sarà inferiore quando la velocità è alta. (Consultare la tabella 2 dell'ultima

pagina)

◆ Per cancellare il modo di funzionamento FP (flash ad alta velocità) seguite la procedura Flash ad

alta velocità per far comparire l'indicazione

relativa sul display LCD.

FLASH DI RIEMPIMENTO

Se si usa la funzione Flash di riempimento è possibile controllare gli effetti di luce e ombra, prima di

scattare la foto.

1. Premere il pulsante MODE impostare il modo di funzionamento desiderato.

2. Premere il pulsante

alcune volte per far apparire la scritta sul display LCD.

3. Accertarsi che il flash sia pronto al lampo, poi premere il pulsante TEST per farlo scattare.

MODALITÀ MULTI FLASH

Mentre l’otturatore è aperto, il flash scatterà ripetutamente e una serie di immagini del soggetto verrà

esposta sul medesimo fotogramma.. Uno sfondo scuro con un soggetto chiaro ottimizza l’impiego di

questa modalità. E’ possibile regolare la frequenza degli scatti del flash tra 1Hz e 100 Hz. Si possono

raggiungere fino a 90 scatti di seguito. Il numero massimo di scatti varia a seconda del numero guida

del flash e della frequenza di scatto. (Consultare la tabella 3 dell'ultima pagina)

1. Regolate la modalità di esposizione della macchina su M e

impostate anche il valore di diaframma

2. Premete il pulsante MODE fino a quando appare l’opzione

Multi-flash

3. Premete SEL fino a quando la frequenza di scatto del flash

comincia a lampeggiare

4. Premete il pulsante

per impostare il valore desiderato

5. Dopo aver premuto nuovamente il pulsante SEL, la spia del livello di potenza del flash inizierà a

lampeggiare

6. Premete il pulsante

per regolare il livello di potenza

Premete il pulsante SEL e il numero di scatti inizierà a lampeggiare

8. Premete il pulsante

per impostare il numero dei lampi che si vuole ottenere

9. Premete il pulsante SEL e il display cesserà di lampeggiare

10.

Quando la spia READY del flash è illuminata, il flash è pronta per l’uso

Nota: regolate la velocità dell’otturatore maggiore di;

(Numero dei lampi desiderati-Frequenza dei lampi)

FLASH INDIRETTO

Quando, in una stanza, si scatta una foto con il flash, a volte una pesante ombra appare dietro al

soggetto. Se si punta la parabola del flash verso l’alto, facendo riflettere la luce dal soffitto o dalle

pareti, il soggetto avrà un’illuminazione più morbida. Premete il pulsante di blocco e ruotate la testa del

flash in modo da regolare il suo angolo d'inclinazione nelle varie direzioni.

In alto: 0, 60, 75, 90 In basso; 0,7

Destra: 0, 60, 75, 90 Sinistra: 0, 60, 75,90, 120, 150, 180

Quando la modalità Flash Indiretto è attiva, l'apposito simbolo

apparirà sul display LCD.

L’immagine sarà influenzata dal colore dalla superficie riflettente.

Meglio se pareti e soffitto sono bianchi.

A causa della riflettanza della superficie, della distanza del soggetto

e di altri fattori, l’effettiva distanza per la modalità TTL AUTO può

variare. Controllate che l'esposizione sia corretta (simboli TTL sul

display LCD) prima di scattare.

ESPOZISIONE CLOSE-UP

Per il flash indiretto può essere acceso al 7° per close-up. Il Flash sarà operativo solo per soggetti da

0,5 a 2m. Quanto la testa del flash si attiva 7° si accende il simbolo

PANNELLO RIFLETTENTE

Il flash incorpora un pannello riflettente che

contribuisce a creare il punto di luce di luce

negli occhi del soggetto quando si usa il

flash nella modalità di lampo riflesso.

Estrarre il pannello diffusore e quello

riflettente e riposizionare il diffusore nel suo

alloggiamento. (Estrarre diffusore e pannello

con la massima delicatezza.)

◆ Per utilizzare nel modo migliore il pannello diffusore, ribaltare di 90° gradi in alto la testa del flash e

riprendere il soggetto da breve distanza.

FLASH TELECOMANDATO SENZA FILI (WIRELESS)

Usando il modo " flash a distanza senza fili" è possibile ottenere fotografie in cui i volumi del soggetto sono

messi in maggiore risalto da ombre appropriate. Ciò dipende dalla posizione dei flash. E' possibile

sistemare il flash nella posizione migliore grazie al collegamento a distanza che non richiede cavetti di

sincronizzazione. La comunicazione tra fotocamera e flash avviene, con il EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI,

grazie alla stessa luce del flash. In questo modo di funzionamento la fotocamera calcola automaticamente

la corretta esposizione.

◆ In queste pagine chiameremo il flash inserito nella fotocamera "Flash principale " e il flash staccato

"flash esterno ".

◆ E' necessario fissare su di un treppiede il flash separato dalla fotocamera. Tutti i treppiedi posseggono

una vite da avvitare nel corrispondente foro filettato presente sulla base del flash.

◆ Attenzione a non mettere il flash nel campo inquadrato dall'obiettivo.

◆ Il flash può venire sistema a una distanza dal soggetto variabile tra 0,5 e 5 metri, anche la distanza

fotocamera/soggetto può variare da 0,5 a 5 metri.

◆ Se un altro fotografo usa un sistema di flash a distanza assieme a voi, può accadere che i vostri flash

emettano luce senza che li abbiate comandati. Ma in seguito al lampeggiare degli altri flash. In questo

caso è necessario impostare un canale di trasmissione diverso da quello impostato dall'altro fotografo.

A. USO DEL FLASH INCORPORATO

1. Impostare la fotocamera sulla modalità flash wireless

◆ Dal momento che il settaggio cambia, a seconda della fotocamera, consultare il libretto d’istruzioni

della medesima.

2. Impostare la modalità di esposizione su P, A, S, o M.

3. Premere il pulsante

del flash finchè compare il display

del flash esterno

4. Impostare il flash esterno sul n1 premendo il pulsante

5. Premere il pulsante

per importare la Modalità Flash TTL

6. Informazioni sul canale inizieranno a lampeggiare premendo il

pulsante

7. Impostare il numero del canale (C1-C4) premendo I pulsanti

8. Premendo il pulsante

la spia smetterà di lampeggiare

9. Inserire il flash nella slitta del corpo macchina e premere il pulsante di scatto a metà corsa (il

numero del canale settato verrà memorizzato nella fotocamera)

10. Staccare il flash dalla fotocamera e metterlo nella posizione desiderata

11. Estrarre il flash incorporato della fotocamera e assicurarsi che sia carico.

◆ Nel modo di funzionamento "flash a distanza" quando il flash è carico, l'illuminatore autofocus si

mette a lampeggiare.

12. Mettere a fuoco l'obiettivo.

◆ The EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI will fire when the built-in flash fires. The camera’s built-in flash is

fired only for control of the EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI. The illimunation of the subject is done by

the EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI. The camera will control the flash power as a TTL Auto flash, to

obtain the correct exposure.

◆ Secondo la velocità dell’otturatore, il flash passerà automaticamente dalla modalità normale a

quella ad alta velocità e viceversa

◆ Quando la modalità d’esposizione è impostata su M, funzionerà in wireless manuale.Dopo aver

impostato il numero del canale, inizierà a lampeggiare l’indicatore di potenza. Impostare la potenz

desiderata premendo il pulsante

oppure e poi premere il pulsante per far cessare il

lampeggiamento.

USO DEL FLASH COLLEGATO ALLA FOTOCAMERA

Per la ripresa flash wireless sono necessary due o più flash EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI. Il modello

EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI può essere usato solamente non connesso alla fotocamera.A seconda

del flash usato staccato dalla fotocamera è necessario variare la modalità di controllo del flash

principale. Riferirsi alla tabella che segue. ( può essere usato come flash principale un EF-610 DG

SUPER SO-ADI)

Flash che possono essere

usati separati dalla fotocamera

EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI

EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI

EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI

Modalità di controllo

Fotocamere che possono

essere usate con flash separato

α700, α900 α900

Settaggio per la potenza dei

flash

E’ possibile pilotare fino a 3

gruppi: Principale, staccati dalla

fotocamera Flash 1 e Flash 2. E’

possibile impostare la potenza di

ciascun gruppo di flash fino a 5

livelli.

E’ possibile controllare 2 gruppi:

Principale e Flash staccato dalla

fotocamera.

Principale: è possibile impostare

la potenza sel flash staccato su

due livelli 1:2 o 2:1

Modalità Flash

Flash TTL Auto,

Sincronizzazione ad Alta Velocità

Flash (TTL,M), Flash Manuale

Flash TTL Auto,

Sincronizzazione Flash ad Alta

Velocità (TTL)

B-1.QUANDO SI USA SOLO IL FLASH SEPARATO DALLA FOTOCAMERA

Settaggio fotocamera e Flash principale

1. Settare la fotocamera nella modalità flash wireless

◆ Dal momento che I settaggi cambiano a seconda della

fotocamera, consultare il libretto d’istruzioni della fotocamera

2. Impostare la modalità d’esposizione della fotocamera su P, A, S

o M

3. Inserire il flash nella slitta della fotocamera

4. Il pannello LCD del flash automaticamente visualizzerà le opzioni di controllo. ( Se il pannelo LCD

non cambia automaticamente, premere il pulsante

finché non si visualizzeranno)

5. La visualizzazione dela modalità di controllo si metterà a lampeggiare quando è premuto il pulsante

6. Impostare le modalità su premendo il pulsante

7. L’informazione sul canale si metterà a lampeggiare premendo il pulsante

8. Impostare il numero del canale (C1-C4) premendo I pulsanti

9. L’indicazione del controllo della potenza lampeggerà mentre si tiene premuto il pulsante

10. Impostare la modalità di controllo da [

] premendo il pulsante

11. Premendo nuovamente il pulsante

il display cesserà di lampeggiare

Settaggio Flash esterno

12. Premere il pulsante finchè non appare il display riferito al flash esterno

13. Impostare il flash esterno n1 premendo il pulsante

14. Premere il pulsante

per impostare la modalità TTL

15. L’informazione sul canale scelto lampeggerà quando si tiene

premuto il pulsante

16. Premere il pulsante

per impostare il medesimo

numero di canale del flash principale

17. Premere il pulsante

e l’indicatore smetterà di lampeggiare

18. Mettere il flash ausiliario nella posizione desiderata.

19. Assicurarsi che entrambi i flash siano carichi.

◆ La spia di pronto lampo lampeggerà e la luce dell'illuminatore ausiliario AF lampeggerà anch'essa

per indicare il pronto lampo.

20. Mettere a fuoco e scattare la foto

B-2.COMANDO DELLA POTENZA FLASH (MODALITÀ CONTROLLO

)

Settaggio Fotocamera e Flash principale

1. La procedura è la medesima dal punto 1 al punto 9 di B-1

2. Impostare la modalità controllo potenza su [

] premendo il

pulsante

3. L’indicazione della modalità flash lampeggerà premendo il

pulsante

4. Impostare la modalità TTL premendo il pulsante

5. L’indicazione della potenza [

] del flash principale lampeggiarà tenendo il pulsante

premuto

6. Impostare la potenza del flash principale premendo il pulsante

7. L’indicazione della potenza del flash [

] riferita al Flash esterno 1 lampeggerà tenendo premuto

il pulsante

8. Impostare la potenza del Flash esterno 1 premendo il pulsante

9. L’indicazione della potenza del flash [

] riferita al Flash esterno 2 si metterà a lampeggiare

premendo il pulsante

10. Impostare la potenza del Flash esterno 2 premendo il pulsante

11. Premendo il pulsante

, la spia cesserà di lampeggiare

Settaggio Flash esterno

12. La procedura è la medesima del paragrafo B-1 (Settaggio flash esterno)

◆ Se si usano più flash esterni, allocare il numero del flash desiderato su ciascuna unità

◆ E’ possibile impostare la potenza del flash principale, del Flash esterno1 e del Flash esterno 2

seguendo la procedura seguente

(senza flash) 124816

Il rapporto tra le potenze dei flash è impostato secondo la proporzione singolo flash/potenza totale

[Esempio]

Potenza impostata Rapporto potenze

Flash principale 2 2/7

Flash esterno 1 1 1/7

Flash esterno 2 4 4/7

B-3. CONTROLLO RAPPORTO POTENZA FLASH (MODALITÀ DI CONTROLLO )

Settaggio Fotocamera e Flash principale

1. La procedura è la medesima dal punto 1 al punto 6 del paragrafo B-1

2. Impostare la modalità di controllo

premendo il pulsante

3. L’informazione sul canale si metterà a lampeggiare premendo il pulsante

4. Impostare il numero del canale (C1-C4) premendo il pulsante

5. Impostare la modalità controllo rapporto flash da [

]

premendo il pulsante

6. L’indicazione del rapporto tra flash si metterà a lampeggiare

premendo il pulsante

7. Impostare il rapporto del flash principale:Flash esterno si prema

il pulsante

( Impostare o .)

8. Premendo il pulsante

la spia cesserà di lampeggiare.

Settaggio del Flash esterno

9. Se il flash esterno è il modello EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI eseguire la medesima procedura del

paragrafo (Settaggio Flash Esterno)

◆ Se il Flash esterno è il modello EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI consultare il manuale d’uso del

modello EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI.

◆ Se il Flash esterno è il modello EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI il numero di anale può essere

impostato solamente da C1 a C3

FLASH AUSILIARIO

FLASH AUSILIARIO NORMALE

Anche se il flash EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI non è collegato alla fotocamera, lo si può far scattare

ugualmente mediante il flash incorporato alla fotocamera stessa, oppure mediante un altro flash.

1. Collegare il flash alla macchina fotografica

2. Impostare sulla fotocamera il modo di esposizione desiderato. Se impostate A oppure M, dovete

impostare anche l'apertura di diaframma desiderata.

3. Accendere l'interruttore del flash. Premere il pulsante della

fotocamera a metà corsa.

◆ Da questo momento l'apertura del diaframma e la sensibilità

della pellicola sono automaticamente trasmessi al flash.

4. Scollegare il flash dalla fotocamera

5. Premere il pulsante MODE e impostare il modo

(ausiliario)

6. Premere il pulsante SEL alcune volte e far lampeggiare l'indicatore dei valori d'uscita del flash

7. Premere il pulsante

per selezionare i valori d'uscita

◆ Determinare la potenza del flash selezionando, sul pannello LCD, una distanza che sia la più vicina

possibile a quella tra il flash accessorio e il soggetto

◆ Potete anche impostare manualmente sul flash la sensibilità della pellicola o il valore di diaframma

A. Per la sensibilità della pellicola...premere MODE e selezionare ISO, poi premere il pulsante

SEL per far lampeggiare l'indicatore. Premere il pulsante

e impostare la sensibilità della

pellicola, infine premere ancora il pulsante SEL

B. Per il valore di diaframma....se il flash è regolato sul modo Slave, premere il pulsante SEL per

far lampeggiare l'indicatore del valore di diaframma, poi premere il pulsante

per

impostare il valore di diaframma desiderato. Infine premere il pulsante SEL

8. Premere il pulsante SEL alcune volte per far apparire l'indicazione

9. Sistemare il flash secondario nel punto desiderato. Ricordarsi di non sistemare il flash secondario

all'interno della inquadratura

10. Dopo esservi assicurati che tutti i flash siano pronti al lampo, premete il pulsante di scatto per

realizzare la fotografia

◆ Quando si usa un flash SONY, oppure il flash TTL incorporato alla fotocamera, e il flash EF-610 DG

SUPER SO-ADI come flash ausiliario, non bisogna usare le funzioni ADI , DI, perché il pre flash

provocherà l'anticipata accensione del flash.

◆

Quando il flash EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI è pronto al lampo, la luce ausiliaria AF si mette a lampeggiare

◆ Il flash non scatterà se il flash EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI è collegato al corpo macchina mentre è

regolato sul modo Slave

◆ Si utiliza un flash Minolta o la función TTL del flash incorporado de la cámara, y un EF-610 DG

SUPER SO-ADI como unidad esclava, por favor no utilice la función ADI, DI como monitor de pre

flash, podría causar el disparo prematuro del flash esclavo.

STABILIRE I FLASH SECONDARI

Se si usano due o più flash EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI è possibile stabilire quali flash debbano scattare

insieme

mediante la selezione dei canali. In questo modo un flash funge da flash principale e gli altri da

secondari.

Impostare i flash per lo scatto

1. Collegare il flash che deve scattare alla fotocamera

2. Impostare la fotocamera sul modo di funzionamento S o M

◆ Impostare la velocità dell'otturatore su 1/30 o un tempo più lungo.Il flash principale trasmetterà le

informazioni prima che gli altri flash scattino a loro volta. Se si usa un tempo di sincronizzazione più

veloce di 1/30 i vari flash non scatteranno in sincronia l'uno con l'altro.

3. Mettete su ON l'interruttore del flash e premete a metà corsa il pulsante di scatto.

◆

In questo modo l'apertura del diaframma e la sensibilità del film saranno automaticamente trasferiti al flash

4. Staccare il flash dalla fotocamera

5. Premere il pulsante MODE e impostare / ( Modo slave)

Premere il pulsante SEL per far lampeggiare l'indicatore del canale

7. Premere il pulsante

per impostare il numero del canale

(C1 o C2)

8. Premere il pulsante SEL per far lampeggiare l'indicazione del

valore d'uscita del flash

9. Premere il pulsante

per impostare il valore d'uscita

◆ Stabilire la potenza del flash impostando, sul pannello LCD, una distanza che sia la più vicina

possibile a quella che intercorre tra il flash secondario e il soggetto. Se la distanza è fuori dalla

portata, cambiare l'apertura del diaframma.

10. Premere il pulsante SEL alcune volte per far apparire l'indicazione

11. Mettere il flash nella posizione voluta. Attenzione a non inserire il flash nella inquadratura.

Impostare il flash principale

12. Premere il pulsante MODE e impostare / (Modo slave)

13. Premere il pulsante SEL per far lampeggiare l'indicatore del

canale

14. Premere il pulsante

e impostare lo stesso numero di

canale dei flash che debbono scattare

15. Premere il pulsante SEL per far lampeggiare l'indicazione del

valore d'uscita del flash

16. Premere il pulsante

per far comparire la segnalazione

17. Premere il pulsante SEL per far cessare il lampeggiamento della indicazione

18. Collegare il flash principale alla fotocamera

19. Dopo esservi assicurati che tutti i flash siano pronti al lampo, premete il pulsante di scatto per

realizzare la fotografia

◆ Quando il flash principale EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI è pronto al lampo, la luce ausiliaria AF si

metterà a lampeggiare

◆ Non è possibile impostare il diaframma con il pulsante SEL, se viene impostata l'indicazione

quando s'imposta il valore d'uscita del flash. Il flash va regolato nel modo Slave Controller

◆ Il flash principale Slave Controller ha solamente la funzione di pilotare l'accensione dei flash

SPECIFICHE

MODELLO: Flash con slitta a contatto caldo, auto zoom, TTL

NUMERO GUIDA: 61 ( ISO 100, posizione parabola su focale 105mm)

ALIMENTAZIONE: Quattro batterie alcaline AA, oppure quattro batterie AA Ni-Cd,

oppure quattro batterie Nickel-Metal Hydride

TEMPO DI CARICA: circa 7.0 secondi (batterie alcaline);

circa 5.0 secondi con batterie Ni-Cd e Nickel-Metal Hydride)

NUMERO LAMPI: circa 120 (con batterie alcaline); circa 160 (con batterie Ni-Cd e Nickel-Metal Hydride)

DURATA DEL LAMPO circa 1/700 ( a piena potenza)

COPERTURA FOCALI: 24-105mm, con spostamento motorizzato della parabola;

17mm con diffusore incorporato

SPEGNIMENTO AUTOMATICO: Sì PESO: 330 gr DIMENSIONI: 77x139x117mm

DANSK

Tillykke med dit valg af Sigma EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI Flash. Denne flash er udviklet specielt

til SONY AF spejlreflekskameraer. Afhængig af kameramodel kan funktioner og betjening variere.

For at få det fulde udbytte af flashen anbefaler vi, at du læser denne vejledning. Brugsanvisningen

til kameraet indeholder også informationer om flashfotografering. Vi anbefaler, at du også læser

disse informationer.

BEMÆRK

For at undgå uheld, bør du læse brugsanvisningen grundigt og bemærke de advarsler der er

angivet herunder, inden flashen tages i brug.

Advarsel !!

Bemærk !!

Symbol der markerer vigtige punkter hvor forsigtighed er påkrævet.

Symbol der markerer information om handlinger der bør undgås.

Brug af produktet i modstrid med disse advarsler kan medføre alvorlig

personskade eller anden skade

Brug af produktet i modstrid med disse advarsler kan medføre personskade.

Advarsel !!

Denne flash indeholder højspændingskomponenter. Adskil ikke flashen, da det kan medføre

elektrisk stød eller forbrændinger. Hvis flashens kabinet går i stykker så de indvendige

komponenter blotlægges, må de ikke berøres.

ffyr ikke flashen tæt på en persons øjne. I så fald kan flashens kraftige lys give øjenskader. Hold minds

1 meters afstand mellem flashen og en persons øjne når flashen anvendes.

Berør ikke kameraets synkrostik mens flashen er påmonteret kameraets flashsko, da der e

risiko for elektrisk stød.

nvend aldrig flashen i omgivelser med brændbare gasser eller kemikalier etc. Da det kan

medføre brand eller eksplosion.

Bemærk !!

nvend ikke denne flash med andre kameraer end SONY AF spejlreflekskameraer. I modsa

fald kan flashen beskadige kameraets elektronik.

Denne flash er ikke vandtæt. Hvis flashen anvendes i regn, sne eller fugtige omgivelser skal

den beskyttes mod fugt. Det er ofte umuligt at reparere elektriske komponenter der e

beskadigede af fugt.

Udsæt ikke flashen for stød eller slag, høj temperatur, støv eller fugtighed. Det kan medføre a

flashen ikke fungerer.

Hvis flashen udsættes for pludselige temperaturudsving, f.eks. hvis flashen bringes fra en la

udendørs temperatur til en høj indendørs temperatur, kan der dannes kondens indvendig i

flashen. For at modvirke dette bør flashen anbringes i en taske eller pose og den bør ikke

anvendes før den har opnået rumtemperatur.

Flashen bør ikke opbevares på steder hvor den udsættes for dampe fra kemikalier f.eks. fra

møbler fremstillet af spånplader.

nvend ikke benzin eller andet der indeholder opløsningsmidler til rengøring af flashen. Anvend

en blød klud til at aftørre flashen.

Hvis flashen skal opbevares i længere tid bør det ske på et køligt sted med god ventilation.

Batterierne bør tages ud af flashen – og flashen bør afprøves et par gange hver måned, for a

sikre optimal funktion.

BESKRIVELSE AF FLASHENS DELE

UDVENDIGE DELE

1.Flashhoved 2.AF-hjælpelys 3.Vinkel; Op og ned 4.Vinkel; Højre og venstre

5.Lås; Op og ned 6.Lås; Højre og venstre 7.LCD-display 8.Batteridæksel 9. Låseknap

10.Monteringsfod 11. Reflektorpanel 12. Vidvinkelforsats

BETJENIGNSKNAPPER

13.MODE KNAP 14.<SEL> SELECT knap 15.< + > Indstillingsknap 16.<

> Indstillingsknap

17.ZOOM knap 18.TEST knap 19.LIGHT knap 20.Klar-lampe 21.Tænd/sluk

VEDR: BATTERIER

Denne flash anvender fire type ”AA” Alkaline eller genopladelige Ni-Cad og Ni-MH batterier.

Manganese batterier kan også anvendes, men da de har en kortere levetid end Alkaline batterier

kan de ikke anbefales. Udskift batterierne hvis flashen er mere end 30 sekunder om at lade op.

◆ For at sikre ordentlig elektrisk kontakt, bør batteripolerne aftørres inden batterierne sættes i.

◆ Ni-Cad og Ni-MH batterier har ikke standardiserede kontaktpunkter. Hvis du anvender Ni-Cad

eller Ni-MH batterier bør du kontrollere at batteriets poler har kontakt med kontaktpunkterne i

batterikammeret.

◆ Anvend altid 4 batterier af samme fabrikat og type. Bland ikke nye og brugte batterier.

◆ Forsøg ikke at adskille eller kortslutte batterierne, eller at kaste dem i åben ild eller vand, da det

kan få dem til at eksplodere. Forsøg ikke at oplade batterier der ikke er konstrueret til

genopladning.

◆ Hvis flashen ikke skal anvendes i en længere periode, bør batterierne fjernes for at undgå

beskadigelse eller lækage.

◆ Batteriernes ydeevne nedsættes ved lave temperaturer. Hold batterierne varme hvis flashen

skal bruges i koldt vejr.

◆ Det anbefales at medbringe ekstra batterier på rejser eller ved fotografering ved lave

temperaturer.

ISÆTNING AF BATTERIER

Kontroller at flashen er slukket. Skub batteridækslet

i pilens retning for at åbne det.

2. Isæt 4 stk. ”AA” batterier. Vær opmærksom på at

vende batterierne som angivet i batterikammeret.

3. Luk batteridækslet.

4. Skub Tænd/Sluk-knappen hen på ”ON” for at

tænde flashen. Efter få sekunder vil klar-lampen

lyse som tegn på at flashen er klar til brug.

5. Tryk på Test-knappen for at afprøve flashen.

AUTOMATISK SLUK

For at spare batterier vil flashen automatisk slukke hvis den ikke bruges i ca. 240 sekunder. Tryk

på Test-knappen, eller tryk kameraets udløserknap halvt ned, for at aktivere flashen igen. Bemærk

at automatisk sluk ikke fungerer når Slave-flash funktionerne anvendes.

FEJLINDIKATIONER

Hvis batteristyrken er for lav eller der er en fejl i de elektriske informationer mellem kamera og

flash, vil ”Er” blinke på LCD-displayet. Sluk og tænd flashen hvis dette sker. Hvis indikationen

derefter stadig blinker bør batterispændingen kontrolleres.

JUSTERING AF FLASHHOVEDET

Tryk på ”Op/ned” låseknappen mens flashhovedet justeres til

den ønskede vinkel.

◆

vises på LCD-displayet når du tænder flashen. Hvis dette

symbol blinker, er flashens hoved indstillet til en forkert vinkel.

MONTERING OG AFMONTERING AF FLASHEN

Sluk for flashen. Skub flashfoden ind i kameraets

flashsko indtil den låser med et klik. 

◆ Når du monterer eller afmonterer flashen bør du

holde i flashens nederste del for at undgå at

beskadige flashfoden eller kameraets flashsko.

◆ Hvis kameraets indbyggede flash er vippet op,

bør den skubbes ned inden EF-610 DG SUPER

SO-ADI flashen monteres.

Flashen afmonteres ved at skubbe den ud af kameraets flashsko, mens låseknappen trykkes ind.



INDSTILLING AF FLASHENS UDLYSNINGSVINKEL

Når du trykker på ZOOM-knappen vises symbolet. Hver gang du trykker på ZOOM-knappen

vil LCD-displayet skifte og vise zoompositionen i følgende rækkefølge:

24mm → 28mm → 35mm → 50mm → 70mm → 85mm → 105mm → (Auto)

Ved almindelig brug på TTL funktion vil flashen automatisk indstille zoompositionen i

overensstemmelse med objektivets brændvidde.

◆ Når du tænder for flashen vil den indstille sig på den sidst valgte zoomposition.

◆ Hvis du anvender et objektiv med større billedvinkel end flashens udlysningsvinkel, vil billederne

blive underbelyst i siderne. Flashen styrke vil variere afhængig af indstillingen af flashhovedet.

VIDVINKELFORSATS

Denne flash er forsynet med en indbygget

vidvinkelforsats, der giver en udlysningsvinkel

svarende til et 17mm vidvinkelobjektiv. Træk

vidvinkelforsatsen og reflektorpanelet ud og vip

forsatsen ned så den dækker flashhovedet. (Vær

forsigtig når du trækker panelerne ud.) Skub

derefter reflektorpanelet tilbage på plads.

Flashens udlysningsvinkel vil automatisk blive

indstillet på 17mm.

◆ Hvis vidvinkelforsatsen ved et uheld brækkes af, kan flashens zoom ikke fungere og flashen

skal repareres.

LCD-DISPLAY BELYSNING

Når du trykker på LIGHT-knappen vil LCD-displayet lyse i ca. 8 sekunder. Belysningen kan

forlænges ved at trykke på LIGHT-knappen igen.

TTL FUNKTION

TTL funktionen vil beregne den korrekte eksponering for motivet og kontrollere flashlyset.

◆ TTL-funktionerne varierer afhængig af kombinationerne af kamera og objektiv. Se

nedenstående skema. (Ved alle kombinationer vil TTL vises i flashen LCD-display)

Digitale spejlreflekskamerae

Maxxum 70, 50, 7, 5, 4, 3

nax 60, 40, 7, 5, 4, 3L

Maxxum 9

Dynax 9

Øvrige modeller

D-type objektiv ADI lysmåling For-flash lysmåling Alm. TTL lysmåling

Ikke D-type objektiv For-flash lysmåling For-flash lysmåling Alm. TTL lysmåling

1. Indstil kameraet til P funktion.

2. Tænd for flashen. TTL-markeringen vil vises i LCD-displayet

og flashen vil begynde at lade op.

◆ Med digitale spejlreflekskameraer, kontroller at

indikatoren er tændt. Hvis

indikatoren ikke vises, trykkes

på + eller – knappen så indikatoren vises på LCD

panelet, ellers vil eksponeringen ikke blive korrekt

3. Fokuser på dit motiv.

4. Kontroller at motivet er indenfor flashens effektive rækkevidde indikeret på LCD-displayet.

5. Tryk på udløserknappen når flashen er fuldt opladet.

◆ Når kameraet registrerer korrekt eksponering vil TTL-markeringen vises på LCD-displayet i ca.

5 sekunder. Hvis denne markering ikke vises, er flashlyset ikke tilstrækkeligt for det

pågældende motiv. Tag et nyt billede på kortere afstand.

◆ AF-hjælpelyset tændes automatisk når dit motiv kræver det. Hjælpelysets rækkevidde er fra ca.

0,7m til 9m.

◆ Bemærk at når kameraet indstilles på M-funktion, vil flashen vælge de sidst anvendte

indstillinger.

◆ Når flashen er fuldt opladet vil flashmarkeringen vises i kameraets søger. Hvis lukkeren

udløses inden flashen er fuldt opladet, vil flashen ikke blive affyret og kameraet vil eksponere

billedet på en langsom lukkertid med det eksisterende lys.

BRUG AF FLASHEN MED ANDRE KAMERAFUNKTIONER

Lukkertidsprioriteret indstilling

Når du vælger den ønskede lukkertid vil kameraet indstille den korrekte blændeværdi. Du kan ikke

vælge lukkertider hurtigere end kameraets synkroniseringstid.

Blændeprioriteret indstilling

Ved at vælge A-funktionen kan du vælge den ønskede blænde og kameraet indstiller den korrekte

lukkertid efter baggrundens belysning. Fill-flash anvendes ved denne funktion.

Anvendelse med M-funktion

Du kan indstille den ønskede blænde og lukkertid. Du kan vælge lukkertider mellem

synkroniseringstiden og bulb.

◆ Fill-flash anvendes ved denne funktion.

◆ Hvis du indstiller i overensstemmelse med kameraets lysmåler, vil kameraet fungere på samme

måde som ved Dagslys-flash eller flash med langsom lukkertid.

KONTINUERLIG OPTAGELSE

For at forhindre overophedning bør flashen hvile i mindst 10 minutter efter brug af de antal

flasheksponeringer der er angivet i skemaet herunder.

Funktion Antal flasheksponeringer

TTL, M(1/1,1/2) 20 kontinuerlige flashoptagelser

M(1/4, 1/8) 25 kontinuerlige flashoptagelser

M(1/16-1/32) 40 kontinuerlige flashoptagelser

Multi 10 optagelser

MANUEL INDSTILLING AF FLASH

Manuel indstilling kan anvendes hvis det er vanskeligt at opnå korrekt eksponering med TTL

funktionen. Ved manuel indstilling kan flashens lysstyrke indstilles fra 1/1 (fuld styrke) til 1/64

styrke i trin svarende til 1 blænde.

1. Sæt kameraet på M indstilling.

2. Tryk på MODE-knappen på flashen for at vælge M.

3. Værdien for lysstyrken (ledetallet) blinker når du trykker på SEL-knappen.

4. Tryk på

eller

–

knappen for at vælge flashens lysstyrke.

5. Displayet vil holde op med at blinke og i stedet lyse konstant

når du trykker på SEL-knappen.

6. Fokuser på motivet ved at trykke på kameraets udløserknap

og aflæs afstanden på objektivet. Indstil derefter blænden

eller flashens lysstyrke indtil den afstand der vises i

LCD-displayet svarer til afstanden til motivet.

7. Når flashens klarlampe lyser er den klar til brug.

◆ Du kan beregne den korrekte eksponering efter følgende formel:

Ledetal (GN) divideret med afstanden = blændeværdi.

Flashen vil automatisk kalkulere og vise afstanden til motivet efter denne formel. (se tabel 1 på

sidste side)

SYNKRONISERING PÅ HURTIGE LUKKERTIDER (FP FLASH - HSS)

Når du tager billeder med en almindelig flash kan du ikke anvende hurtigere lukkertider end

kameraets synkroniseringstid, da flashen skal affyres mens lukkerens gardiner er helt åbne. Med

synkronisering på hurtige lukkertider (High Speed Sync) affyres flashen gentagne gange mens

lukkeren arbejder. På denne måde kan du tage flashbilleder med en hurtigere lukkertid end

synkroniseringstiden.

1. Vælg flashfunktion ved at trykke på MODE-knappen (”TTL”

og ”M” funktion kan anvendes).

2. Tryk på

eller

–

knappen så

symbolet vises i LCD-

displayet.

3. Fokuser på motivet.

4. Når flashens klarlampe lyser er den klar til brug.

Ved optagelser med synkronisering på hurtige lukkertider varierer flashens lysstyrke afhængig af

lukkertiden. Flashens rækkevidde vil være kortere med hurtigere lukkertider. (se tabel 2 på sidste

side)

◆ Hvis du vil annullere FP Flash skal du få symbolet

til forsvinde fra LCD-displayet ved at

trykke på

eller

–

knappen.

PILOT-LYS

Hvis du bruger funktionen til pilot-lys, kan du kontrollere lysfordelingen samt skygger og reflekser

inden billedet tages.

1. Tryk på MODE-knappen for at vælge funktion.

2. Tryk på

eller

–

knappen for at få symbolet vist i displayet.

3. Kontroller at flashen er klar og tryk på TEST-knappen for at affyre den.

MULTI-FLASH FUNKTION

Mens lukkeren er åben affyres flashen gentagne gange. Herved eksponeres en serie optagelser af

motivet på samme billede. En mørk baggrund med et lyst motiv giver det bedste resultat. Flashens

affyringsfrekvens kan indstilles mellem 1Hz og 100Hz. Op til 90 flashglimt kan affyres i en serie.

Det maksimale antal flashglimt varierer afhængig af flashens ledetal (lysstyrke) og

affyringsfrekvensen. (se tabel 3 på sidste side)

1. Indstil kameraets eksponeringsfunktion på ”M” og vælg blænden.

2. Tryk på MODE-knappen indtil Multi-flash vises.

3. Tryk på SEL-knappen indtil affyringsfrekvensen blinker.

4. Tryk på

eller

–

knappen for at vælge den ønskede

frekvens.

5. Når der trykkes på SEL-knappen vil flash lysstyrken blinke.

6. Tryk på

eller

–

knappen for at vælge den ønskede

lysstyrke.

7. Når der trykkes på SEL-knappen vil antallet af flashglimt blinke.

8. Tryk på

eller

–

knappen for at vælge det ønskede antal flashglimt.

9. Når der trykkes på SEL-knappen vil displayet holde op med at blinke.

10. Når flashens klarlampe lyser er den klar til brug.

Bemærk: Vælg en længere lukkertid end: (Antallet af flashglimt) divideret med

(affyringsfrekvens)

BOUNCE FLASH (indirekte flash)

På flashbilleder vil der ofte optræde kraftige skygger fra motivet. Hvis du drejer flashhovedet og

anvender indirekte flashlys fra loftet eller væggene vil lyset blive blødere.

Tryk på låseknappen og drej flashhovedet for at indstille vinkelen.

OP: 0, 60, 75, 90 NED: 0,7

HØJRE: 0, 60, 75, 90 VENSTRE: 0, 60, 75,90, 120, 150, 180

Når bounce flash anvendes vil symbolet

vises i

LCD-displayet.

Farverne på billedet vil blive påvirket af farven på det

reflekterede lys. Vælg en hvid flade til at reflektere lyset.

Afhængig af den reflekterende flade, afstanden til motivet og

andre faktorer, vil flashens effektive rækkevidde blive

formindsket. Kontroller om korrekt eksponering er opnået (TTL

markering i LCD-displayet) efter optagelsen.

NÆROPTAGELSER

Til brug ved næroptagelser kan flashhovedet vippes 7º nedad. Flashen kan kun anvendes på

afstande mellem 0,5 og 2 meter. Når flashhovedet vippes nedad vil symbolet

blinke.

REFLEKTORPANEL

Denne flash er forsynet med et indbygget

reflektorpanel, der kan give en lysrefleks i

motivets øjne (catch light) når flashen

anvendes som indirekte lyskilde. Træk

reflektorpanelet ud. Hvis vidvinkelforsatsen

følger med ud, skubbes den tilbage på

plads. (Vær forsigtig når du trækker

panelerne ud.)

◆ For at opnå effekten med lysrefleks i øjnene, skal flashhovedet vippes op i en vinkel på 90

grader og billederne skal tages på kort afstand.

TRÅDLØS FLASH

Når du anvender trådløs flash kan du styre lyslægningen for at opnå en mere tredimensionel virkning

eller en mere jævn lysfordeling, uden at have flashen tilsluttet kameraet med et kabel. EF-610 DG

SUPER SO-ADI kommunikerer med kameraet ved hjælp af flashlyset. Når du anvender trådløs flash

vil kameraet automatisk beregne den korrekte eksponering.

◆ I denne instruktion kalder vi en flash der er monteret på kameraet ”Master-flash” og en flash der

er opstillet på et andet sted ”Slave-Flash”.

◆ Det er praktisk at anvende en holder til den flash der skal opstilles separat. Holderen har et gevind

til montering på et stativ.

◆ Vær opmærksom på, ikke at stille flashen så den er synlig i billedfeltet.

◆ Placer flashen ca. 0.5-5m fra motivet og kameraet ca. 1-5m fra motivet.

◆ Hvis andre anvender trådløs flash i nærheden af dig, kan din flash blive affyret pga. de andre

flashenheders lys. Hvis dette sker, kan du vælge en anden indstilling for flashens kanal.

A. NÅR FLASHEN STYRES AF KAMERAETS INDBYGGEDE FLASH.

1. Indstil kameraet til trådløs flash funktion.

◆ Da indstillingen varierer afhængig af kameramodel, bør du se kameraets brugsanvisning for flere

oplysninger.

2. Indstil kameraets eksponeringsfunktion til P,A,S eller M.

3. Tryk på

knappen på flashen indtil “off-camera flash”

displayet vises.

4. Vælg “off-camera flash” nummer 1 ved at trykke på

knappen.

5. Tryk på

knappen for at indstille Flash Mode til TTL.

6. Kanal information vil blinke når der trykkes på

knappen.

7. Indstil kanal-nummer (C1 - C4) ved at trykke på

eller

knappen.

8. Når der trykkes på

knappen, vil indikatoren stoppe med at blinke.

9. Monter flashen på kameraet og tryk udløserknappen halvvejs ned (kanal-nummeret registreres af

kameraet).

10. Fjern flashen fra kameraet og opstil den det ønskede sted.

11.

Tænd for kameraets indbyggede flash og kontroller at den er opladet.

◆ Når der anvendes trådløs flash vil AF-hjælpelyset på EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI blinke som

information om at flashen er fuldt opladet.

12. Kontroller fokuseringen og tag billedet.

◆ EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI vil blive affyret når den indbyggede flash affyres. Den indbyggede

flash affyres kun som kontrol-enhed for EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI, belysningen af motivet sker af

EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI. Kameraet vil kontrollere eksponeringen via TTL-systemet.

◆ Afhængig af lukkertiden, skiftes der automatisk mellem normal flash eller high speed sync flash.

◆ Hvis kameraets eksponeringsfunktion stilles på M, vælges manuel trådløs flash. Efter indstilling af

kanal-nummer, vil flashens lysstyrkeindikator blinke. Vælg den ønskede lysstyrke ved at trykke på

eller knappen og tryk derefter på knappen for at få displayet til at stoppe med at

blinke.

NÅR FLASHEN STYRES AF EN FLASH MONTERET PÅ KAMERAET

For at anvende trådløs flash, skal der bruges to eller flere EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI flash enheder.

EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI kan kun bruges som slave-flash (”off-camera” funktion). Afhængig af

hvilken flash model der anvendes ved slave-flash, er det nødvendigt at ændre kontrolfunktionen for

master-flashen. Se nedenstående skema. (EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI kan anvendes som

master-flash).

Flashmodel der anvendes

som slave-flash

EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI

EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI

EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI

Kontrol-funktion

Kameramodel der kan

anvendes med slave-flash

α700, α900 α900

Lysstyrke indstilling (Ratio)

Det er muligt at styre op til 3

grupper; Master, Slave-Flash 1 og

Slave-Flash 2.

Det er muligt at indstille lysstyrken

(ratio) for slave-flashen i 5

niveauer eller ingen flash.

Det er muligt at styre 2 grupper;

Master og slave-Flash.

Master : Det er muligt at indstille

lysstyrken (ratio) for slave-flashen

til 1:2 eller 2:1.

Flash funktion

TTL Auto flash, High Speed Sync

Flash (TTL, M), Manuel flash

TTL Auto flash, High Speed Sync

Flash (TTL)

B-1. VED ANVENDELSE KUN SOM SLAVE-FLASH (OFF-CAMERA FLASH)

Kamera og Master-flash indstilling

1. Indstil kameraet til trådløs flash funktion.

◆ Da indstillingen varierer afhængig af kameramodel, bør du se kameraets brugsanvisning for flere

oplysninger.

2. Indstil kameraets eksponeringsfunktion til P,A,S eller M.

3. Monter flashen på kameraet.

4. Flashen’s LCD-display vil automatisk skifte til valg af

kontrolfunktion. (Hvis LCD-displayet ikke skifter automatisk,

trykkes på

knappen indtil valg af kontrolfunktion vises.)

5. Displayet vil blinke når der trykkes på

knappen.

6. Indstil kontrolfunktionen på

ved at trykke på eller knappen.

7. Kanalinformationen vil blinke når der trykkes på

knappen.

8. Vælg kanal-nummer (C1 - C4) ved at trykke på

eller

knappen.

9. Lysstyrke indstillingen (ratio) vil blinke når der trykkes på

knappen.

10. Indstil lysstyrkefunktionen til [

] ved at trykke på eller knappen.

11. Tryk på

knappen igen, for at få displayet til at holde op med at blinke.

Indstilling af Slave-Flash

12. Tryk på knappen indtil Slave-flash (off-camera flash)

displayet vises.

13. Vælg Slave-flash nummer 1 ved at trykke på

knappen.

14. Tryk på

knappen for at indstille flashfunktionen på TTL.

15. Kanal informationen vil blinke når der trykkes på

knappen.

16. Tryk på

eller

knappen for at vælge samme kanal-nummer som er valgt for Master-flashen.

17. Tryk på

knappen, for at få indikatoren til at stoppe med at blinke.

18. Placer flashen det ønskede sted.

19. Når du har kontrolleret at alle flashenheder er klar, kan du tage billedet.

◆ Når off-camera flashen er fuldt opladet vil AF-hjælpelyset blinke.

20. Kontroller fokuseringen og tag billedet.

B-2. RATIO-FLASH FUNKTION (CONTROL MODE

)

Kamera og Master-flash indstilling

1. Gennemfør indstillingerne angivet under B-1 trin 1 til 9.

2. Indstil lysstyrke funktionen til [

] ved at trykke på eller

knappen.

3. Flashfunktionsdisplayet vil blinke når der trykkes på

knappen.

4. Indstil flashfunktionen på TTL ved at trykke på

eller knappen.

5. Lysstyrke (ratio-flash) displayet [

] på Master-flashen vil blinke når der trykkes på

knappen.

6. Indstil lysstyrken for Master-flashen ved at trykke på

eller knappen.

7. Lysstyrke displayet [

] for Slave-Flash 1 vil blinke når der trykkes på knappen.

8. Indstil lysstyrken for Slave-Flash 1 ved at trykke på

eller knappen.

9. Lysstyrke displayet [

] for Slave-Flash 2 vil blinke når der trykkes på knappen.

10. Indstil lysstyrken for Slave-Flash 2 ved at trykke på

eller knappen.

11. Ved tryk på

knappen, vil indikatoren holde op med at blinke.

Indstilling af Slave-Flash

12. Gennemfør indstillingerne angivet under B-1 Indstilling af Slave-Flash.

◆ Hvis der anvendes flere Slave-flash enheder, indstilles det ønskede Slave-flash nummer på hver

enhed.

◆ Det er muligt at indstille lysstyrken (ratio) for Master, Slave-Flash 1 og Slave-Flash 2 som følger:

(ingen flash)124816

Flashens lysstyrke indstilles som en værdi for hver enhed / total værdi.

[Eksempel]

Indstillet værdi Flashen lysstyrke (ratio)

Master 2 2/7

Slave-Flash 1 1 1/7

Slave-Flash 2 4 4/7

B-3. RATIO-FLASH FUNKTION (CONTROL MODE

)

Kamera og Master-flash indstilling

1. Gennemfør indstillingerne angivet under B-1 trin 1 til 6.

2. Indstil lysstyrke funktionen til

ved at trykke på eller

knappen.

3. Kanal informationen vil blinke når der trykkes på

knappen.

4. Vælg kanal-nummer (C1 - C4) ved at trykke på

eller

knappen.

5. Indstil lysstyrke funktionen til [

]ved at trykke på eller knappen.

6. Lysstyrke displayet vil blinke når der trykkes på

knappen.

7. Indstil lysstyrkeforholdet for Master-flashen:Slave-Flashen ved at trykke på

eller knappen.

󰎣Vælg

eller .󰎤

8. Ved tryk på

knappen, vil indikatoren holde op med at blinke.

Indstilling af Slave-Flash

9. Hvis Slave-Flashen er en EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI, gennemføres indstillingerne angivet under

B-1 Indstilling af Slave-Flash.

◆ Hvis Slave-Flashen er en EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI, se den brugsanvisning der følger med

flashen.

◆ Hvis Slave-Flashen er en EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI, kan der kun vælges kanal-nummer C1 til C3.

SLAVE-FLASH

NORMAL SLAVE-FLASH

Selv om EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI ikke er monteret på kameraet

kan du affyre flashen ved hjælp af kameraets indbyggede flash

eller en anden flashenhed.

1. Monter flashen på kameraet.

2. Indstil kameraet på den ønskede eksponeringsfunktion. Hvis du

vælger A eller M skal du også indstille den ønskede blænde.

3. Tænd for flashen og tryk kameraets udløserknap halvt ned.

◆ Nu overføres blændeværdien og filmfølsomheden automatisk til flashen.

4. Fjern flashen fra kameraet.

5. Tryk på MODE-knappen og vælg

/ (Slave) funktionen.

6. Tryk på SEL-knappen for at få indikatoren for lysstyrke til at blinke.

7. Tryk på

eller

–

knappen for at vælge den ønskede lysstyrke.

◆ Indstil den fornødne lysstyrke ved at indstille afstanden på LCD-displayet i overensstemmelse med

afstanden til motivet. Hvis den aktuelle afstand er uden for flashens rækkevidde, må du vælge en

anden blænde.

◆ Du kan manuelt indstille filmfølsomheden og blændeværdien på flashen hvis du ønsker det. For at

indstille filmføsomhed: Tryk på MODE-knappen og vælg og tryk derefter på SEL-knappen for

at få indikatoren til at blinke. Tryk på

eller

–

knappen for at vælge den ønskede filmfølsomhed.

Tryk igen på SEL-knappen. For at indstille blændeværdien: Når flashen er indstillet på

Slave-funktion – tryk på på SEL-knappen for at få indikatoren for blændeværdi til at blinke. Tryk på

eller

–

knappen for at vælge den ønskede blænde. Tryk igen på SEL-knappen.

8. Tryk på SEL-knappen gentagne gange for at få vist displayet.

9. Placer Slave-flashen på det ønskede sted. Undgå at placere Slave-flashen indenfor billedfeltet.

10. Når du har kontrolleret at alle flashenheder er klar, kan du tage billedet.

◆ Når EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI er opladet vil AF-hjælpelyset blinke.

◆ Flashen fungerer ikke hvis EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI er monteret på kameraet mens den er

indstillet på Slave-flash funktionen.

◆ Hvis du anvender en SONY flash eller kameraets indbyggede flash og en EF-610 DG SUPER

SO-ADI som slaveflash, bør du ikke anvende ADI, DI funktionerne på kameraet, da blinket fra

for-flashen vil affyre slaveflashen.

UDVALGTE SLAVE-FLASH

Hvis du anvender to eller flere EF-610 Super flash, kan du udvælge hvilke flashenheder der skal

affyres samtidig ved hjælp af kanalindstillingen. Med denne funktion vil en flash fungere som

kontrolenhed og de andre som Slave-flash.

Indstilling af Slave-flashenheder

1. Monter flashen på kameraet.

2. Indstil kameraet på S eller M funktion.

◆ Vælg en lukkertid på 1/30 eller langsommere. Kontrol-flashen vil transmittere kontrolsignalet inden

flashenhederne affyres. Hvis du vælger en lukkertid hurtigere

end 1/30 vil flashenhederne ikke synkronisere.

3. Tænd for flashen og tryk kameraets udløserknap halvt ned. Nu

overføres blændeværdi og filmfølsomhed automatisk til flashen.

4. Fjern flashen fra kameraet.

5. Tryk på MODE-knappen og vælg

(Slave-funktionen).

6. Tryk på SEL-knappen for at få kanalindikatoren til at blinke.

7. Tryk på

eller

–

knappen for at vælge kanalnummeret (C1 eller C2).

8. Tryk på SEL-knappen for at få indikatoren for lysstyrke til at blinke.

9. Tryk på

eller

–

knappen for at vælge den ønskede lysstyrke.

◆ Indstil den fornødne lysstyrke ved at indstille afstanden på LCD-displayet i overensstemmelse med

afstanden til motivet. Hvis den aktuelle afstand er uden for flashens rækkevidde, må du vælge en

anden blænde.

10. Tryk på SEL-knappen gentagne gange for at få vist displayet.

11. Placer Slave-flashen på det ønskede sted. Undgå at placere Slave-flashen indenfor billedfeltet.

Indstilling af kontrol-enhed

12. Tryk på MODE-knappen og vælg / (Slave-funktionen).

13. Tryk på SEL-knappen for at få kanalindikatoren til at blinke.

14. Tryk på

eller

–

knappen for at vælge samme kanalnummer

som for Slaveflashen (C1 eller C2).

15. Tryk på SEL-knappen for at få indikatoren for lysstyrke til at

blinke.

16. Tryk på

knappen for at vise markeringen.

17. Tryk på SEL-knappen for at få displayet til at holde op med at blinke.

18. Monter kontrol-flashen på kameraet.

19. Når du har kontrolleret at alle flashenheder er klar, kan du tage billedet.

◆ Når Slaveflashenhederne er fuldt opladede vil AF-hjælpelyset blinke.

◆ Du kan ikke indstille blændeværdien ved hjælp af SEL-knappen hvis du vælger

markeringen

ved indstilling af lysstyrken. Flashen vil blive indstillet til Slave-kontrolfunktion.

◆ Kontrol-enheden fungerer kun som styreenhed for Slave-flashenhederne.

SPECIFIKATIONER

TYPE: Kompakt seriekontrolleret TTL flash med auto-zoom.

LEDETAL: 61 (ISO 100/m ved 105mm zoom-indstilling)

STRØMFORSYNING: Fire type AA alkaline batterier eller, Fire type AA Ni-Cd batterier eller,

Fire type AA Ni-MH batterier

GENOPLADNINGSTID: Ca. 7 sekunder med Alkaline batterier

Ca. 5 sekunder med Ni-Cd eller Ni-MH batterier

ANTAL FLASHGLIMT: Ca. 120 flashglimt med Alkaline batterier

Ca. 160 flashglimt med Ni-Cd eller Ni-MH batterier

FLASHGLIMTETS VARIGHED: Ca. 1/700 sek. ved fuld styrke.

UDLYSNINGSVINKEL: Dækker synsvinkelen for 24mm~105mm automatisk zoom

Dækker synsvinkelen for 17mm med indbygget vidvinkelforsats

AUTOMATISK SLUK: Mulig VÆGT: 330 g MÅL: 77X139X117mm

NEDERLANDS

Hartelijk dank voor de aankoop van de Sigma EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI electronenflitser. Dit

product is speciaal ontworpen voor de SONY AF SLR camera’s. Afhankelijk van het gebruikte

cameramodel kunnen de diverse functies afwijken. Wij adviseren u deze gebruiksaanwijzing

aandachtig te lezen. De talloze aantrekkelijke extra’s van deze flitser vormen een welkome uitbreiding

van uw fotografische mogelijkheden. Om uw flitser op de juiste wijze in te stellen en optimaal gebruik

te maken van de mogelijkheden, raden wij u aan deze gebruiksaanwijzing aandachtig door te lezen en

tevens de gebruiksaanwijzing van uw camera naast deze instructies te gebruiken.

VOORZORGSMAATREGELEN

Ter voorkoming van ongelukken en beschadiging, raden wij u aan deze gebruiksaanwijzing

aandachtig te lezen en te letten op de speciale waarschuwingssymbolen. Let u vooral op de twee

onderstaande waarschuwingssymbolen:

Waarschuwing!!

Let Op!!

Dit symbool duidt op een belangrijke aanwijzing wanneer verwondingen en/of schade kunnen worden veroorzaakt.

Dit symbool duidt op welke handelingen vermeden moeten worden

Wanneer u tijdens het gebruik van deze flitser deze waarschuwingen

negeert, loopt u het risico van ernstige verwondingen en/of schade.

Wanneer u tijdens het gebruik van deze flitser deze waarschuwingen

negeert, loopt u het risico van verwondingen en/of schade.

Waarschuwing!!

De electronische circuits in deze flitser hebben een hoog voltage. Maak de flitser niet open om

electrische schokken of brandwonden te voorkomen. Indien de behuizing van de flitse

gescheurd of kapot is, raak de delen binnenin dan niet aan.

Gebruik de flitser niet vlakbij de ogen. Het zeer felle licht zou de ogen kunnen beschadigen.

Houdt minimaal 1 meter afstand van het gezicht als u een flitsopname maakt.

Raak de flitscontacten van uw camera niet aan als de flitser op het flitsschoentje is bevestigd. Dit kan

een electrische schok geven.

Gebruik uw flitser nooit in een omgeving waar zich licht ontvlambare stoffen bevinden, dit zou to

brand of ontploffing kunnen leiden.

Let Op!!

Gebruik deze flitser alleen op de SONY spiegelreflex camera’s: het gebruik op andere camera’s

kan het electronische circuit beschadigen.

De flitser is niet waterdicht. Indien u de flitser in regen of in de nabijheid van water gebruikt, zorg e

dan voor dat deze niet nat wordt. Vaak is het vrijwel onmogelijk om waterschade aan electrische

circuits te repareren.

Stel u camera en flitser niet bloot aan schokken, stoten, stof, hoge temperaturen of vochtigheid. Deze

factoren kunnen tot storingen leiden in uw apparatuur.

Indien de flitser een sterke temperatuurswisseling ondergaat, kan er kon condensatie in he

binnenwerk optreden. Wacht in dit geval tot uw flitser de omgevingstemperatuur heeft aangenomen.

Bewaar uw flitser niet in een ruimte waar zich chemische stoffen, kamfer of insecticides

bevinden. Deze stoffen kunnen de flitser beschadigen.

Gebruik geen thinner, benzine of andere schoonmaakmiddelen om de flitser te reinigen. Gebrui

alleen een schone, eventueel iets vochtige, doek.

Bewaar de flitser op een koele, goed geventileerde, droge plaats. Het is aan te raden om de

flitser enkele keren per maand op te laden en te ontsteken. Dit zal de levensduur van de flitse

ten goede komen.

OMSCHRIJVING VAN DE ONDERDELEN

Externe

onderdelen

1.Flitskop 2.AF hulplicht 3.Flitshoek bij indirect flitsen 4.Rotatiehoek, links/rechts

5.Vergrendelknop indirect flitsen 6.Vergrendelknop rotatie links/rechts

7.LCD display 8.Batterijdeksel 9. Ontkoppelknop 10.Flitsvoetje

11. Vanglichtpaneel 12. Groothoek adapter

Instelknoppen

toetsen

13.Functietoets 14.<SEL> keuzetoets 15.<+> plustoets 16.<

> mintoets

17.Zoomtoets 18.Test toets 19.Lichttoets 20.OK lampje 21. Aan/uit schakelaar

BATTERIJEN

Als stroombron voor deze flitser dienen 4 “AA” Alkaline batterijen van 1,5 Volt te worden gebruikt. Ook

kunnen oplaadbare Ni-Cad of Ni-MH worden gebruikt. Hoewel mangaan batterijen eveneens bruikbaar

zijn, raden wij vanwege hun korte levensduur het gebruik hiervan niet aan. Wanneer het OK-lampje

pas na 30 sec. oplicht dient u de batterijen te vervangen of op te laden.

◆ Om zeker te zijn van een goed electrisch contact kunt de batterijpolen schoonmaken voor u de

batterijen inlegt.

◆ Ni-Cad / Ni-MH batterijen hebben geen gestandaardiseerde contacten. Indien u Ni-Cad batterijen

gebruikt dient u er op te letten dat de polen goed contact maken met de contactpunten van de flitser.

◆ Gebruik altijd 4 batterijen van hetzelfde merk en type en gebruik geen oude en nieuwe batterijen

door elkaar, anders bestaat het risico van explosie, lekkage over oververhitting.

◆ Sluit de batterijen niet kort en haal ze niet uit elkaar. Stel ze ook niet bloot aan vuur of water, want

dan kunnen ze exploderen. Probeer geen normale batterijen op te laden; dit is alleen mogelijk met

Ni-Cad / Ni-MH (oplaadbare) batterijen.

◆ Verwijder de batterijen wanneer de flitser gedurende langere tijd niet zal worden gebruikt om

eventuele lekkage te voorkomen.

◆ Bij lage temperaturen zal de werking van de batterijen achteruitgaan. Bewaar de batterijen goed

beschermd wanneer u de flitser bij koud weer gaat gebruiken.

◆ Het is aan te bevelen extra batterijen mee te nemen wanneer U voor langere tijd weg gaat of bij

opnamen bij koud weer.

HET INLEGGEN VAN DE BATTERIJEN

1. Overtuig u ervan dat de flitser middels de

hoofdschakelaar is uitgeschakeld en schuif

vervolgens het batterijdeksel open.

2. Plaats vier AA batterijen in het batterijcompartiment.

Let er op dat de plus - en minpolen op de juiste

wijze worden geplaatst volgens de aanduiding in

het batterijcompartiment.

3. Sluit vervolgens het deksel.

4. Schakel de flitser in met behulp van de

hoofdschakelaar.

5. Na enkele seconden zal het OK-lampje oplichten als teken dat de flitser voor gebruik gereed is.

6. Druk op de testknop om u ervan te overtuigen dat de flitser goed werkt.

Automatische uitschakeling

Indien de flitser enige tijd niet wordt gebruikt zal hij zich na ongeveer 240 sec. automatisch

uitschakelen om energie te sparen. Om de flitser weer in te schakelen drukt u op de testknop of druk

de ontspanknop van de camera half in. Let op: het automatische uitschakelen zal niet werken als de

flitser in de “slave” stand staat.

Foutmeldingen

Indien de batterijspanning onvoldoende is, of wanneer de electrische informatieoverdracht tussen

camera en flitser niet correct geschiedt, zal op het LCD display de aanduiding “Er” knipperen. Wanneer

dit gebeurt dient u de flitser uit te schakelen en meteen weer aan. Indien de “Er” aanduiding wederom

verschijnt dient u de batterijen te controleren.

HET AFSTELLEN VAN DE FLITSKOP

Depress the Bounce “Up and Down” Lock and Release Button, and

adjust the flash head to the desired position.

◆ Druk de vergrendelknop (6) in en plaats de flitskop in de

gewenste positie.

verschijnt op het LCD display indien u de

flitser inschakelt en de flitsknop in een niet correcte positie staat.

HET BEVESTIGEN EN VERWIJDEREN VAN DE FLITSER

Schakel de flitser met de hoofdschakelaar uit. Schuif

vervolgens het flitsvoetje van de flitser in het

flitsschoentje van de camera tot het vastklikt. 

◆ Wanneer u de flitser bevestigt of verwijdert pak deze

dan bij de onderzijde vast om beschadiging van het

flitsvoetje of flitsschoentje te voorkomen.

◆ Indien de ingebouwde flitser van de camera omhoog

staat, klap deze dan in vóór u de flitser op de

camera aanbrengt.

Om de flitser te verwijderen drukt u op het vergrendelkopje en vervolgens schuift u de flitser uit het

flitsschoentje.



HET INSTELLEN VAN DE ZOOMREFLECTOR

Indien u op de zoomtoets drukt zal het symbool verschijnen, iedere keer dat u de zoomtoets

indrukt zal het LCD display een oplopende waarde aangeven, zoals onderstaand wordt vermeld.

24mm

→ 28mm → 35mm → 50mm → 70mm → 85mm → 105mm → (Auto)

Normaal gesproken zal in de TTL(DDL) mode de zoom zich automatisch aanpassen aan het

brandpunt van het gebruikte objectief

◆ Wanneer u de flitser inschakelt zal de reflector terugkeren naar de laatst gekozen stand; deze wordt

automatisch in het geheugen opgeslagen.

◆ Indien u een objectief gebruikt met een kortere brandpuntsafstand dan 24 mm is het mogelijk dat de

randen en/of hoeken onderbelicht worden.

◆ Afhankelijk van de zoominstelling zal het richtgetal van de flitser veranderen.

GROOTHOEK ADAPTER

De flitser is voorzien van een ingebouwde groothoek

adapter, waarmee het mogelijk is om met ultra

groothoek-objectieven tot 17 mm te werken. Trek de

groothoek adapter samen met het vanglichtpaneel uit

de houder en draai het voor de flitskop. (Trek beiden

voorzichtig en gelijkmatig naar buiten) Druk het

vanglichtpaneel hierna terug in de houder. De

belichtingshoek zal automatisch op 17 mm worden

ingesteld.

◆ Als de ingebouwde groothoekdiffusor ongewenst wordt ingeschakeld zal het correctie mechanisme

van de ingestelde flitshoek niet functioneren. In dit geval dient u contact op te nemen met de

handelaar waar u de flitser heeft gekocht.

VERLICHTING VAN HET LCD DISPLAY

Wanneer u de LIGHT toets indrukt, zal het LCD display voor ca. 8 sec. worden verlicht. Het LCD

display zal langer dan 8 sec. worden verlicht indien u de LIGHT toets nogmaals indrukt.

TTL (DDL) AUTO MODE

De TTL (DDL) Auto mode voorziet de opname van de correcte belichting en controleert de hoeveelheid

flitslicht.

◆ De TTL (DDL) FLASH procedure kan verschillen, dit is afhankelijk van het gebruikte cameramodel

en objectief. Zie onderstaande tabel: (met alle combinaties wordt TTL in het LCD display getoond)

Digitale Spiegelreflex-camera

nax 7D, 60, 40, 7, 5, 4, 3L

Dynax 9 Alle andere modellen

D type objectief ADI meting Pre-flash meting Gewone DDL meting

Geen D type objectief Pre-flash meting Pre-flash meting Gewone DDL meting

1. Zet de camera in de P stand

2. Zet de hoofdschakelaar van de flitser aan, het TTL symbool zal

op het LCD display verschijnen en de flitser wordt opgeladen

◆ Bij gebruik van een Digitale Spiegelreflex-camera dient de

indicatie aan te staan. Is dit niet het geval druk dan op de

–

knop zodat de indicatie zichtbaar wordt op het LCD

display, anders zal de opname niet correct worden belicht.

3. Stel scherp op het onderwerp

4. Controleer of het onderwerp zich binnen de juiste afstand bevindt op het LCD display van de flitser

5. Als de flitser volledig is opgeladen kunt u nu de opname maken.

◆ Indien de camera een correct belichte opname heeft gemaakt verschijnt het TTL symbool

gedurende 5 sec. in het LCD display. Als deze indicatie niet verschijnt dan is de verlichting niet

toereikend geweest voor deze omstandigheden en dient u de opname nogmaals te maken en er

voor te zorgen dat het onderwerp zich dichter bij de camera bevindt.

◆ Het AF hulplicht zal automatisch werken als u zich in een donkere omgeving bevindt. Het effectieve

bereik van het AF hulplicht is van 0,7 tot 9 meter. Let er op dat als de camera in de M stand wordt

gebruikt de flitser wordt ingesteld op de laatst gebruikte waarden.

◆ Als de flitser volledig is opgeladen zal het flitssymbool in de zoeker zichtbaar zijn. Indien de

ontspanknop van de camera wordt ingedrukt voordat de flitser volledig is opgeladen, zal de flitser

niet functioneren en zal de camera een langzame sluitertijd kiezen.

HET GEBRUIK VAN DE FLITSER BIJ DIVERSE CAMERA INSTELLINGEN

Sluitertijd voorkeuze

Als u de gewenste sluitertijd heeft ingesteld zal de camera de juiste diafragmawaarde instellen. U kunt

geen sluitertijd kiezen die sneller is dan de flitssynchronisatie.

Diafragma voorkeuze

Als u de gewenste diafragmawaarde hebt ingesteld zal de camera de juiste sluitertijd kiezen om de

achtergrond goed te belichten. Met deze instelling zal de invulflits methode worden gebruikt.

Handmatige (M) instelling

U kunt de gewenste sluitertijd en diafragmawaarde instellen. De sluitertijd is instelbaar van de

maximale flitssynchronisatietijd tot “Bulb”.

◆ Met deze instelling zal de invulflits methode worden gebruikt indien u de belichting instelt volgens de

indicatie van de belichtingsmeter, zal de camera kiezen voor daglicht- of langzame synchronisatie.

MAXIMALE PRESTATIES BIJ CONTINU FOTOGRAFEREN.

Om oververhitting te voorkomen dient u uw flitser tenminste 10 minuten niet te gebruiken na het aantal

flitsen in de onderstaande tabel:

Mode Aantal flitsen

TTL, M(1/1,1/2) 20 flitsen achter elkaar

M(1/4, 1/8) 25 flitsen achter elkaar

M(1/16-1/32) 40 flitsen achter elkaar

Multi 10 cycli

HANDMATIGE FLITSINSTELLING

Als de opname moeilijk correct te belichten is met de TTL instelling, is het aan te bevelen om de flitser

handmatig in te stellen. Met de handmatige instelling is het mogelijk om de flitsintensiteit in te stellen

van 1/1 (volledig) tot 1/64.

1. Stel de belichting van de camera in op de M mode

2. Druk op de MODE toets om M(anual) te selecteren

3. Het richtgetal knippert wanneer u op de SEL toets drukt.

Druk op de

–

toets om de gewenste flitsintensiteit in te stellen.

5. Als u nogmaals op de SEL toets drukt, zal de ingestelde

flitsintensiteit stoppen met knipperen en zichtbaar blijven.

6. Stel scherp door de ontspanknop van de camera half in te drukken. Lees de afstand af van de

scherpstelring. Regel daarna de diafragmawaarde of de lichtintensiteit zo af dat de afstand

ongeveer gelijk wordt aangegeven op het LCD display van de flitser.

7. Na het oplichten van het OK lampje, is de camera klaar voor opname.

◆ Met behulp van onderstaande formule is het mogelijk de correcte belichting te berekenen:

Richtgetal : Afstand tot het onderwerp = Diafragma opening

De flitser berekent de juiste instelling eveneens met deze formule (zie de tabel 1 op de vorige pagina)

HIGH SPEED SYNC (FP) flits (HSS)

Indien u een gewone flitser gebruikt kunt u geen snellere sluitertijd gebruiken dan flitssynchronisatietijd

van de camera omdat de flitser moet af gaan op het moment dat de sluitergordijnen volledig zijn

geopend. De FP Flits blijft continu flitsen wanneer de sluitergordijnen aflopen. Hierdoor kunt u een

snellere sluitertijd kiezen dan de flitssynchronisatietijd.

1. Selecteer de gewenste belichtingsmethode op de camera (A of M mode)

Druk op de

–

toetsen tot dat FP zichtbaar is op het LCD display.

3. Zet de flitser aan

4. Als het OK lampje van de flitser brand kan de opname worden

gemaakt.

◆ Het richtgetal van de flitser zal, afhankelijk van de gekozen

sluitertijd, worden gewijzigd. (zie de

tabel 2

op de vorige pagina)

◆ Als u de FP mode wilt annuleren dient de

markering niet

meer op het LCD display zichtbaar te zijn.

MODEL / TESTFLITS

Het is mogelijk om vooraf een Model / Testflits te geven om de uitlichting en schaduwvorming etc. te

beoordelen.

1. Druk op de mode toets om de functie te activeren.

2. Druk herhaaldelijk op de

–

toets tot het symbool zichtbaar is.

3. Controleer of de flitser volledig is opgeladen en druk op de TEST toets.

MEERVOUDIG FLITSEN

Bij deze instelling zal de flitser herhaaldelijk afgaan terwijl de sluiter open blijft. Hierdoor worden

achtereenvolgende bewegingen van een onderwerp in één opname vastgelegd. Deze instelling is het

meest effectief bij gebruik van een licht onderwerp tegen een donkere achtergrond. Het is mogelijk de

flitsfrequentie tussen 1 Hz en 100 Hz in te stellen. Tot maximaal 90 flitsen kunnen achter elkaar

worden ontstoken. Het maximum aantal flitsen kan variëren afhankelijk van het richtgetal en de

flitsfrequentie. (zie de tabel 3 op de vorige pagina)

Zet de camera op de M mode en stel het diafragma in.

Druk op de MODE toets totdat het multi-flash symbool verschijnt.

2. Druk op de SEL toets tot dat de flitsfrequentie knippert.

3. Druk op de

–

toets om de gewenste flitsfrequentie te

kiezen.

4. Na het wederom indrukken van de SEL toets gaat het symbool

van de lichtdosering knipperen.

5. Druk op de

–

toets om de gewenste lichtdosering in te stellen.

6. Druk weer op de SEL toets en het flitsaantal symbool gaat knipperen.

7. Druk op de

–

toets om het gewenste aantal flitsen te selecteren.

8. Druk nogmaals op de SEL toets, de LCD display zal stoppen met knipperen.

9. Wanneer het OK lampje van de flitser brandt, is de flitser klaar voor gebruik.

NB: Zet de sluitertijd langer dan: het aantal gewenste flitsen ÷ de flitsfrequentie.

INDIRECT FLITSEN

Wanneer u in een kamer fotografeert met flits, ontstaat er soms achter het onderwerp een zware

slagschaduw. Indien u de flitsreflector omhoog richt of opzij om het licht via het plafond of de muur te

laten weerkaatsen, zal het onderwerp veel zachter worden belicht. Druk op de ‘lock’-toets en verstel de

flitserkop in de gewenste hoek. De volgende hoeken zijn in te stellen:

Omhoog: 0°, 60°, 75° en 90°

Omlaag: 0°, 7°

Rechts: 0°, 60°, 75°, 90° Links: 0°, 60°, 75°, 120°, 150°, 180°

In deze instellingen wordt een symbool zichtbaar op het LCD display.

De opname zal een kleurzweem krijgen in dezelfde tint als het

reflecterende oppervlak. Kiest u daarom een wit oppervlak voor

weerkaatsing van de flits. Het effectieve bereik van de TTL AUTO

instelling is variabel en afhankelijk van de grootte van het

reflectie-oppervlak, de afstand van het onderwerp en andere factoren.

Daarom is het raadzaam om na elke opname de flitsaanduiding (

TTL

symbool) op het LCD display te controleren.

CLOSE-UP OPNAMEN

Voor opnamen dichtbij kan de flitser 7° naar beneden gericht worden. De flits heeft alleen effect

wanneer het onderwerp zich tussen de 0.5 en 2 meter van de lens verwijderd is. Wanneer de flitskop

naar beneden gericht is, verschijnt het

symbool in het LCD display.

VANGLICHTPANEEL

Deze flitser is uitgerust met een ingebouwd

vanglichtpaneel, waardoor een levendige

expressie aan het onderwerp kan worden

gegeven wanneer de “Bounce Flash Mode”

is geactiveerd. Trek de groothoek adapter

samen met het vanglichtpaneel uit de

houder en draai het voor de flitskop. (Trek

beiden voorzichtig en gelijkmatig naar

buiten). Druk de groothoek adapter hierna

terug in de houder.

◆ Voor een maximaal vanglicht effect richt u de flitskop 90 graden naar boven en maak foto’s op korte

afstand van het object.

DRAADLOOS FLITSEN

Indien u één of meerdere draadloze flitsers zoals de EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI gebruikt kunt u een

veel natuurlijkere belichting van het onderwerp creëren en bijvoorbeeld lelijke schaduwvorming bij

portretten vermijden. Met de EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI wordt de draadloze verbinding tot stand

gebracht door het licht van de flitser. De camera zal, als hij op de draadloze mode staat ingesteld,

automatisch de juiste belichting kiezen.

◆ In deze gebruiksaanwijzing zullen wij de flitser welke op de camera is gemonteerd de [Controller]

noemen en alle andere draadloos te gebruiken flitsers de [draadloze Flits].

◆ Als u de off-camera-unit op de gewenste plaats wilt opstellen kunt u de mini-standaard gebruiken.

Deze mini-standaard heeft tevens een statiefaansluiting.

◆ Plaats de off-camera-unit in de gewenste positie. Pas op dat de off-camera-unit niet in beeld komt.

◆ Plaats de flitser op een afstand van ca. 0,5-5 mtr. en de camera op 1-5 mtr. van het onderwerp.

◆ Indien andere mensen in uw directe omgeving ook gebruik maken van flitslicht is het mogelijk dat

uw Slave flitsers ongewenst ontsteken. Maak in dit geval gebruik van een andere kanaalinstelling

om dit probleem te voorkomen.

A. GEBRUIK HET SIGNAAL VAN DE INGEBOUWDE FLITSER.

1. Stel de camera in op de draadloze flitsmodus.

◆ Aangezien de instellingen variëren op de verschillende camera modellen, verwijzen we u door naar

de handleiding van uw camera.

2. Stel de camera’s belichtingsmodus in naar P,A,S of M.

3. Druk op de

knop van de flitser tot dat het symbool van

de camera flitser in het display verschijnt.

4. Kies vervolgens positie 1 door op de

knop te drukken.

5. Druk op de

knop om de Flitser modus op TTL in te stellen.

6. De kanaal informatie zal knipperen wanneer er op de

knop wordt gedrukt.

7. Stel het kanaalnummer in (C1 - C4) door te drukken op de

knop.

8. Druk op de

knop, de indicator zal stoppen met knipperen.

9. Maak de flitser vast aan de camerabehuizing en druk op de sluiter knop half in (het kanaal nummer

wordt opgenomen op de camera).

10. Verwijder de flitser van de camera en zet hem in de door u gewenste positie.

11. Activeer de ingebouwde flitser van uw camera en bevestig dat hij volledig is opgeladen.

◆ Indien u de draadloze flitsmodus heeft gekozen, dan zal het AF Auxiliary licht knippen als hij

volledig is opgeladen.

12. Focus met uw camera om foto’s te maken.

◆ De EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI zal branden wanneer de ingebouwde flitser afgaat. De ingebouwde

flitser van de camera zal alleen afgaan bij een opgeladen EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI. De

verlichting van het onderwerp wordt door de EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI uitgevoerd. De camera

zal de flitskracht controleren als een TTL Auto Flits, zodat de correcte belichting wordt gebruikt.

◆ Afhankelijk van de sluitersnelheid, zal de flits automatisch naar normale flits of hoge snelheid

synchronisatie flits worden ingesteld.

◆ Wanneer de belichtingsmodus van de camera wordt ingesteld naar M, dan wordt de handmatige

draadloze flits geactiveerd. Nadat u het kanaal nummer heeft ingesteld, zal de flitsvermogen niveau

knipperen. Stel het gewenste flitsvermogen in, door te drukken op de

of knop en druk de

knop in om het knipperende beeld te stoppen en de kracht van de flitser te bevestigen.

. GEBRUIK HET SIGNAAL VAN DE AANGEHECHTE FLITSER ALS DE HOOFDFLITSER

Als u een draadloze flitser gebruikt, zijn twee of meer EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI flits eenheden nodig.

EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI kan alleen worden gebruikt als hoofdflitser. Afhankelijk van de gekozen

flitser, is het nodig om de bedieningsmodus van de controller te veranderen. Zie de onderstaande tabel.

(EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI kan worden gebruikt voor de controller).

Flitser model dat kan

worden gebruikt voor de

modus zonder-camera flits

EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI

EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI

EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI

Bedieningsmodus

Camera model dat kan

worden gebruikt voor

modus zonder-camera flits

α700, α900 α900

Ratio-Flits Controle

instelling

Het is mogelijk om tot 3 groepen te

bedienen: Controller, Uit-camera

Flits 1 en Uit-camera flits 2.

Het is mogelijk om de flitsratio van

elke groep met 5 niveau's flits of

zonder flits in te stellen.

Het is mogelijk om 2 groepen te

bedienen: Controller en Uit-camera

flits.

Controller: het is mogelijk om de

ratio van de uit-camera flits op 1:2

of 2:1 in te stellen.

Flits Modus

TTL Auto flits,

Hoge snelheid synchronisatie flits

(TTL,M), Handmatige flits

TTL Auto flits,

Hoge snelheid synchronisatie flits

(TTL)

B-1.INDIEN U ALLEEN IN MODUS DRAADLOZE FLITS

Camera and Controller Setting

1. Stel de camera in op de draadloze flitsmodus.

◆ Aangezien de instellingen variëren op de verschillende camera

modellen, verwijzen we u door naar de handleiding van uw

camera.

2. Stel de camera’s belichtingmodus in naar P,A,S of M.

3. Maak de flitser vast aan de behuizing van de camera.

4. Het LCD paneel van de flitser zal automatisch naar het draadloos flitsen worden doorgeschakeld.

(Als het LCD paneel niet automatisch wordt doorgeschakeld, druk dan op de

knop tot de

controller instellingen worden vertoont).

5. Het draadloos flitsen modus beeld zal knipperen wanneer de

wordt ingedrukt.

6. Stel de draadloos flitsen kanaal in op

door op de of knop te drukken.

7. De kanaal informatie zal knipperen wanneer de

knop wordt gedrukt.

8. Stel het kanaalnummer in (C1 - C4) door te drukken op de

knop.

9. De flitskracht zal knipperen wanneer de

knop wordt ingedrukt.

10. Stel de ratio-flits bedieningsmodus in op [

] door op de of knop te drukken.

11. Druk nog een keer op de

knop, het beeld zal stoppen met knipperen.

draadloze Flits instelling

12. Druk op de knop tot dat de draadloze flits beeld vertoont wordt.

13. Stel de draadloze flits nummer in op 1 door op de

knop te drukken.

14. Druk op de

knop om de flits modus op TTL in te stellen.

15. De kanaal informatie zal knipperen wanneer er op de

knop wordt gedrukt.

16. Druk op de

knop om voor hetzelfde kanaalnummer te

kiezen zoals die is ingesteld op de controller.

17. Druk op de

knop, de indicator zal stoppen met knipperen.

18. Plaats de zonder-camera flits in de door u gewenste positie.

19. Ga na of beide flitsers volledig geladen zijn.

◆ Het OK lampje zal branden en de AF controle lamp zal knipperen om te indiceren dat de flits klaar

is voor opname.

20. Pas de focus aan op het onderwerp en neem de foto.

B-2. RATIO-FLITS BEDIENING (BEDIENING MODUS

)

Camera and Controller instelling

1. Ga de stappen van 1 tot en met 9 van B-1 na om de benodigde

instellingen te verkrijgen.

2. Stel de kracht van de flits bedieningsmodus beeld in op

[

] door op de of knop te drukken.

3. Het flitsmodus beeld zal knipperen wanneer er op de

knop wordt gedrukt.

4. Stel de flitsmodus in op TTL door op de

of knop te drukken.

5. Het flitskracht in [

] van de controller zal knipperen wanneer de knop wordt ingedrukt.

6. Stel de ratio van de controller in door te drukken op de

of knop.

7. Het flitskracht beeld [

] van de zonder flits-camera Flits 1 zal knipperen wanneer de knop

wordt ingedrukt.

8. Stel de ratio van de zonder flits-camera Flits 1 in door op de

of knop te drukken.

9. Het flitsratio beeld [

] van de zonder flits-camera Flits 2 zal knipperen wanneer de knop

wordt ingedrukt.

10. Stel de ratio van de zonder flits-camera Flits 2 in door te drukken op de

of knop.

11. Druk op de

knop om de indicator te laten stoppen met knipperen.

draadloze Flits instelling

12.

dezelfde

stappen

instellingen

van

B-1

krijgen

draadloze

Flits instelling.

◆ Als de zonder-camera flits eenheid meervoudig is, wijs de gewenste zonder-camera draadloze flits

nummers aan elke eenheid toe.

◆ Het is mogelijk om de flitsratio van de controller, draaloze zonder-camera Flits 1 en zonder-camera

Flits 2 als volgt in te stellen.

(zonder flits)124816

De ratio van de kracht van de flits stelt de waarde in van elke eenheid/totale waarde.

[Voorbeeld]

Instelling Waarde Ratio van de Flits sterkte

Controller 2 2/7

Uit-Camera Flits 1 1 1/7

Uit-Camera Flits 2 4 4/7

B-3. RATIO-FLITS BEDIENING (BEDIENING MODUS

)

Camera and Controller instelling

1. Ga dezelfde stappen na als die van 1 tot en met 6 van B-1.

2. Stel de bedieningsmodus in op

door te drukken op de

knop.

3. De kanaal informatie zal knipperen wanneer er op de

knop wordt gedrukt..

4. Stel het kanaalnummer in (C1 - C4) door te drukken op de

knop.

5. Stel de flitsratio bedieningsmodus beeld in op [

] door te drukken op de of knop.

6. De flitsratio beeld zal knipperen wanneer de

knop wordt ingedrukt.

7. Stel de ratio van de controller in met de Uit-Camera Flits door op de

of knop te drukken.

(Selecteer of .)

8. Druk op de

knop zodat de indicator stopt met knipperen.

draadloze Flits instelling

9. Als de type van uw zonder-Camera Flits EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI is, volg dan hetzelfde process

om de instellingen van B-1 te krijgen draadloze Flits instelling.

◆ Als de type van uw draadloze Flits EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI is, verwijzen we u door naar de

handleiding van de EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI.

◆ Als de type van uw draadloze Flits EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI is, dan kan het kanaalnummer

alleen worden ingesteld van C1 tot C3.

SLAVE FUNCTIE

Zelfs als de EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI niet aan de camera bevestigd zit, kunt toch flitsen door

gebruik te maken van de ingebouwde flitser van de camera of een andere flitser.

1. Bevestig de flitser op het flitsschoentje van de camera

2. Zet de belichting op de gewenste instelling, wanneer u de A of

M mode gebruikt dient u ook het diafragma in te stellen.

3. Zet de flitser aan en druk dan de ontspanknop half in.

◆ De diafragmawaarde en de waarde van de filmsnelheid worden

nu aan de flitser doorgezonden.

4. Verwijder de flitser van de camera

5. Druk op de MODE toets en selecteer het

/ symbool

6. Druk meerdere malen op de SEL toets om de flitsvermogen indicator te laten knipperen

7. Druk om op de

–

toets om de juiste waarde in te stellen

◆ U kunt het benodigde flitsvermogen bepalen door op de LCD display de zo goed mogelijke

geschatte afstand tot het object in te stellen. Als deze afstand buiten het bereik valt, dient u de

diafragmawaarde aan te passen.

◆ U kunt de diafragmawaarde en filmsnelheid ook handmatig op de flitser instellen.

a) Voor het instellen van de filmsnelheid drukt u op de MODE toets en selecteert u de ISO-aanduiding,

waarna u vervolgens op de SEL toets drukt om de aanduiding te laten knipperen. Met de

–

toets kunt u de gewenste filmsnelheid instellen en om deze op te slaan drukt u wederom op de

SEL toets.

Voor het instellen van de diafragmawaarde (wanneer de flitser in de ‘slave’ instelling staat) drukt u

de SEL toets om de aanduiding van het diafragma te laten knipperen. Met de

en de

–

toets kunt

u de gewenste diafragmawaarde selecteren en opslaan door nogmaals op de SEL toets te drukken.

8. Druk meerdere malen op de SEL toets om het LCD display te laten stoppen met knipperen.

9. Plaats de slave flitser op de gewenste positie. Plaats de unit echter niet zo dat deze zichtbaar wordt

op de opname.

10. Nadat u uzelf ervan overtuigd heeft dat de flitsers opgeladen zijn, drukt u op de ontspanknop om de

opname te voltooien.

◆ NB Als de EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI geheel geladen is, licht het AF hulplampje op.

◆ De flitser zal niet flitsen als deze in de ‘slave’-instelling op de camera is geplaatst.

◆

Indien u een SONY flitser of de ingebouwde flitser van de camera gebruikt en de EF-610 DG SUPER

SO-ADI als slave flitser wilt gebruiken dient u de ADI, DI functie niet te gebruiken. Indien deze functies

wel worden gebruikt is het mogelijk dat de pre-flash de slave-unit voortijdig zal laten ontsteken.

VOORKEUZE VAN DE SLAVE FLITSER

Als u twee of meerdere EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI flitsers gebruikt, kunt u een voorkeuze maken

welke flitsers tegelijk flitsen door verschillende kanaalinstellingen. In deze stand zal één flitsunit

gebruikt worden op de camera als aansturende flitser en de overigen voor de slave belichting.

Het instellen van de slave mode.

1. Monteer de flitser op de camera

2. Zet de belichtingsstand op de S of M mode

◆ Zet nu de sluitertijd op 1/30 of langzamer. De aansturende flitser

zal dan een signaal naar de overige units sturen voordat deze

flitsen. Dit wil dus zeggen dat wanneer u een sluitertijd sneller

dan 1/30 hanteert, de flitsen niet synchroon zullen zijn.

3. Zet de flitser aan, en druk de ontspanknop van de camera half in.

◆ De diafragmawaarde en de filmsnelheid worden nu aan de slave flitser doorgegeven

4. Verwijder de slave-unit van de camera

5. Druk op de MODE toets en selecteer de

/ (slave mode)

6. Druk op de SEL toets om de kanaalaanduiding te laten knipperen

7. Druk op de

–

toets om het kanaal te selecteren

8. Druk op de SEL toets om de flitsvermogen aanduiding te laten knipperen

9. Druk op de

–

toets om het flitsvermogen in te stellen

◆ U kunt het benodigde flitsvermogen bepalen door op het LCD display de geschatte afstand tot het

object in te stellen. Als deze afstand buiten het bereik valt, dient u de diafragmawaarde aan te

passen.

10. Druk meerdere malen op de SEL toets om het LCD display te laten stoppen met knipperen.

11.

Plaats de ‘slave-unit’ op de gewenste positie. Plaats de unit echter niet in het beeld van de opname.

Instellen van de slave-controler unit

12. Druk op de MODE toets en selecteer het / symbool

(slave mode)

13. Druk op de SEL toets om de kanaalaanduiding te laten

knipperen

14. Druk op de

–

toets om hetzelfde kanaal te selecteren als

dat van de andere unit (c1 of c2)

15. Druk op de SEL toets om de flitsvermogen aanduiding te laten knipperen

16. Druk op de

toets om te tonen

17. Druk op de SEL toets om het display te laten stoppen met knipperen.

18. A Monteer de aansturende flitser op de camera body

19. Nadat u uzelf ervan overtuigd heeft dat de flitsers opgeladen zijn, drukt u op de ontspanknop om de

opname te voltooien.

◆ Als de aansturende EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI geheel geladen is, licht het AF hulplampje op.

◆ U kunt de diafragmawaarde niet veranderen met de SEL toets, wanneer u de

heeft

geselecteerd bij de flitsvermogen instelling.

◆ De aansturende flitser geeft alleen instructies aan de slave-unit(s)

TECHNISCHE GEGEVENS:

Type Opschuifbare DDL Autozoom Electronenflitser

Richtgetal 61 (ISO 100 / op 105mm zoompositie)

Stroombron 4 AA alkaline of 4 oplaadbare Ni-Cd, of Ni-MH batterijen

Oplaadtijd Ca. 7 sec. met alkaline batterijen, ca. 5 sec. met oplaadbare batterijen

Aantal flitsen Ca. 120 met alkaline batterijen Ca. 160 met oplaadbare batterijen

Flitsduur Ca. 1/700 sec. bij vol vermogen

Verlichtingshoek 24mm – 105mm motorisch gestuurd 17mm met ingebouwde

Automatische Ja

Gewicht / Afmetingen 330 gram / 76mmX138mmX116mm

中文

多謝閣下購買適馬 EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI 電子閃光燈本產品是特別為 SONY 自動對焦

單鏡反光相機系列而開發的

功能及操作方式會因應相機型號而有所差別請細閱讀本說明

書本產品多樣化的功能會為閣下帶來更多的攝影樂趣為要把本產品各功能發得淋漓盡致及

增加攝影之樂趣，請將本說明書跟相機說明書一起閱讀，並妥為保存以便將來查閱

注 意

為避免構成任何損毀或受傷，於使用本產品前，請小心及細地閱讀本說明書，隨時留意下

列注意標誌所述事請特別留意下列兩種注意標誌

警告 如忽略此警告標誌所述的情況下使用本產品可能構成嚴重受傷或其他危險結果

注意 如忽略此注意標誌所述的情況下使用本產品可能構成受傷或損毀



標誌代表警告及注意等的重要事

標誌含有需要避免的動作

注意

不要把本閃光燈使用在非 SONY 自動對焦單鏡反光相機上，否則閃光燈可能對相機的電路

構成損害

本閃光燈並不防水當在下雨降雪或近水的地方使用相機及閃光燈時，請避免弄濕

因

弄濕而損毀的電子元件一般都較難維修

不要把閃光燈曝露在震盪滿佈塵埃高溫或高濕度的環境底下

在這些情況下可引致火

警或令器材不正常工作

當閃光燈遇到溫度驟變的環境，例如把閃光燈從寒冷的室外帶到溫暖的室內時，

閃燈內部

及外部會有積水預防方法為先把閃光燈放入密封膠袋內才把它帶到溫度驟變的另一地方

，

直到閃光燈達到地方之溫度方可使用

不要把閃光燈存放在抽屜或廚櫃內，

因其可能含有樟腦或其他殺蟲劑會對閃光燈做成不良

影響

不要使用天拿水苯或其他清潔劑來抹掉閃光燈表面的塵埃或指紋應使用微濕及柔軟的布



如需要長時間存放，請選擇乾爽清涼的地方，最好有良好的通風系統

建議每個月都使用

閃光燈來作數次閃光，以維持電容正常工作

警告!!

本閃光燈內建高壓電路為避免觸電或消傷，請不要嘗試拆開本閃光燈如本閃光燈外殼

爆裂或損毀，請不要觸摸內部的元件

不要靠近眼睛觸發閃光燈，否則其強光可能對眼睛做成傷害拍攝時，請保持閃光燈與臉

部至少 1 米／3 呎的距離

當閃光燈已安裝在相機的熱靴座後不要接觸相機的閃光燈同步接點其高壓可導致觸電

不要在易燃的氣體液體及化學物品附近使用相機，否則可能引起爆炸

各部位名稱

外觀部份名稱

1.閃光燈燈頭 2.自動對焦輔助光朿發射口 3.上下反射角度指示 4.左右反射角色指示

5.上下活動釋放按鈕 6.左右活動釋放按鈕 7.液晶顯示屏 8.電池室蓋掩

9.釋放鈕 10.熱靴座 11.反射片 12.廣角閃光擴散片

控制按鈕名稱

13.“控制模式”按鈕 14.“選擇”按鈕 15.“增加”按鈕 16.“減少”按鈕 17.“變焦”按鈕

18.“閃光測試”按鈕 19.“夜光”按鈕 20.充電完成提示燈 21.“開關”掣

關於電池

本產品使用四枚 AA 型鹼性電池或 Ni-Cd / Ni-MH 充電池雖然錳電池可被用使於本產品上，

但因其電量遠不及鹼性電池，所以並不建議使用如電池組須要 30 秒以上方能充電完成提

示燈亮起，請更換新電池

◆ 為確保妥善的電力接觸，可清潔電池接點後才安裝電池

◆ Ni-Cd / Ni-MH 電池的兩端接點因沒有標準，如使用種電池的話，請確定電池室接點與電

池接點妥善地接觸

◆ 為防止電池發生爆炸洩漏或過熱，請使用相同品種及品牌之電池，不要把品種不同或新

舊不一之電池混合使用

◆ 不要把電池拆開短路或暴露於水火當中，否則可能引起爆炸此外，不要把非充電性質

之電池拿來充電

◆ 如需長時間閒置此閃光燈，請把電池取出，以防電池洩漏可能帶來的損毀

◆ 低溫能影響電池的效能，如需於寒冷天氣下使用此閃光燈，請盡量縮短閃光燈暴露於空氣

的時間及適時關閉電源

◆ 建議於長途旅程或於寒冷的戶外進行拍攝工作前攜帶足夠後備電池

安裝電池

1. 確定已把電源關閉後推至 OFF 位，依附圖箭

咀方向所示把電池室蓋掩推出並開

2. 按照附圖所示之正負極方向放入四枚 AA 型電

池到電池室內

3. 把電池室蓋掩關上

4. 把電源開關掣推至 ON，數秒後充電完成提示燈

將會亮起，表示閃光燈已就緒等待引發

5. 請按下“閃光測試”按鈕以確定閃光燈能正常運作

自動關閉電源

為節省電力，本閃光燈於停用大約 3 分鐘後便會自動關閉電源此時可按“閃光測試”按鈕或

半按相機上之快門釋放掣重新啟動閃光燈請留意，在無線 TTL 模式一般伺服模式及指定

伺服模式時，自動關閉電源機制將不能正常運作

錯誤發生時顯示之訊息

如電池電量不足或相機與閃光燈之間訊息設定發生錯誤，閃光燈上的液晶顯示屏將會出現“Er”

圖示，並不停閃爍此時，可嘗試將閃光燈電源關閉，後再重新啟動，如繼續出現“Er”錯誤

訊息，請檢查電池的電量

調節閃光燈頭

按下“上下活動釋放按鈕”來調節閃光燈燈頭到合適的上仰角

度

◆ 如閃光燈被調節往上仰位置，液晶顯示屏將會出現圖示



如燈頭被調節到一個有不正確的位置，此圖示會不停閃爍

安裝閃光燈到相機及其解除

請確定已把電源關閉，把閃光燈的熱靴座插到相機

的熱靴上，然後鎖緊。

◆ 每次安裝或移除閃光燈時，請抓住閃光燈底部以

防損壞閃光燈的靴座或相機的熱靴。

◆ 如相機的內置閃光燈被開啟彈出，請把其按回成

收藏狀態後方可安裝本閃光燈。

將閃燈解除時，請按著燈腳下部的釋放鈕，然後將

燈拉出便可。

設定閃光燈涵蓋角度

本閃光燈預設為自動變焦模式，燈頭會隨鏡頭焦距之改變來變換涵蓋角度當按下“Zoom”按

鈕時，“M”會顯示在液晶顯示屏上，這時，每按一次 ZOOM 按鈕，燈頭涵蓋角度會從廣角逐

漸改變到遠攝，再重回自動變焦模式變焦之序如下：

24mm

→ 28mm → 35mm → 50mm → 70mm → 85mm → 105mm →自動

在 TTL 模式下，閃光燈的涵蓋角度會自動跟隨鏡頭焦距而改變

◆ 每次開啟電源，閃光燈會回到上一次關閉電源時燈頭涵蓋角度之設定

◆ 如使用的鏡頭焦距比燈頭更廣角的話，照片邊緣位置會出現曝光不足

◆ 閃光燈指數會隨燈頭涵蓋角度而改變

廣角閃光擴散片

閃光燈內附置能覆蓋達 17mm 的超廣角閃光擴散

片設置；先將廣角閃光擴散片及反射片從閃燈頂

部拉出，繼將其反下覆蓋閃燈發射表面(拉出光片請

小心)，再將(11)反射片退回閃燈內；閃燈將自動設

定閃光覆蓋角度為 17mm

◆ 如廣角擴散片意外地脫落，ZOOM 按鈕將不能

運作若遇到此情況請聯絡銷售本產品之店舖或

維修中心

液晶顯示屏夜光照明

當按下 LIGHT 按鈕時，液晶顯示屏的夜光照明系統會被啟動，照明維持大約 8 秒鐘

TTL

自動閃燈功能

於 TTL 自動模式時，相機會控制閃光燈輸出的光量從而令主體得到正確曝光

◆ TTL 自動模式的設定步驟會因應相機型號及鏡頭組合而有所不同請參閱下表在所有的

組合中，TTL 圖示都會被顯示在液晶顯示屏上

數碼單鏡反光相機

Maxxum 70, 50, 7, 5, 4, 3

Dynax 60, 40, 7, 5, 4, 3L

Maxxum/ Dyanx 9

其他相機型號

D 類型鏡頭 ADI 測光預閃測光一般 TTL 測光

非 D 類型鏡頭預閃測光預閃測光一般 TTL 測光

1. 把相機曝光模式設為 P 模式

2. 開啟閃光燈的電源， TTL 會顯示在液晶顯示屏上而閃光燈

亦同時開始充電

◆ 配用在數碼單鏡反光相機時，請確定閃燈設定為

；若

停止顯示，可按

或

–

重現於閃燈 LCD 屏上，

否則曝光不會準確

3. 向主體進行對焦

4. 確定主體與相機的實際距離是否在液晶顯示屏所示的有效距離內

5. 當確定閃光燈充電完成後便可按下快門釋放掣進行拍攝

◆ 如次閃燈拍攝曝光準確的話，TTL 指示會在液晶顯示屏上顯示大約 5 秒如指示沒有出

現的話，閃光燈所能輸出的光量可能並不足夠應付環境，請移近主體再進行拍攝

◆ 在比較黑暗的環境進行對焦的話，自動對焦輔助光朿會自動開啟注意：有效距離為 0.7

米／2.3 呎到 9 米／29.5 呎

◆ 請謹記當相機設於手動曝光模式時，閃光燈會自動被設定到對上一次所選擇的模式

◆ 當閃光燈充電完成後，閃光燈標記會顯示在相機的觀景器內當閃光燈充電尚未完成前按

下快門釋放掣的話，閃光燈並不會被觸發而相機會以一個較慢的快門來進行次拍攝

在其他曝光模式下使用閃光燈

快門先決設定

當選擇了快門後，相機會因應現場環境的光源自動選擇適當光圈配合所選擇的快門速度不

能超越閃燈同步速度在此模式下，閃燈補光模式會被選擇

光圈先決設定

於相機上選擇 A 模式，光圈先決自動曝光模式後，在自行選擇所欲光圈後，相機會因應現場

環境的光源自動選擇適當快門配合在此模式下，閃燈補光模式會被選擇

手動曝光設定

光圈及快門在手動曝光模式下都能個別地被設定快門速度之選擇範圍從 B 門到閃燈同步值

◆ 在此模式下，閃燈補光模式會被選擇

◆ 如根據測光表所示進行曝光，因應當時環境可為日光同步或慢快門同步

閃燈連發限制

為免閃燈因連續發射，而導致閃燈内部電路過熱，請讓閃光燈依隨下列表格所述操作，並務

請在每組次組完成後，讓閃光燈休息至少 10 分鐘

模式閃光次數

TTL，手動全輸出，半輸出 連續 20 次

手動1/4 輸出，1/8 輸出 連續 25 次

手動1/16 輸出，1/32 輸出 連續 40 次

頻閃循環 10 次

閃光輸出操作

讓攝影師可因應拍攝所需效果，而自行調節閃光燈輸出光量度；閃光可選擇以全光 1/1 至 1/64

光度輸出，每以 1 級遞增

1. 設定相機的曝光模式為全手動模式



2. 按下閃光燈上的“MODE”按鈕，選擇自控閃光控制模式



3. 當按下“SEL”按鈕後，輸出數值會閃爍

4. 按＋或－按鈕，以設定所需的輸出光度

5. 再按一次“SEL”會使顯示停止閃爍

6. 按下快門釋放掣進行對焦，然後查看鏡頭距離尺上-被攝體

的距離數值，繼而可調節光圈 F 值或閃燈輸出值，使被攝

體處閃光覆蓋範圍

7. 當“充電完成提示燈”亮起，表示閃光燈已就緒待發

◆ 正確曝光亦可用以下的方程式來計算：

閃光燈指數 GN(表 1)／閃燈與主體距離＝光圈 F.值

本閃光燈亦是根據此一方程式來計算 / 操作(請参閱本書最後頁表 1)

高速閃燈同步HSS

如使用普通的閃光燈來拍攝的話，相機的快門並不能超越本身的閃燈同步快門因為快門簾於

全開的剎那閃光燈已同時被觸發FP 高速閃燈同步模式則由快門簾開始活動的時候已經一直

保持閃動因此可以使用一個比同步快門更高速的快門

1. 按下“MODE”按鈕來選擇閃燈模式可使用“TTL”或“M”模式

按下

＋或－

按鈕來進入

模式此時，

“ ”

應顯示在液晶顯示屏上

3. 對主體進行對焦

4. 當充電完成提示燈亮起方可進行拍攝

◆ 於高速閃燈同步時，有效閃燈指數會隨快門速度而改變當快門速度越高時，閃燈指數便

會變得越細，閃燈有效距離變得越短請參閱最後頁表 2

◆ 如要取消高速閃燈同步功能，可參閱其設定方法來令液晶顯示屏上

指示消失

做型模擬閃燈

此模式可在閃燈拍攝前，先以閃燈頻閃方式，照射主體，從而檢視主體被照射時的光影效果情況

1. 按 MODE 鈕，設定閃兄模式

2. 按＋ / －鈕，待訊號在 LCD 屏幕上顯現

3. 確定充電完成，按著 TEST 鈕發放檢視燈光

頻閃模式

當使用慢快門的時候，頻閃模式能令閃光燈於快門開啟時作連續發射主體的影像會被連續

地記錄在張底片上如影像在一個黑暗背景前拍攝，此效果將會非常明顯連閃頻率可調

範圍由每秒 1 次(1HZ)到每秒 100 次(100HZ)，最多可連閃 90 次連閃次數受限於連閃頻率

及輸出數值，情請參閱說明書最後頁(表三)

1. 把相機設定到手動曝光(M)模式，並選定光圈值

2. 按下閃光燈上的 MODE 按鈕來選擇頻閃模式MULTI

3. 按下 SEL 按鈕使連閃頻率數值在液晶屏上閃爍

4. 按下＋或－按鈕來選擇連閃頻率數值

5. 再按下 SEL 按鈕，閃光燈輸出值出現不停閃爍

6. 按下＋或－按鈕來設定閃光燈輸出值

7. 再按一下 SEL 按鈕，令頻閃次數閃爍

8. 按下＋或－按鈕來設定頻閃次數

9. 再按一下 SEL 按鈕，使各顯示停止閃爍

10. 當充電完成提示燈亮起，表示閃光燈已準備就緒

注意：請把快門設定為不短於頻閃次數 ÷ 連閃頻率

反射閃光

在室內房間中使用閃光燈正面向主體進行拍攝，很多時在主體背後將會出現強烈的背影若

將閃光燈燈頭調節往上或往側面，則可利用天花板或牆壁的反射光，使主體所受的照明度，

呈現比較平均柔和按下上下活

動釋放按鈕或左右活動釋放按鈕來調節反射角度

向上：0°, 60°, 75°, 90° 向下：0°,7°

向右：0°, 60°, 75°, 90°

向左：0°, 60°, 75°,90°, 120°, 150°, 180°

當閃光燈被調節離開 0°角時，液晶顯示屏左下角，將有圖案

顯現作

提示

請選擇白色作燈光反射面，其他顏色的表面，將令反射回來

的光帶有偏色的色溫

因應不同之反射表面主體距離等因素，閃燈在 TTL(Auto 模式)，其原本所示的有效覆蓋閃

光距離將有所改動請於釋放快門後，檢查液晶顯示屏上的TTL 閃光覆蓋範圍是否正確

近攝/近距閃光

應把閃光燈頭調節向下 7 度可作近攝閃光之用在此情況下閃光燈的有效距離為 0.5 米至 2

米當閃光燈頭在向下 7 度

，液晶顯示屏上左下角，將出現閃爍圖案提示

反射片

閃光燈內附置反射片，在進行燈光反射攝

影模式時，它能將閃光燈所發出的光線反

射至被攝主體表面同時在主体的眼睛上

造出高光的效果設置：首將廣角閃光擴

散片及反射片從閃燈頂部拉出，(拉出光片

請小心)，再將(12) 擴散片退回閃燈內

◆ 創立燈光反射攝影模式，適在近距進行，並將閃燈發射部翹起至 90 度°

無線閃燈

當使用無線閃燈模式時，相機無需透過延長線來觸發離機的閃光燈，使閃光燈拍攝的效果能

有較立體及自然的感覺在使用 EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI 時，相機與閃光燈的通訊是透

過光來達成於無線閃燈模式下，相機會自動計算正確的曝光

◆ 在本節往後的說明中，與相機直接連接的閃光燈被稱為“主控燈” (Controller)，而遙距的閃光燈

被稱為“離機閃光燈” (off-camera flash)

◆ 當架設從屬燈時，可使用專屬的微型燈座，此燈座附帶能連接三・架的螺絲孔

◆ 把從屬燈放在所需的位置上但不要進入被拍攝的範圍內

◆ 請把閃光燈設定在跟主體保持 0.5 米／1.5 呎至 5 米／16 呎的距離內，並把相機設定在跟

主體保持 1 米／3 呎至 5 米／16 呎的距離內

◆ 為免其他相近距離的無線閃燈使用者錯誤觸發閣下的閃光燈，可使用與對方不同的頻道來

避免互相影響請參閱以下設定

使用內置閃燈主導引發閃光

1. 將相機設為無線閃光燈模式

◆ 此模式全因應機體是否有此功能，請參閱所屬相機操作說明書

2. 將相機設定於 P, A , S 或 M 曝光模式

3. 按閃燈上的

鍵，待至分離機體閃光 off-camera flash 顯示出現

4. 按

鍵，將分離機體閃光 off-camera flash 設定為 1 號

5. 按

鍵，將閃光模式設定為 TTL

6. 在按下

鍵時，頻道符號將閃動

7. 按

或

鍵，選擇(C1 - C4)頻道

8. 按下

鍵，顯示將停止閃動

9. 將閃燈安放在機身上，隨即半按快門釋放鈕(所選頻道即記錄在

相機內)

10. 把閃光燈從相機上移除並放在所需位置上

11. 開啟相機的內置閃光燈並確定已完成充電

◆ 在無線閃燈模式中，閃光燈完成充電後會以閃爍自動對焦輔助光來提示

12. 向主體對焦及進行拍攝

◆ 相機的內置閃光燈一但發射，EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI 便會被觸發相機的內置閃光

燈只是作為觸發及控制之用途照明主體之工作完全由 EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI 來完

成相機會像在 TTL 自動閃燈模式一般地去控制閃燈輸出來達到正確曝光

◆ 因應快門速度，閃燈將自動轉換為正常閃光或高速同步閃光

◆ 當相機曝光模式設定為 M，閃燈將以無線自設閃光輸出操作

使用置放於機頂上閃燈發放訊號引發閃光

無線控閃光需由 2 支或多支 EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI 組成EF-530DG SUPER SO-ADI

只可作分離機體閃光 off-camera flash 模式操作需視乎閃燈型號，可否作分離機體閃光

off-camera flash 模式，同時它需擁有能變作為主控燈的功能

可作分離機體閃光的閃燈型號

EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI

EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI

EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI

控制模式

可作分離機體閃光的相機型號

α700, α900 α900

控制閃光輸比例設定

可控制多達 3 組；主控燈離機

燈 1離機燈 2

每組可設定閃光輸比例達五級或

禁止閃光

可控制多達 2 組；主控燈離機

燈離機燈

可設定離機閃光輸比例 1:2 或

2:1.

閃光模式

TTL 自動閃光高速同步閃光

(TTLM) 自設閃光輸出

TTL 自動閃光

高速同步閃光(TTL)

B-1.

在離機作閃光情况下

相機及主控燈設定

1. 將相機設定為無線閃光模式

◆ 此設定全視乎機身型號有否此功能，請閣下相機說明書

2. 將相機設定於 P, A, S 或 M 曝光模式

3. 將閃燈安放在機身上

4. 閃燈上屏幕將自動顯示為主控設定 (若屏幕沒有自動顯示

為主控設定，請按

鍵，待至主控設定畫面出現)

5. 在按下

鍵後，主控模式畫面將不停眨動

6. 在

或

鍵中，按

設定控制模式

7. 在按下

鍵後，頻道訊息畫面將不停眨動

8. 可按

或

鍵，設定頻道 (C1-C4)

9. 在按下

鍵後，輸出比例畫面將不停眨動

10. 可按

或

鍵，設定輸出比例 [ ]

11. 再按下

鍵，顯示便停止眨動

離機閃光燈設定

12. 按下

鍵，待至離機閃光模式畫面出現

13. 按動

鍵，將離機閃光設定為 1

14. 按動

鍵，將閃光模式設定為 TTL

15. 按下

鍵時頻道訊息畫面將不停眨動

16. 按

或

鍵，設定與主控燈相同頻道號

17. 再按下

鍵，顯示便停止眨動

18. 把離機燈安放在所需位置

19. 確定各閃光燈已充電完成

◆ 當充電完成後，充電完成提示燈會亮起，另外自動對焦輔助燈會閃爍

20. 向主體對焦及進行拍攝

100

B-2.

控制光量輸出比率 (控制模式 )

相機和主控燈設定

1. 依隨上 B-1 程序 1 至 9 相同，按步設定

2. 按

或

鍵，使光量輸出控制模式畫面顯示為

[

]

3. 在按下

鍵後，閃光模式畫面將眨動

4. 按

或鍵，設定閃光模式為 TTL

5. 在按下

鍵後，主控燈的閃光比率畫面 [ ] 顯示將眨動

6. 使用

或

鍵設定主控燈的比例值

7. 在按下

鍵後，離機閃燈 1 的閃光比率輸出 [ ] 畫面將會眨動

8. 使用

或

鍵，設定離機閃燈 1 的閃光輸出比例值

9. 在按下

鍵後，離機閃燈 2 的閃光比率輸出 [ ] 畫面將會眨動

10. 使用

或

鍵，設定離機閃燈 2 的閃光輸出比例值

11. 按下

鍵，所有顯示即停止眨動

離機閃光燈設定

12. 設定，依隨上 B-1 離機閃光燈設定程序相同，按步設定

◆ 若同時使用 2 支離機閃燈，可配以號碼作識别

◆ 主控閃光比率離機閃燈 1 及離機閃燈 2，可設定如下，

(不閃光)124816

閃光輸出比率可個別選擇設定

[例]

設定值輸出比率

主控燈

2 2/7

離機閃燈 1

1 1/7

離機閃燈 2

4 4/7

B-3.

控制光量輸出比率 (控制模式 )

相機及主控燈設定

1. 依隨上 B-1 程序 1 至 6 相同，按步設定

2. 在

鍵中，按下

鍵

3. 在按下

鍵時，頻道符號將不停閃動

4. 利用按動

鍵，選用頻道(C1 – C4)

5. 利用按動

鍵，設定調控輸出比率顯示為[ ]

6. 在按下

鍵時，閃光輸出比率將不停閃動

7. 調控閃光輸出比率：在離機閃燈上按動

或鍵(選擇或 .

8. 按下

鍵，停止符號閃動

離機閃光燈設定

9. 若閃燈型號為 EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI，可依隨 B-1 步驟進行離機閃光燈設定

◆ 若閃燈型號為 EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI，請參閱 EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI 使用手册

◆ 若離機閃燈為 EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI，頻道只可選擇 C1 至 C3

101

離機無線從屬Slave閃光模式

普通從屬誘發閃光模式

即使 EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI 並不是安裝於相機上，亦可利用相機的內置閃光燈或其他閃光

燈對 EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI 進行誘發

1. 把閃光燈接在相機的熱靴座上

2. 設定相機的曝光模式如使用“A”或“M”模式時，請設定所需的光圈值

3. 開啟閃光燈電源，然後半按相機的快門釋放掣

◆ 此時，光圈數值及菲林感光度數據，便即自動傳送到閃光燈上

4. 把閃光燈從相機上移除

5. 按下 MODE 按鈕來選擇設定從屬閃光模式

/ 圖示

6. 按動 SEL 按鈕，使閃光燈輸出值畫面閃爍

7. 按下＋或－按鈕來設定閃光燈輸出數值

◆ 參考閃燈液晶顯示屏上閃燈覆蓋距離顯示和跟實際被攝體距離，是否相配被攝體實際距離

若超出閃光燈所能覆蓋範圍，需改變光圈數值以配合

◆ 如需要，可手動設定閃光燈上的菲林感光度或光圈數值

a. 設定菲林速度…按下 MODE 按鈕選擇

，然後按下 SEL 按鈕令其閃爍，再按下＋或

－按鈕設定菲林感光度，最後再按一下 SEL 來完成設定步驟

b. 設定光圈值…在閃光燈被設定為從屬模式(Slave)時，按下 SEL 按鈕使光圈值閃爍，再按下

＋或－按鈕來設定所需之光圈值，然後再按 SEL 來完成設定步驟

8. 按動 SEL 按鈕，直至所有閃爍中的顯示停止閃爍

9. 把從屬閃光燈安放在所需位置(不要把閃光燈放在被拍攝範圍內)

10. 當確定所有閃光燈已就緒後便可進行拍攝

◆ 如以 SONY 系列閃燈或相機內置閃燈為主控燈，EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI 為從屬Slave

閃燈時，請注意，請不要使用 ADI/DI 功能，因其的監察預閃程序將會做成“從屬 Slave 閃光”

在相機快門尚未被啟動時，已經被誘發閃光

◆ 當 EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI 已就緒時，自動對焦輔助光將不停閃爍

◆ 如 EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI 被設在從屬模式下而被安裝在相機上的話，閃光燈是不會被引發

主導多燈串聯從屬Slave無線控閃光模式

如使用兩支或以上的 EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI 閃光燈，可用頻道控制同時誘發一支或多支

閃光燈在此模式下，其中一支閃光燈會擔當主導誘發，其他閃光燈則會作為從屬而被誘發

設定從屬閃光燈觸發程序

1. 把閃光燈安裝到相機上

2. 把相機的曝光模式設定為

(光圈先決)或

(手動曝光) 

◆ 把相機的快門設定為 1/30 秒或更慢主控制閃光燈會發出特定的訊號至閃光燈群的所有閃

光燈如相機上的快門速度超過 1/30 秒的話，閃光燈群之間便不能達致同步

3. 開啟閃光燈電源，然後半按相機的快門釋放掣

◆ 此時相機已設定的光圈數值及菲林感光度會自動地被傳送到從屬閃光燈上

4. 把閃光燈從相機上移除

5. 按下 MODE 按鈕來選擇設定從屬閃光模式

Slave 從屬模式

6. 按下 SEL 按鈕使頻道顯示閃爍

7. 按下＋或－按鈕來設定頻道值C1 或 C2

8. 再按 SEL 按鈕使閃光燈輸出值 (

) 閃爍

9. 按下＋或－按鈕來設定閃光燈輸出數值

102

◆ 參考閃燈液晶顯示屏上閃燈覆蓋距離顯示和跟實際被攝體距離，是否相配如被攝體實際距

離超出閃光燈所能覆蓋的範圍，需改變光圈數值以配合

10. 按動 SEL 鈕，直至所有閃爍中的顯示停止閃爍

11. 把從屬閃光燈安放在所需位置(不要把閃光燈放置在被拍攝範圍內)

設定主導誘發閃燈裝置

12. 按下 MODE 按鈕來選定

/ Slave 從屬模式

13. 按下 SEL 按鈕使頻道選擇開啟，並顯示閃爍

14. 按下

＋

或－按鈕，設定與先前從屬閃光燈群所相應的頻道

15. 再按 SEL 按鈕，使閃燈確認輸出的正確誘發光量(

符

號閃爍)

16. 按下 SEL 按鈕，使顯示訊息停止閃爍 (

圖示將消失，衹留下頻道顯示

17. 把主導誘發閃燈安裝到相機上

18. 當確認所有閃光燈單元已就緒後便可按快門進行拍攝

◆ 當 EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI 已就緒時，自動對焦輔助光將不停閃爍

◆ 若選設・誘發

功能燈具時，以 SEL 鈕設定/改動光圈值功能，將失效

◆ 主導閃光燈裝置，其功能只是用作傳遞訊息，誘發其從屬閃光燈

規格

類  型：套入式專用 TTL 自動變焦電子閃光燈

閃燈指數：61ISO 100/M, 設置在 105mm

電  源：四枚 AA 型鹼性或四枚 AA 型 Ni-Cd 或四枚 AA 型 Ni-MH

回電時間：大約 7 秒鹼性電或大約 5 秒Ni-Cd 及 Ni-MH

閃光次數：約 120鹼性電 約 160Ni-Cd 及 Ni-MH

閃光時間：約 1/700 秒全光輸出

自動關閉電源：可以

閃光燈覆蓋角度：24mm – 105mm 自動馬達控制使用內置廣角擴散片可令覆蓋角度達至 17mm

重量：330g

尺寸：77mm闊X 139mm高X 117mm長

只适用于中国

产品手册 : 六种危险物质的名称以及存在与否



 有毒有害物质或元素



部件名称

铅

(Pb)

汞

(Hg)

镉

(Cd)

六价铬

(Cr6+)

多澳联苯

(PBB)

多溴二苯醚

(PBDE)



外壳 金属部件 不 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

外壳 树脂部件 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

基板部件 不 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

光学部件 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

机械部件 不 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○



备注

只适用于中国

○:表示该有毒有害物质在该部件所有物均质材料中的含量均在 SJ/T11363-2006 标准规定的限

量要求以下

不:表示该有毒有害物质到在该部件的某一均质材料中的含量超出 SJ/T11363-2006 标准规定的

限量要求

10 或 5 图形含义: 此标识是适用于在中国境内销售的电子讯息产品的环保使用期限

此产品使用者只要遵守安全和使用上的注意事项，从生产之日起的十年或五年期间不会对环境污

染，也不会对人身和财产造成重大影响

103

한󰖢어

󱬑그󱇽 EF-착려0 DG SUPER SO-ADI 플래󱬑를 󰖡󱾺해 주셔서 감사󲶞니다. 󱾩 플래󱬑는 󱧁니

AF SLR 󲚩메󰾱용으󱂑 개󱑑한 플래󱬑󱾺니다. 󲚩메󰾱 모델에 따󰾱 기능 및 󱿆동은 다를 󱩍

있습니다. 본 설명서를 󲁊󰯺한 다음, 플래󱬑의 기능, 󲂥󱿆, 취󰘾상 주의󲁅을 󱑉르게 󱾩해하고

사진촬󱸶을 즐기󱬢󱬑오. 플래󱬑의 활용󰯹를 󰧇󱾩고 최대의 성능을 󱾩끌어 내기 위해서는

플래󱬑를 사용하기 전에 플래󱬑 사용 설명서와 󲚩메󰾱 사용 설명서를 󲶝께 󱩎󲇵해 주󱬑기

󱑉󰿂니다. 다 󱾲으신 후에는 반드󱬑 사용󱿅󰐵 언제󰾱󰯹 볼 󱩍 있는 곳에 󱔩관해 주󱬢󱬑오.

사용상 주의󲁅

손해󰣍 부상을 미연에 방󲇵하기 위해 플래󱬑 사용전에 사용 설명서를 주의깊게 󱾲어 주󱬑고

아래의 표󱬑들에 주의를 기울󱸡 주󱬑기 󱑉󰿂니다.

󲫮히, 아래의 두󰐵󲇵 주의 표󱬑에 󲫮별히 주의하󱬢󱬑오.

경고 !!

주의 !!

󱾩 기호는 경고와 주의를 표󱬑해주는 중요한 사항들을 알󱁙󲅂니다.

󱾩 기호는 󰘽󲇵하는 사항들을 알󱁙󲅂니다.

󱾩 기호를 무󱬑하고 잘못 취󰘾하면 󱬡󰐶한 손상󱾩󰣍 위험한 결과를 초래할 󱩍 있습니다.

󱾩 기호를 무󱬑하고 잘못 취󰘾하면 손상을 󱾺을 󱩍 있습니다.

경 고 !!

플래󱬑 내부에는 고전압 회󱂑󰐵 내장되어 있습니다. 감전󱾩󰣍 󲺉상의 우󱁙󰐵 있으므󱂑 분해,

개󲂥등은 절대 󰘽󲶞니다. 만󱾱 󰣎하등으󱂑 손상된 경우에는 내부 부품에 손을 대󲇵 않󰯹󱂒

주의하󱸡 주󱬢󱬑오.

플래󱬑를 사󰿁 눈 󰐵까󱾩에 대고 촬󱸶하󲇵 󱇽󱬢󱬑오. 눈 󰐵까󱾩에서 플래󱬑를 󱑑광하면 󱬑󱁚

장󱶕를 󱾱으킬 위험성󱾩 있습니다. 󲫮히 유아를 촬󱸶할 때에는 려애 󱾩상 떨어져서 촬󱸶하󱬢󱬑오.

󲚩메󰾱의 핫 슈에 플래󱬑를 󲁆󱧂하󱸡 사용할때에는 󲚩메󰾱의 싱크󱂑 터미널에 손을 대󲇵

󱇽󱬢󱬑오. 고전압으󱂑 인하󱸡 감전될 󱩍 있습니다.

󲺉재 및 기타 위험󱾩 있는 장󱧁에서는 사용하󲇵 󱇽󱬢󱬑오. 그󱀼󲇵 않을 경우, 󲺉재󰣍 󲰢󱑑의

원인󱾩 될 󱩍 있습니다.

주 의 !!

󱾩 플래󱬑는 󱧁니 AF SLR 󲚩메󰾱 󱾩외의 󲚩메󰾱에는 사용하󲇵 󱇽󱬢󱬑오. 그󱀼󲇵 않을 경우,

󲚩메󰾱의 전󱿅회󱂑에 손상을 줄 󱩍 있습니다.

󱾩 플래󱬑는 방󱩍 󰖡󲂥󱂑 되어 있󲇵 않습니다. 우천󱬑󰣍 물󰐵에서 사용할 때에는 󲁋󲇵

않󰯹󱂒 주의하󱸡 주󱬢󱬑오. 물󱾩 내부에 들어󰐵면 고장의 원인󱾩 됩니다.

플래󱬑와 󲚩메󰾱에 충격을 주󲇵 󱇽󱬢󱬑오. 먼󲇵󰐵 많은 장󱧁󰣍 고온다습한 장󱧁에

방치해두󲇵 󱇽󱬢󱬑오. 고장󱾩󰣍 󲺉재의 원인󱾩 될 󱩍 있습니다.

󰘾격한 온󰯹 변󲺉에 의해 플래󱬑 내부에 결󱂑󰐵 󱑑생할 󱩍 있습니다. 추운 실외에서 따뜻한

실내󱂑 들어올 때와 같은 경우에는 케󱾩스󰣍 비닐봉󲇵에 넣어 주위 온󰯹에 󱾪󱩎해진 후에

사용하󱸡 주󱬢󱬑오.

방충제는 플래󱬑에 󰣍쁜 󱸶향을 미칠󱩍 있습니다. 서󰿂장󱾩󰣍 장롱에 󱔩관하󲇵 󱇽󱬢󱬑오.

신󰣍, 벤젠등의 유기용제󱂑 닦󲇵 󱇽󱬢󱬑오. 변󱣾, 변형등의 원인󱾩 됩니다. 부드러운 천으󱂑

닦아주󱬢󱬑오.

플래󱬑를 장기간 󱔩관할때에는 통풍󱾩 잘 되는 서늘하고 건󲂥한 곳에 󱔩관하󱬢󱬑오.

플래󱬑의 성능을 유󲇵󱬑키기 위해서는 매󰬡 플래󱬑 󱑑광 테스󲫭를 󱩍회 실󱬑해 주󱬑기

󱑉󰿂니다.

104

󰐶부의 명칭

외부 부분

려.플래󱬑 헤드 력.AF 󱔩󲂥광 󱑑광부 3.상하 󱑉운스 󰐶󰯹 4.좌우 󱑉운스 󰐶󰯹

차.상하 󱑉운스 󰾲 및 해제 버튼 착.좌우 회전 󰾲 및 해제 버튼 7.LCD 패널

8.배터리 커버 9.릴리즈 버튼 려0.슈 려려.캐치 󰾱󱾩󲫭 패널 려력.와󱾩드 패널

컨󲫭롤

려3.MODE 버튼 려4.<SEL> SELECT 버튼 려차.< + > 증󰐵 버튼 려착.< - > 감󱧁 버튼

려7.ZOOM 버튼 려8.TEST 버튼 려9.LIGHT 버튼 력0.준비 표󱬑등 력려.전원 스위치

배터리에 대하󱸡

󱾩 플래󱬑에는 4 개의 AA 타󱾺 알󲚩󰾱인 배터리 또는 니켈 󲚩드늄 배터리(N로-C화d발, 니켈 󱩍󱧁

배터리(N로-MH발󰐵 사용됩니다. 󱈒간 배터리󰯹 사용할 󱩍 있󲇵만 알󲚩󰾱인 배터리에 비해 󱩍명󱾩

짧아 권장해 드리󲇵 않습니다. 준비 표󱬑등의 󲁅등까󲇵 30 초󱾩상 걸릴경우 󱣽 배터리󱂑 교체해

주󱬢󱬑오.

◆ 배터리󰣍 배터리 커버의 󲁆󲁅은 항상 깨끗한 상󲤑를 유󲇵해 주󱬢󱬑오.

◆ 니켈 󲚩드늄(N로-C화d발 배터리를 사용할 경우에는 배터리 󲁆󲁅의 형󲤑󰐵 규격으󱂑 통󱾱되어 있󲇵

않으므󱂑 사용할 󱩍 있는󲇵 󲺊인하고 󰣍서 󰖡󱾺하󱬑기 󱑉󰿂니다.

◆ 배터리의 󲰢󱑑, 전󲇵󱶖 누설, 과열등을 방󲇵하기 위해 동󱾱한 브랜드, 동󱾱한 타󱾺의 AA 배터리

4 개를 사용해 주󱬢󱬑오. 배터리 브랜드󰣍 타󱾺을 혼󲶞해 사용하󲇵 󱇽󱬢󱬑오.

◆ 배터리를 분해하거󰣍 불󱧂, 물󱧂에 던󲇵거󰣍, 단󰾲등은 파열의 우󱁙󰐵 있으므󱂑 절대 󰘽󲶞니다.

또한 니켈 󲚩드늄(N로-C화d발 배터리 󱾩외에는 충전하󲇵 󱇽󱬢󱬑오.

◆ 플래󱬑를 장기간 사용하󲇵 않을때는 배터리 󱶖󱾩 누설되󲇵 않󰯹󱂒 배터리를 꺼내어 󱔩관해

주󱬢󱬑오.

◆ 󲀵온의 상󲤑에서는 배터리 성능󱾩 󲀵하될 󱩍 있습니다. 추운곳에서 촬󱸶을 할때에는 예비

배터리를 준비해 두󱬢󱬑오.

◆ 오랜 󱸡󲶾󱾩󰣍 추운 󲇵󱸢에서 촬󱸶을 할때에는 󱸡분의 배터리를 준비해 두󱬢󱬑오.

배터리 장󲑞

려. 전원 스위치󰐵 OFF 󱂑 되어 있는 것을 󲺊인하고,

배터리 커버를 󲺉살표 방향으󱂑 밀어 엽니다.

력. AA 배터리 4 개를 배터리 덮개 안쪽에 있는

표󱬑에

및

–

방향에 󱈓추어 넣습니다.

3. 덮개를 󰬠습니다.

4. 전원 스위치를 ON 으󱂑 하면 몇초후에 준비

표󱬑등󱾩 켜져 플래󱬑를 󱑑광󱬑킬 준비󰐵

되었음을 표󱬑해 󲅂니다.

차. TEST 버튼 을 누르고 󱑑광하는󲇵 󲺊인󲶞니다.

오토 파워 오프

배터리 󱧁모를 줄󱾩기 위해 플래󱬑󰐵 󱶲 력40 초동안 󱿆동하󲇵 않으면 󱿅동으󱂑 전원󱾩 꺼집니다.

플래󱬑를 다󱬑 󱿆동하󱁙면 TEST 버튼을 누르거󰣍 󲚩메󰾱 셔터를 살짝 누르󱬢󱬑오.  오토 파워

오프 기능은 무선 TTL 플래󱬑 모드, 󱾱반 슬󱀽󱾩브 플래󱬑, 󲇵󲁊 슬󱀽󱾩브 플래󱬑 모드에서는

󱿆동하󲇵 않습니다.

에러 표󱬑

배터리 전원󱾩 불충분하거󰣍 전기신호에 󱾩상󱾩 생긴 경우, LCD 패널의  플래󱬑 󲂥사󰐶 󱾩

깜󱑊거릴 것󱾺니다. 󱾩러한 경우 전원 스위치를 껐다󰐵 다󱬑 켜주󱬢󱬑오. 그래󰯹 표󱬑󰐵 계󱧂

󰣍오면 배터리 전원을 체크해 주󱬢󱬑오.

105

플래󱬑 헤드 󲂥󲁊

상하 󱑉운스 󰾲 및 해제 버튼을 누르면서 플래󱬑 헤드를 원하는

위치󱂑 󲂥󲁊하󱬢󱬑오.

◆ 플래󱬑 전원을 켜면 LCD 패널에

󱇽크󰐵 󰣍타󰣍며 만󱾱

󱇽크󰐵 깜󱑊󱾱 경우는 플래󱬑 헤드󰐵 올󱑉르게 󲂥󲁊되󲇵 않은

것을 의미 󲶞니다.

플래󱬑 장󲑞과 탈󲑞

전원스위치󰐵 꺼져 있는󲇵 󲺊인󲶞니다. 그리고 난

후, 찰󲚪 󱧁리󰐵 날때까󲇵 󲚩메󰾱의 핫슈에 밀어

넣은 후 고󲁊󱬑킵니다. 

◆ 플래󱬑를 장󲑞하거󰣍 탈󲑞󱬑킬 때, 󲚩메󰾱와

플래󱬑의 슈 부분󱾩 손상을 󱾺󲇵 않󰯹󱂒 플래󱬑의

아랫부분을 손으󱂑 잡습니다.

◆ 󲚩메󰾱의 내장 플래󱬑󰐵 올󱁙져 있는 경우에는

플래󱬑를 장󲑞하기 전에 내󱇲니다.

플래󱬑를 탈󲑞󱬑킬때는, 릴리즈 버튼을 누른상󲤑에서 󲚩메󰾱의 핫슈󱂑부터 플래󱬑를 󱑉깥쪽으󱂑

밀어 분리󱬑킵니다. 

플래󱬑 󲂥사󰐶 설󲁊

ZOOM 버튼을 누르면 표󱬑󰐵 󰣍오고, ZOOM 버튼을 누를때󱇽다 LCD 패널에 변경된 󲂥사󰐶󱾩

다음과 같󱾩 󰣍타납니다.

력4애애 → 력8애애 → 3차애애 → 차0애애 → 70애애 → 8차애애 → 려0차애애 → (A함to발

󱾱반󲀶으󱂑 TTL 모드에서는, 사용 렌즈의 초󲁅거리에 따󰾱 플래󱬑󰐵 󲅁 위치를 󱿅동으󱂑 설󲁊해

󲅂니다.

◆ 전원을 켜면 플래󱬑는 󱇽󲇵󱇾에 설󲁊된 󲅁 헤드 󲰡󲇵션을 설󲁊할 것󱾺니다.

◆ 플래󱬑 헤드 설󲁊󱔩다 광󰐶 렌즈를 사용하면 사진의 모서리󰐵 노출 부󲂦으󱂑 󰣍올 󱩍 있습니다

◆ 플래󱬑 헤드 설󲁊에 따󰾱 플래󱬑 󰐵󱾩드 넘버󰐵 변경될 것󱾺니다.

와󱾩드 패널

플래󱬑에는 려7애애 의 초 광󰐶 󲂥사 󰐶을 제공하는

내장 와󱾩드 패널󱾩 장󲑞되었습니다. 와󱾩드 패널과

캐치 󰾱󱾩󲫭 패널을 꺼내 플래󱬑 󱑑광 부를 덮어

󲅂니다. (패널들을 부드󱀲게 꺼낼 󱩍 있󰯹󱂒

주의󲶞니다.발 그 다음 캐치 󰾱󱾩󲫭 패널을 원래

위치󱂑 넣습니다. 플래󱬑의 󲂥사 󰐶은 려7애애 에

󱿅동으󱂑 설󲁊될 것󱾺니다.

◆ 실󱩍󱂑 와󱾩드 패널󱾩 떨어󲇵면 ZOOM 버튼󱾩

󱿆동하󲇵 않습니다. 󱾩 경우 󰖡󱾺처󰣍 서비스

센터에 문의하󱬑기 󱑉󰿂니다.

106

LCD

패널 󲂥명

LIGHT 버튼을 누르면 LCD 패널에 8 초간 󲂥명󱾩 켜집니다. LIGHT 버튼을 한번 더 누르면

8 초󱾩상 󲂥명󱾩 󲇵󱧂됩니다.

TTL

오토 플래󱬑

TTL AUTO 모드에서는 피사체󰐵 󲀶󲁊 노출󱾩 되󰯹󱂒 플래󱬑의 󱑑광량을 󲚩메󰾱󰐵 제어󲶞니다.

◆ 󲚩메󰾱 모델과 렌즈의 󲂥󲶞에 따󰾱, TTL 플래󱬑의 진󲶾과󲁊󱾩 다를 󱩍 있습니다. 아래의 󲑝󲫭를

참󲂥하󱬑기 󱑉󰿂니다. (TTL 은 LCD 패널에 아래와 같󱾩 표󱬑될 것󱾺니다발

DSLR / M화xx함애 70

차0

차

D구액화x 7D, 착0, 40, 7, 차, 4, 3L

M화xx함애 9

D구액화x 9

다른 󲚩메󰾱 모델

D 타󱾺 렌즈 ADI 측광 P①e-fl화②h 측광 O①d로액화①구 TTL 측광

D 타󱾺 󱾩외의 렌즈 P①e-fl화②h 측광 P①e-fl화②h 측광 O①d로액화①구 TTL 측광

1. 󲚩메󰾱의 노출 모드를

P 모드에 󱈓󲗚니다.

2. 플래󱬑의 전원스위치를 켜면 LCD 패널에 TTL 표󱬑󰐵

󰣍타󰣍게 되고 충전󱾩 󱬑󱿆될 것󱾺니다.

◆ D-SLR② 과 󲶝께,

표󱬑󰐵 켜져 있는󲇵 󲺊인󲶞니다.

표󱬑󰐵 꺼져있는 경우

󰣍

–

버튼을 눌러 표󱬑󰐵

󰣍타󰣍게 󲶞니다. 그󱀼󲇵 않을 경우 노출󱾩 󲁊󲺊하󲇵

않습니다.

3. 피사체에 초󲁅을 󱈓󲗚니다.

4. 피사체󰐵 플래󱬑 󱑑광 유효 범위안에 있는󲇵 플래󱬑의 LCD 패널의 표󱬑를 통해 󲺊인󲶞니다.

5. 플래󱬑󰐵 완전히 충전되었을 때 셔터 버튼을 누󱆺니다.

◆ 󲚩메󰾱에 󲀶󲁊노출󱾩 되면, LCD 창의 TTL 표󱬑 󰐵 차 초간 󰣍타납니다. 󱾩 표󱬑󰐵 󰣍타󰣍󲇵 않으면

플래󱬑 광량󱾩 그 상황에 󲀶󲶞하󲇵 않은 것󱾺니다. 피사체에 좀더 근󲁆해 다󱬑 촬󱸶을 하󱬑기 󱑉󰿂니다.

◆ AF 󱔩󲂥광은 어두운곳에 있는 피사체에 초󲁅을 󱈓󲗙으󱂑서 󱿅동으󱂑 켜집니다. AF 󱔩󲂥광의 유효

범위는 󱶲 0.7 미터에서 9 미터까󲇵 󱾺니다.

◆ 󲚩메󰾱를 M 모드󱂑 설󲁊하󱸵을때는 플래󱬑󰐵 󱇽󲇵󱇾에 사용󲶽던 설󲁊에 󱈓추어󲇵게 될 것󱾺니다.

◆ 플래󱬑󰐵 완전히 충전되었을 때, 플래󱬑 󱇽크󰐵 뷰 파인더에 󰣍타날 것󱾺니다. 플래󱬑󰐵 완전히

충전되기 전에 셔터를 누르게되면 플래󱬑는 󱑑광되󲇵 않고 󲚩메󰾱는 슬󱂑우 셔터 스피드󱂑 플래󱬑

없󱾩 촬󱸶󱾩 됩니다.

다른 󲚩메󰾱 모드에서 플래󱬑 사용

셔터스피드 우선 모드

원하󱬑는 셔터스피드를 설󲁊하면, 󲚩메󰾱는 󲀶󲁊 노출값을 선󲤒해 󲅂니다. 셔터스피드는 󲚩메󰾱의

동󲂥󱧂󰯹󱔩다 󱚕르게 선󲤒할 󱩍 없습니다. 셔터스피드 우선 모드를 선󲤒하면 필 플래󱬑󰐵

사용됩니다.

󲂥리개 우선 모드

A 모드를 선󲤒하고 원하󱬑는 󲂥리개 값을 선󲤒하면 󲚩메󰾱는 배경 노출에 󱈓는 󲀶󲁊 셔터스피드를

󲺊󱔩하게 됩니다. 󲂥리개 우선 모드에서는 필 플래󱬑󰐵 사용됩니다.

M 모드 사용

원하󱬑는 셔터스피드와 󲂥리개 값을 선󲤒하실 󱩍 있습니다. 셔터스피드는 󰐵장 󱚕른 동󲂥󱧂󰯹부터

벌브까󲇵 선󲤒하실 󱩍 있습니다.

◆ M 모드를 사용하면 필 플래󱬑󰐵 사용됩니다.

◆ 노출 측광 표󱬑에 따󰾱 노출을 󲂥󲁊하면, 󲚩메󰾱는 주광󱾩󰣍 슬󱂑우 동󲂥󱂑 󱿆동될 것󱾺니다.

107

연󱧂 촬󱸶󱬑 주의󲁅

플래󱬑 회󱂑의 과열을 방󲇵하기 위해 아래의 표에 󰣍타󰣍는 연󱧂 플래󱬑 촬󱸶 후 최󱧁 려0 분󱾩상

쉬어 주󱬑기 󱑉󰿂니다.

모 드 플래󱬑 촬󱸶 횟󱩍

TTL, M(려/려,려/력발 력0 회 연󱧂 플래󱬑 촬󱸶

M(려/4, 려/8발 력차 회 연󱧂 플래󱬑 촬󱸶

M(려/려착-려/3력발 40 회 연󱧂 플래󱬑 촬󱸶

M함lt로 려0 사󱾩클

매뉴󱷱 플래󱬑 촬󱸶

매뉴󱷱 플래󱬑는 TTL 모드에서 노출을 󱈓추기 어󱁙울 때 피사체를 󲁊󲺊히 촬󱸶하기 위해

사용󲶞니다. 매뉴󱷱 플래󱬑 모드에서 플래󱬑 󱑑광량을 려/려 (풀 󱑑광발에서 려/착4 까󲇵 원 스탭씩

증󰐵󱬑킬 󱩍 있습니다.

려. 󲚩메󰾱 노출 모드를 M 으󱂑 설󲁊󲶞니다.

력. 플래󱬑의 MODE 버튼을 눌러 M 을 선󲤒󲶞니다.

3. SEL 버튼을 누르면 󰐵󱾩드 넘버 󱩍치󰐵 깜󱑊󱾺니다.

4. ＋ 또는 － 버튼을 눌러 원하는 󱑑광량을 설󲁊󲶞니다. SEL

버튼을 누르면 󰐵󱾩드 넘버 󱩍치󰐵 깜󱑊󱾺니다.

차. ＋ 또는 － 버튼을 눌러 원하는 󱑑광량을 설󲁊󲶞니다. SEL 버튼을 다󱬑 누르면 깜󱑊󱾩며

표󱬑되는 󱑑광량󱾩 계󱧂 표󱬑됩니다.

착.

셔터 버튼을 눌러 󲰡커스를 󱈓추고, 렌즈의 󲰡커스링에서 피사체와의 거리를 󲺊인󲶞니다. 그 다음

플래󱬑 LCD 패널에 표󱬑되는 거리󰐵 거의 󱾱치하󰯹󱂒 F-②top 󱾩󰣍 플래󱬑 󱑑광량을 󲂥절󲶞니다.

7. 플래󱬑의 준비 표󱬑등󱾩 켜󲇵면, 촬󱸶하실 󱩍 있습니다.

◆ 다음의 공󱬒으󱂑 󲁊󲺊한 노출을 계산할 󱩍 있습니다:

󰐵󱾩드 넘버  GN / 플래󱬑에서 피사체까󲇵의 거리 = F-②top

플래󱬑는 위의 공󱬒에 따󰾱 󲀶󲁊한 피사체 거리를 󱿅동으󱂑 계산하고 표󱬑해󲅂니다. (󱇽󲇵󱇾

페󱾩󲇵의 표 려 참󲂥발

고󱧂 동󲂥 플래󱬑 (HSS발 (FP발

󱾱반 플래󱬑를 󰐵󲇵고 촬󱸶을 할 때는 플래󱬑의 셔터󱇾󱾩 완전히 개방되었을 때 󱑑광되어󱶱 하기

때문에 셔터 스피드는 󲚩메󰾱의 동󲂥 󱧂󰯹󱔩다 󱚕르게 사용할 󱩍 없습니다. FP 플래󱬑는 셔터󱇾󱾩

󱿆동되고 있는 동안 플래󱬑는 󲇵󱧂󲀶으󱂑 󱑑광됩니다. 󱾩와 같󱾩 동󲂥 󱧂󰯹󱔩다 󱚕른 셔터

스피드를 사용할 󱩍 있습니다.

려. MODE 버튼을 󱾩용해 플래󱬑 모드를 설󲁊󲶞니다. ( TTL

󱾩󰣍  M 모드를 사용할 󱩍 있습니다.발.

력.

󰣍

버튼을 눌러 LCD 패널에 표󱬑󰐵 󰣍타󰣍게 󲶞니다.

3. 피사체에 초󲁅을 󱈓󲗚니다.

4. 플래󱬑의 준비 표󱬑등󱾩 켜󲇵면 플래󱬑를 사용할 준비󰐵 된

것󱾺니다.

◆ 셔터스피드에 따󰾱, 󰐵󱾩드 넘버󰐵 󱑉뀔것󱾺니다. (󱇽󲇵󱇾 페󱾩󲇵의 표 력 를 참󲂥하󱬢󱬑오.발

◆ FP 플래󱬑를 취󱧁하고 싶을때는, FP 플래󱬑를 LCD 패널에

표󱬑󰐵 󰣍타󰣍게 할때의 과󲁊을

참󲂥하󱬑기 󱑉󰿂니다.

108

모델링 플래󱬑

모델링 플래󱬑를 사용할 경우에는, 촬󱸶전에 󲂥명과 섀󰯹우 효과를 체크할 󱩍 있습니다.

1. MODE 버튼으󱂑 모드를 선󲤒󲶞니다.

버튼󱾩󰣍

– 버튼을 󱸡러 󲑝례 눌러 LCD 창에 아󱾩콘󱾩 󰣍타󰣍󰯹󱂒 󲶞니다.

3. 플래󱬑󰐵 충전된 것을 󲺊인한 후 TEST 버튼을 눌러 󱑑광󱬑킵니다.

멀티 플래󱬑 모드

셔터󰐵 열󱁙 있는 동안 플래󱬑󰐵 연󱧂하󱸡 󱑑광󲶞니다. 󱾩󱀼게 󲶝으󱂑써 피사체의 연󱧂 󱾩미󲇵󰐵

하󰣍의 프󱀽󱾹에 노출됩니다. 󱾩 모드에는 어두운 배경에 󱑒은 피사체󰐵 효과󲀶󱾺니다. 󱑑광 주파󱩍를

려H국 에서 려00H국 사󱾩에서 설󲁊할 󱩍 있습니다. 최대 90 번의 연󱧂 󱑑광󱾩 󰐵능󲶞니다. 최대 촬󱸶󱩍는

플래󱬑 󰐵󱾩드 넘버와 󱑑광 주파󱩍 설󲁊에 따󰾱 󰬡󰾱집니다. (󱇽󲇵󱇾 페󱾩󲇵의 표 3 을 참󲂥발.

려. 󲚩메󰾱의 노출 모드를 M 모드에 설󲁊하고 F 넘버를 설󲁊󲶞니다.

력. 멀티 플래󱬑 모드󰐵 󰣍타날때까󲇵 MODE 버튼을 누르󱬢󱬑오.

3. 플래󱬑 󱑑광 주파󱩍󰐵 깜󱑊󱾱때까󲇵 SEL 버튼을 누르󱬢󱬑오.

＋

또는

－

버튼을 눌러 원하는 플래󱬑 주파󱩍 󱩍치를 설󲁊󲶞니다.

차.

SEL

버튼을 다󱬑 누르면 󱑑광량󱾩 깜󱑊󱾱 것󱾺니다.

착. ＋ 또는 － 버튼을 눌러 원하는 󱑑광량을 설󲁊󲶞니다.

7. SEL 버튼을 다󱬑 누르면 󱑑광 횟󱩍󰐵 깜󱑊󱾱 것󱾺니다.

8. ＋ 또는 － 버튼을 눌러 원하는 󱑑광 횟󱩍를 설󲁊󲶞니다.

9. SEL 버튼을 다󱬑 누르면 깜󱑊󱾹󱾩 멈출 것󱾺니다.

려0. 플래󱬑의 준비 표󱬑등󱾩 들어오면 촬󱸶하실󱩍 있습니다.

려려.

알󱇱: 셔터 스피드를 다음󱔩다 길게 설󲁊해 주󱬢󱬑오; 원하는 󱑑광 횟󱩍 색 󱑑광 주파󱩍

󱑉운스 촬󱸶

실내에서 촬󱸶할 때에는 강한 그󱇱󱿅󰐵 피사체 뒤쪽에 󰣍타날 󱩍 있습니다. 빛을 천󲁊󱾩󰣍 벽면에

반사󱬑키기 위해 플래󱬑를 위쪽으󱂑 향하거󰣍 옆쪽으󱂑 향하게 하면 󲂥명은 좀 더 󱧁프󲫭하게

비춰질 것󱾺니다. 󰾲 버튼을 누르고 플래󱬑 헤드를 󱑉운스 앵글󱂑 󲂥절해 󱔩󱬢󱬑오.

상: 0°, 착0°, 7차°, 90° 하: 0°,7°

우: 0°, 착0°, 7차°, 90° 좌: 0°, 착0°, 7차°,90°, 려력0°, 려차0°, 려80°

󱑉운스 플래󱬑 모드󰐵 󱿆동되면 LCD 패널에 󱑉운스

표󱬑󰐵

󰣍타날 것󱾺니다.

󱑉운스되는 반사면의 󱣾󱾩 사진 전체에 󰣍타󰣍므󱂑 󰐵능한 한

흰󱣾면을 선󲤒하󱬑기 󱑉󰿂니다.

반사면에 따󰾱 피사체의 거리 및 다른 요󱧁들, TTL AUTO 에 대한

유효거리는 변경될 󱩍 있습니다. 촬󱸶 후 󲁊󲺊한 노출 󲺊인을

(LCD 패널의 TTL 󱇽크발 체크하󱬑기 󱑉󰿂니다.

근󲁆 촬󱸶

근󲁆 촬󱸶을 위해 󱑉운스 플래󱬑를 아래󱂑 7° 기울󱾱 󱩍 있습니다. 피사체와의 거리󰐵 0.차애 에서

력애 󱾩내에서 유효󲶞니다. 플래󱬑 헤드󰐵 7° 기울어󲇵면

표󱬑󰐵 깜󱑊󱾱 것󱾺니다.

캐치 󰾱󱾩󲫭 패널

플래󱬑에는 󱑉운스 플래󱬑 모드󰐵 󱿆동

중󱾱 때 피사체의 눈에 캐치 󰾱󱾩󲫭를

만들어 주는 내장 캐치 󰾱󱾩󲫭 패널󱾩

장󲑞되었습니다. 와󱾩드 패널과 캐치 󰾱󱾩󲫭

패널을 꺼낸 후 와󱾩드 패널을 원래 위치󱂑

넣습니다. (패널들을 부드󱀲게 꺼낼 󱩍

있󰯹󱂒 주의󲶞니다.발

109

◆ 캐치 󰾱󱾩󲫭를 효과󲀶으󱂑 만들기 위해서는, 플래󱬑 헤드를 90 󰯹󱂑 세운 후 󰐵까운 거리에서

촬󱸶하󱬢󱬑오.

무선 플래󱬑

무선 플래󱬑 모드󱂑 촬󱸶을 하면 󲚩메󰾱 󱑉디󰣍 플래󱬑에 연결하는 연장선 없󱾩 섀󰯹우에 의해

좀더 3 󲑝원󲀶인 사진을 연출할 󱩍 있으며 또는 플래󱬑 위치에 따󰾱 섀󰯹우에 의한 좀더

󱿅연스러운 󱾩미󲇵 촬󱸶󱾩 󰐵능󲶞니다. EF-착려0 DG SUPER SO-ADI 의 경우에는, 󲚩메󰾱 󱑉디와

플래󱬑의 󲁊󱔩 교환은 플래󱬑 󲂥명에 의해 󱾩루어집니다.  무선 플래󱬑 모드에서 󲚩메󰾱는

󱿅동으󱂑 올󱑉른 노출값을 계산해 냅니다.

◆ 󱾩 사용설명서에서는 󲚩메󰾱 󱑉디에 장󲑞되는 플래󱬑를  컨󲫭롤러

(Co액t①olle①발 󰾱고 부르고

원거리에 떨어져 있는 플래󱬑를  오프 󲚩메󰾱 플래󱬑 (off-c화애e①화 플래󱬑발 󰾱고 부󱆺니다.

◆ 플래󱬑를 󲚩메󰾱에서 분리󲶽을때는 미니 스탠드를 사용하는 것󱾩 󰯹움󱾩 됩니다. 미니 스탠드는

플래󱬑를 󲫭󰾱󱾩󲰡드에 장󲑞할 󱩍 있󰯹󱂒 󰣍사산󱾩 있습니다.

◆ 플래󱬑를 촬󱸶되는 장󱧁에 󰧈󲇵 않󰯹󱂒 󲺊인하󱬑기 󱑉󰿂니다.

◆ 피사체󱂑부터 플래󱬑는 󱶲 0.차애-차애 범위에 󰧈고 󲚩메󰾱는 󱶲 려애-차애 범위에 󰧈습니다.

◆ 󱸡러분 󰐵까󱾩에서 무선 플래󱬑를 사용하는 다른 사용󱿅󰐵 있는 경우, 다른 사󰿁의 플래󱬑와

혼선󱾩 󱾱어날 󱩍 있습니다. 󱾩러한 상황에서는 플래󱬑의 채널을 변경하󱸡 주󱬑기 󱑉󰿂니다.

송신기󱂑서 내장형 플래󱬑의 신호를 사용

려. 󲚩메󰾱를 무선 플래󱬑 모드󱂑 설󲁊󲶞니다.

◆ 󲚩메󰾱 모델에 따󰾱 설󲁊󱾩 󰬡󰾱질 󱩍 있으므󱂑, 󲚩메󰾱 사용 설명서를 참󲂥하󱬑기 󱑉󰿂니다.

력. 󲚩메󰾱의 노출 모드를 P, A, S 또는 M 으󱂑 설󲁊󲶞니다.

3. off-c화애e①화 플래󱬑 디스플󱀽󱾩󰐵 󰣍타날 때까󲇵

버튼을 누󱆺니다.

버튼을 눌러 off-c화애e①화 플래󱬑 번호󰐵 려 󱾩 되󰯹󱂒

설󲁊󲶞니다.

차.

버튼을 눌러 플래󱬑 모드를 TTL 󱂑 설󲁊󲶞니다.

착.

버튼을 누르면 채널 󲁊󱔩󰐵 깜󱑊󱾱 것󱾺니다.

또는

버튼을 눌러 채널 번호를 (C려 – C4발 설󲁊󲶞니다.

버튼을 누르면, 표󱬑계󰐵 깜󱚖 거릴 것󱾺니다.

9. 󲚩메󰾱 󱑉디에 플래󱬑를 장󲑞하고 반 셔터를 누󱆺니다. (채널 번호󰐵 󲚩메󰾱에 기󱂒될

것󱾺니다.발

려0. 󲚩메󰾱에서 플래󱬑를 분리한 후 원하󱬑는 위치에 플래󱬑를 󰧈습니다.

려려. 󲚩메󰾱의 내장 플래󱬑를 올리고 완전히 충전되었는󲇵 󲺊인󲶞니다.

◆

무선 동󲂥 모드에서, 플래󱬑󰐵 완전히 충전된 것을 표󱬑해 주기 위해 AF 󱔩󲂥광󱾩 깜󱑊거릴 것󱾺니다.

려력. 촬󱸶을 위해 󲚩메󰾱의 󲰡커스를 󲂥󲁊󲶞니다.

◆ EF-착려0 DG SUPER SO-ADI 는 내장형 플래󱬑󰐵 󱑑광될 때 플래󱬑󰐵 터질것󱾺니다. 󲚩메󰾱의

내장형 플래󱬑는 EF-착려0 DG SUPER SO-ADI 의 제어를 위해서만 󱑑광될 것󱾺니다. 피사체의

󲂥명은 EF-착려0 DG SUPER SO-ADI 에 의해서만 󱾩루어집니다. 󲚩메󰾱는 󲁊󲺊한 노출을 󱷰을 󱩍

있󰯹󱂒 TTL 오토 플래󱬑󱂑서 플래󱬑 파워󰐵 컨󲫭롤 될 것󱾺니다.

◆ 셔터 스피드에 따󰾱 󱾱반 플래󱬑 또는 고󱧂동󲂥 모드󱂑 󱿅동 전환 됩니다.

◆ 󲚩메󰾱의 노출 모드󰐵 M 으󱂑 설󲁊되어 있을 때 매뉴󱷱 무선 플래󱬑󰐵 될 것󱾺니다. 채널

번호를 설󲁊하면 플래󱬑 파워 󱀽벨󱾩 깜󱚖󱾩게 됩니다.

또는 버튼을 눌러 플래󱬑

출󱁚을 설󲁊하고

버튼을 눌러 깜󱚖󱾩는 것을 멈추게 󲶞니다.

110

󲚩메󰾱에 장󲑞된 플래󱬑를 송신기󱂑서 사용

무선 플래󱬑용으󱂑 력 대 󱾩상의 EF-착려0 DG SUPER SO-ADI 플래󱬑󰐵 필요󲶞니다. EF-차30 DG

SUPER SO-ADI 는 off-c화애e①화 모드와만 사용할 󱩍 있습니다. off-c화애e①화 플래󱬑의 플래󱬑

모델에 따󰾱 컨󲫭롤러의 컨󲫭롤 모드를 변경할 󱩍 있습니다. 아래의 󲑝󲫭를 참󲂥하󱬑기 󱑉󰿂니다.

(EF-착려0 DG SUPER SO-ADI 는 컨󲫭롤러용으󱂑 사용할 󱩍 있습니다.발.

플래󱬑용으󱂑 사용할 󱩍

있는 플래󱬑 모델

EF-착려0 DG SUPER SO-ADI

EF-차30 DG SUPER SO-ADI

EF-착려0 DG SUPER SO-ADI

컨󲫭롤 모드

off

c화애e①화 플래󱬑와 사용할

󱩍 있는 󲚩메󰾱 모델

α 700, α 900 α 900

비율-플래󱬑 컨󲫭롤

설󲁊

3 개의 그룹까󲇵 제어󰐵 󰐵능󲶞니다.

컨󲫭롤러, Off-C화애e①화 플래󱬑 려,

Off-C화애e①화 플래󱬑 력.

차

󱀽벨부터

또는

플래󱬑

없󱾩

󰐶

그룹의

플래󱬑 비율을 설󲁊할 󱩍있습니다.

력 개의 그룹까󲇵 제어󰐵 󰐵능󲶞니다.

컨󲫭롤러, Off-C화애e①화 플래󱬑.

컨󲫭롤러 : off-c화애e①화 의 플래󱬑

비율을 려:력 또는 력:려 󱂑 설󲁊할 󱩍

있습니다.

플래󱬑 모드

TTL 오토 플래󱬑, 고󱧂 동󲂥

(TTL, M발, 매뉴󱷱 플래󱬑

TTL 오토 플래󱬑, 고󱧂 동󲂥

(TTL발

B-1

.off-c화애e①화 플래󱬑만 사용하는 경우

󲚩메󰾱와 컨󲫭롤러의 설󲁊

려. 󲚩메󰾱를 무선 플래󱬑 모드󱂑 설󲁊󲶞니다.

◆ 󲚩메󰾱 모델에 따󰾱 설󲁊󱾩 󰬡󰾱질 󱩍 있으므󱂑, 󲚩메󰾱 사용 설명서를 참󲂥하󱬑기 󱑉󰿂니다.

력. 󲚩메󰾱의 노출 모드를 P, A, S 또는 M 으󱂑 설󲁊󲶞니다.

3. 플래󱬑를 󲚩메󰾱 󱑉디에 장󲑞󲶞니다.

4. 플래󱬑의 LCD 패널은 󱿅동으󱂑 컨󲫭롤러 설󲁊 디스플󱀽󱾩󱂑

연결됩니다. (LCD 패널󱾩 󱿅동으󱂑 전환되󲇵 않으면,

컨󲫭롤러 설󲁊 표󱬑󰐵 󰣍타날 때까󲇵

버튼을 누󱆺니다.

차.

버튼을 누르면 컨󲫭롤 모드 표󱬑󰐵 깜󱚖󱾺니다.

착.

또는 버튼을 눌러 컨󲫭롤 모드를 󱂑 설󲁊󲶞니다.

버튼을 누르면 채널 󲁊󱔩󰐵 깜󱑊󱾱 것󱾺니다.

또는

버튼을 눌러 채널 번호를 (C려 – C4발 설󲁊󲶞니다.

버튼을 누르면 비율-플래󱬑 컨󲫭롤 표󱬑󰐵 󰣍타납니다.

려0.

또는 버튼을 눌러 비율- 플래󱬑 컨󲫭롤 모드를 （ ] 󱂑 설󲁊󲶞니다.

려려.

버튼을 다󱬑 누르면 디스플󱀽󱾩 표󱬑󰐵 깜󱑊 󱾺니다.

Off-C화애e①화 플래󱬑 설󲁊

려력. off-c화애e①화 플래󱬑 표󱬑󰐵 󰣍타날 때까󲇵 버튼을 누󱆺니다.

려3.

버튼을 눌러 off-c화애e①화 플래󱬑 번호를 려 󱂑 설󲁊󲶞니다.

려4.

버튼을 눌러 플래󱬑 모드를 TTL 󱂑 설󲁊󲶞니다.

려차.

버튼을 누르면 채널 󲁊󱔩󰐵 깜󱑊󱾱 것󱾺니다.

려착.

또는

버튼을 눌러 컨󲫭롤러의 설󲁊과 동󱾩󰾱하게

설󲁊󲶞니다.

려7.

버튼을 누르면, 표󱬑계󰐵 깜󱑊󱾩는 것󱾩 멈추게 됩니다.

려8. 원하󱬑는 위치에 오프 󲚩메󰾱 플래󱬑를 󰧈습니다.

려9. 두개의 플래󱬑󰐵 완전히 충전되었는󲇵 󲺊인󲶞니다.

◆ 준비 표󱬑등󱾩 켜󲇵면 촬󱸶 준비󰐵 된 것으󱂑 AF 󱔩󲂥광󱾩 깜󱑊󱾱 것󱾺니다.

력0. 피사체에 초󲁅을 󱈓추고 촬󱸶을 󲶞니다.

111

B-2.

비율-플래󱬑 컨󲫭롤 (컨󲫭롤 모드 발

󲚩메󰾱와 컨󲫭롤러 설󲁊

려. B-려 의 려 ～ 9 단계와 동󱾱하게 설󲁊을 진󲶾󲶞니다.

력.

또는 버튼을 눌러 비율-플래󱬑컨󲫭롤 모드

디스플󱀽󱾩를 （

] 으󱂑 설󲁊󲶞니다.

버튼을 누르면 플래󱬑 모드 디스플󱀽󱾩󰐵 깜󱑊󱾺니다.

또는 버튼을 눌러 플래󱬑 모드를 TTL 󱂑 설󲁊󲶞니다.

차.

버튼을 누르면 컨󲫭롤러의 비율-플래󱬑 디스플󱀽󱾩 （ ] 󱾩 깜󱚖󱾺니다.

착.

또는 버튼을 눌러 컨󲫭롤러의 비율을 설󲁊󲶞니다.

버튼을 누르면 Off-C화애e①화 플래󱬑 려 의 비율-플래󱬑 디스플󱀽󱾩 （ ] 󱾩 깜󱚖󱾺니다.

또는 버튼을 눌러 Off-C화애e①화 플래󱬑 려 의 비율을 설󲁊󲶞니다.

버튼을 누르면 Off-C화애e①화 플래󱬑 력 의 비율 플래󱬑 디스플󱀽󱾩 （ ] 󱾩 깜󱚖󱾺니다.

려0.

또는 버튼을 눌러 Off-C화애e①화 플래󱬑 력 의 비율을 설󲁊󲶞니다.

려려.

버튼을 눌러 표󱬑계󰐵 깜󱚖󱾩는 것을 멈추게 󲶞니다.

Off-C화애e①화 플래󱬑 설󲁊

려력. B-려 Off-C화애e①화 플래󱬑 설󲁊 과 동󱾱한 설󲁊을 진󲶾󲶞니다.

◆ off-c화애e①화 플래󱬑󰐵 󱔪󱩍인 경우, 󰐶󰐶의 플래󱬑에 원하󱬑는 off c화애e①화 플래󱬑 번호를

할당󲶞니다.

◆ 컨󲫭롤러, Off-C화애①e화 플래󱬑 려, Off-C화애e①화 플래󱬑 력 의 플래󱬑 비율을 설󲁊하는 것은

다음과 같습니다.

(플래󱬑 없󱾩발、려、력、4、8、려착

플래󱬑 출󱁚 값의 비율은 󰐶󰐶의 플래󱬑 출󱁚 값 / 전체 출󱁚 값을 설󲁊󲶞니다.

（예]

설󲁊 값 플래󱬑 출󱁚 값 비율

컨󲫭롤러 력 력/7

Off-C화애e①화 플래󱬑 려 려 려/7

Off-C화애e①화 플래󱬑 력 4 4/7

B-3.

비율-플래󱬑 컨󲫭롤 (컨󲫭롤 모드 발

󲚩메󰾱와 컨󲫭롤러의 설󲁊

려. B-려 의 려 단계부터 착 단계까󲇵 동󱾱한 설󲁊을 진󲶾 󲶞니다.

력.

또는 버튼을 눌러 컨󲫭롤 모드를 󱂑 설󲁊󲶞니다.

버튼을 누르면 채널 󲁊󱔩󰐵 깜󱚖󱾺니다.

또는

버튼을 눌러 채널 󲁊󱔩를 (C려-C4발 설󲁊󲶞니다.

차.

또는 버튼을 눌러 비율-플래󱬑 컨󲫭롤 모드를 （ ] 󱂑 설󲁊󲶞니다.

착.

버튼을 눌러 비율-플래󱬑 디스플󱀽󱾩󰐵 깜󱚖󱾩게 󲶞니다.

7. 컨󲫭롤러의 비율을 설󲁊󲶞니다.

또는 버튼을 눌러 Off-C화애e①화 플래󱬑 비율

설󲁊.

또는 .

버튼을 눌러 표󱬑계󰐵 깜󱚖󱾩는 것을 멈추게 󲶞니다.

Off-C화애e①화 플래󱬑 설󲁊

9. Off-C화애e①화 플래󱬑󰐵 EF-착려0 DG SUPER SO-ADI 󱾩면, B-려 Off-C화애e①화 플래󱬑 설󲁊 과

동󱾱한 설󲁊을 진󲶾󲶞니다.

◆ Off-C화애e①화 플래󱬑󰐵 EF-차30 DG SUPER SO-ADI 인 경우, EF-차30 DG SUPER SO-ADI 의

사용 설명서를 참󲂥하󱬑기 󱑉󰿂니다.

112

◆ Off-C화애e①화 플래󱬑󰐵 EF-차30 DG SUPER SO-ADI 인 경우, 채널 번호를 C려 족 C3 까󲇵만 설󲁊

󰐵능󲶞니다.

슬󱀽󱾩브 플래󱬑

󱾱반 슬󱀽󱾩브 플래󱬑

EF-착려0 DG SUPER SO-ADI 을 󲚩메󰾱 󱑉디에 장󲑞하󲇵 않더󰾱󰯹 󲚩메󰾱의 내장 플래󱬑󰣍 다른

플래󱬑를 사용해 플래󱬑를 󱑑광󱬑킬 󱩍 있습니다.

려. 플래󱬑를 󲚩메󰾱 핫 슈에 장󲑞󲶞니다.

력. 󲚩메󰾱의 노출 모드를 원하󱬑는 모드󱂑 설󲁊󲶞니다.

A 󰣍 M

모드를 선󲤒하면 󲂥리개 값󰯹 설󲁊하셔󱶱 󲶞니다.

3. 플래󱬑를 켭니다. 셔터를 반만 누󱆺니다.

◆ 󱾩제 󲂥리개 값과 필󱆹 스피드는 플래󱬑에 󱿅동으󱂑

전송됩니다.

4. 󲚩메󰾱에서 플래󱬑를 분리󲶞니다.

차. MODE 버튼을 누르고

/ (슬󱀽󱾩브발 모드를 선󲤒󲶞니다.

착. SEL 버튼을 󱸡러󲑝례 눌러 플래󱬑 출󱁚값󱾩 깜󱑊거리게 󲶞니다.

또는

–

버튼을 눌러 플래󱬑 출󱁚값을 설󲁊󲶞니다.

◆ 슬󱀽󱾩브 플래󱬑에서 피사체까󲇵 실제 거리를 󰐵󲇵고 LCD 창의 거리계를 설󲁊해 󲀶󲁊 플래󱬑

출󱁚값을 결󲁊󲶞니다. 실제 거리󰐵 촬󱸶거리 󱑋에 있으면 󲂥리개 값󱾩󰣍 필󱆹 스피드 값을

변경해󱶱 󲶞니다.

◆ 필요한 경우 플래󱬑의 필󱆹 스피드󰣍 󲂥리개 값을 매뉴󱷱󱂑 설󲁊할 󱩍 있습니다.

a. 필󱆹 스피드는 MODE 버튼을 눌러

ISO 를 설󲁊하고 SEL 버튼을 눌러 깜󱑊거리게 󲶞니다. +

버튼󱾩󰣍 –

버튼을 눌러 원하󱬑는 필󱆹 스피드 값을 설󲁊하고 SEL 버튼을 누󱆺니다.

b. 󲂥리개 값은 플래󱬑󰐵 슬󱀽󱾩브 모드󱂑 설󲁊되었을 때 SEL 버튼을 눌러 󲂥리개 값󱾩

깜󱑊거리게 하고 + 버튼󱾩󰣍

–

버튼을 눌러 원하󱬑는 󲂥리개 값을 설󲁊하고 SEL 버튼을

다󱬑한번 누󱆺니다.

8. SEL 버튼을 디스플󱀽󱾩 창에 깜󱑊거리는 것󱾩 멈출때까󲇵 󱸡러 󲑝례 누󱆺니다.

슬󱀽󱾩브 플래󱬑를 원하󱬑는 위치에 󰧈습니다. 슬󱀽󱾩브 플래󱬑를 촬󱸶 범위안에 󰧈󲇵 󱇽󱬢󱬑오.

려0. 모든 플래󱬑󰐵 완전히 충전된 것을 󲺊인한 후 촬󱸶을 위해 셔터를 누󱆺니다.

◆ EF-착려0 DG SUPER SO-ADI 󱾩 완전히 충전되면 AF 󱔩󲂥광󱾩 깜󱑊거󱇲니다.

◆ 슬󱀽󱾩브 모드󱂑 설󲁊된 상󲤑󱂑 EF-착려0 DG SUPER SO-ADI 󱾩 󲚩메󰾱 󱑉디에 장󲑞되면

플래󱬑는 󱑑광되󲇵 않습니다.

◆ 󱧁니 브랜드 플래󱬑를 사용하고 계󱬑거󰣍 󲚩메󰾱의 내장형 플래󱬑 TTL 기능󱾩󰣍 EF-착려0 DG

SUPER SO-ADI 플래󱬑를 슬󱀽󱾩브 제품으󱂑 사용할 경우 ADI,DI 기능을 사용하󲇵 󱇽󱬢󱬑오.

p①e-fl화②h 를 모니터하는 것은 완전히 충전되󲇵 않은 상󲤑에서 플래󱬑󰐵 󱑑광될 󱩍 있습니다.

전용 슬󱀽󱾩브 플래󱬑

력 개 󱾩상의 EF-착려0 DG SUPER SO-ADI 플래󱬑를 사용하면, 채널을 설󲁊해 󱑑광되는 플래󱬑를

󲁊할󱩍 있습니다. 󱾩 모드에서 한 개의 플래󱬑는 슬󱀽󱾩브 플래󱬑 컨󲫭롤러󱂑 󱿆동하고 󰣍머󲇵

플래󱬑들은 슬󱀽󱾩브 플래󱬑󱂑 󱿆동됩니다.

슬󱀽󱾩브 플래󱬑 설󲁊

려. 슬󱀽󱾩브 플래󱬑를 󲚩메󰾱 󱑉디에 장󲑞󲶞니다.

력. 󲚩메󰾱의 노출 모드를

S 또는 M

설󲁊󲶞니다.

113

◆ 셔터 스피드를 려/30 󱾩하󱂑 설󲁊󲶞니다. (슬󱀽󱾩브 플래󱬑 (󱇽스터 플래󱬑발 다른 플래󱬑들󱾩

󱑑광되기 전에 신호를 󱔩냅니다. 󱾩처󱀱, 셔터 스피드를 려/30 초 󱔩다 󱚕르게 사용하면

󱑑광되는 플래󱬑는 동󲂥되󲇵 않을 것󱾺니다. 발

3. 플래󱬑의 스위치를 켜고 󲚩메󰾱의 셔터를 반만 누󱆺니다.

(󲂥리개 값과 필󱆹 스피드는 󱿅동으󱂑 플래󱬑에 전송됩니다. 발

4. 󲚩메󰾱에서 슬󱀽󱾩브 플래󱬑를 분리󲶞니다.

차. MODE 버튼을 눌러

(슬󱀽󱾩브 모드발 를 선󲤒󲶞니다.

착. SEL 버튼을 눌러 채널󱾩 깜󱑊거리게 󲶞니다.

또는

–

버튼을 눌러 채널 번호를 설󲁊󲶞니다. (C려 또는 C력발

8. SEL 버튼을 눌러 플래󱬑의 출󱁚값󱾩 ( 발 깜󱑊거리게 󲶞니다.

9. + 또는 – 버튼을 눌러 플래󱬑 출󱁚값을 설󲁊󲶞니다.

◆ 슬󱀽󱾩브 플래󱬑에서 피사체까󲇵 실제 거리를 󰐵󲇵고 LCD 창의 거리계를 설󲁊해 󲀶󲁊 플래󱬑

출󱁚값을 결󲁊󲶞니다. 실제 거리󰐵 촬󱸶거리 󱑋에 있으면 󲂥리개 값을 변경해󱶱 󲶞니다.

려0. SEL 버튼을 깜󱑊거리는 것󱾩 멈출때까󲇵 󱸡러 󲑝례 누󱆺니다.

려려. 슬󱀽󱾩브 플래󱬑를 원하󱬑는 위치에 󰧈습니다. 슬󱀽󱾩브 플래󱬑를 촬󱸶범위 안에 󰧈󲇵

󱇽󱬢󱬑오.

슬󱀽󱾩브 컨틀롤러 플래󱬑 설󲁊

려력.

MODE 버튼을 누르고 / (슬󱀽󱾩브 모드발 를 선󲤒󲶞니다.

려3. SEL 버튼을 눌러 채널󱾩 깜󱑊거리게 󲶞니다.

려4.

또는

– 버튼을 눌러 󱑑광되는 플래󱬑에 설󲁊된 번호와

동󱾱한 채널 번호를 설󲁊󲶞니다.

려차. SEL 버튼을 눌러 플래󱬑 출󱁚값󱾩

( 발

깜󱑊거리게 󲶞니다.

려착. SEL 버튼을 눌러 깜󱑊거리는 것을 멈추게 󲶞니다.

(

표󱬑󰐵 사󰾱󲇵고 채널 표󱬑󰐵 사󰾱질 것󱾺니다.발

려7. 슬󱀽󱾩브 컨󲫭롤러 플래󱬑를 󲚩메󰾱 󱑉디에 장󲑞󲶞니다.

려8. 플래󱬑󰐵 완전히 충전된 것을 󲺊인한 후 촬󱸶을위해 셔터를 반만 누󱆺니다.

◆ EF-착려0 DG SUPER SO-ADI 󱾩 완전히 충전되었을 때 AF 󱔩󲂥광󱾩 깜󱑊거릴 것󱾺니다.

◆

모드에서 슬󱀽󱾩브 컨󲫭롤을 사용할 때 슬󱀽󱾩브 플래󱬑의 󲂥리개는 변경할 󱩍

있습니다.

◆ 슬󱀽󱾩브 컨틀롤러 기능은 슬󱀽󱾩브 플래󱬑를 컨󲫭롤 할때만 사용됩니다.

제품 사양

형 󱬒 : 클󱇲 온(Cl로p-o액발󱬒 󲇶렬 제어 TTL 오토 󲅁 전󱿅 플래󱬑

󰐵󱾩드 넘버 : 착려 (ISO 려00/애, 려0차애애 헤드 󲰡󲇵션발

전원 공󰘾 :

4 개의 AA 타󱾺 알󲚩󰾱인 배터리 또는, : 4 개의 AA 타󱾺 󰣍켈 󲚩드뮴(N로-Cd발 배터리 또는,

: 4 개의 AA 타󱾺 니켈 󱩍󱧁전󲇵(N로-MH N로ckel-Met화l H구d①로de발

충전 󱬑간 : 󱶲 7 초 (알󲚩󰾱인 배터리발

: 󱶲 차 초 (니켈 󲚩드뮴(N로-Cd발, 니켈 󱩍󱧁전󲇵(N로-MH N로ckel-Met화l H구d①로de발발

󱑑광 횟󱩍 : 󱶲 려력0 회 (알󲚩󰾱인 배터리발

: 󱶲 려착0 회 (니켈 󲚩드뮴(N로-Cd발, 니켈 󱩍󱧁전󲇵(N로-MH N로ckel-Met화l H구d①로de발발

섬광 󱬑간 : 󱶲 려 / 700 초 (풀 파워 󱑑광󱬑발

󲂥사 󰐶󰯹 : 력4애애 ～ 려0차애애 모터 파워 컨󲫭롤 (와󱾩드 패널 사용󱬑 려7애애발

󱿅동 절전 : 󲇵원 무게 : 330g. 크 기 : 77애애(W발 x 려39애애 x 려려7애애

114

PYCC

      Sigma EF-610 SUPER SO-ADI. 

     SONY AF  SLR.    

       . ,

   .      

,     . 

      

  

  , ,       

       .



  ,       , ,

    ,     

 . ,        .

!!

!!

  ,     .

      ,   .

        

        .

       

     .

!!

    .



     

 ,      .   

   ,     .

     ,       . 

      ,   , 1   .

         . 

       .

      ,  ,   .

       .

!!

        SONY AF  SLR.

         .

   .        ,

       .    

    .

      ,  ,  

 .           .

      , ,

        ,    .

     ,     

    ,      .

      ,     ,

   .      .

  ,        

  .     .

        

 . ,       

        .

115

  

  

1.  2.   AF 3.    

 4.      5.   

      6.    

    7.  8.  9. 

10. 11.   12.  

 

13.  MODE () 14.  SELECT SEL () 15.   +

16.  

17.  ZOOM () 18.  TEST ()

19.  LIGHT () 20.    21.  



       «»  Ni-Cd, Ni-MH 

     ,     , 

      . ,  ,  

30    .

◆

           .

◆ Ni-Cd     .    Ni-Cd ,

, ,     .

◆    ,      

    .        .

◆       .      

,    .    ,   

  Ni-Cd .

◆       ,     

,      .

◆      .   

     .

◆           ,

         .

 

1.    . 

     

.

2.       

. ,   +  –  

    ..

3.  .

4.     ON ().

    

,    , 



  .

5.   “Test Button” ( )     .

  

      ,   

    240 .      “TEST”

()      .  ,    

   TTL,       

      (“Auto Power

Off”)

.

116

 

            

,       “Flash Coverage Angle” (  ).

       .    

 ,   .

  

  “Up and Down” (  )  

.     

.

◆        

   ,    

 .

     

   . 

      

. 

◆      

       

     .

◆      

   ,  

     .

         

      . 

   

    ZOOM ()   .  ,  

  ZOOM (),      

   .

24mm

→ 28mm → 35mm → 50mm → 70mm → 85mm → 105mm → (Auto)

    TTL       

   .

◆    ,       

    .

◆         ,    , 

     .

◆           .

 

   

,    

     17. 

     

    . (

   .) 

    

.   

     17 .

117

◆       ,  ZOOM

()  .      ,   

     .

  

    LIGHT (),     8 . 

   8 ,     LIGHT ()  .

   TTL AUTO

  TTL AUTO       

  .

◆           TTL .

   . (      

 TTL .)

DSLR / Maxxum 70, 50, 7, 5, 4, 3

Dynax 7D, 60, 40, 7, 5, 4, 3L

Maxxum / Dynax 9   

  D  ADI

 



 

TTL

   D   

 



 

TTL

1.       P.

2.   .     

TTL    .

◆      

    

 

,      

 



–

.    

    .

3.   .

4. ,        

    .

5.       .

◆        ,    

  5    TTL.     ,   

  . ,    .

◆       AF,   

      .   

   AF  0,7   9 .

◆ ,  ,       , 

     .

◆    ,     . 

   ,    ,   

      .

     

   

   ,     .  

    ,      

.       .

118

   

       ,   

    .    

  .

   

       .   

        .

◆       .

◆          ,

          

 .

   

       , , 

 ,   , 10       

     .

     

TTL, M(1/1,1/2) 20    

M(1/4, 1/8) 25    

M(1/16,-1/32) 40    

Multi 10 

    

    ,    ,  

   TTL.         

  1/1 ()  1/64     .

1.      .

2.   MODE ()     .

3.    ,   

 SEL ().

4.  



   

 .

5.            , 

    SEL ().

6.     ,      

  .         ,

            

.

7.    ,    .

◆        :

  “GN”/     = 

         

  . (,   1   .)

119





(HSS)



(FP)

      ,     

 ,    ,    , 

  .

 FP       .  ,  

  ,  ,    .

1.      MODE ()

(    “TTL”  “M”.)

2. 

 

   

  .

3.   .

4.     ,   

.

◆        . (, 

 2   .)

◆       FP, ,   

 FP  ,   

  .

 

    ,      

   .

1.   MODE ()   .

2.    



      .

3. ,       TEST ().

  MULTY ()

  ,    .    

 ,     .    

      .      1  

100 .     90 .    

   

 ,      . (,

  3   .)

1.        

.

2.   MODE ()   ,  

   MULTI ().

3.   SEL ()   ,  

   .

4.  



    .

5.     SEL ()     .

6.  



    .

7.    SEL ().    .

8.  



    .

9.    SEL ().   .

10.      ,    .

: ,   ,   ÷  ,

  

120

 

      ,      .

         ,     ,

  ..,    .     

    .

: 0°, 60°, 75°, 90°

: 0°, 7°

: 0°, 60°, 75°, 90° : 0°, 60°, 75°, 90°, 120°, 150°, 180°

    ,  

   

       .

    .

    ,  

   ,  

  TTL AUTO   . ,

   ( TTL   )

  .

   

        7° .   

      0,   2 .      7° 

 

 

   

,   

     ё 

 «» . 

    

    

. (   

.)

◆       ,      90° 

   .

  

    «  »,     

         

          .

   EF-610 Super,       

 .   « »  



  .

◆          «» 

    « ».

◆ ,         .

        .

◆ ,      .

◆      0,5 ~ 5     

  1  ~ 5   .

◆            

 ,       . 

 , ,        

 . ,   .

121

.

     

1.      .

◆       

,       

 .

2.      P,A,S  M.

3.  

    ,  

 ё   .

4.   

     1.

5.  

    TTL.

6.   ,  

    ё .

7.    (C1 - C4)   



8.  

,    .

9.           ( 

   ).

10.          .

11.       ,    .

◆          AF 

,    .

12.      .

◆  EF-610      . 

       EF-610.  

  EF-610 SUPER.      

       TTL Auto.

◆     ,      

   .

◆       M,     

 .    ,    

 .       



 

 

,      .

.        

     2    EF-610 DG SUPER

SO-ADI.  EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI      , ..

   .     ,   ,

     .   . (EF-610 DG

SUPER SO-ADI    ).

 , 

  

 

EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI

EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI

EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI

 

 , 

  

  

α700, α900 α900

 

 

 





3 ; , 

 1    2.

  

    5



  « ».

  2

;   

.

 :  

 

  1:2  2:1.

 

 TTL Auto,

 

(

TTL, M

)

, 



 

 TTL Auto,





(

TTL

)

122

B-1.      

   

1.      .

◆        ,  

      .

2.      P,A,S  M.

3.    .

4. -    

  . ( 

  ,  



 ,      .)

5.  

,    ё .

6.     

,    .

7.  

,   ё .

8.    (C1 - C4)  



9.  

    ё .

10.

     

[ ]

 



11.   ё ,      .

  

12.     ,   

   .

13.   

  

  1.

14.  

    TTL.

15.   ,  

    ё .

16.   



    ,   

.

17.  

,    .

18.        .

19. ,     .

◆        AF,  ,

    .

20.      .

B-2.    ( 

)

   

1.  ,    1

9  B-1.

2.      [

 

 .

3.  

,   ё .

    TTL,  



 

ё   

  [

6.     ,  

 .

7.  

, ё     

 1 [



















9.   , ё     

 2 [

123

10.       2,  



11.  

ё ,      .

  

12.  ,    B-1   .

◆    ,     .

◆ ,     ,   1 

  2  .

( )124816

         

 .

[]

   

 2 2/7

  1 1 1/7

  2 4 4/7

B-3.    ( 

)

   

1.  ,    1

6  B-1.

2.     

, 



 .

3.  

,   ё .

   (C1

C4),  



5.  



     [

6.  

, ё    .

7.      :   





.󰎣  .󰎤

8.  

ё ,      .

  

9.        EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI,

 ,     B-1   .

◆        EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI,

 ,      EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI.

◆        EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI, 

       C1  C3.

 

  

   EF-610 Super    ,    

      .

1.     .

2.    .       , 

  .

3.  .     .

124

◆

     

  .

4.    .

5.   MODE ()   

().

6.     SEL ()  , 

    .

7.  



   .

◆         

         

  .      , 

 .

◆          .

a.   …   MODE ()   ISO, 

  SEL ()    .  





   .     SEL

().

b.  …       ,

  SEL (),       



   .    SEL ().

8.     SEL ()  ,    .

9.       .  

     .

10.     ,    ,     

.

◆   EF-610 Super  ,    AF 

.

◆   ,  EF-610 Super   ,    

 .

◆   EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI      

  ,   .

  

       EF-610 Super,     

    .      

        .

 ю ()  

1.    .

2.      S  .

◆     1/30  .     

  .  ,     

1/30,     .

3.    ON ()      .

◆          

 .

4.    .

5.   MODE ()   

(  ).

6.   SEL ()   

 .

7.  



   

 (1  2).

125

8.   SEL ()  ,     .

9.  



    .

◆          , 

          

 .      , 

  .

10.     SEL ()    .

11.      .  

    .

   

12.   MODE ()    /

(  ).

13.   SEL ()  ,  

 .

14.  

 

  

      .

15.   SEL ()  ,     .

16.  

   .

17.   SEL ()    .

18.  ,      .

19.     ,     ,   

  .

◆   EF-610 Super  ,    

 AF.

◆       SEL (),    

   .      

 .

◆        

 .



:      TTL .

 : 61 (ISO 100/,   105 )

 :     ;  Ni-Cd   ;

 --   

 :  7,0  ( )

: 5,0  (Ni-Cd, -- )

 :  120  ( )

: 160  (Ni-Cd, -- )

 :  1/700  (  )

  : 24–105   

(17    )

  :   

: 330 

: 77   139   117 .

126

[表 1] [Table1] [Tabelle1] [Tabla1] [Tablla1] [Tabel1] [Tableau1] [Cuadro1] [󲑝󲫭 1] [1] [Tabela1]

ドナンバヸ/ GN / NG 󰎣ISO100ヷm󰎤

17mm 24mm 28mm 35mm 50mm 70mm 85mm 105mm

1/1 23.0 34.0 35.0 36.0 46.0 52.0 56.0 61.0

1/2 16.3 24.0 24.7 25.5 32.5 36.8 39.6 43.1

1/4 11.5 17.0 17.5 18.0 23.0 26.0 28.0 30.5

1/8 8.1 12.0 12.4 12.7 16.3 18.4 19.8 21.6

1/16 5.8 8.5 8.8 9.0 11.5 13.0 14.0 15.3

1/32 4.1 6.0 6.2 6.4 8.1 9.2 9.9 10.8

1/64 2.9 4.3 4.4 4.5 5.8 6.5 7.0 7.6

[表 2]

[Table

[Tabelle

[Tabla

[Tablla

[Tabel

[Tableau

[Cuadro

[󲑝󲫭 2]

[

[Tabela 2]

ドナンバヸ/ GN / NG 󰎣ISO100ヷm󰎤

17mm 24mm 28mm 35mm 50mm 70mm 85mm 105mm

1/125 16.3 24.0 24.7 25.5 32.5 36.8 39.6 43.1

1/160 14.4 21.3 21.9 22.5 28.8 32.5 35.0 38.1

1/180 13.6 20.0 20.6 21.2 27.1 30.6 33.0 35.9

1/250 11.5 17.0 17.5 18.0 23.0 26.0 28.0 30.5

1/320 10.2 15.0 15.5 15.9 20.3 23.0 24.7 27.0

1/350 9.1 13.4 13.8 14.2 18.2 20.6 22.1 24.1

1/400 9.7 14.4 14.8 15.2 19.4 22.0 23.7 25.8

1/500 8.1 12.0 12.4 12.7 16.3 18.4 19.8 21.6

1/640 7.2 10.6 10.9 11.3 14.4 16.3 17.5 19.1

1/750 6.6 9.8 10.1 10.4 13.3 15.0 16.2 17.6

1/800 6.4 9.5 9.8 10.1 12.9 14.5 15.7 17.1

1/1000 5.8 8.5 8.8 9.0 11.5 13.0 14.0 15.3

1/1250 5.1 7.6 7.8 8.0 10.3 11.6 12.5 13.6

1/1500 4.7 6.9 7.1 7.3 9.4 10.6 11.4 12.5

1/1600 4.5 6.7 6.9 7.1 9.1 10.3 11.1 12.1

1/2000 4.1 6.0 6.2 6.4 8.1 9.2 9.9 10.8

1/2500 3.6 5.4 5.5 5.7 7.3 8.2 8.9 9.6

1/3000 3.3 4.9 5.1 5.2 6.6 7.5 8.1 8.8

1/3200 3.2 4.8 4.9 5.0 6.4 7.3 7.8 8.5

1/4000 2.9 4.3 4.4 4.5 5.8 6.5 7.0 7.6

1/5000 2.6 3.8 3.9 4.0 5.1 5.8 6.3 6.8

1/6000 2.3 3.5 3.6 3.7 4.7 5.3 5.7 6.2

1/6400 2.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 4.5 5.1 5.5 6.0

1/8000 2.0 3.0 3.1 3.2 4.1 4.6 4.9 5.4

1/64

1～3 Hz 1～90

4～5 Hz 1～80

6～7 Hz 1～70

8～9 Hz 1～50

10 Hz 1～45

11～14 Hz 1～35

15～19 Hz 1～30

20～50 Hz 1～25

～

100 Hz 1～20

1/32

1～3 Hz 1～60

4～5 Hz 1～50

6 Hz 1～30

7～9 Hz 1～20

10～19 Hz 1～15

～

100 Hz 1～12

1/16

1 Hz 1～30

2 Hz 1～20

3 Hz 1～10

4～100 Hz 1～6

1/8

1 Hz

1～14

2 Hz 1～7

3 Hz 1～6

4～7 Hz 1～5

8～9 Hz 1～4

～

100 Hz 1～3

1/4

1 Hz 1～4

2 Hz 1～3

3～100 Hz 1～2

[表 3]

[Table

[Tabelle

[Tabla

[Tablla

[Tabel

[Tableau

[Cuadro

[󲑝󲫭 3]

[

[Tabela 3]

マルチ発光町MULTI FLASH MODE

127

Disposal of Electric and Electronic Equipment in Private Households

ENGLISH

Disposal of used Electrical & Electronic Equipment (Applicable in the European Union and other European countries

with separate collection systems)

This symbol on the product, in the manual/warranty, and/or on the packaging indicates that this product must not be

treated as household waste. Instead it should be handed over to the appropriate collection point for the recycling of

electrical and electronic equipment. If your equipment contains easy removable batteries, please dispose of these

separately according to your local legislation. It is your responsibility to ensure that this product is recycled correctly. In doing so

you will help conserve natural resources, protect the environment and human health. For more detailed information about recycling

this

product

please

contact

your

local

city

office

your

household

waste

disposal

service

the

shop

where

you

purchased

the

product.

Entsorgung von Elektro- und Elektronikgeräten aus privaten Haushalten

DEUTSCH

Entsorgung von Elektro- und Elektronikgeräten (Anzuwenden in der Europäischen Union und anderen europäischen Ländern mit

entsprechend geregeltem Abfall-Sammelsystem)

SIGMA unterstützt den Umweltschutz. Diese Produkt und die enthaltenen Zubehörteile erfüllen die Anforderungen der

WEEE-Richtlinie. Bitte bewahren Sie diese Information auf. Dieses Symbol weist auf die getrennte Rücknahme elektrischer und

elektronischer Geräte in EU-Ländern hin. Bitte werfen Sie das Gerät nicht in den Hausmüll. Informieren Sie sich über das in Ihrem

Land gültige Rücknahmesystem und nutzen Sie dieses zur Entsorgung. Batterien und Akkus sollten separat entsorgt werden.

Elimination des Déchets d'Equipements Electriques et Electroniques ménagers

FRANÇAIS

(Applicable dans l'Union Européenne selon les dispositions particulières de chaque Etat membre)

Ce symbole inscrit sur le produit ou sur l'emballage, le mode d'emploi et la carte de garantie indique que le produit ne odit pas être

éliminé avec les autres déchets ménagers. Il doit être remis à un point de collecte agréé des Déchets d'Equipements Electrique et

Electroniques en fin de vie. En vous assurant que ce produit sera éliminé correctement, vous aiderez à lutter contre l'impact négatif

pour l'environnement et la santé humaine qui résulterait d'un mode d'élimination inapproprié. Si votre produit contient des

accumulateurs ou piles aisément amovibles, éliminez-les séparément selon les dispositions locales en vigueur.

Inzamelen van electronische apparatuur voor huishoudelijk gebruik.

NEDERLANDS

Inzamelen van electronische apparatuur (van de toepassing in de EU en andere Europese landen met een gescheiden afval systeem).

Dit symbool geeft aan dat dit product niet als huishoudelijk afval verwerkt mag worden. Het dient derhalve ingeleverd te worden bij

het afval scheidingsstation als KCA voor eventueel hergebruik. U helpt hierbij schade aan het milieu te voorkomen. Indien er in het

apparaat makkelijk te verwijderen batterijen of accu’s zitten dient u deze appart in te leveren als KCA bij het scheidingsstation. Het

hergebruiken van materialen spaart het milieu. Voor meer informatie voor hergebruiken van dit product kunt u contact opnemen

met uw locale afval scheidingsstation of bij de winkel waar u het apparaat gekocht heeft.

Reciclaje de Equipos Eléctricos y Electrónicos de Uso Privado

ESPAÑOL

Reciclaje de Equipos Eléctricos y Electrónicos Usados (Aplicable en la Unión Europea y en otros países con sistema de reciclaje por separado)

Este símbolo indica que este producto no debería tratarse como los demás materiales residuales de uso general. Estos productos

deben reciclarse en el contenedor específico para los equipos eléctricos y electrónicos. Depositando estos productos

correctamente, UD. ayuda al tratamiento adecuado de los productos reciclables y previene los efectos potencialmente negativos

para el medioambiente y la salud, que podrían verse afectados por un incorrecto reciclado del producto. Si su equipo contiene

baterías o acumuladores de fácil extracción, por favor deposítelos en el contenedor adecuado según las normativas locales. El

reciclaje de los materiales ayuda a la conservación de los recursos naturales. Para más información acerca del reciclaje de estos

productos, contacte con la autoridad local, el servicio de reciclaje o el establecimiento donde adquirió el producto.

Smaltimento privato di apparecchiature elettriche ed elettroniche

ITALIANO

Norme europee per lo smaltimento di apparecchiature elettriche ed elettroniche nei Paesi con raccolta differenziata.

Il simbolo informa che il prodotto non può essere considerato un normale rifiuto domestico. Deve essere smaltito negli speciali

contenitori previsti per apparecchiature elettriche ed elettroniche. Assicuratevi che questo prodotto sia smaltito correttamente,

aiuterete ad evitare negative conseguenze, per l’ambiente e la salute umana, che potrebbero verificarsi a causa di un suo

inappropriato smaltimento. Se possibile togliete eventuali batterie elettriche o accumulatori e smaltiteli separatamente, secondo le

disposizioni locali. Il riciclaggio dei materiali aiuta a conservare le risorse naturali. Per maggiori informazioni sul riciclaggio di questo

prodotto informatevi presso la vostra locale azienda di smaltimento rifiuti o presso il negozio dove l’avete comperato.

Hantering av elektriskt och elektroniskt hushållsavfall

SVENSKA

Hantering av förbrukad elektrisk och elektronisk utrustning, gällande EU och övriga europeiska länder med separata uppsamlingssystem.

Denna symbol betyder att denna produkt ej skall hanteras som vanligt hushållsavfall. Istället skall den lämna till närmaste

återvinningsstation. Genom att lämna in denna produkt på korrekt sätt, hjälper du till att förhindra skador på människa och miljö,

som annars kunnat uppstå vid normal sophantering. Om din utrustning har lätt urtagbara batterier eller accumulatorer, var vänlig

lämna in dem enligt lokala föreskrifter. Återvinning hjälper till att spara våra naturtillgångar. För mer detaljerad information om

återvinning av denna produkt, vänd Dig till ortens miljökontor eller till din handlare.

Bortskaffelse af elektrisk/elektronisk udstyr i private husholdninger

DANSK

Bortskaffelse af kasseret elektrisk & elektronisk udstyr (Gældende for lande indenfor EU og andre europæiske lande med separat indsamlingsordning).

Dette symbol betyder, at udstyret ikke bør behandles som almindeligt husholdningsaffald. I stedet skal det afleveres på et godkendt

indsamlingssted for behandling og genanvendelse af elektronisk udstyr. Ved at bortskaffe dette produkt på korrekt måde, sikrer du

at affaldet behandles korrekt og genbruges i størst muligt omfang. Herved forhindres en evt. negativ miljømæssig og

sundhedsmæssig effekt der kunne opstå ved forkert behandling af affaldet. Hvis udstyret indeholder batterier eller akkumulatorer

der nemt kan tages ud, bør disse behandles separat i henhold til de lokale regler. Genbrug af materialer hjælper med at bevare de

naturlige ressourcer. Hvis du ønsker mere detaljerede oplysninger om genbrug af dette produkt, kan du kontakte de lokale

myndigheder, den lokale renovationsvirksomhed eller den forretning hvor du har købt produktet.

Eliminação doméstica dos equipamentos eléctricos e electrónicos PORTUGUÊS

Eliminação de equipamento eléctrico e electrónico usado (aplicável na União Europeia e noutros países da Europa com sistemas

de recolha de lixo separados)

O símbolo acima indica que o produto não deve ser tratado como lixo doméstico. Em vez disso, deve ser separado para

reciclagem de equipamento eléctrico e electrónico. Se adquirir novos produtos, esta câmara deve ser entregue ao distribuidor ou a

um sistema especializado de recolha de lixo. Assegurando a correcta eliminação destes equipamentos, ajudará a prevenir

consequências negativas para o ambiente e para a saúde humana causadas por uma inapropriada manipulação dos componentes

deste produto. Se a eliminação for feita de forma ilegal, poderá dar lugar a eventuais penalizações. Para informação mais

detalhada acerca da reciclagem deste produto, contacte os serviços camarários ou a loja onde adquiriu o mesmo.

Documenttranscriptie

F18E10081 ELECTRONIC FLASH EF-610 DG SUPER INSTRUCTIONS EO-ETTL II 1 3 5 6 2 7 4 8 9 10 11 13 14 15 18 19 20 17 16 12 21 ENGLISH The CE Mark is a Directive conformity mark of the European Community (EC). DEUTSCH Die CE-Kennzeichnung ist eine Konformitätserklärung des Herstellers, die dokumentiert, daß das betreffende Produkt die Anforderungen von EG-Richtlinien einhält. FRANÇAIS Le label CE garantit la conformité aux normes établies par la Communauté Européenne. NEDERLANDS Het CE teken is een aanduiding voor de Europese Gemeenschap (EC). ESPAÑOL El logotipo CE es una directiva de conformidad con la Comunidad Europea (CE). ITALIANO Questo è il marchio di conformità alle direttive della comunità Europea (CE). SVENSKA CE-märket betyder att varan blivit godkänd av EU:s gemensamma kvalitetsnorm. DANSK CE-mærket er i overensstemmelse med de gældende regler i EU. PORTUGUÊS A marca CE garante a conformidade com as normas estabelecidas pela Comunidade Europeia. SIGMA (Deutschland) GmbH Carl-Zeiss-Str. 10/2, D-63322 Rödermark, F.R.GERMANY Verkauf: 01805-90 90 85-0 Service: 01805-90 90 85-85 Fax: 01805-90 90 85-35 1 ENGLISH Thank you very much for purchasing the Sigma EF-610 DG SUPER EO-TTL II Electronic Flash. This product is specifically developed for the Canon EOS series SLR cameras. Depending on the camera model, functions and operation may vary. Please read this instruction booklet carefully. To add to your enjoyment of photography, the flash has a variety of features. To make the most of all these features and to get the maximum performance and enjoyment from your flash, please read this instruction booklet together with your camera’s instruction manual before using the flash, and also keep it handy for your future reference. PRECAUTIONS In order to avoid causing any damage or injury, please read this instruction manual very carefully, paying attention to the cautionary signs below, before using the flash. Please take special note of the two cautionary signs below. Using the product disregarding this warning sign might cause serious injury or Warning !! other dangerous results. Caution !! Using the product disregarding this caution sign might cause injury or damage. Symbol denotes the important points, where warning and caution are required. Symbol contains information regarding the actions that must be avoided. Warning !! This flash contains high voltage circuits. To avoid electric shock or burns, do not attempt to disassemble the flash. If the outside shell of the unit is broken or cracked, do not touch the mechanism inside. Do not fire the flash close to eyes. Otherwise the bright light could damage the eyes. Keep at least 1m/3feet distance between face and the flash unit when taking a picture with flash. Do not touch the synchro terminal of your camera when the flash is attached to the hot shoe. High voltage circuitry could cause an electric shock. Never use your camera in an environment where flammable, burnable, gas, liquids or chemicals, etc, exist. Otherwise it might cause fire or explosion. Caution !! Do not use this flash unit on any camera other than the Canon EOS series cameras, otherwise the flash may damage the circuitry of these cameras. This flash unit is not waterproof. When using the flash and camera in the rain or snow or near water, keep it from getting wet. It is often impractical to repair internal electrical components damaged by water. Never subject the flash and camera to shock, dust, high temperature or humidity. These factors might cause fire or malfunctioning of your equipment. When the flash is subjected to sudden temperature change, as when the flash unit is brought from a cold exterior to warm interior, condensation might form inside. In such a case, place your equipment in a sealed plastic bag before such a change, and do not use the flash unit until it reaches room temperature. Do not store your flash in a drawer or cupboard etc. containing naphthalene, camphor or other insecticides. These chemicals will have a negative effects on the flash unit. Do not use a thinner, Benzene or other cleaning agents to remove dirt or finger prints from the component. Clean with a soft, moistened cloth. For extended storage, choose a cool dry place, preferably with good ventilation. It is recommended that the flash be charged and fired several times a month, to maintain proper capacitor functioning. 2 DESCRIPTION OF THE PARTS EXTERNAL PARTS 1.Flash Head 2.AF Auxiliary Light 3.Bounce Angle; Up and Down 4.Bounce Angle; Right and Left 5.Bounce Lock and Release Button; Up and Down 6.Swivel Lock and Release Button; Right and Left 7.LCD Panel 8.Battery Cover 9.Shoe Ring 10.Shoe 11.Catch Light Panel 12.Wide Panel CONTROLS 13.MODE Button 14.SEL SELECT Button 15. + Increment Button 16. - Decrement Button 17.ZOOM Button 18.TEST Button 19.LIGHT Button 20.Ready Light 21.Power Switch CAMERA MODELS AND FUNCTIONS Although this Flash unit has been equipped with numerous functions, depending on the camera model being used some functions may have some limitations. Please confirm the type camera you have from the list below. Please refer to explanations of each function through the instruction manual; If no model information is specified, it means that this function of flash can be used with all type of EOS cameras. A type camera B type camera E-TTL(E-TTL II) Compatible EOS SLR cameras All other EOS cameras except those listed above ABOUT THE BATTERY This flash unit uses four “AA” type Alkaline dry cell batteries, Ni-Cad or Ni-MH rechargeable batteries. Manganese batteries can also be used but as they have a shorter life than Alkaline batteries, we do not recommend using them. Please replace batteries if it takes more than 30seconds to light the Ready Lamp. ◆ To assure proper electrical contact, clean the battery terminals before installing the batteries. ◆ Ni-Cad or Ni-MH batteries do not have standardized contacts. If you use Ni-Cad or Ni-MH batteries, please confirm that the battery contacts touch the battery compartment properly. ◆ To prevent battery explosion, leakage or overheating, use four new AA batteries of the same type and brand. Do not mix the type or new and used batteries. ◆ Do not disassemble or short-circuit the batteries, or expose them fire or water; they may explode. Do not recharge the batteries other than Ni-Cad or Ni-MH rechargeable batteries. ◆ When the flash will not be used for an extended period of time, remove the batteries from the flash to avoid the possibility of damage from leakage. ◆ Battery performance decreases at low temperatures. Keep batteries insulated when using the flash in cold weather. ◆ As with any flash, it is recommended you carry spare batteries when on a long trip or when photographing outdoors in cold weather. BATTERY LOADING 1. Be sure to set the Power Switch to the off position then slide the battery cover in the direction of the arrow to open. 2. Insert four AA size batteries into the battery chamber. Be sure the + and – ends of the batteries are aligned according to the diagram in the chamber. 3. Close the cover. 4. Slide the Power Switch to the ON position. After few seconds the Ready Lamp will light, indicating that the flash unit can be fired. 3 5. Please press the “Test Button” to be sure that the flash is working properly. AUTO POWER OFF To conserve battery power, the flash unit automatically turns itself off when the flash is not used within approximately 90 seconds. To turn the flash on again, depress the TEST button or the camera shutter button halfway. Please note that the “Auto Power Off” mechanism does not work with wireless TTL flash mode, normal slave flash, and designated slave flash modes. ERROR INDICATION If the battery power is not sufficient or there is an electric information error between the camera and flash unit, the “Flash Coverage Angle” will blink on the LCD panel. When this occurs, turn the power switch off and on. If it still blinks after this procedure, check the battery power. ADJUSTING THE FLASH HEAD Depress the Bounce “Up and Down” Lock and Release Button and adjust the flash head to the desired position. ◆ If appears on the LCD panel when you turn on the flash, and if this mark blinks, then the flash head is adjusted to an incorrect position. ATTACHING AND REMOVING THE FLASH TO AND FROM THE CAMERA Be sure to turn off the Power Switch, then insert the Shoe Base into the hot shoe on the camera and turn the Shoe Locking Ring until it is tight. ◆ When you attach or remove the flash, grasp the bottom of the flash to prevent damage to the shoe foot and the camera’s hot shoe. ◆ If the camera’s built-in flash is set in up position, please close it before you attach the flash unit. ◆ To remove the flash, rotate the shoe-locking ring in the opposite direction of ◄LOCK mark, until it stops. SETTING OF FLASH COVERAGE ANGLE When you press the ZOOM button, the symbol appears. Each time you press the ZOOM button, the LCD panel display will change and indicate the zoom position in sequence as follows. 24mm → 28mm → 35mm → 50mm → 70mm → 85mm → 105mm → (Auto) Generally, in the ETTL (TTL) mode, the flash will automatically set the zoom position according to the focal length of your lens. ◆ When you turn on the main switch, the flash will memorize and set the zoom head position to the last setting used. ◆ If you use a lens wider than the flash head setting, there may be under exposed areas around the edge of the picture. ◆ Depending on the flash head setting, the flash’s Guide Number will be changed. 4 WIDE PANEL This flashgun is equipped with a built-in wide panel, which can provide an ultra wide 17mm angle of coverage. Slide out the wide panel and catch light panel and flip it down to cover the flash’s head. (Be careful to slide the panels out smoothly.) Then put the catch light panel back in its place. The coverage angle setting of the flash will be set to 17mm automatically. ◆ If the built-in wide panel comes off accidentally, the ZOOM button will not function. In this case please contact the store where the flash was purchased or a Sigma service station. LCD PANEL ILLUMINATION When you press the LIGHT button, the LCD panel will illuminate for about 8 seconds. The illumination stays on longer than 8 seconds if you press the LIGHT button once again. ETTL (TTL) AUTO FLASH In the TTL AUTO Mode, the camera will control the amount of flash lighting to get the appropriate exposure for the subject. ◆ “A” type cameras can be set in ETTL mode. “B” type cameras can be set in TTL mode. 1. Set the camera’s mode to Full-AUTO Mode. ( Usually □ Mode. If the camera does not have □ Mode, set to P Mode.) 2. Turn on the power switch of the flash, the ETTL (TTL) mark will appear on the LCD panel and the flash will start charging. 3. Focus on your subject. 4. Check that the subject is located within the effective distance range indicated on the LCD panel. 5. Press the shutter button, after the flash is fully charged. Note: When the flash is fully charged, the ready light in the viewfinder appears. ◆ When the camera receives the appropriate exposure, the ETTL (TTL) mark on the LCD panel will appear for 5 seconds. If this indication does not appear, the flash illumination is not sufficent for that situation. Please re-take the picture at a closer distance. ◆ The AF Auxiliary Light will turn on automatically as you focus on a dark area. Note: Effective distance is up to about 0.7 to 9 meters (2.3-29.5 feet). ◆ When the camera is set to ‘Creative Zone’, the flash will be set to TTL / ETTL mode. ◆ When the flash is fully charged, the flash mark will appear in the finder. If the shutter is released before the flash is fully charged, the camera will take the picture at a slow shutter speed with no flash. USING FLASH IN OTHER CAMERA MODES (Except EOS700, 750, 850) Shutter Speed Priority Setting By selecting the Tv mode of the camera, you can set the shutter speed from 30sec. to 1/X sync speed. When you set the desired shutter speed, the camera will select the appropriate aperture value for the scene. If the subject is too light or too dark, the aperture value indicator will blink and show the limit values (maximum or minimum aperture). In such as case, the camera proceeds to take a flash photograph at the limit value. Thus, the main subject in the picture should be exposed correctly, but 5 the background may become under or over exposed. Aperture Priority Setting By selecting the Av mode of your camera, the camera will select the appropriate shutter speed for the scene. If the subject is too bright or too dark, the shutter speed indicator will blink and show the limit (highest or slowest shutter speed) value. The highest shutter speed will be limited to the camera’s normal flash synchronization speed. In such a case, the camera proceeds to take a flash photograph at the limit value. Thus, the main subject in a picture should be exposed correctly, but the background may become under or overexposed. When used with M Mode You can set the desired aperture value and shutter speed from 30 seconds to the camera’s flash sync speed. If the camera’s exposure requires more light to achieve correct exposure for the inputted values, the flashgun will provide sufficient light to give the correct exposure, within the working range of the flashgun. LIMITS OF CONTINUOUS SHOOTING To prevent overheating of the flashgun’s circuitry, do not use your flash unit for at least 10 minutes after continuously firing the flash for the number of exposures shown in the table below. Mode Number of Flash Exposures TTL, M(1/1,1/2) 20 Continuous Flash Shots M(1/4, 1/8) 25 Continuous Flash Shots M(1/16-1/32) 40 Continuous Flash Shots Multi 10 Cycle MANUAL FLASH OPERATION Manual flash is provided for shooting subjects when the correct exposure is difficult to obtain in the TTL mode. In the manual flash mode, you can set the flash power level from 1/1 (full) to 1/128 power in one step increments. 1. Set the camera’s exposure mode to M. 2. Press the MODE button on the flash unit to select M. 3. The flash power output value blinks when you press the SEL button. 4. Press + or - button to set the desired flash power output. 5. The manual flash output display will stop blinking and remain displayed after you press the SEL button again. 6. Adjust the focusing by pressing the shutter button, note the subject distance on the focus ring on the lens. Then adjust the lens’ aperture value or flash power level until the distance indicated on the LCD panel of the flashgun is equal to the subject distance. 7. When the Ready Light of the flash is illuminated, the unit is ready for use. ◆ You can calculate the correct exposure by using the following formula: Guide Number “GN” / Flash to Subject Distance = F-stop This flash unit will automatically calculate and indicate the appropriate subject distance according to the above formula.(Please refer to table1 on the last page) SECOND CURTAIN SYNCHRONIZATION When you photograph a moving subject with slow synchronization, usually the furrow of the subject will be exposed in front of the subject. The ordinary flash light will fire when the first shutter curtain is fully opened, thus the subject will be exposed from the time flash is fired to the time the shutter is closed (First curtain synchronization). When you use second curtain synchronization, the flash will fire just before the second curtain begins to close and the subject will be exposed by ambient light from the time the shutter opens until the flash fires. As a result the furrow of the subject will be recorded 6 behind the subject. This is a more natural effect. ◆ This mode cannot be used with EOS 700, 750, 850 cameras. 1. Set the desired picture-taking mode of the camera. 2. Press + or - button mark will be displayed on the LCD panel. 3. Adjust the focus and take the picture after confirming the ready light. ◆ First curtain synchronization will be set if mark is not displayed. ◆ If the camera is set to Full Auto Mode this function cannot be used. ◆ To cancel second curtain synchronization, turn off the mark on the LCD panel by using + or buttons. HIGH SPEED SYNC (FP) FLASH, A TYPE CAMERAS ONLY When you take a picture with an ordinary flash, you cannot use a shutter speed faster than the camera’s synchronized speed because the flash must fire when the shutter curtain is fully open. When using the High Speed Sync mode, the flash keeps firing while the shutter curtain is running, thus you can use a shutter speed faster than the shutter’s normal synchronization speed. 1. Select the camera’s exposure mode. (“Tv” or “M” modes can be used) 2. Select a shutter speed faster than the camera’s normal synchronization speed. 3. Slide the Power Switch of the flash to the ON position. 4. Choose the Flash Mode by using MODE button (“ETTL” or “M” modes can be used). mark is displayed on the 5. Press + or - button until the LCD panel. 6. Focus on the subject 7. Check that the subject is located within the effective distance, indicated on the LCD panel. 8. Confirm the mark is in the viewfinder of the camera and then you can take the picture. ◆ With high-speed sync, the Guide Number changes depending on the shutter speed. The flash range will be shorter (ie Guide Number will be smaller) when the shutter speed is faster. (Refer to table 2 on the last page). ◆ Selecting shutter speeds slower than the camera’s normal synchronization speed cancels Hi-speed sync. Then the flash will automatically set to normal ETTL operation. To activate FP flash again, follow the procedure above from point 1. ◆ It is possible to use the exposure compensation function with high speed synchronization operation. To do so, please refer to your camera’s instruction manual regarding “exposure correction”. ◆ will disappear when Hi-speed sync (FP Flash) is cancelled. FE LOCK “FE” lock mode allows you to choose and lock the exposure before taking the picture. 1. Set the camera’s exposure mode (“P”, “Tv”, “Av”, “M” or “DEP”). 2. Set the flash’s mode to the E-TTL or the High Speed Sync. 3. Focus on the subject 4. Focus on the subject in the center AF frame of the viewfinder, and depress FE lock button. ◆ The flash unit will make a pre-flash, then calculate and memorize the amount of light necessary for the correct exposure. ◆ The camera’s viewfinder will display “FEL” for 0.5 sec and the correct exposure will be set. mark, it means that power is not sufficient for correct exposure. Please ◆ If the viewfinder shows get closer to the subject and repeat from step 3. 7 5. After composing the picture, press the shutter button. ◆ This function may vary depending on camera model. For more details please refer to “FE lock” instructions of your camera manual. MODELING FLASH If useing the Modeling flash, you can check the lighting and shadow effects before taking the picture. (This function is limited to cameras which are compatible with modeling flash. For more details, please refer to the instruction manual of your camera) When the camera is set to modeling flash, the Flash panel will display the symbol automatically. EXPOSURE COMPENSATION You can use flash exposure compensation in combination with normal exposure compensation to control the background exposure level. Flash exposure compensation can be set to ±3 stops in 1/3 stop increments (or in 1/2 stop increments with some cameras). ◆ This mode cannot be used with EOS 620, 650, 700, 850 and 1000 cameras. 1. Press the SEL button and select . 2. Press the + or - button to set the desired flash exposure compensation amount. 3. Press the SEL button until the display stops blinking. 4. Focus on the subject. 5. Check that the subject is within the flash range as displayed on the EF 610 DG Super’s LCD panel. 6. You can take the picture after confirming that the Ready Light of the flash is illuminated. ◆ To cancel exposure compensation, please start from step 1 and choose + 0 on display. FB (Flash Exposure Bracketing) With FB, you can get bracketed flash shots of the subject while the ambient exposure level remains constant. The bracketed flash shots can be taken in the sequence of correct exposure, under exposure and over exposure, up to ± 3 stops in 1/3EV increments (or 1/2EV increments with some cameras). blinks. 1. Press the SEL button until 2. Press the + or - button to set the flash exposure bracketing amount. will be displayed after pressing the SEL button again. 3. 4. Adjust the focusing. 5. Please check that the subject is within the flash range displayed on the EF- 610 DG Super’s LCD panel. 6. Check the mark is displayed in the virefinder and take the picture. 7. If it is necessary, repeat steps 4 to 6. ◆ This function will be cancelled automatically after making the third exposure. MULTI FLASH MODE While the shutter is open, the flash will fire repeatedly. By doing so a series of images of the subject will be exposed in one frame. A bright subject with a dark background shows more effectively in this mode. It is possible to set the firing frequency between 1Hz and 199Hz. Up to 100 flashes can be fired continuously. The maximum number of flashes varies, depending on the flash’s power output and firing frequency settings. (Please refer to table 3 on the last 8 page). ◆ This function cannot be used with EOS 700, 750, 850 cameras. 1. Set the camera’s exposure mode to M mode and set the F number. 2. Press the MODE button until the Multi-flash mode appears. 3. Press the SEL button until the flash firing frequency starts to blink. 4. Press the + or - button to set the desired flash frequency value. 5. After pressing the SEL button again, the flash power level will blink. 6. Press the + or - button to set the desired power level. 7. Press the SEL button again, the number of flashes will blink. 8. Press the + or - button to set the desired number of flashes. 9. Press the SEL button again, the display will stop blinking. 10. When the ready light of the flash is illuminated, the unit is ready to use. Note: Please set the shutter speed longer than; Number of Flashes you want ÷ Firing Frequency BOUNCE FLASH When you take a photo with flash in a room, sometimes a strong shadow will appear behind the subject, if you point the flash head upwards or sideways to reflect the light off the ceiling, wall etc. the subject will be illuminated softly. Press the lock button and adjust the flash head to set the bounce angle. UP: 0°, 60°, 75°, 90° DOWN: 0°,7° RIGHT: 0°, 60°, 75°, 90° LEFT: 0°, 60°, 75°,90°, 120°, 150°, 180° When the bounce flash mode is activated, a bounce indicator will appear on the LCD panel. Choose a white surface for bouncing the flash, otherwise the image’s colour may be incorrect. Depending on the reflecting surface, the subject distance and other factors, the effective distance range for the TTL AUTO may change. Please check for correct exposure confirmation (ETTL or TTL mark on the LCD panel) after releasing the shutter. CLOSE-UP EXPOSURES Bounce flash can be tilted 7° downward for close-ups. The Flash will be effective only for the subjects will blink. 0.5 meter to 2 meters. When the flash head is tilted 7°, CATCH LIGHT PANEL This flash is equipped with a built-in catch light panel, which can create a catch light in the eyes of the subject when the bounce flash mode is activated. Slide out the wide panel and catch light panel, and then put wide panel back in its place. (Be careful to slide the panels out smoothly.) ◆ To create a catch light effectively, tilt the flash head upward 90 degrees and take pictures at a close distance. WIRELESS FLASH When using the “Wireless Flash” mode, you can take pictures with a more three-dimensional feeling, or make natural images by using shadowing depending on the flash position. This can be done without any extension cord connecting the camera body and flash. In case of the EF-610 DG SUPER, communication between the camera body and the flash will be achieved by the light produced by the flash. In the “Wireless Flash” mode, the camera will calculate the correct exposure automatically. ◆The type A camera models can be used with “Wireless Manual Flash” and “Wireless Multi Flash” 9 functions only. The EOS750 and EOS850 cannot be used with “Wireless Flash”. ◆In this instruction we call the flash unit which is attached to the camera body the “Master unit ” and we call a flash unit at a remote position a “Slave unit”. ◆When setting a slave unit at the desired position, you can use the mini-stand provided. This mini-stand has a screw hole for a tripod. ◆Place the slave flash unit at the desired location. Do not place the slave unit within the picture area. ◆Set the flash unit within the range of 0.5m/1.5ft~5m/16ft from the subject and set the camera body within the range of 1m/3ft~5m/16ft from the subject. Preparation for Wireless Flash Channel Setting When other people are using Wireless Flash mode near you, your flash may be connected with the other person’s flash and your flash may fire. In this circumstance, please set a different channel for your flash from that of the other person’s. Channel setting for Master unit 1. Press the MODE button to Select the mark. 2. Press the SEL button several times to make the channel indicator blink. 3. Press the + or - button to set the channel number. (C1～C4) 4. Press the SEL button several times to stop the blinking. Channel setting for Slave unit 1. Press the MODE button to Select the ETTL／／ mark. 2. Press the SEL button several times to make the channel indicator blink. 3. Press the + or - button to set the channel to the same number. (C1 ～ C4) as the master unit. 4. Press the SEL button several times to stop the blinking. ◆ If the channel number of the Master and Slave flashguns are different, the Slave will not fire. Please set the same number for Master and Slave. Slave Unit ID Setting When you use several Slave units, the Slave ID can be set to distinguish a Slave unit from Main flash. ◆ If you want to all Slave units to fire at the same flash output, this setting is not necessary. 1. Press the MODE button to Select the ETTL／／ mark. 2. Press the SEL button three times to make the Slave ID indicator blink. 3. Press the + or - button and set the ID number. (1, 2 or 3) 4. Press the SEL button again so the display stops blinking. ◆ Repeat this process for each slave unit you are using, giving each one a different ID number. Master Flash ON/OFF Setting You can set the Master flash unit firing ON or OFF. Master Flash unit firing ON 1. Press the MODE button to Select the mark. 2. Press the + or - button to indicate the mark. Master Flash unit firing OFF 1. Press the MODE button to Select the mark. 2. Press the + or - button to indicate the mark. WIRELESS ETTL AUTOFLASH (type A cameras only) In this Wireless ETTL Autoflash function, the camera automatically calculates the correct exposure. 10 Wireless ETTL Autoflash with Flash Ratio OFF If you require an equal power ratio for each flash unit, the slave ID setting is not necessary. You can set 1, 2 or 3 for each Slave Unit in use. All the Slave flash units will fire at the same flash output and the ETTL autoflash system controls the total flash amount automatically, to obtain a correct flash exposure. The instructions below show how to reset the flashgun so no flash ratio is used and therefore equal power is emmited from each flashgun. ◆ Please set the Master Flash unit as follows: 1. Press the MODE button to select the ETTL／ mark. 2. Press the + or - button to display the mark (Master Flash will fire) or the shows (Master Flash will not fire) in the LCD display. 3. Press the SEL button several times and confirm that the flash ratio is 1:1. ◆ If the flash ratio is indicated as or , press the + or - button until 1:1 is displayed. 4. Place the Slave Unit at the desired position. 5. Make sure that the Master Unit and Slave Unit have both been charged. ◆ Master Unit’s Ready Light is lit and Slave Unit’s AF Auxiliary Light is blinking. 6. Focus on the subject and take the picture. Slave ID, Wireless ETTL Autoflash With Flash Ratio (Two Slave Units) The Wireless ETTL autoflash system, described as an example, consists of a master unit on the camera, which will not fire, and two slave units. When you set the flash ratio, the ETTL autoflash system then controls the total flash amount according to the flash ratio, to obtain a correct exposure. ◆ Only EOS-1V, EOS-3 cameras can use this function. ◆ The flash ratio can be set between 8 : 1 ～ 1 : 1 ～ 1 : 8. ◆ Please set the Slave ID to 1 and 2 for each Slave unit. Set the Master unit as follow. 1. Please set the Master Flash unit firing mode to OFF (see Mater Flash ON / OFF setting). mark. 2. Press the MODE button to Select the ETTL／ 3. Press the SEL button several times to make the flash ratio indicator blink. 4. Press the + or - button and select . (Blinking) 5. Press the SEL button to make flash ratio value blink. 6. Press the + or - button to set the flash ratio. 7. Press the SEL button to make the Flash Ratio indicator stop blinking. 8. Place the Slave Unit at the desired position. 9. Confirm that both the master and slave units are charged. 10. Focus on the subject and take the picture. ◆ If you want to change the settings, you can start from step 3. ◆ If you want to cancel the setting, please set the flash ratio 1:1. (refer to step 4) Slave ID, Wireless ETTL Autoflash With Flash Ratio (Three Slave Units) The following wireless ETTL autoflash procedure is for a master unit with three (3) slave units. This procedure sets the flash ratio for two Slave Units and the flash exposure compensation amount for other slave unit. ◆ Only EOS-1V and EOS-3 camera can use this function. ◆ Please set the Slave ID 1, 2 and 3 for each Slave unit (See Slave ID Setting). Set the Master unit as follow. 1. Please set the Master Flash unit firing mode to OFF (See Master Flash ON / OFF Settings). 2. Press the MODE button to Select the ETTL／ mark. 3. Press the SEL button several times to make the flash ratio indicator display blink. 4. Press the + or - button to select the 1 2 3. (Blinking) 5. Press the SEL button to make the flash ratio value blink. 6. Press the + or - button to set the flash ratio. 7. Press the SEL button to make the flash exposure compensation display blink. 8. Press the + or - button and set the flash exposure compensation amount. 9. Press the SEL button to make the indicator stop blinking. 10. Place the Slave Units at the desired position. 11 11. Confirm that both the master and slave units are charged. 12. Focus on the subject and take the picture. ◆ If you want to change the settings or cancel the flash ratio settings, you can start from step 3. Wireless High-Speed Sync (FP Flash) 1. Please set the master flash to Wireless Flash mode. (Refer to Page 21) (Master Flash unit firing ON) or ／ (Master Flash 2. Press the + or - button to set to ／ unit firing OFF). 3. The remainder of the procedure for setting wireless high-speed sync, is the same as for normal high-speed sync. ◆ It is not necessary to make any additional settings on the Slave units. Wireless Flash Exposure Compensation 1. Please set master flash unit to the Wireless Flash Mode. 2. Press the SEL button to make mark blink. 3. Press the + or - button to set the flash exposure compensation amount. 4. Press the SEL button several times to make exposure compensation indicator appear. ◆ It is not necessary to make any additional setting on the Slave units. ◆ You can also set the flash exposure compensation individually for each slave unit. (If using more than one slave, you will need to apply steps 2-4 to each slave unit.) Wireless FE Lock 1. First please set the flashgun to Wireless Flash mode. 2. Focus on the subject and press the FEL button on the camera. 3. The procedure for setting wireless EF lock is the same as for normal FE lock. ◆ It is not necessary to make any change to the settings on the Slave units. Wireless Flash Exposure Bracketing (FB) 1. First set the flash to the Wireless Flash Mode. mark blink. 2. On the Master Unit, press the SEL button several times to make the 3. Press the + or - button and set the flash exposure compensation amount. 4. Press the SEL button several times to make the indicator stop blinking. 5. The remainder of procedure for setting wireless FB is the same as for normal FB. ◆ It is not necessary to change any settings on the Slave units. CHANGING THE WIRELESS MODE Please set the flash as follows. 1. Press the MODE button to select the ETTL / mark. 2. Press and hold the SEL button more than 2 seconds to make the mode indicator blink. 3. Press the MODE button and select the ETTL, M, or MULTI mode. 4. Press the SEL button to make the mode of indicator stop blinking. WIRELESS MANUAL FLASH You can manually set the slave unit’s flash output, with the master unit. The flash output among the slave units can be uniform or varied. To determine the proper flash exposure, use a hand-held flash meter. Wireless Manual Flash With Uniform Flash Output Please set the Master flash unit as described below. 1. Please follow the procedure of Changing the Wireless Mode and set to the M／ mark. 2. Press the SEL button several times to make the flash output amount indicator blink. 3. Press the + button or – button to set the flash output amount. 4. Press the SEL button several times until the display stops blinking. ◆ If the master flash unit ON function is set, the master unit will also fire, at the same flash output. Wireless Manual Flash With Varied Flash Output 12 You can set a different flash output for each slave unit(s) (the following explains the procedure for using three slave flash units). Set the slave units to normal Wireless Flash mode. Please set the master flash unit as follows. 1. Please follow the procedure for Changing the Wireless Mode and set to the M／ mark. mark blink. 2. Press the SEL button several times to make the 3. Press the + or - button to select indicator. (blinking) 4. Press the SEL button, making the flash output display and blink. 5. Press the + or - button to set the flash output amount for ID 1. 6. Press the SEL button make the flash output display and blink. 7. Press the + or - button to set the flash output amount for ID 2. 8. Press the SEL button make the flash output display and blink. 9. Press the + or - button to set the flash output amount for ID 3. 10. Press the SEL button to make the indicator stop blinking. ◆ If there are only two slave units, please select the indicator at step 3 ( step 9 and step 10 should be omitted). WIRELESS MULTI FLASH Set the master flash unit as follows. 1. Follow the procedure for Changing the Wireless Mode, and set to the MULTI／ 2. Press the 3. Press the 4. Press the 5. Press the 6. Press the 7. Press the 8. Press the mark. SEL button to make the firing frequency display blink. + or - button to set the firing frequency. SEL button to make the flash output amount display blink. + or - button to set the flash output amount. SEL button to make the flash count display blink. + or - button to set the flash count. SEL button to make the display stop blinking. ◆ The firing frequency and flash count will be the same for all slave units. SLAVE FLASH ◆ When selecting this mode with the MODE button, make sure that the flash indicator mode (ETTL, M, MULTI) is not displayed. NORMAL SLAVE FLASH Even if the EF-610 DG SUPER is not attached to the camera body, you can fire the flash by using another flash unit. ◆ Built-in flash (E-TTL, E-TTL II) cannot be used. ◆ Please set your Master Flash unit to TTL autoflash (E-TTL, E-TTL II autoflash cannot be used) or Manual flash mode. 1. Attach the flash unit to the camera’s hot shoe. 2. Set the camera’s exposure mode to the desired mode. If you use A or M mode, also set the desired aperture value. 3. Turn on the flash unit and press the shutter button half way. ◆ Now, the aperture value and film speed are automatically transmitted to the flash unit. 4. Remove the flash unit from the camera. 5. Press the MODE button and select the / (Slave) mode. 6. Press the SEL button several times to make the flash output value indicator blink. 7. Press the + or – button to set the flash output amount. ◆ Determine the appropriate flash output by setting the distance indicator on the LCD panel to coincide as closely as possible with the actual distance from the slave flash to the subject. If the actual distance is out of range, you will need to change the aperture value or film speed. a. To change the aperture value: When the flash unit is set to the Slave mode, press the SEL button until the aperture value blinks, then press the + or – button to set the desired aperture value. Then 13 press the SEL button to stop the display blinking. b. To change the film speed: Press MODE to select the ISO, then press the SEL button to make the indicator for the aperture value blink. Press the + or – button and set the desired film speed, then press the SEL button once again. You will need to press the MODE button several times to return to the slave mode. 8. Press the SEL button several times to make the display stop blinking. 9. Place the slave unit in the desired location. Do not place the slave unit within the picture area. 10. After confirming that all flash units are fully charged, press the shutter button to take the picture. ◆ When the EF-610 DG SUPER is fully charged, the AF Auxiliary Light will blink. ◆ The flash will not fire if the EF-610 DG SUPER is attached to the camera body while it is in the Slave Mode setting. DESIGNATED SLAVE FLASH If using two or more EF-610 DG Super flash units, you can designate which flash will fire together by using the channel settings. In this mode, one flash unit will be used as the Slave Controller and the others for firing as Slaves. Setting the Slave Flash unit(s) for firing 1. Attach the slave unit to the camera body. 2. Set the camera’s exposure mode to S or M. 3. Set the shutter speed to 1/30 or slower. (The slave controller unit (Master Flash) will transmit the designated signal before the others fire. Thus if you use a shutter speed faster than 1/30, the firing flash units will not be synchronized.) 4. Switch “ON” the flash unit and press the camera’s shutter button halfway. (The aperture value and film speed are now automatically transmitted to the slave flash unit.) 5. Remove the slave flash unit from the camera. / . (Slave Mode) 6. Press the MODE button and select the 7. Press the SEL button to make the channel display indicator blink. 8. Press the + or – button to set the channel number. (C1 or C2) 9. Press the SEL button to make the output amount display indicator of the flash blink. 10. Press the + or – button to set the flash output amount. ◆ Set the flash power by setting the distance indicator on the LCD panel to coincide as closely as possible with the actual distance from the slave flash to the subject. If the actual distance is out of range, you need to change the aperture value. 11. Press the SEL button several times to make the display stop blinking. 12. Place the slave unit in the desired location. Do not place the slave unit within the picture area. Setting for Slave Controller unit 13. Attach the Slave Controller flash unit to the camera body. / (Slave Mode). 14. Press the MODE button and select the 15. Press the SEL button to make the channel display indicator blink. 16. Press the + or – button to set the same channel number as that set on the firing flash unit. 17. Press the SEL button to make the flash output amount display indicator blink. mark is displayed and blinking. 18. Press the + button so the 19. Press the SEL button twice to make the display stop blinking. 20. After confirming that all flash units are fully charged, press the shutter button to take the picture. ◆ When the firing flash unit of EF-610 DG Super is fully charged, the AF Auxiliary Light will blink. mode, the aperture on the slave control unit can not be changed. ◆ As the slave control using is in ◆ The Slave Controller unit functions only to control the slave unit. 14 SPECIFICATIONS TYPE : Clip-on type serial-controlled TTL auto zoom electric flash GUIDE NUMBER : 61 (ISO 100/m, 105mm head position) POWER SOURCE : Four AA type alkaline batteries or Four AA type Ni-Cd batteries or, : Four AA type Ni-MH Nickel-Metal Hydride batteries RECYCLING TIME : about 7.0 sec. (Alkaline batteries) : about 5.0 sec. (Ni-Cd, Ni-MH Nickel-Metal Hydride) NUMBER OF FLASHES : about 120 flashes (Alkaline batteries) : about 160 flashes (Ni-Cd, Ni-MH Nickel-Metal Hydride) FLASH DURATION : about 1 / 700 sec. (full power firing) FLASH ILLUMINATE ANGLE : 24～105mm motor powered control (17mm with Built-in Wide Panel) AUTO POWER OFF : Available WEIGHT : 330g / 11.6oz. DIMENSIONS : 77mm (W) / 3.0in. x 139mm (H) / 5.5in. x 117mm (L) / 4.6in. Disposal of Electric and Electronic Equipment in Private Households ENGLISH Disposal of used Electrical & Electronic Equipment (Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems) This symbol on the product, in the manual/warranty, and/or on the packaging indicates that this product must not be treated as household waste. Instead it should be handed over to the appropriate collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic equipment. If your equipment contains easy removable batteries, please dispose of these separately according to your local legislation. It is your responsibility to ensure that this product is recycled correctly. In doing so you will help conserve natural resources, protect the environment and human health. For more detailed information about recycling this product, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the product. 15 [Table1] GN ISO100・m 17mm 24mm 23.0 34.0 16.3 24.0 11.5 17.0 8.1 12.0 5.8 8.5 4.1 6.0 2.9 4.3 2.1 3.0 1/1 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/16 1/32 1/64 1/128 [Table 2] GN 1/125 1/160 1/180 1/250 1/320 1/350 1/400 1/500 1/640 1/750 1/800 1/1000 1/1250 1/1500 1/1600 1/2000 1/2500 1/3000 1/3200 1/4000 1/5000 1/6000 1/6400 1/8000 28mm 35.0 24.7 17.5 12.4 8.8 6.2 4.4 3.1 35mm 36.0 25.5 18.0 12.7 9.0 6.4 4.5 3.2 50mm 46.0 32.5 23.0 16.3 11.5 8.1 5.8 4.1 70mm 52.0 36.8 26.0 18.4 13.0 9.2 6.5 4.7 85mm 56.0 39.6 28.0 19.8 14.0 9.9 7.0 5.0 105mm 61.0 43.1 30.5 21.6 15.3 10.8 7.6 5.5 28mm 24.7 21.9 20.6 17.5 15.5 13.8 14.8 12.4 10.9 10.1 9.8 8.8 7.8 7.1 6.9 6.2 5.5 5.1 4.9 4.4 3.9 3.6 3.5 3.1 35mm 25.5 22.5 21.2 18.0 15.9 14.2 15.2 12.7 11.3 10.4 10.1 9.0 8.0 7.3 7.1 6.4 5.7 5.2 5.0 4.5 4.0 3.7 3.6 3.2 50mm 32.5 28.8 27.1 23.0 20.3 18.2 19.4 16.3 14.4 13.3 12.9 11.5 10.3 9.4 9.1 8.1 7.3 6.6 6.4 5.8 5.1 4.7 4.5 4.1 70mm 36.8 32.5 30.6 26.0 23.0 20.6 22.0 18.4 16.3 15.0 14.5 13.0 11.6 10.6 10.3 9.2 8.2 7.5 7.3 6.5 5.8 5.3 5.1 4.6 85mm 39.6 35.0 33.0 28.0 24.7 22.1 23.7 19.8 17.5 16.2 15.7 14.0 12.5 11.4 11.1 9.9 8.9 8.1 7.8 7.0 6.3 5.7 5.5 4.9 105mm 43.1 38.1 35.9 30.5 27.0 24.1 25.8 21.6 19.1 17.6 17.1 15.3 13.6 12.5 12.1 10.8 9.6 8.8 8.5 7.6 6.8 6.2 6.0 5.4 ISO100・m 17mm 16.3 14.4 13.6 11.5 10.2 9.1 9.7 8.1 7.2 6.6 6.4 5.8 5.1 4.7 4.5 4.1 3.6 3.3 3.2 2.9 2.6 2.3 2.3 2.0 24mm 24.0 21.3 20.0 17.0 15.0 13.4 14.4 12.0 10.6 9.8 9.5 8.5 7.6 6.9 6.7 6.0 5.4 4.9 4.8 4.3 3.8 3.5 3.4 3.0 [Table 3] MULTI FLASH MODE 1/128 1/64 1～5Hz 1～100 1～3 Hz 1～60 1 Hz 1～14 6～7 Hz 1～90 4～5 Hz 1～50 2 Hz 1～7 8～9 Hz 1～80 6 Hz 1～30 3 Hz 1～6 10～11 Hz 1～70 7～9 Hz 1～20 4～7 Hz 1～5 12～14 Hz 1～60 10～19 Hz 1～15 8～9 Hz 1～4 15～19 Hz 1～50 20～199 Hz 1～12 10～199 Hz 1～3 20～199 Hz 1～40 1 Hz 1～30 1 Hz 1～4 1～3 Hz 1～90 2 Hz 1～20 2 Hz 1～3 4～5 Hz 1～80 3 Hz 1～10 3～119 Hz 1～2 6～7 Hz 1～70 4～199 Hz 1～6 8～9 Hz 1～50 10 Hz 1～45 11～14 Hz 1～35 15～19 Hz 1～30 20～50 Hz 1～25 60～199 Hz 1～20 1/32 1/16 1/8 1/4 16 F18N10081 ELECTRONIC FLASH EF-610 DG SUPER INSTRUCTIONS NA-iTTL 1 3 5 6 2 7 4 8 9 10 11 13 14 15 18 19 20 17 16 12 ENGLISH The CE Mark is a Directive conformity mark of the European Community (EC). 1 21 ENGLISH Thank you very much for purchasing the Sigma EF-610 DG SUPER NA-iTTL Electronic Flash. This product is specifically developed for the Nikon SLR series cameras. Depending on the camera model, functions and operation may vary. Please read this instruction booklet carefully. To add to your enjoyment of photography, this flash has a variety of features. To make the most of all these features and to get the maximum performance and enjoyment from your flash, please read this instruction booklet together with your camera’s instruction manual, before using the flash and also keep it handy for your future reference. PRECAUTIONS In order to avoid causing any damage or injury, please read this instruction manual very carefully, paying attention to the cautionary signs below, before using the flash. Please take special note of the two cautionary signs below. Warning !! Caution !! Using the product disregarding this warning sign might cause serious injury or other dangerous results. Using the product disregarding this caution sign might cause injury or damage. Symbol denotes the important points, where warning and caution are required. Symbol contains information regarding the actions that must be avoided. Warning !! This flash contains high voltage circuits. To avoid electric shock or burns, do not attempt to disassemble the flash. If the outside shell of the unit is broken or cracked, do not touch the mechanism inside. Do not fire the flash close to eyes. Otherwise the bright light could damage the eyes. Keep at least 1m/3feet distance between face and the flash unit when taking a picture with flash. Do not touch the synchro terminal of your camera when the flash is attached to a hot shoe. High voltage circuitry could cause an electric shock. Never use your camera in an environment where flammable, burnable, gas, liquids or chemicals, etc, exist. Otherwise it might cause fire or explosion. Caution !! Do not use this flash unit on any camera other than the Nikon NA series cameras, otherwise the flash may damage the circuitry of these cameras. This flash unit is not waterproof. When using the flash and camera in the rain or snow or near water, keep it from getting wet. It is often impractical to repair internal electrical components damaged by water. Never subject the flash and camera to shock, dust, high temperature or humidity. These factors might cause fire or malfunctioning of your equipment. When the flash is subjected to sudden temperature change, as when the flash unit is brought from a cold exterior to warm interior, condensation might form inside. In such a case, place your equipment in a sealed plastic bag before such a change, and do not use the flash unit until it reaches room temperature. Do not store your flash in a drawer or cupboard etc. containing naphthalene, camphor or other insecticides. These chemicals will have a negative effects on the flash unit. Do not use a thinner, Benzene or other cleaning agents to remove dirt or finger prints from the component. Clean with a soft, moistened cloth. For extended storage, choose a cool dry place, preferably with good ventilation. It is recommended that the flash be charged and fired several times a month to maintain proper capacitor functioning. 2 DESCRIPTION OF THE PARTS EXTERNAL PARTS 1.Flash Head 2.AF Auxiliary Light 3.Bounce Angle; Up and Down 4.Bounce Angle; Right and Left 5.Bounce Lock and Release Button; Up and Down 6.Swivel Lock and Release Button; Right and Left 7.LCD Panel 8.Battery Cover 9.Shoe Ring 10.Shoe 11.Catch Light Panel 12.Wide Panel CONTROLS 13.MODE Button 14.SEL SELECT Button 15. + Increment Button 16. - Decrement Button 17.ZOOM Button 18.TEST Button 19.LIGHT Button 20.Ready Light 21.Power Switch CAMERA MODELS AND FUNCTIONS This flash can be used with cameras, which are given below. Digital SLR, F6, F5, F4 Series, F3 Series(*), F100, F90X/N90S Series, F90/N90 Series, F80 Series, F75/N75, F70D/N70, U/F65/N65, F60D/N60, F55/N55, F50D/N50, F-801S/N8008S, F-801/N8008, F601M, F-601/N6006, F501/N2020, F401X, F401S/N4004S, F-401/N4004, F-301, N2000, FA, FE10, FE-2, FG, FM10, New FM2, FM3, Nikonos V(*), Pronea 600i (*) It is necessary to use adapter for connection. This instruction book is used for the following lens types. (Please check your lens.) With Built-in CPU Nikon Lenses Without Built-in CPU Nikon Lenses D Type Lenses, G Type Lenses, IX Nikor Lenses, Except D type AF lens (does not include F3AF), Ai-P type lens Ai-S, Ai, Series E lens ABOUT THE BATTERY This flash unit uses four “AA” type Alkaline dry cell batteries or Ni-Cad, Ni-MH rechargeable batteries. Manganese batteries can also be used but as they have a shorter life than Alkaline batteries, we do not recommend using them. Please replace batteries if it takes more than 30seconds to light the Ready Lamp. ◆ To assure proper electrical contact, clean the battery terminals before installing the batteries. ◆ NiCad batteries do not have standardized contacts. If you use NiCad batteries, please confirm that the battery contacts touch the battery compartment properly. ◆ To prevent battery explosion, leakage or overheating, use four new AA batteries of the same type and brand. Do not mix the type or new and used batteries. ◆ Do not disassemble or short-circuit the batteries, or expose them fire or water; they may explode. Do not recharge the batteries other than Ni-Cd or Ni-MH rechargeable batteries. ◆ When the flash will not be used for an extended period of time, remove the batteries from the flash to avoid the possibility of damage from leakage. ◆ Battery performance decreases at low temperatures. Keep batteries insulated when using the flash in cold weather. ◆ As with any flash, it is recommended you carry spare batteries when on a long trip or when photographing outdoors in cold weather. BATTERY LOADING 1. Be sure to set the Power Switch to the off position then slide the battery cover in the direction of the arrow to open. 2. Insert four AA size batteries into the battery chamber. Be sure the + and – ends of the batteries are aligned according to the diagram in the chamber. 3 3. Close the cover. 4. Slide the Power Switch to the ON position. After few seconds the Ready Lamp will light, indicating that the flash unit can be fired. 5. Please press the “Test Button” to be sure that the flash is working properly. AUTO POWER OFF To conserve battery power, the flash unit automatically turns itself off when the flash is not used within approximately 80 seconds. To turn the flash on again, depress the TEST button or the camera shutter button halfway. Please note that the “Auto Power Off” mechanism does not work with wireless TTL flash mode, normal slave flash, and designated slave flash modes. Please Note; However, “Auto Power Off” mechanism does not work with slave flash mode. ERROR INDICATION If the battery power is not sufficient, or if there is an electric information error between the camera and flash unit, the “Er” icon will blink on the LCD panel. When this occurs, turn the power switch off and on. If it still blinks, after this procedure, check the battery power. ADJUSTING THE FLASH HEAD Depress the Bounce “Up and Down” Lock and Release Button and adjust the flash head to the desired position. ◆ If appears on the LCD panel when you turn on the flash, and if this mark blinks, then the flash head is adjusted to an incorrect position. ATTACHING AND REMOVING THE FLASH TO AND FROM THE CAMERA Be sure to turn off the Power Switch, then insert the Shoe Base into the hot shoe on the camera and turn the Shoe Locking Ring until it is tight. ◆ When you attach or remove the flash, grasp the bottom of the flash to prevent damage to the shoe foot and the camera’s hot shoe. ◆ If the camera’s built-in flash is set in up position, please close it before you attach the flash unit. ◆ To remove the flash, rotate the shoe-locking ring in the opposite direction of ◄LOCK mark, until it stops. SETTING OF FLASH COVERAGE ANGLE When you press the ZOOM button, the symbol appears. Each time you press the ZOOM button, the LCD panel display will change and indicate the zoom position in sequence as follows. 24mm → 28mm → 35mm → 50mm → 70mm → 85mm → 105mm → (Auto) Please confirm the distance from <<CHART A>> page 18. If the setting is possible with 1 then depending on the focal length of the lens, the flash coverage angle will be set automatically, when TTL mode is chosen. ◆ When you turn on the main switch, the flash will memorize and set the zoom head position to the last setting used. ◆ If you use a lens wider than the flash head setting, there may be under exposed areas around the edges of the picture. ◆ Depending on the flash head setting, the flash’s Guide Number will change. 4 WIDE PANEL This flashgun is equipped with a built-in wide panel, which can provide an ultra wide 17mm angle of coverage. Slide out the wide panel and catch light panel and flip it down to cover the flash’s head. (Be careful to slide the panels out smoothly.) Then put the catch light panel back in its place. The coverage angle setting of the flash will be set to 17mm automatically. ◆ If the built-in wide panel comes off accidentally, the ZOOM button will not function. In this case please contact the store where the flash was purchased, or an authorized .Sigma service station. LCD PANEL ILLUMINATION When you press the LIGHT button, the LCD panel will illuminate for about 8 seconds. The illumination stays on longer than 8 seconds if you press the LIGHT button once again. SETTING THE ISO FILM SPEED The ISO film speed is automatically set for the combination of EF-610 DG SUPER NA-iTTL with Digital SLR Cameras, or the F6, F5, F4 series, F100, F90X/F90/F80 (N90S/N90/N80) series, F75D/N75, F65/N65, F70/N70, F810S/N8008S, F801/N8008 and Pronea600i. To confirm ISO film speed, press the MODE button. If your camera is not one of the models listed above, please follow the procedure below. 1. Press the MODE button until ISO is selected. 2. Press the SEL button. The ISO value will blink. 3. Press + or – to set ISO film speed. 4. Press the SEL button and make the indicator stop blinking. TTL MODE TTL mode can provide the correct exposure for the subject and will control the amount of flash. ◆ Please refer to <<CHART A>> which shows the combinations of camera and lens types, exposure mode, and flash modes. ◆ TTL function does not work when using the following cameras: F3 series, FM10, New FM2, FE10, Nikonos V. 1. Set the desired exposure mode on your camera. Please refer to Camera’s Instruction manual. 2. Slide the Flash’s power switch to the ON position. 3. Select TTL/BL or TTL by pressing the MODE button. ◆ When using Digital SLR Cameras, please select TTL/BL. Depending on the camera model, i-TTL or D-TTL system will be used. The ”d” mark will be displayed on the LCD panel for both systems. ◆ For the following cameras; F5, F4 series, F100, F90X/F90/F80 (N90S/N90/N80) series, F70D/N70, F810S/N8008S, F801/ N8008S and Pronea 600i, TTL/BL or TTL can be selected. However, cameras other than those listed above, only TTL can be selected. 4. Focus on the subject. 5. Confirm that the subject is located within the effective distance range, indicated on the LCD panel. 5 ◆ Depending on the combination of the camera, lens and selected exposure mode, the method for shooting the subject with flash may be different. Please see chart “A” and set the “F”-number by referring to the manual for your camera. 6. Confirm the Ready Light is on and press the shutter release button. ◆ When the camera does not receive the appropriate exposure for the subject, the TTL/BL or TTL mark on the LCD panel will appear for 5 seconds after shooting, which shows that the flash power is not sufficient for this situation. Please re-take at a closer distance or use a wider aperture. In the case of F5, F100, F90X/F90/F80 (N90S/N90/N80) series and F70D/N70 cameras, the underexposure indicator appears for 5 seconds. If you want to see the display for underexposure again, please depress the LIGHT button. ◆ When the flash is fully charged, the ready light in the camera’s viewfinder will appear. If it does not appear, the shutter of the camera may operate at a slow shutter speed without triggering the flash. ◆ If you use the AF camera with an AF lens, the AF Auxiliary Light will turn on automatically as you focus on a subject in a dark area. However the AF Auxiliary Light will not light up if central focus area is not selected. << CHART A >> Camera Lens Type Exp. Mode F5 D, G Type All Modes F100 F90X/N90ser. AF lens other All Modes F80/N80ser. than D, G type F70D/N70 Without Built in A/M F75/N75 CPU Modes With Built-in CPU All Modes F4 Series F-801S/N8008S F-801/N8008 F65/N65 Without A/M Pronea 600i Built-in CPU Modes F601/N6006 F-601M With Built-in CPU All Modes Without Built-in CPU With Built-in CPU F60D/N60 F50D/N50 F-401X/4004S Without Built-in CPU Built-in CPU lens, Ai-S, Ai, Series E, F501/N2020 AF F3 Lens F301/N2000 Except above lenses F401S/N4004S With Built-in CPU F401/N4004 Without Built-in CPU FA, FE2 With Built-in CPU; FG, F3, FM3 Without Built-in CPU A/M Modes P/S A/M M P Metering All Modes All Modes Center-weighted, Spot Metering Matrix Pattern Center-weighted, Spot Metering Center-weighted, Spot Metering Matrix Pattern Center-weighted, Spot Metering Center-weighted, Spot Metering TTL System Note 3-D Multi-Sensor BL Can switch to TTL Mode. With F5, F100, F80, series Cameras Multi-Sensor BL spot metering system is always Center Weighted TTL. / Spot Fill-Flash TTL BL Can switch to TTL Mode. TTL BL can work with only F4 Center Weighted / Spot Fill-Flash series, AF F3, Ai-S, Ai, Series E lens. Spot metering system of F4 is always TTL. Center Weighted Pronea 600i will be TTL, when / Spot Fill-Flash exposure mode is “M”. Center Weighted BL cannot work. TTL BL Center Weighted Spot Metering cannot use with / Spot Fill-Flash F-601M Center Weighted / Spot Fill-Flash If exposure mode is “M”, it will TTL BL be Center Weighted / Spot Fill-Flash Center Weighted / Spot Fill-Flash TTL Programmed Conf Dist 1 2 1 2 2 2 A/M TTL A/M TTL P/S A/M M TTL Programmed TTL TTL 2 A/M TTL 2 2 Confirm Distance: 1 : Flash’s LCD panel will show the F-number and working distance of flash automatically. 2 : Set the F-number on the flash to be the same as camera, and check the available working distance range on the LCD panel. To set the F-number on the Flash, push the SEL button until the F-number blinks, and use + or – button to set the F-number. Then press the SEL button again. The F-number will stop blinking. ◆ When using Digital SLR cameras, functions will vary depending on the lens type and combinations of exposure modes, same as F5 and F100 group (in chart A), however, they will use D-TTL (i-TTL). 6 LIMITS OF CONTINUOUS SHOOTING To prevent overheating of the flash’s circuitry, do not use your Flash unit for at least 10minutes after continiously using the flash as shown in the table below. Mode TTL, M(1/1,1/2) M(1/4, 1/8) M(1/16-1/32) Multi Number of Flash Exposures 20 Continuous Flash Shots 25 Continuous Flash Shots 40 Continuous Flash Shots 10 Cycle MANUAL FLASH OPERATION Manual flash is provided for shooting subjects when the correct exposure is difficult to obtain in the TTL mode. In the manual flash mode, you can set the flash power level from 1/1 to 1/64 power in 1/3 stop increments. 1. Set the camera’s exposure mode (A, M modes). 2. Press the MODE button on the flash unit to select M. 3. Press the SEL button to make the guide number value blink. 4. Press + or – button to set the desired flash power output. 5. To stop the manual flash output display blinking, Press the SEL button again. 6. When the Ready Light of the flash is illuminated, the unit is ready for use. How to set the correct flash power level Page 18 <<CHART A>> combination of 1 Focus on the subject and note the subject distance on the lens’ focus ring. Adjust the lens’ aperture until the distance indicated on the LCD panel of the flash is equal to the camera to subject distance. When you use with cameras other than the above Focus on the subject and note the subject distance on the lens’ focus ring. Adjust either the flash power level or the flash’s F stop display. Please refer to the following on how to change the flash’s F-stop. 1. Press the SEL button several times and make the F-stop indicator blink. 2. Press the + button or – button to set the F-stop display. 3. Press the SEL button to make F-stop indicator stop blinking. Set the distance indicated on the LCD panel of the flash so that it is about equal to the actual camera-to-subject distance become about equal. Then set the aperture value of the lens via lens’ aperture ring or cameras command dial. ◆ You can calculate the correct exposure by using this formula. Guide Number “GN” / Flash to Subject Distance = F-stop This flash unit will calculate and indicate the Subject Distance by following the above formula. (Please refer to table1 on the last page). DISTANCE PRIORITY MANUAL FLASH With this flash operation system, EF-610 DG SUPER NA i-TTL automatically controls the light output according to the selected distance and aperture value.  Distance-priority manual flash is not possible with D1X and D1H digital cameras. Page 18 <<CHART A>> combination of 1 1.Set the camera’s exposure mode to either A or M mode. 2.Press MODE on the flash unit so (GN) is displayed. 3.Press the SEL button to make the distance display blink. 4.Press the + button or – button to set the distance. 5.Press the SEL button several times to stop blinking. 6.Set the aperture value on the lens or camera. 7.When the Ready Light of the flash is illuminated, the unit is ready for use. 7 When using with cameras other than the above 1.Please follow the first 2 steps as above and press the SEL button several times to make the aperture display blink. 2.Press the + button or – button to set the F-stop display. 3.Press the SEL button to stop the display blinking. 4.Set the aperture value on the lens or camera, make sure that the flashgun is charged before firing. ◆ Distance-priority manual can be used together with exposure compensation. blink. 1.Press the SEL button several times to make the compensation amount indicator 2.Press the + or - button to set the compensation amount. 3.Press the SEL button several times to make the display stop blinking. FV LOCK “FV” lock mode allows you to choose and lock the exposure for part of the image before taking the picture. ◆ This function is available with CLS compatible camera models only. ◆ You cannot set this function on the flashgun directly. For details please refer to your camera’s instruction manual. AUTO FP HIGH-SPEED SYNC FP FLASH When you take a picture with an ordinary flash, you cannot use a shutter speed faster than the camera’s synchronized speed because the flash must fire when the shutter curtain is fully open. The FP flash keeps firing while the shutter curtain is running. Thus you can use a shutter speed faster than the synchronized speed. ◆ This function is available with CLS compatible cameras only. ◆ You cannot set this function on the flashgun directly. For details please refer to your camera’s instruction manual. will be displayed on Flash’s LCD display. ◆ When you set this function on the camera, ◆ Depending on the shutter speed, the Guide Number will change. (Please refer to table2 on the last page) EXPOSURE COMPENSATION You can compensate the exposure by changing the flash power level. Exposure compensation of the EF-610 DG SUPER NA-iTTL Super flash’s power level ◆ Dedicated exclusively for Digital SLR Cameras and F6, F5, F4 series, F100, F90/N90, F90X/N90S, F80/F80 series, F70D, F75/N75, U/F65/N65, F801S/N800S, F801/ N8008, F601M, F601/N6006 and Pronea 600i only. ◆ Cameras with EV compensation capability allow you to make exposure compensation on either the EF-610 DG SUPER NA-iTTL or the camera (or both). If you use both controls, exposure is modified by the sum total of both exposure compensation values, and will affect the background exposure. ◆ If your camera is an F601 / N6006 series camera, set the exposure compensation by operating the camera’s synchronization mode. ◆ It can be set at 1/3 stop increments from +1.0 stops to –3.0 stops. 1. Press the MODE button to select the TTL/BL (TTL) mode. 2. Press the SEL button to make the compensation amount indicator blink. 3. Press the + and - button to set the compensation amount. 4. Press the SEL button several times to stop the display blinking. Exposure compensation of the EF-610 DG SUPER NA-iTTL flash’s power level and background ◆ This function can be used on all Nikon cameras except F3 series, FM10, New FM2 and FE10. 8 Use your camera’s exposure compensation control button or dial to make exposure compensation to both foreground and background. (Please refer to your camera’s instruction) Exposure compensation on M mode When using the camera on M mode, you can change the aperture value on the camera, or change the flash power level, after setting the exposure compensation. REAR-CURTAIN SYNCHRONIZATION When you photograph a moving subject with slow synchronization, usually the furrow of the subject will be exposed in front of the subject. The ordinary flash light will fire when the first shutter curtain is fully opened, thus the subject will be exposed from the time flash is fired to the time the shutter is closed (This is front curtain synchronization). When you use rear curtain synchronization, the flash will fire just before the rear curtain begins to close, and the subject will be exposed by ambient light from the time the shutter opens until the flash fires. As a result, the furrow of the subject will therefore be recorded behind the subject, creating a more natural effect. ◆ It can be used with cameras providing rear-curtain sync. only. ◆ You cannot set this function on the flashgun directly. For details please refer to your camera’s instruction manual. ◆ The LCD panel on the flash will indicate mark, when the “Second-curtain synchronization” function is set. RED-EYE REDUCTION When you take a picture with flash, sometimes the person’s eyes reflect the flash light and appear as “red-eyes”, in the picture. If you use the function of “Red-eye reduction”, the flash will blink approximately 1 second, before the shutter is released, and reduce the “red-eye”. ◆ Available with cameras providing red-eye reduction control only. ◆ You cannot set this function on the flashgun directly. For details please refer to your camera’s instruction manual. mark, when the “Red-eye reduction” function is set. ◆ The LCD panel on the flash will indicate MODELING FLASH If you use the Modeling flash, you can check the lighting and shadow effects, before you take the picture. 1. Press the MODE button and select the mode you want to use. 2. Press the + button or – button several times to make the icon on the LCD panel appear. 3. Confirm that the flash is charged, then press the TEST button to fire. MULTI FLASH MODE When a slow shutter speed is used, the flash will fire repeatedly while the shutter is open. By doing so a series of images of the subject will be exposed in one frame. A dark background with a bright subject shows the result more effectively in this mode. It is possible to set the firing frequency between 1Hz and 100Hz. Up to 90 flashes can be fired continuously. The maximum number of flashes varies, depending on the flash guide number and firing frequency settings. (Please refer to table3 on the last page). 1. Set the camera’s exposure mode to M and set the desired aperture. 2. Press the MODE button until the multi-flash mode appears. 3. Press the SEL button until the flash firing frequency starts to blink. 4. Press the + or – button to set the desired flash frequency value. 5. After pressing the SEL button again, the flash power level will blink. 6. Press the + or – button to set the desired power level. 7. Press the SEL button again, the number of flashes will blink. 9 8. Press the + or – button to set the desired number of flashes. 9. Press the SEL button until the display stops blinking. 10. When the ready light of the flash is illuminated, the unit is ready to use. Note: Please set the shutter speed longer than; Number of Flashes you want ÷ Firing Frequency How to set the correct flash power level Page 18 <<CHART A>> combination of 1 Read out the subject distance from the focus ring on the lens. Then adjust the aperture ring on the lens until the distance indicated on the LCD panel of the flash and the subject distance become about equal. When using with cameras other than the above Read-out the subject distance from the focus ring on the lens. Either change the flash power level or the flash’s F-stop. Please refer following on how to change the flash’s F-stop. 1. Press the SEL button several times to make the F-stop indicator blink. 2. Press the + or – button and set the F-stop. 3. Press the SEL button and make the indicator of F-stop stop blinking. Please set the distance indicated on the LCD panel of the flash and the actual subject distance so that they are about equal. Then set that F-stop on the lens aperture ring. * You can calculate the correct exposure by using this formula: Guide Number “GN” / Flash to Subject Distance = F-stop This flash unit will calculate and indicate the Subject Distance by following the above formula. (Please refer to table 1 on the last page) BOUNCE FLASH When you take a photo with flash in a room, sometimes a strong shadow will appear behind the subject If you point the flash head upwards or sideways to reflect the light off the ceiling, wall etc, the subject will be illuminated softly. Press the lock button and adjust the flash head to set the bounce angle. UP: 0°, 60°, 75°, 90° DOWN: 0°,7° RIGHT: 0°, 60°, 75°, 90° LEFT: 0°, 60°, 75°,90°, 120°, 150°, 180° When the bounce flash mode is activated, a bounce indicator will appear on the LCD panel. Choose a white surface for bouncing the flash, otherwise the image’s colour may be incorrect. Depending on the reflecting surface, the subject distance and other factors, the effective distance range for the TTL AUTO may change. Please check for correct exposure confirmation (TTL BL or TTL mark on the LCD panel) after releasing the shutter. CLOSE-UP EXPOSURES Bounce flash can be tilted 7° downward for close-ups. The Flash will be effective only for the subjects will blink. 0.5 meter to 2 meters. When the flash head is tilted 7° CATCH LIGHT PANEL This flash is equipped with a built-in catch light panel, which can create a catch light in eyes of the subject when the bounce flash mode is activated. Slide out the wide panel and catch light panel, and then put wide panel back in its place. (Be careful to slide the panels out smoothly.) ◆ the To create a catch light effectively, tilt the flash head upward 90 degrees and take pictures at a close distance. 10 WIRELESS FLASH When using the “Wireless Flash” mode, you can take pictures with a more three-dimensional feeling with shadow, or you can produce natural images with shadow depending on the flash position without any extension cord connecting the camera body to the flash. In case of the EF-610 DG SUPER NA-iTTL, communication between the camera body and the flash will be achieved by the light of the flash. In the “Wireless Flash” mode, the camera will calculate the correct exposure automatically. ◆ This function is available with CLS compatible cameras only. ◆ If the camera body incorporates Commander mode, it is possible to use its own built-in flash for wireless ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ photography. In these instructions, we call a flash unit, which is attached to the camera body the “Master unit ”, and we call a flash unit at a remote position a “Slave unit”. When setting a slave unit at the desired position, you can use a mini-stand. This mini-stand has a screw hole for a tripod. Place the slave flash unit at the desired location. Do not place the slave unit within the picture area. Set the flash unit within the range of 0.5m/1.5ft~5m/16ft from the subject and set the camera body within the range of 1m/3ft~5m/16ft from the subject. Two or more sets of Slaves can be divided into groups and different flash conditions can be set for each group (1~3). The Master Flash should be set at 0. Channel and group number settings can be input on the master unit and slave units. Other settings can be input on the master flash unit only. Setting the slave unit 1. Attach the flashgun to the camera body and switch “ON” the flash unit. Press the MODE button to select the TTL / / icon. ◆ Setting cannot be done if camera’s exposure display turns off. In such a case, press the camera’s shutter button half-way to re-activate the setting. 2. Press the SEL button to make the channel indicator blink and press the + or – button to set the channel number (from C1- C4). 3. Press the SEL button to make the group number blink and press the + or – button to set the group number. Press the SEL button to confirm. 4. Detach the slave unit from the camera body and place it in the desired position. ◆ In the case of using the built-in flash of a camera body with Commander mode for wireless photography, Group A cameras correspond to Group 1 flashguns and Group B corresponds to Group 2 flashguns. When using the built-in flash unit of the D70 for wireless photography, set the channel number to C3 and group number to 1. For the rest of the settings, refer to your camera’s instruction manual. Please also note that it cannot be used with camera’s command mode AA and M1/128. Setting the Master Unit Setting the channel number on the master flash unit 1. Attach the flashgun to the camera body, and switch “ON” the flash unit. icon. Confirm the icon is Press the MODE button to select the shown in the display. 2. Press the SEL button to make the channel indicator blink on the display. 3. Press the + or – button to set the desired channel number. (Choose the same channel number as set on the slave flash unit.) 4. Press the SEL button several times until the display stops blinking. Setting the flash mode on the master flash unit 5. Press the + or – button and select (Master) 6. Press the SEL button and confirm icon is blinking. (If you do not want to fire master unit, press the + or – button and select icon. Press the SEL button to confirm this setting). 7. Press the SEL button again. 8. Press the MODE button and select TTL, M or MULTI and then press the SEL button to confirm. 9. If TTL is selected, icon will blink and you can set the exposure compensation. If no compensation is required press the SEL button to complete the setup. If compensation is required press the + or – button to 11 set the required amount, then press the SEL button to set compensation. If M mode is selected, press the + or – button to set the flash output amount. If MULTI is selected, exposure will switch to Multi Flash Mode. Setting the Flash Mode on the slave flash unit The following has to be programmed into the master unit. This will set the mode for the slave unit. 10. Press the + or – button and select a slave group number. 11. Press the SEL button so the flash symbol blinks and press the + or – button to select icon. 12. Continue from step 7 above. ◆ If you wish to fire two or more sets of slaves in different flash modes, use desired settings for each group number. ◆ If you set the Master or Slave to MULTI, all groups must be set to MULTI. Combinations with other flash modes are not possible. ◆ If the Master or Slave is changed from MULTI to TTL or M, other groups will be changed to TTL or M. However, if the exposure compensation or flash output level returns to the initial value, it will be necessary to set them up again. 13. Check that all flashguns are fully charged. ◆ Confirm that the Master unit’s “Ready Light” is on and the Slave unit’s “AF Auxiliary Light” is blinking. ◆ Standard TTL will be displayed regardless of the selected flash mode. Modeling flash when Wireless flash is used If master unit is used for modeling flash After wireless flash has been set, modeling flash can be used by pressing the TEST button. If slave unit is used for modeling flash 1. When Wireless Flash setup is complete, press the + or – button on the master to select icon. 2. Press the SEL button several times to display (blinking) on the LCD display. 3. Press the + or – button to select and press the SEL button to confirm. 4. By pressing the TEST button only the selected flashgun will fire in modeling mode. ◆If you wish to select the master unit as the modeling flash, follow the above steps, but in step 3 select and erase from display. SLAVE FLASH NORMAL SLAVE FLASH Even if the EF-610 DG SUPER is not attached to the camera body, you can fire the flash by using the camera’s built-in flash or another flash unit. 1. Attach the flash unit to the camera’s hot shoe. 2. Set the camera’s exposure mode to the desired mode. If you use A or M mode, also set the desired aperture value. 3. Turn on the flash unit and press the shutter button half way. ◆ Now, the aperture value and film speed are automatically transmitted to the flash unit. 4. Remove the flash unit from the camera. 5. Press the MODE button and select the / (Slave) mode. 6. Press the SEL button several times to make the flash output value indicator blink. 7. Press the + or – button to set the flash output amount. ◆ Determine the appropriate flash output by setting the distance indicator on the LCD panel to coincide as closely as possible with the actual distance from the slave flash to the subject. If the actual distance is out of range, you will need to change the aperture value or film speed. 1. To change the aperture value: When the flash unit is set to the Slave mode, press the SEL button until the aperture value blinks, then press the + or – button to set the desired aperture value. Then press the SEL button to stop the display blinking. 2. To change the film speed: Press MODE to select ISO, then press SEL to make the aperture value blink. Press the + or – button and set the desired film speed, then press the SEL button once again. You will need to press the MODE button several times to return to the slave mode. 8. Press the SEL button several times to make the display stop blinking. 12 9. Place the slave unit in the desired location. Do not place the slave unit within the picture area. 10. After confirming that all flash units are fully charged, press the shutter button to take the picture. ◆ When the EF-610 DG SUPER NA-iTTL is fully charged, the AF Auxiliary Light will blink. ◆ The flash will not fire if the EF-610 DG SUPER is attached to the camera body whilst in Slave Mode setting. ◆ If you are using a Nikon brand flash unit with (3-D) Multi-Sensor BL function on your camera, and the EF-610 DG SUPER NA-iTTL flash unit as a slave unit, please do not use (3-D) Multi-Sensor BL function, as the monitor pre-flash may cause the slave to fire prematurely. DESIGNATED SLAVE FLASH If using two or more EF-610 DG Super flash units, you can designate which flash will fire together by using the channel settings. In this mode, one flash unit will be used as the Slave Controller and the others for firing as Slaves. Setting the Slave Flash unit(s) for firing 1. Attach the slave unit to the camera body. 2. Set the camera’s exposure mode to S or M. 3. Set the shutter speed to 1/30 or slower. (The slave controller unit (Master Flash) will transmit the designated signal before the others fire. Thus if you use a shutter speed faster than 1/30, the firing flash units will not be synchronized.) 4. Switch “ON” the flash unit and press the camera’s shutter button halfway. (The aperture value and film speed are now automatically transmitted to the slave flash unit.) 5. Remove the slave flash unit from the camera. 6. Press the MODE button and select the / . (Slave Mode) 7. Press the SEL button to make the channel display indicator blink. 8. Press the + or – button to set the channel number. (C1 or C2) 9. Press the SEL button to make the output amount display indicator of the flash blink. 10. Press the + or – button to set the flash output amount. ◆ Set the flash power by setting the distance indicator on the LCD panel to coincide as closely as possible with the actual distance from the slave flash to the subject. If the actual distance is out of range, you need to change the aperture value. 11. Press the SEL button several times to make the display stop blinking. 12. Place the slave unit in the desired location. Do not place the slave unit within the picture area. Setting for Slave Controller unit 13. Attach the Slave Controller flash unit to the camera body. / (Slave Mode). 14. Press the MODE button and select the 15. Press the SEL button to make the channel display indicator blink. 16. Press the + or – button to set the same channel number as that set on the firing flash unit. 17. Press the SEL button to make the flash output amount display indicator blink. 18. Press the + button so the mark is displayed and blinking. 19. Press the SEL button twice to make the display stop blinking. 20. After confirming that all flash units are fully charged, press the shutter button to take the picture. ◆ When the firing flash unit of EF-610 DG Super is fully charged, the AF Auxiliary Light will blink. ◆ As the slave control using is in mode, the aperture on the slave control unit can not be changed. ◆ The Slave Controller unit functions only to control the slave unit. 13 SPECIFICATIONS TYPE : Clip-on type serial-controlled TTL auto zoom electric flash GUIDE NUMBER : 61 (ISO 100/m, 105mm head position) POWER SOURCE : Four AA type alkaline batteries or, Four AA type Ni-Cd batteries or, Four AA type Ni-MH Nickel-Metal Hydride RECYCLING TIME : about 7.0 sec. (Alkaline batteries) : about 5.0 sec. (Ni-Cd, Ni-MH Nickel-Metal Hydride) NUMBER OF FLASHES : about 120 flashes (Alkaline batteries) : about 160 flashes (Ni-Cd, Ni-MH Nickel-Metal Hydride) FLASH DURATION : about 1 / 700 sec. (full power firing) FLASH ILLUMINATE ANGLE : 24mm-105mm motor powered control (17mm with Built-in Wide Panel) AUTO POWER OFF : Available WEIGHT : 330 g / 11.6oz. DIMENSIONS : 77mm(W) / 3.0in. x 139mm(H) / 5.5in. x 117mm(L) / 4.6in. Disposal of Electric and Electronic Equipment in Private Households Disposal of used Electrical & Electronic Equipment (Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems) This symbol on the product, in the manual/warranty, and/or on the packaging indicates that this product must not be treated as household waste. Instead it should be handed over to the appropriate collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic equipment. If your equipment contains easy removable batteries, please dispose of these separately according to your local legislation. It is your responsibility to ensure that this product is recycled correctly. In doing so you will help conserve natural resources, protect the environment and human health. For more detailed information about recycling this product, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the product. 14 [Table1] GN (ISO100・m 17mm 23.0 16.3 11.5 8.1 5.8 4.1 2.9 2.1 1/1 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/16 1/32 1/64 1/128 [Table 2] GN 1/125 1/160 1/180 1/250 1/320 1/350 1/400 1/500 1/640 1/750 1/800 1/1000 1/1250 1/1500 1/1600 1/2000 1/2500 1/3000 1/3200 1/4000 1/5000 1/6000 1/6400 1/8000 24mm 34.0 24.0 17.0 12.0 8.5 6.0 4.3 3.0 28mm 35.0 24.7 17.5 12.4 8.8 6.2 4.4 3.1 35mm 36.0 25.5 18.0 12.7 9.0 6.4 4.5 3.2 50mm 46.0 32.5 23.0 16.3 11.5 8.1 5.8 4.1 70mm 52.0 36.8 26.0 18.4 13.0 9.2 6.5 4.7 85mm 56.0 39.6 28.0 19.8 14.0 9.9 7.0 5.0 105mm 61.0 43.1 30.5 21.6 15.3 10.8 7.6 5.5 28mm 24.7 21.9 20.6 17.5 15.5 13.8 14.8 12.4 10.9 10.1 9.8 8.8 7.8 7.1 6.9 6.2 5.5 5.1 4.9 4.4 3.9 3.6 3.5 3.1 35mm 25.5 22.5 21.2 18.0 15.9 14.2 15.2 12.7 11.3 10.4 10.1 9.0 8.0 7.3 7.1 6.4 5.7 5.2 5.0 4.5 4.0 3.7 3.6 3.2 50mm 32.5 28.8 27.1 23.0 20.3 18.2 19.4 16.3 14.4 13.3 12.9 11.5 10.3 9.4 9.1 8.1 7.3 6.6 6.4 5.8 5.1 4.7 4.5 4.1 70mm 36.8 32.5 30.6 26.0 23.0 20.6 22.0 18.4 16.3 15.0 14.5 13.0 11.6 10.6 10.3 9.2 8.2 7.5 7.3 6.5 5.8 5.3 5.1 4.6 85mm 39.6 35.0 33.0 28.0 24.7 22.1 23.7 19.8 17.5 16.2 15.7 14.0 12.5 11.4 11.1 9.9 8.9 8.1 7.8 7.0 6.3 5.7 5.5 4.9 105mm 43.1 38.1 35.9 30.5 27.0 24.1 25.8 21.6 19.1 17.6 17.1 15.3 13.6 12.5 12.1 10.8 9.6 8.8 8.5 7.6 6.8 6.2 6.0 5.4 ISO100・m 17mm 16.3 14.4 13.6 11.5 10.2 9.1 9.7 8.1 7.2 6.6 6.4 5.8 5.1 4.7 4.5 4.1 3.6 3.3 3.2 2.9 2.6 2.3 2.3 2.0 24mm 24.0 21.3 20.0 17.0 15.0 13.4 14.4 12.0 10.6 9.8 9.5 8.5 7.6 6.9 6.7 6.0 5.4 4.9 4.8 4.3 3.8 3.5 3.4 3.0 [Table 3] MULTI FLASH MODE 1/64 15 1～3 Hz 1～90 1～3 Hz 1～60 1 Hz 1～14 4～5 Hz 1～80 4～5 Hz 1～50 2 Hz 1～7 6～7 Hz 1～70 6 Hz 1～30 3 Hz 1～6 8～9 Hz 1～50 7～9 Hz 1～20 4～7 Hz 1～5 10 Hz 1～45 10～19 Hz 1～15 8～9 Hz 1～4 11～14 Hz 1～35 20～100 Hz 1～12 10～100 Hz 1～3 15～19 Hz 1～30 1 Hz 1～30 1 Hz 1～4 20～50 Hz 1～25 2 Hz 1～20 2 Hz 1～3 60～100 Hz 1～20 3 Hz 1～10 3～100 Hz 1～2 4～100 Hz 1～6 1/32 1/16 1/8 1/4 F18S10091 ELECTRONIC FLASH EF-610 DG SUPER INSTRUCTIONS SA-STTL 0 1 3 5 6 2 7 4 8 9 10 11 13 14 15 18 19 20 17 16 12 ENGLISH The CE Mark is a Directive conformity mark of the European Community (EC). 1 21 ENGLISH Thank you very much for purchasing the Sigma EF-610 DG SUPER SA-STTL Electronic Flash. This product is specifically developed for the Sigma SA, SD series autofocus SLR cameras. Depending on the camera model, functions and operation may vary. Please read this instruction booklet carefully for your camera body. To add to your enjoyment of photography, the flash has a variety of features. To make the most of all these features and to get the maximum performance and enjoyment from your flash, please read this instruction booklet together with your camera’s instruction manual before using the flash, and also keep it handy for your future reference. PRECAUTIONS In order to avoid causing any damage or injury, please read this instruction manual very carefully, paying attention to the cautionary signs below, before using the flash. Please take special note of the two cautionary signs below. Using the product disregarding this warning sign might cause serious injury or Warning !! other dangerous results. Caution !! Using the product disregarding this caution sign might cause injury or damage. Symbol denotes the important points, where warning and caution are required. Symbol contains information regarding the actions that must be avoided. Warning !! This flash contains high voltage circuits. To avoid electric shock or burns, do not attempt to disassemble the flash. If the outside shell of the unit is broken or cracked, do not touch the mechanism inside. Do not fire the flash close to eyes. Otherwise the bright light could damage the eyes. Keep at least 1m/3feet distance between face and the flash unit when taking a picture with flash. Do not touch the synchro terminal of your camera when the flash is attached to the hot shoe. High voltage circuitry could cause an electric shock. Never use your camera in an environment where flammable, burnable, gas, liquids or chemicals, etc, exist. Otherwise it might cause fire or explosion. Caution !! Do not use this flash unit on any camera other than the Sigma SA, SD series cameras, otherwise the flash may damage the circuitry of these cameras. This flash unit is not waterproof. When using the flash and camera in the rain or snow or near water, keep it from getting wet. It is often impractical to repair internal electrical components damaged by water. Never subject the flash and camera to shock, dust, high temperature or humidity. These factors might cause fire or malfunctioning of your equipment. When the flash is subjected to sudden temperature change, as when the flash unit is brought from a cold exterior to warm interior, condensation might form inside. In such a case, place your equipment in a sealed plastic bag before such a change, and do not use the flash unit until it reaches room temperature. Do not store your flash in a drawer or cupboard etc. containing naphthalene, camphor or other insecticides. These chemicals will have a negative effects on the flash unit. Do not use a thinner, Benzene or other cleaning agents to remove dirt or finger prints from the component. Clean with a soft, moistened cloth. For extended storage, choose a cool dry place, preferably with good ventilation. It is recommended that the flash be charged and fired several times a month, to maintain proper capacitor functioning. 2 DESCRIPTION OF THE PARTS EXTERNAL PARTS 1.Flash Head 2.AF Auxiliary Light 3.Bounce Angle; Up and Down 4.Bounce Angle; Right and Left 5.Bounce Lock and Release Button; Up and Down 6.Swivel Lock and Release Button; Right and Left 7.LCD Panel 8.Battery Cover 9.Shoe Ring 10.Shoe 11.Catch Light Panel 12.Wide Panel CONTROLS 13.MODE Button 14.SEL SELECT Button 15. + Increment Button 16. - Decrement Button 17.ZOOM Button 18.TEST Button 19.LIGHT Button 20.Ready Light 21.Power Switch ABOUT THE BATTERY This flash unit uses four “AA” type Alkaline dry cell batteries, Ni-Cad or Ni-MH rechargeable batteries. Manganese batteries can also be used but as they have a shorter life than Alkaline batteries, we do not recommend using them. Please replace batteries if it takes more than 30seconds to light the Ready Lamp. ■ To assure proper electrical contact, clean the battery terminals before installing the batteries. ■ NiCad batteries do not have standardized contacts. If you use NiCad batteries, please confirm that the battery contacts touch the battery compartment properly. ■ To prevent battery explosion, leakage or overheating, use four new AA batteries of the same type and brand. Do not mix the type or new and used batteries. ■ Do not disassemble or short-circuit the batteries, or expose them fire or water; they may explode. Do not recharge the batteries other than Ni-Cd or Ni-MH rechargeable batteries. ■ When the flash will not be used for an extended period of time, remove the batteries from the flash to avoid the possibility of damage from leakage. ■ Battery performance decreases at low temperatures. Keep batteries insulated when using the flash in cold weather. ■ As with any flash, it is recommended you carry spare batteries when on a long trip or when photographing outdoors in cold weather. BATTERY LOADING 1. Be sure to set the Power Switch to the off position then slide the battery cover in the direction of the arrow to open. 2. Insert four AA size batteries into the battery chamber. Be sure the + and – ends of the batteries are aligned according to the diagram in the chamber. 3. Close the cover. 4. Slide the Power Switch to the ON position. After few seconds the Ready Lamp will light, indicating that the flash unit can be fired. 5. Please press the “Test Button” to be sure that the flash is working properly. AUTO POWER OFF To conserve battery power, the flash unit automatically turns itself off when the flash is not used within approximately 5 minutes. To turn the flash on again, depress the TEST button or the camera shutter button halfway. Please note that the “Auto Power Off” mechanism does not work with wireless TTL flash mode, normal slave flash, and designated slave flash modes. ERROR INDICATION If the battery power is not sufficient or there is an electric information error between the camera and flash unit, the “Er” mark will blink on the LCD panel. When this occurs, turn the power switch off and on. If it still blinks after this procedure, check the battery power. 3 ADJUSTING THE FLASH HEAD Depress the Bounce “Up and Down” Lock and Release Button, and adjust the flash head to the desired position. ■ If appears on the LCD panel when you turn on the flash, and if this mark blinks, then the flash head is adjusted to an incorrect position. ATTACHING AND REMOVING THE FLASH TO AND FROM THE CAMERA Be sure to turn off the Power Switch, Then insert the Shoe Base into the hot shoe on the camera and turn the Shoe Locking Ring until it is tight. ■ When you attach or remove the flash, grasp the bottom of the flash to prevent damage to the shoe foot and the camera’s hot shoe. ■ If the camera’s built-in flash is set in up position, please close it before you attach the flash unit. ■ To remove the flash, rotate the shoe-locking ring in the opposite direction of ◄LOCK mark, until it stops. SETTING OF FLASH COVERAGE ANGLE When you press the ZOOM button, the symbol appears. Each time you press the ZOOM button, the LCD panel display will change and indicate the zoom position in sequence as follows. 24mm → 28mm → 35mm → 50mm → 70mm → 85mm → 105mm → (Auto) Generally, in the TTL mode, the flash will automatically set the zoom position according to the focal length of your lens. ■ When you turn on the main switch, the flash will memorize and set the zoom head position to the last setting used. ■ If you use a lens wider than the flash head setting, there may be under exposed areas around the edge of the picture. ■ Depending on the flash head setting, the flash’s Guide Number will be changed. In the case of use with Sigma SD9 SD10 SD14 SD15 Due to the size of the camera’s image sensor, when the coverage angle of the flash is set to auto zoom, coverage angle can effectively reach that of 17mm wide focal length, without using the wide panel, (However, the coverage angle display of the flash will not show wider than 24mm). When the wide panel is used, 10mm focal length can be covered. (However, the coverage angle display on the flash will show 17mm.) When "Manual Flash photography" or "FP Flash photography" is performed, the flash’s coverage angle can be set automatically by the flash’s autozoom function. However, when used with the camera, the effective range of the flash’s light can be extended by increasing the zoom setting of the flash to be equal to the effective focal length of the lens being used by using the ZOOM button. Please refer to the following table as a guide in setting the flash to the appropriate zoom setting. Please use this table in conjunction with Table 1 (“Guide Number Table for Manual Flash”) on the last page of this instruction manual, and Table 2 (“Guide Number Table for FP Flash”). Lens’ Focal Length 10-13mm Flash Coverage Angle 17mm (given on the tables 1,2) withwide panel 14-15mm 16-19mm 20-29mm 30-39mm 40-49mm 50-59mm 60mm 24mm 28mm 35mm 50mm 70mm 85mm 105mm 4 WIDE PANEL This flashgun is equipped with a built-in wide panel, which can provide an ultra wide 17mm angle of coverage. Slide out the wide panel and catch light panel and flip it down to cover the flash’s head. (Be careful to slide the panels out smoothly.) Then put the catch light panel back in its place. The coverage angle setting of the flash will be set to 17mm automatically. ◆ If the built-in wide panel comes off accidentally, the ZOOM button will not function. In this case please contact the store where the flash was purchased or a Sigma service station. LCD PANEL ILLUMINATION When you press the LIGHT button, the LCD panel will illuminate for about 8 seconds. The illumination stays on longer than 8 seconds if you press the LIGHT button once again. TTL AUTO FLASH In the TTL AUTO Mode, the camera will control the amount of flash lighting to provide the appropriate exposure for the subject. 1. Set the camera’s exposure mode to P Mode. (In the case of SA-300, SA-300N and SA-5 set to “ ” fully automatic mode) 2. Turn on the power switch of the flash, the TTL mark will appear on the LCD panel and flash will start charging. (If TTL mark does not appear, depress the MODE button several times to select the TTL mode). 3. Focus on your subject. 4. Check that the subject is located within the effective distance range, indicated on the LCD panel. 5. Press the shutter button, after the flash is fully charged. When the flash is fully charged, the ready light in the viewfinder, and appears on the flash unit. ■ The TTL exposure is controlled by the S-TTL system of the digital camera. If the flash is set to TTL, the character "d" (digital) will be displayed on the LCD panel. ■ When the camera receives the appropriate exposure, the TTL mark on the LCD panel will appear for 5 seconds. If this indication does not appear, the flash illumination is not enough for that situation. Please re-take the picture, at a closer distance. ■ The AF Auxiliary Light will turn on automatically as you focus on a subject in a dark area. The effective range of the AF Auxiliary Light is up to about 0.7meter to 9 meters (2.3-29.5 feet). ” fully automatic mode, Flash will ■ If the SA-300, SA-300N and SA-5 cameras, are set to “ automatically switch to TTL mode only. For other camera exposure modes, the flash will be set to the last chosen mode each time. ■ When the flash is fully charged, the flash mark will appear in the finder. If the shutter is released before the flash is fully charged, the flash will not fire, and the camera will take the picture at a slow shutter speed. 5 USING FLASH IN OTHER CAMERA MODES Shutter Speed Priority Setting By selecting the S mode of the camera, you can set the shutter speed from 30sec. to 1/X sync speed. When you set the desired shutter speed, the camera will select the appropriate aperture value for the background. If the subject is too light or too dark, the aperture value indicator will blink and show the limit values (maximum or minimum aperture). In such as case, the camera proceeds to a take a flash photograph at the limit value. Thus, the main subject in the picture should may be exposed correctly, but the background may become under or over exposed. Aperture Priority Setting By selecting the A mode of your camera, the camera will select the appropriate shutter speed for the scene. If the subject is too bright or too dark, the shutter speed indicator will blink and show the limit (highest or slowest shutter speed) value. The highest shutter speed will be limited to the camera’s normal flash synchronization speed. In such a case, the camera proceeds to take a flash photograph at the limit value. Thus, the main subject in a picture should be exposed correctly, but the background may become under or overexposed. When used with M Mode You can set the desired shutter speed and aperture value. You can set the shutter speed from top sync speed to bulb. If you adjust the exposure according to the exposure meter indication, the camera will work as for Daylight synchronization flash or slow, synchronization. ■ In the case of use with SD9, SD10, depending on the ISO setting, shutter speed will change to slow shutter speed side. For more detailed information, please refer to Exposure Mode selection. LIMITS OF CONTINUOUS SHOOTING To prevent overheating of the flashgun’s circuitry, do not use your flash unit for at least 10 minutes after continuously firing the flash for the number of exposures shown in the table below. Mode TTL, M(1/1,1/2) M(1/4, 1/8) M(1/16-1/32) Multi Number of Flash Exposures 20 Continuous Flash Shots 25 Continuous Flash Shots 40 Continuous Flash Shots 10 Cycle MANUAL FLASH OPERATION Manual flash is provided for shooting subjects when the correct exposure is difficult to obtain in the TTL mode. In the manual flash mode, you can set the flash power level from 1/1 (full) to 1/128 power in one step increments. 1. Set the camera’s exposure mode to M. 2. Press the MODE button on the flash unit to select M. 3. The flash power output value blinks when you press the SEL button. 4. Press + or – button to set the desired flash power output. 5. The manual flash output display will stop blinking and remain displayed after you press the SEL button again. 6. Adjust the focusing by pressing the shutter button, note the subject distance on the focus ring on the lens. Then adjust the lens’ aperture value or flash power level until the distance indicated on the LCD panel of the flashgun is equal to the subject distance. 7. When the Ready Light of the flash is illuminated, the unit is ready for use. ■ You can calculate the correct exposure by using the following formula: Guide Number “GN” / Flash to Subject Distance = F-stop This flash unit will automatically calculate and indicate the appropriate subject distance according to the above formula.(Please refer to table1 on the last page) 6 FP FLASH (Except SA-300) When you take a picture with an ordinary flash, you cannot use a shutter speed faster than the camera’s synchronized speed because the flash must fire when the shutter curtain is fully open. The FP flash keeps firing, while the shutter curtain is running. Thus you can use a shutter speed faster than the synchronized speed. 1. Set the camera’s exposure mode to M mode. 2. Press the MODE button on the flash unit, to select the M. 3. Press the + or – button and make the indicate indicator appear on the LCD panel. 4. Set the shutter speed. 5. Read-out the subject distance from the focus ring on the lens. Then, adjust the aperture value until the distance indicated on the LCD panel of the flash matches the subject distance on the lens as closely as possible. 6. When the Ready Light of the flash is illuminated, the unit is ready for use. ■ Depending on the shutter speed, the Guide Number will be changed.(Please refer to table2 on the last page) ■ When you use the FP flash, do not use the Wide Panel. ■ You cannot set the Second Curtain Synchronization while the flash unit is set on FP Flash ■ If you want to cancel the FP Flash mode, please follow the FP flash procedure to make the indicator display from the LCD panel. SECOND CURTAIN SYNCHRONIZATION When you photograph a moving subject with slow synchronization, usually the furrow of the subject will be exposed in front of the subject. The ordinary flash light will fire when the first shutter curtain is fully opened, thus the subject will be exposed from the time flash is fired to the time the shutter is closed (This is called First Curtain Synchronization). When you use second curtain synchronization, the flash will fire just before the second curtain begins to close and and the subject will be exposed by ambient light from the time the shutter opens until the flash fires. The furrow of the subject will therefore be exposed behind the subject. This is a more natural effect. 1. Set the desired picture-taking mode of the camera. 2. Select the Mode of the flash. (TTL, M modes. SD9, SD10 SD14 and SD15 can be used in M mode only) mark will be displayed on the LCD 3. Press + or – button panel. 4. Adjust the focus and take the picture after confirming the ready light is lit. mark is not displayed. ■ First curtain synchronization will be set if ■ In the Full Auto Mode “ ” of SA-300, SA-300N, SA-5 cameras, this function cannot be used. mark on the LCD panel. ■ To cancel second curtain synchronization, turn off the RED-EYE REDUCTION When you take a picture with flash, sometimes the person’s eyes reflect the flashlight and will exhibit “red-eye” in the picture. If you use the function of “Red-eye reduction”, the flash will blink approximately 1 second before the shutter is released, and reduce the “red-eye”. 1. Press the MODE Select the mode of the flash(TTL, M modes) 2. Press + or – , button and make mark displayed on the LCD panel. 3. Adjust the focus, and take the picture after confirming the ready light is lit. ■ To cancel the “Red-eye reduction” turn of the mark. ■ In the Full Auto Mode “ ” of SA-300, SA-300N, SA-5 cameras, this function cannot be used. 7 MODELING FLASH If useing the Modeling flash, you can check the lighting and shadow effects before taking the picture. 1. Press the MODE button and select the mode. 2. Press the + button or – button several times to make the appear. 3. Confirm that the flash is charged, then press the TEST button to fire. icon on the LCD panel EXPOSURE COMPENSATION You can use flash exposure compensation in combination with normal exposure compensation to control the background exposure level. Flash exposure compensation can be set to ±3 stops in 1/3 stop increments (or in 1/2 stop increments with some cameras). 1. Press the MODE button and select the TTL mode. 2. Press the SEL button to make the indicator of mark blink. 3. Press the + button or – button to set the compensation amount. 4. Press the SEL button to make compensation amount indicator stop blinking. 5. Focus on the subject. 6. Check that the subject is within the flash range displayed on the EF 610 DG SUPER SA-STTL’s LCD panel. 7. You can take the picture after confirming that the Ready Light of the flash is illuminated. ■ When you set the exposure compensation on the camera, both the flash power level and background can be compensated. ■ You can use both exposure compensation by flash, and exposure compensation by camera at the same time. MULTI FLASH MODE While the shutter is open, the flash will fire repeatedly. By doing so a series of images of the subject will be exposed in one frame. A bright subject with a dark background shows more effectively in this mode. It is possible to set the firing frequency between 1Hz and 199Hz. Up to 100 flashes can be fired continuously. The maximum number of flashes varies, depending on the flash’s power output and firing frequency settings. (Please refer to table 3 on the last page). 1. Set the camera’s exposure mode to M mode and set the F number. 2. Press the MODE button until the Multi-flash mode appears. 3. Press the SEL button until the flash firing frequency starts to blink. 4. Press the + or – button to set the desired flash frequency value. 5. After pressing the SEL button again, the flash power level will blink. 6. Press the + or – button to set the desired power level. 7. Press the SEL button again, the number of flashes will blink. 8. Press the + or – button to set the desired number of flashes. 9. Press the SEL button again, the display will stop blinking. 10. When the ready light of the flash is illuminated, the unit is ready to use. Note: Please set the shutter speed longer than; Number of Flashes you want ÷ Firing Frequency 8 BOUNCE FLASH When you take a photo with flash in a room, sometimes a strong shadow will appear behind the subject, if you point the flash head upwards or sideways to reflect the light off the ceiling, wall etc. the subject will be illuminated softly. Press the lock button and adjust the flash head to set the bounce angle. UP: 0°, 60°, 75°, 90° DOWN: 0°,7° RIGHT: 0°, 60°, 75°, 90° LEFT: 0°, 60°, 75°,90°, 120°, 150°, 180° When the bounce flash mode is activated, a bounce indicator will appear on the LCD panel. Choose a white surface for bouncing the flash, otherwise the image’s colour may be incorrect. Depending on the reflecting surface, the subject distance and other factors, the effective distance range for the TTL AUTO may change. Please check for correct exposure confirmation (TTL mark on the LCD panel) after releasing the shutter. CLOSE-UP EXPOSURES Bounce flash can be tilted 7° downward for close-ups. The Flash will be effective only for the subjects 0.5 meter to 2 meters. When the flash head is tilted 7°, will blink. CATCH LIGHT PANEL This flash is equipped with a built-in catch light panel, which can create a catch light in the eyes of the subject when the bounce flash mode is activated. Slide out the wide panel and catch light panel, and then put wide panel back in its place. (Be careful to slide the panels out smoothly.) ◆ To create a catch light effectively, tilt the flash head upward 90 degrees and take pictures at a close distance. WIRELESS FLASH (Except SD9) When using the “Wireless Flash” mode, you can take pictures with a more three-dimensional feeling, or make natural images by using shadowing depending on the flash position. This can be done without any extension cord connecting the camera body and flash. In case of the EF-610 DG SUPER, communication between the camera body and the flash will be achieved by the light produced by the flash. In the “Wireless Flash” mode, the camera will calculate the correct exposure automatically. CONTROL SYSTEM CHANGE Control System of “Wireless Flash” is different for each camera. First it is necessary to attach the flashgun to the camera for activating the control system. If this operation is neglected, wireless function may not work when flashgun is separated from the camera. 1. Attach the flashgun to the camera and turn on the power switch of the flashgun and camera. 2. Press the shutter button of camera halfway. (The camera and flashgun communicate and control system will be switched automatically.) 3. Turn off the power switch of the flashgun and camera. 9 WHEN BUILT-IN FLASH IS USED (SA-7, SA-9 SD14 AND SD15) 1. Press the MODE button to select the mark. 2. Press the SEL button to make the channel indicator blink. 3. Press the + button or – button to set the channel. 4. Press the SEL button to stop the indicator blinking. 5. Place the EF-610 DG SUPER SA-STTL at the desired position. ■ Do not place the flash unit within the picture area. ■ Please be set the flash unit between 0.5m～5m (1.6 ~16ft) from the subject, and set the camera body between 1m～5m (1.6~16ft) from the subject. ■ Be sure to set the camera’s flash mode to “Wireless Flash Mode”, and set the channel number on the EF-610 DG SUPER SA-STTL Flash unit to the same channel number as that you set on the camera. Otherwise, the EF-610 DG SUPER SA-STTL and your camera will not communicate with each other and the EF-610 DG SUPER SA-STTL will not fire, when you take picture. 6. Pop-up the camera’s built-in flash, and then after both flashes are fully charged, press the shutter button to take the picture. ■ AF Auxiliary Light on the EF-610 DG SUPER SA-STTL will blink, when the flash unit charged and is ready to fire. ■ The EF-610 DG SUPER SA-STTL will fire when the built-in flash fires. The camera’s built-in flash is fired only to control the EF-610 DG SUPER SA-STTL only. The flash lighting of the subject is done by the EF-610 DG SUPER SA-STTL. The camera will control the flash power level, as a TTL mode flash, to Obtain correct exposure. CAMERAS NOT EQUIPPED WITH BUILT-IN FLASH USED (SD10) For Wireless flash two pieces of EF-610 DG SUPER SA-STTL will be necessary. In this instruction, we call a flash unit, which is attached to the camera body “Master unit”, and we call a flash unit at a remote position “Slave unit”. Master unit Setting 1. Attach the flash unit to the camera. ⁄ mark. 2. Press the MODE button to select 3. Press SEL button, to make the channel indicator blink on the display. 4. Press + or – button to set the desired channel number. 5. Press the SEL button several times until the display stops blinking. Slave unit Setting 6. Press the MODE button to select . 7. Press SEL button, to make the channel indicator blink, on the display. 8. Press + or – button to choose the same channel number as set on the Master unit. 9. Press the SEL button several times until the indicator stops blinking. 10. Place the Slave unit at the desired position. 11. Check that both flashes are fully charged. ■ Ready light lamp will light, and the AF Auxiliary lamp will blink to indicate that the flash is ready for shooting. 12. Adjust the focus on the subject, and take the picture. ■ Master unit fires just for controlling the Slave unit, and does not influence photography. ■ When you set a slave unit at the desired position, you can use mini-stand. This mini-stand has a screw hole for a tripod. 10 SLAVE FLASH NORMAL SLAVE FLASH Even if the EF-610 DG SUPER SA-STTL is not attached to the camera body, you can fire the flash by using the camera’s built-in flash or another flash unit. 1. Attach the flash unit to the camera’s hot shoe. 2. Set the camera’s exposure mode to the desired mode. If you use A or M mode, also set the desired aperture value. 3. Turn on the flash unit. Then press the shutter button half way. ■ Now, the aperture value and film speed are automatically transmitted to the flash unit. 4. Remove the flash unit from the camera. / (Slave) 5. Press the MODE button and select the mode. 6. Press the SEL button several times to make the flash output value indicator blink. 7. Press the + or – button to set the flash output amount. ■ Determine the appropriate flash output by setting the distance indicator on the LCD panel to coincide as closely as possible, with the actual distance from the slave flash to the subject. If the actual distance is out of range, you will need to change the aperture value or film speed. ■ You can set the film speed or aperture value on the flash unit manually, if desired. a. For the film speed … Press the MODE to select the ISO, then press the SEL button to make the indicator blink. Press the + button or – button and set the desired film speed, then press the SEL button once again. b. For the aperture value … When the flash unit is set to the Slave mode, press the SEL button to make the indicator for the aperture value blink, and press the + button or – button to set the desired aperture value. Then press the SEL button. 8. Press the SEL button several times to make the display stop blinking. 9. Place the slave unit in the desired location. Do not place the slave unit within the picture area. 10. After confirming that all flash units are fully charged, press the shutter button to take the picture. ■ When using the EF610 DG SUPER SA-STTL flash as the "Slave Controller" (on SD9, SD10, SD14 or SD15 camera) in Normal Slave mode, please set the flash to "Manual" mode, and adjust the light output to 1/16 power. If you set it to TTL mode instead, the Pre-Flash system will function, causing the "Slave" (off-camera) flash unit to fire prematurely. ■ When the EF-610 DG SUPER SA-STTL is fully charged, the AF Auxiliary Light will blink. ■ The flash will not fire if the EF-610 DG SUPER SA-STTL is attached to the camera body while it is in the Slave Mode setting. DESIGNATED SLAVE FLASH If using two or more EF-610 DG SUPER SA-STTL flash units, you can designate which flash will fire together by using the channel settings. In this mode, one flash unit will be used as the Slave Controller and the others for firing as Slaves. Setting the Slave Flash unit(s) for firing 1. Attach the slave unit to the camera body. 2. Set the camera’s exposure mode to S or M. ■ Set the shutter speed to 1/30 or slower. (The slave controller unit (Master Flash) will transmit the designated signal before the others fire. Thus if you use a shutter speed faster than 1/30, the firing flash units will not be synchronized.) 11 3. Switch “ON” the flash unit and press the camera’s shutter button halfway. (The aperture value and film speed are now automatically transmitted to the slave flash unit.) 4. Remove the slave flash unit from the camera. 5. Press the MODE button and select the / . (Slave Mode) 6. Press the SEL button to make the channel display indicator blink. 7. Press the + or – button to set the channel number. (C1 or C2) 8. Press the SEL button to make the output amount ( ) display indicator of the flash blink. 9. Press the + or – button to set the flash output amount. ■ Set the flash power by setting the distance indicator on the LCD panel to coincide as closely as possible with the actual distance from the slave flash to the subject. If the actual distance is out of range, you need to change the aperture value. 10. Press the SEL button several times to make the display stop blinking. 11. Place the slave unit in the desired location. Do not place the slave unit within the picture area. Setting for Slave Controller unit 12. Attach the Slave Controller flash unit to the camera body. 13. Press the MODE button and select the / (Slave Mode). 14. Press the SEL button to make the channel display indicator blink. 15. Press the + or – button to set the same channel number as that set on the firing flash unit. ) display indicator blink. 16. Press the SEL button to make the flash output amount ( 17. Press the SEL button to make the display stop blinking. ( mark disappear and, channel display will appear) 18. After confirming that all flash units are fully charged, press the shutter button to take the picture. ■ When the firing flash unit of EF-610 DG SUPER SA-STTL is fully charged, the AF Auxiliary Light will blink. ■ As the slave control using is in mode, the aperture on the slave control unit can not be changed. ■ The Slave Controller unit functions only to control the slave unit. SPECIFICATIONS TYPE : Clip-on type serial-controlled TTL auto zoom electric flash GUIDE NUMBER : 61 (ISO 100/m, 105mm head position) POWER SOURCE : Four AA type alkaline batteries or Four AA type Ni-Cd batteries or, : Four AA type Ni-MH Nickel-Metal Hydride batteries RECYCLING TIME : about 7.0 sec. (Alkaline batteries) : about 5.0 sec. (Ni-Cd, Ni-MH Nickel-Metal Hydride) NUMBER OF FLASHES : about 120 flashes (Alkaline batteries) : about 160 flashes (Ni-Cd, Ni-MH Nickel-Metal Hydride) FLASH DURATION : about 1 / 700 sec. (full power firing) FLASH ILLUMINATE ANGLE : 24～105mm motor powered control (17mm with Built-in Wide Panel) AUTO POWER OFF : Available WEIGHT : 330g / 11.6oz. DIMENSIONS : 77mm (W) / 3.0in. x 139mm (H) / 5.5in. x 117mm (L) / 4.6in. 12 [Table1] GN ISO100・m 17mm 24mm 1/1 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/16 1/32 1/64 1/128 23.0 16.3 11.5 8.1 5.8 4.1 2.9 2.1 [Table 2] GN 1/125 1/160 1/180 1/250 1/320 1/350 1/400 1/500 1/640 1/750 1/800 1/1000 1/1250 1/1500 1/1600 1/2000 1/2500 1/3000 1/3200 1/4000 1/5000 1/6000 1/6400 1/8000 34.0 24.0 17.0 12.0 8.5 6.0 4.3 3.0 28mm 35mm 50mm 70mm 85mm 105mm 35.0 24.7 17.5 12.4 8.8 6.2 4.4 3.1 36.0 25.5 18.0 12.7 9.0 6.4 4.5 3.2 46.0 32.5 23.0 16.3 11.5 8.1 5.8 4.1 52.0 36.8 26.0 18.4 13.0 9.2 6.5 4.7 56.0 39.6 28.0 19.8 14.0 9.9 7.0 5.0 61.0 43.1 30.5 21.6 15.3 10.8 7.6 5.5 28mm 24.7 21.9 20.6 17.5 15.5 13.8 14.8 12.4 10.9 10.1 9.8 8.8 7.8 7.1 6.9 6.2 5.5 5.1 4.9 4.4 3.9 3.6 3.5 3.1 35mm 25.5 22.5 21.2 18.0 15.9 14.2 15.2 12.7 11.3 10.4 10.1 9.0 8.0 7.3 7.1 6.4 5.7 5.2 5.0 4.5 4.0 3.7 3.6 3.2 50mm 32.5 28.8 27.1 23.0 20.3 18.2 19.4 16.3 14.4 13.3 12.9 11.5 10.3 9.4 9.1 8.1 7.3 6.6 6.4 5.8 5.1 4.7 4.5 4.1 70mm 36.8 32.5 30.6 26.0 23.0 20.6 22.0 18.4 16.3 15.0 14.5 13.0 11.6 10.6 10.3 9.2 8.2 7.5 7.3 6.5 5.8 5.3 5.1 4.6 85mm 39.6 35.0 33.0 28.0 24.7 22.1 23.7 19.8 17.5 16.2 15.7 14.0 12.5 11.4 11.1 9.9 8.9 8.1 7.8 7.0 6.3 5.7 5.5 4.9 105mm 43.1 38.1 35.9 30.5 27.0 24.1 25.8 21.6 19.1 17.6 17.1 15.3 13.6 12.5 12.1 10.8 9.6 8.8 8.5 7.6 6.8 6.2 6.0 5.4 (ISO100・m 17mm 16.3 14.4 13.6 11.5 10.2 9.1 9.7 8.1 7.2 6.6 6.4 5.8 5.1 4.7 4.5 4.1 3.6 3.3 3.2 2.9 2.6 2.3 2.3 2.0 24mm 24.0 21.3 20.0 17.0 15.0 13.4 14.4 12.0 10.6 9.8 9.5 8.5 7.6 6.9 6.7 6.0 5.4 4.9 4.8 4.3 3.8 3.5 3.4 3.0 [Table 3] MULTI FLASH MODE 1/128 1/64 13 1～5Hz 1～100 1～3 Hz 1～60 1 Hz 1～14 6～7 Hz 1～90 4～5 Hz 1～50 2 Hz 1～7 8～9 Hz 1～80 6 Hz 1～30 3 Hz 1～6 10～11 Hz 1～70 7～9 Hz 1～20 4～7 Hz 1～5 12～14 Hz 1～60 10～19 Hz 1～15 8～9 Hz 1～4 15～19 Hz 1～50 20～199 Hz 1～12 10～199 Hz 1～3 20～199 Hz 1～40 1 Hz 1～30 1 Hz 1～4 1～3 Hz 1～90 2 Hz 1～20 2 Hz 1～3 4～5 Hz 1～80 3 Hz 1～10 3～119 Hz 1～2 6～7 Hz 1～70 4～199 Hz 1～6 8～9 Hz 1～50 10 Hz 1～45 11～14 Hz 1～35 15～19 Hz 1～30 20～50 Hz 1～25 60～199 Hz 1～20 1/32 1/16 1/8 1/4 Disposal of Electric and Electronic Equipment in Private Households ENGLISHsposal of used Electrical & Electronic Equipment (Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems) This symbol on the product, in the manual/warranty, and/or on the packaging indicates that this product must not be treated as household waste. Instead it should be handed over to the appropriate collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic equipment. If your equipment contains easy removable batteries, please dispose of these separately according to your local legislation. It is your responsibility to ensure that this product is recycled correctly. In doing so you will help conserve natural resources, protect the environment and human health. For more detailed information about recycling this product, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the product. 14 F18A10091 ELECTRONIC FLASH EF-610 DG SUPER P 使用明書 INSTRUCTIONS BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG MODE D’EMPLOI INSTRUCCIONES ISTRUZIONI PER L’USO BRUGSANVISNING GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING 用戶手冊 사용 설명서 O O C O O SO - ADI 日本語 ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO DANSK NEDERLANDS 中文 한 어 CC 2~13 14~24 25~36 37~47 48~58 59~69 70~80 81~91 92~102 103~113 114~125 1 3 5 6 2 7 4 8 9 10 11 13 14 15 18 19 20 16 17 12 21 ENGLISH The CE Mark is a Directive conformity mark of the European Community (EC). DEUTSCH Die CE-Kennzeichnung ist eine Konformitätserklärung des Herstellers, die dokumentiert, daß das betreffende Produkt die Anforderungen von EG-Richtlinien einhält. FRANÇAIS Le label CE garantit la conformité aux normes établies par la Communauté Européenne. NEDERLANDS Het CE teken is een aanduiding voor de Europese Gemeenschap (EC). ESPAÑOL El logotipo CE es una directiva de conformidad con la Comunidad Europea (CE). ITALIANO Questo è il marchio di conformità alle direttive della comunità Europea (CE). SVENSKA CE-märket betyder att varan blivit godkänd av EU:s gemensamma kvalitetsnorm. DANSK CE-mærket er i overensstemmelse med de gældende regler i EU. PORTUGUÊS A marca CE garante a conformidade com as normas estabelecidas pela Comunidade Europeia. SIGMA (Deutschland) GmbH Carl-Zeiss-Str. 10/2, D-63322 Rödermark, F.R.GERMANY Verkauf: 01805-90 90 85-0 Service: 01805-90 90 85-85 Fax: 01805-90 90 85-35 1 日本語びマレトロニッフラッュ EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI 買いㄥいいフラッュソニヸ AF ㄟ眼レフメラ使用メラ使用機能や操作方法異使用メラ当箇所選い明書精ㄥフラッュ機能操作扱いㄥ注意理解写真撮影楽い使用メラ明書フラッュ使用方法関目あわ覧い後使い方い見所必保管いあう安全上の注意人的損害や物的損害然う願い表示無視警告内容示注意行使用誤い表示無視び物的損害注意記号記号防扱い誤発生想定警告促内容告禁前目人扱い内容内容告い示内容死亡人い害十重傷負う理解い負う能性想定能性想定内容い警告フラッュ内部高電回路組込解改等絶対いい手触う十注意ㄦいフラッュ人目近害起険性あ撮影特いい目近乳幼児撮影メラホットュヸフラッュ接手触いい高電燃性大気中い感電や火傷万ㄟ落ㄦ等破損場合使用感電ああ場所使用あ内部部品フラッュ発光 1m 以ㄥ離いメラい視力ンロタヸミナルい火災原因注意フラッュソニヸ AF ㄟ眼レフメラ以外メラ電子回路悪影響及ぼ能性あフラッュ防水構注意ㄦい水内部い入込故ホコリ多い場所や高温多湿急激温度変化入場所放置防虫剤フラッュ悪影響ㄨえフラッュ使用行い放置いい性能劣化いうい故や火災原因あ寒い屋外使用温度保管い変色変形等１ヶい誤動作や濡いタンや押入機溶剤拭使用雨天や水辺使用原因フラッュ内部結露生ヸやビニヸル袋入周ンナヸベンン等メラいい室内いい原因１度目安発光テト数回 2 各部の名称 1 ペー 1.発光部 2.AF 補助光発光部 3.ㄥㄦバウン角度表示 4. 右バウン角度表示 5.ㄥㄦバウンロッ解除ボタン 6. 右バウンロッ解除ボタン 7.液晶パネル外観部 8.電池室バヸ 9.リリヸボタン 10. 付ュヸ 11. ャッチラトパネル 12.ワドパネル操作部 13.MODE ボタン 18.TEST ボタン 14.SEL ボタン 15. ＋ボタン 16. －ボタン 17.ZOOM ボタン 19.LIGHT ボタン 20.レデラト 21.電源ッチ電池についフラッュ電源単3形ルリ乾電池ニッル水素電池ニッド電池 4 使用レデラト灯 30 秒以ㄥ電池 4 新い交換い ◆ 電池や電池室バヸ接常いい ◆ 単 3 形ニッル水素電池単 3 形ニッド電池電池側接形状規格統ㄟい使用確認買い求い ◆ 交換 4 同メヸヸ同種類使用い誤使い方液漏発熱破裂等あ ◆ 電池解火中ヷ水中投ㄦョヸト等いい電池破裂液漏や火災原因 ◆ 充電い電池充電いㄦい電池破裂液漏や火災原因 ◆ 撮影済電池出保管い電池入液漏生フラッュ内部損傷あ ◆ 長期間旅行寒冷地撮影大量撮影予備電池 ◆ 寒冷地電池性能極端 ㆯㄦ電池保温使用電池の入電源長期間放置用意いい方ッチ OFF い確認電池室ㄥ持ㄥ開単ㄤ形電池 4 電池室バヸ内面表示従い電池＋－向間えいう入電池室バヸ戻閉電源ッチ ON 充電開始発光能状態充電レデラト灯 TEST ボタン押発光確認バヸ矢方向ラドートパワーフ機構についフラッュヸトパワヸフ機構いい電源ッチ ON 状態約 4 間フラッュ操作い電池消耗防自動的電源 OFF TEST ボタン押メラ体ャッタヸボタン半押再度電源 ON ワヤレフメラフラッュモヸド通常レヸブモヸド指定レヸブモヸドヸトパワヸフ機構働 3 エラー表示につい電池消耗電気信号異常生場合液晶パネル説Er読表示出ラヸ表示出場合電源ッチㄟ OFF 再度 ON い表示消えい場合電池検いあ発光部のセットㄥㄦバウンットロッ ◆ 電源解除ボタン押ッチ ON 滅表示いト発光部面方向マヸ灯面方向ッ液晶パネル場合発光部注意いメラへの取付け方電源ッチ OFF メラホットュヸ込差メラ付加わ ◆ 確認ロッ着脱フラッュㄦ部持行いュヸやメラホットュヸ無理力いう注意い ◆ フラッュいチッュ内蔵状態納外メラ付フラッュ必内蔵フラッいリリヸボタン押外い照射角のセット ZOOM ボタン押表示出ボタン押照射角次う換わ 24mm → 28mm → 35mm → 50mm → 70mm → 85mm → 105mm → 自動通常 TTL モヸドット使用レン焦距離合照射角自動的ット ◆ 電源自動的 ON い ◆ レン焦 ◆ 照射角変わ距離望遠側前回使用数値ドナンバヸ大照射角ットい方ット表示場合面確認四隅変化ワイドパネルについフラッュ通常状態 24mm 角 17mm 広角レン使用ワドパネル+ ャッチラトパネル引出 (強引張いい) ャッチラトパネル元 ㆮ置納い照射角自動的 17mm 角対応ットバヸ 4 ◆ 事故ワドパネル外弊社営業所修理申 ZOOM ボタンい機能購入店液晶パネルの照明 LIGHT ボタン時押更約 8 秒間液晶パネル 8 秒間照明照明照明中再度 LIGHT ボタン押 TTL 撮影 TTL モヸド被写体適露出うメラやレン組合わ組合わ液晶パネル ◆ フラッュ TTL 調光方式 TTL 表示異発光量メラㄦ表制御参照ㄦデタルㄟ眼レフメラ α-7,70,Sweet位,Sweet位L α-9 D レン ADI 調光 DI 調光通常 TTL 調光 D 以外レン DI 調光 DI 調光通常 TTL 調光メラ P モヸドットフラッュ電源ッチ晶パネル出充電始 ON TTL ◆デタルㄟ眼レフメラ使用確認い消灯－ボタン押表示撮影露出合わい場合被写体ピント合わ被写体撮影能範あ充電完了確認い表示以外いメラ液灯い場合＋或いい消灯状態あ液晶パネル距離表示確認ャッタヸボタン押撮影 ◆ フラッュ撮影常行わフラッュ液晶パネル TTL 表示 5 秒間滅滅い光量ㄧ足い被写体近撮影直い ◆ い場所ヸトフヸ作動助 AF 補助光照射効範ヷ約 0.7m～9m ◆ メラ M モヸドットい前回使用モヸドット注意い ◆ 充電完了フンダヸ内フラッュマヸ灯充電完了いいャッタヸフラッュ無状態適露出うロヸャッタヸ注意い ◆ 調光連動距離表示能範超え液晶パネル距離表示バヸ滅各撮影モードのフラッ A モードのき絞任意ット 5 ュ撮影最適ャッタヸ度自動的選フラッュ強制発光 S モードのきャッタヸ度任意ット最適 M モードのきャッタヸ度絞自選ンロ OFF い場合同調 ◆ フラッ ◆ ュフ度絞選ルムㄟ眼レフメラ使用いャッタヸ度選ハピヸド強制発光メラ露出計ンロ行え表示合わ求適露出適性露出ット意的簡単デヸラ露出変化トンいロやロヸ便利連続撮影時の注意連発光加熱劣化防以ㄦ表示回数以ㄦ 10 以ㄥ休いモヸド TTL, M(1/1, 1/2) M(1/4, 1/8) M(1/16～1/32) MULTI 最大連発光回数 20 回 25 回 40 回 10 サルマニュアル発光撮影被写体条件自ル発光量メラ意ボタン TTL 映押撮影モヸド露出意び換わ滅＋或い設定押発光量 SEL ボタン押表示灯ピント合わレン距離目盛適撮影距離ㄟ致充電完了確認撮影 ◆ マニュル発光適露出フラッュ発光量バヸああ様マニュット M MODE ボタン M 選択 SEL ボタン押発光量表示－ボタン面異う方法マニュル発光 1/1～1/64 範設定フラッュㄥ記計算巻［表 1］参照示撮影距離フラッュ液晶パネルㄥ表示うフラッュ発光量絞値変え次計算式割出ドナンバヸ／撮影距離適露出い m ＝絞撮影距離算出値い F 表示ドナン 6 ハイピードンロ撮影 HSS 発光通常フラッュ撮影ャッタヸ幕同調度高ャッタヸ使用発光ャッタヸ走行開始ャッタヸ使用能 ◆デタルㄟ眼レフメラフラッュモヸド M モヸド使用＋或い－ボタン被写体ピント充電完了 ◆ハ光押フラッュ光ハピヸドンロフラッ発光維持同調度終了場合 TTL 撮影時常 MODE ボタン選択表示ュ連高い TTL 表示液晶パネル合わ確認ピヸド到距離い使用全開撮影ン短ロ撮影表示 ◆ 解除フラッュ注意いドナンバヸャッタヸ度変化ドナンバヸ巻［表 2］参照消モデリン発光モデリンテン発光機能バラン MODE ボタン＋或い充電完了使用確認モヸド－ボタンュ撮影被写体影出や多灯発光ラ選択数回押確認フラッ液晶パネル TEST ボタン押表示発光マルチ発光撮影ャッタヸ開いい間フラッュ連発光被写体動１コマ面写真う写込背景被写体明い方効果的発光発光周波数ボタン押び換わ 1～100Hz 範設定発光能回数 90 回い発光量発光周波数変わ発光回数巻［表 3］参照いット任意絞値メラ撮影モヸド M MODE ボタン MULTI 選択 SEL ボタン押発光周波数表示滅＋或い－ボタン押発光周波数設定 SEL ボタン押発光量表示滅＋或い－ボタン押発光量設定 SEL ボタン押発光回数表示滅＋或い－ボタン押発光回数設定 SEL ボタン押表示灯ピント合わ充電完了確認撮影発光回数与発光周波数以ㄥャッタヸ 7 度設定設定い連解マルチ連最大連バウン撮影室内フラッュ撮影壁背景強い影出あフラッュ発光部ㄥ向発光天井射影少い柔写真撮影バウンロッボタン解除回転ㄥ：0°60°75°90° ㄦ：0° 7° 右：0°60°75°90° ：0°60°75°90°120°150°180° 換え出来バウン撮影時液晶パネル表示バウンバウン撮影後射面色写真全体あわ射面状況や撮影距離液晶パネル表示撮影撮影条件う確認白い面調光い選範光わい変化近接撮影発光部ㄦ 7°傾機能被写体ㄦ方 7°バウン近接撮影い面ㄦ部距離約 0.5～2m 以内効表示滅い時十キャッチライトパネルバウン撮影時人物目ャッチラト入ャッチラトパネル内蔵いワドパネル + ャッチラトパネル引出 (強引張いい) ワドパネル元 ㆮ置納い ◆ バウン角度ㄥ方 90° 被写体近い距離撮影効果的ワイヤレ撮影フラッュメラ外置 ㆮ置夫陰影立体感あ写真や自然陰影写真う撮影いメラフラッュコヸド接い多い EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI メラフラッュ信号伝フラッュ光利用行うコヸド撮影ワヤレ発光撮影露出メラ自動的適露出う制御メラ付メラフラッ ◆ ュフフラッュ表記コントロヸラヸ ◆ フラッュメラ離使用ミニタンドㄤ脚用穴い ◆ 面内フラッュ入いう注意い ◆ 被写体メラ約 1m～5m ◆他ヤレ人フラッワあフラッヤレュメラ離置フラッュ約 0.5m～5m 撮影いう場合ュ撮影操作方法付属ミニタンド付便利い信号光他人覧い範内ット使いフラッュうチャンネル設定い発光うワ 8 A. メラの内蔵フラッメラュを信号にす場合ワヤレフラッュモヸドットメラ異メラ使用明書覧いメラ露出モヸドット P,A,S,M いットフラッュボタン数回押フフラッュモヸド表示換えボタン押フメラフラッュ番号 1 設定ボタン押発光モヸド TTL 設定ボタン押チャンネル表示滅或いボタン押チャンネル番号 C1～C4 設定ボタン押表示灯フラッュメラ付メラャッタヸボタン半押メラ側チャンネル番号記憶フラッュメラ外決い ㆮ置ットメラ内蔵フラッュポップップフラッュ充電完了確認 ◆ ワヤレフラッュモヸド AF 補助光滅充電完了知被写体ピント合わ撮影 ◆ メラ内蔵フラッュ発光同時発光メラ内蔵フラッュ EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI 制御発光主撮影 EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI 発光行わ露出制御 TTL モヸド同様被写体適露出う EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI 発光量メラ制御 ◆ ャッタヸ度応通常撮影ワヤレハピヸドンロ撮影自動的換わ ◆ 発光モヸド M 設定場合ワヤレマニュル発光チャンネル設定後或いボタン押発光量ットボタ発光量表示滅ン押表示灯い ◆ 設定方法 B. メラに取付けたフラッュを信号にす場合ワヤレ撮影行う 2 以ㄥ EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI 必要フメラフラッュ側 EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI 使用機能や使用メラ制限あフメラフラッュ使用機種コントロヸラヸコントロヸルモヸド変更必要あㄦ表参照いコントロヸラヸ必 EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI 使用いフメラフラッュ使用機種コントロヸルモヸド使用メラ光量比制御設定発光モヸド 9 EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI + α700, α900 α900 コントロヸラヸフメラフラッュ1 フメラフラッュ 2 最大 3 ルヸプ制御ルヸプ発光禁５段階光量比設定能 TTL 撮影, ハピヸドンロ撮影 TTL, M , マニュル発光コントロヸラヸフメラフラッュ 2 ルヸプ制御コントロヸラヸ：フメラフラッュ割合 1:2 2:1 選択能 TTL 撮影, ハピヸドンロ撮影 TTL B-1. フメラフラッュのみを発光せ場合メラコントローラーの設定メラワヤレフラッュモヸドット ◆ 設定方法メラ異メラ使用明書覧メラ露出モヸドット P,A,S,M いットメラフラッュ付自動ワヤレコントロヸラヸ設定表示換わボタン数回押自動的換わい場合コントロヸラヸ設定表示換えいボタン押コントロヸルモヸド表示滅或いボタン押コントロヸルモヸド設定ボタン押チャンネル表示滅或いボタン押チャンネル番号 C1～C4 設定ボタン押光量比制御モヸド表示 [r OFF/On] 滅或いボタン押 [ ] 設定ボタン押表示灯いフメラフラッュの設定ボタン数回押フメラフラッュ設定表示換えボタン押フメラフラッュ番号 1 設定ボタン押発光モヸド TTL 設定ボタン押チャンネル表示滅或いボタン押コントロヸラヸ同チャンネル番号設定ボタン押表示灯フメラフラッュ決い ㆮ置ット両方フラッュ充電完了確認 ◆ コントロヸラヸ側レデラト灯フメラフラッュ側 AF 補助光充電完了知被写体ピント合わ撮影 B-2.光量比制御撮影をす場合滅コントロールモードメラコントローラーの設定 B-1 手同様設定行い或いボタン押光量比制御モヸド表示 ] 設定 [ ボタン押発光モヸド表示滅或いボタン押発光モヸド TTL 設定ボタン押コントロヸラヸ光量比設定表示 [ ] 滅或いボタン押コントロヸラヸ光量比設定ボタン押フメラフラッュ 1 光量比設定表示 [ ] 或いボタン押フメラフラッュ 1 光量比設定ボタン押フメラフラッュ 2 光量比設定表示 [ ] 或いボタン押フメラフラッュ 2 光量比設定ボタン押表示灯滅滅 10 フメラフラッュの設定 B-1 フメラフラッュ設定同様設定行いフメラフラッュ複数あ場合割当設定い ◆ 光量比設定コントロヸラヸフメラフラッュ 1 以ㄦう設定 (発光禁 ) 1 2 4 8 16 発光量割合設定値 / 合計数値 [例] 設定値 2 コントロヸラヸ 1 フメラフラッュ 1 4 フメラフラッュ 2 い ◆ B-3.光量比制御撮影をす場合フメラフラッュの設定フメラフラッュ EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI 設定同様設定行い ◆ メラフラッメラフラッュ番号ュ2 発光量割合 2/7 1/7 4/7 コントロールモードメラコントローラーの設定 B-1 手同様設定行い或いボタン押コントロヸルモヸド設定ボタン押チャンネル表示滅或いボタン押チャンネル番号設定或いボタン押光量比制御モヸド表示 [ ボタンボタン押光量比表示滅或いボタンボタン押コントロヸラヸ : 選択定ボタン押表示灯 ◆ フフ設定 ] フ場合メラフラッ B-1 フメラフラッュ EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI 場合使用明書当目従設定いフメラフラッュ EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI 場合フュ光量比メラフラッ設ュ EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI チャンネル設定 C1～C3 レーブ発光通常レーブ発光フラッュメラ体離発光 ◆ 通常レヸブ発光メラ側プリ発光誤動作起フラッュメラ付メラ撮影モヸドット 11 メラ内蔵フラッ ADI 調光使用ュや他 DI 調光行わフラッュ組合わ使用同調いフラッュ電源 ON メラャッタヸボタン半押 ◆ ISO 感度絞値フラッュ記憶フラッュメラ外／選択 MODE ボタン SEL ボタン数回押発光量表示滅＋或い－ボタン押発光量設定 ◆あ決いフラッュ設置場所被写体距離フラッュ距離表示ㄟ致う発光量設定ㄟ致い場合絞設定変更い ◆ フラッュ単体 ISO 感度や絞値変更選択 SEL ボタン押表示滅＋或 ◆ ISO 感度 MODE ボタンい－ボタン押数値設定再度 SEL ボタン押表示灯 ◆絞値レヸブ設定状態 SEL ボタン押絞値滅＋或い－ボタン押数値設定再度 SEL ボタン押表示灯 SEL ボタン数回押表示灯フラッュ決い ㆮ置ット面内フラッュいメラ内蔵フラッュメラ付あフラッュュ充電完了確認撮影 ◆ EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI 充電完了 AF 補助光滅知 ◆ レヸブ発光設定状態メラ付連動除付い入い設置う注意あフラッレヸブ発光解フラッ発光用使指定スレーブ発光複数 EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI 使用設定同調発光 1 制御用用チャンネルㄟ致メラ付他ュ発光用フラッュの設定フラッュメラ付メラ撮影モヸド設定 S M モヸド使用 ◆ 指定レヸブモヸド発光前信号送信ャッタヸ度 1／30 以ㄦットいフラッュ電源 ON メラャッタヸボタン半押 ◆ ISO 感度絞値フラッュ記憶フラッュメラ外 MODE ボタン／選択 SEL ボタン押チャンネル表示滅＋或い－ボタン押チャンネル番号設定 C1 C2 いット SEL ボタン押発光量表示滅＋或い－ボタン押発光量設定 ◆あ決いフラッュ設置場所被写体距離フラッュ距離表示ㄟ致う発光量設定ㄟ致い場合絞設定変更い SEL ボタン数回押表示灯 12 フラッュい決い ㆮ置ット面内フラッュ入いう注意制御用フラッュの設定フラッュメラ付前 MODE ボタン／選択 SEL ボタン押チャンネル表示滅＋或い－ボタン押発光用フラッュ同チャンネル番号設定 SEL ボタン押発光量表示滅＋ボタン押表示 SEL ボタン押表示灯フラッュメラ付全フラッュ充電完了確認撮影 ◆ 発光用 EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI 充電完了 AF 補助光滅知選択指定レヸブ発光制御用設定 SEL ボタン押 ◆ 発光量設定絞値設定 ◆ 制御用フラッュ光信号送信用主撮影発光用フラッュ行わ主要諸元形式：リップン式直列制御 TTL ヸトヸムフラッュドナンバヸ：61 ISO 100／m 105mm ㆮ置使用電源：単ㄤ形ルリ乾電池 4 又単ㄤ形ニッド電池 4 単ㄤ形ニッル水素電池 4 充電時間：約 7 秒ルリ乾電池使用約 5 秒ニッド電池又発光回数：約 120 回ルリ乾電池使用約 160 回ニッド電池又ニッル水素電池使用閃光時間：約 1／700 秒フル発光時照射角度：24～105mm 使用レン合わ自動ットワドパネル使用 17mm レン角バヸヸトパワヸフ／ヸトパワヸン：内蔵質量：330g 寸法幅不高不長：77不139不117mm 品質保証保証細ル水素電池使用アフターサービについフタヸサヸビ電話でお問い合わせ・・・携帯電ヷPHS 付時間 : ニッ利用方～金 9:00-18:00 関マ別紙 044-989-7436 土保証規定参照いタマヸサヸビ部フリヸコヸル: 0120-9977-88 び年連絡い年始弊社休業株式会社マ社〒215-8530 奈川県川崎市麻生区栗木 2 ㄠ目 4 番 16 号休い (044) 989-7430 (代) FAX: (044) 989-7451 大阪営業所〒541-0059 大阪市中央区博労 1-7-2 堺筋トラトビル 8F 06(6271)1548 場〒969-3395 福島県耶麻郡磐梯大大谷知坂 6594 0242(73)2771(代) ンタヸネットホヸムペヸ 13 ドレ http://www.sigma-photo.co.jp ENGLISH Thank you very much for purchasing the Sigma EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI Electronic Flash. This product is specifically developed for the SONY AF SLR cameras. Depending on the camera model, functions and operation may vary. Please read this instruction booklet carefully for your camera body. To add to your enjoyment of photography, the flash has a variety of features. To make the most of all these features, and to get the maximum performance and enjoyment from your flash, please read this instruction booklet, together with your camera’s instruction manual, before using the flash, and also keep it handy for your future reference. PRECAUTIONS In order to avoid causing any damage or injury, please read this instruction manual very carefully, paying attention to the cautionary signs below, before using the flash. Please take special note of the two cautionary signs below. Using the product disregarding this warning sign might cause serious injury or Warning !! other dangerous results. Caution !! Using the product disregarding this caution sign might cause injury or damage. Symbol denotes the important points, where warning and caution are required. Symbol contains information regarding the actions that must be avoided. Warning !! This flash contains high voltage circuits. To avoid electric shock or burns, do not attempt to disassemble the flash. If the outside shell of the unit is broken or cracked, do not touch the mechanism inside. Do not fire the flash close to eyes. Otherwise the bright light could damage the eyes. Keep at least 1m/3feet distance between face and the flash unit when taking a picture with flash. Do not touch the synchro terminal of your camera when the flash is attached to the hot shoe. High voltage circuitry could cause an electric shock. Never use your camera in an environment where flammable, burnable, gas, liquids or chemicals, etc, exist. Otherwise it might cause fire or explosion. Caution !! Do not use this flash unit on any camera other than the SONY AF SLR cameras; otherwise the flash may damage the circuitry of these cameras. This flash unit is not waterproof. When using the flash and camera in the rain or snow or near water, keep it from getting wet. It is often impractical to repair internal electrical components damaged by water. Never subject the flash and camera to shock, dust, high temperature or humidity. These factors might cause fire or malfunctioning of your equipment. When the flash is subjected to sudden temperature change, as when the flash unit is brought from a cold exterior to warm interior, condensation might form inside. In such a case, place your equipment in a sealed plastic bag before such a change, and do not use the flash unit until it reaches room temperature. Do not store your flash in a drawer or cupboard etc. containing naphthalene, camphor or other insecticides. These chemicals will have a negative effects on the flash unit. Do not use a thinner, Benzene or other cleaning agents to remove dirt or finger prints from the component. Clean with a soft, moistened cloth. For extended storage, choose a cool dry place, preferably with good ventilation. It is recommended that the flash be charged and fired several times a month, to maintain proper capacitor functioning. 14 DESCRIPTION OF THE PARTS EXTERNAL PARTS CONTROLS 1.Flash Head 2.AF Auxiliary Light 3.Bounce Angle; Up and Down 4.Bounce Angle; Right and Left 5.Bounce Lock and Release Button; Up and Down 6.Swivel Lock and Release Button; Right and Left 7.LCD Panel 8.Battery Cover 9.Release Button 10.Shoe 11.Catch Light Panel 12.Wide Panel 13.MODE Button 14.SEL SELECT Button 15. + Increment Button 16. - Decrement Button 17.ZOOM Button 18.TEST Button 19.LIGHT Button 20.Ready Light 21.Power Switch ABOUT THE BATTERY This flash unit uses four “AA” type Alkaline dry cell batteries, Ni-Cad or Ni-MH rechargeable batteries. Manganese batteries can also be used but as they have a shorter life than Alkaline batteries, we do not recommend using them. Please replace batteries if it takes more than 30seconds to light the Ready Lamp. ◆ To assure proper electrical contact, clean the battery terminals before installing the batteries. ◆ Ni-Cad or Ni-MH batteries do not have standardized contacts. If you use Ni-Cad or Ni-MH batteries, please confirm that the battery contacts touch the battery compartment properly. ◆ To prevent battery explosion, leakage or overheating, use four new AA batteries of the same type and brand. Do not mix the type or new and used batteries. ◆ Do not disassemble or short-circuit the batteries, or expose them fire or water; they may explode. Do not recharge the batteries other than Ni-Cad or Ni-MH rechargeable batteries. ◆ When the flash will not be used for an extended period of time, remove the batteries from the flash to avoid the possibility of damage from leakage. ◆ Battery performance decreases at low temperatures. Keep batteries insulated when using the flash in cold weather. ◆ As with any flash, it is recommended you carry spare batteries when on a long trip or when photographing outdoors in cold weather. BATTERY LOADING 1. Be sure to set the Power Switch to the off position then slide, the battery cover in the direction of the arrow to open. 2. Insert four AA size batteries into the battery chamber. Be sure the + and – ends of the batteries are aligned according to the diagram in the chamber. 3. Close the cover. 4. Slide the Power Switch to the ON position. After few seconds, the Ready Lamp will light, indicating that the flash unit can be fired. 5. Please press the “Test Button” to be sure that the flash is working properly. AUTO POWER OFF To conserve battery power, the flash unit automatically turns itself off when the flash is not used for approximately 240 seconds. To turn the flash on again, depress the “TEST” button, or depress the camera shutter button halfway. Please note that, “Auto Power Off” mechanism does not work with ‘Wireless’ off-camera flash mode, normal slave flash, and designated slave flash modes. ERROR INDICATION If the battery power is not sufficient or there is electric information error between the camera and flash unit, the “Er” mark will blink on the LCD panel. When this occurs, turn the power switch off and on. If it still blinks, after this procedure, check the battery power. 15 ADJUSTING THE FLASH HEAD Depress the Bounce “Up and Down” Lock and Release Button, and adjust the flash head to the desired position. appears on the LCD panel, when you turn on the flash, and if ◆ this mark blinks, then the flash head is adjusted to an incorrect position. ATTACHING AND REMOVING THE FLASH TO AND FROM THE CAMERA Be sure turn off the Power Switch. Then insert the Shoe Base into the hot shoe of the camera until it clicks and locks. ◆ When you attach or remove the flash, grasp the bottom of the flash to prevent damage to the shoe foot and camera’s hot shoe. ◆ If the camera’s built-in flash is set in up position, please close it before you attach the flash unit. When you remove the flash, slide the flash unit out of the camera’s hot shoe, while pressing the release button. SETTING OF FLASH COVERAGE ANGLE When you press the ZOOM button symbol appears. Each time you press the ZOOM button, the LCD panel display will change and indicate the zoom position in sequence, as follows. 24mm → 28mm → 35mm → 50mm → 70mm → 85mm → 105mm → (Auto) Generally, in the TTL mode, the flash will automatically set the zoom position according to the focal length of your lens. ◆ When you turn on the main switch, the flash will memorize and set the zoom head position to the last setting used. ◆ If you use a lens wider than the flash head setting, there may be under exposed areas around the edge of the picture. ◆ Depending on the flash head setting, the flash’s Guide Number will be changed. WIDE PANEL This flashgun is equipped with a built-in wide panel, which can provide an ultra wide 17mm angle of coverage. Slide out the wide panel and catch light panel and flip it down to cover the flash’s head. (Be careful to slide the panels out smoothly.) Then put the catch light panel back in its place. The coverage angle setting of the flash will be set to 17mm automatically. ◆ If the built-in wide panel comes off accidentally, the ZOOM button will not function. In this case please contact the store where the flash was purchased or a Sigma service station. LCD PANEL ILLUMINATION When you press the LIGHT button, the LCD panel will illuminate for about 8 seconds. The illumination stays on longer than 8sec, if you press the LIGHT button once again. 16 TTL AUTO FLASH In the TTL AUTO Mode, the camera will control the amount of flash lighting, to get the appropriate exposure for the subject. ◆ Depending on the camera model and lens combination, TTL Flash procedure varies. Please see the below chart. (In all combinations, TTL will be displayed on the LCD) D-SLR / Maxxum 70, 50, 7, 5, 4, 3 Maxxum 9 Other Camera Models Dynax 7D, 60, 40, 7, 5, 4, 3L Dynax 9 D type Lens ADI metering Pre-flash metering Ordinary TTL metering Non-D type lens Pre-flash metering Pre-flash metering Ordinary TTL metering 1. Set the camera’s exposure mode to P Mode. 2. Turn on the power switch of the flash, the TTL mark will appear on the LCD panel and the flash will start charging. ◆ With D-SLRs, please make sure that indicator is on. If the indicator is off, press the + or – button and make the indicate indicator appear on the LCD panel, otherwise exposure will not be correct. 3. Focus on your subject. 4. Check that the subject is located within the effective flash distance range, indicated on the LCD panel of the flash unit. 5. Press the shutter button, after the flash is fully charged. ◆ When the camera receives the appropriate exposure, the TTL mark on the flash’s LCD panel will appear for 5 seconds. If this indication does not appear, the flash illumination is not sufficient for that situation. Please re-take the picture, at a closer distance. ◆ The AF Auxiliary Light will turn on automatically if you focus on a subject in a dark area. The effective range of the AF Auxiliary Light is up to about 0.7meter to 9meter (2.3-29.5 feet). ◆ Please note that when the camera is set to M mode, the flash will be set to the mode settings last used. ◆ When the flash is fully charged, the flash mark will appear in the camera viewfinder. If the shutter is released before the flash is fully charged, the flash will not fire, and the camera will take the picture at a slow shutter speed as if by ambient light only. USING FLASH IN OTHER CAMERA MODES Shutter Speed Priority Setting When you set the desired shutter speed, the camera will select the appropriate aperture value. You cannot choose shutter a speed faster than the camera’s sync speed. Fill flash is used when this mode is selected. Aperture Priority Setting By selecting the A mode, after you select the desired aperture the camera will set the appropriate shutter speed for the background exposure. Fill flash is used when this mode is selected. When used with M Mode You can set the desired shutter speed and aperture value. You can set the shutter speed from top sync speed to bulb. ◆ The fill flash is used when this mode is selected. ◆ If you adjust the exposure according to the exposure meter indication, the camera will work as for Daylight synchronization flash or slow synchronization. LIMITS OF CONTINUOUS SHOOTING To prevent overheating of the flash’s circuitry, please do not use your Flash unit for at least 10minutes after using the number of flash exposures, shown in the below table have been made in quick succession. 17 Mode TTL, M(1/1,1/2) M(1/4, 1/8) M(1/16-1/32) Multi Number of Flash Exposures 20 Continuous Flash Shots 25 Continuous Flash Shots 40 Continuous Flash Shots 10 Cycle MANUAL FLASH OPERATION Manual flash is provided when shooting the subjects when the correct, Exposure is difficult to obtain in the TTL mode. In the manual flash mode, you can set the flash power level from 1/1 (full) to 1/64 power in one step increments. 1. Set the camera’s exposure mode to M. 2. Press the MODE button on the flash unit to select M. 3. The guide number value blinks when you press the SEL button. 4. Press + or – button to set the desired flash power output. 5. The manual flash output display will stop blinking and remain displayed after you press the SEL button again. 6. Adjust the focusing by pressing the shutter button, read-out subject distance from the focus ring on the lens. Then, adjust the F-stop or flash power, until the distance indicated on the LCD panel of the flash, and subject distance becomes about equal. 7. When the Ready Light of the flash is illuminated, the unit is ready for use. ◆ You can calculate the correct exposure by using the following formula: Guide Number “GN” / Flash to Subject Distance = F-stop This flash unit will automatically calculate and indicate the appropriate Subject Distance according to the above formula. (Please refer to table1 on the last page) HIGH SPEED SYNC (FP) FLASH HSS When you take a picture with an ordinary flash, you cannot use a shutter speed faster than the camera’s synchronized speed because the flash must fire when the shutter curtain is fully open. The FP flash keeps firing, while the shutter curtain is running. Thus you can use a shutter speed faster than the synchronized speed. 1. Choose the Flash Mode by using MODE button (“TTL” or “M” modes can be used). 2. Press the + or – button and make the indicate indicator appear on the LCD panel. 3. Focus on the subject 4. When the Ready Light of the flash is illuminated, the unit is ready for use. ◆ Depending on the shutter speed, the Guide Number will be changed.(Please refer to table2 on the last page) ◆ If you want to cancel the FP Flash mode, please follow the FP indicator display from the LCD panel. flash procedure to make the MODELING FLASH If you use the Modeling flash, you can check the lighting and shadow effects, before you take the picture. 1. Press the MODE button and select the mode. 2. Press the + button or – button several times to make the icon on the LCD panel appear. 3. Confirm that the flash is charged, then press the TEST button to fire. 18 MULTI FLASH MODE While the shutter is open, the flash will fire repeatedly. By doing so a series of images of the subject will be exposed in one frame. A dark background with a bright subject shows more effectively in this mode. It is possible to set the firing frequency between 1Hz and 100Hz. Up to 90 flashes can be fired continuously. The maximum number of flashes varies, depending on the flash guide number and firing frequency settings. (Please refer to table 3 on the last page) 1. Set the camera’s exposure mode to M mode, and set the F number 2. Press the MODE button until the Multi-flash mode appears 3. Press the SEL button until the flash firing frequency starts to blink. 4. Press the + or – button to set the desired flash frequency value. 5. After pressing the SEL button again, the flash power level will blink. 6. Press the + or – button to set the desired power level. 7. Press the SEL button again, the number of flashes will blink. 8. Press the + or – button to set the desired number of flashes. 9. Press the SEL button again, the display will stop blinking. 10. When the ready light of the flash is illuminated, the unit is ready to use. Note: Please set the shutter speed longer than; Number of Flashes you want 与 Firing Frequency BOUNCE FLASH When you take a photo with flash in a room, sometimes a strong shadow will appear behind the subject, if you point the flash head upwards or sideways to reflect the light off the ceiling, wall etc. the subject will be illuminated softly. Press the lock button and adjust the flash head to set the bounce angle. UP: 0°, 60°, 75°, 90° DOWN: 0°,7° RIGHT: 0°, 60°, 75°, 90° LEFT: 0°, 60°, 75°,90°, 120°, 150°, 180° When the bounce flash mode is activated, a bounce indicator will appear on the LCD panel. Choose a white surface for bouncing the flash, otherwise the image’s colour may be incorrect. Depending on the reflecting surface, the subject distance and other factors, the effective distance range for the TTL AUTO may change. Please check for correct exposure confirmation (TTL mark on the LCD panel) after releasing the shutter. CLOSE-UP EXPOSURES Bounce flash can be tilted 7° downward for close-ups. The Flash will be effective only for the subjects will blink. 0.5 meter to 2 meters. When the flash head is tilted 7°, CATCH LIGHT PANEL This flash is equipped with a built-in catch light panel, which can create a catch light in the eyes of the subject when the bounce flash mode is activated. Slide out the wide panel and catch light panel, and then put wide panel back in its place. (Be careful to slide the panels out smoothly.) ◆ To create a catch light effectively, tilt the flash head upward 90 degrees and take pictures at a close distance. 19 WIRELESS FLASH When you use the “Wireless Flash” mode, you can take pictures with a more three-dimensional effect by shadow, or you can make natural image by shadow depending on the flash position, without any extension cord connecting the camera body and the flash. In the case of the EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI, communication between the camera body and the flash will be done by the means of the light of the flash. In the “Wireless Flash” mode, the camera will calculate the correct exposure automatically. ◆ In this instruction, we call a flash unit, which is attached to the camera body the “Controller”, and we call a flash unit at a remote position the “off-camera flash”. ◆ It would be helpful to use a mini-stand when the flash unit is separated from the camera. The mini-stand has a threaded hole to attach the flash unit to a tripod. ◆ Make sure not to position the flash your picture area. ◆ Place the flash approximately between 0.5m~5m(1.5-5.6ft) range, and camera approximately 1m~5m(3-16ft) range from the subject. ◆ In case of other people using Wireless Flash mode near you, your flash may be influenced by the other person’s flash and your flash may fire. In this circumstance, please set your flash to a different channel; from that of the other person’s flash. Please refer to above settings. A. USING THE SIGNAL OF BUILT-IN FLASH AS A TRIGGER. 1. Set the camera to the wireless flash mode. ◆ Since the settings vary depending on the camera model, please refer to the instruction manual for your camera. 2. Set the camera’s exposure mode to P,A,S or M. button of the flashgun until the off-camera 3. Press the flash display appears. 4. Set the off-camera flash number to 1 by pressing the button. button to set the Flash Mode to TTL. 5. Press the button is pressed. 6. Channel information will blink when the 7. Set the channel number (C1 - C4) by pressing or button. 8. Press the button, the indicator will stop blinking. 9. Attach the flashgun to the camera body and press the shutter button halfway (the channel number is recorded to the camera). 10. Remove your flash from the camera and place it at the desired position. 11. Pop-up the built-in flash of your camera, and confirm that it is fully charged. ◆ In wireless flash mode, AF Auxiliary Light will blink to indicate that the flash is fully charged. 12. Adjust the focus of your camera for taking picture. ◆ The EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI will fire when the built-in flash fires. The camera’s built-in flash is fired only for control of the EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI. The illimunation of the subject is done by the EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI. The camera will control the flash power as a TTL Auto flash, to obtain the correct exposure. ◆ Depending on the shutter speed, it will be switched automatically to normal flash or high speed sync flash. ◆ When the camera’s exposure mode is set to M, it will be manual wireless flash. After setting the channel number, the flash power level will blink. Set the desired flash power output by pressing the or button and then press the button to stop the display blinking. 20 B. USING THE SIGNAL OF THE FLASH THAT IS ATTACHED TO THE CAMERA AS THE TRIGGER For Wireless Flash, two or more EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI flash units are necessary. EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI can be used only with off-camera mode. Depending on the flash unit model of off-camera flash, it is necessary to change the control mode of the controller. Please see the below chart. (EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI can be used for the controller). Flashgun model can be used for off-camera flash Control Mode Camera model can be used with off-camera flash Ratio-Flash Control setting Flash Mode + EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI - α700, α900 α900 It is possible to control up to 3 groups;Controller, Off-Camera Flash 1 and Off-Camera Flash 2. It is possible to set flash-ratio of each group from 5 levels or without falsh. TTL Auto flash, High Speed Sync Flash (TTL, M), Manual flash It is possible to control 2 groups;Controller and Off-Camera Flash. Controller : It is possible to set the ratio of off-camera flash to 1:2 or 2:1. TTL Auto flash, High Speed Sync Flash (TTL) EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI B-1.In the case of using only off-camera flash Camera and Controller Setting 1. Set the camera to the wireless flash mode. ◆ Since the settings vary depending on the camera model, please refer to the instruction manual for your camera. 2. Set the camera’s exposure mode to P,A,S or M. 3. Attach the flashgun to the camera body. 4. The flashgun’s LCD panel will be switched to the controller setting display automatically. (If the LCD panel will not be button until the switched automatically, press the controller setting display appears.) button is 5. The control mode display will blink when the pressed. by pressing the or button. 6. Set the control mode to 7. Channel information will blink when the button is pressed. or button. 8. Set the channel number (C1 - C4) by pressing the button is pressed. 9. The ratio-flash control display will blink when the 10. Set the ratio-flash control mode to [ ] by pressing the or button. button again, the display will stop blinking. 11. Press the Off-Camera Flash Setting 12. Press the button until the off-camera flash display appears. 13. Set the off-camera flash number to 1 by pressing the button. button to set the flash mode to TTL. 14. Press the 15. Channel information will blink when the button is pressed. 16. Press or button to choose the same channel number as set on the controller. button, the indicator stops blinking. 17. Press the 18. Place the off-camera flash at the desired position. 19. Check that both flashes are fully charged. 21 ◆ Ready light lamp will light, and the AF Auxiliary lamp will blink to indicate that the flash is ready for shooting. 20. Adjust the focus on the subject, and take the picture. ) B-2. Ratio-Flash Control (Control Mode Camera and Controller setting 1. Process the same setting from step 1 to 9 of B-1. ] by 2. Set the ratio-flash control mode display to the [ pressing the or button. button is 3. The flash mode display will blink when the pressed. or button. 4. Set the flash mode to TTL by pressing the 5. The ratio-flash display [ ] of the controller will blink when the button is pressed. or button. 6. Set the ratio of the controller by pressing the ] of Off-Camera Flash 1 will blink when the button is pressed. 7. The ratio-flash display [ or button. 8. Set the ratio of Off-Camera Flash 1 by pressing the 9. The ratio-flash display [ ] of Off-Camera Flash 2 will blink when the button is pressed. or button. 10. Set the ratio of Off-Camera Flash 2 by pressing the button, the indicator stops blinking. 11. Press the Off-Camera Flash Setting 12. Process the same setting of B-1 Off-Camera Flash Setting. ◆ If the off-camera flash unit is plural, allocate the desired off camera flash number to each unit. ◆ It is possible to set the flash ratio for the controller, Off-Camera Flash 1 and Off-Camera Flash 2 as follows. (without flash) 1 2 4 8 16 The ratio of flash output amount is setting the value of each unit / total value. [Example] Setting value Ratio of flash amount Controller 2 2/7 Off-Camera Flash 1 1 1/7 Off-Camera Flash 2 4 4/7 B-3. Ratio-Flash Control (Control Mode ) Camera and Controller setting 1. Process the same setting from step 1 to 6 of B-1. 2. Set the control mode to by pressing the or button. button is 3. Channel information will blink when the pressed. or 4. Set the channel number (C1 – C4) by pressing button. 5. Set the ratio-flash control mode display to the [ ] by pressing the or button. 6. The ratio-flash display will blink when the button is pressed. 7. Set the ratio of the controller: Off-Camera Flash by pressing the or . button, the indicator stops blinking. 8. Press the or button. Select the 22 Off-Camera Flash Setting 9. If the Off-Camera Flash is EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI, please process the same setting of B-1 Off-Camera Flash Setting. ◆ If the Off-Camera Flash is EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI, please refer to the instruction manual of EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI. ◆ If the Off-Camera Flash is EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI, the channel number can be set only from C1 to C3. SLAVE FLASH NORMAL SLAVE FLASH Even if the EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI is not attached to the camera body, you can fire the flash by using the camera’s built-in flash or another flash unit 1. Attach the flash unit to the camera’s hot shoe. 2. Set the camera’s exposure mode to the desired mode. If you use A or M mode, set the desired aperture value also. 3. Turn on the flash unit. Then press the shutter button half way. ◆ Now, the aperture value and film speed are automatically transmitted to the flash unit. 4. Remove the flash unit from camera. / (Slave) 5. Press the MODE button and select the mode. 6. Press the SEL button several times to make the flash output amount indicator blink. 7. Press the + button or – button to set the flash output amount. ◆ Determine the appropriate flash power by setting the distance indicator on the LCD panel to coincide as closely as possible, with the actual distance from the slave flash to the subject. If the actual distance is out of range, you need to change the aperture value. ◆ You can set the film speed or aperture value on the flash unit manually, if desired. a.For the film speed … Press the MODE to select the ISO, then press the SEL button to make the indicator blink. Press the + button or – button and set the desired film speed, then press the SEL button once again. b.For the aperture value … When the flash unit is set to the Slave mode, press the SEL button to make the indicator for the aperture value blink, and press the + button or – button to set the desired aperture value. Then press the SEL button. 8. Press the SEL button several times to make the display stop blinking. 9. Place the slave unit in the desired location. Do not place the slave unit within the Picture area. 10. After you confirm that all flash units are fully charged, press the shutter button to take the picture. ◆If you are using a SONY brand flash unit , or the camera’s built-in flash TTL function on your camera, and the EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI flash unit as a slave unit, please do not use ADI,DI function, as the monitor pre-flash may cause the slave to fire prematurely. ◆When the EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI is fully charged, the AF Auxiliary Light will blink. ◆The flash will not fire if the EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI is attached to the camera body while it is in the Slave Mode setting. DESIGNATED SLAVE FLASH If you use two or more EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI flash units, you can designate which flashes will fire together by using the channel settings. In this mode, one flash unit will be used as the Slave Controller and the others for firing as Slaves. 23 Setting the Slave Flash unit(s) for firing 1. Attach the firing flash unit to the camera body. 2. Set the camera’s exposure mode to S or M mode. ◆ Then set the shutter speed to 1/30 or slower. The slave Controller will transmit the designated signal before the others fire. Thus if you use a shutter speed faster than 1/30, the firing flash units will not be synchronized. 3. Switch “ON” the flash unit, and press the camera’s shutter button halfway. ◆ Now, aperture value and film speed are automatically transmitted to the slave flash unit. 4. Remove the slave flash unit from camera. 5. Press the MODE button and select the / . (Slave Mode) 6. Press the SEL button to make the channel display indicator blink. 7. Press the + button or – button to set the channel number. (C1 or C2) 8. Press the SEL button to make the output amount display indicator of flash blink. 9. Press the + button or – button to set the flash output amount. ◆ Set the flash power by setting the distance indicator on the LCD panel to coincide as closely as possible with the actual distance from the slave flash to the subject. If the actual distance is out of range, you need to change the aperture value. 10. Press the SEL button several times to make the display stop blinking. 11. Place the slave unit in the desired location. Do not place the slave unit within the picture area. Setting for Slave Controller unit 12. Press the MODE button and select the / (Slave Mode). 13. Press the SEL button to make the channel display indicator blink. 14. Press the + button or – button to set the same channel number as that set on the firing flash unit. 15. Press the SEL button to make the flash output amount display indicator blink. mark displayed. 16. Press the + button 17. Press the SEL button to make the display stop blinking. 18. Attach the Slave Controller flash unit to the camera body. 19. After you confirm that all flash units are fully charged, press the shutter button to take the picture. ◆ When the firing flash unit of EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI is fully charged, the AF Auxiliary Light will blink. ◆ You cannot set the aperture value by SEL button, if you select the mark at the setting of flash output amount. The flash unit will be set to the Slave Controller mode. ◆ The Slave Controller unit functions only to control the slave unit. SPECIFICATIONS TYPE : Clip-on type serial-controlled TTL auto zoom electric flash GUIDE NUMBER : 61 (ISO 100/m, 105mm head position) POWER SOURCE : Four AA type alkaline batteries or Four AA type Ni-Cd batteries or, : Four AA type Ni-MH Nickel-Metal Hydride batteries RECYCLING TIME : about 7.0 sec. (Alkaline batteries) : about 5.0 sec. (Ni-Cd, Ni-MH Nickel-Metal Hydride) NUMBER OF FLASHES : about 120 flashes (Alkaline batteries) : about 160 flashes (Ni-Cd, Ni-MH Nickel-Metal Hydride) FLASH DURATION : about 1 / 700 sec. (full power firing) FLASH ILLUMINATE ANGLE : 24～105mm motor powered control (17mm with Built-in Wide Panel) AUTO POWER OFF : Available WEIGHT : 330g / 11.6oz. DIMENSIONS : 77mm (W) / 3.0in. x 139mm (H) / 5.5in. x 117mm (L) / 4.6in. 24 DEUTSCH Vielen Dank, dass Sie sich für ein SIGMA EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI Blitzgerät entschieden haben. Dieses Produkt wurde speziell für den Einsatz an der SONY AF Spiegelreflexkameraserie entwickelt. Abhängig von dem jeweiligen Kameramodell können Funktionen und Handhabung differieren. Bitte lesen Sie diese Gebrauchsanleitung bezogen auf Ihr Kameramodell sorgfältig durch. Um Ihre Freude an der Fotografie zu steigern, besitzt dieses Gerät eine Vielzahl von Ausstattungsmerkmalen. Sie sollten diese Gebrauchsanleitung im Zusammenhang mit Ihrer Kamerabedienungsanleitung studieren und für zukünftiges Nachschlagen griffbereit halten, um die Funktionen in vollem Umfang nutzen und die maximale Leistung des Gerätes ausschöpfen zu können. VORSICHTSMAßNAHMEN Um Verletzungen oder Beschädigungen zu verhindern, lesen Sie diese Bedienungsanleitung vor dem ersten Einsatz Ihres Blitzgerätes bitte sehr sorgfältig und vollständig durch und beachten Sie unbedingt die untenstehenden Warnzeichen. Bitte beachten Sie speziell die beiden folgenden Warnzeichen. Wenn Sie die entsprechenden Hinweise nicht befolgen, kann dies zu ernsthaften Warnung!! Verletzungen oder anderen gefährlichen Folgen führen. Wenn Sie die entsprechenden Hinweise nicht befolgen, können Verletzungen oder Achtung!! Schäden entstehen. Dieses Symbol verweist auf die wichtigen Punkte, an denen Vorsicht geboten ist. Dieses Symbol enthält Informationen bezüglich zu unterlassender Handlungen. Warnung!! Dieses Blitzgerät enthält hochspannungsführende Schaltkreise. Um elektrische Schläge oder Verbrennungen zu vermeiden, versuchen Sie nicht, das Gerät zu öffnen. Sollte das äußere Gehäuse gebrochen oder zersprungen sein, berühren Sie keine inneren Geräteteile. Blitzen Sie nicht aus kurzer Entfernung direkt in die Augen. Andernfalls kann das grelle Licht die Augen verletzen. Halten Sie beim Fotografieren zumindest einen Abstand von einem Meter zwischen Gesicht und Blitzgerät ein. Berühren Sie nicht einen eventuell zusätzlich vorhanden Blitzkontakt (X) Ihrer Kamera, wenn das Blitzgerät im Zubehörschuh steckt. Hochspannungsführende Stromkreise könnten einen elektrischen Stromschlag verursachen. Benutzen Sie Ihre Ausrüstung nie in der Umgebung entflammbarer, brennbarer Gase, Flüssigkeiten oder Chemikalien etc. Andernfalls könnte dies zu einem Brand oder einer Explosion führen. Achtung!! Benutzen Sie dieses Blitzgerät nicht an einer anderen Kamera als an einer SONY AF Spiegelreflexkamera; andernfalls könnte das Blitzgerät die Schaltkreise der Kamera beschädigen. Dieses Blitzgerät ist nicht wasserdicht. Wenn Sie die Ausrüstung im Regen, Schnee oder in der Nähe von Wasser verwenden, bewahren Sie sie davor, nass zu werden. Es ist häufig unmöglich, Wasserschäden interner elektrischer Komponenten zu reparieren. Setzen Sie das Blitzgerät niemals Stößen, Staub, Hitze oder Feuchtigkeit aus. Diese Faktoren könnten einen Brand oder Fehlfunktionen Ihrer Ausrüstung verursachen. Wenn das Gerät plötzlichen Temperaturschwankungen ausgesetzt, etwa aus einer kalten Umgebung in einen warmen Innenraum gebracht wird, kann sich Kondensniederschlag im Inneren des Gerätes bilden. In solchen Fällen stecken Sie das Gerät bitte vor dem Temperaturwechsel in eine zu verschließende Plastiktasche und benutzen Sie es erst wieder, wenn es sich der Raumtemperatur angepasst hat. Bewahren Sie das Gerät nicht in einer Schublade oder einem Schrank auf, wo es schädlichen Dämpfen wie derer von Naphthalin, Kampfer oder Insektiziden ausgesetzt ist. Verwenden Sie weder Verdünner, Benzin noch andere Reinigungsmittel, um Schmutz oder Fingerabdrücke von dem Gerät zu entfernen. Benutzen Sie ein weiches, gegebenenfalls angefeuchtetes, fusselfreies Tuch. Bewahren Sie das Blitzgerät an einem trockenen, kühlen und gut belüfteten Ort auf. Lösen Sie den Blitz von Zeit zu Zeit aus, um seine volle Leistungsfähigkeit langfristig zu erhalten. 25 BESCHREIBUNG DER TEILE Externe Teile 1.Blitzkopf 2.AF-Hilfsilluminator 3.Verstellwinkel vertikal 4.Schwenkwinkel horizontal 5.Verstellver –u. entriegelung vertikal 6.Schwenkver –u. entriegelung horizontal 7.Flüssigkeitskristallanzeige 8.Batteriefachdeckel 9. Entriegelungsknopf 10.Aufsteckfuß 11. Reflektorfolie 12. Weitwinkelstreuscheibe Bedienungselemente 13.Betriebsartentaste MODE 14.Wahltaste SEL 15. + Steigerungstaste 16. - Reduzierungstaste 17.ZOOM Taste ZOOM 18.Testauslöser TEST 19.Beleuchtungstaste LIGHT 20.Bereitschaftslampe 21.Hauptschalter BATTERIEHINWEISE Dieses Blitzgerät benötigt vier „AA“ Alkaline Trockenbatterien oder wiederaufladbare Ni-Cad oder Ni-MH Akkus. Wechseln Sie den kompletten Batteriesatz aus, wenn die Aufladezeit mehr als 30 Sekunden beträgt. ◆ Um einwandfreien elektrischen Kontakt zu gewährleisten, reinigen Sie die Batteriekontakte, bevor Sie die Batterien einsetzen. ◆ Ni-Cad / Ni-MH Akkus besitzen keine standardisierten Kontakte. Falls Sie Ni-Cad / Ni-MH Akkus verwenden, vergewissern Sie sich, dass die Batteriekontakte jene des Batteriefaches einwandfrei berühren. ◆ Verwenden Sie ausschließlich vier frische „AA“ Mignonzellen einer Marke und eines Typs, um die Gefahr des Platzens einer Batterie, des Austritts von Batteriesäure oder der Überhitzung vorzubeugen. Mischen Sie keinesfalls frische und gebrauchte Batterien. ◆ Batterien dürfen weder geöffnet, noch kurzgeschlossen bzw. ins Feuer geworfen werden, da sie explodieren können. Zur Wiederaufladung dürfen nur hierfür geeignete Zellen verwendet werden, wie etwa Ni-Cad / Ni-MH. ◆ Wenn Sie das Blitzgerät längere Zeit nicht benutzen wollen, entnehmen Sie bitte die Batterien, um Schäden durch austretende Batteriesäure zu verhindern. ◆ Bei niedrigen Temperaturen lässt die Leistung jeder Batterie nach. Bewahren Sie die Batterien daher bei kalter Witterung bis zur Aufnahme getrennt vom Blitzgerät möglichst körperwarm auf. ◆ Wie bei jedem Blitzgerät empfiehlt sich die Mitnahme von Ersatzbatterien auf einer Reise oder für Außenaufnahmen bei winterlichen Temperaturen. EINLEGEN DER BATTERIEN 1. Vergewissern Sie sich, dass der Hauptschalter auf OFF steht und öffnen Sie den Batteriefachdeckel durch Schieben in Pfeilrichtung und klappen Sie ihn nach oben. 2. Setzen Sie vier Mignonzellen Typ „AA“ entsprechend der Markierung der Polung (+ und -) in das Batteriefach ein. 3. Schließen Sie den Batteriefachdeckel. 4. Schalten Sie das Gerät am Hauptschalter ein. Nach einigen Sekunden leuchtet die Blitzbereitschaftslampe auf und zeigt somit an, dass das Gerät nunmehr zündbereit ist. 5. Um sich von der Funktionsfähigkeit durch einen Probeblitz zu überzeugen, genügt ein Druck auf den Testauslöser. Automatische Abschaltung Um Strom zu sparen, schaltet sich das Gerät 240 Sekunden nach der letzten Betätigung automatisch ab. Zur Wiedereinschaltung genügt ein Druck auf den Testauslöser oder das Antippen des Kameraauslösers. Die automatische Abschaltung steht nicht im kabellosen Blitzbetrieb zur Verfügung. 26 Fehleranzeige Bei ungenügender Batteriespannung bzw. fehlerhaftem Informationsaustausch zwischen Kamera und Blitzgerät erscheint “Er” in der LCD. Schalten Sie das Gerät in diesem Fall kurzfristig aus und wieder ein. Führt dies nicht zum Erlöschen der Anzeige, prüfen Sie bitte die Batteriespannung. EINSTELLEN DES BLITZKOPFES Drücken Sie die Verstellwinkelver- und -entriegelungstaste, während Sie den Blitzkopf in die gewünschte Position neigen. ◆ Wenn Sie das Gerät einschalten, erscheint auf dem LCD. Sollte das Symbol blinken, befindet sich der Blitzkopf in einer unzulässigen Position. ANBRINGEN UND ABNEHMEN DES BLITZGERÄTES Vergewissern Sie sich, dass das Gerät ausgeschaltet ist. Schieben Sie dann den Aufsteckfuß des Blitzes in den Zubehörschuh der Kamera bis er einrastet. ◆ Fassen Sie das Gerät zum Ansetzen bzw. Abnehmen ausschließlich an seinem Unterteil an, um Beschädigungen am Steckfuß oder am Zubehörschuh der Kamera zu vermeiden. ◆ Falls der eingebaute Blitz der Kamera ausgeklappt sein sollte, muss er vor dem Anbringen des EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI eingeklappt werden. Um das Blitzgerät abzunehmen, ziehen Sie es unter Druck auf den Entriegelungsknopf aus dem Zubehörschuh. EINSTELLEN DES AUSLEUCHTWINKELS (ZOOMREFLEKTOR) Nach Druck auf die ZOOM-Taste erscheint das Symbol . Durch wiederholtes Drücken der ZOOM-Taste ändert sich die Einstellung des ZOOMreflektors und der Anzeige in der LCD wie folgt: 24mm → 28mm → 35mm → 50mm → 70mm → 85mm → 105mm → (Auto) In der Betriebsart TTL reguliert das Gerät die Einstellung des Zoomreflektors innerhalb des Einstellbereiches automatisch entsprechend der Brennweite des verwendeten Objektives. ◆ Beim Einschalten des Blitzes stellt sich der Zoomreflektor automatisch auf die zuletzt benutzte Einstellung. ◆ Sofern Sie eine kürzere Objektivbrennweite benutzen, als am Zoomreflektor eingestellt wurde, werden die Bildecken abgedunkelt wiedergegeben. ◆ Die Blitzleistung ändert sich in Abhängigkeit von der Zoomreflektoreinstellung. WEITWINKELSTREUSCHEIBE Das Blitzgerät ist mit einer eingebauten Weitwinkelstreuscheibe ausgestattet, die die Ausleuchtung des Bildwinkels eines 17mm Objektivs ermöglicht. Ziehen Sie die Weitwinkelstreuscheibe gemeinsam mit der eingebauten Reflektorfolie vorsichtig heraus und klappen Sie ausschließlich die Weitwinkelstreuscheibe vor den Blitzkopf. Anschließend schieben Sie nur die Reflektorfolie wieder zurück. Der Ausleuchtwinkel des Blitzgeräts stellt sich nun automatisch auf 17mm. 27 ◆ Sollte die eingebaute Weitwinkelstreuscheibe versehentlich abgerissen werden, funktioniert die ZOOM-Taste nicht mehr. In diesem Fall wenden Sie sich bitte an Ihren Händler oder direkt an einen autorisierten SIGMA Service. BELEUCHTUNG DER LCD Beim Druck auf die LIGHT Taste wird das Display für ca. acht Sekunden lang beleuchtet. Durch erneuten Druck auf die LIGHT Taste bleibt die Beleuchtung für länger als acht Sekunden aktiviert. TTL BLITZAUTOMATIK Im TTL-Blitzautomatikbetrieb kontrolliert die Kamera die abgeblitzte Lichtmenge, so- dass sich daraus die korrekte Belichtung des Hauptobjektes ergibt. ◆ Abhängig von dem eingesetzten Kamera-Modell und der Objektiv-Kombination variiert der TTL-Blitzbetrieb. Bitte beachten Sie die untenstehende Tabelle.(In allen Kombinationen erscheint die TTL-Anzeige im Display) D-SLR Kameras, Dynax 9 Andere Modelle Dynax 60, 40, 7, 5, 4, 3L (Maxxum 9) (Maxxum 7D, 70, 50, 7, 5, 4, 3) D-Charakteristik Konventionelle ADI-Blitzsteuerung Vorblitzmessung Objektiv TTL-Messung Objektive ohne Konventionelle Vorblitzmessung Vorblitzmessung D-Charakteristik TTL-Messung 1. Stellen Sie die Belichtungsautomatik der Kamera auf P. 2. Schalten Sie das Blitzgerät am Hauptschalter ein. Das TTL Symbol erscheint auf dem LCD und das Gerät beginnt, sich aufzuladen. ◆ Vergewissern Sie sich beim Einsatz an D-SLR Kameras, dass die Funktion aktiviert ist. Sollte die Anzeige nicht leuchten, drücken Sie bitte + oder – Tasten, bis das Symbol im Display des Blitzgerätes erscheint. Andernfalls arbeitet die Belichtungskontrolle nicht korrekt. 3. Stellen Sie scharf. 4. Vergewissern Sie sich, dass sich das Hauptobjekt innerhalb der in dem LCD angezeigten Blitzreichweite befindet. 5. Nachdem der Blitz vollständig aufgeladen ist, betätigen Sie den Auslöser. ◆ Wenn die Kamera ausreichende Belichtung ermittelt hat, erscheint das TTL Symbol für fünf Sekunden auf dem Display. Sollte diese Anzeige nicht erscheinen, war die Blitzbelichtung nicht ausreichend. Wiederholen Sie in diesem Fall die Aufnahme aus kürzerer Entfernung. ◆ Das AF-Hilfslicht schaltet sich automatisch ein, wenn Sie ein Motiv im Dunkeln anvisieren. Seine Reichweite beträgt ca. 0,7 bis 9 Meter. ◆ Sofern sich die Kamera in der manuellen Betriebsart befindet, beachten Sie bitte, dass das Blitzgerät jeweils in die zuletzt gewählte Einstellung zurückkehrt. ◆ Sobald das Blitzgerät die volle Ladekapazität erreicht hat, erscheint die Bereitschaftsanzeige im Sucher. Wenn der Auslöser vor Erreichen der Zündbereitschaft betätigt wird, blitzt das Gerät nicht und die Kamera löst entsprechend der Lichtverhältnisse mit langer Verschlusszeit aus. Einsatz des Blitzgerätes in anderen Betriebseinstellungen Einsatz mit Blendenautomatik Je nach gewählter Verschlusszeit ermittelt die Kamera die passende Blende entsprechend der Helligkeit des Motivs. Sie können keine kürzere Verschlusszeit wählen als die Synchronzeit der Kamera. 28 Einsatz mit Zeitautomatik Bei Wahl der Zeitautomatik ermittelt die Kamera zur vorgewählten Blende die passende Verschlusszeit zur Helligkeit des Hintergrundes. Beim Einsatz dieser Betriebsart wird die ständige Blitzzuschaltung angewandt. Einsatz mit manueller Einstellung In dieser Betriebsart können Sie sowohl die Blende als auch die Verschlusszeit in dem Bereich zwischen der Synchronzeit und B (bulb = beliebig) vorwählen. ◆ Beim Einsatz dieser Betriebsart wird die ständige Blitzzuschaltung angewandt. ◆ Sofern Sie sich dabei nach den Angaben des Belichtungsmessers richten, arbeitet die Kamera wie beim Aufhellblitzen bzw. bei der Langzeitsynchronisation. GRENZEN DER SERIENAUSLÖSUNG Um ein Überhitzen des Gerätes zu verhindern, legen Sie eine 10minütige Pause nach dem Absolvieren der im folgenden genannten Aufnahmeserien ein. Betriebsart TTL, M (1/1, ½) M (1/4, 1/8) M (1/16-1/32) Multi Anzahl der Blitzaufnahmen 20 Serienauslösungen 25 Serienauslösungen 40 Serienauslösungen 10 Sequenzen MANUELLER BLITZBETRIEB Der manuelle Blitzbetrieb empfiehlt sich immer dann, wenn Motive geblitzt werden, deren korrekte Belichtung mittels TTL-Betriebsart nur schwierig zu erreichen ist. In der manuellen Betriebsart lässt sich die Blitzleistung von 1/1 (voll) bis zu 1/64 in einstufigen Schritten wählen. 1. Schalten Sie die Kamera auf M. 2. Drücken Sie am Blitzgerät die Betriebsartentaste MODE, um M zu wählen. 3. Der Wert der Blitzleistung blinkt, wenn Sie die Wahltaste SEL drücken. 4. Drücken Sie die Taste + oder – , um die gewünschte Blitzleistung einzustellen. 5. Nach dem erneuten Drücken der Wahltaste SEL stoppt das Blinken des Blitzleistungswertes und die Anzeige bleibt bestehen. 6. Stellen Sie Ihr Motiv durch Antippen des Kameraauslösers scharf und lesen Sie die Entfernung von der Einstellskala des Objektives ab. Verändern Sie anschließend die Blendeneinstellung oder die Blitzleistung so lange, bis die angezeigte Blitzreichweite auf dem LCD des Blitzgerätes der tatsächlichen Entfernung zum Motiv entspricht. 7. Sobald die Bereitschaftslampe aufleuchtet, ist das Gerät zündbereit. ◆ Die korrekte Belichtung kann nach der folgenden Formel ermittelt werden: Leitzahl (GN) / Abstand Blitz zum Motiv (in m) = Arbeitsblende Das Blitzgerät ermittelt und indiziert die Entfernung zum Hauptobjekt automatisch entsprechend der obigen Formel. (Bitte beachten Sie die Tabelle 1 auf der letzten Seite) KURZZEITBLITZSYNCHRONISATION (FP; HSS) Wenn Sie mit einem gewöhnlichen Blitzgerät arbeiten, können Sie keine kürzere Verschlusszeit als die Synchronzeit der Kamera verwenden, da der Blitz in dem Moment gezündet werden muss, in dem das Bildfenster von den Verschlussvorhängen vollständig freigegeben ist. Bei der Kurzzeitsynchronisation sendet das Gerät ununterbrochen Blitze, während der Verschluss abläuft. Hierdurch kann eine kürzere Verschlusszeit als die eigentliche Synchronzeit verwendet werden. 29 1. Wählen Sie an der Kamera die Belichtungsfunktion („S“ und „M“ ist verfügbar) 2. Drücken Sie die Taste + oder – , bis das Symbol auf dem LCD erscheint. 3. Stellen Sie das Objekt scharf 4. Sobald die Bereitschaftslampe aufleuchtet, ist das Gerät zündbereit. ◆ Bei Verwendung der Kurzzeitsynchronisation verändert sich die Leitzahl des Blitzes in Abhängigkeit von der eingestellten Verschlusszeit. Die Blitzreichweite wird umso kürzer, je schneller die gewählte Verschlusszeit. (Bitte beachten Sie die Tabelle 2 auf der letzten Seite). ◆ Wenn Sie die Betriebsart Kurzzeitsynchronisation löschen möchten, folgen Sie bitte der Anleitung für Betriebsart und entfernen das Symbol aus der Anzeige. die Einstellung der EINSTELLLICHT Mit dem Einstelllicht können Sie die Lichtwirkung und den Schattenverlauf vor der Aufnahme überprüfen. 1. Drücken Sie die MODE Taste und wählen Sie die Betriebsart. 2. Drücken Sie die + oder – Taste, bis das Symbol auf dem LCD erscheint. 3. Warten Sie das Aufleuchten der Bereitschaftslampe ab und drücken Sie die TEST Taste zur Auslösung des Einstelllichtes. STROBOSKOPBETRIEB Während der Verschluss geöffnet ist, sendet das Blitzgerät eine Serie von Blitzen aus. Hierdurch entsteht auf einem Bild eine Sequenz von Aufnahmen eines Motivs. Ein helles Motiv vor dunklem Hintergrund ist am effektivsten für diese Funktion. Die Blitzfrequenz kann zwischen 1 Hz und 100 Hz eingestellt werden. Bis zu 90 Blitze können kontinuierlich abgegeben werden. Die maximale Anzahl von Blitzen variiert in Abhängigkeit von der Leitzahl und der eingestellten Frequenz. (Bitte beachten Sie die Tabelle 3 auf der letzten Seite). 1. Stellen Sie die Belichtungsfunktion der Kamera auf M und stellen Sie eine Blende ein. 2. Drücken Sie wiederholt die Betriebsartentaste MODE, bis die Stroboskopanzeige MULTI erscheint. 3. Drücken Sie die Wahltaste SEL, bis die Blitzfrequenzanzeige zu blinken beginnt. 4. Drücken Sie die Taste + oder – , um den gewünschten Wert einzustellen. 5. Nach dem erneuten Druck auf die Wahltaste SEL beginnt die Angabe der Blitzleistung zu blinken. 6. Drücken Sie die Taste + oder – , um den gewünschten Wert einzustellen. 7. Nach dem erneuten Druck auf die Wahltaste SEL beginnt der Wert der Blitzanzahl zu blinken. 8. Drücken Sie die Taste + oder – , um die gewünschte Anzahl von Blitzen einzustellen. 9. Nach dem erneuten Druck auf die Wahltaste SEL stellt die Anzeige das Blinken ein. 10. Sobald die Bereitschaftslampe aufleuchtet, ist der Blitz einsatzbereit. Achtung: Bitte wählen Sie eine längere Verschlusszeit als: Anzahl der eingestellten Blitze / Blitzfrequenz in Hz INDIREKTES BLITZEN Bei Blitzaufnahmen in Innenräumen erscheint häufig ein harter Schlagschatten hinter Ihrem direkt angeblitzten Objekt. Wenn Sie den Blitzreflektor jedoch nach oben neigen und das Blitzlicht somit indirekt über eine Decke auf ihr Motiv fällt, erreichen Sie eine wesentlich weichere Ausleuchtung. Drücken Sie die Entriegelungstaste und neigen Sie den Blitzkopf in den gewünschten Winkel. 30 Vertikal, aufwärts: 0,60,75 und 90° abwärts: 0 und 7° Horizontal, rechts: 0,60,75 und 90° links: 0,60,75,90,120,150 und 180° Wenn indirektes Blitzen gewählt wurde, erscheint das Neigesymbol auf dem LCD. Das Motiv wird in die Farbe der reflektierenden Oberfläche getaucht. Wählen Sie deshalb bitte eine weiße Oberfläche für das indirekte Blitzen. Abhängig von der reflektierenden Oberfläche, der Motiv-Entfernung und anderen Faktoren kann sich die effektive Distanz für die TTL-Automatik verändern. Deshalb vergewissern Sie sich bitte immer der Blitzkontrollanzeige (TTL-Anzeige auf dem LCD) nach dem Auslösen. NAHAUFNAHMEN Der Blitzkopf kann für Nahaufnahmen um 7° nach unten geneigt werden. Die effektive Ausleuchtung ist in diesem Fall nur für Motive in einem Abstand zwischen 0,5 und 2 Metern gegeben. Wenn der Blitzkopf um 7° nach unten geneigt ist, blinkt das Neigesymbol . EINGEBAUTE REFLEKTORFOLIE Das Blitzgerät ist mit einer eingebauten Reflektorfolie ausgestattet, die eine dezente frontale Aufhellung beim indirekten Blitzen gestattet (bspw. ein Lichtreflex im Auge des Models). Ziehen Sie die Weitwinkelstreuscheibe gemeinsam mit der eingebauten Reflektorfolie vorsichtig heraus und schieben Sie nur die Weitwinkelstreuscheibe wieder zurück. ◆ Neigen Sie für eine natürliche Ausleuchtung mit dezenter frontaler Aufhellung den Blitzkopf um 90 Grad nach oben und fotografieren Sie aus kurzer Entfernung. KABELLOSES BLITZEN Durch den Einsatz der kabellosen Blitzauslösung haben Sie die Möglichkeit, in Ihren Bildern durch die Lichtführung einen räumlichen Eindruck zu vermitteln, oder ihnen eine besonders natürliche Lichtstimmung durch den gezielten Schattenverlauf in Abhängigkeit der Blitzgeräteposition zu verleihen. Hierzu bedarf es keiner Kabelverbindung zwischen Kamera und Blitzgerät, da die Kommunikation zwischen beiden Geräten mittels des Blitzlichtes vorgenommen wird. In dieser Betriebsart ermittelt die Kamera die korrekte Belichtung automatisch. ◆ In dieser Bedienungsanleitung wird das Blitzgerät, welches mit der Kamera verbunden ist, als „Controller“ bezeichnet und das entsprechend platzierte fernausgelöste Gerät als „entfesselter Blitz“. ◆ Wenn der „entfesselte Blitz“ an der gewünschten Stelle platziert werden soll, leistet ein Blitzgeräteständer, der auch über ein Stativgewinde verfügt, gute Dienste. ◆ Wenn Sie den „entfesselten Blitz“ an der gewünschten Stelle platzieren, achten Sie darauf, dass er im Bild nicht zu sehen ist. ◆ Bitte platzieren Sie den „entfesselten Blitz“ in einem Abstand zwischen 0,5m und 5m zum Motiv und die Kamera zwischen 1m bis 5m zum Motiv. ◆ Für den Fall, dass andere Personen in Ihrer Nähe die kabellose Blitzauslösung nutzen und Ihr eigenes Gerät auf diese Blitze reagieren sollte, stellen Sie bitte an Ihrem Gerät einen anderen Kanal als die anderen Fotografen ein. Befolgen Sie hierzu bitte die obigen Einstellungen. A. AUSLÖSUNG DURCH DEN EINGEBAUTEN BLITZ DER KAMERA 1. Stellen Sie die Kamera auf „Drahtlos Blitz“. ◆ Da die Einstellungen je nach Kameramodell variieren, entnehmen Sie bitte die genaue Einstellung für „Drahtlos Blitz“ der Bedienungsanleitung Ihrer Kamera. 31 2. Stellen Sie den Belichtungsmodus der Kamera auf P, A, S oder M. Taste des Blitzgerätes, bis das Symbol 3. Drücken Sie die für entfesseltes Blitzen erscheint. Taste, bis für den entfesselten Blitz die 4. Drücken Sie die Ziffer 1 erscheint. 5. Drücken Sie die Taste, um den TTL Blitzmodus einzustellen. Taste, bis die Kanalanzeige blinkt. 6. Drücken Sie die oder Taste, um den Kanal (C1 - C4) einzustellen. 7. Drücken Sie die 8. Drücken Sie die Taste, um das Blinken der Kanalanzeige zu beenden. 9. Verbinden Sie das Blitzgerät mit der Kamera und drücken den Auslöser halb durch (der Kanal wird an die Kamera übertragen). 10. Nehmen Sie das Blitzgerät von der Kamera und platzieren Sie es an der gewünschten Stelle. 11. Klappen Sie das eingebaute Blitzgerät aus und vergewissern Sie sich, dass es vollständig aufgeladen ist. ◆ Im kabellosen Blitzbetrieb beginnt das AF-Hilfslicht des EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI zu blinken, wenn die Blitzbereitschaft erreicht wird. 12. Stellen Sie die Schärfe an der Kamera ein. ◆ Das EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI löst aus, wenn das eingebaute Blitzgerät blitzt. Das eingebaute Blitzgerät dient hierbei ausschließlich zur Kontrolle des EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI. Die Belichtung erfolgt alleine durch das Blitzlicht des EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI. Die Kamera kontrolliert die Blitzabgabe in der TTL-Automatik, um die korrekte Belichtung zu gewährleisten. ◆ In Abhängigkeit von der Verschlusszeit wird automatisch der normale Blitzbertrieb oder die Kurzeit-Synchronisation eingestellt. ◆ Steht der Belichtungsmodus der Kamera auf M, findet manuelles kabelloses Blitzen statt. Nachdem der Kanal gewählt wurde, blinkt die Anzeige der Blitzleistung. Wählen Sie die gewünschte oder Taste und im Anschluss die Taste, um das Blitzleistung durch Drücken der Blinken der Anzeige zu beenden. B. AUSLÖSUNG DURCH EINEN EXTERNEN BLITZ, DER MIT DER KAMERA VERBUNDEN IST. Für das kabellose Blitzen sind zwei oder mehrere EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI Aufsteckblitzgeräte notwendig. Der EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI kann nur im entfesselten Blitz Modus verwendet werden. Je nach Modell, das als entfesseltes Blitzgeräte eingesetzt wird, ist es notwendig den Kontroll-Modus des Controllers zu ändern. Entnehmen Sie dies bitte der untenstehenden Tabelle (Der EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI kann als Controller verwendet werden). Aufsteckblitzgeräte, die als entfesselter Blitz eingesetzt werden können Kontroll-Modus Kameramodelle, die mit dem entfesselten Blitz genutzt werden können Blitz-Belichtungsverhältnis Blitz Modus EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI + - α700, α900 α900 Es ist möglich bis zu 3 Gruppen anzusteuern; Controller, entfesselten Blitz 1 und entfesselten Blitz 2. Das Blitz-Belichtungsverhältnis kann für jede der Gruppen in 5 Stufen oder ohne Blitz eingestellt werden. TTL Automatik, Kurzzeit-Blitzsynchronisation (TTL, M), manuelles Blitzen Es ist möglich 2 Gruppen anzusteuern;Controller und entfesselten Blitz. Controller: Das Blitz-Belichtungsverhältnis des entfesselten Blitzes kann auf 1:2 oder 2:1 eingestellt werden. TTL Automatik, Kurzzeit-Blitzsynchronisation (TTL) 32 B-1. BEIM GEWÖHNLICHEN EINSATZ ALS ENTFESSELTER BLITZ Einstellung Kamera und Controller 1. Stellen Sie die Kamera auf „Drahtlos Blitz“. ◆ Da die Einstellungen je nach Kameramodell variieren, entnehmen Sie bitte die genaue Einstellung für „Drahtlos Blitz“ der Bedienungsanleitung Ihrer Kamera. 2. Stellen Sie den Belichtungsmodus der Kamera auf P, A, S oder M. 3. Verbinden Sie das Blitzgerät mit der Kamera. 4. Im Display erscheint automatisch die Controller-Anzeige. (Erscheint die Anzeige nicht automatisch, drücken Sie die Taste, bis die Controller-Anzeige erscheint.) Taste, bis der Kontroll-Modus blinkt. 5. Drücken Sie die 6. Drücken Sie die oder Taste, bis Kontroll-Modus erscheint. Taste, bis die Kanalanzeige blinkt. 7. Drücken Sie die oder Taste, um den Kanal (C1 - C4) einzustellen. 8. Drücken Sie die Taste, bis die Blitz-Belichtungsverhälnis Anzeige blinkt. 9. Drücken Sie die 10. Drücken Sie die oder Taste, bis als Blitz-Belichtungsverhältnis Modus [ ] erscheint. Taste, um das Blinken der Anzeige zu beenden. 11. Drücken Sie die Einstellung entfesseltes Blitzgerät 12. Drücken Sie die Taste des Blitzgerätes, bis das Symbol für entfesseltes Blitzen erscheint. Taste, bis für den entfesselten Blitz die 13. Drücken Sie die Ziffer 1 erscheint Taste, um den TTL Blitzmodus 14. Drücken Sie die einzustellen. 15. Drücken Sie die Taste, bis die Kanalanzeige blinkt. 16. Drücken Sie die oder Taste, um denselben Kanal wie am Controller einzustellen. Taste, um das Blinken der Anzeige zu beenden. 17. Drücken Sie die 18. Platzieren Sie das entfesselte Blitzgerät an der gewünschten Position. 19. Vergewissern Sie sich, dass beide Geräte aufgeladen und blitzbereit sind. ◆ Die Bereitschaftslampe leuchtet und am entfesselten Blitzgerät beginnt das AF-Hilfslicht zu blinken. 20. Stellen Sie Ihr Motiv scharf und lösen Sie aus. B-2. BLITZ-BELICHTUNGSVERHÄLTNIS (KONTROLL-MODUS ) Einstellung Kamera und Controller 1. Verfahren Sie mit den Schritten 1 bis 9 ebenso wie im Abschnitt B-1. oder Taste, bis als 2. Drücken Sie die Blitz-Belichtungsverhältnis Modus [ ] angezeigt wird. Taste, bis der Blitz Modus blinkt. 3. Drücken Sie die 4. Drücken Sie die oder Taste, um den TTL Blitzmodus einzustellen. Taste, bis die Blitz-Belichtungsverhältnis Anzeige [ ] blinkt. 5. Drücken Sie die 6. Drücken Sie die oder Taste, um das Blitz-Belichtungsverhältnis zu wählen. 7. Drücken Sie die Taste, bis die Anzeige [ ] für entfesselten Blitz 1 blinkt. 8. Drücken Sie die oder Taste, um das Verhältnis für entfesselten Blitz 1 einzustellen. 9. Drücken Sie die Taste, bis die Anzeige [ ] für entfesselten Blitz 2 blinkt. 10. Drücken Sie die oder Taste, um das Verhältnis für entfesselten Blitz 2 einzustellen. 11. Drücken Sie die Taste, um das Blinken der Anzeige zu beenden. 33 Einstellung entfesseltes Blitzgerät 12. Verfahren Sie wie im Abschnitt B-1 Einstellung entfesseltes Blitzgerät. ◆ Verwenden Sie mehrere entfesselte Blitzgeräte, vergeben Sie den Blitzgeräten die jeweilige Ziffer für entfesselten Blitz. ◆ Das Blitz-Belichtungsverhältnis des Controllers, entfesselten Blitz 1 und entfesselten Blitz 2 kann wie folgt eingestellt werden. (ohne Blitz) 1 2 4 8 16 Das Verhältnis der Blitzleistung reguliert den Wert jedes Blitzgerätes / Gesamtwert. [Beispiel] Einstellwert Blitz-Belichtungsverhältnis Controller 2 2/7 Entfessleter Blitz 1 1 1/7 Entfessleter Blitz 2 4 4/7 B-3. BLITZ-BELICHTUNGSVERHÄLTNIS (KONTROLL-MODUS ) Einstellung Kamera und Controller 1. Verfahren Sie mit den Schritten 1 bis 6 ebenso wie im Abschnitt B-1. oder Taste, bis Kontrollmodus 2. Drücken Sie die erscheint. Taste, bis die Kanalanzeige blinkt. 3. Drücken Sie die 4. Drücken Sie die oder Taste, um den Kanal (C1 - C4) einzustellen. 5. Drücken Sie die oder Taste, bis als Blitz] angezeigt wird. Belichtungsverhältnis Modus [ 6. Drücken Sie die Taste, bis die Blitz-Belichtungsverhältnis Anzeige blinkt. 7. Stellen Sie das Blitz-Belichtungsverhältnis des Controllers ein: Durch Drücken der Taste des entfesselten Blitzgeräts (Wählen Sie oder ). 8. Drücken Sie die Taste, um das Blinken der Anzeige zu beenden. oder Einstellung entfessltes Blitzgerät 9. Verwenden Sie als entfesselten Blitz den EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI, verfahren Sie wie im Abschnitt B-1 Einstellung entfesseltes Blitzgerät. ◆ Verwenden Sie als entfesselten Blitz den EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI, schauen Sie bitte in die Bedienungsanleitung des EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI. ◆ Verwenden Sie als entfesselten Blitz den EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI, kann als Kanal nur C1 - C3 ausgewählt werden. „SLAVE“ GERÄT NORMALER „SLAVE“ GERÄTE BETRIEB Selbst wenn der EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI nicht an der Kamera angesetzt ist, kann er durch den eingebauten Blitz der Kamera oder ein anderes Blitzgerät ausgelöst werden. 1. Verbinden sie das Blitzgerät mit dem Kameragehäuse. 2. Stellen Sie die Kamera auf die gewünschte Belichtungsautomatik. Falls Sie A oder M wählen, stellen Sie bitte auch die gewünschte Blende ein. 3. Schalten Sie das Blitzgerät ein. Anschließend drücken Sie den Kameraauslöser halb durch. 34 ◆ Nun wird der Blendenwert und die Filmempfindlichkeit automatisch an das Blitzgerät übertragen. 4. Entfernen Sie das Blitzgerät von der Kamera. 5. Drücken Sie die Betriebsartentaste MODE und wählen Sie die / (Slave) Betriebsart. 6. Drücken Sie mehrmals die Wahltaste SEL, bis die Anzeige der Blitzleistung blinkt. 7. Drücken Sie + oder – um die Blitzleistung einzustellen. ◆ Legen Sie die korrekte Blitzbelichtung durch übereinstimmendes Einstellen der Entfernungsanzeige auf dem Display mit der tatsächlichen Entfernung zwischen „Slave“ Gerät und Motiv fest. Sollte sich die tatsächliche Entfernung außerhalb der Blitzreichweite befinden, wählen Sie bitte eine größere Blendenöffnung. ◆ Sie können Filmempfindlichkeit und Blendenwert, falls gewünscht, auch am Blitz manuell einstellen. a. Für die Filmempfindlichkeit ... drücken Sie MODE und wählen Sie ISO, drücken Sie danach SEL, sodass die Anzeige blinkt. Drücken Sie + oder – , um die gewünschte Filmempfindlichkeit einzustellen und drücken Sie danach die SEL Taste noch einmal. b. Für den Blendenwert ... Wenn das Blitzgerät auf Slave Betriebsart steht, drücken Sie die SEL Taste, sodass die Blendenanzeige blinkt und drücken Sie + oder – , um den gewünschten Wert einzustellen. Drücken Sie danach noch einmal die SEL Taste.Press the SEL button several times to make the display stop blinking. 8. Drücken Sie mehrmals die Wahltaste SEL, sodass die Anzeige dauerhaft erscheint. 9. Platzieren Sie den Blitz an der gewünschten Position und achten Sie darauf, dass er nicht auf dem Bild zu sehen ist. 10. Nachdem Sie sich vergewissert haben, dass alle Blitzgeräte aufgeladen und blitzbereit sind, betätigen Sie den Auslöser und nehmen das Bild auf. ◆ Wenn der EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI voll aufgeladen ist, beginnt das AF-Hilfslicht zu blinken. ◆ Der EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI wird nicht auslösen, wenn er an der Kamera angeschlossen ist, während er sich im Slave Betrieb befindet. ◆ Wenn Sie ein Original-SONY Blitzgerät oder die TTL-Funktion des eingebauten Blitzgerätes der Kamera und den EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI als „Slave“ Gerät einsetzen, benutzen Sie bitte nicht die ADI, DI Funktion, da ansonsten der Vorblitz das „Slave“ Gerät unbeabsichtigt auslösen könnte. KABELLOSE ZÜNDUNG BESTIMMTER „SLAVE“ GERÄTE Falls Sie 2 oder mehr EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI Blitzgeräte einsetzen, können Sie durch den Einsatz der Kanalwahl bestimmen, welche Geräte gleichzeitig blitzen sollen. In dieser Betriebsart wird ein Gerät als Slave Controller und die anderen werden als blitzende „Slave“ Geräte eingesetzt. Einstellung der blitzenden Geräte 1. Verbinden Sie das blitzende Gerät mit dem Kameragehäuse. 2. Stellen Sie die Belichtungsfunktion der Kamera auf S oder M. ◆ Stellen Sie die Verschlusszeit auf 1/30s oder länger. Der Slave Controller sendet das entsprechende Signal, bevor die anderen Blitze auslösen. Wenn Sie daher den Verschluss auf eine kürzere Zeit als eine 1/30s einstellen, sind die blitzenden Geräte nicht synchronisiert. 3. Schalten Sie das Blitzgerät ein und drücken Sie den Auslöser halb durch. ◆ Nun werden Filmempfindlichkeit und Blendenwert automatisch an das Blitzgerät übertragen. 4. Entfernen Sie das Blitzgerät von der Kamera. 5. Drücken Sie die Betriebsartentaste MODE und wählen Sie die / (Slave) Betriebsart. 6. Drücken Sie die Wahltaste SEL, sodass die Anzeige der Kanalwahl blinkt. 35 7. Drücken Sie + oder – , um den Kanal einzustellen. (C1 oder C2) 8. Drücken Sie die Wahltaste SEL, sodass die Anzeige der Blitzleistung blinkt. 9. Drücken Sie + oder – , um die Blitzleistung einzustellen. ◆ Legen Sie die korrekte Blitzbelichtung durch übereinstimmendes Einstellen der Entfernungsanzeige auf dem Display mit der tatsächlichen Entfernung zwischen „Slave“ Gerät und Motiv fest. Sollte sich die tatsächliche Entfernung außerhalb der Blitzreichweite befinden, wählen Sie bitte eine größere Blendenöffnung. 10. Drücken Sie mehrmals die Wahltaste SEL, sodass die Anzeige dauerhaft erscheint. 11. Platzieren Sie den Blitz an der gewünschten Position und achten Sie darauf, dass er nicht auf dem Bild zu sehen ist. Einstellung des Slave Controllers 12. Drücken Sie die Betriebsartentaste MODE und wählen Sie die / (Slave) Betriebsart. 13. Drücken Sie die Wahltaste SEL, sodass die Anzeige der Kanalwahl blinkt. 14. Drücken Sie + oder – , und stellen Sie den gleichen Kanal ein wie an der blitzenden Einheit. 15. Drücken Sie die Wahltaste SEL, sodass die Anzeige der Blitzleistung blinkt. 16. Drücken Sie + , um das Symbol einzustellen. 17. Drücken Sie die Wahltaste SEL, um das Blinken der Anzeige zu beenden. 18. Verbinden Sie den Slave Controller mit dem Kameragehäuse. 19. Nachdem Sie sich vergewissert haben, dass alle Blitzgeräte aufgeladen und blitzbereit sind, betätigen Sie den Auslöser und nehmen das Bild auf. ◆ Wenn der EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI voll aufgeladen ist, beginnt das AF-Hilfslicht zu blinken. ◆ Sie können den Blendenwert nicht durch die SEL Taste einstellen, sofern das Symbol bei der Blitzleistung gewählt wurde. ◆ Die Slave Controller Einheit kontrolliert ausschließlich die blitzenden Geräte. TECHNISCHE DATEN Type Leitzahl Energieversorgung Aufladezeit Blitzanzahl Blitzdauer Ausleuchtwinkel Automatische Abschaltung Gewicht Abmessungen Systemblitzgerät, Aufsteck-Type, serienmäßige TTL-Messung, mit Auto-Zoomreflektor 61 (ISO 100/m, 105mm Blitzkopfeinstellung) 4 AA Type Alkaline Batterien oder 4 AA Type Ni-Cd Akkus oder 4 AA Type Ni-MH Nickel-Metall Hydrid Akkus ca. 7,0 s mit Alkaline Batterien ca. 5,0 s mit Ni-Cd oder Ni-MH Akkus ca. 120 mit Alkaline Batterien ca. 160 mit Ni-Cd oder Ni-MH Akkus ca. 1/700 s bei voller Leistung 24mm～105mm motorgesteuert 17mm mit eingebauter Weitwinkelstreuscheibe Vorhanden 330 Gramm 77mm (B) x 139mm (H) x 117mm (T) 36 FRANÇAIS Nous vous remercions d'avoir choisi le flash électronique Sigma EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI. Ce produit a été conçu spécifiquement pour être utilisé avec les boîtiers reflex SONY AF. Les fonctions et le mode opératoire pouvant varier d'un appareil à l'autre, nous vous recommandons de vous référer au mode d'emploi de votre boîtier. Ce flash dispose d'une grande diversité de fonctions qui vous augmenteront le plaisir que vous éprouvez à faire de la photographie. Pour profiter au mieux de ses possibilités et en tirer le meilleur parti, nous vous suggérons de lire attentivement ce mode d'emploi avant toute utilisation, en ayant sous la main celui de votre appareil. Nous vous conseillons également de le garder toujours à portée de main. PRECAUTIONS Pour éviter tout dommage ou erreur de manipulation, nous vous demandons de lire attentivement ce mode d’emploi avant d’utiliser votre appareil. Nous attirons particulièrement votre attention sur les deux signes d’avertissement ci-dessous. La non prise en compte de cette mise en garde pourrait entraîner un Mise en garde !! accident grave ou un dommage sérieux au produit. non respect de cet avertissement pourrait entraîner un accident ou Avertissement !! Le endommager le produit. Ce symbole marque un point important où la plus grande prudence est requise Ce symbole correspond à une information qu’il convient de respecter Mise en garde !! Ce flash comprend des circuits électriques à haut voltage. N'essayez jamais de démonter le produit, ceci pouvant entraîner une électrocution ou une brûlure. Si la coque est cassée ou fêlée, ne touchez pas les composants internes. Ne déclenchez jamais d'éclair à proximité des yeux. L'intensité lumineuse pourrait créer des dommages irréversibles. Laissez toujours une distance d'au moins 1m/3 pieds entre le visage et l'appareil lorsque vous photographiez avec le flash. Ne touchez pas la griffe lorsque le flash est monté sur l'appareil. Vous pourriez subir une décharge à haute tension. N'utilisez jamais le flash dans un environnement de produits inflammables tels que gaz, produits chimiques, solvants, etc…en raison de risques d'incendie ou d'explosion. Avertissement !! Ce produit a été conçu spécifiquement pour être utilisé avec les boîtiers reflex SONY AF. Toute autre utilisation pourrait endommager les circuits électriques des appareils concernés. Ce flash n'est pas étanche. Tenez-le à l'abri en cas d'utilisation sous la pluie, la neige ou les embruns. Des circuits endommagés par l'eau sont souvent irréparables. N'exposez pas votre flash, ni l'appareil, à un choc, à la poussière, à de très hautes températures ou à l'humidité. Ces éléments pourraient causer des dégâts ou un dysfonctionnement. Si le flash est soumis à un brusque contraste de température, comme de passer d'un extérieur froid à un intérieur bien chauffé, une condensation peut se former à l'intérieur. Dans une telle circonstance, placez le flash dans un sac plastique fermé et ne l'utilisez pas tant qu'il n'a pas atteint la température de la pièce. Ne rangez pas le flash dans un tiroir ou une armoire contenant de la naphtaline, du camphre ou tout autre insecticide. Ceci pourrait provoquer des dysfonctionnements. N'employez pas de dissolvant, de benzène ou tout autre agent chimique pour nettoyer votre flash ou enlever des traces de doigts. N'utilisez qu'un chiffon doux et humide. En cas de stockage prolongé, placez le flash dans un endroit sec et tempéré, de préférence ventilé. Faites le fonctionner plusieurs fois par mois pour entretenir le condensateur. 37 DESCRIPTION DES ELEMENTS ELEMENTS EXTERNES 1.Tête Flash 2.Illuminateur d'assistance AF 3.Angle d'inclinaison : Haut et Bas 4.Angle de rotation: Droite et Gauche 5.Verrouillage de la tête orientable Haut et Bas 6.Verrouillage du pivotement Droite et Gauche 7.Ecran LCD 8.Couvercle du compartiment piles 9.Bouton de deverrouillage 10.Sabot 11.Réflecteur de lumière 12.Elargisseur d'angle CONTROLS 13.Bouton de MODE 14.Bouton SELECT SEL 15.Touche d'incrément + 16.Touche de décrément – 17.Bouton ZOOM 18.Bouton TEST 19.Bouton de rétro éclairage LIGHT 20.Lampe témoin de charge 21.Interrupteur ALIMENTATION ELECTRIQUE Ce flash fonctionne avec quatre piles alcalines ou quatre accus rechargeables Ni-Cd ou Ni-MH de type “AA”. Des piles au manganèse peuvent aussi être utilisées, mais leur durée d'utilisation est plus courte que celle des piles alcalines, et leur usage n'est donc pas conseillé. Remplacez les piles dès que le temps de charge excède 30 secondes. ◆ Nettoyez les contacts des piles avant installation pour assurer une bonne conductivité. ◆ Les accus Ni-Cd ou Ni-Mh n'étant pas standardisés, vérifiez les contacts avec les extrémités du compartiment de piles. ◆ Afin d'éviter tout risque d'explosion, d'écoulement ou de surchauffe, utilisez toujours quatre piles AA neuves de même type et de la même marque. Ne mélangez ni différents types, ni des piles neuves avec des piles usagées. ◆ Ne cherchez pas à démonter les piles, ni à les décharger. Ne les exposez ni au feu, ni à l'eau : il y aurait danger d'explosion. De même, ne cherchez pas à recharger des piles, ou des accumulateurs autres que des accus Ni-Cd ou Ni-Mh. ◆ Si vous n'utilisez pas le flash pendant une longue période, ôtez les piles afin d'éviter tout risque d'écoulement. ◆ La performance des piles diminue sous de basses températures. Protégez-les du froid lorsque vous utilisez le flash par temps froid. ◆ Il est toujours recommandé d'emmener des piles de rechange lors d'un long voyage ou en cas d'utilisation par grand froid. MISE EN PLACE DES PILES 1. Assurez-vous que le flash est éteint (interrupteur principal en position "OFF"). Ouvrez alors le compartiment de piles en faisant glisser le couvercle dans le sens de la flèche. 2. Insérez quatre piles AA dans le compartiment de piles, en respectant les polarités + et – comme indiqué sur les parois. 3. Refermez le couvercle 4. Allumez le flash en plaçant l'interrupteur en position "ON". Après quelques secondes, la lampe témoin de charge s'allume, indiquant que le flash est prêt à fonctionner. 5. Appuyez sur le bouton TEST pour vous assurer que le flash fonctionne correctement. MISE EN VEILLE AUTOMATIQUE Le flash se met en veille automatiquement après environ 240 secondes de non-activation, afin de préserver la puissance des piles. Pour le remettre en route, appuyez sur le bouton TEST ou appuyez à mi-course sur le déclencheur de l'appareil. Le système de mise en veille automatique ne fonctionne pas en mode de flash distant sans cordon, de mode flash esclave normal ou de mode flash esclave désigné. 38 INDICATEUR D'ANOMALIE Si la puissance des piles est insuffisante, ou s'il y a un problème d'information électrique entre le flash et le boîtier, le symbole "Er" clignote sur l'écran LCD. Dans ce cas, éteignez le flash et rallumez-le. Si le témoin clignote encore, vérifiez la puissance des piles. AJUSTEMENT DE LA TETE FLASH Appuyez sur le bouton de verrouillage "Haut et Bas" et relâchez-le ensuite en orientant la tête dans la position souhaitée. ◆ apparaît sur l'écran LCD lorsque vous l'allumez. Si cette icône clignote, c'est que la tête est placée sur une mauvaise position. MISE EN PLACE ET RETRAIT DU FLASH Assurez-vous que le flash est éteint. Placez ensuite le sabot du flash dans la griffe porte-flash de l'appareil jusqu'à son encliquetage. ◆ Lorsque vous attachez ou retirez le flash, tenez bien le corps du flash afin d'éviter d'endommager le sabot ou la griffe porte flash. ◆ Si le flash intégré du boîtier est relevé, rabaissez-le avant de mettre en place le flash sur la griffe. Pour retirer le flash, faites glisser le sabot tout en appuyant sur le bouton de déblocage. REGLAGE DE L'ANGLE DE COUVERTURE Si vous appuyez sur le bouton ZOOM, le symbole apparaît sur l'écran LCD. Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le bouton ZOOM, l'écran LCD affiche la position de la tête zoom selon la séquence suivante : 24mm → 28mm → 35mm → 50mm → 70mm → 85mm → 105mm → (Auto) En mode TTL, le flash ajuste automatiquement la position de la tête zoom en fonction de la focale de l'objectif. ◆ Lorsque vous rallumez le flash, la tête zoom se mettra sur la dernière position utilisée, qui aura été mémorisée. ◆ Si vous utilisez un objectif dont l'angle de champ est supérieur à l'angle couvert par le flash, les angles de l'image pourront être sous-exposés. ◆ La portée de l'éclair du flash varie en fonction de la position de la tête zoom. ELARGISSEUR D'ANGLE Ce flash est pourvu d'un élargisseur d'angle intégré qui procure une couverture d'angle pour une focale de 17mm. Pour l'utiliser, veuillez extraire avec précaution l'élargisseur et le réflecteur et les rabattre devant la tête flash. Remettez ensuite le réflecteur dans son logement. La couverture d'angle se règle automatiquement sur la focale 17mm. ◆ Si l'élargisseur d'angle est arraché accidentellement, la tête zoom automatique ne fonctionne plus. Contactez alors votre revendeur pour faire réparer le flash. 39 RETRO ECLAIRAGE DE L'ECRAN LCD Si vous appuyez sur le bouton LIGHT l'écran LCD est éclairé pendant environ 8 secondes. Ce rétro éclairage peut être interrompu en appuyant à nouveau sur LIGHT . FLASH AUTOMATIQUE TTL En mode de mesure TTL AUTO, l'appareil assure le contrôle de la quantité de lumière nécessaire pour assurer une exposition correcte du sujet. ◆ La méthode de mesure au flash varie selon le type d'appareil et d'objectif utilisés. Nous vous demandons de vous reporter au tableau ci-dessous : (dans tous les cas, le symbole TTL sera affiché sur l'écran LCD) Reflex numérique, Dynax 60, 40, 7, 5, 4, 3L Dynax / Maxuum 9 Autres boîtiers Maxuum 70, 50, 7, 5, 4, 3 Objectif AF-D Mesure ADI Pré-éclair de mesure Mesure TTL Autres objectifs Pré-éclair de mesure Pré-éclair de mesure Mesure TTL 1. Choisissez le mode P sur l'appareil 2. Mettez le flash sous tension; le symbole TTL apparaît sur l'écran LCD et le flash se met en charge. ◆ Avec un reflex numérique, assurez-vous que le symbole est affiché. Dans le cas inverse, appuyez sur les touches + ou – pour faire apparaître le symbole sur l'écran ACL. Sinon, l'exposition ne sera pas correcte. 3. Faites la mise au point sur le sujet 4. Vérifiez que le sujet se trouve bien à l'intérieur de la plage de distance indiquée sur l'écran LCD. 5. Appuyez sur le déclencheur lorsque le flash est chargé. ◆ Si l'appareil a reçu la quantité de lumière appropriée, le signe TTL apparaît pendant 5 secondes sur l'écran LCD. Si cette marque ne s'affiche pas, cela signifie que l'éclairage était insuffisant. Refaites la photo à une moindre distance. ◆ Le faisceau d'assistance AF s'active automatiquement si vous photographiez dans le noir. Il est opérant entre 0,7 et 9 mètres (2.3 à 29.5 pieds). ◆ Lorsque le boîtier est en mode M, le flash se positionne, lors de sa mise sous tension, sur les paramètres précédemment utilisés. ◆ Lorsque le flash est chargé, le témoin de flash apparaît dans le viseur. Si l'obturateur est activé avant la pleine charge, le flash n'émet pas d'éclair, et l'appareil prend la photo en vitesse lente en fonction de la seule lumière ambiante. UTILISATION DU FLASH DANS LES AUTRES MODES Réglage en mode de priorité à la vitesse Lorsque vous sélectionnez la vitesse souhaitée, l'appareil détermine la valeur d'ouverture appropriée. Vous ne devez pas choisir une vitesse plus rapide que la vitesse de synchronisation. Réglage en mode de priorité à l'ouverture En mode A, l'appareil sélectionne la vitesse appropriée à une exposition correcte de l'arrière-plan. Dans ce mode, le flash fonctionne en mode de déclenchement systématique. Utilisation en mode M Vous pouvez sélectionner à la fois la vitesse et la valeur d'ouverture. La vitesse peut être choisie entre la vitesse de synchronisation et la pose B (bulb). ◆ Dans ce mode, le flash est activé systématiquement. ◆ Si vous réglez l'exposition en fonction des indications du boîtier, l' appareil fonctionnera comme en mode de synchronisation à la lumière du jour ou en synchronisation lente 40 LIMITES DES PRISES DE VUE CONSECUTIVES AU FLASH Pour éviter une surchauffe, laissez le flash au repos au moins 10 minutes après des séquences de prises de vues consécutives en respectant le tableau ci-dessous. Mode TTL, M(1/1,1/2) M(1/4, 1/8) M(1/16-1/32) Stroboscopique Nombre d'éclairs 20 éclairs consécutifs 25 éclairs consécutifs 40 éclairs consécutifs 10 Cycles MODE OPERATOIRE EN FLASH MANUEL Le flash manuel est utile quand l'obtention d'une exposition correcte en mode TTL est difficile. En mode manuel, il est possible de faire varier la puissance du flash de la pleine puissance 1/1 au 1/64 de puissance. 1. Sélectionnez le mode M sur le boîtier. 2. Appuyez sue le bouton MODE du flash et sélectionnez la marque M. 3. Appuyez sur le bouton SEL pour faire clignoter le symbole du rapport de puissance 4. Appuyez sur les touches + ou – pour sélectionner la puissance souhaitée. 5. La valeur de puissance cesse de clignoter et s'affiche en continu après une nouvelle pression sur le bouton SEL . 6. Faites la mise au point. Vérifiez la distance sur la bague de distance de l'objectif. Ajustez ensuite l'ouverture ou le ratio de puissance de manière à faire au mieux la portée indiquée sur l'écran LCD du flash avec la distance réelle du sujet. 7. Lorsque le flash est chargé, il est prêt à déclencher. ◆ Vous pouvez calculer l'exposition correcte en utilisant la formule ci-dessous Nombre Guide “GN” / distance du sujet = valeur F du diaphragme Le flash calcule et détermine la distance appropriée en utilisant cette formule. (voir le tableau 1 en dernière page) SYNCHRO HAUTE VITESSE (HSS) Lorsque vous photographiez au flash, vous ne pouvez pas, normalement, utiliser une vitesse plus rapide que la vitesse de synchronisation car le flash ne peut fonctionner que durant la pleine ouverture de l'obturateur. La synchronisation rapide (Grande Vitesse) permet d'émettre alors même que le rideau de l'obturateur est en mouvement. Vous pouvez donc utiliser une vitesse d'obturation plus rapide que la vitesse de synchronisation. 1. Choisissez le mode flash en appuyant sur le bouton MODE (les modes “TTL” et “M” peuvent être utilisés). 2. Appuyez sur la touche + ou – pour faire apparaître le symbole sur l'écran LCD. 3. Faites la mise au point sur le sujet. 4. Lorsque le flash est chargé, il est prêt à déclencher. ◆ Le nombre Guide varie selon la vitesse choisie (voir le tableau 2 en dernière page) ◆ Pour annuler le mode de flash FP, reprenez la procédure ci-dessus en supprimant le symbole de l'écran LCD. FLASH PREDICTIF La fonction de flash prédictif permet de visualiser l'éclairage et les effets d'ombres avant de prendre la photo. 41 1. Appuyez sur le bouton MODE et sélectionnez le mode flash désiré. 2. Appuyez sur + ou – à plusieurs reprises pour faire apparaître l'icône sur l'écran LCD. 3. Assurez-vous que le flash est chargé, et appuyez ensuite sur le bouton TEST pour déclencher le pré-flashage prédictif. MODE DE FLASH STROBOSCOPIQUE (MULTI FLASH) Dans ce mode créatif, le flash émet une série d'éclairs pendant l'ouverture de l'obturateur, générant ainsi une série d'images du sujet sur la même vue. Le sujet sera particulièrement mis en valeur si l'arrière-plan est sombre. La fréquence des éclairs peut être choisie entre 1Hz et 100Hz. Il est possible de produire jusqu'à 90 éclairs en continu. Le nombre maximal d'éclairs dépend du nombre guide du flash et de la fréquence retenue. (voir le tableau 3 en dernière page). 1. Sélectionnez le mode M sur le boîtier et choisissez l'ouverture. 2. Appuyez sur le bouton MODE pour afficher le symbole MULTI. 3. Appuyez sur SEL jusqu'à ce que l'affichage de la fréquence clignote 4. Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionnez la fréquence souhaitée. 5. Appuyez à nouveau sur SEL pour faire clignoter l'indicateur de puissance. 6. Appuyez sur + ou – pour entrer la puissance désirée. 7. Appuyez à nouveau sur SEL , le nombre d'éclairs clignote. 8. Appuyez sur + ou – pour paramétrer le nombre d'éclairs. 9. Appuyez à nouveau sur SEL pour faire cesser le clignotement de l'affichage. 10. Le flash est prêt dès que le témoin de charge s'allume. Nota: Choisissez toujours une vitesse plus longue que : Nombre d'éclairs / Fréquence des éclairs FLASH INDIRECT Lors d'une prise de vue au flash en intérieur, il est fréquent qu'une ombre indésirable apparaisse derrière le sujet. Si vous orientez le réflecteur vers le plafond ou sur le côté vers un mur, l'éclairage du sujet sera plus doux. Déverrouillez la tête orientable et orientez le réflecteur pour réaliser un éclairage indirect. Les angles suivants sont possibles : HAUT : 0°, 60°, 75°, 90° BAS; 0°,7° (Pour prise de vue rapprochée) DROITE: 0°, 60°, 75°, 90° GAUCHE: 0°, 60°,75°,90°,120°,150°, 180° Lorsque la tête est en position de flash indirect, l'icône s'affiche sur l'écran LCD. La lumière prenant la teinte de la surface sur laquelle elle se réfléchit, il est recommandé de choisir une surface blanche. Selon les propriétés réfléchissantes de la surface, la distance du sujet et d'autres facteurs, l'intensité et la distance réelle parcourue par l'éclair peuvent varier. Il est conseillé de vérifier la confirmation de l'exposition correcte (symbole TTL sur l'écran LCD) après la prise de vue. PRISE DE VUE RAPPROCHEE La tête peut être orientée de 7° vers le bas pour la prise de vue rapprochée. Cette position ne doit être utilisée que pour des distances comprises entre 0,5 et 2 mètres. Lorsque le réflecteur est incliné de 7° vers le bas, l'icône clignote. REFLECTEUR DE LUMIERE Ce flash est pourvu d'un réflecteur de lumière intégré qui permet de créer un effet de lumière harmonieux dans les yeux du sujet en mode d'éclairage indirect. . Pour l'utiliser, veuillez extraire avec précaution l'élargisseur et le réflecteur et les rabattre devant la tête flash. Remettez ensuite le diffuseur dans son logement. 42 ◆ Pour tirer le meilleur parti du diffuseur, orientez la tête à 90° vers le haut et photographiez à faible distance. FLASH DISTANT SANS CORDON (Wireless) Le mode de commande de flash TTL sans cordon permet de varier les angles d'éclairage, d'accentuer des reliefs en jouant avec les ombres ou de rendre l'éclairage plus naturel en faisant varier la position du flash, sans aucun problème de liaison ou de connexion avec le boîtier. Avec le flash EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI, la communication entre l'appareil et le flash se fait au moyen d'un éclair codé émis par le flash intégré. Dans ce mode, l'appareil détermine automatiquement l'exposition correcte. ◆ Dans les instructions qui suivent, nous appellerons "flash de commande" le flash attaché au boîtier, et "flash détaché" un flash distant de l'appareil. ◆ Il peut être pratique d'utiliser un mini-pied pour le flash détaché. Le support livré à cette fin avec le flash comporte un pas de vis permettant de le fixer à un trépied. ◆ Assurez-vous que le flash ne se situe pas dans le champ de la prise de vue. ◆ Placez le flash à une distance comprise entre 0,5m et 5m du sujet (1.5~16ft), et l'appareil entre 1m et 5m du sujet (3~16ft). ◆ Dans le cas où d'autres personnes utiliseraient le mode distant sans cordon près de vous, il peur se créer des interférences entre vos flashes et les leurs. Vous pouvez sélectionner chacun un canal de communication différent en vous reportant aux instructions ci-dessus. A. UTILISATION DU FLASH INTEGRE EN TANT QUE FLASH DE COMMANDE 1. Positionnez le boîtier en mode flash WireLess. ◆ La procédure de réglage dépendant du boîtier utilisé, nous vous demandons de vous reporter au mode d’emploi de votre appareil. 2. Choisissez le mode d’exposition P, A, S, ou M sur votre boîtier du flash jusqu’à ce que l’icône 3. Appuyez sur le bouton flash détaché apparaisse sur l’écran. 4. Réglez le numéro de flash détaché sur 1 en appuyant sur la touche . afin de sélectionner le mode Flash TTL. 5. Appuyez sur le bouton pour faire clignoter le numéro du canal. 6. Appuyez sur la touche 7. Appuyez sur la touche ou pour sélectionner le canal (C1 – C4). pour faire cesser le clignotement. 8. Appuyez sur la touche 9. Placez le flash sur l’appareil et appuyez à mi-course sur le déclencheur (le numéro du canal est enregistré par l’appareil). 10. Détachez le flash de l'appareil et placez-le à l'endroit désiré 11. Sortez le flash intégré de l'appareil et vérifiez qu'il est chargé. ◆ En mode de flash distant sans cordon, le faisceau d'assistance AF du flash détaché clignote pour indiquer qu'il est chargé. 12. Faites la mise au point pour prendre la photo. ◆ Le flash EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI se déclenchera en même temps que le flash intégré. L'éclair émis par ce dernier ne sert qu'à contrôler le flash EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI, qui est le seul à servir à l'éclairage du sujet. L'appareil ajuste la puissance du flash en mode Auto TTL pour assurer une exposition correcte. ◆ En fonction de la vitesse d’obturation, le flash fonctionnera automatiquement entre flash normal et synchronisation à haute vitesse. ◆ Lorsque le mode d’exposition du boîtier est le mode M, le flash sera en mode distant manuel. Après avoir sélectionné le numéro de canal, le niveau de puissance du flash clignotera. Sélectionnez la puissance souhaitée en appuyant sur les touches ou et ensuite appuyez sur la touche pour faire cesser le clignotement. 43 B. UTILISATION D'UN FLASH ATTACHE EN TANT QUE FLASH DE COMMANDE En mode distant sans fil, deux ou plusieurs flashes EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI sont nécessaires. Le flash EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI peut être utilisé uniquement en tant que flash détaché. Selon le modèle de flash utilisé il est nécessaire de changer le mode de contrôle du flash de commande. Voir le tableau ci-dessous (le flash EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI étant utilisé comme flash de commande). Type de flash pouvant être utilisé comme flash détaché Mode de contrôle Type de boîtier pouvant être utilisé en mode flash détaché Réglage du contrôle ratio d’éclairage Mode Flash EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI + EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI - α700, α900 α900 Il est possible de contrôler jusque 3 groupes : Flash de commande, Flash détaché 1 et Flash détaché 2. Il est possible de paramétrer le ratio d’éclairage de chaque type sur 5 niveaux ou sur inactif. Flash Auto TTL, Flash à synchronisation Haute Vitesse (TTL, M), Flash manuel. Il est possible de contrôler 2 groupes : Flash de commande et Flash détaché. Flash de commande : il est possible de paramétrer le ratio du flash détaché sur 1 :2 ou 2 :1. Flash Auto TTL, Flash à synchronisation Haute Vitesse (TTL) B-1.ECLAIRAGE PAR LE FLASH DETACHE SEULEMENT. Réglage du boîtier et du Flash de commande 1. Positionnez le boîtier en mode flash WireLess. ◆ La procédure de réglage dépendant du boîtier utilisé, nous vous demandons de vous reporter au mode d’emploi de votre appareil. 2. Choisissez le mode d’exposition P, A, S, ou M sur votre boîtier. 3. Placez le flash sur l’appareil 4. L'écran ACL du flash se positionne automatiquement sur les réglages. (Si ce n'est pas le cas, jusqu'à ce que les réglages du flash apparaissent sur l’écran.) appuyez sur la touche pour faire clignoter l’affichage du mode de contrôle. 5. Appuyez sur la touche 6. Appuyez sur la touche ou afin de paramétrer le mode de contrôle sur . pour faire clignoter le numéro de canal. 7. Appuyez sur la touche ou pour sélectionner le canal (C1 – C4). 8. Appuyez sur la touche 9. Appuyez sur la touche pour faire clignoter l’affichage du ratio d’éclairage. ou afin de paramétrer le mode de contrôle du ratio d’éclairage sur [ ]. 10. Appuyez sur la touche 11. Appuyez sur la touche pour faire cesser le clignotement. Réglage du flash detaché 12. Appuyez sur le bouton du flash jusqu’à ce que l’icône flash détaché apparaisse sur l’écran. 13. Définissez le numéro de flash détaché à 1 en appuyant sur la touche . afin de sélectionner le mode Flash TTL. 14. Appuyez sur le bouton 15. Appuyez sur la touche pour faire clignoter le numéro du canal. ou pour sélectionner le même numéro de canal paramétré sur le 16. Appuyez sur la touche flash de commande. 17. Appuyez sur la touche pour faire cesser le clignotement. 18. Placez le flash détaché à l'emplacement désiré. 19. Vérifiez que les deux flashes sont chargés. ◆ Le témoin de charge est allumé et le faisceau d'assistance AF du flash détaché clignote. 20. Faites la mise au point sur le sujet et prenez la photo. 44 B-2. PARAMETRAGE D’UN RATIO D’ECLAIRAGE (MODE DE CONTROLE ) Réglage du boîtier et du flash de commande 1. Effectuez les opérations 1 à 9 du paragraphe B-1. ou afin de paramétrer 2. Appuyez sur la touche l’affichage du mode de contrôle du ratio d’éclairage sur [ ]. pour faire clignoter l’affichage du 3. Appuyez sur la touche mode flash. ou pour placer le mode flash 4. Appuyez sur la touche sur TTL. pour faire clignoter l’affichage du ratio d’éclairage [ ] du flash de 5. Appuyez sur la touche commande. 6. Appuyez sur la touche ou pour définir le ratio d’éclairage du flash de commande. pour faire clignoter l’affichage du ratio d’éclairage [ ] du flash 7. Appuyez sur la touche détaché 1. ou pour définir le ratio d’éclairage du flash détaché 1. 8. Appuyez sur la touche pour faire clignoter l’affichage du ratio d’éclairage [ ] du flash 9. Appuyez sur la touche détaché 2. ou pour définir le ratio d’éclairage du flash détaché 2. 10. Appuyez sur la touche 11. Appuyez sur la touche pour faire cesser le clignotement. Réglage du flash détaché 12. Effectuez les mêmes opérations qu’au paragraphe B-1 Réglage du flash détaché ◆ Dans le cas d’utilisation de plusieurs flashes détachés, attribuez un numéro de flash détaché à chacun d’entre eux. ◆ Il est possible de paramétrer le ratio d’éclairage des flash de commande, flash détaché 1 et flash détaché 2 comme suit : (Flash inactif) 1 2 4 8 16 Le ratio de la puissance de chaque flash est définie par la valeur de chaque unité / valeur totale [Exemple] Valeur paramétrée Ratio d’éclairage du flash Flash de commande 2 2/7 Flash détaché 1 1 1/7 Flash détaché 2 4 4/7 B-3. PARAMETRAGE D’UN RATIO D’ECLAIRAGE (MODE DE CONTROLE ) Réglage du boîtier et du flash de commande 1. Effectuez les opérations 1 à 6 du paragraphe B-1. ou afin de paramétrer le mode 2. Appuyez sur la touche de contrôle sur . pour faire clignoter le numéro du 3. Appuyez sur la touche canal. ou pour sélectionner le canal 4. Appuyez sur la touche (C1 – C4). 5. Appuyez sur la touche ou afin de paramétrer l’affichage du mode de contrôle du ratio d’éclairage sur [ ]. 6. Appuyez sur la touche pour faire clignoter l’affichage du ratio d’éclairage. 7. Appuyez sur la touche ou afin de paramétrer le ratio du flash de commande / flash ou détaché. (Sélectionnez ). 8. Appuyez sur la touche pour faire cesser le clignotement. 45 Réglage du flash détaché 9. Si le flash détaché est le flash EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI, effectuez les mêmes opérations qu’au paragraphe B-1 Réglage du flash détaché ◆ Si le flash détaché est le flash EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI, nous vous demandons de vous reporter au mode d’emploi du flash EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI. ◆ Si le flash détaché est le flash EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI, le numéro de canal peut uniquement être sélectionné de C1 à C3. FLASH ESCLAVE FLASH ESCLAVE NORMAL Cette fonction vous permet d'utiliser le flash EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI à distance du boîtier, en utilisant le flash intégré ou tout autre flash pour l'activer. 1. Commencez par placer le flash sur la griffe de l'appareil. 2. Choisissez le mode d'exposition. Si vous utilisez le mode A ou M, fixez également la valeur d'ouverture. 3. Mettez le flash sous tension. Appuyez ensuite à mi-course sur le déclencheur. ◆ Les valeurs d'ouverture et la sensibilité du film ont ainsi été transmises automatiquement au flash. 4. Retirez le flash de l'appareil. 5. Appuyez sur le bouton MODE et sélectionnez le symbole / . 6. Appuyez sur le bouton SEL à plusieurs reprises jusqu'à faire clignoter l'indicateur de puissance. 7. Appuyez sur + ou – pour déterminer la puissance souhaitée. ◆ La puissance doit être déterminée en faisant coïncider au mieux l'indicateur de distance de l'écran LCD avec la distance réelle existant entre le flash esclave et le sujet. Si la distance réelle est en dehors de la plage indiquée sur l'écran LCD, il faut changer la valeur d'ouverture. ◆ Vous pouvez régler la sensibilité du film ou la valeur d'ouverture manuellement si vous le souhaitez. a. Pour régler la sensibilité du film… Appuyez sur MODE pour sélectionner le symbole , et appuyez ensuite sur SEL jusqu'à ce que l'indicateur clignote. Appuyez sur + ou – pour paramétrer la sensibilité, et appuyez à nouveau sur SEL pour valider. b. Pour régler la valeur d'ouverture… Après avoir positionné le flash en mode esclave, appuyez sur SEL pour faire clignoter l'indicateur de valeur d'ouverture et appuyez sur + ou – pour déterminer l'ouverture. Appuyez ensuite sur SEL . 8. Appuyez sur SEL à plusieurs reprises pour valider la puissance. 9. Placez le flash à l'emplacement désiré. Prenez garde qu'il ne soit pas dans le champ de l'image. 10. Après avoir vérifié que tous les flashes sont chargés, prenez la photo. ◆ Lorsque le flash EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI est en pleine charge, la lumière d'assistance AF clignote. ◆ Le flash EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI ne fonctionnera pas s'il est attaché sur l'appareil lorsqu'il est en mode de Flash esclave. ◆ Si vous utilisez un flash de marque SONY, ou le flash intégré du boîtier en mode TTL, et le flash EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI en tant que flash esclave, n'activez pas la fonction ADI, le pré-flashage pouvant faire déclencher le flash esclave prématurément. FLASH ESCLAVE DESIGNE Si vous utilisez deux ou plus de deux flashes EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI, vous pouvez désigner quels flashes se déclencheront ensemble en paramétrant des canaux de communication. Dans ce mode, un flash servira de flash esclave de contrôle, et les autres de flashes esclaves d'éclairage. 46 Préparation du ou des flashes d'éclairage 1. Attachez le flash sur la griffe de l'appareil. 2. Choisissez le mode d'exposition S ou M. ◆ Sélectionnez une vitesse d'obturation de 1/30 ou moins rapide. Le flash de contrôle enverra un signal codé avant le déclenchement des éclairs d'éclairage. Si vous utilisez une vitesse plus rapide que 1/30 sec., les flash d'éclairage ne seront pas synchronisées. 3. Mettez le flash sous tension et appuyez à mi-course sur le déclencheur. ◆ Les valeurs d'ouverture et la sensibilité du film ont ainsi été transmises automatiquement au flash. 4. Retirez le flash de l'appareil. 5. Appuyez sur le bouton MODE et sélectionnez le symbole / . (Mode de flash esclave) 6. Appuyez sur le bouton SEL pour faire clignoter l'indicateur de canal. 7. Appuyez sur la touche + ou – pour sélectionner le canal. (C1 ou C2) 8. Appuyez sur SEL pour faire clignoter l'indicateur de puissance. 9. Appuyez sur la touche + ou – pour choisir la puissance souhaitée. ◆ La puissance doit être déterminée en faisant coïncider au mieux l'indicateur de distance de l'écran LCD avec la distance réelle existant entre le flash esclave et le sujet. Si la distance réelle est en dehors de la plage indiquée sur l'écran LCD, il faut changer la valeur d'ouverture. 10. Appuyez sur SEL à plusieurs reprises pour afficher les paramètres sélectionnés. 11. Placez le flash à l'emplacement désiré. Prenez garde qu'il ne soit pas dans le champ de l'image. Préparation du flash de contrôle 12. Appuyez sur le bouton MODE et sélectionnez le symbole / (Mode de flash esclave). 13. Appuyez sur le bouton SEL pour faire clignoter l'indicateur de canal. 14. Appuyez sur la touche + ou – et sélectionnez le même canal que celui retenu pour les flashes d'éclairage. 15. Appuyez sur SEL pour faire clignoter l'indicateur de puissance. 16. Appuyez sur la touche + pour faire apparaître l'icône . 17. Appuyez sur SEL pour confirmer et faire cesser le clignotement. 18. Attachez le flash esclave de contrôle sur l'appareil. 19. Après vous être assuré que tous les flashes sont chargés, prenez la photo. ◆ Lorsque les flashes d'éclairage sont chargés, leur lumière d'assistance AF clignote. ◆ Vous ne pouvez pas régler l'ouverture avec le bouton SEL lorsque vous avez sélectionné l'icône lors du réglage de la puissance, le flash étant en mode de flash esclave de contrôle. ◆ Le flash esclave de contrôle ne sert qu'au contrôle du déclenchement des flashes d'éclairage. CARACTERISTIQUES TECHNIQUES TYPE : Flash électronique à tête zoom automatique et orientable à contrôle TTL NOMBRE GUIDE : 61 (100 ISO/m, avec réflecteur en position 105mm) ALIMENTATION : Quatre piles alcalines de type AA ou : Quatre accumulateurs Ni-Cd de type AA ou : Quatre accumulateurs Ni-Mh de type AA TEMPS DE RECYCLAGE : environ 7,0 sec. (avec piles alcalines) : environ 5,0 sec. (accus Ni-Cd et Ni-Mh) NOMBRE D'ECLAIRS : environ 120 éclairs (piles alcalines) : environ about 160 éclairs (accus Ni-Cd et Ni-Mh) DUREE DE L'ECLAIR : environ 1 / 700 sec. (à pleine puissance) ANGLE D'ECLAIRAGE : 24~105mm avec motorisation automatique 17mm avec l'élargisseur d'angle intégré. MISE EN VEILLE AUTOMATIQUE : oui POIDS : 330 g DIMENSIONS : 76mm(l) x 138mm(H) x 116mm(L) 47 ESPAÑOL Muchas gracias por comprar el Flash electrónico Sigma EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI. Este producto ha sido desarrollado específicamente para cámaras SLR de SONY AF. Dependiendo del modelo de cámara, las funciones serán diferentes. Por favor lea este manual de instrucciones detenidamente para el cuerpo de su cámara. Para disfrutar de la fotografía, el flash tiene una variedad de características. Para utilizar la mayoría de estas características, y obtener el máximo rendimiento y disfrutar de su flash, por favor lea este libro de instrucciones junto con el manual de su cámara antes de utilizar el flash, y guárdelo a mano para próximas consultas. PRECAUCIONES Para evitar posibles daños o perjuicios. Por favor lea el manual de instrucciones muy atentamente, y preste atención a los símbolos de precaución que vienen a continuación antes de utilizar el flash. Por favor tome nota de los dos símbolos de precaución que aparecen a continuación. el símbolo de Advertencia al utilizar este producto, puede causar serio Advertencia!! Ignorar perjuicios o otros daños. Ignorar el símbolo de Advertencia al utilizar este producto, puede causar Cuidado!! daños o perjuicios. Este símbolo significa puntos importantes, que se requiere cuidado o advertencia. O Este símbolo contiene información con respecto a acciones que deben prevenir. Advertencia!! Este flash contiene circuitos de alto voltaje. Para evitar quemaduras no intente desmontar el flash. Si la carcasa exterior se rompe no toque los mecanismos interiores. No dispare el flash cerca de los ojos. El brillo del destello podría dañar los ojos. Mantenga una distancia de al menos 1m entre la cara y la cámara, cuando realice fotografías con flash. No toque el terminal sincro de la cámara cuando el flash está conectado a la zapata. El circuito de alto voltaje podría causar un shock eléctrico. Nunca utilice el equipo en ambientes inflamables, con llamas, gases, líquidos o químicos, etc. Podría causar un incendio o una explosión. Cuidado!! No utilice este flash en ninguno otra cámara que no sea de SONY AF SLR, se podría dañar el circuito de estas cámaras. Esta unidad de flash no es resistente al agua. Cuando utilice el flash y la cámara con lluvia, nieve o cerca del agua, cuide que no se humedezca. A menudo es imposible reparar componentes eléctricos internos estropeados a causa del agua. Nunca deje la cámara en un lugar con polvo, alta temperatura o húmedo. Estos factores pueden causar fuego o estropear su equipo. Cuando el flash está sujeto a cambios bruscos de temperatura, como cuando transporta la unidad de flash de un lugar frío exterior a uno cálido interior. En este caso, ponga su equipo en una bolsa de plástico sellada y no utilice la unidad de flash hasta que alcance la temperatura de ola habitación. No almacene el flash en un armario, cajón, etc., si contiene naftalina, o otros insecticidas. Esto podría producir efectos negativos en la unidad de flash. No utilice gasolina o otros agentes de limpieza para sacar el polvo o huellas dactilares. Límpiese con un trapo de ropa suave. Para un almacenamiento prolongado, escoja un lugar frío y seco, preferiblemente con buena ventilación. Dispare el flash unas cuantas veces al mes para mantener en buen estado sus funciones. 48 DESCRIPCIÓN DE LAS PARTES PARTES EXTERIORES 1. Cabezal de flash 2. Luz auxiliar AF 3. Angulo de basculación; Arriba y abajo 4. Angulo de giro; Derecha e izquierda 5. Botón de bloqueo y desbloqueo de la basculación; Arriba y abajo 6. Botón de bloqueo y desbloqueo del giro; Derecha e izquierda 7. Pantalla LCD 8. Tapa de las pilas 9. Botón de desbloqueo 10. Zapata 11. Panel de luz rebotada 12. Panel angular CONTROLES 13. Botón de MODO 14. <SEL> Botón SELECTOR 15. <+> Botón de Incremento 16. Botón de Disminución 17. Botón de ZOOM 18. Botón de TEST 19. Botón de LUZ 20. Luz de preparado 21. Interruptor de encendido ACERCA DE LAS PILAS Esta unidad de flash utiliza cuatro pilas Alcalinas de tipo “AA” o pilas recargables Ni-Cad / Ni-MH. Las pilas de Magnesio también se pueden utilizar aunque tienen una vida más corta que las alcalinas. No recomendamos utilizarlas. Por favor cambie las pilas si la Luz de Preparado tarda más de 30 segundos en iluminarse. ◆ Para asegurar un buen contacto eléctrico, limpie las terminales de las pilas antes de instalarlas. ◆ Las pilas Ni-Cad / Ni-MH, no tienen contactos estandarizados. Si utiliza las pilas Ni-Cad / Ni-MH, por favor confirme que los contactos de las baterías coinciden correctamente con el compartimento de las pilas. ◆ Para prevenir la explosión de las pilas, una fuga o recalentamiento, utilice cuatro pilas nuevas AA del mismo tipo y de la misma marca. No mezcle diferentes tipos ni pilas nuevas y usadas. ◆ No desmonte o haga un corto circuito con las pilas, o las exponga al fuego o al agua; podrían explotar. Tampoco intente recargar pilas que no sean Ni-Cad / Ni-MH recargables. ◆ Cuando el flash no se vaya a utilizar en un periodo largo, saque las pilas del flash, para evitar posibles daños o roturas. ◆ La vida de las pilas decrece a temperaturas bajas. Guarde las pilas en un lugar cálido cuando utilice el flash con un tiempo frío. ◆ Como con ningún flash, se recomienda que se lleven pilas de recambio cuando se realice un viaje largo o se fotografíe al exterior con temperaturas bajas. CARGA DE LAS PILAS 1. Asegúrese de ajustar el flash a la posición off, entonces deslice la tapa de las pilas en dirección de la flecha para abrir el compartimento. 2. Inserte cuatro pilas del tamaño AA en el compartimento de las pilas. Asegúrese que el + y el – de las pilas coincide con el dibujo del compartimento. 3. Cierre la tapa. 4. Deslice el interruptor de encendido a la posición ON. Después de unos segundos la luz de preparado se iluminará, indicando que la unidad de flash ya está a punto. 5. Por favor presione el “botón de Test “ para estar seguro de que el flash funciona correctamente. DESACTIVACIÓN AUTOMÁTICA Para conservar la carga de las pilas, el flash se desactiva cuando no se utiliza durante aproximadamente 240 segundos. Para activar el flash de nuevo, presione el botón TEST, o el disparador de la cámara suavemente. Tenga en cuenta que la “desconexión automática no funciona con el modo “por control remoto”, con el flash esclavo normal ni en los modos de flash esclavo. 49 AJUSTE DEL CABEZAL DEL FLASH Presione el botón de bloqueo y desbloqueo del movimiento arriba y abajo, mientras ajusta el cabezal a la posición deseada. Aparecerá en la pantalla LCD cuando ponga en marcha el flash, y si esta marca parpadea entonces el cabezal del flash no está ajustado a una posición correcta. AJUSTE DEL CABEZAL DEL FLASH Presione el botón de bloqueo y desbloqueo del movimiento arriba y abajo, mientras ajusta el cabezal a la posición deseada. ◆ Aparecerá en la pantalla LCD cuando ponga en marcha el flash, y si esta marca parpadea entonces el cabezal del flash no está ajustado a una posición correcta. MONTAR Y DESMONTAR EL FLASH A LA CAMARA Asegúrese que el flash está desconectado. Entonces inserte la base de la zapata en la zapata de la cámara y gire el anillo de la zapata hasta que esté ajustado. ◆ Cuando coloque o desmonte el flash, agarre el botón del flash para prevenir daños en el pie de la zapata y la zapata de la cámara. ◆ Si el flash incorporado de la cámara esta alzado, por favor ciérrela antes de montar la unidad de flash. Para desmontar el flash de la cámara, deslice el flash hacia fuera mientras presiona el botón de desbloqueo. AJUSTAR EL ANGULO DE COBERTURA DEL FLASH Cuando presione el botón ZOOM, aparece el símbolo , cada vez que presiona el botón ZOOM, en la pantalla LCD cambiará y indicará la posición de Zoom en secuencia, tal y como se muestra a continuación. 24mm → 28mm → 35mm → 50mm → 70mm → 85mm → 105mm → (Auto) Generalmente, en el modo TTL, el flash ajustará automáticamente la posición del zoom de acuerdo con la focal del objetivo. ◆ Cuando pone en conecta el interruptor principal, el flash memorizará y ajustará el cabezal zoom a la última posición ajustada. ◆ Si utiliza un objetivo más angular que el cabezal del flash, puede que surjan zonas subexpuestas alrededor de la fotografía. ◆ Dependiendo del ajuste del cabezal del flash, la potencia del flash puede cambiar. PANTALLA ANGULAR Este flash está equipado con un panel angular, que proporciona un ángulo de cobertura ultra angular de 17mm. Extraiga el panel angular y el panel de luz rebotada y déjelo caer hasta cubrir el cabezal del flash. (Sea cuidadoso a la hora de deslizar los paneles). Después recoja el panel de luz rebotada a su lugar. El ángulo de cobertura del flash se ajustará automáticamente a 17mm. 50 ◆ Si la pantalla angular incorporada, sale accidentalmente, el botón ZOOM no funcionará. En este caso póngase en contacto con el establecimiento dónde compró el flash o con el servicio técnico. ILUMINACIÓN DE LA PANTALLA LCD Cuando presiona el botón LIGHT, la pantalla LCD se iluminará acerca de 8 segundos. La iluminación se prolongará si vuelve a presionar el botón light otra vez. FLASH AUTOMÁTICO TTL En el modo TTL AUTO, la cámara controlará la cantidad de luz para obtener la exposición correcta del sujeto. ◆ Dependiendo del modelo de cámara y la combinación con los objetivos, el procedimiento del flash TTL varia. Por favor vea el cuadro a continuación. (En todas las combinaciones, TTL aparecerá en la pantalla LCD) Digitales réflex, Otros modelos de Dynax 9 Dynax 60, 40, 7, 5, 4, 3L (Maxxum 9) cámara Maxxum 70, 50, 7, 5, 4, 3 Tipo de objetivos D Tipo de objetivo NO D Medición ADI Medición Pre-flash Medición Pre-flash Medición Pre-flash Medición normal TTL Medición normal TTL 1. Seleccione el modo P en la cámara. 2. Conecte el flash, la marca TTL aparecerá en la pantalla LCD y el flash empezará a cargarse. ◆ Por favor, asegúrese que en las cámaras digitales réflex la está activada. Si el indicador no aparece en función la pantalla LCD, presione el botón + o – para que éste aparezca, de lo contrario la exposición no será correcta. 3. Enfoque el sujeto. 4. Compruebe que el sujeto está localizado en el rango efectivo de distancia que se indica en la pantalla LCD 5. Presione el botón de disparo después que el flash esté completamente cargado. ◆ Cuando la cámara recibe la exposición adecuada, la marca TTL en la pantalla LCD aparecerá durante 5 segundos. Si esta indicación no aparece, la iluminación del flash no es suficiente para esta situación. Por favor vuelva a realizar la fotografía a una distancia menor. ◆ La luz auxiliar AF se activará automáticamente si se enfoca en un lugar oscuro. La distancia efectiva es aproximadamente de 0.7 a 9 metros. ◆ Recuerde que cuando utiliza el flash con la cámara al modo M, el flash se ajustará al último modo seleccionado. ◆ Cuando el flash está completamente cargado, la marca del flash aparecerá en el visor. Si se realiza el disparo antes de que el flash esté completamente cargado, la cámara realizará la fotografía a la velocidad más lenta. UTILIZACIÓN DEL FLASH CON OTROS MODELOS DE CÁMARAS Ajuste para la prioridad de velocidad Cuando seleccione la velocidad de obturación deseada, la cámara seleccionará el diafragma apropiado. No podrá escoger una velocidad superior a la sincronización de la cámara. Ajuste para prioridad de diafragma. Seleccionando el modo A de la cámara, después de escoger el diafragma deseado la cámara seleccionará la velocidad apropiada para el fondo. Se utilizará el flash de relleno cuando se seleccione este modo. Cuando se utiliza con el Modo M Usted puede ajustar el diafragma y la velocidad deseada. Puede ajustar la velocidad desde la velocidad Pose a la velocidad sincro. 51 ◆ El flash de relleno se utiliza cuando se selecciona este modo. ◆ Si se ajusta la exposición de acuerdo con la indicación del fotómetro, la cámara trabajará como sincro de luz día o sincro lenta. LIMITACIONES DEL DISPARO CONTINUO Para prevenir recalentamientos, por favor no utilice la unidad de flash por lo menos 10 minutos después de utilizar el número de exposiciones que se muestran en la tabla a continuación. Modo Número de exposiciones con Flash TTL, M(1/1,1/2) 20 Disparos continuos de flash M(1/4, 1/8) 25 Disparos continuos de flash M(1/16-1/32) 40 Disparos continuos de flash Multi Ciclo 10 OPERACIÓN CON EL FLASH MANUAL El flash manual es aconsejable cuando la correcta exposición de los sujetos es difícil de obtener con el modo TTL. En el modo de flash manual, se puede ajustar el nivel de potencia del flash que va desde 1/1 (completamente cargado) a 1/64, con incrementos de 1 paso. 1. Ajuste la exposición de la cámara al modo M. 2. Presione el botón MODE en la unidad de flash para seleccionar M. 3. El número guía parpadeará cuando presione el botón SEL 4. Presione el botón + o – para seleccionar la potencia de flash deseada. 5. El display del flash manual dejará de parpadear y permanecerá activo después de presionar el botón SEL otra vez. 6. Ajuste el enfoque presionando el disparador, compruebe la distancia a que se encuentra el sujeto en el anillo de enfoque del objetivo. Ajuste el nºf o la potencia del flash hasta que la distancia indicada en la pantalla LCD del flash y la distancia del sujeto se aproxime. 7. Cuando se ilumine la Luz de Preparado en el flash, la unidad está a punto para disparar. ◆ Se puede calcular la correcta exposición utilizando la siguiente fórmula: Número Guía “NG” / La distancia del sujeto al flash= Nº F Esta unidad de flash calculará e indicará automáticamente la Distancia al Sujeto apropiada según la fórmula mencionada. (Por favor mire Cuadro 1 de la última página) SINCRONIZACIÓN DEL FLASH A ALTA VELOCIDAD (FP) (HSS) Cuando toma una fotografía con el flash ordinario, no se puede utilizar una velocidad superior a la velocidad de sincronización de la cámara porque el flash se disparará cuando el obturador esté completamente abierto. La sincronización del flash a alta velocidad se dispara mientras corren las cortinillas. De esta manera se puede utilizar una velocidad más rápida que la velocidad de sincronización. 1. Escoja el modo del flash presionando el botón MODE (Puede utilizar los modos “TTL” o “M”) 2. Presione los botones + o – varias veces para que aparezca el icono en la pantalla LCD. 3. Enfoque el sujeto. 4. Cuando se ilumine la Luz de Preparado en el flash, la unidad está a punto para disparar. ◆ Con la sincronización a alta velocidad, el Número Guía dependiendo de la velocidad de obturación. El rango del flash será más corto cuando la velocidad de obturación sea más rápida. (Por favor mire Cuadro 2 de la última página) 52 ◆ La marca desaparecerá cuando se cancele la función de sincronización a alta velocidad (flash FP) MODO DE MULTI FLASH (Estroboscópico) Mientras el obturador está abierto, el flash puede disparar repetidamente. Para realizar una serie de imágenes del sujeto en un solo fotograma. En un fondo oscuro con el sujeto iluminado, este modo es más efectivo. Es posible ajustar la frecuencia de disparos entre 1Hz y 100Hz. Superior a 90 disparos continuados. El máximo números de disparos varía dependiendo del número guía del flash y de la frecuencia de disparos. (Por favor mire Cuadro 3 de la última página). 1. Ajuste la cámara al modo M y seleccione el número F. 2. Presione el botón MODE hasta que aparezca el modo multi-flash. 3. Presione el botón SEL hasta que parpadee el flash de frecuencia. 4. Presione el botón + o – para ajustar el valor deseado. 5. Después de presionar el botón SEL otra vez, el nivel de la potencia del flash parpadeará. 6. Presione el botón + o – para ajustar el nivel de la potencia del flash deseado 7. Presione el botón SEL para que parpadee el número de disparos 8. Presione los botón + o – para seleccionar el número de disparos deseados 9. Vuelva a presionar el botón SEL para que deje de parpadear. 10. Cuando se ilumine la Luz de Preparado del flash, la unidad está lista para utilizarlo. Nota: Por favor seleccione una velocidad de obturación superior a; Número de disparos que quiere / Frecuencia de disparo FLASH REFLEJADO Cuando realice una fotografía con flash en interior, a veces puede aparecer una fuerte sombra detrás del sujeto, si apunta el cabezal de flash hacia arriba para reflejar la luz del techo, de la pared etc. El sujeto se iluminará más suavemente. Presione el botón de bloqueo y gire el cabezal del flash al ángulo deseado. Hacia arriba: 0°, 60°, 75°, 90° Derecha: 0°,7° Derecha: 0°, 60°, 75°, 90° Izquierda: 0°, 60°, 75°, 90°, 120°, 150°, 180° Cuando el modo de flash reflejado está activado, aparecerá en la pantalla LCD la marca . La fotografía recibirá el color de la superficie reflectante. Por favor escoja una superficie blanca para reflejar el flash. Dependiendo de la superficie reflejada, de la distancia del sujeto y de otros factores, la distancia efectiva para el TTL AUTO puede cambiar. Por favor compruebe la confirmación de la correcta exposición (la marca TTL en la pantalla LCD) después de realizar el disparo. EXPOSICIONES DE APROXIMACIÓN El cabezal de flash puede inclinarse 7º hacia abajo para las aproximaciones. El flash será efectivo solo para sujetos de 0.5 metros a 2 metros. Cuando el cabezal del flash está inclinado a 7º la marca parpadeará. PANEL DE LUZ REBOTADA Este flash está equipado con un panel de luz rebotada, que permite iluminar los ojos del sujeto cuando el flash esta con el cabezal basculado (en posición de luz rebotada). Extraiga los dos paneles simultáneamente, y después recoja el panel angular a su lugar. (Sea cuidadoso a la hora de deslizar los paneles.) 53 ◆ Para crear una luz de captura efectiva, incline el cabezal del flash 90º hacia arriba y tome las fotografías a una distancia cercana. CONTROL REMOTO DEL FLASH Cuando utilice el modo “Control remoto del flash”, puede realizar fotografías con sensación de imagen tridimensional con sombra o puede realizar imágenes naturales con sombra dependiendo de la exposición del flash sin ningún cable de conexión entre el flash y la cámara. En el caso del EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI, la señal de comunicación entre la cámara y el flash se tiene que realizar con la luz del flash. En el modo de control remoto del flash, la cámara calculará la correcta exposición automáticamente. ◆ En estas instrucciones llamamos a la unidad de flash conectada a la cámara “Controlador” y la unidad de flash a la posición control remoto “Flash esclavo”. ◆ Será de ayuda si utiliza el flash con un mini-stand cuando está separado de la cámara. El mini-stand tiene la rosca para adaptarlo al trípode. ◆ Asegúrese de no colocar el flash dentro del área de la foto. ◆ Coloque el flash a una distancia entre 0.5m a 5m y la cámara entre 1m y 5m del sujeto. ◆ En el caso que otras personas utilicen un flash por control remoto cerca suyo, le puede influir al suyo y dispararse. En estas circunstancias ajuste otro canal diferente. A. UTILIZAR LA SEÑAL DEL FLASH INCORPORADO COMO DISPARADOR. 1. Fije la cámara en el modo Flash Inalámbrico. ◆ Los ajustes varían dependiendo del modelo de cámara, por favor consulte el manual de instrucciones de su cámara. 2. Establezca el modo de exposición de la cámara en P,A,S o M. 3. Presione el botón del flash hasta que aparezca en la pantalla el icono del flash esclavo. 4. Fije el número del flash esclavo en 1 presionando el botón . 5. Presione el botón para fijar el modo en TTL. . 6. La información del canal parpadeará al presionar el botón o . 7. Fije el número del canal (C1 - C4) presionando el botón 8. Al presionar el botón , el indicador dejará de parpadear. 9. Conecte el flash a la cámara y presione el disparador a la mitad (el número del canal se graba en la cámara). 10. Saque el flash de la cámara y póngalo en el lugar deseado. 11. Levante el flash incorporado de la cámara y asegúrese que está totalmente cargado. ◆ La Luz de flash listo se iluminará La luz auxiliar AF parpadeará para indicar que el flash está preparado para disparar. 12. Enfoque con la cámara y dispare. ◆ El EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI se disparará cuando se dispare el flash incorporado. El flash de la cámara se dispara solo para poder controlar la potencia, para obtener la correcta exposición. ◆ Dependiendo de la velocidad de obturación, se conectará automáticamente en destello normal o en destello sincronización alta velocidad. ◆ Cuando el modo de exposición de la cámara se establece en M, será flash inalámbrico manual. Después de ajustar el número del canal, el nivel de potencia del flash parpadeará. Ajuste la o y entonces presione potencia deseada de salida del flash presionando el botón para detener el parpadeo. 54 B. UTILIZAR LA SEÑAL DEL FLASH QUE ESTÁ ACOPLADO A LA CÁMARA COMO DISPARADOR Para el Flash Inalámbrico, son necesarias dos o más unidades de flash EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI. El flash EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI únicamente se puede usar sin conectarlo a la cámara. Dependiendo del modelo de flash que no esté conectado a la cámara, será necesario cambiar el modo del controlador. Por favor consulte el siguiente cuadro. (El flash EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI se puede usar como controlador). Modelos de Flash que se EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI pueden usar fuera de la cámara Modo de Control + Modelos de cámara que se pueden usar con el flash fuera α700, α900 del cuerpo de la cámara. Puede controlar hasta 3 grupos; Controlador, Flash esclavo 1 y Ajustes de relación de Flash esclavo 2. control del destello Puede fijar la relación de flash de cada grupo hasta 5 niveles o sin flash. Flash TTL Auto, Flash Sincro Alta Modos Velocidad (TTL, M), Flash Manual EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI α900 Puede controlar hasta 2 grupos; Controlador y Flash esclavo. Controlador: puede fijar la relación del flash esclavo en 1:2 o 2:1. Flash TTL Auto, Flash Sincro Alta Velocidad (TTL) B-1.EN CASO DE USAR SÓLO EL FLASH INALÁMBRICO Ajustes de Cámara y Controlador 1. Establezca la cámara en modo inalámbrico. 2. Los ajustes varían dependiendo del modelo de cámara, por favor consulte el manual de instrucciones de su cámara. ◆ Establezca el modo de exposición de la cámara en P,A,S o M. 3. Monte el flash en la cámara. 4. El panel LCD cambiará de configuración de forma automática. (Si el panel LCD no cambia automáticamente, presione el botón hasta que aparezca el control de ajuste.) 5. La pantalla del modo de control parpadeará cuando se pulse el . botón presionando los botones o . 6. Establezca el modo de control . 7. La información del canal parpadeará cuando se pulsa el botón o . 8. Ajuste el número del canal (C1 - C4) presionando los botones 9. La relación del control del flash parpadeará al presionar el botón . ] presionando el botón o . 10. Establezca la relación del modo de control del flash en [ 11. Presione de nuevo el botón , y la visualización dejará de parpadear. Ajustes del Flash Esclavo 12. Presione el botón hasta que visualice el icono del flash inalámbrico. . 13. Fije el numero del flash esclavo en 1 presionando el botón 14. Presione el botón para establecer el modo en TTL. 15. La información del canal parpadeará cuando se presione el botón . 16. Presione los botones o para escoger el mismo número de canal que fijó en el controlador. y el indicador dejará de parpadear. 17. Presione el botón 18. Coloque el flash externo a la posición deseada. 19. Compruebe que los dos flashes estén cargados. 55 ◆ La Luz de flash listo se iluminará La luz auxiliar AF parpadeará para indicar que el flash está preparado para disparar. 20. Enfoque el sujeto y dispare. B-2. RELACIÓN CONTROL DEL FLASH (MODO CONTROL ) Ajuste de la cámara y el controlador 1. Siga los mismos pasos de ajustes del 1 al 9 de la sección B-1. ] presionando 2. Ajuste el modo de visualización del control [ los botones o . . 3. La pantalla del modo parpadeará al presionar el botón o . 4. Fije el modo n TTL presionando los botones 5. La visualización de la relación del flash [ ] del controlador . parpadeará al presionar 6. Establezca la proporción del controlador presionando los botones o . ] del Flash esclavo 1 parpadeará cuando se presione el botón 7. La visualización de la relación [ . o . 8. Fije la relación del Flash esclavo 1 presionando el botón 9. La visualización de la relación [ ] del Flash esclavo 2 parpadeará cuando se presione el botón . 10. Establezca la proporción del Flash esclavo 2 presionando los botones o . , el indicador dejará de parpadear. 11. Al presionar el botón Ajustes del Flash Esclavo 12. Proceda siguiendo los mismos ajustes del B-1 Ajustes del Flash Esclavo. ◆ Si el número de flashes esclavos es plural, asigne un número a cada unidad. ◆ Puede fijar la proporción del flash para el controlador, el Flash esclavo 1 y el Flash esclavo 2 de la siguiente manera: (sin destello) 1 2 4 8 16 La relación del valor de salida del destello establece el valor de cada unidad / valor total. [Ejemplo] Valor Ajuste Relación proporción flash Controlador 2 2/7 Flash esclavo 1 1 1/7 Flash esclavo 2 4 4/7 B-3. CONTROL PROPORCIÓN FLASH (MODO CONTROL ) Ajustes cámara y controlador 1. Siga los mismos pasos de ajustes del 1 al 6 de B-1. presionando los botones o 2. Fije el modo de control en . 3. La información del canal parpadeará al presionar el botón . 4. Establezca el número del canal (C1 – C4) presionando los botones o . 5. Fije el modo de visualización de control de relación del flash [ ] presionando los botones o . 6. La visualización de la relación del flash parpadeará al presionar el botón . o . Seleccione 7. Fije la relación del controlador: Flash esclavo presionando los botones . o 8. Presione el botón , y el indicador dejará de parpadear. 56 Ajustes del Flash Esclavo 9. Si el flash inalámbrico es el EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI, por favor proceda con los mismos ajustes del B-1 Ajustes Flash esclavo. ◆ Si el Flash inalámbrico es el EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI, por favor consulte el manual de instrucciones del EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI. ◆ Si el Flash inalámbrico es el EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI, el número del canal solo se puede fijar del C1 a C3. FLASH ESCLAVO FLASH ESCLAVO NORMAL Aunque el EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI no esté junto con el cuerpo de la cámara, puede disparar el flash utilizando el flash incorporado o otra unidad de flash. 1. Monte la unidad de flash en la cámara. 2. Ajuste el modo de exposición de la cámara al modo deseado. Si utiliza el modo A o M, seleccione el diafragma deseado también. 3. Conecte la unidad de flash. Presione el disparador levemente. ◆ Ahora el diafragma y la sensibilidad de la película se transmite automáticamente a la unidad de flash. 4. Desmonte la unidad de flash de la cámara. / (Esclavo). 5. Presione el botón MODE y seleccione el modo 6. Presione el botón SEL repetidas veces para que el indicador de flash externo parpadee. 7. Presione el botón + o – para ajustar la potencia del flash externo. ◆ Determine la potencia apropiada del flash ajustando la distancia que aparece en la pantalla LCD que coincida la más cerca posible con la actual distancia entre el flash esclavo y el sujeto. Si al distancia actual está fuera del rango, necesitará cambiar el diafragma. ◆ Puede ajustar la sensibilidad de la película o el diafragma en la unidad de flash manualmente, si lo desea. a. Para la sensibilidad de la película… Presione el botón MODE y seleccione , entonces presione el botón SEL para que parpadee el indicador. Presione el botón + o – y ajuste la sensibilidad deseada, luego presione el botón SEL una vez más. b. Para el diafragma …Cuando la unidad de flash se ajusta al modo esclavo, presione el botón SEL para que el indicador de diafragma parpadee, y presione el botón + o – para ajustar el diafragma deseada, luego presione el botón SEL. 8. Presione el botón SEL repetidas veces para que aparezca el dispositivo. 9. Coloque la unidad de flash en el lugar deseado. No lo coloque dentro del área de la fotografía. 10. Después de comprobar que la unidad de flash está totalmente cargada, presione el disparador para realizar la fotografía. ◆ Cuando el EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI está totalmente cargado, la luz auxiliar AF parpadeará. ◆ El flash no se disparará si el EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI Super está conectado a la cámara y está ajustado al Modo Esclavo. ◆ Si está utilizando una marca SONY flash o la cámara incorporada en función de flash TTL de la cámara, y el EF-610 DG SUPER flash SO-ADI como unidad esclava, por favor, no use ADI/DI función, como el monitor de pre-flash puede hacer que el esclavo al fuego antes de tiempo. DESIGNACIÓN DEL FLASH ESCLAVO Si utiliza dos o más unidades EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI, puede desganar cual de los flashes se dispararán juntos utilizando los ajustes del canal. En este modo una unidad de flash se utilizará como controlador esclavo y el resto para disparar como esclavos. Ajustar los disparos de las unidades de flash 1. Coloque la unidad de flash en la cámara. 2. Ajuste la exposición de la cámara al modo S o M. 57 ◆ Ajuste la velocidad a 1/30 o inferior. El Controlador esclavo transmitirá la señal de designación antes que a los otros flashes. Aunque si utiliza una velocidad más rápida que 1/30 las unidades de flash no estarán sincronizadas. 3. Conecte la unidad de flash “ON”, y presione el disparador levemente. ◆ Ahora, el diafragma y la sensibilidad se transmiten automáticamente a la unidad de flash. 4. Saque la unidad de flash de la cámara. / (Modo esclavo) 5. Presione el botón MODE y seleccione 6. Presione el botón SEL para que el indicador de canal parpadee. 7. Presione el botón + o – para ajustar el número de canal. (C1 o C2) 8. Presione el botón SEL para que el indicador de flash externo parpadee en la pantalla. 9. Presione el botón + o – para ajustar el flash externo. ◆ Ajuste la potencia del flash haciendo coincidir el indicador de distancia en la pantalla LCD lo más aproximado posible con la distancia entre la unidad de flash esclavo y el sujeto. Si la distancia se encuentra fuera del rango, necesitará cambiar el diafragma. 10. Presione el botón SEL repetidas veces para que aparezca la señal. 11. Coloque la unidad de flash en el lugar deseado. No lo coloque dentro del área de la foto. Ajustes para la unidad Controladora Esclava 12. Presione el botón MODE y seleccione / . (Modo esclavo) 13. Presione el botón SEL para que el indicador de canal parpadee. 14. Presione el botón + o – y ajuste el mismo número de canal para todas las unidades. 15. Presione el botón SEL para que el indicador de flash externo parpadee en la pantalla. . 16. Presione el botón + para que aparezca la marca 17. Presione el botón SEL para que deje de parpadear. 18. Coloque la unidad de flash controlador en la cámara. 19. Después de comprobar que la unidad de flash está totalmente cargada, presione el disparador para realizar la fotografía. ◆ Cuando el flash EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI está totalmente cargado, la luz auxiliar AF parpadeará. ◆ Si selecciona la marca en el ajuste de flash externo, no se puede ajustar el diafragma con el botón SEL, la unidad de flash se tiene que ajustar al modo Controlador Esclavo. ◆ Las funciones del Controlador Esclavo sólo controla la unidad de disparo. ESPECIFICACIONES TIPO: Flash electrónico automático zoom TTL tipo Clip-on con controlador de serie. NUMERO GUIA: 61 ( 100 ISO/m, posición del cabezal 105 mm) ALIMENTACION: Cuatro pilas alcalinas de tipo AA cuatro pilas Ni-Cd de tipo AA, cuatro pilas Niquel-hidrógeno de tipo AA. TIEMPO DE RECICLAJE: acerca de 7.0 seg. (pilas alcalinas), acerca de 5.0 seg. (con pilas Ni-Cd o Niquel-hidrógeno) NÚMERO DE DISPAROS: acerca de 120 disparos (pilas alcalinas), acerca 160 disparos (con pilas Ni-Cd o Niquel-hidrógeno) DURACIÓN DEL DISPARO: acerca de 1/ 700 seg.( disparo a máxima potencia) ANGULO DE ILUMINACION DEL FLASH: 24mm a 105mm controlador de motor de potencia 17mm con la pantalla angular incorporada. AUTODESCONECTABLE: disponible PESO: 330 g. DIMENSIONES: 77mm x 139mm x 117mm 58 ITALIANO Grazie per la preferenza accordata al Flash elettronico Sigma EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI. Questo prodotto è stato studiato specificatamente per le reflex SONY AF. A seconda del modello della macchina, funzioni e operatività possono variare. Leggete attentamente questo manuale quando usate il flash con la vostra macchina. Il flash dispone di molte funzioni per ottimizzare la vostre riprese. Per avere ottime fotografie e ottenere il massimo dal flash, prima di iniziare a usarlo, leggete questo manuale e quello della vostra macchina. Tenetelo poi a portata di mano per poterlo consultare in caso di dubbio. ATTENZIONE Per evitare danni o ferite a terzi, leggete attentamente il manuale di istruzioni e fate attenzione ai segni di allerta riportati di seguito prima di usare il flash. In particolar modo, fate attenzione a questi due segnali: Attenzione!! Attenzione!! Usare questo prodotto nell'inosservanza del presente segnale di pericolo può causare serie ferite o mettervi in serio pericolo Usare questo prodotto nell'inosservanza del presente segnale di pericolo può causare serie ferite o danni. Questo denota punti rilevanti, per i quali attenzione e cautela sono particolarmente richiesti Il simbolo contiene informazioni su ciò che non si deve fare Attenzione!! Il flash contiene circuiti ad alto voltaggio. Per evitare di prendere la corrente o di bruciarsi, non cercate di smontare il flash. Se la carrozzeria è rotta o incrinata, non toccate le parti interne. Non scattate flash vicino agli occhi. La luce molto intensa può provocare danni alla vista. Tenete almeno 1 metro di distanza tra il flash e il viso quando fotografate. Non toccate il terminale syncro della macchina quando il flash è collegato. Il circuito ad alto voltaggio può causare scosse elettriche. Non usate la macchina in ambienti con materiali infiammabili, gas, agenti chimici o infiammabili liquidi. C'è il rischio di causare un'esplosione. Attenzione!! Non usate questo flash con fotocamere che non siano reflex SONY AF; potreste danneggiarne i circuiti elettrici. Questo flash teme l'acqua. Se usato sotto pioggia, neve o vicino all'acqua va protetto. Spesso non è possibile riparare componenti interni danneggiati dall'acqua. Flash e apparecchio fotografico non vanno esposti a urti, polvere, alte temperature e umidità. Questi fattori possono causare malfunzionamento o incendio dell'apparecchiatura. Quando il flash è sottoposto a sbalzi improvvisi di temperatura (es. dal freddo di un esterno al caldo di un ambiente interno) può formarsi della condensa. In questi casi, riponete l'attrezzatura in un sacchetto di plastica e non usatela fino a quando non è a temperatura ambiente. Non riponete il flash in un cassetto o armadietto con naftalina, canfora o altro insetticida. Possono avere un effetto negativo sul suo funzionamento. Non utilizzate un lucidante, Benzene o altro agente di pulizia per rimuovere sporco o impronte. Pulite solamente con un panno morbido appena inumidito. Se non intendete usare il flash per un lungo periodo, cercate un luogo asciutto e fresco dove riporlo, preferibilmente con una buona ventilazione. Fate scattare il flash più volte nell'arco di un mese, affinché mantenga adeguate capacità di funzionamento. 59 DESCRIZIONE DELLE PARTI PARTI ESTERNE 1.testa del flash 2.Luce ausiliaria AF 3.Angolo di rotazione per flash indiretto; su e giù 4.Angolo di rotazione per flash indiretto; destra e sinistra 5.Blocco della rotazione e pulsante di sblocco: su e giù 6.Blocco SWIVEL e pulsante di sblocco: destra e sinistra 7.Display LCD 8.Coperchio delle batterie 9. Pulsante di scatto 10.Staffa 11. Pannello riflettente 12. Diffusore grandangolare CONTROLLI 13.pulsante per la selezione dei modi 14.pulsante di selezione (sel) 15.pulsante di incremento (+) 16.pulsante di decremento (-) 17.pulsante zoom 18.pulsante TEST 19.pulsante d'illuminazione LIGHT 20.spia di pronto lampo 21.interruttore accensione BATTERIA Questo flash usa quattro pile AA di tipo alcalino o batterie ricaricabili Ni-Cad e Ni-MH. Anche le batterie al Manganese possono essere usate ma hanno una durata più ridotta rispetto alle alcaline. Se la spia di pronto lampo impiega più di 30 secondi ad illuminarsi, le pile vanno sostituite ◆ Per assicurare contatti elettrici ottimali, pulite i terminali delle batterie prima di installarle ◆ Le batterie Ni-Cad / Ni-MH non hanno contatti standard. Se le utilizzate, verificate che i contatti delle batterie siano correttamente allocati ◆ Per evitare esplosioni delle batterie, perdite o surriscaldamento, usate quattro batterie nuove della stessa marca. Non mischiate batterie di marche diverse, vecchie e nuove insieme ◆ Non mandate in corto le batterie, non smontatele, non esponetele a fonti di calore o d'energia: potrebbero esplodere. Non ricaricate altre batterie se non quelle ricaricabili al Ni-Cad / Ni-MH. ◆ Se non si utilizza il flash per un periodo prolungato, togliere le batterie per evitare danni o perdite ◆ La funzionalità delle batterie decresce alle basse temperature. Tenete quindi le batterie protette quando utilizzate il flash al freddo. CARICAMENTO DELLE BATTERIE 1. Accertatevi che il pulsante d'accensione sia su off, quindi facendolo scivolare nel verso indicato dalla freccia, aprite il coperchio del vano batterie 2. Inserite quattro batterie AA nel vano apposito. Accertatevi che i poli + e - sulle batterie corrispondano a quelli segnati all'interno del vano. 3. Chiudete il coperchio 4. Spostate il pulsante d'accensione su ON. Dopo qualche secondo la spia di pronto lampo si illuminerà, indicando che il flash è pronto. 5. Per essere sicuri del corretto funzionamento del flash, premere il pulsante test AUTO POWER OFF Per risparmiare l'energia delle batterie il flash si spegne automaticamente dopo 240 secondi di inattività. Per riaccenderlo basta premere il tasto TEST oppure premere a metà corsa il pulsante di scatto della fotocamera. Attenzione: il dispositivo di spegnimento automatico (Auto Power Off) non funziona nei modi scatto a distanza, flash ausiliario, e flash ausiliario prestabilito. INDICAZIONI D'ERRORE Se la potenza delle batterie non è sufficiente o c'è un'indicazione di errore tra la macchina e il flash, la sigla " Er" lampeggerà sul display LCD. Se ciò avviene, portate l'interruttore acceso/spento su OFF e quindi su ON. Se l'indicatore lampeggia ancora, controllate lo stato delle batterie. 60 REGOLAZIONE DELLA TESTA DEL FLASH Premere il pulsante di blocco e rilascio "su e giù" della testa mobile, mentre ne regolate la posizione. ◆ appare sul display LCD quando girate il flash e se questa spia continua a lampeggiare dopo aver sistemato la testa del flash, significa che non è stata posizionata correttamente. INSERIMENTO E DISINSERIMENTO DEL FLASH Controllare che il flash sia spento. Poi infilare lo zoccolo del flash nella slitta portaccessori della fotocamera, fino a che si blocca. ◆ Quando attaccate o staccate il flash, afferratelo saldamente dal basso per evitare danni all'innesto. ◆ Se il flash incorporato della macchina è estratto, chiudetelo prima di attaccare l'unità flash esterna Per disinserirlo premere il pulsante di sblocco e spingere il flash fuori dalla slitta portaccessori. REGOLAZIONE DELL'ANGOLO DI COPERTURA DEL FLASH Quando si preme il pulsante dello ZOOM appaiono dei simboli e il display LCD cambia e indica la posizione dello ZOOM in sequenza, come segue 24mm → 28mm → 35mm → 50mm → 70mm → 85mm → 105mm → (Auto) Nel modo “AUTO”, il flash predisporrà automaticamente il comando per effetto zoom secondo la focale effettiva dell’obiettivo applicato. ◆ Quando accendete l'interruttore principale, il flash memorizza e regola nuovamente lo zoom mettendo l'ultima regolazione davanti a quella precedente ◆ Se usate obiettivi con un angolo di ripresa più ampio di quello permesso dalla parabola del flash, potrebbero esserci delle aree sotto-esposte verso i margini dell'inquadratura ◆ A seconda della regolazione della parabola del flash, la sua potenza può variare DIFFUSORE GRANDANGOLARE Il flash incorpora un filtro diffusore grandangolare che assicura la copertura fino alla focale del supergrandangolare da 17mm. Estrarre il pannello diffusore assieme al pannello riflettente dalla testa del flash. (Estrarre i pannelli lentamente, con delicatezza.) Poi spingere il pannello riflettente nel suo alloggiamento. L’angolo di copertura del flash diventa automaticamente pari alla focale da 17mm. ◆ Se il pannello si stacca accidentalmente, il pulsante dello ZOOM non funzionerà. In questo caso, contattate il negozio dove avete acquistato il flash o un centro di assistenza. ILLUMINAZIONE DEL DISPLAY LCD Quando premete il pulsante LIGHT, il display LCD si illumina per circa 8 secondi. Se premete nuovamente il pulsante LIGHT il display si spegnerà. 61 FLASH AUTOMATICO TTL Nel modo di funzionamento TTL AUTO la fotocamera controlla automaticamente la quantità di luce emessa dal flash, in modo che il soggetto riceva la necessaria quantità di luce. ◆ A seconda del modello di fotocamera e dell'obiettivo montato, la lettura TTL del flash varia. Riferirsi alla seguente tabella. ( Con tutte le combinazioni l'indicazione TTL compare nel display LCD) Obiettivi D Obiettivi non D Digitali SLR, Dynax 60, 40, 7, 5, 4, 3L ADI Misurazione pre-flash Dynax 9 Misurazione pre-flash Misurazione pre-flash Altri modelli TTL normale TTL normale 1. Impostare il modo di esposizione della fotocamera su P 2. Accendere l'interruttore del flash che inizierà a caricarsi, mentre la scritta TTL apparirà nel display LCD ◆ Con le fotocamere reflex Digitali SLR, assicuratevi che la spia sia accesa. Se la spia è spenta, premere I pulsanti + oppure - , in questo modo la spia apparirà nel pannello LCD, in caso contrario l’esposizione potrebbe essere sbagliata 3. Inquadrare il soggetto 4. Controllare che il soggetto sia nell'ambito delle distanze indicate nel pannello LCD del flash 5. Premere il pulsante di scatto, appena il flash abbia finito di caricarsi. ◆ Se il soggetto riceve la quantità di luce necessaria a una giusta esposizione, la scritta TTL comparirà nel display LCD per circa cinque secondi. Se ciò non avviene significa che l'esposizione non è stata sufficiente. E' necessario scattare una nuova foto, da una distanza minore. ◆ L'illuminatore AF si metterà automaticamente in funzione quando viene inquadrato un soggetto non illuminato a sufficienza. La portata dell'illuminatore AF va da circa 0,7 metri a 9 metri. ◆ Ricordare che quando viene impostato sulla fotocamera il modo di funzionamento manuale M, il flash funzionerà secondo l'ultimo modo di funzionamento impostato. ◆ Quando il flash è carica, nel mirino compare la spia di pronto flash. Se il pulsante di scatto viene premuto prima che il flash sia del tutto carico, il lampo non scatterà e la fotocamera riprenderà il soggetto con un tempo lento, determinato dalla esposizione della sola luce ambiente. USO DEL FLASH CON LA FOTOCAMERA IN ALTRI MODI DI FUNZIONAMENTO A priorità di esposizione Quando impostate la velocità di scatto, la fotocamera automaticamente imposta il diaframma più adatto. Non è possibile impostare una velocità di scatto più breve di quella di sincronizzazione con flash. A priorità di diaframma Impostando il modo A, dopo aver scelto il valore di diaframma desiderato, la fotocamera imposta automaticamente il tempo di scatto, in modo da avere una corretta esposizione dello sfondo. Impostando questo modo il flash funziona in fill flash. Modo M, manuale Potete impostare manualmente sia il valore di diaframma che il tempo di scatto. Si possono impostare tutti i tempi compresi fra quello di sincronizzazione flash e la posa Bulb. In questo modo di funzionamento il flash offre la possibilità di fill flash. Impostando i calori di esposizione suggeriti all'esposimetro, la fotocamera lavora sia con la sincronizzazione normale, per luce diurna, sia con la sincronizzazione lenta. LIMITAZIONI QUANDO SI SCATTA IN SEQUENZA Per evitare il surriscaldamento, non usate il flash per almeno 10 minuti dopo una sequenza di scatti, come indicato nella tabella Modalità TTL, M (1/1,1/2)) M(1/4, 1/8) M(1/16-1/32) Multi Numero di esposizioni flash 20 esposizioni continuate 25 esposizioni continuate 40 esposizioni continuate 10 cicli 62 FLASH MANUALE La regolazione manuale del flash è conveniente quando le condizioni sono tali che il sistema TTL non funzionerebbe bene. Nel modo di funzionamento manuale è possibile regolare vari livelli di potenza, da 1/1( piena potenza) a 1/64 di potenza, con incrementi di uno stop. 1. Regolate la macchina in modalità M o A 2. Premete il pulsante MODE sul flash fino a selezionare M 3. Quando premete il pulsante SEL, il valore del numero guida lampeggia 4. Premete il pulsante + o - per regolare la potenza del flash 5. Il display d'uscita del flash manuale cesserà di lampeggiare premendo nuovamente SEL 6. Attivare la messa a fuoco premendo il pulsante di scatto. Leggere la distanza fotocamera/soggetto sull'anello delle distanze dell'obiettivo. Poi regolare il diaframma o la potenza del flash su di un valore che faccia coincidere, la distanza indicata sul display LCD del flash con quella letta sulla ghiera dell'obiettivo. 7. Quando la spia Ready si illumina, il flash è pronto per funzionare ◆ Potete calcolare la corretta esposizione seguendo la seguente formula: Numero guida NG/distanza del flash dal soggetto=F-stop Questo flash calcolerà automaticamente e indicherà la distanza appropriata dal soggetto seguendo la formula di cui sopra. (Consultare la tabella 1 dell'ultima pagina) SINCRONIZZAZIONE AD ALTA VELOCITÀ' (FP) (HSS) Quando si fotografa con un normale flash, non si può utilizzare una velocità maggiore di quella di sincronizzazione perché il flash deve scattare quando la tendina è completamente aperta. La sincronizzazione ad alta velocità consente invece al flash di scattare mentre la tendina sta ancora aprendosi. Di contro è possibile usare una velocità di scatto della macchina superiore a quella di sincronizzazione. 1. Selezionate la modalità del flash intervenendo sul pulsante MODE (possono essere usate le modalità TTL o M) 2. Premere il pulsante + o - e fare apparire la relativa indicazione sul display LCD 3. Mettete a fuoco di pronto lampo potete 4. Quando sul flash si accende la spia scattare la foto. ◆ Con la sincronizzazione high-speed, il Numero Guida cambia in relazione alla velocità di ripresa. Il campo d’azione del flash sarà inferiore quando la velocità è alta. (Consultare la tabella 2 dell'ultima pagina) ◆ Per cancellare il modo di funzionamento FP (flash ad alta velocità) seguite la procedura Flash ad alta velocità per far comparire l'indicazione relativa sul display LCD. FLASH DI RIEMPIMENTO Se si usa la funzione Flash di riempimento è possibile controllare gli effetti di luce e ombra, prima di scattare la foto. 1. Premere il pulsante MODE impostare il modo di funzionamento desiderato. 2. Premere il pulsante + o - alcune volte per far apparire la scritta sul display LCD. 3. Accertarsi che il flash sia pronto al lampo, poi premere il pulsante TEST per farlo scattare. 63 MODALITÀ MULTI FLASH Mentre l’otturatore è aperto, il flash scatterà ripetutamente e una serie di immagini del soggetto verrà esposta sul medesimo fotogramma.. Uno sfondo scuro con un soggetto chiaro ottimizza l’impiego di questa modalità. E’ possibile regolare la frequenza degli scatti del flash tra 1Hz e 100 Hz. Si possono raggiungere fino a 90 scatti di seguito. Il numero massimo di scatti varia a seconda del numero guida del flash e della frequenza di scatto. (Consultare la tabella 3 dell'ultima pagina) 1. Regolate la modalità di esposizione della macchina su M e impostate anche il valore di diaframma 2. Premete il pulsante MODE fino a quando appare l’opzione Multi-flash 3. Premete SEL fino a quando la frequenza di scatto del flash comincia a lampeggiare 4. Premete il pulsante + o - per impostare il valore desiderato 5. Dopo aver premuto nuovamente il pulsante SEL, la spia del livello di potenza del flash inizierà a lampeggiare 6. Premete il pulsante + o - per regolare il livello di potenza 7. Premete il pulsante SEL e il numero di scatti inizierà a lampeggiare 8. Premete il pulsante + o - per impostare il numero dei lampi che si vuole ottenere 9. Premete il pulsante SEL e il display cesserà di lampeggiare 10. Quando la spia READY del flash è illuminata, il flash è pronta per l’uso Nota: regolate la velocità dell’otturatore maggiore di; (Numero dei lampi desiderati-Frequenza dei lampi) FLASH INDIRETTO Quando, in una stanza, si scatta una foto con il flash, a volte una pesante ombra appare dietro al soggetto. Se si punta la parabola del flash verso l’alto, facendo riflettere la luce dal soffitto o dalle pareti, il soggetto avrà un’illuminazione più morbida. Premete il pulsante di blocco e ruotate la testa del flash in modo da regolare il suo angolo d'inclinazione nelle varie direzioni. In alto: 0, 60, 75, 90 In basso; 0,7 Destra: 0, 60, 75, 90 Sinistra: 0, 60, 75,90, 120, 150, 180 Quando la modalità Flash Indiretto è attiva, l'apposito simbolo apparirà sul display LCD. L’immagine sarà influenzata dal colore dalla superficie riflettente. Meglio se pareti e soffitto sono bianchi. A causa della riflettanza della superficie, della distanza del soggetto e di altri fattori, l’effettiva distanza per la modalità TTL AUTO può variare. Controllate che l'esposizione sia corretta (simboli TTL sul display LCD) prima di scattare. ESPOZISIONE CLOSE-UP Per il flash indiretto può essere acceso al 7° per close-up. Il Flash sarà operativo solo per soggetti da 0,5 a 2m. Quanto la testa del flash si attiva 7° si accende il simbolo PANNELLO RIFLETTENTE Il flash incorpora un pannello riflettente che contribuisce a creare il punto di luce di luce negli occhi del soggetto quando si usa il flash nella modalità di lampo riflesso. Estrarre il pannello diffusore e quello riflettente e riposizionare il diffusore nel suo alloggiamento. (Estrarre diffusore e pannello con la massima delicatezza.) 64 ◆ Per utilizzare nel modo migliore il pannello diffusore, ribaltare di 90° gradi in alto la testa del flash e riprendere il soggetto da breve distanza. FLASH TELECOMANDATO SENZA FILI (WIRELESS) Usando il modo " flash a distanza senza fili" è possibile ottenere fotografie in cui i volumi del soggetto sono messi in maggiore risalto da ombre appropriate. Ciò dipende dalla posizione dei flash. E' possibile sistemare il flash nella posizione migliore grazie al collegamento a distanza che non richiede cavetti di sincronizzazione. La comunicazione tra fotocamera e flash avviene, con il EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI, grazie alla stessa luce del flash. In questo modo di funzionamento la fotocamera calcola automaticamente la corretta esposizione. ◆ In queste pagine chiameremo il flash inserito nella fotocamera "Flash principale " e il flash staccato "flash esterno ". ◆ E' necessario fissare su di un treppiede il flash separato dalla fotocamera. Tutti i treppiedi posseggono una vite da avvitare nel corrispondente foro filettato presente sulla base del flash. ◆ Attenzione a non mettere il flash nel campo inquadrato dall'obiettivo. ◆ Il flash può venire sistema a una distanza dal soggetto variabile tra 0,5 e 5 metri, anche la distanza fotocamera/soggetto può variare da 0,5 a 5 metri. ◆ Se un altro fotografo usa un sistema di flash a distanza assieme a voi, può accadere che i vostri flash emettano luce senza che li abbiate comandati. Ma in seguito al lampeggiare degli altri flash. In questo caso è necessario impostare un canale di trasmissione diverso da quello impostato dall'altro fotografo. A. USO DEL FLASH INCORPORATO 1. Impostare la fotocamera sulla modalità flash wireless ◆ Dal momento che il settaggio cambia, a seconda della fotocamera, consultare il libretto d’istruzioni della medesima. 2. Impostare la modalità di esposizione su P, A, S, o M. del flash finchè compare il display 3. Premere il pulsante del flash esterno 4. Impostare il flash esterno sul n1 premendo il pulsante 5. Premere il pulsante per importare la Modalità Flash TTL 6. Informazioni sul canale inizieranno a lampeggiare premendo il pulsante o 7. Impostare il numero del canale (C1-C4) premendo I pulsanti la spia smetterà di lampeggiare 8. Premendo il pulsante 9. Inserire il flash nella slitta del corpo macchina e premere il pulsante di scatto a metà corsa (il numero del canale settato verrà memorizzato nella fotocamera) 10. Staccare il flash dalla fotocamera e metterlo nella posizione desiderata 11. Estrarre il flash incorporato della fotocamera e assicurarsi che sia carico. ◆ Nel modo di funzionamento "flash a distanza" quando il flash è carico, l'illuminatore autofocus si mette a lampeggiare. 12. Mettere a fuoco l'obiettivo. ◆ The EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI will fire when the built-in flash fires. The camera’s built-in flash is fired only for control of the EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI. The illimunation of the subject is done by the EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI. The camera will control the flash power as a TTL Auto flash, to obtain the correct exposure. ◆ Secondo la velocità dell’otturatore, il flash passerà automaticamente dalla modalità normale a quella ad alta velocità e viceversa ◆ Quando la modalità d’esposizione è impostata su M, funzionerà in wireless manuale.Dopo aver impostato il numero del canale, inizierà a lampeggiare l’indicatore di potenza. Impostare la potenz desiderata premendo il pulsante oppure e poi premere il pulsante per far cessare il lampeggiamento. 65 B. USO DEL FLASH COLLEGATO ALLA FOTOCAMERA Per la ripresa flash wireless sono necessary due o più flash EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI. Il modello EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI può essere usato solamente non connesso alla fotocamera.A seconda del flash usato staccato dalla fotocamera è necessario variare la modalità di controllo del flash principale. Riferirsi alla tabella che segue. ( può essere usato come flash principale un EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI) Flash che possono essere usati separati dalla fotocamera Modalità di controllo Fotocamere che possono essere usate con flash separato Settaggio per la potenza dei flash Modalità Flash + EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI - α700, α900 α900 E’ possibile pilotare fino a 3 gruppi: Principale, staccati dalla fotocamera Flash 1 e Flash 2. E’ possibile impostare la potenza di ciascun gruppo di flash fino a 5 livelli. Flash TTL Auto, Sincronizzazione ad Alta Velocità Flash (TTL,M), Flash Manuale E’ possibile controllare 2 gruppi: Principale e Flash staccato dalla fotocamera. Principale: è possibile impostare la potenza sel flash staccato su due livelli 1:2 o 2:1 Flash TTL Auto, Sincronizzazione Flash ad Alta Velocità (TTL) EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI B-1.QUANDO SI USA SOLO IL FLASH SEPARATO DALLA FOTOCAMERA Settaggio fotocamera e Flash principale 1. Settare la fotocamera nella modalità flash wireless ◆ Dal momento che I settaggi cambiano a seconda della fotocamera, consultare il libretto d’istruzioni della fotocamera 2. Impostare la modalità d’esposizione della fotocamera su P, A, S oM 3. Inserire il flash nella slitta della fotocamera 4. Il pannello LCD del flash automaticamente visualizzerà le opzioni di controllo. ( Se il pannelo LCD finché non si visualizzeranno) non cambia automaticamente, premere il pulsante 5. La visualizzazione dela modalità di controllo si metterà a lampeggiare quando è premuto il pulsante 6. Impostare le modalità su premendo il pulsante o 7. L’informazione sul canale si metterà a lampeggiare premendo il pulsante o 8. Impostare il numero del canale (C1-C4) premendo I pulsanti 9. L’indicazione del controllo della potenza lampeggerà mentre si tiene premuto il pulsante ] premendo il pulsante o 10. Impostare la modalità di controllo da [ il display cesserà di lampeggiare 11. Premendo nuovamente il pulsante Settaggio Flash esterno 12. Premere il pulsante finchè non appare il display riferito al flash esterno 13. Impostare il flash esterno n1 premendo il pulsante 14. Premere il pulsante per impostare la modalità TTL 15. L’informazione sul canale scelto lampeggerà quando si tiene premuto il pulsante 16. Premere il pulsante o per impostare il medesimo numero di canale del flash principale e l’indicatore smetterà di lampeggiare 17. Premere il pulsante 18. Mettere il flash ausiliario nella posizione desiderata. 19. Assicurarsi che entrambi i flash siano carichi. 66 ◆ La spia di pronto lampo lampeggerà e la luce dell'illuminatore ausiliario AF lampeggerà anch'essa per indicare il pronto lampo. 20. Mettere a fuoco e scattare la foto B-2.COMANDO DELLA POTENZA FLASH (MODALITÀ CONTROLLO ) Settaggio Fotocamera e Flash principale 1. La procedura è la medesima dal punto 1 al punto 9 di B-1 ] premendo il 2. Impostare la modalità controllo potenza su [ o pulsante 3. L’indicazione della modalità flash lampeggerà premendo il pulsante o 4. Impostare la modalità TTL premendo il pulsante ] del flash principale lampeggiarà tenendo il pulsante 5. L’indicazione della potenza [ premuto o 6. Impostare la potenza del flash principale premendo il pulsante ] riferita al Flash esterno 1 lampeggerà tenendo premuto 7. L’indicazione della potenza del flash [ il pulsante 8. Impostare la potenza del Flash esterno 1 premendo il pulsante o ] riferita al Flash esterno 2 si metterà a lampeggiare 9. L’indicazione della potenza del flash [ premendo il pulsante o 10. Impostare la potenza del Flash esterno 2 premendo il pulsante 11. Premendo il pulsante , la spia cesserà di lampeggiare Settaggio Flash esterno 12. La procedura è la medesima del paragrafo B-1 (Settaggio flash esterno) ◆ Se si usano più flash esterni, allocare il numero del flash desiderato su ciascuna unità ◆ E’ possibile impostare la potenza del flash principale, del Flash esterno1 e del Flash esterno 2 seguendo la procedura seguente (senza flash) 1 2 4 8 16 Il rapporto tra le potenze dei flash è impostato secondo la proporzione singolo flash/potenza totale [Esempio] Potenza impostata Rapporto potenze Flash principale 2 2/7 Flash esterno 1 1 1/7 Flash esterno 2 4 4/7 B-3. CONTROLLO RAPPORTO POTENZA FLASH (MODALITÀ DI CONTROLLO Settaggio Fotocamera e Flash principale 1. La procedura è la medesima dal punto 1 al punto 6 del paragrafo B-1 2. Impostare la modalità di controllo o premendo il pulsante 3. L’informazione sul canale si metterà a lampeggiare premendo il pulsante 4. Impostare il numero del canale (C1-C4) premendo il pulsante o ] 5. Impostare la modalità controllo rapporto flash da [ o premendo il pulsante 6. L’indicazione del rapporto tra flash si metterà a lampeggiare premendo il pulsante 7. Impostare il rapporto del flash principale:Flash esterno si prema il pulsante o ( Impostare o .) 8. Premendo il pulsante la spia cesserà di lampeggiare. 67 ) Settaggio del Flash esterno 9. Se il flash esterno è il modello EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI eseguire la medesima procedura del paragrafo (Settaggio Flash Esterno) ◆ Se il Flash esterno è il modello EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI consultare il manuale d’uso del modello EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI. ◆ Se il Flash esterno è il modello EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI il numero di anale può essere impostato solamente da C1 a C3 FLASH AUSILIARIO FLASH AUSILIARIO NORMALE Anche se il flash EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI non è collegato alla fotocamera, lo si può far scattare ugualmente mediante il flash incorporato alla fotocamera stessa, oppure mediante un altro flash. 1. Collegare il flash alla macchina fotografica 2. Impostare sulla fotocamera il modo di esposizione desiderato. Se impostate A oppure M, dovete impostare anche l'apertura di diaframma desiderata. 3. Accendere l'interruttore del flash. Premere il pulsante della fotocamera a metà corsa. ◆ Da questo momento l'apertura del diaframma e la sensibilità della pellicola sono automaticamente trasmessi al flash. 4. Scollegare il flash dalla fotocamera / 5. Premere il pulsante MODE e impostare il modo (ausiliario) 6. Premere il pulsante SEL alcune volte e far lampeggiare l'indicatore dei valori d'uscita del flash 7. Premere il pulsante + o - per selezionare i valori d'uscita ◆ Determinare la potenza del flash selezionando, sul pannello LCD, una distanza che sia la più vicina possibile a quella tra il flash accessorio e il soggetto ◆ Potete anche impostare manualmente sul flash la sensibilità della pellicola o il valore di diaframma A. Per la sensibilità della pellicola...premere MODE e selezionare ISO, poi premere il pulsante SEL per far lampeggiare l'indicatore. Premere il pulsante + o - e impostare la sensibilità della pellicola, infine premere ancora il pulsante SEL B. Per il valore di diaframma....se il flash è regolato sul modo Slave, premere il pulsante SEL per far lampeggiare l'indicatore del valore di diaframma, poi premere il pulsante + o - per impostare il valore di diaframma desiderato. Infine premere il pulsante SEL 8. Premere il pulsante SEL alcune volte per far apparire l'indicazione 9. Sistemare il flash secondario nel punto desiderato. Ricordarsi di non sistemare il flash secondario all'interno della inquadratura 10. Dopo esservi assicurati che tutti i flash siano pronti al lampo, premete il pulsante di scatto per realizzare la fotografia ◆ Quando si usa un flash SONY, oppure il flash TTL incorporato alla fotocamera, e il flash EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI come flash ausiliario, non bisogna usare le funzioni ADI , DI, perché il pre flash provocherà l'anticipata accensione del flash. ◆ Quando il flash EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI è pronto al lampo, la luce ausiliaria AF si mette a lampeggiare ◆ Il flash non scatterà se il flash EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI è collegato al corpo macchina mentre è regolato sul modo Slave ◆ Si utiliza un flash Minolta o la función TTL del flash incorporado de la cámara, y un EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI como unidad esclava, por favor no utilice la función ADI, DI como monitor de pre flash, podría causar el disparo prematuro del flash esclavo. STABILIRE I FLASH SECONDARI Se si usano due o più flash EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI è possibile stabilire quali flash debbano scattare insieme mediante la selezione dei canali. In questo modo un flash funge da flash principale e gli altri da secondari. 68 Impostare i flash per lo scatto 1. Collegare il flash che deve scattare alla fotocamera 2. Impostare la fotocamera sul modo di funzionamento S o M ◆ Impostare la velocità dell'otturatore su 1/30 o un tempo più lungo.Il flash principale trasmetterà le informazioni prima che gli altri flash scattino a loro volta. Se si usa un tempo di sincronizzazione più veloce di 1/30 i vari flash non scatteranno in sincronia l'uno con l'altro. 3. Mettete su ON l'interruttore del flash e premete a metà corsa il pulsante di scatto. ◆ In questo modo l'apertura del diaframma e la sensibilità del film saranno automaticamente trasferiti al flash 4. Staccare il flash dalla fotocamera 5. Premere il pulsante MODE e impostare / ( Modo slave) 6. Premere il pulsante SEL per far lampeggiare l'indicatore del canale 7. Premere il pulsante + o - per impostare il numero del canale (C1 o C2) 8. Premere il pulsante SEL per far lampeggiare l'indicazione del valore d'uscita del flash 9. Premere il pulsante + o - per impostare il valore d'uscita ◆ Stabilire la potenza del flash impostando, sul pannello LCD, una distanza che sia la più vicina possibile a quella che intercorre tra il flash secondario e il soggetto. Se la distanza è fuori dalla portata, cambiare l'apertura del diaframma. 10. Premere il pulsante SEL alcune volte per far apparire l'indicazione 11. Mettere il flash nella posizione voluta. Attenzione a non inserire il flash nella inquadratura. Impostare il flash principale 12. Premere il pulsante MODE e impostare / (Modo slave) 13. Premere il pulsante SEL per far lampeggiare l'indicatore del canale 14. Premere il pulsante + o - e impostare lo stesso numero di canale dei flash che debbono scattare 15. Premere il pulsante SEL per far lampeggiare l'indicazione del valore d'uscita del flash 16. Premere il pulsante + per far comparire la segnalazione 17. Premere il pulsante SEL per far cessare il lampeggiamento della indicazione 18. Collegare il flash principale alla fotocamera 19. Dopo esservi assicurati che tutti i flash siano pronti al lampo, premete il pulsante di scatto per realizzare la fotografia ◆ Quando il flash principale EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI è pronto al lampo, la luce ausiliaria AF si metterà a lampeggiare ◆ Non è possibile impostare il diaframma con il pulsante SEL, se viene impostata l'indicazione quando s'imposta il valore d'uscita del flash. Il flash va regolato nel modo Slave Controller ◆ Il flash principale Slave Controller ha solamente la funzione di pilotare l'accensione dei flash SPECIFICHE MODELLO: Flash con slitta a contatto caldo, auto zoom, TTL NUMERO GUIDA: 61 ( ISO 100, posizione parabola su focale 105mm) ALIMENTAZIONE: Quattro batterie alcaline AA, oppure quattro batterie AA Ni-Cd, oppure quattro batterie Nickel-Metal Hydride TEMPO DI CARICA: circa 7.0 secondi (batterie alcaline); circa 5.0 secondi con batterie Ni-Cd e Nickel-Metal Hydride) NUMERO LAMPI: circa 120 (con batterie alcaline); circa 160 (con batterie Ni-Cd e Nickel-Metal Hydride) DURATA DEL LAMPO circa 1/700 ( a piena potenza) COPERTURA FOCALI: 24-105mm, con spostamento motorizzato della parabola; 17mm con diffusore incorporato SPEGNIMENTO AUTOMATICO: Sì PESO: 330 gr DIMENSIONI: 77x139x117mm 69 DANSK Tillykke med dit valg af Sigma EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI Flash. Denne flash er udviklet specielt til SONY AF spejlreflekskameraer. Afhængig af kameramodel kan funktioner og betjening variere. For at få det fulde udbytte af flashen anbefaler vi, at du læser denne vejledning. Brugsanvisningen til kameraet indeholder også informationer om flashfotografering. Vi anbefaler, at du også læser disse informationer. BEMÆRK For at undgå uheld, bør du læse brugsanvisningen grundigt og bemærke de advarsler der er angivet herunder, inden flashen tages i brug. Advarsel !! Bemærk !! Brug af produktet i modstrid med disse advarsler kan medføre alvorlig personskade eller anden skade Brug af produktet i modstrid med disse advarsler kan medføre personskade. Symbol der markerer vigtige punkter hvor forsigtighed er påkrævet. Symbol der markerer information om handlinger der bør undgås. Advarsel !! Denne flash indeholder højspændingskomponenter. Adskil ikke flashen, da det kan medføre elektrisk stød eller forbrændinger. Hvis flashens kabinet går i stykker så de indvendige komponenter blotlægges, må de ikke berøres. Affyr ikke flashen tæt på en persons øjne. I så fald kan flashens kraftige lys give øjenskader. Hold mindst 1 meters afstand mellem flashen og en persons øjne når flashen anvendes. Berør ikke kameraets synkrostik mens flashen er påmonteret kameraets flashsko, da der er risiko for elektrisk stød. Anvend aldrig flashen i omgivelser med brændbare gasser eller kemikalier etc. Da det kan medføre brand eller eksplosion. Bemærk !! Anvend ikke denne flash med andre kameraer end SONY AF spejlreflekskameraer. I modsat fald kan flashen beskadige kameraets elektronik. Denne flash er ikke vandtæt. Hvis flashen anvendes i regn, sne eller fugtige omgivelser skal den beskyttes mod fugt. Det er ofte umuligt at reparere elektriske komponenter der er beskadigede af fugt. Udsæt ikke flashen for stød eller slag, høj temperatur, støv eller fugtighed. Det kan medføre at flashen ikke fungerer. Hvis flashen udsættes for pludselige temperaturudsving, f.eks. hvis flashen bringes fra en lav udendørs temperatur til en høj indendørs temperatur, kan der dannes kondens indvendig i flashen. For at modvirke dette bør flashen anbringes i en taske eller pose og den bør ikke anvendes før den har opnået rumtemperatur. Flashen bør ikke opbevares på steder hvor den udsættes for dampe fra kemikalier f.eks. fra møbler fremstillet af spånplader. Anvend ikke benzin eller andet der indeholder opløsningsmidler til rengøring af flashen. Anvend en blød klud til at aftørre flashen. Hvis flashen skal opbevares i længere tid bør det ske på et køligt sted med god ventilation. Batterierne bør tages ud af flashen – og flashen bør afprøves et par gange hver måned, for at sikre optimal funktion. 70 BESKRIVELSE AF FLASHENS DELE UDVENDIGE DELE 1.Flashhoved 2.AF-hjælpelys 3.Vinkel; Op og ned 4.Vinkel; Højre og venstre 5.Lås; Op og ned 6.Lås; Højre og venstre 7.LCD-display 8.Batteridæksel 9. Låseknap 10.Monteringsfod 11. Reflektorpanel 12. Vidvinkelforsats BETJENIGNSKNAPPER 13.MODE KNAP 14.<SEL> SELECT knap 15.< + > Indstillingsknap 16.< - > Indstillingsknap 17.ZOOM knap 18.TEST knap 19.LIGHT knap 20.Klar-lampe 21.Tænd/sluk VEDR: BATTERIER Denne flash anvender fire type ”AA” Alkaline eller genopladelige Ni-Cad og Ni-MH batterier. Manganese batterier kan også anvendes, men da de har en kortere levetid end Alkaline batterier kan de ikke anbefales. Udskift batterierne hvis flashen er mere end 30 sekunder om at lade op. ◆ For at sikre ordentlig elektrisk kontakt, bør batteripolerne aftørres inden batterierne sættes i. ◆ Ni-Cad og Ni-MH batterier har ikke standardiserede kontaktpunkter. Hvis du anvender Ni-Cad eller Ni-MH batterier bør du kontrollere at batteriets poler har kontakt med kontaktpunkterne i batterikammeret. ◆ Anvend altid 4 batterier af samme fabrikat og type. Bland ikke nye og brugte batterier. ◆ Forsøg ikke at adskille eller kortslutte batterierne, eller at kaste dem i åben ild eller vand, da det kan få dem til at eksplodere. Forsøg ikke at oplade batterier der ikke er konstrueret til genopladning. ◆ Hvis flashen ikke skal anvendes i en længere periode, bør batterierne fjernes for at undgå beskadigelse eller lækage. ◆ Batteriernes ydeevne nedsættes ved lave temperaturer. Hold batterierne varme hvis flashen skal bruges i koldt vejr. ◆ Det anbefales at medbringe ekstra batterier på rejser eller ved fotografering ved lave temperaturer. ISÆTNING AF BATTERIER 1. Kontroller at flashen er slukket. Skub batteridækslet i pilens retning for at åbne det. 2. Isæt 4 stk. ”AA” batterier. Vær opmærksom på at vende batterierne som angivet i batterikammeret. 3. Luk batteridækslet. 4. Skub Tænd/Sluk-knappen hen på ”ON” for at tænde flashen. Efter få sekunder vil klar-lampen lyse som tegn på at flashen er klar til brug. 5. Tryk på Test-knappen for at afprøve flashen. AUTOMATISK SLUK For at spare batterier vil flashen automatisk slukke hvis den ikke bruges i ca. 240 sekunder. Tryk på Test-knappen, eller tryk kameraets udløserknap halvt ned, for at aktivere flashen igen. Bemærk at automatisk sluk ikke fungerer når Slave-flash funktionerne anvendes. FEJLINDIKATIONER Hvis batteristyrken er for lav eller der er en fejl i de elektriske informationer mellem kamera og flash, vil ”Er” blinke på LCD-displayet. Sluk og tænd flashen hvis dette sker. Hvis indikationen derefter stadig blinker bør batterispændingen kontrolleres. 71 JUSTERING AF FLASHHOVEDET Tryk på ”Op/ned” låseknappen mens flashhovedet justeres til den ønskede vinkel. ◆ vises på LCD-displayet når du tænder flashen. Hvis dette symbol blinker, er flashens hoved indstillet til en forkert vinkel. MONTERING OG AFMONTERING AF FLASHEN Sluk for flashen. Skub flashfoden ind i kameraets flashsko indtil den låser med et klik. ◆ Når du monterer eller afmonterer flashen bør du holde i flashens nederste del for at undgå at beskadige flashfoden eller kameraets flashsko. ◆ Hvis kameraets indbyggede flash er vippet op, bør den skubbes ned inden EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI flashen monteres. Flashen afmonteres ved at skubbe den ud af kameraets flashsko, mens låseknappen trykkes ind. INDSTILLING AF FLASHENS UDLYSNINGSVINKEL Når du trykker på ZOOM-knappen vises symbolet. Hver gang du trykker på ZOOM-knappen vil LCD-displayet skifte og vise zoompositionen i følgende rækkefølge: 24mm → 28mm → 35mm → 50mm → 70mm → 85mm → 105mm → (Auto) Ved almindelig brug på TTL funktion vil flashen automatisk indstille zoompositionen i overensstemmelse med objektivets brændvidde. ◆ Når du tænder for flashen vil den indstille sig på den sidst valgte zoomposition. ◆ Hvis du anvender et objektiv med større billedvinkel end flashens udlysningsvinkel, vil billederne blive underbelyst i siderne. Flashen styrke vil variere afhængig af indstillingen af flashhovedet. VIDVINKELFORSATS Denne flash er forsynet med en indbygget vidvinkelforsats, der giver en udlysningsvinkel svarende til et 17mm vidvinkelobjektiv. Træk vidvinkelforsatsen og reflektorpanelet ud og vip forsatsen ned så den dækker flashhovedet. (Vær forsigtig når du trækker panelerne ud.) Skub derefter reflektorpanelet tilbage på plads. Flashens udlysningsvinkel vil automatisk blive indstillet på 17mm. ◆ Hvis vidvinkelforsatsen ved et uheld brækkes af, kan flashens zoom ikke fungere og flashen skal repareres. 72 LCD-DISPLAY BELYSNING Når du trykker på LIGHT-knappen vil LCD-displayet lyse i ca. 8 sekunder. Belysningen kan forlænges ved at trykke på LIGHT-knappen igen. TTL FUNKTION TTL funktionen vil beregne den korrekte eksponering for motivet og kontrollere flashlyset. ◆ TTL-funktionerne varierer afhængig af kombinationerne af kamera og objektiv. Se nedenstående skema. (Ved alle kombinationer vil TTL vises i flashen LCD-display) D-type objektiv Ikke D-type objektiv Digitale spejlreflekskameraer Maxxum 70, 50, 7, 5, 4, 3 Dynax 60, 40, 7, 5, 4, 3L ADI lysmåling For-flash lysmåling Maxxum 9 Dynax 9 Øvrige modeller For-flash lysmåling For-flash lysmåling Alm. TTL lysmåling Alm. TTL lysmåling 1. Indstil kameraet til P funktion. 2. Tænd for flashen. TTL-markeringen vil vises i LCD-displayet og flashen vil begynde at lade op. ◆ Med digitale spejlreflekskameraer, kontroller at indikatoren er tændt. Hvis indikatoren ikke vises, trykkes på + eller – knappen så indikatoren vises på LCD panelet, ellers vil eksponeringen ikke blive korrekt 3. Fokuser på dit motiv. 4. Kontroller at motivet er indenfor flashens effektive rækkevidde indikeret på LCD-displayet. 5. Tryk på udløserknappen når flashen er fuldt opladet. ◆ Når kameraet registrerer korrekt eksponering vil TTL-markeringen vises på LCD-displayet i ca. 5 sekunder. Hvis denne markering ikke vises, er flashlyset ikke tilstrækkeligt for det pågældende motiv. Tag et nyt billede på kortere afstand. ◆ AF-hjælpelyset tændes automatisk når dit motiv kræver det. Hjælpelysets rækkevidde er fra ca. 0,7m til 9m. ◆ Bemærk at når kameraet indstilles på M-funktion, vil flashen vælge de sidst anvendte indstillinger. ◆ Når flashen er fuldt opladet vil flashmarkeringen vises i kameraets søger. Hvis lukkeren udløses inden flashen er fuldt opladet, vil flashen ikke blive affyret og kameraet vil eksponere billedet på en langsom lukkertid med det eksisterende lys. BRUG AF FLASHEN MED ANDRE KAMERAFUNKTIONER Lukkertidsprioriteret indstilling Når du vælger den ønskede lukkertid vil kameraet indstille den korrekte blændeværdi. Du kan ikke vælge lukkertider hurtigere end kameraets synkroniseringstid. Blændeprioriteret indstilling Ved at vælge A-funktionen kan du vælge den ønskede blænde og kameraet indstiller den korrekte lukkertid efter baggrundens belysning. Fill-flash anvendes ved denne funktion. Anvendelse med M-funktion Du kan indstille den ønskede blænde og lukkertid. Du kan vælge lukkertider mellem synkroniseringstiden og bulb. ◆ Fill-flash anvendes ved denne funktion. ◆ Hvis du indstiller i overensstemmelse med kameraets lysmåler, vil kameraet fungere på samme måde som ved Dagslys-flash eller flash med langsom lukkertid. 73 KONTINUERLIG OPTAGELSE For at forhindre overophedning bør flashen hvile i mindst 10 minutter efter brug af de antal flasheksponeringer der er angivet i skemaet herunder. Funktion TTL, M(1/1,1/2) M(1/4, 1/8) M(1/16-1/32) Multi Antal flasheksponeringer 20 kontinuerlige flashoptagelser 25 kontinuerlige flashoptagelser 40 kontinuerlige flashoptagelser 10 optagelser MANUEL INDSTILLING AF FLASH Manuel indstilling kan anvendes hvis det er vanskeligt at opnå korrekt eksponering med TTL funktionen. Ved manuel indstilling kan flashens lysstyrke indstilles fra 1/1 (fuld styrke) til 1/64 styrke i trin svarende til 1 blænde. 1. Sæt kameraet på M indstilling. 2. Tryk på MODE-knappen på flashen for at vælge M. 3. Værdien for lysstyrken (ledetallet) blinker når du trykker på SEL-knappen. 4. Tryk på + eller – knappen for at vælge flashens lysstyrke. 5. Displayet vil holde op med at blinke og i stedet lyse konstant når du trykker på SEL-knappen. 6. Fokuser på motivet ved at trykke på kameraets udløserknap og aflæs afstanden på objektivet. Indstil derefter blænden eller flashens lysstyrke indtil den afstand der vises i LCD-displayet svarer til afstanden til motivet. 7. Når flashens klarlampe lyser er den klar til brug. ◆ Du kan beregne den korrekte eksponering efter følgende formel: Ledetal (GN) divideret med afstanden = blændeværdi. Flashen vil automatisk kalkulere og vise afstanden til motivet efter denne formel. (se tabel 1 på sidste side) SYNKRONISERING PÅ HURTIGE LUKKERTIDER (FP FLASH - HSS) Når du tager billeder med en almindelig flash kan du ikke anvende hurtigere lukkertider end kameraets synkroniseringstid, da flashen skal affyres mens lukkerens gardiner er helt åbne. Med synkronisering på hurtige lukkertider (High Speed Sync) affyres flashen gentagne gange mens lukkeren arbejder. På denne måde kan du tage flashbilleder med en hurtigere lukkertid end synkroniseringstiden. 1. Vælg flashfunktion ved at trykke på MODE-knappen (”TTL” og ”M” funktion kan anvendes). 2. Tryk på + eller – knappen så symbolet vises i LCDdisplayet. 3. Fokuser på motivet. 4. Når flashens klarlampe lyser er den klar til brug. Ved optagelser med synkronisering på hurtige lukkertider varierer flashens lysstyrke afhængig af lukkertiden. Flashens rækkevidde vil være kortere med hurtigere lukkertider. (se tabel 2 på sidste side) ◆ Hvis du vil annullere FP Flash skal du få symbolet til forsvinde fra LCD-displayet ved at trykke på + eller – knappen. 74 PILOT-LYS Hvis du bruger funktionen til pilot-lys, kan du kontrollere lysfordelingen samt skygger og reflekser inden billedet tages. 1. Tryk på MODE-knappen for at vælge funktion. 2. Tryk på + eller – knappen for at få symbolet vist i displayet. 3. Kontroller at flashen er klar og tryk på TEST-knappen for at affyre den. MULTI-FLASH FUNKTION Mens lukkeren er åben affyres flashen gentagne gange. Herved eksponeres en serie optagelser af motivet på samme billede. En mørk baggrund med et lyst motiv giver det bedste resultat. Flashens affyringsfrekvens kan indstilles mellem 1Hz og 100Hz. Op til 90 flashglimt kan affyres i en serie. Det maksimale antal flashglimt varierer afhængig af flashens ledetal (lysstyrke) og affyringsfrekvensen. (se tabel 3 på sidste side) 1. Indstil kameraets eksponeringsfunktion på ”M” og vælg blænden. 2. Tryk på MODE-knappen indtil Multi-flash vises. 3. Tryk på SEL-knappen indtil affyringsfrekvensen blinker. 4. Tryk på + eller – knappen for at vælge den ønskede frekvens. 5. Når der trykkes på SEL-knappen vil flash lysstyrken blinke. 6. Tryk på + eller – knappen for at vælge den ønskede lysstyrke. 7. Når der trykkes på SEL-knappen vil antallet af flashglimt blinke. 8. Tryk på + eller – knappen for at vælge det ønskede antal flashglimt. 9. Når der trykkes på SEL-knappen vil displayet holde op med at blinke. 10. Når flashens klarlampe lyser er den klar til brug. Bemærk: Vælg en længere lukkertid end: (affyringsfrekvens) (Antallet af flashglimt) divideret med BOUNCE FLASH (indirekte flash) På flashbilleder vil der ofte optræde kraftige skygger fra motivet. Hvis du drejer flashhovedet og anvender indirekte flashlys fra loftet eller væggene vil lyset blive blødere. Tryk på låseknappen og drej flashhovedet for at indstille vinkelen. OP: 0, 60, 75, 90 HØJRE: 0, 60, 75, 90 NED: 0,7 VENSTRE: 0, 60, 75,90, 120, 150, 180 Når bounce flash anvendes vil symbolet vises i LCD-displayet. Farverne på billedet vil blive påvirket af farven på det reflekterede lys. Vælg en hvid flade til at reflektere lyset. Afhængig af den reflekterende flade, afstanden til motivet og andre faktorer, vil flashens effektive rækkevidde blive formindsket. Kontroller om korrekt eksponering er opnået (TTL markering i LCD-displayet) efter optagelsen. NÆROPTAGELSER Til brug ved næroptagelser kan flashhovedet vippes 7º nedad. Flashen kan kun anvendes på afstande mellem 0,5 og 2 meter. Når flashhovedet vippes nedad vil symbolet blinke. 75 REFLEKTORPANEL Denne flash er forsynet med et indbygget reflektorpanel, der kan give en lysrefleks i motivets øjne (catch light) når flashen anvendes som indirekte lyskilde. Træk reflektorpanelet ud. Hvis vidvinkelforsatsen følger med ud, skubbes den tilbage på plads. (Vær forsigtig når du trækker panelerne ud.) ◆ For at opnå effekten med lysrefleks i øjnene, skal flashhovedet vippes op i en vinkel på 90 grader og billederne skal tages på kort afstand. TRÅDLØS FLASH Når du anvender trådløs flash kan du styre lyslægningen for at opnå en mere tredimensionel virkning eller en mere jævn lysfordeling, uden at have flashen tilsluttet kameraet med et kabel. EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI kommunikerer med kameraet ved hjælp af flashlyset. Når du anvender trådløs flash vil kameraet automatisk beregne den korrekte eksponering. ◆ I denne instruktion kalder vi en flash der er monteret på kameraet ”Master-flash” og en flash der er opstillet på et andet sted ”Slave-Flash”. ◆ Det er praktisk at anvende en holder til den flash der skal opstilles separat. Holderen har et gevind til montering på et stativ. ◆ Vær opmærksom på, ikke at stille flashen så den er synlig i billedfeltet. ◆ Placer flashen ca. 0.5-5m fra motivet og kameraet ca. 1-5m fra motivet. ◆ Hvis andre anvender trådløs flash i nærheden af dig, kan din flash blive affyret pga. de andre flashenheders lys. Hvis dette sker, kan du vælge en anden indstilling for flashens kanal. A. NÅR FLASHEN STYRES AF KAMERAETS INDBYGGEDE FLASH. 1. Indstil kameraet til trådløs flash funktion. ◆ Da indstillingen varierer afhængig af kameramodel, bør du se kameraets brugsanvisning for flere oplysninger. 2. Indstil kameraets eksponeringsfunktion til P,A,S eller M. knappen på flashen indtil “off-camera flash” 3. Tryk på displayet vises. 4. Vælg “off-camera flash” nummer 1 ved at trykke på knappen. knappen for at indstille Flash Mode til TTL. 5. Tryk på knappen. 6. Kanal information vil blinke når der trykkes på 7. Indstil kanal-nummer (C1 - C4) ved at trykke på eller knappen. 8. Når der trykkes på knappen, vil indikatoren stoppe med at blinke. 9. Monter flashen på kameraet og tryk udløserknappen halvvejs ned (kanal-nummeret registreres af kameraet). 10. Fjern flashen fra kameraet og opstil den det ønskede sted. 11. Tænd for kameraets indbyggede flash og kontroller at den er opladet. ◆ Når der anvendes trådløs flash vil AF-hjælpelyset på EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI blinke som information om at flashen er fuldt opladet. 12. Kontroller fokuseringen og tag billedet. ◆ EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI vil blive affyret når den indbyggede flash affyres. Den indbyggede flash affyres kun som kontrol-enhed for EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI, belysningen af motivet sker af EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI. Kameraet vil kontrollere eksponeringen via TTL-systemet. 76 ◆ Afhængig af lukkertiden, skiftes der automatisk mellem normal flash eller high speed sync flash. ◆ Hvis kameraets eksponeringsfunktion stilles på M, vælges manuel trådløs flash. Efter indstilling af kanal-nummer, vil flashens lysstyrkeindikator blinke. Vælg den ønskede lysstyrke ved at trykke på eller knappen og tryk derefter på knappen for at få displayet til at stoppe med at blinke. B. NÅR FLASHEN STYRES AF EN FLASH MONTERET PÅ KAMERAET For at anvende trådløs flash, skal der bruges to eller flere EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI flash enheder. EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI kan kun bruges som slave-flash (”off-camera” funktion). Afhængig af hvilken flash model der anvendes ved slave-flash, er det nødvendigt at ændre kontrolfunktionen for master-flashen. Se nedenstående skema. (EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI kan anvendes som master-flash). Flashmodel der anvendes som slave-flash Kontrol-funktion Kameramodel der kan anvendes med slave-flash Lysstyrke indstilling (Ratio) Flash funktion + EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI - α700, α900 α900 EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI Det er muligt at styre op til 3 grupper; Master, Slave-Flash 1 og Slave-Flash 2. Det er muligt at indstille lysstyrken (ratio) for slave-flashen i 5 niveauer eller ingen flash. TTL Auto flash, High Speed Sync Flash (TTL, M), Manuel flash Det er muligt at styre 2 grupper; Master og slave-Flash. Master : Det er muligt at indstille lysstyrken (ratio) for slave-flashen til 1:2 eller 2:1. TTL Auto flash, High Speed Sync Flash (TTL) B-1. VED ANVENDELSE KUN SOM SLAVE-FLASH (OFF-CAMERA FLASH) Kamera og Master-flash indstilling 1. Indstil kameraet til trådløs flash funktion. ◆ Da indstillingen varierer afhængig af kameramodel, bør du se kameraets brugsanvisning for flere oplysninger. 2. Indstil kameraets eksponeringsfunktion til P,A,S eller M. 3. Monter flashen på kameraet. 4. Flashen’s LCD-display vil automatisk skifte til valg af kontrolfunktion. (Hvis LCD-displayet ikke skifter automatisk, knappen indtil valg af kontrolfunktion vises.) trykkes på 5. Displayet vil blinke når der trykkes på knappen. ved at trykke på eller knappen. 6. Indstil kontrolfunktionen på 7. Kanalinformationen vil blinke når der trykkes på knappen. eller knappen. 8. Vælg kanal-nummer (C1 - C4) ved at trykke på knappen. 9. Lysstyrke indstillingen (ratio) vil blinke når der trykkes på 10. Indstil lysstyrkefunktionen til [ ] ved at trykke på eller knappen. 11. Tryk på knappen igen, for at få displayet til at holde op med at blinke. Indstilling af Slave-Flash 12. Tryk på knappen indtil Slave-flash (off-camera flash) displayet vises. 13. Vælg Slave-flash nummer 1 ved at trykke på knappen. 14. Tryk på knappen for at indstille flashfunktionen på TTL. 77 15. Kanal informationen vil blinke når der trykkes på knappen. eller knappen for at vælge samme kanal-nummer som er valgt for Master-flashen. 16. Tryk på knappen, for at få indikatoren til at stoppe med at blinke. 17. Tryk på 18. Placer flashen det ønskede sted. 19. Når du har kontrolleret at alle flashenheder er klar, kan du tage billedet. ◆ Når off-camera flashen er fuldt opladet vil AF-hjælpelyset blinke. 20. Kontroller fokuseringen og tag billedet. B-2. RATIO-FLASH FUNKTION (CONTROL MODE ) Kamera og Master-flash indstilling 1. Gennemfør indstillingerne angivet under B-1 trin 1 til 9. ] ved at trykke på eller 2. Indstil lysstyrke funktionen til [ knappen. 3. Flashfunktionsdisplayet vil blinke når der trykkes på knappen. 4. Indstil flashfunktionen på TTL ved at trykke på eller knappen. ] på Master-flashen vil blinke når der trykkes på 5. Lysstyrke (ratio-flash) displayet [ knappen. eller knappen. 6. Indstil lysstyrken for Master-flashen ved at trykke på 7. Lysstyrke displayet [ ] for Slave-Flash 1 vil blinke når der trykkes på knappen. eller knappen. 8. Indstil lysstyrken for Slave-Flash 1 ved at trykke på ] for Slave-Flash 2 vil blinke når der trykkes på knappen. 9. Lysstyrke displayet [ 10. Indstil lysstyrken for Slave-Flash 2 ved at trykke på eller knappen. knappen, vil indikatoren holde op med at blinke. 11. Ved tryk på Indstilling af Slave-Flash 12. Gennemfør indstillingerne angivet under B-1 Indstilling af Slave-Flash. ◆ Hvis der anvendes flere Slave-flash enheder, indstilles det ønskede Slave-flash nummer på hver enhed. ◆ Det er muligt at indstille lysstyrken (ratio) for Master, Slave-Flash 1 og Slave-Flash 2 som følger: (ingen flash) 1 2 4 8 16 Flashens lysstyrke indstilles som en værdi for hver enhed / total værdi. [Eksempel] Master Slave-Flash 1 Slave-Flash 2 Indstillet værdi 2 1 4 B-3. RATIO-FLASH FUNKTION (CONTROL MODE Flashen lysstyrke (ratio) 2/7 1/7 4/7 ) Kamera og Master-flash indstilling 1. Gennemfør indstillingerne angivet under B-1 trin 1 til 6. 2. Indstil lysstyrke funktionen til ved at trykke på eller knappen. 3. Kanal informationen vil blinke når der trykkes på knappen. 4. Vælg kanal-nummer (C1 - C4) ved at trykke på eller knappen. 5. Indstil lysstyrke funktionen til [ ]ved at trykke på eller knappen. 6. Lysstyrke displayet vil blinke når der trykkes på knappen. 78 7. Indstil lysstyrkeforholdet for Master-flashen:Slave-Flashen ved at trykke på eller . Vælg 8. Ved tryk på knappen, vil indikatoren holde op med at blinke. eller knappen. Indstilling af Slave-Flash 9. Hvis Slave-Flashen er en EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI, gennemføres indstillingerne angivet under B-1 Indstilling af Slave-Flash. ◆ Hvis Slave-Flashen er en EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI, se den brugsanvisning der følger med flashen. ◆ Hvis Slave-Flashen er en EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI, kan der kun vælges kanal-nummer C1 til C3. SLAVE-FLASH NORMAL SLAVE-FLASH Selv om EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI ikke er monteret på kameraet kan du affyre flashen ved hjælp af kameraets indbyggede flash eller en anden flashenhed. 1. Monter flashen på kameraet. 2. Indstil kameraet på den ønskede eksponeringsfunktion. Hvis du vælger A eller M skal du også indstille den ønskede blænde. 3. Tænd for flashen og tryk kameraets udløserknap halvt ned. ◆ Nu overføres blændeværdien og filmfølsomheden automatisk til flashen. 4. Fjern flashen fra kameraet. 5. Tryk på MODE-knappen og vælg / (Slave) funktionen. 6. Tryk på SEL-knappen for at få indikatoren for lysstyrke til at blinke. 7. Tryk på + eller – knappen for at vælge den ønskede lysstyrke. ◆ Indstil den fornødne lysstyrke ved at indstille afstanden på LCD-displayet i overensstemmelse med afstanden til motivet. Hvis den aktuelle afstand er uden for flashens rækkevidde, må du vælge en anden blænde. ◆ Du kan manuelt indstille filmfølsomheden og blændeværdien på flashen hvis du ønsker det. For at indstille filmføsomhed: Tryk på MODE-knappen og vælg og tryk derefter på SEL-knappen for at få indikatoren til at blinke. Tryk på + eller – knappen for at vælge den ønskede filmfølsomhed. Tryk igen på SEL-knappen. For at indstille blændeværdien: Når flashen er indstillet på Slave-funktion – tryk på på SEL-knappen for at få indikatoren for blændeværdi til at blinke. Tryk på + eller – knappen for at vælge den ønskede blænde. Tryk igen på SEL-knappen. 8. Tryk på SEL-knappen gentagne gange for at få vist displayet. 9. Placer Slave-flashen på det ønskede sted. Undgå at placere Slave-flashen indenfor billedfeltet. 10. Når du har kontrolleret at alle flashenheder er klar, kan du tage billedet. ◆ Når EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI er opladet vil AF-hjælpelyset blinke. ◆ Flashen fungerer ikke hvis EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI er monteret på kameraet mens den er indstillet på Slave-flash funktionen. ◆ Hvis du anvender en SONY flash eller kameraets indbyggede flash og en EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI som slaveflash, bør du ikke anvende ADI, DI funktionerne på kameraet, da blinket fra for-flashen vil affyre slaveflashen. UDVALGTE SLAVE-FLASH Hvis du anvender to eller flere EF-610 Super flash, kan du udvælge hvilke flashenheder der skal affyres samtidig ved hjælp af kanalindstillingen. Med denne funktion vil en flash fungere som kontrolenhed og de andre som Slave-flash. 79 Indstilling af Slave-flashenheder 1. Monter flashen på kameraet. 2. Indstil kameraet på S eller M funktion. ◆ Vælg en lukkertid på 1/30 eller langsommere. Kontrol-flashen vil transmittere kontrolsignalet inden flashenhederne affyres. Hvis du vælger en lukkertid hurtigere end 1/30 vil flashenhederne ikke synkronisere. 3. Tænd for flashen og tryk kameraets udløserknap halvt ned. Nu overføres blændeværdi og filmfølsomhed automatisk til flashen. 4. Fjern flashen fra kameraet. / (Slave-funktionen). 5. Tryk på MODE-knappen og vælg 6. Tryk på SEL-knappen for at få kanalindikatoren til at blinke. 7. Tryk på + eller – knappen for at vælge kanalnummeret (C1 eller C2). 8. Tryk på SEL-knappen for at få indikatoren for lysstyrke til at blinke. 9. Tryk på + eller – knappen for at vælge den ønskede lysstyrke. ◆ Indstil den fornødne lysstyrke ved at indstille afstanden på LCD-displayet i overensstemmelse med afstanden til motivet. Hvis den aktuelle afstand er uden for flashens rækkevidde, må du vælge en anden blænde. 10. Tryk på SEL-knappen gentagne gange for at få vist displayet. 11. Placer Slave-flashen på det ønskede sted. Undgå at placere Slave-flashen indenfor billedfeltet. Indstilling af kontrol-enhed 12. Tryk på MODE-knappen og vælg / (Slave-funktionen). 13. Tryk på SEL-knappen for at få kanalindikatoren til at blinke. 14. Tryk på + eller – knappen for at vælge samme kanalnummer som for Slaveflashen (C1 eller C2). 15. Tryk på SEL-knappen for at få indikatoren for lysstyrke til at blinke. 16. Tryk på + knappen for at vise markeringen. 17. Tryk på SEL-knappen for at få displayet til at holde op med at blinke. 18. Monter kontrol-flashen på kameraet. 19. Når du har kontrolleret at alle flashenheder er klar, kan du tage billedet. ◆ Når Slaveflashenhederne er fuldt opladede vil AF-hjælpelyset blinke. ◆ Du kan ikke indstille blændeværdien ved hjælp af SEL-knappen hvis du vælger ved indstilling af lysstyrken. Flashen vil blive indstillet til Slave-kontrolfunktion. ◆ Kontrol-enheden fungerer kun som styreenhed for Slave-flashenhederne. markeringen SPECIFIKATIONER TYPE: Kompakt seriekontrolleret TTL flash med auto-zoom. LEDETAL: 61 (ISO 100/m ved 105mm zoom-indstilling) STRØMFORSYNING: Fire type AA alkaline batterier eller, Fire type AA Ni-Cd batterier eller, Fire type AA Ni-MH batterier GENOPLADNINGSTID: Ca. 7 sekunder med Alkaline batterier Ca. 5 sekunder med Ni-Cd eller Ni-MH batterier ANTAL FLASHGLIMT: Ca. 120 flashglimt med Alkaline batterier Ca. 160 flashglimt med Ni-Cd eller Ni-MH batterier FLASHGLIMTETS VARIGHED: Ca. 1/700 sek. ved fuld styrke. UDLYSNINGSVINKEL: Dækker synsvinkelen for 24mm~105mm automatisk zoom Dækker synsvinkelen for 17mm med indbygget vidvinkelforsats AUTOMATISK SLUK: Mulig VÆGT: 330 g MÅL: 77X139X117mm 80 NEDERLANDS Hartelijk dank voor de aankoop van de Sigma EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI electronenflitser. Dit product is speciaal ontworpen voor de SONY AF SLR camera’s. Afhankelijk van het gebruikte cameramodel kunnen de diverse functies afwijken. Wij adviseren u deze gebruiksaanwijzing aandachtig te lezen. De talloze aantrekkelijke extra’s van deze flitser vormen een welkome uitbreiding van uw fotografische mogelijkheden. Om uw flitser op de juiste wijze in te stellen en optimaal gebruik te maken van de mogelijkheden, raden wij u aan deze gebruiksaanwijzing aandachtig door te lezen en tevens de gebruiksaanwijzing van uw camera naast deze instructies te gebruiken. VOORZORGSMAATREGELEN Ter voorkoming van ongelukken en beschadiging, raden wij u aan deze gebruiksaanwijzing aandachtig te lezen en te letten op de speciale waarschuwingssymbolen. Let u vooral op de twee onderstaande waarschuwingssymbolen: Wanneer u tijdens het gebruik van deze flitser deze waarschuwingen Waarschuwing!! negeert, loopt u het risico van ernstige verwondingen en/of schade. Wanneer u tijdens het gebruik van deze flitser deze waarschuwingen negeert, loopt u het risico van verwondingen en/of schade. Dit symbool duidt op een belangrijke aanwijzing wanneer verwondingen en/of schade kunnen worden veroorzaakt. Dit symbool duidt op welke handelingen vermeden moeten worden Let Op!! Waarschuwing!! De electronische circuits in deze flitser hebben een hoog voltage. Maak de flitser niet open om electrische schokken of brandwonden te voorkomen. Indien de behuizing van de flitser gescheurd of kapot is, raak de delen binnenin dan niet aan. Gebruik de flitser niet vlakbij de ogen. Het zeer felle licht zou de ogen kunnen beschadigen. Houdt minimaal 1 meter afstand van het gezicht als u een flitsopname maakt. Raak de flitscontacten van uw camera niet aan als de flitser op het flitsschoentje is bevestigd. Dit kan een electrische schok geven. Gebruik uw flitser nooit in een omgeving waar zich licht ontvlambare stoffen bevinden, dit zou tot brand of ontploffing kunnen leiden. Let Op!! Gebruik deze flitser alleen op de SONY spiegelreflex camera’s: het gebruik op andere camera’s kan het electronische circuit beschadigen. De flitser is niet waterdicht. Indien u de flitser in regen of in de nabijheid van water gebruikt, zorg er dan voor dat deze niet nat wordt. Vaak is het vrijwel onmogelijk om waterschade aan electrische circuits te repareren. Stel u camera en flitser niet bloot aan schokken, stoten, stof, hoge temperaturen of vochtigheid. Deze factoren kunnen tot storingen leiden in uw apparatuur. Indien de flitser een sterke temperatuurswisseling ondergaat, kan er kon condensatie in het binnenwerk optreden. Wacht in dit geval tot uw flitser de omgevingstemperatuur heeft aangenomen. Bewaar uw flitser niet in een ruimte waar zich chemische stoffen, kamfer of insecticides bevinden. Deze stoffen kunnen de flitser beschadigen. Gebruik geen thinner, benzine of andere schoonmaakmiddelen om de flitser te reinigen. Gebruik alleen een schone, eventueel iets vochtige, doek. Bewaar de flitser op een koele, goed geventileerde, droge plaats. Het is aan te raden om de flitser enkele keren per maand op te laden en te ontsteken. Dit zal de levensduur van de flitser ten goede komen. 81 OMSCHRIJVING VAN DE ONDERDELEN 1.Flitskop 2.AF hulplicht 3.Flitshoek bij indirect flitsen 4.Rotatiehoek, links/rechts 5.Vergrendelknop indirect flitsen 6.Vergrendelknop rotatie links/rechts 7.LCD display 8.Batterijdeksel 9. Ontkoppelknop 10.Flitsvoetje 11. Vanglichtpaneel 12. Groothoek adapter 16.<-> mintoets Instelknoppen / 13.Functietoets 14.<SEL> keuzetoets 15.<+> plustoets toetsen 17.Zoomtoets 18.Test toets 19.Lichttoets 20.OK lampje 21. Aan/uit schakelaar Externe onderdelen BATTERIJEN Als stroombron voor deze flitser dienen 4 “AA” Alkaline batterijen van 1,5 Volt te worden gebruikt. Ook kunnen oplaadbare Ni-Cad of Ni-MH worden gebruikt. Hoewel mangaan batterijen eveneens bruikbaar zijn, raden wij vanwege hun korte levensduur het gebruik hiervan niet aan. Wanneer het OK-lampje pas na 30 sec. oplicht dient u de batterijen te vervangen of op te laden. ◆ Om zeker te zijn van een goed electrisch contact kunt de batterijpolen schoonmaken voor u de batterijen inlegt. ◆ Ni-Cad / Ni-MH batterijen hebben geen gestandaardiseerde contacten. Indien u Ni-Cad batterijen gebruikt dient u er op te letten dat de polen goed contact maken met de contactpunten van de flitser. ◆ Gebruik altijd 4 batterijen van hetzelfde merk en type en gebruik geen oude en nieuwe batterijen door elkaar, anders bestaat het risico van explosie, lekkage over oververhitting. ◆ Sluit de batterijen niet kort en haal ze niet uit elkaar. Stel ze ook niet bloot aan vuur of water, want dan kunnen ze exploderen. Probeer geen normale batterijen op te laden; dit is alleen mogelijk met Ni-Cad / Ni-MH (oplaadbare) batterijen. ◆ Verwijder de batterijen wanneer de flitser gedurende langere tijd niet zal worden gebruikt om eventuele lekkage te voorkomen. ◆ Bij lage temperaturen zal de werking van de batterijen achteruitgaan. Bewaar de batterijen goed beschermd wanneer u de flitser bij koud weer gaat gebruiken. ◆ Het is aan te bevelen extra batterijen mee te nemen wanneer U voor langere tijd weg gaat of bij opnamen bij koud weer. HET INLEGGEN VAN DE BATTERIJEN 1. Overtuig u ervan dat de flitser middels de hoofdschakelaar is uitgeschakeld en schuif vervolgens het batterijdeksel open. 2. Plaats vier AA batterijen in het batterijcompartiment. Let er op dat de plus - en minpolen op de juiste wijze worden geplaatst volgens de aanduiding in het batterijcompartiment. 3. Sluit vervolgens het deksel. 4. Schakel de flitser in met behulp van de hoofdschakelaar. 5. Na enkele seconden zal het OK-lampje oplichten als teken dat de flitser voor gebruik gereed is. 6. Druk op de testknop om u ervan te overtuigen dat de flitser goed werkt. Automatische uitschakeling Indien de flitser enige tijd niet wordt gebruikt zal hij zich na ongeveer 240 sec. automatisch uitschakelen om energie te sparen. Om de flitser weer in te schakelen drukt u op de testknop of druk de ontspanknop van de camera half in. Let op: het automatische uitschakelen zal niet werken als de flitser in de “slave” stand staat. Foutmeldingen Indien de batterijspanning onvoldoende is, of wanneer de electrische informatieoverdracht tussen camera en flitser niet correct geschiedt, zal op het LCD display de aanduiding “Er” knipperen. Wanneer dit gebeurt dient u de flitser uit te schakelen en meteen weer aan. Indien de “Er” aanduiding wederom verschijnt dient u de batterijen te controleren. 82 HET AFSTELLEN VAN DE FLITSKOP Depress the Bounce “Up and Down” Lock and Release Button, and adjust the flash head to the desired position. ◆ Druk de vergrendelknop (6) in en plaats de flitskop in de verschijnt op het LCD display indien u de gewenste positie. flitser inschakelt en de flitsknop in een niet correcte positie staat. HET BEVESTIGEN EN VERWIJDEREN VAN DE FLITSER Schakel de flitser met de hoofdschakelaar uit. Schuif vervolgens het flitsvoetje van de flitser in het flitsschoentje van de camera tot het vastklikt. ◆ Wanneer u de flitser bevestigt of verwijdert pak deze dan bij de onderzijde vast om beschadiging van het flitsvoetje of flitsschoentje te voorkomen. ◆ Indien de ingebouwde flitser van de camera omhoog staat, klap deze dan in vóór u de flitser op de camera aanbrengt. Om de flitser te verwijderen drukt u op het vergrendelkopje en vervolgens schuift u de flitser uit het flitsschoentje. HET INSTELLEN VAN DE ZOOMREFLECTOR Indien u op de zoomtoets drukt zal het symbool verschijnen, iedere keer dat u de zoomtoets indrukt zal het LCD display een oplopende waarde aangeven, zoals onderstaand wordt vermeld. 24mm → 28mm → 35mm → 50mm → 70mm → 85mm → 105mm → (Auto) Normaal gesproken zal in de TTL(DDL) mode de zoom zich automatisch aanpassen aan het brandpunt van het gebruikte objectief ◆ Wanneer u de flitser inschakelt zal de reflector terugkeren naar de laatst gekozen stand; deze wordt automatisch in het geheugen opgeslagen. ◆ Indien u een objectief gebruikt met een kortere brandpuntsafstand dan 24 mm is het mogelijk dat de randen en/of hoeken onderbelicht worden. ◆ Afhankelijk van de zoominstelling zal het richtgetal van de flitser veranderen. GROOTHOEK ADAPTER De flitser is voorzien van een ingebouwde groothoek adapter, waarmee het mogelijk is om met ultra groothoek-objectieven tot 17 mm te werken. Trek de groothoek adapter samen met het vanglichtpaneel uit de houder en draai het voor de flitskop. (Trek beiden voorzichtig en gelijkmatig naar buiten) Druk het vanglichtpaneel hierna terug in de houder. De belichtingshoek zal automatisch op 17 mm worden ingesteld. ◆ Als de ingebouwde groothoekdiffusor ongewenst wordt ingeschakeld zal het correctie mechanisme van de ingestelde flitshoek niet functioneren. In dit geval dient u contact op te nemen met de handelaar waar u de flitser heeft gekocht. 83 VERLICHTING VAN HET LCD DISPLAY Wanneer u de LIGHT toets indrukt, zal het LCD display voor ca. 8 sec. worden verlicht. Het LCD display zal langer dan 8 sec. worden verlicht indien u de LIGHT toets nogmaals indrukt. TTL (DDL) AUTO MODE De TTL (DDL) Auto mode voorziet de opname van de correcte belichting en controleert de hoeveelheid flitslicht. ◆ De TTL (DDL) FLASH procedure kan verschillen, dit is afhankelijk van het gebruikte cameramodel en objectief. Zie onderstaande tabel: (met alle combinaties wordt TTL in het LCD display getoond) D type objectief Geen D type objectief Digitale Spiegelreflex-camera Dynax 7D, 60, 40, 7, 5, 4, 3L Dynax 9 Alle andere modellen ADI meting Pre-flash meting Gewone DDL meting Pre-flash meting Pre-flash meting Gewone DDL meting 1. Zet de camera in de P stand 2. Zet de hoofdschakelaar van de flitser aan, het TTL symbool zal op het LCD display verschijnen en de flitser wordt opgeladen ◆ Bij gebruik van een Digitale Spiegelreflex-camera dient de indicatie aan te staan. Is dit niet het geval druk dan op de + of – knop zodat de indicatie zichtbaar wordt op het LCD display, anders zal de opname niet correct worden belicht. 3. Stel scherp op het onderwerp 4. Controleer of het onderwerp zich binnen de juiste afstand bevindt op het LCD display van de flitser 5. Als de flitser volledig is opgeladen kunt u nu de opname maken. ◆ Indien de camera een correct belichte opname heeft gemaakt verschijnt het TTL symbool gedurende 5 sec. in het LCD display. Als deze indicatie niet verschijnt dan is de verlichting niet toereikend geweest voor deze omstandigheden en dient u de opname nogmaals te maken en er voor te zorgen dat het onderwerp zich dichter bij de camera bevindt. ◆ Het AF hulplicht zal automatisch werken als u zich in een donkere omgeving bevindt. Het effectieve bereik van het AF hulplicht is van 0,7 tot 9 meter. Let er op dat als de camera in de M stand wordt gebruikt de flitser wordt ingesteld op de laatst gebruikte waarden. ◆ Als de flitser volledig is opgeladen zal het flitssymbool in de zoeker zichtbaar zijn. Indien de ontspanknop van de camera wordt ingedrukt voordat de flitser volledig is opgeladen, zal de flitser niet functioneren en zal de camera een langzame sluitertijd kiezen. HET GEBRUIK VAN DE FLITSER BIJ DIVERSE CAMERA INSTELLINGEN Sluitertijd voorkeuze Als u de gewenste sluitertijd heeft ingesteld zal de camera de juiste diafragmawaarde instellen. U kunt geen sluitertijd kiezen die sneller is dan de flitssynchronisatie. Diafragma voorkeuze Als u de gewenste diafragmawaarde hebt ingesteld zal de camera de juiste sluitertijd kiezen om de achtergrond goed te belichten. Met deze instelling zal de invulflits methode worden gebruikt. Handmatige (M) instelling U kunt de gewenste sluitertijd en diafragmawaarde instellen. De sluitertijd is instelbaar van de maximale flitssynchronisatietijd tot “Bulb”. ◆Met deze instelling zal de invulflits methode worden gebruikt indien u de belichting instelt volgens de indicatie van de belichtingsmeter, zal de camera kiezen voor daglicht- of langzame synchronisatie. 84 MAXIMALE PRESTATIES BIJ CONTINU FOTOGRAFEREN. Om oververhitting te voorkomen dient u uw flitser tenminste 10 minuten niet te gebruiken na het aantal flitsen in de onderstaande tabel: Mode Aantal flitsen TTL, M(1/1,1/2) 20 flitsen achter elkaar M(1/4, 1/8) 25 flitsen achter elkaar M(1/16-1/32) 40 flitsen achter elkaar Multi 10 cycli HANDMATIGE FLITSINSTELLING Als de opname moeilijk correct te belichten is met de TTL instelling, is het aan te bevelen om de flitser handmatig in te stellen. Met de handmatige instelling is het mogelijk om de flitsintensiteit in te stellen van 1/1 (volledig) tot 1/64. 1. Stel de belichting van de camera in op de M mode 2. Druk op de MODE toets om M(anual) te selecteren 3. Het richtgetal knippert wanneer u op de SEL toets drukt. 4. Druk op de + of – toets om de gewenste flitsintensiteit in te stellen. 5. Als u nogmaals op de SEL toets drukt, zal de ingestelde flitsintensiteit stoppen met knipperen en zichtbaar blijven. 6. Stel scherp door de ontspanknop van de camera half in te drukken. Lees de afstand af van de scherpstelring. Regel daarna de diafragmawaarde of de lichtintensiteit zo af dat de afstand ongeveer gelijk wordt aangegeven op het LCD display van de flitser. 7. Na het oplichten van het OK lampje, is de camera klaar voor opname. ◆ Met behulp van onderstaande formule is het mogelijk de correcte belichting te berekenen: Richtgetal : Afstand tot het onderwerp = Diafragma opening De flitser berekent de juiste instelling eveneens met deze formule (zie de tabel 1 op de vorige pagina) HIGH SPEED SYNC (FP) flits (HSS) Indien u een gewone flitser gebruikt kunt u geen snellere sluitertijd gebruiken dan flitssynchronisatietijd van de camera omdat de flitser moet af gaan op het moment dat de sluitergordijnen volledig zijn geopend. De FP Flits blijft continu flitsen wanneer de sluitergordijnen aflopen. Hierdoor kunt u een snellere sluitertijd kiezen dan de flitssynchronisatietijd. 1. Selecteer de gewenste belichtingsmethode op de camera (A of M mode) 2. Druk op de + of – toetsen tot dat FP zichtbaar is op het LCD display. 3. Zet de flitser aan 4. Als het OK lampje van de flitser brand kan de opname worden gemaakt. ◆ Het richtgetal van de flitser zal, afhankelijk van de gekozen sluitertijd, worden gewijzigd. (zie de tabel 2 op de vorige pagina) ◆ Als u de FP mode wilt annuleren dient de markering niet meer op het LCD display zichtbaar te zijn. MODEL / TESTFLITS Het is mogelijk om vooraf een Model / Testflits te geven om de uitlichting en schaduwvorming etc. te beoordelen. 1. Druk op de mode toets om de functie te activeren. symbool zichtbaar is. 2. Druk herhaaldelijk op de + of – toets tot het 3. Controleer of de flitser volledig is opgeladen en druk op de TEST toets. 85 MEERVOUDIG FLITSEN Bij deze instelling zal de flitser herhaaldelijk afgaan terwijl de sluiter open blijft. Hierdoor worden achtereenvolgende bewegingen van een onderwerp in één opname vastgelegd. Deze instelling is het meest effectief bij gebruik van een licht onderwerp tegen een donkere achtergrond. Het is mogelijk de flitsfrequentie tussen 1 Hz en 100 Hz in te stellen. Tot maximaal 90 flitsen kunnen achter elkaar worden ontstoken. Het maximum aantal flitsen kan variëren afhankelijk van het richtgetal en de flitsfrequentie. (zie de tabel 3 op de vorige pagina) Zet de camera op de M mode en stel het diafragma in. 1. Druk op de MODE toets totdat het multi-flash symbool verschijnt. 2. Druk op de SEL toets tot dat de flitsfrequentie knippert. 3. Druk op de + of – toets om de gewenste flitsfrequentie te kiezen. 4. Na het wederom indrukken van de SEL toets gaat het symbool van de lichtdosering knipperen. 5. Druk op de + of – toets om de gewenste lichtdosering in te stellen. 6. Druk weer op de SEL toets en het flitsaantal symbool gaat knipperen. 7. Druk op de + of – toets om het gewenste aantal flitsen te selecteren. 8. Druk nogmaals op de SEL toets, de LCD display zal stoppen met knipperen. 9. Wanneer het OK lampje van de flitser brandt, is de flitser klaar voor gebruik. NB: Zet de sluitertijd langer dan: het aantal gewenste flitsen ÷ de flitsfrequentie. INDIRECT FLITSEN Wanneer u in een kamer fotografeert met flits, ontstaat er soms achter het onderwerp een zware slagschaduw. Indien u de flitsreflector omhoog richt of opzij om het licht via het plafond of de muur te laten weerkaatsen, zal het onderwerp veel zachter worden belicht. Druk op de ‘lock’-toets en verstel de flitserkop in de gewenste hoek. De volgende hoeken zijn in te stellen: Omhoog: 0°, 60°, 75° en 90° Omlaag: 0°, 7° Rechts: 0°, 60°, 75°, 90° Links: 0°, 60°, 75°, 120°, 150°, 180° In deze instellingen wordt een symbool zichtbaar op het LCD display. De opname zal een kleurzweem krijgen in dezelfde tint als het reflecterende oppervlak. Kiest u daarom een wit oppervlak voor weerkaatsing van de flits. Het effectieve bereik van de TTL AUTO instelling is variabel en afhankelijk van de grootte van het reflectie-oppervlak, de afstand van het onderwerp en andere factoren. Daarom is het raadzaam om na elke opname de flitsaanduiding (TTL symbool) op het LCD display te controleren. CLOSE-UP OPNAMEN Voor opnamen dichtbij kan de flitser 7° naar beneden gericht worden. De flits heeft alleen effect wanneer het onderwerp zich tussen de 0.5 en 2 meter van de lens verwijderd is. Wanneer de flitskop naar beneden gericht is, verschijnt het symbool in het LCD display. VANGLICHTPANEEL Deze flitser is uitgerust met een ingebouwd vanglichtpaneel, waardoor een levendige expressie aan het onderwerp kan worden gegeven wanneer de “Bounce Flash Mode” is geactiveerd. Trek de groothoek adapter samen met het vanglichtpaneel uit de houder en draai het voor de flitskop. (Trek beiden voorzichtig en gelijkmatig naar buiten). Druk de groothoek adapter hierna terug in de houder. 86 ◆ Voor een maximaal vanglicht effect richt u de flitskop 90 graden naar boven en maak foto’s op korte afstand van het object. DRAADLOOS FLITSEN Indien u één of meerdere draadloze flitsers zoals de EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI gebruikt kunt u een veel natuurlijkere belichting van het onderwerp creëren en bijvoorbeeld lelijke schaduwvorming bij portretten vermijden. Met de EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI wordt de draadloze verbinding tot stand gebracht door het licht van de flitser. De camera zal, als hij op de draadloze mode staat ingesteld, automatisch de juiste belichting kiezen. ◆ In deze gebruiksaanwijzing zullen wij de flitser welke op de camera is gemonteerd de [Controller] noemen en alle andere draadloos te gebruiken flitsers de [draadloze Flits]. ◆ Als u de off-camera-unit op de gewenste plaats wilt opstellen kunt u de mini-standaard gebruiken. Deze mini-standaard heeft tevens een statiefaansluiting. ◆ Plaats de off-camera-unit in de gewenste positie. Pas op dat de off-camera-unit niet in beeld komt. ◆ Plaats de flitser op een afstand van ca. 0,5-5 mtr. en de camera op 1-5 mtr. van het onderwerp. ◆ Indien andere mensen in uw directe omgeving ook gebruik maken van flitslicht is het mogelijk dat uw Slave flitsers ongewenst ontsteken. Maak in dit geval gebruik van een andere kanaalinstelling om dit probleem te voorkomen. A. GEBRUIK HET SIGNAAL VAN DE INGEBOUWDE FLITSER. 1. Stel de camera in op de draadloze flitsmodus. ◆ Aangezien de instellingen variëren op de verschillende camera modellen, verwijzen we u door naar de handleiding van uw camera. 2. Stel de camera’s belichtingsmodus in naar P,A,S of M. knop van de flitser tot dat het symbool van 3. Druk op de de camera flitser in het display verschijnt. knop te drukken. 4. Kies vervolgens positie 1 door op de knop om de Flitser modus op TTL in te stellen. 5. Druk op de 6. De kanaal informatie zal knipperen wanneer er op de knop wordt gedrukt. of knop. 7. Stel het kanaalnummer in (C1 - C4) door te drukken op de knop, de indicator zal stoppen met knipperen. 8. Druk op de 9. Maak de flitser vast aan de camerabehuizing en druk op de sluiter knop half in (het kanaal nummer wordt opgenomen op de camera). 10. Verwijder de flitser van de camera en zet hem in de door u gewenste positie. 11. Activeer de ingebouwde flitser van uw camera en bevestig dat hij volledig is opgeladen. ◆ Indien u de draadloze flitsmodus heeft gekozen, dan zal het AF Auxiliary licht knippen als hij volledig is opgeladen. 12. Focus met uw camera om foto’s te maken. ◆ De EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI zal branden wanneer de ingebouwde flitser afgaat. De ingebouwde flitser van de camera zal alleen afgaan bij een opgeladen EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI. De verlichting van het onderwerp wordt door de EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI uitgevoerd. De camera zal de flitskracht controleren als een TTL Auto Flits, zodat de correcte belichting wordt gebruikt. ◆ Afhankelijk van de sluitersnelheid, zal de flits automatisch naar normale flits of hoge snelheid synchronisatie flits worden ingesteld. ◆ Wanneer de belichtingsmodus van de camera wordt ingesteld naar M, dan wordt de handmatige draadloze flits geactiveerd. Nadat u het kanaal nummer heeft ingesteld, zal de flitsvermogen niveau knipperen. Stel het gewenste flitsvermogen in, door te drukken op de of knop en druk de knop in om het knipperende beeld te stoppen en de kracht van de flitser te bevestigen. 87 B. GEBRUIK HET SIGNAAL VAN DE AANGEHECHTE FLITSER ALS DE HOOFDFLITSER Als u een draadloze flitser gebruikt, zijn twee of meer EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI flits eenheden nodig. EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI kan alleen worden gebruikt als hoofdflitser. Afhankelijk van de gekozen flitser, is het nodig om de bedieningsmodus van de controller te veranderen. Zie de onderstaande tabel. (EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI kan worden gebruikt voor de controller). Flitser model dat kan worden gebruikt voor de modus zonder-camera flits Bedieningsmodus Camera model dat kan worden gebruikt voor modus zonder-camera flits Ratio-Flits Controle instelling Flits Modus EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI + - α700, α900 α900 Het is mogelijk om tot 3 groepen te bedienen: Controller, Uit-camera Flits 1 en Uit-camera flits 2. Het is mogelijk om de flitsratio van elke groep met 5 niveau's flits of zonder flits in te stellen. TTL Auto flits, Hoge snelheid synchronisatie flits (TTL,M), Handmatige flits Het is mogelijk om 2 groepen te bedienen: Controller en Uit-camera flits. Controller: het is mogelijk om de ratio van de uit-camera flits op 1:2 of 2:1 in te stellen. TTL Auto flits, Hoge snelheid synchronisatie flits (TTL) B-1.INDIEN U ALLEEN IN MODUS DRAADLOZE FLITS Camera and Controller Setting 1. Stel de camera in op de draadloze flitsmodus. ◆ Aangezien de instellingen variëren op de verschillende camera modellen, verwijzen we u door naar de handleiding van uw camera. 2. Stel de camera’s belichtingmodus in naar P,A,S of M. 3. Maak de flitser vast aan de behuizing van de camera. 4. Het LCD paneel van de flitser zal automatisch naar het draadloos flitsen worden doorgeschakeld. (Als het LCD paneel niet automatisch wordt doorgeschakeld, druk dan op de knop tot de controller instellingen worden vertoont). wordt ingedrukt. 5. Het draadloos flitsen modus beeld zal knipperen wanneer de door op de of knop te drukken. 6. Stel de draadloos flitsen kanaal in op 7. De kanaal informatie zal knipperen wanneer de knop wordt gedrukt. of knop. 8. Stel het kanaalnummer in (C1 - C4) door te drukken op de 9. De flitskracht zal knipperen wanneer de knop wordt ingedrukt. ] door op de of knop te drukken. 10. Stel de ratio-flits bedieningsmodus in op [ knop, het beeld zal stoppen met knipperen. 11. Druk nog een keer op de draadloze Flits instelling 12. Druk op de knop tot dat de draadloze flits beeld vertoont wordt. 13. Stel de draadloze flits nummer in op 1 door op de knop te drukken. knop om de flits modus op TTL in te stellen. 14. Druk op de 15. De kanaal informatie zal knipperen wanneer er op de knop wordt gedrukt. 16. Druk op de of knop om voor hetzelfde kanaalnummer te kiezen zoals die is ingesteld op de controller. knop, de indicator zal stoppen met knipperen. 17. Druk op de 18. Plaats de zonder-camera flits in de door u gewenste positie. 88 19. Ga na of beide flitsers volledig geladen zijn. ◆ Het OK lampje zal branden en de AF controle lamp zal knipperen om te indiceren dat de flits klaar is voor opname. 20. Pas de focus aan op het onderwerp en neem de foto. ) B-2. RATIO-FLITS BEDIENING (BEDIENING MODUS Camera and Controller instelling 1. Ga de stappen van 1 tot en met 9 van B-1 na om de benodigde instellingen te verkrijgen. 2. Stel de kracht van de flits bedieningsmodus beeld in op ] door op de of knop te drukken. [ 3. Het flitsmodus beeld zal knipperen wanneer er op de knop wordt gedrukt. 4. Stel de flitsmodus in op TTL door op de of knop te drukken. ] van de controller zal knipperen wanneer de knop wordt ingedrukt. 5. Het flitskracht in [ of knop. 6. Stel de ratio van de controller in door te drukken op de 7. Het flitskracht beeld [ ] van de zonder flits-camera Flits 1 zal knipperen wanneer de knop wordt ingedrukt. of knop te drukken. 8. Stel de ratio van de zonder flits-camera Flits 1 in door op de ] van de zonder flits-camera Flits 2 zal knipperen wanneer de knop 9. Het flitsratio beeld [ wordt ingedrukt. 10. Stel de ratio van de zonder flits-camera Flits 2 in door te drukken op de of knop. knop om de indicator te laten stoppen met knipperen. 11. Druk op de draadloze Flits instelling 12. Ga dezelfde stappen na om de instellingen van B-1 te krijgen draadloze Flits instelling. ◆ Als de zonder-camera flits eenheid meervoudig is, wijs de gewenste zonder-camera draadloze flits nummers aan elke eenheid toe. ◆ Het is mogelijk om de flitsratio van de controller, draaloze zonder-camera Flits 1 en zonder-camera Flits 2 als volgt in te stellen. (zonder flits) 1 2 4 8 16 De ratio van de kracht van de flits stelt de waarde in van elke eenheid/totale waarde. [Voorbeeld] Instelling Waarde Ratio van de Flits sterkte Controller 2 2/7 Uit-Camera Flits 1 1 1/7 Uit-Camera Flits 2 4 4/7 B-3. RATIO-FLITS BEDIENING (BEDIENING MODUS ) Camera and Controller instelling 1. Ga dezelfde stappen na als die van 1 tot en met 6 van B-1. door te drukken op de 2. Stel de bedieningsmodus in op of knop. 3. De kanaal informatie zal knipperen wanneer er op de knop wordt gedrukt.. 4. Stel het kanaalnummer in (C1 - C4) door te drukken op de of knop. ] door te drukken op de 5. Stel de flitsratio bedieningsmodus beeld in op [ 6. De flitsratio beeld zal knipperen wanneer de knop wordt ingedrukt. 7. Stel de ratio van de controller in met de Uit-Camera Flits door op de of (Selecteer of .) knop zodat de indicator stopt met knipperen. 8. Druk op de 89 of knop. knop te drukken. draadloze Flits instelling 9. Als de type van uw zonder-Camera Flits EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI is, volg dan hetzelfde process om de instellingen van B-1 te krijgen draadloze Flits instelling. ◆ Als de type van uw draadloze Flits EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI is, verwijzen we u door naar de handleiding van de EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI. ◆ Als de type van uw draadloze Flits EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI is, dan kan het kanaalnummer alleen worden ingesteld van C1 tot C3. SLAVE FUNCTIE SLAVE FUNCTIE Zelfs als de EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI niet aan de camera bevestigd zit, kunt toch flitsen door gebruik te maken van de ingebouwde flitser van de camera of een andere flitser. 1. Bevestig de flitser op het flitsschoentje van de camera 2. Zet de belichting op de gewenste instelling, wanneer u de A of M mode gebruikt dient u ook het diafragma in te stellen. 3. Zet de flitser aan en druk dan de ontspanknop half in. ◆ De diafragmawaarde en de waarde van de filmsnelheid worden nu aan de flitser doorgezonden. 4. Verwijder de flitser van de camera 5. Druk op de MODE toets en selecteer het / symbool 6. Druk meerdere malen op de SEL toets om de flitsvermogen indicator te laten knipperen 7. Druk om op de + en – toets om de juiste waarde in te stellen ◆ U kunt het benodigde flitsvermogen bepalen door op de LCD display de zo goed mogelijke geschatte afstand tot het object in te stellen. Als deze afstand buiten het bereik valt, dient u de diafragmawaarde aan te passen. ◆ U kunt de diafragmawaarde en filmsnelheid ook handmatig op de flitser instellen. a) Voor het instellen van de filmsnelheid drukt u op de MODE toets en selecteert u de ISO-aanduiding, waarna u vervolgens op de SEL toets drukt om de aanduiding te laten knipperen. Met de + en – toets kunt u de gewenste filmsnelheid instellen en om deze op te slaan drukt u wederom op de SEL toets. b) Voor het instellen van de diafragmawaarde (wanneer de flitser in de ‘slave’ instelling staat) drukt u op de SEL toets om de aanduiding van het diafragma te laten knipperen. Met de + en de – toets kunt u de gewenste diafragmawaarde selecteren en opslaan door nogmaals op de SEL toets te drukken. 8. Druk meerdere malen op de SEL toets om het LCD display te laten stoppen met knipperen. 9. Plaats de slave flitser op de gewenste positie. Plaats de unit echter niet zo dat deze zichtbaar wordt op de opname. 10. Nadat u uzelf ervan overtuigd heeft dat de flitsers opgeladen zijn, drukt u op de ontspanknop om de opname te voltooien. ◆ NB Als de EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI geheel geladen is, licht het AF hulplampje op. ◆ De flitser zal niet flitsen als deze in de ‘slave’-instelling op de camera is geplaatst. ◆ Indien u een SONY flitser of de ingebouwde flitser van de camera gebruikt en de EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI als slave flitser wilt gebruiken dient u de ADI, DI functie niet te gebruiken. Indien deze functies wel worden gebruikt is het mogelijk dat de pre-flash de slave-unit voortijdig zal laten ontsteken. VOORKEUZE VAN DE SLAVE FLITSER Als u twee of meerdere EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI flitsers gebruikt, kunt u een voorkeuze maken welke flitsers tegelijk flitsen door verschillende kanaalinstellingen. In deze stand zal één flitsunit gebruikt worden op de camera als aansturende flitser en de overigen voor de slave belichting. 90 Het instellen van de slave mode. 1. Monteer de flitser op de camera 2. Zet de belichtingsstand op de S of M mode ◆ Zet nu de sluitertijd op 1/30 of langzamer. De aansturende flitser zal dan een signaal naar de overige units sturen voordat deze flitsen. Dit wil dus zeggen dat wanneer u een sluitertijd sneller dan 1/30 hanteert, de flitsen niet synchroon zullen zijn. 3. Zet de flitser aan, en druk de ontspanknop van de camera half in. ◆ De diafragmawaarde en de filmsnelheid worden nu aan de slave flitser doorgegeven 4. Verwijder de slave-unit van de camera 5. Druk op de MODE toets en selecteer de / (slave mode) 6. Druk op de SEL toets om de kanaalaanduiding te laten knipperen 7. Druk op de + of – toets om het kanaal te selecteren 8. Druk op de SEL toets om de flitsvermogen aanduiding te laten knipperen 9. Druk op de + of – toets om het flitsvermogen in te stellen ◆ U kunt het benodigde flitsvermogen bepalen door op het LCD display de geschatte afstand tot het object in te stellen. Als deze afstand buiten het bereik valt, dient u de diafragmawaarde aan te passen. 10. Druk meerdere malen op de SEL toets om het LCD display te laten stoppen met knipperen. 11. Plaats de ‘slave-unit’ op de gewenste positie. Plaats de unit echter niet in het beeld van de opname. Instellen van de slave-controler unit 12. Druk op de MODE toets en selecteer het / symbool (slave mode) 13. Druk op de SEL toets om de kanaalaanduiding te laten knipperen 14. Druk op de + of – toets om hetzelfde kanaal te selecteren als dat van de andere unit (c1 of c2) 15. Druk op de SEL toets om de flitsvermogen aanduiding te laten knipperen 16. Druk op de + toets om te tonen 17. Druk op de SEL toets om het display te laten stoppen met knipperen. 18. A Monteer de aansturende flitser op de camera body 19. Nadat u uzelf ervan overtuigd heeft dat de flitsers opgeladen zijn, drukt u op de ontspanknop om de opname te voltooien. ◆ Als de aansturende EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI geheel geladen is, licht het AF hulplampje op. ◆ U kunt de diafragmawaarde niet veranderen met de SEL toets, wanneer u de heeft geselecteerd bij de flitsvermogen instelling. ◆ De aansturende flitser geeft alleen instructies aan de slave-unit(s) TECHNISCHE GEGEVENS: Type Richtgetal Stroombron Oplaadtijd Aantal flitsen Flitsduur Verlichtingshoek Automatische Gewicht / Afmetingen 91 Opschuifbare DDL Autozoom Electronenflitser 61 (ISO 100 / op 105mm zoompositie) 4 AA alkaline of 4 oplaadbare Ni-Cd, of Ni-MH batterijen Ca. 7 sec. met alkaline batterijen, ca. 5 sec. met oplaadbare batterijen Ca. 120 met alkaline batterijen Ca. 160 met oplaadbare batterijen Ca. 1/700 sec. bij vol vermogen 24mm – 105mm motorisch gestuurd 17mm met ingebouwde Ja 330 gram / 76mmX138mmX116mm 中文多謝閣下購買適馬 EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI 電子閃光燈本產品是特別為 SONY 自動對焦單鏡反光相機系列而開發的功能及操作方式會因應相機型號而有所差別請細閱讀本說明書本產品多樣化的功能會為閣下帶來更多的攝影樂趣為要把本產品各功能發得淋漓盡致及增加攝影之樂趣，請將本說明書跟相機說明書一起閱讀，並妥為保存以便將來查閱注意為避免構成任何損毀或受傷，於使用本產品前，請小心及列注意標誌所述事請特別留意下列兩種注意標誌警告注意細地閱讀本說明書，隨時留意下如忽略此警告標誌所述的情況下使用本產品可能構成嚴重受傷或其他危險結果如忽略此注意標誌所述的情況下使用本產品可能構成受傷或損毀標誌代表警告及注意等的重要事標誌含有需要避免的動作警告!! 本閃光燈內建高壓電路為避免觸電或消傷，請不要嘗試拆開本閃光燈爆裂或損毀，請不要觸摸內部的元件不要靠近眼睛觸發閃光燈，否則其強光可能對眼睛做成傷害部至少 1 米／3 呎的距離拍攝時，請保持閃光燈與臉當閃光燈已安裝在相機的熱靴座後不要接觸相機的閃光燈同步接點不要在易燃的氣體如本閃光燈外殼其高壓可導致觸電液體及化學物品附近使用相機，否則可能引起爆炸注意不要把本閃光燈使用在非 SONY 自動對焦單鏡反光相機上，否則閃光燈可能對相機的電路構成損害本閃光燈並不防水當在下雨降雪或近水的地方使用相機及閃光燈時，請避免弄濕弄濕而損毀的電子元件一般都較難維修不要把閃光燈曝露在震盪警或令器材不正常工作滿佈塵埃高溫或高濕度的環境底下因在這些情況下可引致火當閃光燈遇到溫度驟變的環境，例如把閃光燈從寒冷的室外帶到溫暖的室內時，閃燈內部及外部會有積水預防方法為先把閃光燈放入密封膠袋內才把它帶到溫度驟變的另一地方，直到閃光燈達到地方之溫度方可使用不要把閃光燈存放在抽屜或廚櫃內，因其可能含有樟腦或其他殺蟲劑會對閃光燈做成不良影響不要使用天拿水苯或其他清潔劑來抹掉閃光燈表面的塵埃或指紋應使用微濕及柔軟的布如需要長時間存放，請選擇乾爽清涼的地方，最好有良好的通風系統閃光燈來作數次閃光，以維持電容正常工作建議每個月都使用 92 各部位名稱外觀部份名稱 1.閃光燈燈頭 2.自動對焦輔助光朿發射口 3.上下反射角度指示 4.左右反射角色指示 5.上下活動釋放按鈕 6.左右活動釋放按鈕 7.液晶顯示屏 8.電池室蓋掩 9.釋放鈕 10.熱靴座 11.反射片 12.廣角閃光擴散片控制按鈕名稱 13.“控制模式”按鈕 18.“閃光測試”按鈕 14.“選擇”按鈕 19.“夜光”按鈕 15.“增加”按鈕 16.“減少”按鈕 17.“變焦”按鈕 20.充電完成提示燈 21.“開關”掣關於電池本產品使用四枚 AA 型鹼性電池或 Ni-Cd / Ni-MH 充電池雖然錳電池可被用使於本產品上，但因其電量遠不及鹼性電池，所以並不建議使用如電池組須要 30 秒以上方能充電完成提示燈亮起，請更換新電池 ◆ 為確保妥善的電力接觸，可清潔電池接點後才安裝電池 ◆ Ni-Cd / Ni-MH 電池的兩端接點因沒有標準，如使用種電池的話，請確定電池室接點與電池接點妥善地接觸 ◆ 為防止電池發生爆炸洩漏或過熱，請使用相同品種及品牌之電池，不要把品種不同或新舊不一之電池混合使用 ◆ 不要把電池拆開短路或暴露於水火當中，否則可能引起爆炸此外，不要把非充電性質之電池拿來充電 ◆ 如需長時間閒置此閃光燈，請把電池取出，以防電池洩漏可能帶來的損毀 ◆ 低溫能影響電池的效能，如需於寒冷天氣下使用此閃光燈，請盡量縮短閃光燈暴露於空氣的時間及適時關閉電源 ◆ 建議於長途旅程或於寒冷的戶外進行拍攝工作前攜帶足夠後備電池安裝電池 1. 確定已把電源關閉後推至 OFF 位，依附圖箭咀方向所示把電池室蓋掩推出並開 2. 按照附圖所示之正負極方向放入四枚 AA 型電池到電池室內 3. 把電池室蓋掩關上 4. 把電源開關掣推至 ON，數秒後充電完成提示燈將會亮起，表示閃光燈已就緒等待引發 5. 請按下“閃光測試”按鈕以確定閃光燈能正常運作自動關閉電源為節省電力，本閃光燈於停用大約 3 分鐘後便會自動關閉電源此時可按“閃光測試”按鈕或半按相機上之快門釋放掣重新啟動閃光燈請留意，在無線 TTL 模式一般伺服模式及指定伺服模式時，自動關閉電源機制將不能正常運作錯誤發生時顯示之訊息如電池電量不足或相機與閃光燈之間訊息設定發生錯誤，閃光燈上的液晶顯示屏將會出現“Er” 圖示，並不停閃爍此時，可嘗試將閃光燈電源關閉，後再重新啟動，如繼續出現 “Er”錯誤訊息，請檢查電池的電量 93 調節閃光燈頭按下 “上下活動釋放按鈕 ”來調節閃光燈燈頭到合適的上仰角度 ◆ 如閃光燈被調節往上仰位置，液晶顯示屏將會出現圖示如燈頭被調節到一個有不正確的位置，此圖示會不停閃爍安裝閃光燈到相機及其解除請確定已把電源關閉，把閃光燈的熱靴座插到相機的熱靴上，然後鎖緊。 ◆ 每次安裝或移除閃光燈時，請抓住閃光燈底部以防損壞閃光燈的靴座或相機的熱靴。 ◆ 如相機的內置閃光燈被開啟彈出，請把其按回成收藏狀態後方可安裝本閃光燈。將閃燈解除時，請按著燈腳下部的釋放鈕，然後將燈拉出便可。設定閃光燈涵蓋角度本閃光燈預設為自動變焦模式，燈頭會隨鏡頭焦距之改變來變換涵蓋角度當按下“Zoom”按鈕時，“M”會顯示在液晶顯示屏上，這時，每按一次 ZOOM 按鈕，燈頭涵蓋角度會從廣角逐漸改變到遠攝，再重回自動變焦模式變焦之序如下： 24mm → 28mm → 35mm → 50mm → 70mm → 85mm → 105mm → 自動在 TTL 模式下，閃光燈的涵蓋角度會自動跟隨鏡頭焦距而改變 ◆ 每次開啟電源，閃光燈會回到上一次關閉電源時燈頭涵蓋角度之設定 ◆ 如使用的鏡頭焦距比燈頭更廣角的話，照片邊緣位置會出現曝光不足 ◆ 閃光燈指數會隨燈頭涵蓋角度而改變廣角閃光擴散片閃光燈內附置能覆蓋達 17mm 的超廣角閃光擴散片設置；先將廣角閃光擴散片及反射片從閃燈頂部拉出，繼將其反下覆蓋閃燈發射表面(拉出光片請小心)，再將(11)反射片退回閃燈內；閃燈將自動設定閃光覆蓋角度為 17mm ◆ 如廣角擴散片意外地脫落， ZOOM 按鈕將不能運作若遇到此情況請聯絡銷售本產品之店舖或維修中心液晶顯示屏夜光照明當按下 LIGHT 按鈕時，液晶顯示屏的夜光照明系統會被啟動，照明維持大約 8 秒鐘 94 TTL 自動閃燈功能於 TTL 自動模式時，相機會控制閃光燈輸出的光量從而令主體得到正確曝光 ◆ TTL 自動模式的設定步驟會因應相機型號及鏡頭組合而有所不同請參閱下表在所有的組合中，TTL 圖示都會被顯示在液晶顯示屏上 D 類型鏡頭非 D 類型鏡頭數碼單鏡反光相機 Maxxum 70, 50, 7, 5, 4, 3 Dynax 60, 40, 7, 5, 4, 3L ADI 測光預閃測光 Maxxum/ Dyanx 9 其他相機型號預閃測光預閃測光一般 TTL 測光一般 TTL 測光 1. 把相機曝光模式設為 P 模式 2. 開啟閃光燈的電源， TTL 會顯示在液晶顯示屏上而閃光燈亦同時開始充電；若 ◆配用在數碼單鏡反光相機時，請確定閃燈設定為停止顯示，可按 + 或 – 重現於閃燈 LCD 屏上，否則曝光不會準確 3. 向主體進行對焦 4. 確定主體與相機的實際距離是否在液晶顯示屏所示的有效距離內 5. 當確定閃光燈充電完成後便可按下快門釋放掣進行拍攝 ◆如次閃燈拍攝曝光準確的話，TTL 指示會在液晶顯示屏上顯示大約 5 秒如指示沒有出現的話，閃光燈所能輸出的光量可能並不足夠應付環境，請移近主體再進行拍攝 ◆ 在比較黑暗的環境進行對焦的話，自動對焦輔助光朿會自動開啟注意：有效距離為 0.7 米／2.3 呎到 9 米／29.5 呎 ◆ 請謹記當相機設於手動曝光模式時，閃光燈會自動被設定到對上一次所選擇的模式 ◆ 當閃光燈充電完成後，閃光燈標記會顯示在相機的觀景器內當閃光燈充電尚未完成前按下快門釋放掣的話，閃光燈並不會被觸發而相機會以一個較慢的快門來進行次拍攝在其他曝光模式下使用閃光燈快門先決設定當選擇了快門後，相機會因應現場環境的光源自動選擇適當光圈配合能超越閃燈同步速度在此模式下，閃燈補光模式會被選擇所選擇的快門速度不光圈先決設定於相機上選擇 A 模式，光圈先決自動曝光模式後，在自行選擇所欲光圈後，相機會因應現場環境的光源自動選擇適當快門配合在此模式下，閃燈補光模式會被選擇手動曝光設定光圈及快門在手動曝光模式下都能個別地被設定快門速度之選擇範圍從 B 門到閃燈同步值 ◆ 在此模式下，閃燈補光模式會被選擇 ◆ 如根據測光表所示進行曝光，因應當時環境可為日光同步或慢快門同步 95 閃燈連發限制為免閃燈因連續發射，而導致閃燈内部電路過熱，請讓閃光燈依隨下列表格所述操作，並務請在每組次組完成後，讓閃光燈休息至少 10 分鐘模式 TTL，手動全輸出，半輸出手動 1/4 輸出，1/8 輸出手動 1/16 輸出，1/32 輸出頻閃閃光次數連續 20 次連續 25 次連續 40 次循環 10 次閃光輸出操作讓攝影師可因應拍攝所需效果，而自行調節閃光燈輸出光量度；閃光可選擇以全光 1/1 至 1/64 光度輸出，每以 1 級遞增 1. 設定相機的曝光模式為全手動模式 M 2. 按下閃光燈上的“MODE”按鈕，選擇自控閃光控制模式 M 3. 當按下“SEL”按鈕後，輸出數值會閃爍 4. 按＋或－按鈕，以設定所需的輸出光度 5. 再按一次“SEL”會使顯示停止閃爍 6. 按下快門釋放掣進行對焦，然後查看鏡頭距離尺上-被攝體的距離數值，繼而可調節光圈 F 值或閃燈輸出值，使被攝體處閃光覆蓋範圍 7. 當“充電完成提示燈”亮起，表示閃光燈已就緒待發 ◆ 正確曝光亦可用以下的方程式來計算：閃光燈指數 GN(表 1)／閃燈與主體距離＝光圈 F.值本閃光燈亦是根據此一方程式來計算 / 操作(請参閱本書最後頁表 1) FP 高速閃燈同步 HSS 如使用普通的閃光燈來拍攝的話，相機的快門並不能超越本身的閃燈同步快門因為快門簾於全開的剎那閃光燈已同時被觸發 FP 高速閃燈同步模式則由快門簾開始活動的時候已經一直保持閃動因此可以使用一個比同步快門更高速的快門 1. 按下“MODE”按鈕來選擇閃燈模式可使用“TTL”或“M”模式 2. 按下＋或－按鈕來進入 FP 模式此時，“ ” 應顯示在液晶顯示屏上 3. 對主體進行對焦 4. 當充電完成提示燈亮起方可進行拍攝 ◆ 於高速閃燈同步時，有效閃燈指數會隨快門速度而改變會變得越細，閃燈有效距離變得越短當快門速度越高時，閃燈指數便請參閱最後頁表 2 ◆ 如要取消高速閃燈同步功能，可參閱其設定方法來令液晶顯示屏上指示消失 96 做型模擬閃燈此模式可在閃燈拍攝前，先以閃燈頻閃方式，照射主體，從而檢視主體被照射時的光影效果情況 1. 按 MODE 鈕，設定閃兄模式 2. 按＋ / －鈕，待訊號在 LCD 屏幕上顯現 3. 確定充電完成，按著 TEST 鈕發放檢視燈光頻閃模式當使用慢快門的時候，頻閃模式能令閃光燈於快門開啟時作連續發射主體的影像會被連續地記錄在張底片上如影像在一個黑暗背景前拍攝，此效果將會非常明顯連閃頻率可調範圍由每秒 1 次(1HZ)到每秒 100 次(100HZ)，最多可連閃 90 次連閃次數受限於連閃頻率及輸出數值，情請參閱說明書最後頁(表三) 1. 把相機設定到手動曝光(M)模式，並選定光圈值 2. 按下閃光燈上的 MODE 按鈕來選擇頻閃模式 MULTI 3. 按下 SEL 按鈕使連閃頻率數值在液晶屏上閃爍 4. 按下＋或－按鈕來選擇連閃頻率數值 5. 再按下 SEL 按鈕，閃光燈輸出值出現不停閃爍 6. 按下＋或－按鈕來設定閃光燈輸出值 7. 再按一下 SEL 按鈕，令頻閃次數閃爍 8. 按下＋或－按鈕來設定頻閃次數 9. 再按一下 SEL 按鈕，使各顯示停止閃爍 10. 當充電完成提示燈亮起，表示閃光燈已準備就緒注意：請把快門設定為不短於頻閃次數 ÷ 連閃頻率反射閃光在室內房間中使用閃光燈正面向主體進行拍攝，很多時在主體背後將會出現強烈的背影若將閃光燈燈頭調節往上或往側面，則可利用天花板或牆壁的反射光，使主體所受的照明度，呈現比較平均柔和按下上下活動釋放按鈕或左右活動釋放按鈕來調節反射角度向上：0°, 60°, 75°, 90° 向下：0°,7° 向右：0°, 60°, 75°, 90° 向左：0°, 60°, 75°,90°, 120°, 150°, 180° 當閃光燈被調節離開 0°角時，液晶顯示屏左下角，將有圖案提示顯現作請選擇白色作燈光反射面，其他顏色的表面，將令反射回來的光帶有偏色的色溫因應不同之反射表面主體距離等因素，閃燈在 TTL(Auto 模式)，其原本所示的有效覆蓋閃光距離將有所改動請於釋放快門後，檢查液晶顯示屏上的 TTL 閃光覆蓋範圍是否正確近攝/近距閃光應把閃光燈頭調節向下 7 度可作近攝閃光之用在此情況下閃光燈的有效距離為 0.5 米至 2 米當閃光燈頭在向下 7 度，液晶顯示屏上左下角，將出現閃爍圖案提示 97 反射片閃光燈內附置反射片，在進行燈光反射攝影模式時，它能將閃光燈所發出的光線反射至被攝主體表面同時在主体的眼睛上造出高光的效果設置：首將廣角閃光擴散片及反射片從閃燈頂部拉出，(拉出光片請小心)，再將(12) 擴散片退回閃燈內 ◆ 創立燈光反射攝影模式，適在近距進行，並將閃燈發射部翹起至 90 度° 無線閃燈當使用無線閃燈模式時，相機無需透過延長線來觸發離機的閃光燈，使閃光燈拍攝的效果能有較立體及自然的感覺在使用 EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI 時，相機與閃光燈的通訊是透過光來達成於無線閃燈模式下，相機會自動計算正確的曝光 ◆ 在本節往後的說明中，與相機直接連接的閃光燈被稱為“主控燈” (Controller)，而遙距的閃光燈被稱為“離機閃光燈” (off-camera flash) ◆ 當架設從屬燈時，可使用專屬的微型燈座，此燈座附帶能連接三・架的螺絲孔 ◆ 把從屬燈放在所需的位置上但不要進入被拍攝的範圍內 ◆ 請把閃光燈設定在跟主體保持 0.5 米／1.5 呎至 5 米／16 呎的距離內，並把相機設定在跟主體保持 1 米／3 呎至 5 米／16 呎的距離內 ◆ 為免其他相近距離的無線閃燈使用者錯誤觸發閣下的閃光燈，可使用與對方不同的頻道來避免互相影響請參閱以下設定 A. 使用內置閃燈主導引發閃光 1. 將相機設為無線閃光燈模式 ◆ 此模式全因應機體是否有此功能，請參閱所屬相機操作說明書 2. 將相機設定於 P,A,S 或 M 曝光模式 3. 按閃燈上的鍵，待至分離機體閃光 off-camera flash 顯示出現鍵，將分離機體閃光 off-camera flash 設定為 1 號 4. 按 5. 按鍵，將閃光模式設定為 TTL 6. 在按下鍵時，頻道符號將閃動 7. 按或鍵，選擇(C1 - C4)頻道 8. 按下鍵，顯示將停止閃動 9. 將閃燈安放在機身上，隨即半按快門釋放鈕(所選頻道即記錄在相機內) 10. 把閃光燈從相機上移除並放在所需位置上 11. 開啟相機的內置閃光燈並確定已完成充電 ◆ 在無線閃燈模式中，閃光燈完成充電後會以閃爍自動對焦輔助光來提示 12. 向主體對焦及進行拍攝 ◆ 相機的內置閃光燈一但發射，EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI 便會被觸發相機的內置閃光燈只是作為觸發及控制之用途照明主體之工作完全由 EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI 來完成相機會像在 TTL 自動閃燈模式一般地去控制閃燈輸出來達到正確曝光 ◆ 因應快門速度，閃燈將自動轉換為正常閃光或高速同步閃光 ◆ 當相機曝光模式設定為 M，閃燈將以無線自設閃光輸出操作 98 B. 使用置放於機頂上閃燈發放訊號引發閃光無線控閃光需由 2 支或多支 EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI 組成 EF-530DG SUPER SO-ADI 只可作分離機體閃光 off-camera flash 模式操作需視乎閃燈型號，可否作分離機體閃光 off-camera flash 模式，同時它需擁有能變作為主控燈的功能可作分離機體閃光的閃燈型號 EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI 控制模式可作分離機體閃光的相機型號 + α700, α900 可控制多達 3 組；主控燈離機燈 1 離機燈 2 每組可設定閃光輸比例達五級或禁止閃光 TTL 自動閃光高速同步閃光 (TTL M) 自設閃光輸出控制閃光輸比例設定閃光模式 EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI α900 可控制多達 2 組；主控燈離機燈離機燈可設定離機閃光輸比例 1:2 或 2:1. TTL 自動閃光高速同步閃光(TTL) B-1.在離機作閃光情况下相機及主控燈設定 1. 將相機設定為無線閃光模式 ◆ 此設定全視乎機身型號有否此功能，請閣下相機說明書 2. 將相機設定於 P,A,S 或 M 曝光模式 3. 將閃燈安放在機身上 4. 閃燈上屏幕將自動顯示為主控設定 (若屏幕沒有自動顯示為主控設定，請按鍵，待至主控設定畫面出現) 5. 在按下鍵後，主控模式畫面將不停眨動設定控制模式 6. 在或鍵中，按 7. 在按下鍵後，頻道訊息畫面將不停眨動 8. 可按或鍵，設定頻道 (C1-C4) 鍵後，輸出比例畫面將不停眨動 9. 在按下 10. 可按或鍵，設定輸出比例 [ ] 鍵，顯示便停止眨動 11. 再按下離機閃光燈設定 12. 按下鍵，待至離機閃光模式畫面出現 13. 按動鍵，將離機閃光設定為 1 14. 按動鍵，將閃光模式設定為 TTL 鍵時頻道訊息畫面將不停眨動 15. 按下 16. 按鍵，設定與主控燈相同頻道號或 17. 再按下鍵，顯示便停止眨動 18. 把離機燈安放在所需位置 19. 確定各閃光燈已充電完成 ◆ 當充電完成後，充電完成提示燈會亮起，另外自動對焦輔助燈會閃爍 20. 向主體對焦及進行拍攝 99 B-2. 控制光量輸出比率 (控制模式 ) 相機和主控燈設定 1. 依隨上 B-1 程序 1 至 9 相同，按步設定 2. 按或鍵，使光量輸出控制模式畫面顯示為 ] [ 3. 在按下鍵後，閃光模式畫面將眨動或鍵，設定閃光模式為 TTL 4. 按鍵後，主控燈的閃光比率畫面 [ ] 顯示將眨動 5. 在按下 6. 使用或鍵設定主控燈的比例值 7. 在按下鍵後，離機閃燈 1 的閃光比率輸出 [ ] 畫面將會眨動或鍵，設定離機閃燈 1 的閃光輸出比例值 8. 使用鍵後，離機閃燈 2 的閃光比率輸出 [ ] 畫面將會眨動 9. 在按下 10. 使用或鍵，設定離機閃燈 2 的閃光輸出比例值 11. 按下鍵，所有顯示即停止眨動離機閃光燈設定 12. 設定，依隨上 B-1 離機閃光燈設定程序相同，按步設定 ◆ 若同時使用 2 支離機閃燈，可配以號碼作識别 ◆ 主控閃光比率離機閃燈 1 及離機閃燈 2，可設定如下， (不閃光) 1 2 4 8 16 閃光輸出比率可個別選擇設定 [例] 設定值輸出比率 2 2/7 主控燈 1 1/7 離機閃燈 1 4 4/7 離機閃燈 2 B-3. 控制光量輸出比率 (控制模式 ) 相機及主控燈設定 1. 依隨上 B-1 程序 1 至 6 相同，按步設定鍵中，按下鍵 2. 在 3. 在按下鍵時，頻道符號將不停閃動鍵，選用頻道(C1 – C4) 4. 利用按動鍵，設定調控輸出比率顯示為[ ] 5. 利用按動 6. 在按下鍵時，閃光輸出比率將不停閃動 7. 調控閃光輸出比率：在離機閃燈上按動或鍵(選擇鍵，停止符號閃動 8. 按下或 . 離機閃光燈設定 9. 若閃燈型號為 EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI，可依隨 B-1 步驟進行離機閃光燈設定 ◆ 若閃燈型號為 EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI，請參閱 EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI 使用手册 ◆ 若離機閃燈為 EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI，頻道只可選擇 C1 至 C3 100 離機無線從屬 Slave 閃光模式普通從屬誘發閃光模式即使 EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI 並不是安裝於相機上，亦可利用相機的內置閃光燈或其他閃光燈對 EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI 進行誘發 1. 把閃光燈接在相機的熱靴座上 2. 設定相機的曝光模式如使用“A”或“M”模式時，請設定所需的光圈值 3. 開啟閃光燈電源，然後半按相機的快門釋放掣 ◆ 此時，光圈數值及菲林感光度數據，便即自動傳送到閃光燈上 4. 把閃光燈從相機上移除 5. 按下 MODE 按鈕來選擇設定從屬閃光模式 / 圖示 6. 按動 SEL 按鈕，使閃光燈輸出值畫面閃爍 7. 按下＋或－按鈕來設定閃光燈輸出數值 ◆ 參考閃燈液晶顯示屏上閃燈覆蓋距離顯示和跟實際被攝體距離，是否相配被攝體實際距離若超出閃光燈所能覆蓋範圍，需改變光圈數值以配合 ◆ 如需要，可手動設定閃光燈上的菲林感光度或光圈數值 a. 設定菲林速度…按下 MODE 按鈕選擇，然後按下 SEL 按鈕令其閃爍，再按下＋或－按鈕設定菲林感光度，最後再按一下 SEL 來完成設定步驟 b. 設定光圈值…在閃光燈被設定為從屬模式(Slave)時，按下 SEL 按鈕使光圈值閃爍，再按下＋或－按鈕來設定所需之光圈值，然後再按 SEL 來完成設定步驟 8. 按動 SEL 按鈕，直至所有閃爍中的顯示停止閃爍 9. 把從屬閃光燈安放在所需位置(不要把閃光燈放在被拍攝範圍內) 10. 當確定所有閃光燈已就緒後便可進行拍攝 ◆ 如以 SONY 系列閃燈或相機內置閃燈為主控燈，EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI 為從屬 Slave 閃燈時，請注意，請不要使用 ADI/DI 功能，因其的監察預閃程序將會做成“從屬 Slave 閃光” 在相機快門尚未被啟動時，已經被誘發閃光 ◆ 當 EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI 已就緒時，自動對焦輔助光將不停閃爍 ◆ 如 EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI 被設在從屬模式下而被安裝在相機上的話，閃光燈是不會被引發主導多燈串聯從屬 Slave 無線控閃光模式如使用兩支或以上的 EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI 閃光燈，可用頻道控制同時誘發一支或多支閃光燈在此模式下，其中一支閃光燈會擔當主導誘發，其他閃光燈則會作為從屬而被誘發設定從屬閃光燈觸發程序 1. 把閃光燈安裝到相機上 2. 把相機的曝光模式設定為 S(光圈先決)或 M(手動曝光) ◆ 把相機的快門設定為 1/30 秒或更慢主控制閃光燈會發出特定的訊號至閃光燈群的所有閃光燈如相機上的快門速度超過 1/30 秒的話，閃光燈群之間便不能達致同步 3. 開啟閃光燈電源，然後半按相機的快門釋放掣 ◆ 此時相機已設定的光圈數值及菲林感光度會自動地被傳送到從屬閃光燈上 4. 把閃光燈從相機上移除 5. 按下 MODE 按鈕來選擇設定從屬閃光模式 / Slave 從屬模式 6. 按下 SEL 按鈕使頻道顯示閃爍 7. 按下＋或－按鈕來設定頻道值 C1 或 C2 ) 閃爍 8. 再按 SEL 按鈕使閃光燈輸出值 ( 9. 按下＋或－按鈕來設定閃光燈輸出數值 101 ◆ 參考閃燈液晶顯示屏上閃燈覆蓋距離顯示和跟實際被攝體距離，是否相配如被攝體實際距離超出閃光燈所能覆蓋的範圍，需改變光圈數值以配合 10. 按動 SEL 鈕，直至所有閃爍中的顯示停止閃爍 11. 把從屬閃光燈安放在所需位置(不要把閃光燈放置在被拍攝範圍內) 設定主導誘發閃燈裝置 / 12. 按下 MODE 按鈕來選定 Slave 從屬模式 13. 按下 SEL 按鈕使頻道選擇開啟，並顯示閃爍 14. 按下＋或－按鈕，設定與先前從屬閃光燈群所相應的頻道符 15. 再按 SEL 按鈕，使閃燈確認輸出的正確誘發光量( 號閃爍) 16. 按下 SEL 按鈕，使顯示訊息停止閃爍 ( 圖示將消失，衹留下頻道顯示 17. 把主導誘發閃燈安裝到相機上 18. 當確認所有閃光燈單元已就緒後便可按快門進行拍攝 ◆ 當 EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI 已就緒時，自動對焦輔助光將不停閃爍 ◆ 若選設・誘發功能燈具時，以 SEL 鈕設定/改動光圈值功能，將失效 ◆ 主導閃光燈裝置，其功能只是用作傳遞訊息，誘發其從屬閃光燈規格類型：套入式專用 TTL 自動變焦電子閃光燈閃燈指數：61 ISO 100/M, 設置在 105mm 電源：四枚 AA 型鹼性或四枚 AA 型 Ni-Cd 或四枚 AA 型 Ni-MH 回電時間：大約 7 秒鹼性電或大約 5 秒 Ni-Cd 及 Ni-MH 閃光次數：約 120 鹼性電約 160 Ni-Cd 及 Ni-MH 閃光時間：約 1/700 秒全光輸出自動關閉電源：可以閃光燈覆蓋角度：24mm – 105mm 自動馬達控制使用內置廣角擴散片可令覆蓋角度達至 17mm 重量：330g 尺寸：77mm 闊 X 139mm 高 X 117mm 長只适用于中国产品手册 : 六种危险物质的名称以及存在与否部件名称外壳金属部件外壳树脂部件基板部件光学部件机械部件铅 (Pb) 不 ○ 不 ○ 不汞 (Hg) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 有毒有害物质或元素镉六价铬 (Cd) (Cr6+) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 多澳联苯 (PBB) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 多溴二苯醚 (PBDE) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 备注只适用于中国 ○:表示该有毒有害物质在该部件所有物均质材料中的含量均在 SJ/T11363-2006 标准规定的限量要求以下不:表示该有毒有害物质到在该部件的某一均质材料中的含量超出 SJ/T11363-2006 标准规定的限量要求 10 或 5 图形含义: 此标识是适用于在中国境内销售的电子讯息产品的环保使用期限此产品使用者只要遵守安全和使用上的注意事项，从生产之日起的十年或五年期间不会对环境污染，也不会对人身和财产造成重大影响 102 한 어 그 EF-착려0 DG SUPER SO-ADI 플래 를 해 주셔서 감사 니다. 플래 는 니 AF SLR 메 용으 개 한 플래 니다. 메 모델에 따 기능 및 동은 다를 있습니다. 본 설명서를 한 다음, 플래 의 기능, , 취 상 주의 을 르게 해하고 사진촬 을 즐기 오. 플래 의 활용 를 고 최대의 성능을 끌어 내기 위해서는 플래 를 사용하기 전에 플래 사용 설명서와 메 사용 설명서를 께 해 주 기 니다. 다 으신 후에는 반드 사용 언제 볼 있는 곳에 관해 주 오. 사용상 주의 손해 부상을 미연에 방 하기 위해 플래 사용전에 사용 설명서를 주의깊게 아래의 표 들에 주의를 기울 주 기 니다. 히, 아래의 두 주의 표 에 별히 주의하 오. 경고 !! 주의 !! 기호를 무 하고 잘못 취 하면 기호를 무 하고 잘못 취 한 손상 하면 손상을 위험한 결과를 초래할 을 경 있습니다. 있습니다. 기호는 경고와 주의를 표 해주는 중요한 사항들을 알 기호는 하는 사항들을 알 니다. 플래 내부에는 고전압 회 개 등은 절대 니다. 만 주의하 주 오. 어 주 고 니다. 고 !! 내장되어 있습니다. 감전 상의 우 있으므 분해, 하등으 손상된 경우에는 내부 부품에 손을 대 않 플래 를 사 눈 까 에 대고 촬 하 오. 눈 까 에서 플래 를 광하면 장 를 으킬 위험성 있습니다. 히 유아를 촬 할 때에는 려애 상 떨어져서 촬 하 메 의 핫 슈에 플래 를 하 오. 고전압으 인하 감전될 사용할때에는 있습니다. 재 및 기타 위험 있는 장 에서는 사용하 원인 될 있습니다. 주 플래 는 니 AF SLR 메 메 의 전 회 에 손상을 줄 않 플래 는 방 주의하 주 플래 와 방치해두 메 오. 그 오. 터미널에 손을 대 않을 경우, 재 의 의 !! 외의 메 에는 사용하 있습니다. 오. 그 않을 경우, 되어 있 않습니다. 우천 물 에서 사용할 때에는 오. 물 내부에 들어 면 고장의 원인 됩니다. 에 충격을 오. 고장 주 오. 먼 재의 원인 될 격한 온 변 에 의해 플래 내부에 결 실내 들어올 때와 같은 경우에는 케 스 사용하 주 오. 방충제는 플래 에 메 의 싱크 쁜 신 , 벤젠등의 유기용제 닦아주 오. 향을 미칠 닦 많은 장 있습니다. 고온다습한 장 에 생할 있습니다. 추운 실외에서 따뜻한 비닐봉 에 넣어 주위 온 에 해진 후에 있습니다. 서 장 장롱에 오. 변 , 변형등의 원인 관하 오. 됩니다. 부드러운 천으 플래 를 장기간 관할때에는 통풍 잘 되는 서늘하고 건 한 곳에 관하 오. 플래 의 성능을 유 키기 위해서는 매 플래 광 테스 를 회 실 해 주 기 니다. 103 부의 명칭 외부 부분 컨 롤 려.플래 헤드 력.AF 차.상하 운스 및 해제 버튼 광 8.배터리 커버 9.릴리즈 버튼 광부 3.상하 운스 착.좌우 회전 려0.슈 4.좌우 및 해제 버튼 려려.캐치 려3.MODE 버튼 려4.<SEL> SELECT 버튼 려차.< + > 증 패널 운스 7.LCD 패널 려력.와 드 패널 버튼 려착.< - > 감 려7.ZOOM 버튼 려8.TEST 버튼 려9.LIGHT 버튼 력0.준비 표 등 버튼 력려.전원 스위치 배터리에 대하 플래 에는 4 개의 AA 타 알 인 배터리 또는 니켈 드늄 배터리(N로-C화d발, 니켈 배터리(N로-MH발 사용됩니다. 간 배터리 사용할 있 만 알 인 배터리에 비해 명 짧아 권장해 드리 않습니다. 준비 표 등의 등까 30 초 상 걸릴경우 배터리 교체해 주 오. ◆ 배터리 배터리 커버의 은 항상 깨끗한 상 를 유 해 주 오. 드늄(N로-C화d발 배터리를 사용할 경우에는 배터리 의 형 규격으 통 되어 있 않으므 사용할 있는 인하고 서 하 기 니다. ◆ 배터리의 , 전 누설, 과열등을 방 하기 위해 동 한 브랜드, 동 한 타 의 AA 배터리 4 개를 사용해 주 오. 배터리 브랜드 타 을 혼 해 사용하 오. ◆ 배터리를 분해하거 불 , 물 에 던 거 , 단 등은 파열의 우 있으므 절대 니다. 또한 니켈 드늄(N로-C화d발 배터리 외에는 충전하 오. ◆ 플래 를 장기간 사용하 않을때는 배터리 누설되 않 배터리를 꺼내어 관해 주 오. ◆ 온의 상 에서는 배터리 성능 하될 있습니다. 추운곳에서 촬 을 할때에는 예비 배터리를 준비해 두 오. ◆ 오랜 추운 에서 촬 을 할때에는 분의 배터리를 준비해 두 오. ◆ 니켈 배터리 장 려. 전원 스위치 OFF 되어 있는 것을 인하고, 배터리 커버를 살표 방향으 밀어 엽니다. 력. AA 배터리 4 개를 배터리 덮개 안쪽에 있는 표 에 + 및 – 방향에 추어 넣습니다. 3. 덮개를 습니다. 4. 전원 스위치를 ON 으 하면 몇초후에 준비 표 등 켜져 플래 를 광 킬 준비 되었음을 표 해 니다. 차. TEST 버튼 을 누르고 광하는 인 니다. 오토 파워 오프 배터리 모를 줄 기 위해 플래 력40 초동안 동하 않으면 동으 전원 꺼집니다. 플래 를 다 동하 면 TEST 버튼을 누르거 메 셔터를 살짝 누르 오. 오토 파워 오프 기능은 무선 TTL 플래 모드, 반 슬 브 플래 , 슬 브 플래 모드에서는 동하 않습니다. 에러 표 배터리 전원 불충분하거 전기신호에 상 생긴 경우, LCD 패널의 플래 깜 거릴 것 니다. 러한 경우 전원 스위치를 껐다 다 켜주 오. 그래 오면 배터리 전원을 체크해 주 오. 사 표 계 104 플래 상하 위치 헤드 운스 하 및 해제 버튼을 누르면서 플래 오. ◆ 플래 전원을 켜면 LCD 패널에 크 깜 경우는 플래 헤드 것을 의미 니다. 플래 헤드를 원하는 크 올 르게 타 며 만 되 않은 장 과 탈 전원스위치 꺼져 있는 후, 찰 리 날때까 넣은 후 고 킵니다. 인 니다. 그리고 난 메 의 핫슈에 밀어 ◆ 플래 를 장 하거 탈 킬 때, 메 와 플래 의 슈 부분 손상을 않 플래 의 아랫부분을 손으 잡습니다. ◆ 메 의 내장 플래 올 져 있는 경우에는 플래 를 장 하기 전에 내 니다. 플래 를 탈 킬때는, 릴리즈 버튼을 누른상 에서 밀어 분리 킵니다. 플래 사 메 의 핫슈 부터 플래 를 깥쪽으 설 ZOOM 버튼을 누르면 표 다음과 같 타납니다. 오고, ZOOM 버튼을 누를때 다 LCD 패널에 변경된 사 력4애애 → 력8애애 → 3차애애 → 차0애애 → 70애애 → 8차애애 → 려0차애애 → (A함to발 반 으 TTL 모드에서는, 사용 렌즈의 초 거리에 따 플래 위치를 동으 설 해 니다. ◆ 전원을 켜면 플래 는 에 설 된 헤드 션을 설 할 것 니다. ◆ 플래 헤드 설 다 광 렌즈를 사용하면 사진의 모서리 노출 부 으 올 있습니다 ◆ 플래 헤드 설 에 따 플래 드 넘버 변경될 것 니다. 와 드 패널 플래 에는 려7애애 의 초 광 사 을 제공하는 내장 와 드 패널 장 되었습니다. 와 드 패널과 캐치 패널을 꺼내 플래 광 부를 덮어 니다. (패널들을 부드 게 꺼낼 있 주의 니다.발 그 다음 캐치 패널을 원래 위치 넣습니다. 플래 의 사 은 려7애애 에 동으 설 될 것 니다. ◆실 와 드 패널 동하 않습니다. 센터에 문의하 기 105 떨어 면 ZOOM 버튼 경우 처 서비스 니다. LCD 패널 명 LIGHT 버튼을 누르면 LCD 패널에 8 초간 8초 상 명 됩니다. 명 켜집니다. LIGHT 버튼을 한번 더 누르면 TTL 오토 플래 TTL AUTO 모드에서는 피사체 ◆ 노출 되 플래 의 광량을 메 제어 니다. 메 모델과 렌즈의 에 따 , TTL 플래 의 진 과 다를 있습니다. 아래의 참 하 기 니다. (TTL 은 LCD 패널에 아래와 같 표 될 것 니다발 D 타 D 타 1. 메 2. 플래 타 DSLR / M화xx함애 70, 차0, 7, 차, 4, 3 D구액화x 7D, 착0, 40, 7, 차, 4, 3L 렌즈 ADI 측광 외의 렌즈 P①e-fl화②h 측광 의 노출 모드를 P 모드에 니다. 의 전원스위치를 켜면 LCD 패널에 게 되고 충전 될 것 니다. 표 께, 표 꺼져있는 경우 + 타 게 니다. 그 않습니다. ◆ D-SLR② 과 M화xx함애 9 D구액화x 9 P①e-fl화②h 측광 P①e-fl화②h 측광 TTL 다른 메 를 모델 O①d로액화①구 TTL 측광 O①d로액화①구 TTL 측광 표 켜져 있는 인 니다. – 버튼을 눌러 표 않을 경우 노출 하 3. 피사체에 초 을 니다. 4. 피사체 플래 광 유효 범위안에 있는 플래 의 LCD 패널의 표 5. 플래 완전히 충전되었을 때 셔터 버튼을 누 니다. 를 통해 인 니다. 메 에 노출 되면, LCD 창의 TTL 표 차 초간 타납니다. 표 타 않으면, 플래 광량 그 상황에 하 않은 것 니다. 피사체에 좀더 근 해 다 촬 을 하 기 니다. ◆ AF 광은 어두운곳에 있는 피사체에 초 을 으 서 동으 켜집니다. AF 광의 유효 범위는 0.7 미터에서 9 미터까 니다. ◆ 메 를 M 모드 설 하 을때는 플래 에 사용 던 설 에 추어 게 될 것 니다. ◆ 플래 완전히 충전되었을 때, 플래 크 뷰 파인더에 타날 것 니다. 플래 완전히 충전되기 전에 셔터를 누르게되면 플래 는 광되 않고 메 는 슬 우 셔터 스피드 플래 없 촬 됩니다. ◆ 다른 메 모드에서 플래 셔터스피드 우선 모드 원하 는 셔터스피드를 설 하면, 동 다 르게 선 할 사용됩니다. 사용 메 는 노출값을 선 해 니다. 셔터스피드는 메 의 없습니다. 셔터스피드 우선 모드를 선 하면 필 플래 리개 우선 모드 A 모드를 선 하고 원하 는 리개 값을 선 하면 하게 됩니다. 리개 우선 모드에서는 필 플래 메 는 배경 노출에 사용됩니다. M 모드 사용 원하 는 셔터스피드와 리개 값을 선 하실 있습니다. 셔터스피드는 벌브까 선 하실 있습니다. ◆ M 모드를 사용하면 필 플래 사용됩니다. ◆ 노출 측광 표 에 따 노출을 하면, 메 는 주광 슬 우 동 는 장 셔터스피드를 른 동 부터 동될 것 니다. 106 연 촬 주의 플래 회 의 과열을 방 하기 위해 아래의 표에 쉬어 주 기 니다. 후 최 려0 분 상 추기 어 울 때 피사체를 히 촬 광량을 려/려 (풀 광발에서 려/착4 까 하기 위해 원 스탭씩 모 드 TTL, M(려/려,려/력발 M(려/4, 려/8발 M(려/려착-려/3력발 M함lt로 매뉴 플래 타 는 연 플래 촬 플래 촬 횟 력0 회 연 플래 촬 력차 회 연 플래 촬 40 회 연 플래 촬 려0 사 클 촬 매뉴 플래 는 TTL 모드에서 노출을 사용 니다. 매뉴 플래 모드에서 플래 증 킬 있습니다. 려. 메 노출 모드를 M 으 설 니다. 력. 플래 의 MODE 버튼을 눌러 M 을 선 니다. 3. SEL 버튼을 누르면 드 넘버 치 깜 니다. 4. ＋ 또는 － 버튼을 눌러 원하는 광량을 설 니다. SEL 버튼을 누르면 드 넘버 치 깜 니다. 차. ＋ 또는 － 버튼을 눌러 원하는 광량을 설 니다. SEL 버튼을 다 누르면 깜 며 표 되는 광량 계 표 됩니다. 착. 셔터 버튼을 눌러 커스를 추고, 렌즈의 커스링에서 피사체와의 거리를 인 니다. 그 다음 플래 LCD 패널에 표 되는 거리 거의 치하 F-②top 플래 광량을 절 니다. 7. 플래 의 준비 표 등 켜 면, 촬 하실 있습니다. ◆ 다음의 공 한 노출을 계산할 있습니다: 드 넘버 GN / 플래 에서 피사체까 의 거리 = F-②top 플래 는 위의 공 에 따 한 피사체 거리를 동으 계산하고 표 해 니다. ( 페 의 표 려 참 발 고 동 으 플래 (HSS발 (FP발 반 플래 를 고 촬 을 할 때는 플래 의 셔터 완전히 개방되었을 때 광되어 하기 때문에 셔터 스피드는 메 의 동 다 르게 사용할 없습니다. FP 플래 는 셔터 동되고 있는 동안 플래 는 으 광됩니다. 와 같 동 다 른 셔터 스피드를 사용할 있습니다. 려. MODE 버튼을 용해 플래 모드를 설 니다. ( TTL M 모드를 사용할 있습니다.발. - 버튼을 눌러 LCD 패널에 표 타 게 니다. 력. + 3. 피사체에 초 을 니다. 4. 플래 의 준비 표 등 켜 면 플래 를 사용할 준비 된 것 니다. ◆ 셔터스피드에 따 , 드 넘버 뀔것 니다. ( 페 를 취 하고 싶을때는, FP 플래 를 LCD 패널에 참 하 기 니다. ◆ FP 플래 107 의 표 력를 참 하 오.발 표 타 게 할때의 과 을 모델링 플래 모델링 플래 를 사용할 경우에는, 촬 전에 명과 섀 우 효과를 체크할 있습니다. 1. MODE 버튼으 모드를 선 니다. 2. + 버튼 – 버튼을 러 례 눌러 LCD 창에 아 콘 타 니다. 3. 플래 충전된 것을 인한 후 TEST 버튼을 눌러 광 킵니다. 멀티 플래 모드 셔터 열 있는 동안 플래 연 하 광 니다. 게 으 써 피사체의 연 미 하 의 프 에 노출됩니다. 모드에는 어두운 배경에 은 피사체 효과 니다. 광 주파 를 려H국 에서 려00H국 사 에서 설 할 있습니다. 최대 90 번의 연 광 능 니다. 최대 촬 는 플래 드 넘버와 광 주파 설 에 따 집니다. ( 페 의 표 3 을 참 발. 려. 메 의 노출 모드를 M 모드에 설 하고 F 넘버를 설 니다. 력. 멀티 플래 모드 타날때까 MODE 버튼을 누르 오. 3. 플래 광 주파 깜 때까 SEL 버튼을 누르 오. 4. ＋ 또는 － 버튼을 눌러 원하는 플래 주파 치를 설 니다. 차. SEL 버튼을 다 누르면 광량 깜 것 니다. 착. ＋ 또는 － 버튼을 눌러 원하는 광량을 설 니다. 7. SEL 버튼을 다 누르면 광 횟 깜 것 니다. 8. ＋ 또는 － 버튼을 눌러 원하는 광 횟 를 설 니다. 9. SEL 버튼을 다 누르면 깜 멈출 것 니다. 려0. 플래 의 준비 표 등 들어오면 촬 하실 있습니다. 려려. 알 : 셔터 스피드를 다음 다 길게 설 해 주 오; 원하는 광 횟 색 광 주파 운스 촬 실내에서 촬 할 때에는 강한 그 피사체 뒤쪽에 타날 있습니다. 빛을 천 반사 키기 위해 플래 를 위쪽으 향하거 옆쪽으 향하게 하면 명은 좀 더 비춰질 것 니다. 버튼을 누르고 플래 헤드를 운스 앵글 절해 오. 상: 0°, 착0°, 7차°, 90° 하: 0°,7° 우: 0°, 착0°, 7차°, 90° 좌: 0°, 착0°, 7차°,90°, 려력0°, 려차0°, 려80° 벽면에 프 하게 표 운스 플래 모드 동되면 LCD 패널에 운스 타날 것 니다. 운스되는 반사면의 사진 전체에 타 므 능한 한 흰 면을 선 하 기 니다. 반사면에 따 피사체의 거리 및 다른 요 들, TTL AUTO 에 대한 유효거리는 변경될 있습니다. 촬 후 한 노출 인을 (LCD 패널의 TTL 크발 체크하 기 니다. 근 촬 근 력애 촬 을 위해 운스 플래 를 아래 7° 기울 내에서 유효 니다. 플래 헤드 7° 기울어 면 캐치 있습니다. 피사체와의 거리 표 깜 것 니다. 0.차애 에서 패널 플래 에는 운스 플래 모드 동 중 때 피사체의 눈에 캐치 를 만들어 주는 내장 캐치 패널 장 되었습니다. 와 드 패널과 캐치 패널을 꺼낸 후 와 드 패널을 원래 위치 넣습니다. (패널들을 부드 게 꺼낼 있 주의 니다.발 108 ◆ 캐치 를 효과 으 오. 촬 하 만들기 위해서는, 플래 헤드를 90 세운 후 까운 거리에서 무선 플래 무선 플래 모드 촬 을 하면 메 디 플래 에 연결하는 연장선 없 섀 우에 의해 좀더 3 원 인 사진을 연출할 있으며 또는 플래 위치에 따 섀 우에 의한 좀더 연스러운 미 촬 능 니다. EF-착려0 DG SUPER SO-ADI 의 경우에는, 메 디와 플래 의 교환은 플래 명에 의해 루어집니다. 무선 플래 모드에서 메 는 동으 올 른 노출값을 계산해 냅니다. ◆ 사용설명서에서는 메 디에 장 되는 플래 를 컨 롤러 (Co액t①olle①발 고 부르고 원거리에 떨어져 있는 플래 를 오프 메 플래 (off-c화애e①화 플래 발 고 부 니다. ◆ 플래 를 플래 를 ◆ 플래 를 촬 되는 장 ◆ 피사체 ◆ 메 에서 분리 을때는 미니 스탠드를 사용하는 것 드에 장 할 있 사산 있습니다. 러분 혼선 에 부터 플래 는 않 인하 기 0.차애-차애 범위에 고 움 됩니다. 미니 스탠드는 니다. 메 는 려애-차애 범위에 습니다. 까 에서 무선 플래 를 사용하는 다른 사용 있는 경우, 다른 사 의 플래 와 어날 있습니다. 러한 상황에서는 플래 의 채널을 변경하 주 기 니다. A. 송신기 서 내장형 플래 의 신호를 사용 려. ◆ 메 메 를 무선 플래 모드 모델에 따 설 설 질 니다. 있으므 , 메 사용 설명서를 참 하 기 력. 메 의 노출 모드를 P, A, S 또는 M 으 설 니다. 3. off-c화애e①화 플래 디스플 타날 때까 버튼을 누 니다. 버튼을 눌러 off-c화애e①화 플래 번호 려 되 4. 설 니다. 차. 버튼을 눌러 플래 모드를 TTL 설 니다. 버튼을 누르면 채널 깜 것 니다. 착. 7. 또는 버튼을 눌러 채널 번호를 (C려 – C4발 설 니다. 버튼을 누르면, 표 계 깜 거릴 것 니다. 8. 9. 메 디에 플래 를 장 하고 반 셔터를 누 니다. (채널 번호 것 니다.발 려0. 메 에서 플래 를 분리한 후 원하 는 위치에 플래 를 습니다. 려려. 메 의 내장 플래 를 올리고 완전히 충전되었는 인 니다. ◆ 무선 동 모드에서, 플래 려력. 촬 을 위해 메 의 완전히 충전된 것을 표 해 주기 위해 AF 커스를 광 니다. 메 에 기 될 깜 거릴 것 니다. 니다. ◆ EF-착려0 DG SUPER SO-ADI 는 내장형 플래 광될 때 플래 터질것 니다. 메 의 내장형 플래 는 EF-착려0 DG SUPER SO-ADI 의 제어를 위해서만 광될 것 니다. 피사체의 명은 EF-착려0 DG SUPER SO-ADI 에 의해서만 루어집니다. 메 는 한 노출을 을 있 TTL 오토 플래 서 플래 파워 컨 롤 될 것 니다. ◆ 셔터 스피드에 따 ◆ 반 플래 또는 고 동 모드 메 의 노출 모드 M 으 설 되어 있을 때 매뉴 번호를 설 하면 플래 파워 벨 깜 게 됩니다. 출 을 설 하고 버튼을 눌러 깜 는 것을 멈추게 109 동 전환 됩니다. 무선 플래 또는 니다. 될 것 니다. 채널 버튼을 눌러 플래 B. 메 에 장 된 플래 를 송신기 서 사용 무선 플래 용으 력 대 상의 EF-착려0 DG SUPER SO-ADI 플래 필요 니다. EF-차30 DG SUPER SO-ADI 는 off-c화애e①화 모드와만 사용할 있습니다. off-c화애e①화 플래 의 플래 모델에 따 컨 롤러의 컨 롤 모드를 변경할 있습니다. 아래의 를 참 하 기 니다. (EF-착려0 DG SUPER SO-ADI 는 컨 롤러용으 사용할 있습니다.발. 플래 용으 사용할 있는 플래 모델 컨 롤 모드 off-c화애e①화 플래 와 사용할 있는 메 모델 비율-플래 설 플래 컨 롤 모드 + EF-차30 DG SUPER SO-ADI EF-착려0 DG SUPER SO-ADI - α 700, α 900 α 900 3 개의 그룹까 제어 능 니다. 컨 롤러, Off-C화애e①화 플래 려, Off-C화애e①화 플래 력. 차 벨부터 또는 플래 없 그룹의 플래 비율을 설 할 있습니다. TTL 오토 플래 , 고 동 (TTL, M발, 매뉴 플래 력 개의 그룹까 제어 능 니다. 컨 롤러, Off-C화애e①화 플래 . 컨 롤러 : off-c화애e①화 의 플래 비율을 려:력 또는 력:려 설 할 있습니다. TTL 오토 플래 , 고 동 (TTL발 EF-착려0 DG SUPER SO-ADI B-1.off-c화애e①화 플래 만 사용하는 경우 메 와 컨 롤러의 설 려. 메 를 무선 플래 모드 설 니다. 메 모델에 따 설 질 있으므 , 메 사용 설명서를 참 하 기 력. 메 의 노출 모드를 P, A, S 또는 M 으 설 니다. 3. 플래 를 메 디에 장 니다. 4. 플래 의 LCD 패널은 동으 컨 롤러 설 디스플 연결됩니다. (LCD 패널 동으 전환되 않으면, 컨 롤러 설 표 타날 때까 버튼을 누 니다. 차. 버튼을 누르면 컨 롤 모드 표 깜 니다. 착. 또는 버튼을 눌러 컨 롤 모드를 설 니다. 버튼을 누르면 채널 깜 것 니다. 7. 8. 또는 버튼을 눌러 채널 번호를 (C려 – C4발 설 니다. 버튼을 누르면 비율-플래 컨 롤 표 타납니다. 9. 려0. 또는 버튼을 눌러 비율- 플래 컨 롤 모드를 （ ] 설 니다. 려려. 버튼을 다 누르면 디스플 표 깜 니다. ◆ Off-C화애e①화 플래 니다. 설 려력. off-c화애e①화 플래 표 타날 때까 버튼을 누 니다. 버튼을 눌러 off-c화애e①화 플래 번호를 려 설 니다. 려3. 려4. 버튼을 눌러 플래 모드를 TTL 설 니다. 려차. 버튼을 누르면 채널 깜 것 니다. 려착. 또는 버튼을 눌러 컨 롤러의 설 과 동 하게 설 니다. 려7. 버튼을 누르면, 표 계 깜 는 것 멈추게 됩니다. 려8. 원하 는 위치에 오프 메 플래 를 습니다. 려9. 두개의 플래 완전히 충전되었는 인 니다. ◆ 준비 표 등 켜 면 촬 준비 된 것으 AF 광 깜 것 니다. 력0. 피사체에 초 을 추고 촬 을 니다. 110 B-2. 비율-플래 컨 롤 (컨 롤 모드 발 메 와 컨 롤러 설 려. B-려 의 려 ～ 9 단계와 동 하게 설 을 진 니다. 력. 또는 버튼을 눌러 비율-플래 컨 롤 모드 ] 으 설 니다. 디스플 를 （ 3. 버튼을 누르면 플래 모드 디스플 깜 니다. 4. 또는 버튼을 눌러 플래 모드를 TTL 설 니다. 차. 버튼을 누르면 컨 롤러의 비율-플래 디스플 （ ] 깜 또는 버튼을 눌러 컨 롤러의 비율을 설 니다. 착. 7. 버튼을 누르면 Off-C화애e①화 플래 려 의 비율-플래 디스플 （ 또는 버튼을 눌러 Off-C화애e①화 플래 려 의 비율을 설 니다. 8. 9. 버튼을 누르면 Off-C화애e①화 플래 력 의 비율 플래 디스플 （ 려0. 또는 버튼을 눌러 Off-C화애e①화 플래 력 의 비율을 설 니다. 려려. 버튼을 눌러 표 계 깜 는 것을 멈추게 니다. Off-C화애e①화 플래 니다. ] 깜 ] 니다. 깜 니다. 설 려력. B-려 Off-C화애e①화 플래 설 과 동 한 설 을 진 니다. ◆ off-c화애e①화 플래 인 경우, 의 플래 에 원하 는 off c화애e①화 플래 번호를 할당 니다. ◆ 컨 롤러, Off-C화애①e화 플래 려, Off-C화애e①화 플래 력 의 플래 비율을 설 하는 것은 다음과 같습니다. (플래 없 발、려、력、4、8、려착 플래 출 값의 비율은 의 플래 출 값 / 전체 출 값을 설 니다. （예] 설 값 플래 출 값 비율 컨 롤러 력 력/7 Off-C화애e①화 플래 려 려 려/7 Off-C화애e①화 플래 력 4 4/7 B-3. 비율-플래 컨 롤 (컨 롤 모드 발 메 와 컨 롤러의 설 려. B-려 의 려 단계부터 착 단계까 동 한 설 을 진 니다. 또는 버튼을 눌러 컨 롤 모드를 설 니다. 력. 3. 버튼을 누르면 채널 깜 니다. 또는 버튼을 눌러 채널 를 (C려-C4발 설 니다. 4. 차. 또는 버튼을 눌러 비율-플래 컨 롤 모드를 （ ] 착. 버튼을 눌러 비율-플래 디스플 깜 게 니다. 7. 컨 롤러의 비율을 설 니다. 또는 버튼을 눌러 또는 . 설 . 8. 버튼을 눌러 표 계 깜 는 것을 멈추게 니다. Off-C화애e①화 플래 니다. Off-C화애e①화 플래 비율 설 9. Off-C화애e①화 플래 동 한 설 을 진 ◆ Off-C화애e①화 플래 사용 설명서를 참 하 111 설 EF-착려0 DG SUPER SO-ADI 니다. 면, B-려 Off-C화애e①화 플래 설 과 EF-차30 DG SUPER SO-ADI 인 경우, EF-차30 DG SUPER SO-ADI 의 기 니다. ◆ Off-C화애e①화 플래 EF-차30 DG SUPER SO-ADI 인 경우, 채널 번호를 C려 족 C3 까 만 설 능 니다. 슬 브 플래 반 슬 브 플래 EF-착려0 DG SUPER SO-ADI 을 메 디에 장 하 않더 메 의 내장 플래 다른 플래 를 사용해 플래 를 광 킬 있습니다. 려. 플래 를 메 핫 슈에 장 니다. M 력. 메 의 노출 모드를 원하 는 모드 설 니다. A 모드를 선 하면 리개 값 설 하셔 니다. 3. 플래 를 켭니다. 셔터를 반만 누 니다. ◆ 제 리개 값과 필 스피드는 플래 에 동으 전송됩니다. 4. 메 에서 플래 를 분리 니다. 차. MODE 버튼을 누르고 / (슬 브발 모드를 선 니다. 착. SEL 버튼을 러 례 눌러 플래 출 값 깜 거리게 니다. 7. + 또는 – 버튼을 눌러 플래 출 값을 설 니다. ◆ 슬 브 플래 에서 피사체까 실제 거리를 고 LCD 창의 거리계를 설 해 플래 출 값을 결 니다. 실제 거리 촬 거리 에 있으면 리개 값 필 스피드 값을 변경해 니다. ◆ 필요한 경우 플래 의 필 스피드 리개 값을 매뉴 설 할 있습니다. a. 필 스피드는 MODE 버튼을 눌러 ISO 를 설 하고 SEL 버튼을 눌러 깜 거리게 니다. + 버튼 – 버튼을 눌러 원하 는 필 스피드 값을 설 하고 SEL 버튼을 누 니다. b. 리개 값은 플래 슬 브 모드 설 되었을 때 SEL 버튼을 눌러 리개 값 깜 거리게 하고 + 버튼 – 버튼을 눌러 원하 는 리개 값을 설 하고 SEL 버튼을 다 한번 누 니다. 8. SEL 버튼을 디스플 창에 깜 거리는 것 멈출때까 러 례 누 니다. 9. 슬 브 플래 를 원하 는 위치에 습니다. 슬 브 플래 를 촬 범위안에 오. 려0. 모든 플래 완전히 충전된 것을 인한 후 촬 을 위해 셔터를 누 니다. ◆ EF-착려0 DG SUPER SO-ADI 완전히 충전되면 AF 광 깜 거 니다. 브 모드 설 된 상 EF-착려0 DG SUPER SO-ADI 메 디에 장 되면 플래 는 광되 않습니다. ◆ 니 브랜드 플래 를 사용하고 계 거 메 의 내장형 플래 TTL 기능 EF-착려0 DG SUPER SO-ADI 플래 를 슬 브 제품으 사용할 경우 ADI,DI 기능을 사용하 오. p①e-fl화②h 를 모니터하는 것은 완전히 충전되 않은 상 에서 플래 광될 있습니다. ◆ 슬 전용 슬 브 플래 력 개 상의 EF-착려0 DG SUPER SO-ADI 플래 를 사용하면, 채널을 설 해 할 있습니다. 모드에서 한 개의 플래 는 슬 브 플래 컨 롤러 플래 들은 슬 브 플래 동됩니다. 슬 려. 슬 력. 메 브 플래 광되는 플래 를 동하고 머 설 브 플래 를 메 디에 장 의 노출 모드를 S 또는 M 설 니다. 니다. 112 ◆ 셔터 스피드를 려/30 하 설 니다. (슬 브 플래 ( 스터 플래 발 다른 플래 들 광되기 전에 신호를 냅니다. 처 , 셔터 스피드를 려/30 초 다 르게 사용하면 광되는 플래 는 동 되 않을 것 니다. 발 3. 플래 의 스위치를 켜고 메 의 셔터를 반만 누 니다. ( 리개 값과 필 스피드는 동으 플래 에 전송됩니다. 발 4. 메 에서 슬 브 플래 를 분리 니다. 차. MODE 버튼을 눌러 / (슬 브 모드발 를 선 니다. 착. SEL 버튼을 눌러 채널 깜 거리게 니다. 7. + 또는 – 버튼을 눌러 채널 번호를 설 니다. (C려 또는 C력발 8. SEL 버튼을 눌러 플래 의 출 값 ( 발 깜 거리게 니다. 9. + 또는 – 버튼을 눌러 플래 출 값을 설 니다. ◆ 슬 브 플래 에서 피사체까 실제 거리를 고 LCD 창의 거리계를 설 해 플래 출 값을 결 니다. 실제 거리 촬 거리 에 있으면 리개 값을 변경해 니다. 려0. SEL 버튼을 깜 거리는 것 멈출때까 러 례 누 니다. 려려. 슬 브 플래 를 원하 는 위치에 습니다. 슬 브 플래 를 촬 범위 안에 오. 슬 브 컨틀롤러 플래 설 려력. MODE 버튼을 누르고 / (슬 브 모드발 를 선 니다. 려3. SEL 버튼을 눌러 채널 깜 거리게 니다. 려4. + 또는 – 버튼을 눌러 광되는 플래 에 설 된 번호와 동 한 채널 번호를 설 니다. 려차. SEL 버튼을 눌러 플래 출 값 ( 발 깜 거리게 니다. 려착. SEL 버튼을 눌러 깜 거리는 것을 멈추게 니다. ( 표 사 고 채널 표 사 질 것 니다.발 려7. 슬 브 컨 롤러 플래 를 메 디에 장 니다. 려8. 플래 완전히 충전된 것을 인한 후 촬 을위해 셔터를 반만 누 니다. ◆ EF-착려0 DG SUPER SO-ADI 완전히 충전되었을 때 AF 광 깜 거릴 것 니다. 모드에서 슬 브 컨 롤을 사용할 때 슬 브 플래 의 리개는 변경할 있습니다. ◆ 슬 브 컨틀롤러 기능은 슬 브 플래 를 컨 롤 할때만 사용됩니다. ◆ 제품 사양 형 : 드 넘버 : 전원 공 : : 충전 간 : : 광 횟 : : 섬광 간 : 사 : 동 절전 : 113 클 온(Cl로p-o액발 렬 제어 TTL 오토 전 플래 착려 (ISO 려00/애, 려0차애애 헤드 션발 4 개의 AA 타 알 인 배터리 또는, : 4 개의 AA 타 켈 드뮴(N로-Cd발 배터리 또는, 4 개의 AA 타 니켈 전 (N로-MH N로ckel-Met화l H구d①로de발 7 초 (알 인 배터리발 차 초 (니켈 드뮴(N로-Cd발, 니켈 전 (N로-MH N로ckel-Met화l H구d①로de발발 려력0 회 (알 인 배터리발 려착0 회 (니켈 드뮴(N로-Cd발, 니켈 전 (N로-MH N로ckel-Met화l H구d①로de발발 려 / 700 초 (풀 파워 광 발 력4애애 ～ 려0차애애 모터 파워 컨 롤 (와 드 패널 사용 려7애애발 원 무게 : 330g. 크 기 : 77애애(W발 x 려39애애 x 려려7애애 PYCC Sigma EF-610 SUPER SO-ADI. SONY AF SLR. . , . , . , , . , , , , . , . !! . !! . , . , . !! . , . , . , . , ,1 . . . , , . . !! SONY AF SLR. . . , . . , , . . , , . , , , . , , . . , . . . , . 114 1. 2. AF 3. 5. 4. 6. 7. 10. 8. 11. 13. 16. 19. 9. 12. MODE ( ) 14. 17. ) 20. LIGHT ( SELECT SEL ( ZOOM ( 21. ) « 15. ) 18. + TEST ( » ) Ni-Cd, Ni-MH , , . 30 , , . ◆ ◆ Ni-Cd . , , . , Ni-Cd . ◆ , . . ◆ . , . Ni-Cd , . ◆ , , . ◆ . . ◆ , . 1. . . 2. . , 3. 4. + .. – . ON ( , ). , . 5. “Test Button” ( ) . , 240 ( ) . “TEST” . , TTL, (“Auto Power Off”) 115 . , “Flash Coverage Angle” ( . . , “Up and Down” ( ). ) . . ◆ , . . . ◆ . ◆ , . . ZOOM ( ZOOM ( ) . , ), . 24mm → 28mm → 35mm → 50mm → 70mm → 85mm → 105mm → (Auto) TTL . ◆ , . ◆ , . ◆ , . , 17 . . ( .) . 17 . 116 ◆ , ( ) . ZOOM , . 8 LIGHT ( , ), 8 ) LIGHT ( . . TTL AUTO TTL AUTO . ◆ TTL . . ( TTL .) DSLR / Maxxum 70, 50, 7, 5, 4, 3 Maxxum / Dynax 9 Dynax 7D, 60, 40, 7, 5, 4, 3L D ADI TTL D TTL P. 1. 2. . TTL . ◆ , + – . . 3. 4. . , . 5. . ◆ , 5 TTL. . , . , ◆ AF, . AF ◆ , 0,7 9 . , , . ◆ , . , , . , . , . 117 . , . . . . ◆ . ◆ , . , , , , 10 . TTL, M(1/1,1/2) M(1/4, 1/8) M(1/16,-1/32) Multi 20 25 40 10 , 1/1 ( TTL. ) , 1/64 . . 1. 2. 3. MODE ( ) . , SEL ( 4. ). + . , 5. SEL ( ). , 6. . , . , 7. . ◆ : “GN”/ .( = , 1 .) 118 (HSS) (FP) , , , , . FP . , . MODE ( “M”.) 1. ( “TTL” + 2. , , ) . . 3. 4. , . ◆ .( 2 , .) ◆ FP, FP , . , , . 1. 2. 3. MODE ( ) . + - . , TEST ( ). MULTY ( ) , , . . . 100 . 1 90 . , 3 . ( , .) 1. . 2. MODE ( MULTI ( SEL ( ) . + - 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. + SEL ( SEL ( + , ). , . SEL ( ) . . ). . . ). . , : 119 ) , . , ÷ , , . , , . ., . . : 0°, 7° : 0°, 60°, 75°, 90°, 120°, 150°, 180° , . : 0°, 60°, 75°, 90° : 0°, 60°, 75°, 90° . . , , TTL AUTO . ( , ) TTL . 7° 0, 2 . . 7° . , ё « » . .( .) , ◆ 90° . « », . EF-610 Super, . « » . ◆ « « ◆ » ». , . . ◆ ◆ , . 0,5 ~ 5 1 ~5 . ◆ , , . , . , . 120 . 1. . ◆ , . 2. 3. P,A,S , . ё M. 1. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. TTL. , ё . (C1 - C4) . . , . ( ). 10. 11. . , . ◆ AF , . . 12. ◆ EF-610 . EF-610. EF-610 SUPER. TTL Auto. ◆ , . ◆ M, , . . , , . B. 2 SO-ADI. EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI . EF-610 DG SUPER , . . , . (EF-610 DG , . SUPER SO-ADI ). , , EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI + - α700, α900 α900 2 3 ; ; , 1 2. . : 5 « ». TTL Auto, (TTL, M), 121 1:2 2:1. TTL Auto, (TTL) B-1. 1. . ◆ , . 2. 3. 4. P,A,S M. . .( , , .) 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. ё , . , . ё , . . (C1 - C4) ё , [ ё . ], . , 12. . , . 13. 1. TTL. 14. 15. 16. , ё . . , . 17. 18. 19. , . . , . ◆ AF, , . 20. . B-2. ) ( 1. 2. , 1-9 B-1. ], [ . 3. 4. 5. ё , TTL, . ё , [ 6. 7. . ]. , 1[ , ё , ё . ]. 1, 8. 9. 2[ . ]. 122 10. 2, . ё 11. 12. , . , B-1 ◆ . , ◆ . , , 2 ) 1 2 4 8 16 ( 1 . . [ ] 2 1 4 1 2 2/7 1/7 4/7 B-3. ) ( 1. 2. , 1-6 B-1. , . ё , 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. , . (C1 - C4), , ё . [ ]. . : . . ё 8. , . 9. , EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI, . B-1 ◆ EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI, EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI. , ◆ EF-530 DG SUPER SO-ADI, C1 C3. EF-610 Super , . 1. 2. . . , . 3. 123 . . ◆ . 4. 5. . MODE ( ). ( ) 6. / SEL ( ) , . 7. + - . ◆ . . , ◆ a. … SEL ( MODE ( ) ( . ISO, ) . + . SEL ). b. … SEL ( , + ), - . 8. 9. SEL ( SEL ( ) ). , . . . 10. , , . ◆ EF-610 Super , AF . ◆ , EF-610 Super . EF-610 DG SUPER SO-ADI , ◆ , . EF-610 Super, . . ю 1. 2. ( ) . S ◆ 1/30 . 1/30, . . , . 3. ON ( ) . ◆ . 4. 5. . MODE ( / ) ( ). 6. 7. ( 1 SEL ( . + 2). ) 124 8. 9. SEL ( + ) , . - . ◆ , . , . SEL ( 10. 11. ) . . . 12. MODE ( ) / ( ). 13. SEL ( . + 14. ) , . 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. SEL ( + SEL ( , ) , . . ) . . , , . ◆ EF-610 Super , AF. ◆ SEL ( ), . . ◆ . : TTL . : 61 (ISO 100/ , : : : 120 160 : : 24 (17 : : 105 7,0 5,0 ( (Ni-Cd, ( (Ni-Cd, 1/700 ( –105 125 117 ; ) - - ) ) - - ) ) ) : 330 139 Ni-Cd - : : 77 ) ; . [表 1] [Table1] [Tabelle1] [Tabla1] [Tablla1] [Tabel1] [Tableau1] [Cuadro1] [ 1] [ 1] [Tabela1] ドナンバヸ/ GN / NG ISO100ヷm 17mm 24mm 28mm 35mm 50mm 70mm 85mm 105mm 1/1 23.0 34.0 35.0 36.0 46.0 52.0 56.0 61.0 1/2 16.3 24.0 24.7 25.5 32.5 36.8 39.6 43.1 1/4 11.5 17.0 17.5 18.0 23.0 26.0 28.0 30.5 1/8 8.1 12.0 12.4 12.7 16.3 18.4 19.8 21.6 1/16 5.8 8.5 8.8 9.0 11.5 13.0 14.0 15.3 1/32 4.1 6.0 6.2 6.4 8.1 9.2 9.9 10.8 1/64 2.9 4.3 4.4 4.5 5.8 6.5 7.0 7.6 [表 2] [Table 2] [Tabelle 2] [Tabla 2] [Tablla 2] [Tabel 2] [Tableau 2] [Cuadro 2] [ 2] [ 2] [Tabela 2] ドナンバヸ/ GN / NG ISO100ヷm 17mm 24mm 28mm 35mm 50mm 70mm 85mm 105mm 1/125 16.3 24.0 24.7 25.5 32.5 36.8 39.6 43.1 1/160 14.4 21.3 21.9 22.5 28.8 32.5 35.0 38.1 1/180 13.6 20.0 20.6 21.2 27.1 30.6 33.0 35.9 1/250 11.5 17.0 17.5 18.0 23.0 26.0 28.0 30.5 1/320 10.2 15.0 15.5 15.9 20.3 23.0 24.7 27.0 1/350 9.1 13.4 13.8 14.2 18.2 20.6 22.1 24.1 1/400 9.7 14.4 14.8 15.2 19.4 22.0 23.7 25.8 1/500 8.1 12.0 12.4 12.7 16.3 18.4 19.8 21.6 1/640 7.2 10.6 10.9 11.3 14.4 16.3 17.5 19.1 1/750 6.6 9.8 10.1 10.4 13.3 15.0 16.2 17.6 1/800 6.4 9.5 9.8 10.1 12.9 14.5 15.7 17.1 1/1000 5.8 8.5 8.8 9.0 11.5 13.0 14.0 15.3 1/1250 5.1 7.6 7.8 8.0 10.3 11.6 12.5 13.6 1/1500 4.7 6.9 7.1 7.3 9.4 10.6 11.4 12.5 1/1600 4.5 6.7 6.9 7.1 9.1 10.3 11.1 12.1 1/2000 4.1 6.0 6.2 6.4 8.1 9.2 9.9 10.8 1/2500 3.6 5.4 5.5 5.7 7.3 8.2 8.9 9.6 1/3000 3.3 4.9 5.1 5.2 6.6 7.5 8.1 8.8 1/3200 3.2 4.8 4.9 5.0 6.4 7.3 7.8 8.5 1/4000 2.9 4.3 4.4 4.5 5.8 6.5 7.0 7.6 1/5000 2.6 3.8 3.9 4.0 5.1 5.8 6.3 6.8 1/6000 2.3 3.5 3.6 3.7 4.7 5.3 5.7 6.2 1/6400 2.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 4.5 5.1 5.5 6.0 1/8000 2.0 3.0 3.1 3.2 4.1 4.6 4.9 5.4 [表 3] [Table 3] [Tabelle 3] [Tabla 3] [Tablla 3] [Tabel 3] [Tableau 3] [Cuadro 3] [ マルチ発光町MULTI FLASH MODE 1/64 1～3 Hz 4～5 Hz 6～7 Hz 8～9 Hz 10 Hz 11～14 Hz 15～19 Hz 20～50 Hz 60～100 Hz 1～90 1～80 1～70 1～50 1～45 1～35 1～30 1～25 1～20 1/32 1/16 1～3 Hz 4～5 Hz 6 Hz 7～9 Hz 10～19 Hz 20～100 Hz 1 Hz 2 Hz 3 Hz 4～100 Hz 1～60 1～50 1～30 1～20 1～15 1～12 1～30 1～20 1～10 1～6 3] [ 1/8 1/4 3] [Tabela 3] 1 Hz 2 Hz 3 Hz 4～7 Hz 8～9 Hz 10～100 Hz 1 Hz 2 Hz 3～100 Hz 1～14 1～7 1～6 1～5 1～4 1～3 1～4 1～3 1～2 126 ENGLISH Disposal of Electric and Electronic Equipment in Private Households Disposal of used Electrical & Electronic Equipment (Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems) This symbol on the product, in the manual/warranty, and/or on the packaging indicates that this product must not be treated as household waste. Instead it should be handed over to the appropriate collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic equipment. If your equipment contains easy removable batteries, please dispose of these separately according to your local legislation. It is your responsibility to ensure that this product is recycled correctly. In doing so you will help conserve natural resources, protect the environment and human health. For more detailed information about recycling this product, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the product. Entsorgung von Elektro- und Elektronikgeräten aus privaten Haushalten DEUTSCH Entsorgung von Elektro- und Elektronikgeräten (Anzuwenden in der Europäischen Union und anderen europäischen Ländern mit entsprechend geregeltem Abfall-Sammelsystem) SIGMA unterstützt den Umweltschutz. Diese Produkt und die enthaltenen Zubehörteile erfüllen die Anforderungen der WEEE-Richtlinie. Bitte bewahren Sie diese Information auf. Dieses Symbol weist auf die getrennte Rücknahme elektrischer und elektronischer Geräte in EU-Ländern hin. Bitte werfen Sie das Gerät nicht in den Hausmüll. Informieren Sie sich über das in Ihrem Land gültige Rücknahmesystem und nutzen Sie dieses zur Entsorgung. Batterien und Akkus sollten separat entsorgt werden. FRANÇAIS Elimination des Déchets d'Equipements Electriques et Electroniques ménagers (Applicable dans l'Union Européenne selon les dispositions particulières de chaque Etat membre) Ce symbole inscrit sur le produit ou sur l'emballage, le mode d'emploi et la carte de garantie indique que le produit ne odit pas être éliminé avec les autres déchets ménagers. Il doit être remis à un point de collecte agréé des Déchets d'Equipements Electrique et Electroniques en fin de vie. En vous assurant que ce produit sera éliminé correctement, vous aiderez à lutter contre l'impact négatif pour l'environnement et la santé humaine qui résulterait d'un mode d'élimination inapproprié. Si votre produit contient des accumulateurs ou piles aisément amovibles, éliminez-les séparément selon les dispositions locales en vigueur. Inzamelen van electronische apparatuur voor huishoudelijk gebruik. NEDERLANDS Inzamelen van electronische apparatuur (van de toepassing in de EU en andere Europese landen met een gescheiden afval systeem). Dit symbool geeft aan dat dit product niet als huishoudelijk afval verwerkt mag worden. Het dient derhalve ingeleverd te worden bij het afval scheidingsstation als KCA voor eventueel hergebruik. U helpt hierbij schade aan het milieu te voorkomen. Indien er in het apparaat makkelijk te verwijderen batterijen of accu’s zitten dient u deze appart in te leveren als KCA bij het scheidingsstation. Het hergebruiken van materialen spaart het milieu. Voor meer informatie voor hergebruiken van dit product kunt u contact opnemen met uw locale afval scheidingsstation of bij de winkel waar u het apparaat gekocht heeft. Reciclaje de Equipos Eléctricos y Electrónicos de Uso Privado ESPAÑOL Reciclaje de Equipos Eléctricos y Electrónicos Usados (Aplicable en la Unión Europea y en otros países con sistema de reciclaje por separado) Este símbolo indica que este producto no debería tratarse como los demás materiales residuales de uso general. Estos productos deben reciclarse en el contenedor específico para los equipos eléctricos y electrónicos. Depositando estos productos correctamente, UD. ayuda al tratamiento adecuado de los productos reciclables y previene los efectos potencialmente negativos para el medioambiente y la salud, que podrían verse afectados por un incorrecto reciclado del producto. Si su equipo contiene baterías o acumuladores de fácil extracción, por favor deposítelos en el contenedor adecuado según las normativas locales. El reciclaje de los materiales ayuda a la conservación de los recursos naturales. Para más información acerca del reciclaje de estos productos, contacte con la autoridad local, el servicio de reciclaje o el establecimiento donde adquirió el producto. ITALIANO Smaltimento privato di apparecchiature elettriche ed elettroniche Norme europee per lo smaltimento di apparecchiature elettriche ed elettroniche nei Paesi con raccolta differenziata. Il simbolo informa che il prodotto non può essere considerato un normale rifiuto domestico. Deve essere smaltito negli speciali contenitori previsti per apparecchiature elettriche ed elettroniche. Assicuratevi che questo prodotto sia smaltito correttamente, aiuterete ad evitare negative conseguenze, per l’ambiente e la salute umana, che potrebbero verificarsi a causa di un suo inappropriato smaltimento. Se possibile togliete eventuali batterie elettriche o accumulatori e smaltiteli separatamente, secondo le disposizioni locali. Il riciclaggio dei materiali aiuta a conservare le risorse naturali. Per maggiori informazioni sul riciclaggio di questo prodotto informatevi presso la vostra locale azienda di smaltimento rifiuti o presso il negozio dove l’avete comperato. SVENSKA Hantering av elektriskt och elektroniskt hushållsavfall Hantering av förbrukad elektrisk och elektronisk utrustning, gällande EU och övriga europeiska länder med separata uppsamlingssystem. Denna symbol betyder att denna produkt ej skall hanteras som vanligt hushållsavfall. Istället skall den lämna till närmaste återvinningsstation. Genom att lämna in denna produkt på korrekt sätt, hjälper du till att förhindra skador på människa och miljö, som annars kunnat uppstå vid normal sophantering. Om din utrustning har lätt urtagbara batterier eller accumulatorer, var vänlig lämna in dem enligt lokala föreskrifter. Återvinning hjälper till att spara våra naturtillgångar. För mer detaljerad information om återvinning av denna produkt, vänd Dig till ortens miljökontor eller till din handlare. Bortskaffelse af elektrisk/elektronisk udstyr i private husholdninger DANSK Bortskaffelse af kasseret elektrisk & elektronisk udstyr (Gældende for lande indenfor EU og andre europæiske lande med separat indsamlingsordning). Dette symbol betyder, at udstyret ikke bør behandles som almindeligt husholdningsaffald. I stedet skal det afleveres på et godkendt indsamlingssted for behandling og genanvendelse af elektronisk udstyr. Ved at bortskaffe dette produkt på korrekt måde, sikrer du at affaldet behandles korrekt og genbruges i størst muligt omfang. Herved forhindres en evt. negativ miljømæssig og sundhedsmæssig effekt der kunne opstå ved forkert behandling af affaldet. Hvis udstyret indeholder batterier eller akkumulatorer der nemt kan tages ud, bør disse behandles separat i henhold til de lokale regler. Genbrug af materialer hjælper med at bevare de naturlige ressourcer. Hvis du ønsker mere detaljerede oplysninger om genbrug af dette produkt, kan du kontakte de lokale myndigheder, den lokale renovationsvirksomhed eller den forretning hvor du har købt produktet. Eliminação doméstica dos equipamentos eléctricos e electrónicos PORTUGUÊS Eliminação de equipamento eléctrico e electrónico usado (aplicável na União Europeia e noutros países da Europa com sistemas de recolha de lixo separados) O símbolo acima indica que o produto não deve ser tratado como lixo doméstico. Em vez disso, deve ser separado para reciclagem de equipamento eléctrico e electrónico. Se adquirir novos produtos, esta câmara deve ser entregue ao distribuidor ou a um sistema especializado de recolha de lixo. Assegurando a correcta eliminação destes equipamentos, ajudará a prevenir consequências negativas para o ambiente e para a saúde humana causadas por uma inapropriada manipulação dos componentes deste produto. Se a eliminação for feita de forma ilegal, poderá dar lugar a eventuais penalizações. Para informação mais detalhada acerca da reciclagem deste produto, contacte os serviços camarários ou a loja onde adquiriu o mesmo. 127